JP7195536B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally called "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally called "pachislot machines").

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which a display device is provided on a game board (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2017-217381 A (paragraphs [0023], [0039], and FIGS. 3 to 5)

By the way, when a plurality of light emitters are mounted on the substrate of the display device, when the light emitted by the light emitters is reflected on the surface of the substrate, the color of the light emitted by one light emitter and the color of the light emitted by the other light emitters are different. There is a problem that the color of the emitted light is mixed with the color of the emitted light (the light emitted by the other light emitter for the one light emitter constitutes disturbance light) and is difficult to visually recognize.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing color mixture caused by ambient light .

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
A game machine comprising a game board on which a game area is divided,
The game board comprises a plurality of substrates having a front mounting surface on which light emitters are mounted and a back mounting surface on which light emitters are not mounted,
A first substrate of the plurality of substrates includes a dark-colored insulating coating made of black or green that is formed on substantially the entire surface of the surface mounting surface, a surface mounting surface side wiring pattern that is formed on the surface mounting surface, and a back surface mounting. A back mounting surface side wiring pattern formed on the surface, a front mounting surface side land electrically connected to the front mounting surface side wiring pattern, and a back mounting surface electrically connected to the back mounting surface side wiring pattern. a through hole having a side land,
The through holes formed in the first substrate are not provided for mounting electronic components including light emitters,
At least the outer periphery of the surface-mounting-surface-side land formed on the first substrate is covered with a dark-colored insulating coating made of black or green,
At least one of the opening of the front mounting surface and the opening of the back mounting surface of the through hole formed in the first substrate is open,
comprising a partition section that partitions the surface mounting surface of the first substrate so as to correspond to the light emitting area of the light emitter;
When the player operates the adjusting means, the brightness of the light emitter mounted on the second substrate of the plurality of substrates can be changed, while the light emitter mounted on the first substrate can be changed. Emitting brightness is no longer changed,
It is characterized by

Thus, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing color mixture due to ambient light .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front; (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame, viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit, viewed from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a plate base unit in the plate unit; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the top view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit in a dish unit from the forward-backward direction of the production|presentation operation part button unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. (a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front right. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front left. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit of the production|presentation operation unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit, and was seen from the front lower side. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation portion of the pressing operation portion. is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in . It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a payout unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction; (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. (a) is a plan view of a body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from below. Fig. 101(a) is exploded and is an exploded perspective view seen from the front; It is an explanatory view showing a region in which the game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame circulate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball to the detour passage in the main-body frame upper part. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side. 1 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which front components, a game panel, a front unit, etc. are made opaque; FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as seen from the front right. FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 viewed from the front left. FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. 1 is a front view of a game board with the front constituent members, the game panel, the front unit, etc. made transparent; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 107; It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate and the obstacle nail. (a) is a front perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel of the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel. (a) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front unit on the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit, (b) is a back perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit. It is a left side view of a starting mouth unit, and (d) is a left side view of a side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front surface of a general prize-winning opening, and the inclination of the door member of the variable prize-winning opening at the time of an open state. It is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the starting port unit and the side unit in the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit when it is exploded and viewed from the front; It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the 1st big prize-winning entrance door in a 1st attacker unit from left side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passage of the game ball in a 1st attacker unit in a cross section. (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as seen from the back. It is a front view of a center accessory. (a) is a front perspective view of the second attacker unit, the middle right side unit, and the gate member in the front unit, and (b) is the second attacker unit, the middle right side unit, and the gate member in the front unit. is a perspective view of the from behind. It is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the path of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side middle unit. FIG. 115 is an enlarged explanatory diagram of the right part of the game area in FIG. 115 ; It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine showing an enlarged upper left corner of a game board with a transparent door frame; FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of a back guide unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a back-side effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back-side perspective view of the back-side effect unit in the back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the rear back production|presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the rear back production|presentation unit, and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of a back production|presentation unit from a front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back production|presentation unit. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the rear movable decorative body together with the rear decorative substrate. 142. (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 142, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the rear movable decorative body, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rear movable decorative body. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back rear movable decoration body, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back rear movable decoration body, and was seen from the back. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back rear movable decoration. FIG. 148 is an explanatory view showing the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration substrate in the front view of FIG. 147 with broken lines; (a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back rear movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body in (a), (c ) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration substrate in the same part as the decoration of (a). FIG. 143(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the upper part of FIG. 143(a). 151 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 exploded; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decoration by the decorative body and the decorative sheet, the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the rear movable decorative body. (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate in the region of the first LED, and (b) is a second LED positioned on the optical axis of the first LED. FIG. 10C is an explanatory view showing from the front the action of the light guide radiation plate at the part where the light guide radiation plate is located, and FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the arrangement of , from the front. FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing an enlarged part of the back decoration substrate together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. (a) is a front view of the rear decorative substrate, and (b) is a rear view of the rear decorative substrate. (a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear movable decorative body, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative part with a form different from that of (a). It is a figure and (c) is an enlarged sectional view which shows a part of decoration which has the metal decoration part of a different form from (a) and (b). (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the configuration of the movable back decoration of the second embodiment, which is different from the movable back decoration of FIG. 142, and (b) is a movable back decoration of the third embodiment. FIG. 11C is an explanatory view showing the configuration of 1 in a cross section, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the configuration of the rear movable decorative body of the fourth embodiment in a cross section. (a) is a front perspective view of a lower back left effect unit and a lower right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a perspective view of a lower back left effect unit and a lower back right effect unit in the back unit. is a perspective view. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom left effect unit and the right bottom effect unit when viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom left effect unit and the right bottom effect unit when viewed from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the movable configuration of the back bottom left effect unit and the back bottom right effect unit from the front. (a) is a front perspective view of a back-bottom middle effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back-bottom view of the back-bottom middle effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom-side lifting mechanism of the bottom-side effect unit as seen from the front. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom-side lifting mechanism of the bottom-side effect unit as seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the underside decoration unit of the underside effect unit, viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the underside decoration unit of the underside effect unit, viewed from the back. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view showing the lifting and lowering of the lower back decoration body unit by the lower back middle lifting mechanism in the lower back middle effect unit. (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the back-lower middle rotating decoration of the back-lower middle decoration unit in the back-lower middle effect unit, and (b) is a stop position of the back-lower middle rotating decoration. and each detection sensor in a table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the arrangement of LEDs of the lower back middle decorative body unit in the lower back middle effect unit from the front. (a) is a front perspective view of an upper back effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the upper back effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the back side effect unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the back side effect unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the upper back elevation decorative body unit in the upper back effect unit, which is viewed from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back upper raising/lowering decoration body unit in a back unit, and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front the rotation mechanism of the back top front rotary decoration in a back top production|presentation unit. (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the lifting mechanism of the upper lifting decorative body unit in the upper rear effect unit; It is an explanatory view showing from the front the lifting mechanism of the body unit and the rotating mechanism of the back-up rear rotary decoration. FIG. 10 is an explanatory view showing the decoration substrate from the front in a state where the upper back elevating decorative body unit is moved to the appearing position in the upper back effect unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the rear left effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the back-left effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-left effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left decorative body unit of the rear rear left effect unit exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left decorative body unit of the rear rear left effect unit exploded and viewed from the rear; It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back left production|presentation unit from the front. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back left decorative body unit in the back left effect unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a back rear right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back perspective view of a back rear right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the back-right production unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-right decoration unit of the rear-right effect unit, viewed from the front. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right decorative body unit of the rear rear right effect unit exploded and viewed from the rear; It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back right production|presentation unit from the front. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-right decorative body unit in the back-right effect unit; (a) is a front perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left effect unit, viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left effect unit, viewed from the rear; (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the closed state in the back front left effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the open state in the back front left effect unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right effect unit, viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right effect unit exploded and viewed from behind; (a) is a front view showing the closed state of the shutter group in the back front right effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing the open state of the shutter group in the back front right effect unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-back movable decorative body of the rear-back production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-lower middle rotary ornament of the back-lower middle effect unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. The back upper rear rotating decoration of the back upper rear effect unit moves from the retracted position to the appearing position, the back left rotating ornament of the back rear left effect unit moves from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back of the back rear right effect unit moves from the retracted position to the first appearance position It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-right rotating decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the first appearing position. A state in which the back-left rotating decoration of the back-left effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-right rotating decoration of the back-right effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in . It is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit, respectively, from the closed state to the open state. Back rear movable decoration of the back rear production unit from the retracted position to the appearing position, Back upper rear rotary decoration of the back upper rear production unit from the retracted position to the appearing position, Back left rotating decoration of the back left production unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, the back right rotation decoration of the back right production unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back bottom middle rotation decoration of the back bottom middle production unit is raised from the lowered position. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being moved to respective positions; It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit; It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the shape of a solid ground at a portion where the front surface of a disconnection prevention rib portion formed on the base body contacts the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, showing the copper foil on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board; 1A is a schematic view of the surface, and FIG. 1B is a schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the shape of the resist with respect to the land when the peripheral control board is flowed into the solder bath; It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko game machine. 213 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 212; FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of a power supply substrate; FIG. It is the structure of the commercial power supply voltage measure which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. 4 is a circuit diagram of a motor drive circuit; FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a main control solenoid drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control board. It is a circuit which shows a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing an effect control solenoid drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing an effect control motor drive circuit. Outline of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the board on which the fuse is mounted FIG. 4 is a block diagram for explaining electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame; FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit; FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 229 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on processing of FIG. 228; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control unit power-on. FIG. 235 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the processing when the payout control unit power is turned on in FIG. 234. FIG. FIG. 235 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing subsequent to FIG. 235 . It is a flow chart which shows an example of due-out control part timer interruption processing. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a first starting opening passing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the second starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design process processing performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design normal process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. 7 is a flow chart showing the procedure of hit determination processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; (A) is a win determination table used for lottery processing for big wins, (B) is a big win symbol determination table used for lottery processing for types of big wins, and (C) is types of small wins. It is a small winning symbol determination table used in the lottery process for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design variation process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a front view of a game board in a modification. (A) is a front perspective view of a dot matrix display, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in (A) and a perspective view seen from the back side. (A) is a front view of a circuit board of Modification 1 and a cross-sectional view along AA, and (B) is a front view of a circuit board of Modification 1 and a cross-sectional view along AA. FIG. 11 is a front view of a circuit board provided in a dot matrix display of a modified example; 4 is a time chart showing control states of a dot matrix display; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of display contents of a dot matrix display; (A) is a front perspective view of a modified dot matrix display, and (B) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (A) and a perspective view from the back side. (A) A front view of the specific substrate, (B) a front view showing the decoration of the specific substrate, and (C) the specific substrate in the modified example. It is a detailed diagram of the main control unit in the game board. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart showing a modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart showing a modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine when the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. 10 is a time chart showing the operation timing of the specific operation of the movable body in the initial symbol variation display after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the special monitor related effect processing executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining signal paths when a steering wheel touch sensor or a single button operation sensor detects. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of first firing stop command-related processing that is executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of second firing stop command-related processing executed in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of firing permission command-related processing that is executed in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing; FIG. It is a concrete example of the suspension notice effect and the set value suspension suggestion effect. It is the perspective view (a) which looked at the function display unit from the front, and the perspective view (b) which looked at the function display unit from the back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit as seen from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit viewed from behind; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of the front surface (top surface) of a function display substrate housed in the function display unit; 2 is a schematic diagram of a game board side matrix display device provided on a game board and a door frame side matrix display device provided on a door frame; FIG. Schematic diagrams (a) and XX in (a) for explaining the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes according to the first embodiment formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board with an insulating film. It is the schematic (b) of the cross section of a line, and the schematic (c) of the modification of (b). Schematic diagrams (a) and XX in (a) for explaining the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes according to the second embodiment formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board with an insulating film. It is the schematic (b) of the cross section of a line, and the schematic (c) of the modification of (b). Schematic diagrams (a) and XX in (a) for explaining a configuration for covering lands of through-holes according to the third embodiment formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board with an insulating film. It is the schematic (b) of the cross section of a line, and the schematic (c) of the modification of (b). Schematic diagrams (a) and XX in (a) for explaining the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes according to the fourth embodiment formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board with an insulating film. It is the schematic (b) of the cross section of a line, and the schematic (c) of the modification of (b). It is a schematic diagram (a) of the rear surface (back surface) side and a schematic diagram (b) of the front surface (front surface) side of the decoration board on which the DIP type connector is mounted, and the surface mount (SMD) type connector is mounted. It is the schematic (c) of the back surface (back surface) side of a decoration board|substrate, and the schematic (d) of the front (surface) side. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated upward. It is a specific display example displayed on the effect display device and the special monitor when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated upward. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated upward. It is a modified example of a specific display displayed on the effect display device and the special monitor when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated upward. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated downward. It is a specific display example displayed on the effect display device and the special monitor when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated downward. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the game ball enters when the second start opening is closed. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when an abnormality is detected. 10 is a time chart showing the standby position of the peripheral control board side movable body when the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is completed after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between suggestion production|presentation and abnormality detection. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine; FIG.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. be. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls B (see FIG. 90) are driven by.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 are connected to the main body frame 4 and the main body. It is for coaxially supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 so as to be rotatable, and attaching the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that the lower outer frame assembly 40 is part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operating section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player can operate the performance operating section 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. , the player can participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by the operation of the performance operation unit 301.例文帳に追加

The body frame 4 has a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 for putting out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the body frame base 501 are covered. A back cover 640 and a locking unit 650 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front constituent member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front constituent member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and peripherals arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100. , and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emitting effects according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of golden obstacle nails N (brass is used in the present embodiment) which are in contact with the game balls B and planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. , a general prize winning port 2001, a first start port 2002, a gate part 2003, and a second start that give a predetermined privilege (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B payout) to the player by receiving or passing the game ball B An opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided. A golden obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 . A general winning opening 2001 , a first starting opening 2002 , a gate section 2003 , a second starting opening 2004 , a first big winning opening 2005 and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000 .

A game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 by the player. As a result, the game ball B enters the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate part 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. , the player can be entertained with the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be received or passed.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, or displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, or displays a reverse effect unit 3100, a reverse effect unit 3100, or a Left effect unit 3200, back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom middle effect unit 3300, back top effect unit 3400, back rear left effect unit 3500, back rear right effect unit 3600, back front left effect unit 3700, back front right effect The unit 3800 or the like can be used to entertain the player by performing a lighting effect, a movable effect, or the like.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 together, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2 . It is for attaching the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 .

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 includes a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a portion that is opposite to the concave portion 11a on the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the portion 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 while the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11 . The upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing portion 12a in contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left side cutout portion 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 13a extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and rightward from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. and a flat plate-like abutting portion 13d that extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the contact portion 13 d against the front surface of the bulging portion 11 b of the left outer frame member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13 b against the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, thereby It is attached to the left frame member 11 . The left lower connecting member 13 has the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, and the right outer frame member 21. and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed leftward at the rear portion of the right side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a recess portion 21a that is flat and recessed leftward from the portion opposite to the recessed portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10 .

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the portion 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, and the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the right outer frame member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21 while the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing portion 22a in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a in the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and left from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. and a flat plate-like contact portion 23d that extends short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 has the rear surface of the abutting portion 23 d in contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21 b of the right outer frame member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23 b on the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a in the right side surface of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The upper hooking member 24 extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 24b to which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked is provided.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. and a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 which is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear panel member 43 extending to the left and right, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 a mechanism 44;

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel interior becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube part 43a, thereby connecting the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624. FIG.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is arranged such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, thereby preventing the game ball B from being held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. to prevent it from being caught.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so as to face the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the placement portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear. and a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. A standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end projecting portion 44e that protrudes forward provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged behind the curtain board rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a left-right spacing, and closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which is mounted inside the front panel member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 .

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal with numerous small holes. The port member 47 communicates the inner space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain board and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 with two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the low-pitched sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (within the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. , a rich low-pitched sound can be radiated forward of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. and prevents the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable. is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. and a mounting screw 53 for mounting the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 .

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is in the form of a horizontally extending flat plate and extends forward from an upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the forward extending portion 51b to the center of the forward extending portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and an end edge extending downward from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. A flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band plate-like lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and an operation piece 52b extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It has an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 , the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the edge of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 . It extends forward so as to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 has a flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and having a size through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrower upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the outer frame lower hinge member 60 assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screwed (not shown). It is fixed to the rear panel member 43 by . The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 60.例文帳に追加

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100; a door frame left side unit 400 attached to the tray unit, a door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, and mounted near the right end on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the rear side. a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the door frame main relay board 104; The door frame relay board cover 107 covers the rear handle relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handle rear relay board 106 is covered from the rear side. It has a post-handle relay board cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 . In addition, hereinafter, the frame formed by the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 may be referred to as a "front frame".

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is ejected into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game to hit into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 at the left side in front view, and closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 with an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting a handle unit 180, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view.

The door-frame base unit 100 also includes a door-frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101, and a door-frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted to the left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side and covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable are provided. I have it.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame top hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the bottom corner of the front surface, a plate unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 400 at the front surface of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery, which are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively. It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b, which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted is recessed near the right end in the front view from the front to the front and the insertion recess 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 101e for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 101 penetrates in the front and back at a position near the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. a passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper tray that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a in the vicinity of the left end in a front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, and a door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper tray ball passage opening 101g) when viewed from the front and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of slits 101i are such that the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is positioned in front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is positioned behind. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The handlebar mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion 102a. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) protrusions 102c protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and are arranged at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a. and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

The handle mounting member 102 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with a screw while the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The cylindrical portion 102 a has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 . One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed in the handle base 181 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 102, the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is positioned in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided forward. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the player can be guided forward (to the player side) of the pachinko machine 1 in a favorable manner.

Moreover, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (see FIG. 83). and FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the square extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410 side. It is for relaying connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and various boards of the body frame 4. The remainder of the connecting cable 503 extending from the frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door-frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are arranged so that the vertically extending parts of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the door. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107 , and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 .

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board (inverted L-shaped portion extending up and down) can be covered. cover the sides. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107 and can be opened. A connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side of the housing and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 with a wiring cable (not shown). It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and has openings formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cables.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 . An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position near the upper end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115, which are connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical gap therebetween, and the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are engaged. and a hooking member 116 that is attached.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The notch portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It has a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of front extending portions to each other. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching and molding metal plates. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114. , is assembled to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

[3-1g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a locking spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends upward. The portion that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is fully extended. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 , so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 . can be supported as much as possible.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and rectangular in front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer circumference of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is located coaxially with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125b. installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 rotatably with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. can be done.

[3-1i. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650, which will be described later, to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing and locking with. The cylinder lock 130 has a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131. and a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind and has its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is arranged at opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 22, etc.).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. FIG. 34(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 34(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the tampering prevention member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and also the game balls stored in the upper tray 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222. - 特許庁

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which the game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open end, and a box-shaped front cover 141 with a closed rear end and an open front, and a game ball entered from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hit ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover supported rotatably about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a partitioning between an entrance port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a rear cover 142 for game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported about an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144 .

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a. And, it is formed so as to close from the rear side the portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extracting member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extracting port 141b below the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144. Extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 141b. a rod-shaped operating rod 143c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b; and the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. and a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. An operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 is formed to project forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34(a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 that moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 144a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the entrance port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, and a cut-off portion 144a behind the cut-off portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation shaft, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to hold one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a feed position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. As a result, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding working rod 146 which swings vertically. and a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by movement of the ball feeding member 144 and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding actuation rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. It is When the ball-feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball-feeding operating rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upward) the ball-feeding solenoid 145 due to the magnetic force generated, thereby feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. and return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feed operating rod 146 near the ball feed crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feed solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction, which is engageable with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which moves up and down, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b is disposed on the opposite side to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the shaft portion 147b extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , and a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35(b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 211) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 may come into contact with the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper dish ball extracting slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball extracting button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since its rotation is restricted, the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b in a normal state to partition the ball removal port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter into.

When the player presses downward the upper tray ball release button 222 of the tray unit 200, the upper tray ball release slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the operation transmission portion 242b moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmission part 242b, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the inlet 141a and the ball removal opening 141b. partition is removed. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the side of the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guideway 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is biased upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if the ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, preventing the ball removal member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B being pushed into the partition. Rebounding at 143a can be prevented.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 35(b), etc.) that is recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball feed port 142a in the rear cover 142. An anti-tampering member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proof member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-tamper member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. As shown in FIG. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this tampering prevention member 148, an illicit game ball B to which a string is attached is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illicit game ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed such as operating the string that has been set to let the illegal game ball B enter and exit the first starting port 2002, etc., the illegal game ball B shot (hit ball) by the ball launching device 540 is released. By force, the string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It is possible to cut the string by the narrowed portion, and to prevent the fraudulent act using the illegal game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1k. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. FIG. 36(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 36(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152 and .

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner when viewed from the front and communicates the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 with the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200. A ball passage 150a and a full ball receiver that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a in a front view and can communicate with a lower full discharge passage 610b of a lower full ball passage unit 610 of the body frame 4. and a mouth 150b.

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and despite being shot by the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4, it did not reach the game area 5a. A foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B received by a full ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c which are open forward near the lower right corner in a front view. and a ball discharge port 150d that discharges the balls forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passageway 150e having a possible width is provided.

The ball-through passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the lower end thereof is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152. and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is placed inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, the fact can be notified to the player, the staff of the game hall, or the like, and they can be urged to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a. A door opening/closing abutting portion 150f with which the operating projection 613a of the door 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front). It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 161 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. and a mounting member 163 .

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-like locking piece 161b. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with a projecting portion 163 b of a glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disc-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-like protrusion protruding from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101 . After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the above procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is regulated by the projecting portion 163b when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the projecting portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-like rear projecting piece 172 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 .

A main body portion 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. ing.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area is opened. It does not hinder the hitting of the game ball B into 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000 . In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 projects further rearward than the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to hit the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a handle 182 covering the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and a transparent handle cover 185 attached to a cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration substrate 184. - 特許庁A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the handle decoration substrate 184 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and the handle 182 is attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186 .

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190 is attached to an inner base 186 at one end and to a transmission gear 188 at the other end. and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. and an operation sensor 194 .

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. and three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. A base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handlebar mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are positioned in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes non-rotatable relative to the handle attachment member 102 .

The handle 182 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d projecting outwardly away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape from the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center from the slit 182e. and a locking protrusion 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a protrudes outward from the portion protruding most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (gouged out) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second projection 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first projection 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 85 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. protrudes slightly lower. The second projection 182b protrudes so that the clockwise side surface in the front view of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the counterclockwise side surface, which is the opposite side, curves inward. and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first projection 182a.

The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It sticks out at about half the height. Both side surfaces of the third projection 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the clockwise side surface is inclined more gently than the opposite counterclockwise side surface. The portion of the fourth projection 182d that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the third projection 182c that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. It also protrudes slightly higher. Both sides of the fourth projection 182d are inclined substantially linearly, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle shape.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disc shape and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through slits 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward and is transparent. An inner lens 185a that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member is attached to the inside of the handle cover 185 on the rear surface of the handle cover 185. As shown in FIG. The surface of the inner lens 185a is lens-cut (polyhedron-shaped) so that light can be refracted irregularly. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the mounting surface) are difficult to see clearly from the player's side. The back surface of the inner lens 185a as well as the front surface may be lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the inner lens 185a may be lens cut instead of the front surface. (It may be formed into a polyhedron). The steering wheel cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 . The front surface of the handle cover 185 may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or both the front and rear surfaces of the handle cover 185 may be lens-cut. Alternatively, the rear surface of the handle cover 185 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. As shown in FIG. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in a plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without any sense of incongruity.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.例文帳に追加

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the player and detects the static electricity acting on the player's handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a manner different from the original to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Also, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single shot button 193. Firing solenoid 542 is de-energized. As a result, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the single-shot button 193 can be operated before the operation. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 can be rotated most clockwise when viewed from the front. so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit"), the fourth projection 182d is the first projection 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the player can comfortably maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position by switching the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. To reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and the upper plate 201 arranged below the upper plate 201 and game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. and a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 attached to the front surface of the tray base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surfaces of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-like dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201 , and a right side of the upper dish body 212 . A mounting base 213 that is attached to and protrudes forward, a plate unit relay board 214 that is attached to the right of the mounting base 213, a ball rental operation unit 220 that is attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, It has an upper tray before ball removal unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213 and an upper tray after ball removal unit 240 attached behind the upper tray before ball removal unit 230. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower part of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. a lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251; a plate upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with a space left and right; A plate upper right decoration unit 275 and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 are provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. ing. The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular performance operation ring 330 having a rotation operation portion 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation portion 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation portion 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 rotatably mounting the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring are provided.

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 that lights up the effect operation ring 330, the decoration board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation part base 320. an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330; and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320. and have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the production operation unit 301 at the center in the left-right direction faces obliquely upward and forward, and the left side of the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface. An upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the performance operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower plate 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 under the upper plate 201.例文帳に追加

[3-5a. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is positioned below the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211, and the game balls are pushed toward the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It inclines so that it may become low toward the position of a little lower side than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be discharged from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the horizontal center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in front view. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be ejected through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. A lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the performance operation unit 300 in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a can be opened. The stored game balls B can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the ball is moved forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The discharged game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a front perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit, and FIG. 44 is a rear perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached on the front surface.

The dish base unit 210 includes a flat plate-like dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 that is attached to the right side of the upper plate main body 212 in the upper front portion of the plate unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and a mounting base 213 that is attached to the right side of the mounting base 213 in the front surface of the plate unit base 211. and a plate unit relay board 214 .

The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , and an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the upper tray ball removal front unit 230. - 特許庁

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends laterally across the entire width of the door frame base 101. box).

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side of the left-right center in front view, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d cut in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c to a size through which the game ball B can pass, and a front view upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. an upper tray ball feeding port 211e extending vertically and having an upper portion located at the right end of the upper tray main body 212. - 特許庁

In addition, the plate unit base 211 has a mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed, which protrudes forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feed port 211e, and an upper plate portion 211f on the left side of the upper plate ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g, through which an operation transmission part 242b of an upper tray ball removal slider 242 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is inserted, penetrates back and forth below the plate body, and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in a front view. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion opening 211h that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the right corner in front view and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. and a mouth 211i.

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has its front end opened in the rear wall of the upper tray 201 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and its cylindrical rear end through which the upper tray balls of the door frame base 101 pass. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end opened to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects with the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 . As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. A notch portion 211d formed in a cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is connected to the downstream end of the ball removal guiding path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are released by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222, the upper tray ball feed port 211e, the entrance port 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feed unit 140, and the upper tray ball feed port 211e. The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the post-dish ball removal unit 240 and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feeding opening 211e is positioned in front of the ball receiving opening 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240 in the state assembled to the tray base unit 210, and the game balls in the upper tray 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper plate body 212 recedes rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end, whose upper part is closed, slips under the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled to the plate unit 200 . In addition, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open top. The mounting base 213 has an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the right corner of the rear end.

The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is through which the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball removal front unit 230 is inserted. A wiring cable for connecting the ball rental operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate upper left decorative board 273, the plate upper right decorative board 278, the plate lower left decorative board 283, and the plate lower right decorative board 288. , and the operation unit relay board 392 . The plate unit relay board 214 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball rental operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the attachment base 213 . This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and operates a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. (omitted)), a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, and the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed. return the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine after deducting the amount of the game balls B borrowed, or adjust the sound volume relating to the presentation to be larger or smaller.

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper tray ball ejection button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper tray ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball rental operation base 223 having translucency disposed on the right side of the extraction button 222, and a ball rental operation base 223 located on the upper surface of the base portion 221 and right below the upper tray ball extraction button 222. A volume up button 226 arranged on the lower left side of the base part 221 A volume down button 227 arranged below the volume up button 226 on the upper surface of the base part 221 A ball arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223 Equipped with a lend button 224, a return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged on the lower rear portion of the ball lending operation base 223. ing.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and when the player presses it, it moves slightly downward (when the player presses it, the upper tray ball eject button 222 moves downward. The pressing operation part of the tactile switch 224a (lead type) for the ball lending button is pushed slightly downward to turn on the tactile switch 224a for the ball lending button, while the player releases the pressing operation. By doing so, the ball lending button 224 moves upward to the original position, and the pressing operation part of the ball lending button tactile switch 224a returns upward, so that the ball lending button tactile switch 224a can be turned off. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The return button tactile switch 225a (lead type) can be turned on by pressing the push operation part of the return button tactile switch 225a (lead type) slightly downward, while the player releases the push operation. The return button 225 moves upward to its original position, and the push operation portion of the return button tactile switch 225a returns upward, so that the return button tactile switch 225a can be turned off. The ball rental display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs (lead type), and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after inserting cash or a prepaid card with a balance into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. The remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed on the ball lending display section. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume up button 226 is formed in a triangular shape, and is arranged such that one of its three vertices faces upward. It is smaller than the distance that the upper tray ball eject button 222 moves downward by operation.) The pressing operation part of the volume up button tactile switch 226a (surface mounting type) is pushed slightly downward to move the volume up button. While the tactile switch 226a can be turned on, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume up button 226 moves upward to its original position, and the pressing operation portion of the volume up button tactile switch 226a returns upward. The volume up button tactile switch 226a can be turned off. The volume down button 227 is formed in a triangular shape, and is arranged such that one of its three vertices faces downward. It is smaller than the distance that the top tray ball eject button 222 moves downward when operated.) The pressing operation part of the volume down button tactile switch 227a (surface mounting type) is pushed slightly downward to move the volume down button. While the tactile switch 227a can be turned on, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume down button 227 moves upward to its original position, and the pressing operation portion of the volume down button tactile switch 227a returns upward. The volume down button tactile switch 227a can be turned off.

The ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front or surface) of the ball rental board 228 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220, Through the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the body frame 4 side, it is electrically connected to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted on the upper surface (front or surface) of the volume control board 229 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220. , the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (display in response to a command from a peripheral control board 1510 to be described later) without going through the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. A peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (which controls the progress of the performance) is provided to the unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 via a performance drive board 1720 (to be described later) that drives a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like provided in the back unit 3000. It is electrically connected to a peripheral control board 1510, which can be described later. The ball rental board 228 and the volume control board 229 are accommodated in the ball rental operation unit 220 in a state of being adjacent to each other.

In this way, the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the three 7-segment LEDs are electrically connected to the ball rental board 228 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220. The door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side, the volume control board 229 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220 on which the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are mounted, and electrical The door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side connected to the door frame 3 side is a completely different relay board. The signal transmission path for the switch 225a and the three 7-segment LEDs and the signal transmission path for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are not mixed on the same relay board. . This is because the signal transmission path for the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the three 7-segment LEDs is a path through which a so-called main side signal is transmitted. The signal transmission path to the volume-up button tactile switch 226a and the volume-down button tactile switch 227a is a path through which signals on the main side are transmitted. Therefore, it is configured to pass through the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side.

On the upper surface (front or surface) of the ball rental board 228, there are a pad for soldering a tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, a tactile switch 225a for the return button, and three 7-segment LEDs. Peripheral walls are plated with copper and have conductivity; the same shall apply hereinafter.); A green resist layer is formed by a solid green resist. On the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the ball rental board 228, the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a connector (lead type) (not shown) is mounted is soldered. The resist forms a green resist layer. Furthermore, although not shown, on the upper surface (front or surface) of the ball rental board 228, there are mounted a ball rental button tactile switch 224a, a return button tactile switch 225a, and three 7-segment LEDs. In the vicinity of the side electronic component, the attributes of the front side electronic component such as the part number of the front side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is arranged (In addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component , mounting orientation of the front side electronic parts (mounting direction), and the model number of the front side electronic parts. It is printed on a green resist by silk printing. On the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the ball rental board 228, although not shown, the part numbers of the back surface electronic components and the back surface electronic components are arranged near the back surface electronic components such as connectors (surface mount type). The attributes of the back side electronic components such as the area indicating the position of the back side (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic components, the size of the back side electronic components, the mounting direction of the back side electronic components (mounting direction), the model of the back side electronic components ) is printed on the solid green resist by silk printing with a white paint that stands out against the green.

On the other hand, on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the volume control board 229, pads, through holes, lands, etc. for soldering the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are removed. A white resist layer is formed over the entire area by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid white resist”). On the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the volume control board 229, the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a connector (not shown) is mounted is soldered with white resist. A resist layer is formed. Furthermore, on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the volume control board 229, although not shown, the vicinity of surface-side electronic components such as the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are mounted. , the part number of the front side electronic component, the attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is placed (further, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the front side (Mounting direction of the component, may include the model number of the electronic component on the front side.) is solidly painted with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out against white. is printed on the resist by silk printing. On the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the volume control board 229, although not shown, an area indicating the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is arranged is located near the back side electronic component such as a connector. Attributes of the back side electronic components such as (further include the shape of the back side electronic components, the size of the back side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back side electronic components, and the type of the back side electronic components. ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white.

In this way, the colors of the resist liquids applied to the ball rental board 228 and the volume control board 229, which are housed in the ball rental operation unit 220 while being adjacent to each other, are different. To explain this, the signal transmission path for the ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs, as described above, is the path through which the so-called main side signal is transmitted. Therefore, the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front or surface) of the ball rental board 228 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220. It is electrically connected to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. On the other hand, the signal transmission path for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a is not a path through which a so-called main side signal is transmitted, as described above. The volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted on the upper surface (front or surface) of the volume control board 229 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220, and are mounted on the door frame 3 side. Drive board unit 1700 on the side of main body frame 4 (front unit 2000 and rear unit 3000 in response to a command from peripheral control board 1510 described later) does not go through door frame sub-relay board 105 and interface board 635 on the side of main body frame 4. Peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (peripheral control unit 1500 that can control the progress of the performance) It is electrically connected to the control board 1510).

That is, in the present embodiment, the volume electrically connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, which can control the progress of the performance, which will be described later) on the game board 5 side, which is the control device in the pachinko machine 1. An adjustment board 229 and a ball lending board 228 electrically connected to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1 are adjacent to each other in the ball lending operation unit 220 of the pachinko machine 1. Although the sound volume control board 229 is coated with a white resist liquid to form a white coating film, the ball rental board 228 is coated with a green resist liquid different from white. Since the green coating film is formed, an operator who performs wiring connection can use the color of the coating film formed in this way (that is, the color of the resist) as a guide for electrical connection with the volume control board 229. This can contribute to prevention of erroneous connection between the wiring that is connected to the ball rental board 228 and the wiring that is electrically connected to the ball rental board 228 . Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of erroneous connection of wiring.

In addition, the volume control board 229 includes a volume up button tactile switch 226a that allows the player to adjust the volume related to the performance to a high level, and a volume down button tactile switch 226a that allows the player to adjust the volume related to the performance to a low level. 227a and are mounted, and the detection result (ON signal by ON, OFF signal by OFF) by the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button is the game board 5 which is the control device in the pachinko machine 1 It is transmitted to the side peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the performance), and the player can request the ball lending board 228 to pay out the game ball B by lending the ball. A ball lending button tactile switch 224a, a return button tactile switch 225a capable of requesting the ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) to return cash or a prepaid card, and cash or money thrown into the ball lending machine. Three 7-segment LEDs that can display the remaining amount of the prepaid card are mounted, and the detection results (ON signal by ON, OFF signal by OFF ) is transmitted to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1 . In addition, by transmitting a drive signal from a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) to the ball lending board 228, the ball lending display unit configured by three 7-segment LEDs mounted on the ball lending board 228 While the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the machine is displayed, the volume is adjusted from the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the performance) on the game board 5 side. No drive signal is output to the board 229, and the sound volume control board 229 operates based on the drive signal from the peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (peripheral control board 1510, which can control the progress of the performance, which will be described later). None of the electronic components that make up the displayed display are mounted. In this way, the position of the player's operation is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, which can control the progress of the performance) on the game board 5 side, which is the control device in the pachinko machine 1. and a path to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is electrically connected to the volume control board 229. If the wiring and the wiring electrically connected to the ball lending board 228 are incorrectly connected, the player may suffer an unintended disadvantage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a white resist solution is applied to the sphere rental substrate 228 to form a white coating film, and a green resist solution different from white is applied to the sphere rental substrate 228. Incorrect connection is prevented by forming a green coating film on the connection.

In addition, surface-mount type electronic components are adopted as the volume-up button tactile switch 226a and the volume-down button tactile switch 227a mounted on the volume control board 229. Since the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the three 7-segment LEDs adopt lead-type electronic components, the type of electronic components mounted on the board (lead type or surface mount type), the wiring electrically connected to the volume control board 229 and the wiring electrically connected to the ball rental board 228 can be distinguished. It can contribute to prevention of erroneous connection.

By the way, although the reflectance of light is highest in white and low in dark colors, as described above, the volume control substrate 229 having no display portion is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film. On the other hand, the ball rental substrate 228 on which the ball display portion is provided is coated with a dark green resist liquid to form a green coating film. As a result, by reducing the efficiency of reflection of the light emitted by the ball rental display part on the upper surface (front or surface) of the ball rental board 228, the production by the production device excluding the ball rental display part is not hindered. can be done. Although green is used as the dark color in this embodiment, purple or black may be used instead of green.

In this embodiment, the ball lending board 228 is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the body frame 4 side. (for example, a CR unit), the volume control board 229 is connected without interposing the door frame secondary relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. , the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (decorative boards provided in the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 in response to commands from the peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later), the driving motor, the driving solenoid, etc. drive board 1720), via the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side, and electrically with the peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (peripheral control board 1510, which can control the progress of the performance, which will be described later). It is connected. That is, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are present on the door frame 3 side. Therefore, for the front surface (surface) of the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side, the same color as the color of the resist liquid applied to the ball rental board 228 is adopted, and the green resist liquid is applied. A green coating film is formed, and the same color as the color of the resist liquid applied to the volume control board 229 is adopted for the front surface (surface) of the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side. Preferably, a white resist solution is applied to form a white coating film. In addition, the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution is fragile compared to the green coating film formed by applying the green resist solution. When manufacturing by arranging and cutting out a plurality of substrates from a material), it may crack or tear.

By the way, when manufacturing a substrate, as described above, a plurality of substrates are arranged and cut out from a single sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material), so the color of the silk paint and the resist solution will be the same color, and a plurality of substrates having the same color will be manufactured. For this reason, for example, it may be possible to determine whether or not it is manufactured from the same copper-clad laminate (base material) of the same standard size by examining the substrate having white color. Once it is found, when checking other defects, it is sufficient to trace (find out) the other white substrates one by one, which has the advantage of being able to contribute to early discovery of defects.

It should be noted that the volume adjustment operation to adjust the volume of the performance based on the volume up button 226 to a higher level or adjust the volume of the performance to a lower level based on the volume down button 227 is performed for a certain period of time (for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on). After that, for a certain period of time until the peripheral control MPU (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control IC" instead of the peripheral control MPU) is activated, the display is fluctuating. It may be always executable by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) except for a certain period of time before and after the special symbol is stopped (one or both of them), or the customer waiting state and Execution by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) is possible only when specific conditions such as a period during which the performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) are satisfied. can be anything. In addition, the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) may be reflected, or the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) may be delayed from the timing of the volume control operation depending on the situation (whether or not the variable display is being performed, the progress of the production, etc.) may be reflected.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine having a plurality of substrates has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0047] and FIG. 5). If they are arranged in the same direction, there is a risk that a person who performs wiring connection work may mistakenly connect the wiring electrically connected to one substrate and the wiring electrically connected to the other substrate.

[3-5c-6. Unit before upper tray ball removal and unit after upper tray ball removal]
The unit 230 before ball removal and the unit 240 after ball removal of the upper plate in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper tray ball before unit 230 and the upper tray after ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower tray 202 .

The upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 . The upper bowl post-ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion behind the upper bowl ball removal pre-unit 230 on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 .

The upper tray ball removal front unit 230 includes a cylindrical front base 231 attached to the front surface of the tray unit base 211 and extending vertically, and a front base 231 inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be vertically movable. and a slider 232 . The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 near the front of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222, and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240. It abuts on the top surface.

The upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. an upper tray ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the upper tray, a spring 243 urging the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241, It has

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and has a ball receiving opening 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving opening 241a. A ball feeding guideway 241b for guiding the accepted game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guiding it backward, and a game from a position below the ball feeding guideway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. and a ball removal guideway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is installed in the plate base unit 210 and extends forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guiding passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an open position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the state assembled to the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The laterally extending portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c protrudes to the right in a rear view from the portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in the rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side in rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The upper portion of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c that extends vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 in the state assembled to the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end of the laterally extending portion as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 . As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper bowl ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an operation receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface, which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a, projecting rearward. and an operation transmission portion 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving section 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion opening 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the . When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided on the upper surface. The rod 143c abuts.

The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extracting slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243 .

In the upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 and the upper bowl ball extraction unit 240, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward. The front slider 232 in contact with the upper surface of the actuation receiving portion 242a positions the upper tray ball eject button 222 upward at the end of movement. In addition, since the urging force of the spring 243 positions the upper tray ball removal slider 242 at the upper moving end, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to separate the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is fed from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving opening 241a. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the hitting ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is operated. The actuating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b, can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partition portion 143a. retreats from between the entry port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entry port 141a through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feed guide path 241b from the upper tray 201 is discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b that opens below the entry port 141a. It will be done. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower dish ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d. The game ball B is discharged into the tray 202 and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202 .

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is moved through the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 rises, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c in contact with the operation transmission part 242b, and the partition part 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to its original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before the upper tray ball is removed and the unit 240 after the upper tray ball is removed. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a front perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit, and FIG. 48 is a rear perspective view of the dish decoration unit. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish main body 251 attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. 211, a lower tray ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 with a space left and right. An upper left decorative unit 270 and a right upper plate decorative unit 275, and a lower left plate decorative unit 280 and a lower right plate decorative unit attached below the upper left plate decorative unit 270 and upper right plate decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and .

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower front portion of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . When the lower tray main body 251 is assembled with the tray unit 200, the bottom surface of the lower tray main body 251 is located below the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is used to supply the lower tray balls. It is positioned in front of the mouth 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the plate unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 has an upper side swelling portion 252a which bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction and extends downward and is spaced apart from the left and right at the bottom, and an upper left side bulge portion 252a from the center in the left and right direction at the bottom. has a lower front decorative portion 252b protruding forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and are provided on the front surfaces of the upper left and lower plate decoration units 270, 280, 275, and 275, respectively. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b at the right end of the lower surface. In addition, the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected at its lower end to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower tray opening 252d has a size that allows the fingers of the player to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

The plate unit main body 252 includes a front cutout portion 252e cut upward from the front lower end of a portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decoration portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. and a bottom cutout portion 252f that is cut at a portion below the . A lower tray ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Furthermore, the plate unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g that penetrates the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are central in the left-right direction. A production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . In addition, when the plate decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is positioned. By closing the bottom notch 252f, the bottom surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5d-3. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the game ball B is stored in the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is discharged from the lower tray 202. It is intended for

The lower pan ball extractor unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower pan main body 251 and includes a flat lower pan ball extractor base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower pan ball extractor base 261 . A slider 262 attached to the upper surface of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower dish ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward, A lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower tray ball removal cover 265 in an open state via the slider 262 are provided.

The lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom notch 252f of the tray unit main body 252, and is vertically aligned with the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (lower tray main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 has a projecting pin projecting upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower tray ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower tray ball removal base 261 so as to be rotatable about a vertically extending axis at a position to the left of the slider 262 on the left end side, and is attached to the slider 262 on the right end side. , and the right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower disk ball removal lid 265 is formed with a laterally extending slit into which the projecting pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower tray ball removal base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower tray ball release button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the tray unit main body 252. As shown in FIG. In the normal state, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole. and closes the through hole (lower tray ball extraction hole 202a).

In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加In addition, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower tray ball release button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is pushed backward to move backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower tray ball ejection button 263. becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower disk ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower disk ball removal cover 265 moves rearward on the right side with the left side as the center. It rotates in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 positioned directly above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, thereby opening the through hole and opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged downward from the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower tray ball eject button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower tray ball eject button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264 . As a result, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game ball B in the lower tray 202 is continuously released. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, is pushed backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. be. Then, when the pressure on the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower tray ball ejection button 263 returns to the state in which it is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is positioned directly above the through hole, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265 . Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper part of the plate unit 200 .

The upper left plate decoration unit 270 includes a semi-cylindrical upper left transparent plate decoration body 271 extending to the left and right, a transparent upper left inner plate lens 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left plate decoration body 271, and an upper left inner transparent plate plate. A dish upper left decorative substrate 273 mounted on the rear side of the lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") is provided.

The upper left decorative body 271 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper left ornamental body 271 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. This dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed transparent. The surface of the upper left ornamental body 271 of the dish may be cut with a lens (it may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface of the upper left ornamental body 271 of the dish may be cut with a lens. (It may be formed into a polyhedron), and the rear surface of the plate upper left decorative body 271 may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The upper left inner lens 272 of the plate is inserted into the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate from behind. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top left decoration substrate 273 of the plate are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the top left decoration of the plate 271 can be decorated with light. . The dish upper left inner lens 272 is formed transparent. The surface of the upper left inner lens 272 of the dish is provided with a lens cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 273 is difficult to clearly see from the player side. The back surface of the upper left inner lens 272 of the dish 272 may have a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron). A lens cut may be applied (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper left plate decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the upper left plate decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate upper right decoration unit 275 includes a semi-cylindrical transparent plate upper right decoration 276 extending left and right, a transparent plate upper right inner lens 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decoration 276, and a plate upper right inner. A plate upper right decorative substrate 278 is provided, which is attached to the rear side of the lens 277 and has a front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “surface (mounting surface)”) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper right ornamental body 276 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. This dish upper right decoration 276 is formed transparent. The surface of the upper right ornamental body 276 of the dish may be cut with a lens (it may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface of the upper right ornamental body 276 of the dish may be cut with a lens. (It may be formed into a polyhedron), and the rear surface of the plate upper right decorative body 276 may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The upper-right inner lens 277 of the plate is inserted into the upper-right plate ornament 276 from behind. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decorative body 276 can be decorated with light. . The plate upper right inner lens 277 is formed transparent. The surface of the upper right inner lens 277 of the plate is provided with a lens cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 278 is difficult to clearly see from the player's side. In addition, the back surface of the upper right inner lens 277 of the dish 277 may have a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and instead of the surface of the upper right inner lens 277 of the dish 277, the back surface may be: A lens cut may be applied (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper right plate decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper right plate decoration substrate 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 partially protrude upward from the front end of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled on the door frame 3. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a, a step can be formed in which the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the plate upper right decorative unit 275 are higher. As a result, the player can hook his finger using the step between the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 and the upper side protrusion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. Alternatively, it can be used as a finger hold when operating an effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. In addition, the step between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Plate lower left decorative unit and plate lower right decorative unit]
The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit body 252 so as to extend along the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively. be done. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

The lower left plate decoration unit 280 includes a semi-cylindrical lower left transparent plate decoration body 281 extending left and right, a transparent lower left inner lens 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left plate decoration body 281, and a lower left inner transparent plate plate. A plate lower left decorative substrate 283 mounted on the rear side of the lens 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") is provided.

The plate lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape centered rearward in a plan view. is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left plate decoration 281 is a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The left end of the plate lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The lower left ornamental body 281 of the plate has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. This plate lower left decorative body 281 is formed transparent. The surface of the lower left plate decoration 281 may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). (It may be formed into a polyhedron), and the rear surface of the plate lower left decorative body 281 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The lower left inner lens 282 is inserted into the lower left ornament 281 from behind. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the plate lower left decoration body 281 can be decorated with light. . The lower left inner lens 282 of the dish is formed transparent. The surface of the lower left inner lens 282 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 283 is difficult to clearly see from the player's side. The back surface of the lower left inner lens 282 may be lens-cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron). A lens cut may be applied (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The left end of the plate lower decoration unit 280 is positioned below the left end of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the lower plate center decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. Contiguous with the left edge. Since the left end of the plate lower left decorative body 281 of the plate lower left decorative unit 280 is formed in a spherical shape, the left end looks as if it is hidden inside the door frame 3 . Since the lower left plate decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower left plate decoration 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the lower left plate decoration 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 includes a transparent plate lower right decoration body 286 that is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right, and a transparent plate lower right inner lens 287 that is attached to the rear side of the plate lower right decoration body 286 . , and a plate lower right decorative substrate 288 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right inner lens 287 and having a front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. , is equipped with

The plate lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rearward center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The lower right plate decoration 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The dish lower right ornament 286 has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. This plate lower right decoration 286 is formed transparent. The surface of the lower right plate decoration 286 may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). may be applied (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the rear surface of the plate lower right decorative body 286 may be subjected to a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). .

The plate lower right inner lens 287 is inserted into the plate lower right decorative body 286 from behind. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 is decorated with light. can be done. The dish lower right inner lens 287 is formed transparent. The surface of the lower right inner lens 287 of the dish is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decoration board 288 is difficult to clearly see from the player side. A lens cut may be applied (it may be formed into a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be applied to both the surface and the back surface of the lower right inner lens 287 of the dish (polyhedron may be formed). lens cut may be applied to the rear surface instead of the front surface of the lower right inner lens 287 (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The right end of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is located below the right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is contiguous with the right edge of Since the right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is formed in a spherical shape, the right end appears to be hidden inside the door frame 3 . The lower right plate decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower right plate decoration body 286. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 are caused to emit light, the lower right plate decoration body 286 The entire front surface of the display can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, making it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as seen from the forward/backward direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. It is possible. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operating section 301 is composed of a transparent rotating operating section 302 which can be rotated by the player and a transparent pressing operating section 303 which can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation part 301, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation part 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation part 303 is arranged at the center of the rotating operation part 302, and is composed of a transparent central pressing operation part 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotating operation part 302, the outer periphery of the central pressing operation part 303a, and the rotating operation part. 302 and a transparent annular outer peripheral pressing portion 303b arranged between the inner peripheral portion 302 and the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation part 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation part 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 , and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320 .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and a effect operation ring decoration board 352. A decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, a vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330. A performance operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation section cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and rear.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 includes a downwardly recessed hemispherical unit lower cover 311, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, and a unit front cover. A transparent plate center upper inner lens 313 attached from behind in a plate center upper ornamental body 312a of a cover 312 and a plate center upper inner lens 313 attached to the rear side of the plate center upper inner lens 313 and capable of irradiating light forward. A plate center upper decorative substrate 314 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a transparent plate center lower inner lens 315 attached from behind in a plate center lower decoration body 312b of a unit front cover 312, and a plate center lower inner lens. 315 is attached to the rear side, and a plate center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward is mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical surface bulging downward on the front side from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 on the rear side thereof. 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in a slanted state so that the axis perpendicular to the imaginary plane formed on the upper edge extending in a semi-circular shape of the front portion is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 is formed with a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest portion when assembled to the dish unit 200. As shown in FIG.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 when viewed from above. installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a transparent plate center upper decoration 312a in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a transparent plate center upper decoration 312a below the plate center upper decoration 312a. A transparent plate center lower decorative body 312 b extending forward in a semi-arc shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is provided. The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the plate center lower decorative body 312b.

The upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder of approximately the same thickness (radius) into halves, and extend in a semicircular shape with the divided surfaces facing the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is slightly thinner than the upper plate center decoration 312a. is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the front end of the upper plate center decoration 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the lower plate center decoration 312b. When the plate unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the upper plate center decoration 312a are continuous with the right ends of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the left ends of the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively, and the lower plate center decorations. The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is transparent.

Further, the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the horizontal direction.

The plate center upper inner lens 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The upper plate center decorative substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the upper plate center decoration body 312a, and the upper surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") is forward (outward). ) are mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light. A plurality of LEDs of the upper plate center decorative substrate 314 are surface-mounted full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the upper plate center decoration 312a can be decorated with light. In addition, the surface of the plate center upper decoration 312a may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). may be applied (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface of the plate center upper decoration 312a may be subjected to a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). .

The plate center upper inner lens 313 is formed transparent. The surface of the inner lens 313 at the center of the dish is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 arranged is difficult to be clearly recognized from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be applied to both the front surface and the rear surface of the plate center inner lens 313 (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and instead of the surface of the plate center inner lens 313, the rear surface may be provided with a lens cut. may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The lower plate center inner lens 315 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted from the rear into the lower plate center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 to be attached. The plate center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the plate center lower decoration 312b, and the upper surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”) is forward (outward). ) are mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light. A plurality of LEDs of the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the plate center lower decoration 312b can be decorated with light. In addition, the surface of the lower plate center decoration 312b may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). may be applied (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface of the plate center lower decorative body 312b may be subjected to a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). .

The dish center lower inner lens 315 is formed transparent. The surface of the inner lens 315 under the center of the dish is provided with a lens cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 arranged is difficult to be clearly recognized from the player side. In addition, the back surface and the front surface of the lower dish center inner lens 315 may be subjected to a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and instead of the surface of the lower dish center inner lens 315, the rear surface may be provided with a lens cut. may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The production operation section cover unit 310 does not have reinforcing ribs in the middle of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semicircular shape. When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower dish center decoration substrate 316 are caused to emit light, the whole of each can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and it is possible to make it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加In addition, in the production operation section cover unit 310, the upper plate center decoration 312a is continuous with the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is connected with the lower left plate decoration 281 and the right plate decoration. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operating section base 320 of the effect operating unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation part base 320 is inserted into the effect operation part cover unit 310 from above, and the lower end is attached to the effect operation part cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open top, and is translucent (for example, milky white).

The operation unit base 320 includes a body portion 321 that is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and has an open top, and a body portion 321 that extends outward from the upper end of the body portion 321 and has a circular outer periphery. a plurality of (here, four) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321; and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward to support the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a rotatable manner.

The operation part base 320 is formed such that the main body part 321 is sized to accommodate the production operation button unit 360 therein. The main body part 321 has a bottom wall to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from below, and a portion of the bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be flat. The bottom wall of the main body part 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibrations from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibrations can be amplified, and the vibrations can be converted into sounds such as voice and music and output. can.

A leg portion 361 b of a button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 . Further, the body portion 321 has a through-hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the body portion 321 . The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the body part 321, and the operating part relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially coincides with the inner circumference of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . An effect operation ring decoration board 352 and a decoration board cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation section cover unit 310 .

The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the transmission gear for the operation ring so as to be rotatable about an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the driving side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is positioned at the flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation part base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the flange part 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the upper plate center decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . In addition, in the state where the effect operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5e-3. Production control ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56 and the like. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from above, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has a transparent rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation part 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the effect operation ring 330 has an outer diameter of approximately 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushings 333 are attached to the ring mounting base 331 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring mounting base 332, and are mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to prevent upward movement of the rotation base 332. and a regulating ring retaining member 334 . The ring mounting base 331, rotation base 332, bushing 333, and ring retaining member 334 are each formed transparent.

In addition, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side of the ring outer cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operation part 302 and form a part of the rotation operation part 302. and a ring inner cover 337 that is in the ring. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a transparent annular shape.

The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 and an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the flange portion 322 . The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 and a boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 projecting upward from a plurality of (here, four) portions, and a space in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. and through-holes 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites. A plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 .

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 . The rotation base 332 has a ring gear 332a projecting downward from the bottom surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332 . The ring gear 332 a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 , and faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331 when assembled to the effect operation ring 330 . The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring in a state assembled with the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on an outer upper surface portion 335a in which an arc forming the outer and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer upper surface portions 335a are arranged in the circumferential direction. and a plurality of outer cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending toward the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. there is An outer upper surface portion 335a of the upper outer ring cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The upper outer cover mounting portion 335 c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the upper outer surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 .

The ring outer and lower cover 336 has an outer and lower surface portion 336a in which an arc forming the outer and lower portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer and lower surface portions 336a that protrude upward and toward the center from the inner side of the outer and lower surface portion 336a. and an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b arranged. A lower outer surface portion 336a of the outer lower ring cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The lower outer cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the upper outer cover 335 of the ring.

The ring inner cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming the inside and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis. and a plurality of inner cover mounting portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. An inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The cylinder surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter equal to the inner diameter of the rotation base 332 . The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332. As shown in FIG.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. - 特許庁

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57(a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the performance operation unit, and FIG. 57(b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 . The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 .

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft protrudes leftward. , a drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of an operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. 345, and a gear cover that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. 346 and .

The rotation drive unit 340 also includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 that are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. and a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The driving gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates together with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. there is A second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with a gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 .

The transmission detection gear member 345 includes a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a left side surface of the gear portion 345a. and a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345 b are detected by a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345 . The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction by an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It's like As a result, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation portion 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345 .

When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the driving side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. engage with. In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 is entirely located inside the effect operation section cover unit 310 in a state where it is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

The rotation drive unit 340 is driven by an operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily rotate the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via a drive gear 343, a transmission gear 344, a transmission detection gear member 345, and an operation ring transmission gear. can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby reciprocatingly rotating and vibrating the rotary operation section 302. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, it is possible to change the contents of the player participation type presentation according to the direction of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 .

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotational direction of the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation of the rotation operation section 302, it is possible to apply a load to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these elements, it is possible to provide the rotary operation unit 302 with an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player-participation type presentation or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Operation ring transmission gear]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation portion base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes a bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the ring side gear portion 350a that rotates integrally with the ring side gear portion 350a to detect the transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur-gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the driving-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a narrows in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation portion base 320 so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 . The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by inserting it from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 and then attaching the gear mounting member 351 to the operation portion base 320 . be done.

When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged with the ring gear 332a. It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340 . Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can light-embellish the effect operation ring 330 (rotational operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is formed in a shape in which a ring is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decoration board 352a on the front side and a rear decoration board 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery of each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surfaces (mounting surfaces)"). A plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is positioned below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300 . The upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 is covered with a transparent decoration board cover 353 . The decoration board cover 353 is formed in a form divided into the front and rear sides, similarly to the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and covers the front decoration board 352a from above and is attached to the flange part 322 of the operation part base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 to cover the rear decoration substrate 352b from above.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, so that the decoration board cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331 are transparent. or through the through hole 331c of the decorative substrate cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331, the transparent ring outer upper cover 335, the transparent ring outer lower cover 336, and the transparent ring inner The cover 337 can be decorated with light from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to present the player with a light-emitting decoration such that an LED is provided in the rotary operation unit 302 .

[3-5e-7. vibration speaker]
Vibration speaker 354 in production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds such as voice and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Also, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation section base 320 . The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies compared to a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present more diverse effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit, viewed from below. FIG. 62(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a transparent pressing operation part 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a transparent cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a and a transparent cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation portion 303a. , consists of

The performance operation button unit 360 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the button unit base 361 attached inside the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other. Upper base 363 , and between upper base 363 and button unit base 361 , are attached so as to be vertically movable by means of a pair of guide shafts 362 . and a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and biasing the lifting base 364 upward.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a cylindrical shape, the upper end of which is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. An operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to protrude upward, a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 are engaged with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevation cam drive gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably mounted through the central shaft 366. 370, an elevation cam member 371, which is connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end and rotatably mounted through a central shaft 366, and rotates to raise and lower the elevation base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevation cam driving gear member 370 from above.

Furthermore, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom extending vertically with an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base, and is mounted above the elevation base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button body 373 and the lift base 364 and biasing the central button body 373 upward; A transparent center button cover 375 which is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom closed at the upper end and which has approximately the same diameter and which is attached to the upper end of the center button main body 373 so as to cover the top of the upper base 363 , and the upper base 363 . and a central button decoration substrate 376 mounted on the top surface and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon capable of emitting light upward. In the effect operation button unit 360, a central button main body 373 and a central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the center button main body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364. A transparent outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration substrate 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373 , and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 covering the outer periphery of the central button body 373 . A transparent cylindrical outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379 with three-dimensional decoration, which is arranged above the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side of the part, and covers the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379. and a transparent peripheral button cover 380 attached to the lift base 364 and having a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 includes a pressing detection sensor 381 attached to the button unit base 361 for detecting pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303, and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 attached to the button unit base 361. and an elevation detection sensor 382 that detects elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. A base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 . The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam driving gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to its upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 attached to its lower surface. is attached. The button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b.

A pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center. A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. A pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366 .

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and have their lower ends in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and their upper ends in contact with the elevating base 364 . The lifting spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374 .

The elevating base 364 is formed to have substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, a central hole 364b having a size through which the elevating cam member 371 can pass, and a central hole 364b that penetrates vertically. A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. there is The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The lifting base 364 is restricted from moving upward by contacting the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c with the upper base 363, and a space is provided between the upper base 363 and the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 to move. forming. Also, the elevation base 364 is vertically moved by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. and an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the top and is notched at two locations facing each other and is detected by the elevation detection sensor 382. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364. As shown in FIG.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis; a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (see Figure 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the distance between the adjacent cam portions 371a is smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364.

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The elevation cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. is formed as By rotating the elevation cam member 371, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 can be guided by the cam portion 371a so that the elevation base 364 can be elevated.

The central button main body 373 has a vertically extending cylindrical cylindrical portion 373a, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylindrical portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. 362 is slidably inserted into a pair of guide holes 373c, a central opening 373d passing through the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressing detection piece 373 e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 , and a pair of guide bosses 373 f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373 b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 .

The center button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the lift base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. As shown in FIG. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373 .

The center button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that their lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and screws through which washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. A washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevation base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is activated when the bottom 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 contacts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 to protrude downward. This center button main body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs with a weaker biasing force than the lifting spring 365 .

The center button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having approximately the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and formed transparent. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. The central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 at the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b.

The central button decoration board 376 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”), which are surface-mounted full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. ing. The center button decoration board 376 can light-embellish the center button cover 375 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”), which are surface-mounted full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. ing. The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can light-embellish the peripheral decoration inner lens 379 and the peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 includes an annular substrate portion 378 a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and is attached to the lift base 364 , and a cylindrical substrate portion 378 a that extends upward from the inner periphery of the substrate portion 378 a to cover the center button main body 373 . and a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The peripheral substrate cover 378 is transparent.

The outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379 has twisted portions extending upward so as to move in the circumferential direction and arranged in rows at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The peripheral decorative inner lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a of the peripheral substrate cover 378 . The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. . The peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the lifting base 364 at the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

In the state where the effect operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. It is inserted into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevation cam member 371 from below. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Also, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, when assembled into the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 , and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 . also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63, etc.).

In this state (state shown in FIG. 62(a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pushed downward to move downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 is pushed downward. is detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is substantially level with the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65(c)).

In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. Neither is detected by the detection sensor 381 . That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 counterclockwise in plan view, the elevation cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the elevation drive gear 368 . The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevation cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the engaging portion 371c, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the biasing force of the lift spring 365. Together with this, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the elevated position, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the state of the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 abuts the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevation base 364 is restricted. In addition, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (the central depressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral depressing operation portion 303b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 .

When the effect operation unit 300 is assembled into the effect operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65(b), etc.). reference).

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a ) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 are pressed against the button spring 374 . It moves downward against the force, and the center button main body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 . When the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protrudes downward from the lift base 364. , the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button main body 373 abuts on the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the lifting base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the lifting base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the lifting base 364, the peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364 and the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 is detected. is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the central button cover 375 (the central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force greater than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the lifting base 364 moves through the outer peripheral button cover 380 to the lifting spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365 , and the lower end of the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 . In this state, the lift base 364 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in the lowered position. The pressure detecting piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lifting base 364, and the pressure detecting piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381.

In order to return the central button cover 375 and the peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation portion 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. 62(b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364, moves rightward (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the guide pin 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the elevation cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevation base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves toward the first cam. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the concave locking portion 371c by the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the state of the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 320 . The operating section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operating section base 320 and an operating section relay board 392 attached inside the board box 391 .

The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. The operation part relay board 392 includes the plate center upper decoration board 314, the plate center lower decoration board 316, the operation ring drive motor 342, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevation drive motor 367, center button decoration board 376, peripheral button decoration board 377, press detection sensor 381, elevation detection sensor 382, and plate unit relay board 214 of plate base unit 210 are relayed. there is

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the action of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing portion of the pressing operation portion. It is a front view of a plate unit when an operation part is pressed.

The performance operation unit 300 has a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player on its upper surface. The effect operating section 301 is composed of a large annular rotating operating section 302 and a pressing operating section 303 arranged in the ring of the rotating operating section 302 . The press operation portion 303 includes a cylindrical central press operation portion 303 a positioned at the center of the rotary operation portion 302 and an annular outer peripheral press operation portion disposed between the central press operation portion 303 a and the rotary operation portion 302 . 303b.

The rotation operation part 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335 , a ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330 . The central pressing operation portion 303 a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360 , and the outer pressing operation portion 303 b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the imaginary plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotary operation part 302 (the effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 arranged in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so that it moves backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). .

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 . Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 clockwise in a left side view, the effect operation ring 330 rotates through the operation ring transmission gear 350 . , rotates clockwise in plan view. On the other hand, when the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 counterclockwise in left side view, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. .

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotary operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation portion 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 rotates clockwise in left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and rotates. When the operating portion 302 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in left side view. This transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. FIG. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart in the circumferential direction, is greater than the space between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in rows at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , is an interval that is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, after the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected from the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

Since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected in this way, the content of the player participation type presentation can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 . Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring driving motor 342 rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. . Alternatively, the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the rotary operation portion 302 in the direction opposite to the direction of the rotary operation, thereby making the rotary operation heavy or giving a click feeling.

The rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation portion 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the drawing, the rotary operation unit 302 is attached with the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface exposed, so that it is formed in a shape that is easy for the player to grasp. .

As a result, the player can touch the rotary operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the player can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 in a way that is easy for the player to operate. is enhanced. Further, the rotary operation portion 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation portion 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. It should be noted that since the lower surface side of the rotary operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 below the effect operation ring 330, on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape. Thus, by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 to emit light, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, in the effect operation ring decoration board 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a line are successively arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 can be decorated with light. As a result, the player can be given the illusion that an LED (decoration board) is provided inside the rotary operation unit 302 that rotates.

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 has a pressing operation part 303 arranged in a ring of the rotary operation part 302, and the upper surface of the rotary operation part 302 is larger than the upper surface of the rotary operation part 302, as shown in FIG. 65(a). It is in a state of a lowered position projecting slightly upward. In this state, the rotary operation section 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation section 303a of the pressing operation section 303 can be pressed. When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward, the upper surface of the central push operation portion 303a (center button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer circumference push operation portion 303b (perimeter button cover 380), and the push is detected. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381 .

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing is detected. The pressure is never detected by the sensor 381 .

In a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the lifting base 364 to reach the raised position (see FIG. 65(b)). In this elevated position, the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 303 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 . In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward to a greater extent than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 .

When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward while the push operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the central push operation portion 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central push operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b are at approximately the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b face the rotation operating portion 302. It will be in a state of approximately the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the upper surface of the rotary operating portion 302 are approximately at the same height (see FIG. 65(a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation portion 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed to the downward movement end, regardless of whether the pressing operation portion 303 is in the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to encourage the player to press the central pressing operation portion 303a firmly, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , the player-participation type performance can be more enjoyable.

Note that the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation portion 303 may be used as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation portion 303 may hinder the rotation operation. Therefore, it is possible to change the operability of the rotary operation unit 302, thereby making it possible to enjoy a wider variety of operations.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. FIG. 66(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 66(b) is a back perspective view of the door frame left side unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decoration substrate 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the cage front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “surface (mounting surface)”) and a front side of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 are covered. A transparent left side inner lens 403 attached to a door frame left side base 401 and a transparent door frame left side decoration attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side inner lens 403. a body 404;

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are surface-mounted full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The door-frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can light-embellish the door-frame left-side decoration body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side inner lens 403 is formed transparent. The surface of the left side inner lens 403 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decoration board 402 is difficult to clearly see from the player side. It should be noted that the left side inner lens 403 may have a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron) along with the front surface of the left side inner lens 403, or may be formed into a polyhedron. A lens cut may be applied (it may be formed into a polyhedron). The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed transparent. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be lens-cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron). A lens cut may be applied (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be applied to the rear surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 (it may be formed into a polyhedron). can also be used).

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the left end of the upper left plate decoration 271 of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200 , and the upper end is the top door frame unit 450 door frame top decoration 453 . is formed so as to be continuous with the left lower end of the

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are approximately the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. FIG. 69(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 69(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200, and a side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. and a plurality of luminous side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and prevents a player playing with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult to see, and a player's personal space can be formed so as to protect the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A transparent side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of transparent side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and cylindrically extending forward and arranged vertically in rows, and a side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A side window interior decoration board 413 mounted on the front side of a door frame right side base 411, and a side window interior decoration member. 412, a transparent inner inner lens 414 inserted within each of the plurality of side window trims 410b.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to a transparent right side inner lens 415 that is arranged forward of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and to the door frame right side base 411 . A through-hole 416a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in a flat plate shape so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 of the cage door frame and the right side inner lens 415 and penetrating in the left-right direction to constitute the side window 410a is formed. The door frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415 are attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415. a door frame right side inner panel 417 extending in the direction and the front-rear direction in a flat plate shape and formed with a through hole 417a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes the side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side inner lens 415, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). A door frame right side decorative substrate 418 and a transparent door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right inner lens 415 so as to cover the front side of the right inner lens 415 are provided.

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (three in this case) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416 at the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b. The side window inner decorative member 412 is attached to the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from a lower position to an upper position with respect to the center in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed transparent. The surfaces of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 may be lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the side window interior decoration member 412 The front and back surfaces of the plurality of side window interior decorative portions 410b may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 of the side window interior decoration member 412 may be cut. The rear surface of the decorative portion 410b may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 is attached to a portion behind the connection base 412 a of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") of the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 is a surface mounting type and is capable of emitting multicolor full-color LEDs. LEDs are used. The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 has four LEDs arranged in a cross shape vertically and horizontally around the axial center of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear portion of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is

The internal inner lens 414 has an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decorative portion 410b into which it is inserted. The internal inner lens 414 divides the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four sections, ie, upper, lower, left, and right. The internal inner lens 414 is formed transparent. The surface of the internal inner lens 414 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the decoration board 413 is difficult to be clearly recognized from the player side. It should be noted that a lens cut may be applied to the back surface of the internal inner lens 414 as well as to the front surface (it may be formed into a polyhedron), and instead of the front surface of the internal inner lens 414, a lens cut may be applied to the back surface. may be applied (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The right side inner lens 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and has a wavy shape in the front-rear direction that moves forward and then backward from the top end to the bottom end. formed. The right side inner lens 415 is formed transparent. The surface of the right side inner lens 415 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decoration board 418 is difficult to be clearly recognized from the player's side. It should be noted that both the surface and the back surface of the right side inner lens 415 may be lens-cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and instead of the surface of the right side inner lens 415, the back surface may A lens cut may be applied (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and forward and backward. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending deformed elliptical shape, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side inner lens 415). The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending deformed oval shape, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window inner decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side inner lens 415). The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 are surface-mounted full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The door-frame right-side decorative substrate 418 can light-embellish the door-frame right-side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed transparent. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side inner lens 415 . As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be lens-cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron). A lens cut may be applied (it may be formed into a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be applied to the rear surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 (it may be formed into a polyhedron). can also be used).

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decorative body 276 of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453 .

The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the door frame 3 and decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration 419 is a columnar fluorescent lamp. It looks embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes forward most, and is formed like a screen. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be viewed through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (columnar) side window decoration part 410b extending back and forth in the side window 410a. , the side window inner decorative portion 410b can be decorated with light. By luminous decoration of the side window interior decoration part 410b, the inside of the side window 410a can be brightened, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that illuminates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island equipment) through the three side window interior decoration parts 410b in 410a. Therefore, a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. This pachinko machine 1 can be used to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window inner decorative portion 410b can block the line of sight of a player located nearby. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if he is being watched by other players, so that the other players can play without hesitation. .

Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are illuminated by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can dazzle the inside of the side window 410a, thereby changing the visibility through the side window 410a. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, the light is emitted in a belt-like and radial manner. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as a neighbor to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to being unable to concentrate on the game and feeling lost due to mistakes being induced, and making the player concentrate on the game to make the game more enjoyable. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72(a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and (c) is a top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the folded state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from above, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from below. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a translucent (for example, milky white) door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame top base 451. A translucent (for example, milky white) top upper cover 452 is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides of the top base 451 and the front upper portion, and the top upper cover 452 is attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452 . and a translucent (for example, milky white) door frame top bottom plate connecting the lower end of the door frame top decoration 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451 . 454 and . In this embodiment, the door frame top base 451, the top upper cover 452, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are translucent (for example, milky white). A top upper cover 452 is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides of the base 451 and the front upper part, and the lower end of the transparent door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451 are connected to the door frame top base 451 . Since the frame top bottom plate 454 is connected, the door frame top base 451 may be transparent instead of translucent (milky white, for example).

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decoration board 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top decoration board 455. a door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 in front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; a door frame top right decoration board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; I have it.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is arranged between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 (that is, arranged behind the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top center decoration). A transparent top center inner lens 458 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452 (located in front of the substrate 455) and disposed between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 (i.e. a transparent top left inner lens 459 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452; A top upper cover 452 arranged between the decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 (that is, arranged behind the door frame top decoration 453 and in front of the door frame top right decoration substrate 457). and a transparent top right inner lens 460 attached to the front surface of the lens.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a center speaker box 461 attached to the center of the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top center speakers 462 attached downward to the center speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. and a top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, and a translucent (for example, milky white ), a door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the door frame top base 451, and a top upper cover 452 attached to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top plate 468 having translucency (for example, having a milky white color).

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 451a extending in the left and right direction with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction. and a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side thereof is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right forward protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The forward projecting portion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top cover 452 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top upper cover 452 covers the outer sides of the left and right forward protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is shaped to connect the upper front ends of the left and right forward protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes forward most at the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. The top cover 452 also has an opening 452a on the upper surface thereof, which is largely cut forward from the rear end. This opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decoration 453 is transparent. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a semi-circular arc that protrudes forward, and the curvature decreases as it goes from both left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and it extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 . formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame top decoration 453 faces downward at both ends in the horizontal direction, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively. The surface of the door-frame top decoration 453 may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). may be applied (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the rear surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 may be subjected to a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). .

The door-frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door-frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door-frame top base 451, and bulges upward at the center in the left-right direction. , extending in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is spaced apart in the left-right direction. It has a pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the lateral outside of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speakers 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454 .

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") of the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 are of a surface mounting type and capable of emitting multicolor full-color LEDs. LEDs are used. The door frame top center decoration substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right. The door frame top left decorative board 456 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). LEDs are used. The door-frame top left decoration substrate 456 can light-embellish the left portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. The door frame top right decorative board 457 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). LEDs are used. This door-frame top right decoration substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 each extend in the horizontal direction and are transparent. The surfaces of the top central inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 are cut (polyhedron-shaped) to refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame top center decoration board 455 arranged behind the top center inner lens 458, the door frame top left decoration board arranged behind the top left inner lens 459 456 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 arranged behind the top right inner lens 460. This makes it difficult for the player to clearly see it. Note that the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 may have lens cuts (or may be formed into polyhedrons) on the front and back surfaces thereof, respectively. Instead of the front surfaces of the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460, the rear surfaces may be lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron).

The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. As shown in FIG. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker that outputs sounds such as speech and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right forward projections 451 b of the door frame top base 451 . The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter that outputs high-pitched sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sounds output from the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465 .

The door frame top relay board 467 includes the door frame top center decorative board 455 , the door frame top left decorative board 456 , the door frame top right decorative board 457 , the top center speaker 462 , the top side speaker 464 , and the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the door frame secondary relay board 105 .

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively, forming an integral decoration. there is In addition, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top central speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464 .

[Illumination with top side speakers]
Next, the structure of the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIGS. 72 to 74 will be briefly described. The top side speaker 464 has a vibrating portion such as a diaphragm and a center cap made of translucent resin (for example, polypropylene having a milky white color), and a magnetic circuit portion such as a magnet and a yoke. The vibrating portion and the magnetic circuit portion are held by the housing portion. A plurality of openings are formed in the housing portion in the circumferential direction. The through-hole of the magnetic circuit section formed in a cylindrical shape is covered with a center cap arranged in the front, but is open in the rear.

On the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464 is attached to a mounting portion (not shown), and on the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, a predetermined distance (in this embodiment, approximately 18 mm) The acoustic decoration substrate 469 is attached to the attachment portions formed on the four extended substrate attachment bending plates (not shown). In addition, a transparent plate (not shown) is attached together with the acoustic decoration substrate 469 to the attachment portions formed in the four substrate attachment bending plates (not illustrated) so as to cover the rear surface (rear surface) side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 . This transparent plate protects the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 from contacting other members and causing electrical troubles. In this manner, the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, and the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the transparent plate are attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, thereby assembling the speaker illumination unit. In other words, the speaker electric decoration unit is composed of the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and the transparent plate.

When the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 , the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464 . It is arranged so as to face the rear surface, and the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is arranged to cover the rear side of the magnetic circuit section of the top side speaker 464 .

A white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") is formed on the front (surface) and rear (rear) surfaces of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. ) forms a white resist layer. A plurality of LEDs (in this embodiment, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) 469a are mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 . A connector (not shown) is mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 . A plurality of LEDs 469 a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are designed to flow a constant current controlled by an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 . The LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 receives light emission data and a clock signal serially output from the peripheral control board 1510. Based on this, the sound decoration board 469 By controlling the constant current flowing to the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, the lighting, extinguishing, blinking, gradation lighting, etc. of the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 It realizes various light emission modes.

The peripheral control board 1510 detects an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball jams in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guide unit 570, and payout device 580, etc., detection of fraud, opening of the door frame 3, main body opening of the frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or trouble (malfunction related to the operation of various movable decorations (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorations (movable bodies), etc.). If not, it outputs light emission data for normal light emission mode to the LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 detects an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball clogging in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guide unit 570, and payout device 580, fraud detection, door frame detection, etc.). 3, opening of the main body frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunction (malfunction related to the operation of various movable decorations (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorations (movable bodies), etc. )) is occurring, light emission data in a notification mode different from the above-described normal mode is output to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal.

In addition, in the light emission mode of the production mode (normal time), various light emission modes are obtained by combining lighting, extinguishing, blinking, gradation lighting, etc., and the main control board 1310 sends a control signal to the function display unit 1400. output, variably display the pattern using a plurality of LEDs based on this control signal, the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a command corresponding to the variation pattern set when the pattern is variably displayed, Based on this command, the peripheral control board 1510 performs control to the lighting state of the lighting mode as predetermined lighting for lighting (normal time). On the other hand, in the notification mode (a mode different from the normal mode), a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red) is illuminated at maximum brightness. When the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 is detected based on the detection signal from the open switch, a door frame open command is transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control board receives this door frame open command. 1310 adds predetermined information (information for preparing a format for transmitting the command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) to the door frame open command that conveys the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and The peripheral control board 1510 that has received such a command by transmitting it to the control board 1510 controls to a predetermined notification mode (a mode different from the normal mode).

On the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, although not shown, the part numbers of the surface-side electronic components and the surface-side electronic components are arranged in the vicinity of the surface-side electronic components such as the plurality of mounted LEDs 769a. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as areas indicating positions (including shape of surface-side electronic components, size of surface-side electronic components, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of surface-side electronic components, model of surface-side electronic components) ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less conspicuous than white. On the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, although not shown, an area indicating the part number of the rear surface electronic component and the position at which the rear surface electronic component is arranged is displayed near the rear surface electronic component such as a connector. Attributes of back side electronic components (may also include back side electronic component shape, back side electronic component size, back side electronic component mounting orientation (mounting direction), back side electronic component model) The reverse side writing portion shown is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint that is a bright color that is less noticeable than white.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. While the written part (the red written part on the back side of the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the structure of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow color is inconspicuous, and the surface When the side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous against the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light-emitting effects by means of electric decorations by light-emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is , as described above, it is a full-color LED that can emit light in multiple colors, and its light emission mode changes in various ways by turning on (lighting) and turning off. For this reason, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is coated with a white resist liquid over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered, thereby forming a white coating film. (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”.) A white resist layer is formed, and a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is formed on the solid white resist. The surface-side marking part that enables identification is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that the yellow surface-side marking part is inconspicuous against the white resist when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off. Furthermore, when a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is lit (at the time of light emission), a solid white resist with high reflectance and a yellow paint whose reflectance is very close to white The combination of the surface-side inscription printed by silk printing in (1) and (2) makes it possible to maintain a high reflectance on the front surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 .

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

In a state in which the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. Since it is arranged to cover the rear side, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, it passes through the through hole of the magnetic circuit section formed in the cylindrical shape of the top side speaker 464 and passes through. Light is emitted from the center cap having light properties, and passes through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing, and light is emitted from the diaphragm having light transmission properties. It is designed so that it can be decorated. As described above, the top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. As well as being able to visually recognize, the illumination of the top side speaker 464 can be visually recognized.

Furthermore, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, it is reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke that constitutes the magnetic circuit section formed in a cylindrical shape). The back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are repeatedly reversed, and emitted rearward from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, that is, behind the top side speaker 464. In other words, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a portion around the acoustic decoration substrate 469. FIG. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 through a transparent plate (not shown) covering the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, which is the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right forward projections 451b of the door frame top base 451, as described above. On the door frame top base 451, the outer circumference of the acoustic decoration board 469 is larger than the outer circumference of the acoustic decoration board 469 so that the acoustic decoration board 469 attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 at the position corresponding to the position where the left and right speaker brackets 463 are attached is exposed. Through holes 451ba having a shape and penetrating back and forth are formed respectively. When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the LEDs 469a emit light rearward from the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 (in other words, the acoustic decoration When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the substrate 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469). A plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a part around the acoustic decoration substrate 469 through a transparent plate (not shown) covering the rear surface (rear surface), and to the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the door frame top base 451. The light is emitted to the rear of the door frame top base 451 through the gap formed by the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba.

The door frame top base 451 is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, as described above. In the door frame base 101, through holes 101k having a shape larger than or the same shape as the perimeter of the through holes 451ba formed at the left and right through holes 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451 and penetrating back and forth. are formed respectively. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the LEDs 469a emit light rearward from the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, that is, from the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 (in other words, When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a part around the acoustic decoration board 469 (the acoustic decoration on the back side of the acoustic decoration board 469). A plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a part around the acoustic decoration substrate 469 through a transparent plate (not shown) covering the rear surface (rear surface) of the substrate 469), the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and the door frame top base. The light exits to the rear of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 through the gap formed by the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba formed in 451 and through the through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101.

When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the left and right through holes 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. Light from a plurality of mounted LEDs 469a is emitted from the upper left region of the front component 1000, which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4, and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. They are reflected to the upper right area. In this embodiment, the front component member 1000 is made of transparent resin, but it may be made of black resin. Hereinafter, when the door frame 3 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the opening/closing axis side between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 will be referred to as "the pivot side of the door frame 3" or "the pivot side of the main body frame 4". , and the side opposite to the opening/closing shaft side may be described as "the open side of the door frame 3" or "the open side of the main body frame 4".

[Upper left region of front component]
On the front (surface) of the upper left region of the front component 1000, there is a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status (in this embodiment, black is used except for each transparent region for confirming the lighting state of a plurality of LEDs). ) is provided, a reflective sheet 1000a, which is a white printed portion having a high reflectance or a color close to white, is attached except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is arranged.

The area of the front surface (surface) of the upper left area of the front component member 1000 to which the reflection sheet 1000a is attached is an area outside the game area 5a formed on the game board 5. 1400 is covered with the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is arranged. Visibility becomes difficult. In other words, since the presence of the reflection sheet 1000a, which has no relation to the contents of the game presentation, can be hidden, it does not become an eyesore of the game.

In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the reflection sheet 1000a is arranged in the upper left area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to the left acoustic decoration board 469, and the pachinko machine is used for pachinko. When the machine 1 is viewed from the front, the front surface of the left acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 on the pivot side of the door frame 3 (the pivot side of the main body frame 4). Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the (surface) is provided on the game board 5 side provided separately from the left acoustic decoration board 469 (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side). Reflected by the reflective sheet 1000a, the light is emitted forward, and passes through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101, the outer periphery of the left acoustic decoration board 469, and the left through hole formed in the door frame top base 451. The light from the translucent diaphragm of the left top side speaker 464 passes through the gap between the inner circumference of the hole 451ba and the plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing of the left top side speaker 464. , the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side can be efficiently used as a game effect or notification mode. Note that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of mounting holes mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 are mounted. The light from the LED 469a is reflected by the reflection sheet 1000a provided on the game board 5 side provided separately from the left acoustic decoration board 469 (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side), Since the light is emitted forward, the light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is emitted into the game area 5a. It is not emitted toward the direction of the game board 5, nor is it emitted to the rear of the game board 5.例文帳に追加That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the plurality of acoustic decoration substrates 469 mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 are mounted. Light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.例文帳に追加

In this way, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 (the door frame 3 is in a closed state), the reflection sheet 1000a is arranged on the left acoustic decoration board 469 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. It is provided on the front surface of the upper left area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to , and can reflect the light emitted by the left acoustic decoration board 469 toward the front of the reflective sheet 1000a. Therefore, the light (leakage) that leaks backward from the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side can be reflected forward on the reflection sheet 1000a and emitted forward from the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side. It can function as a reflective member that can be used. As a result, it is possible to suppress the leakage of light from the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side from proceeding toward the rear of the game board 5 . Therefore, light directed toward the rear of the game board 5 can be suppressed.

On the reflection sheet 1000a, although not shown, is a QR code (registered trademark) that stores a number (control number) that specifies the model of the game board 5 and attribute information of the game board 5 such as the manufacturing date of the game board 5. , and are printed in predetermined positions with black paint, which is a dark color. The pachinko machine 1 is identified by a QR code (registered trademark) that stores attribute information of the game board 5 such as a reflection sheet 1000a, a number (management number) for specifying the model of the game board 5, and the manufacturing date of the game board 5. A specific information display section for displaying information (that is, a number specifying the model of the game board 5 and a QR code (registered trademark) storing attribute information of the game board 5 such as the manufacturing date of the game board 5) is configured. ing. Since the front structural member 1000 is made of transparent resin when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 (when the front structural member 1000 is made of black resin, the background is black), Since the white reflective sheet 1000a is conspicuous, it is possible to naturally direct the line of sight of a game hall clerk or other attendant to the reflective sheet 1000a.

Further, the area of the front surface (surface) of the upper left area of the front component member 1000 to which the reflective sheet 1000a is attached is, as described above, an area outside the game area 5a formed on the game board 5, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is arranged, and the reflection sheet 1000a is covered with the door frame base unit 100. Since it is difficult to see through the door window 101 a of the frame 3 , the control number and the QR code (registered trademark) printed on the reflection sheet 1000 a are difficult to see through the door window 101 a of the door frame 3 .

Furthermore, since the reflection sheet 1000a is white, the dark black color stands out when the background is white, making it easy to visually recognize the control number and the QR code (registered trademark). In addition, when the QR code (registered trademark) is read by a code reading device that is separate from the pachinko machine 1 and is possessed by an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall, the reflection sheet 1000a is white, so that the background is displayed. becomes white, making it easier to read a QR code having a black color, which is a dark color. In other words, the white color of the reflective sheet 1000a can improve readability of the QR code (registered trademark). The surface area of the reflective sheet 1000a is larger than the area of the front surface (front surface) or the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the left side. Also, in place of the QR code (registered trademark), a one-dimensional bar code, letters, numbers, graphics, symbols, etc., or a combination of letters, numbers, graphics, symbols, etc. may be used.

Although not shown, a plurality of pseudo nails are arranged on the front surface (surface) of the upper left region of the front component 1000 . Through holes are formed in the reflection sheet 1000a in portions corresponding to areas where gold-colored false nails are arranged. On the front surface (surface) of the game area 5a of the game board 5, as described above, a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted. Since the false nail is also made of gold-colored metal, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4, it can be used as a reflecting member in the same manner as the reflecting sheet 1000a.

[Upper right region of front component]
On the open side of the body frame 3 and on the front (surface) side of the upper right region and the lower right region of the front structural member 1000, a metal plate for maintaining the mounting state of the game board 5 and the body frame 4 is provided. A manufacturing stopper FT (see FIG. 10) is provided respectively. That is, on the opening side of the door frame 3, the metal fasteners FT are arranged on the front (surface) sides of the upper right region and the lower right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, respectively. In particular, the front side of the upper right region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 is located at a position corresponding to the sound decoration board 469 on the right side, and the metal fastener FT is arranged. The metal fastener FT is designed such that its end is inserted into a board fastener insertion hole (not shown) formed in the body frame 4 and engaged.

In addition, the door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 is made of metal, and as described above, is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101. Rigidity is imparted to the door frame base unit 100, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 are connected to the vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 which are spaced apart in the left and right direction. an upper reinforcing frame 113 extending to the left and right, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having the left end side attached to a position near the upper side from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112; A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right end of 114 and the right reinforcing frame 112, and a plurality of door frame hooks of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4, which are vertically spaced apart from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. and a hooking member 116 to which 652 is hooked. That is, the right reinforcing frame 112 made of metal is arranged on the rear side of the door frame 3 and on the opening side of the door frame 3 .

Thus, in this embodiment, on the open side of the body frame 4, the metal fasteners FT are provided on the front (surface) side of the upper right region and the lower right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, respectively. A right reinforcing frame 112 made of metal is arranged on the rear surface side of the door frame 3 on the open side of the door frame 3 . The metal fastener FT and the metal right reinforcing frame 112 are both made of metal and have luster. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface ( The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the surface) is emitted by the metal fastener FT arranged on the front side of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the metal right reinforcing frame 112. can be reflected. Further, even when the door frame 3 is slightly opened with respect to the body frame 4, it is possible to make it easier to visually recognize the light emitted from the rear side of the door frame 3. - 特許庁Note that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of acoustic decoration substrates mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 are mounted. The light from the LED 469a of the game board 5 is reflected by the metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the metal right reinforcing frame 112, but the door frame base The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the right through hole 101k formed in 101 is not emitted toward the game area 5a, and the light from the game board 5 does not radiate to That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the plurality of acoustic decoration substrates 469 mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 are mounted. Light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.例文帳に追加

Since the front component 1000 is made of transparent resin, the front component 1000 may be made of black resin instead. Even with this configuration, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the right acoustic decoration passing through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 is opened. The light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the board 469 is directed to the metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the metal right reinforcement Since the light can be reflected by the frame 112, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 can be emitted. It is neither emitted toward the game area 5a nor emitted behind the game board 5. - 特許庁That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the plurality of acoustic decoration substrates 469 mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 are mounted. Light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.例文帳に追加

In addition, a white reflective sheet obtained by appropriately modifying the shape of the white reflective sheet 1000a described above is pasted on the upper right area of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 and in the peripheral area where the metal fastener FT is arranged. can be configured to In this way, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the right acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 can be seen. Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the (surface), a metal fastener FT arranged on the front side of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, a metal right reinforcing frame 112, Since it can be reflected by the white reflective sheet, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 The light is neither emitted toward the game area 5a nor emitted behind the game board 5.例文帳に追加That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the plurality of acoustic decoration substrates 469 mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 are mounted. Light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.例文帳に追加

By the way, when opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall inserts a proper key into the cylinder lock 130 and rotates the cylinder lock 130, for example. A decorative member such as the transparent door frame right side decorative body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410 is grasped by hand, and the door frame 3 is opened from the closed state with respect to the main body frame 4. Since the decorative member is continuously pulled, the more the work of opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the more the load is repeatedly applied to the connecting portion between the decorative member and the door frame 3, which may damage the door frame. There is

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 on the right side on the open side of the door frame 3 is emitted as described above. In addition, since the LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, the LEDs 469a are mounted on the door frame 101k. 3 can emit light toward the rear. On the open side of the door frame 3, a metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear side of the door frame 3, and on the open side of the main body frame 4, the front surface of the upper right area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5. A metal fastener FT is arranged on the (surface) side, and both are metal members. Through the gap formed between the open side of the door frame 3 and the open side of the main body frame 4, the light reflected by the right reinforcing frame 112 made of metal and the metal reflectors such as the metal fasteners FT leaks out, can be made to emit light. As a result, when an employee such as a clerk of a game hall performs an operation to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, for example, the transparent door frame right side unit 410 provided in the door frame 3 can be opened. When the decorative member such as the side decorative body 419 is grasped by hand and the decorative member is pulled to such an extent that the appearance of light emission in the gap can be visually observed, the pulling of the decorative member is stopped, and the finger is inserted into the gap to open the door frame. 3 can be opened. Since the time for gripping and pulling the decorative member can be shortened, the time during which the joint between the decorative member (door frame right side unit 410) and the door frame 3 is subjected to load can also be shortened. Therefore, damage to the door frame 3 can be suppressed.

[When opening the door frame]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, while a player is playing a game, when a game ball shot toward the game area 5a of the game board 5 is flowing down, it accidentally hits an obstacle nail together with other game balls. It may become clogged. In this state, when the player launches the game balls one after another toward the game area 5a, the game balls are piled up on the clogged game balls, and the game balls are gathered like grapes. In order to eliminate the state in which the game balls are gathered like grapes, the player calls an attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall to remove the game balls that are gathered like grapes. An attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall called by the player opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, each decoration board provided on the game board 5 is displayed. In addition to performing control to turn off all the mounted LEDs, each movable body provided on the game board 5 is controlled to maintain the position at the time of opening regardless of whether it is operating or not. Control of the game board at the time". Along with such control of the game board at the time of opening, or instead of this, a specific LED among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board provided in the door frame 3 (for example, the front surface (surface) of the sound decoration board 469 When the door frame 3 is equipped with a movable body, the movable body is maintained at the position at the time of opening regardless of whether it is operating or not. Perform "control of the door frame when opening", which is to control so as to

When opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, when controlling the door frame at the time of opening, a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 are all extinguished, and / or Among the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, specific LEDs (for example, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469) light up in a notification mode for notifying that the door is open. be in a state to When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, it passes through the through hole of the magnetic circuit section formed in the cylindrical shape of the top side speaker 464 as described above, and the translucency is obtained. Light is emitted from the center cap provided, and light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing. Furthermore, the light is reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke that constitutes the magnetic circuit section formed in a cylindrical shape), and repeatedly moves between the back surface of the top side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 . On the other hand, since it is emitted backward from the rear of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (in other words, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emit light. Then, light leaks from the plurality of LEDs 469a from at least a portion around the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (through a transparent plate (not shown) covering the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, which is the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. ) Because light leaks from the plurality of LEDs 469a from at least a portion around the acoustic decoration substrate 469)), the gap between the outer circumference of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, and the door The light exits rearward of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 through a through hole 101 k formed in the frame base 101 .

That is, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3 and can emit light toward the rear of the door frame 3. 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 (that is, when the door frame 3 is opened), the sound decoration board 469 is positioned from the direction facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3. It is possible to visually recognize the notification mode by a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface). In other words, the fact that the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light in the notification mode can be visually recognized not only from the front of the door frame 3 but also from the rear of the door frame 3. A plurality of LEDs 469a are arranged to leak light from at least a part around the acoustic decoration substrate 469 . As a result, in the game hall, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is displayed to the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall passing through the aisle side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side facing the rear side of the door frame 3. It is possible to convey the notification mode by a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened, the notification mode can be visually recognized from the front side and the rear side of the door frame 3 . In addition, in the game hall, from both the aisle side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side facing the rear side of the door frame 3, an abnormality or malfunction occurs in a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall (pachinko) Abnormalities in machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball clogging in ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guide unit 570, dispensing device 580, etc., detection of fraud, opening of door frame 3, opening of body frame 4, wiring Disconnection, etc.) or defects (malfunctions related to the operation of various movable decorations (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorations (movable bodies), etc.))) The work efficiency of the hall can be improved.

By the way, if the speaker diaphragm is torn with an unauthorized tool, the sound will not flow. Although the sound changes just by opening it, the sound flows. Therefore, if you make a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an illegal tool and remove the wiring that is connected to the connection terminal of the speaker, or break the wire so that the sound does not flow from the speaker, you will not be able to hear the sound from the speaker. Even if the game machine can detect the act of illegally acquiring a game ball by performing When a person who commits such fraudulent acts leaves the gaming machine, the gaming machine enters a player waiting state and performs a silent demonstration (a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame and the game board are illuminated for player waiting). The player waiting image is displayed on the effect display device capable of displaying the effect image while emitting light.) is repeated. Then, in such a state of waiting for a player, a staff member such as a store clerk at amusement hall will open a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an illegal tool and disconnect the wire connected to the connection terminal of the speaker, or disconnect the wire. It becomes difficult to determine whether or not sound is flowing from the speaker.

Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is perforated with a wire, since the acoustic decoration board 469 is arranged behind the top side speaker 464, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 ), light is emitted from the translucent center cap through the through hole of the magnetic circuit section formed in the cylindrical shape of the top side speaker 464, and the housing section Light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the . Since the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 and the center cap are made of translucent resin (for example, milky white polypropylene, etc.), the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 passes through the hole in the diaphragm. The light emitted from the diaphragm and the center cap shine brightly like a spotlight compared to the light emitted from the diaphragm and the center cap. As described above, the top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Through the hole, the presence of the hole in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 can be discovered as a spotlight shining with high brightness. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to determination of whether or not sound is flowing from the top side speaker 464 .

In addition, when the vibration plate of the top side speaker 464 is perforated with a wire and a silent demonstration is performed, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are turned off (by chance). ), or a state in which a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are extinguished within a period from the end of the silent demonstration to the start of the silent demonstration again. Also, since the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on which the white coating film coated with the white resist liquid is formed is arranged behind the top side speaker 464, the background becomes white due to the white coating film, and the top side speaker Through the holes in the diaphragm of 464 and the countless through-holes formed in the top lower cover 465, the white color of the white paint film can be seen. The holes are easily visible. This makes it possible to discover whether or not the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 has been tampered with. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to determination of whether or not sound is flowing from the top side speaker 464 .

In addition, a silent demonstration is performed in which a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 emit light in a player waiting light emission mode, and the player waiting image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image. is performed, a plurality of LEDs emit light in the player waiting light emission mode, so even if the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is illegally punched with a wire, it is mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 Since the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 469a that are connected leaks through the holes in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464, part of the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 appears to emit light. Thereby, it can be discovered that the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 has a hole.

A translucent speaker net may be provided in front of the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 . By providing the speaker net, it is possible to prevent unauthorized entry into the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 with a wire, and it takes time to make a hole in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. , can contribute to the early detection of such fraud. In addition, since the speaker net is translucent, it does not easily interfere with the light emitted through the translucent diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 .

In the top side speaker 464, the vibrating parts such as the diaphragm and the center cap are made of translucent resin, such as milky white polypropylene. A color close to black), red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, yellow, etc. may be used.

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a front frame provided with a light emitting device (for example, JP-A-2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). The light emitting device performs effects that occur during the game, error notification, and the like. However, when the front frame is opened, the notification mode of the light emitting device can be visually recognized from the direction facing the front side of the front frame, but it is difficult to visually recognize the notification mode of the light emitting device from the direction facing the rear side of the front frame. There was a problem.

In addition, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine including a front frame configured to detachably hold a game board in the middle frame and cover the front side of the game board (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163). (Paragraph [0019], and FIG. 1)). By the way, when the front frame is to be opened, a staff member such as a store clerk in the amusement hall inserts a key into the cylinder lock and turns the cylinder lock, and then grasps and pulls the decorative member provided on the front frame by hand. As the number of opening operations increases, there is a risk that the front frame will be damaged due to repeated load applied to the connecting portion between the decorative member and the front frame.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine including a front frame provided with a light emitting device (for example, JP-A-2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). The light-emitting device emits light in a special manner different from normal when some kind of abnormality or malfunction occurs in the gaming machine, and can inform the outside of the occurrence of the abnormality or malfunction. However, it is difficult to say that it is sufficient to inform the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or malfunction in the same manner as in the prior art.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine having a front frame provided with a light emitting device (for example, JP-A-2018-079163 (paragraph [0019] and FIG. 1)). The light-emitting device emits light in a special manner different from usual when some kind of abnormality or malfunction occurs in the game machine, and can inform the outside of the occurrence of the abnormality or malfunction. However, as the amount of light directed toward the rear of the game board increases, the amount of light directed toward the front of the game machine decreases.

Also, conventionally, a game machine has been proposed in which specific information about the game machine is provided on the game board (for example, JP-A-2017-080279 (paragraph [0035] and FIG. 14)). As a result, it becomes possible to confirm from the outside whether the game board is legitimate or not, and it is possible to suppress unauthorized alterations to the game machine. However, in the same manner as in the prior art, the specific information is visible from the player's side, which may reduce the decorativeness and reduce the interest in the game.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine having a speaker in the front frame (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). A speaker provided in the gaming machine not only emits an effect sound generated during a game, but also an error notification sound and the like. By the way, if the diaphragm of the speaker is torn to pieces with an illegal tool, the sound will not flow, but it is easy to visually recognize that the diaphragm of the speaker is torn to pieces. Simply opening a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an illegal tool will change the sound, but the sound will flow. Therefore, if you make a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an illegal tool and remove the wiring that is connected to the connection terminal of the speaker, or break the wire so that the sound does not flow from the speaker, you will not be able to hear the sound from the speaker. Even if the game machine can detect the act of illegally acquiring a game ball by doing When a person who commits such an illegal act leaves the gaming machine, the gaming machine enters a player waiting state and performs a silent demonstration (the light emitting device emits light in a player waiting light emitting mode and the image display device emits light). The player waiting image is displayed.) is repeated. However, in such a state of waiting for a player, a staff member such as a store clerk at amusement halls may use an illegal tool to open a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker, disconnect the wire connected to the connection terminal of the speaker, or disconnect the wire. It was difficult to determine whether sound was flowing from the speaker or not.

[3-9. door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire periphery of the door window 101a.

A plate upper left decorative body 271, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate central upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, a plate upper left decoration body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a plate upper right decoration body 276, a plate center upper decoration body 312a, a door frame left side decoration body 404, a door frame right side decoration body 419, and Behind the door frame top decoration 453 are a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and a door frame top center decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately lighting the LEDs of these decoration substrates, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated, A player can be shown or given a light emitting effect such that light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, on the upper surface, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation part 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation part 302. A pressing operation portion 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing portion 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotating operation portion 302 is provided below the rotating operating portion 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or half-tube) large-diameter plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b are mounted vertically apart from each other. A door-frame left-side decoration 404 of the door-frame left-side unit 400 and a door-frame right-side decoration of the door-frame right-side unit 410 have similar shapes so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached outside the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b. Since the pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be made conspicuous.

In addition, the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower left plate decoration 281, the lower right plate decoration 286, and the lower center plate decoration 312b, which are arranged below the upper plate center decoration 312a, are placed in half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 increases upward from the lower end, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that is arranged on the upper side and can be operated by the player. The push operation part 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation part 302 and the push operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can.

Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, a doughnut-shaped rotary operation part 302 is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends forward as it goes upward. Since the state is tilted to be lowered, the top surfaces of the rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 face the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be fully visible, and the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear larger. In addition, as described above, since the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotary operation portion 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that the player can immediately rotate when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 allows the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration body 312a and the lower plate center decoration body 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation portion 302, the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b protrude farther forward than the upper plate 201. Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be made. can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. Fig. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a body frame top hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame top hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame top hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; Main body frame hinge assembly attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in front view, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid 520 is provided.

The main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and is positioned within the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for hitting a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base unit 500 in front view, and the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. a rear cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable; and a locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 and extending leftward in an upwardly open groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570, based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the board unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501 , a plurality of door frame hooks 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3 , and a unit base 651 projecting backward. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be engaged with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that vertically moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653, and the door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It has a lock spring 655 that biases the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
Main body frame base unit 500 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIGS. 84(a) to 84(c) are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 501 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503 . and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b. A placing portion 501c and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a in front view, and has a launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540, and a launcher attachment portion 501e. A cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted is inserted in the front-rear right side of the portion 501e in the front view, and a substrate unit in which the board unit is penetrated in the front-rear lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c. A circular speaker opening 501g that faces the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620, and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. It has a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate-like shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A rear extending portion 501j rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 around a longitudinally extending axis below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably attached about an axis that extends vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat plate-shaped guide body 502a extending left and right, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a projecting forward and extending rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of protruding strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a guide body 502a are penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that an attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, and one end is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the drive board unit 1700 on the side of the main body frame 4 (front unit 2000 according to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 described later). and a decorative board provided in the back unit 3000, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc., which will be described later), and the opposite end is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 .

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is connected to the body frame base 501 at the end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the hinge in the left-right direction. ) is mounted rotatably about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3 .

A connection cable that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the effect drive board 1720 described later of the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. 503 guides the interface board 635 and the side of the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side connected to an effect drive board 1720, which will be described later, to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502. With the binding band 504 in contact with the front surface of the main body 502a, the banding band 504 is inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position in the horizontal direction among the plurality of through holes 502d formed on both upper and lower end sides of the guide main body 502a. , are attached to the guide body 502a by being clamped together.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and in a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are installed. (see FIG. 84(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably, α/3≧β). (see FIG. 84(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). transition as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501 . By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. problems can be prevented.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the crease. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a guides the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) side of the lower door frame hinge pin 126 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the center axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and the door is positioned closer to the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a. The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open through the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and effects similar to those described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame upper hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. is rotatably mounted on the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the above.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear part of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511. and a main body frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame hinge assembly 50 . The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally. I have it.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to attach the main body frame 4 to the door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 , is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 , and is attached to the door frame 3 . door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate member upward into an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. , is equipped with The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 . can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded profile.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a rear side portion extending rightward from the front end thereof, which restricts the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a that opens to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into the groove portion 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 is in a meandering state in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be inserted from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also extends from the left side of the main body frame 4 through between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. The ball shooting device 540 is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and shoots the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 onto the game board attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for hitting into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3 .

The ball launching device 540 includes a flat plate-shaped launching base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through a firing base 541; A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544. In this state, when the handle 182 is rotated, the shooting solenoid 542 is driven with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 . Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the shooting rail 544 and hit into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the gap, the ball drops into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 . The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a front-rear width extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a; and a rear side of the top plate portion 551a. and a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a rear plate portion 551b extending from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width to the right. A back plate left portion 551e, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front portion of the lower side of the left side plate portion 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f are provided. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a shallow recessed portion that is open rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the left rear plate portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. The dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward, and a part that extends left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward.

In addition, the dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 mounted in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction, and a first rail cover 554 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stop member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 has a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570 a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. In addition, a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball straightening member 556, and a ball stop member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are provided to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end on the side of the first rail cover 554 is arranged around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B that are circulating in two stages, the rectification pieces 556a rectify the flow of the game balls B so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side. Even if the height is lowered, the balls will not be clogged.

The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in a front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the part extending in the left and right direction of the payout base 551 . The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 has a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501 . A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. FIG. 88(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pull out lever 593 is operated from the ball pull out passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit A game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which the game ball B flows, and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward, and the front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. A flat guide passage front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by a game ball B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit base 571. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeating folding between the widths of the unit base 571 in the horizontal direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571 .

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction in which the game ball B is circulated. It can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. is formed to This movable piece member 573 is in a state where the game ball B abuts on the part protruding into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B, retreats from the guide passage 570a, and does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B exists in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a that guides the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many games are played in the guide passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a back cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball ejection movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a; A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward are provided. ing.

Dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583. A spur-gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, and a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 , a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispenser main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and the second transmission gear 587 meshes with the second transmission gear 587. and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a rotating integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and protruding into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 is provided.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and includes a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear cover 582. A movable ball removal piece 592 attached to a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by a lid 582 so as to be able to open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. and a ball extracting lever 593 attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It is open downwards. The dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward by about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move leftward as it goes downward from the upstream end. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 . Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer circumference of the payout blade 589 is formed, and extends downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the delivery blade 589 in the rear view.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and right above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a.

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion where it is bent to the right, and extends vertically along the left side of the rear view to the lower end. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge. The body-side guide wall 581a protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b in a rear view. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a branch from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the dispensing device front lid 583. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 has three blade pieces 589a extending outward in the form of flat plates at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The wing piece 589a extends from above in the payout passage 580a toward the rotating shaft and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Further, it protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates clockwise in the rear view. Thus, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved downstream.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially attached to the payout device rear cover 582 and the payout device front cover 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotating shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removing movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extracting lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592, and the clockwise rotation of the ball extracting movable piece 592 in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (Fig. 90).

When the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, moves to the ball extraction movable piece 592. and flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of this contact. It is not caught between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 .

For this reason, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, so that pachinko It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball removal path 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the back cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable piece 592. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front side. and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper delivery ball receiving passage 600a, extends rightward in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view and opening downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper full discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the bottom surface, and an upper opening near the right end in the front view on the top surface and substantially perpendicular to the bottom. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e extending downward and opening downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper disbursed ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600 e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580 b in the dispensing device 580 . As a result, the game ball B released (discharged) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. is emitted downward from any of Also, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c. 611, a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening/closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full-tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 are attached in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-tank payout passage 610b. and a biasing closing spring 614 .

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage open/close door 613 is urged clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short circular arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 613a gradually increases toward the end in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are connected to the upper full ball passage. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b. , and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is open so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627, which opens leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 is such that the actuating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As shown in FIG. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are opened, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in the state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end, closing the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are supplied from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of the ball running out by the ball running out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b moves clockwise in the back view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a 589 is discharged downstream. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 are arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. , is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at .

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device. The game ball B paid out from 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving opening 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be received. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, when the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower tray The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( The player is notified that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are ejected from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball extraction lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the state of the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so that the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to break.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall island equipment side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 93(b) is a back perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, and a front view near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 facing forward. and a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of vertically extending slits penetrating in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction, obliquely downward and rearward. and an open connecting portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side facing forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low frequencies.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes rearward the most. is formed so that the protrusion of the As a result, a sufficient rear space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed stepwise so as to reduce the volume, a sufficiently wide space is ensured on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 .

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so that the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the body frame speaker 622 is positioned behind the speaker unit 620a. and the inner space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the panel front member 42, and the panel rear member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the front panel 42 can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42. - 特許庁

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body-frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since it communicates with the lower outer frame assembly 40 through the connecting tube portion 43a, the lower outer frame assembly 40 can be connected to the lower outer frame assembly 40 without particularly attenuating the low frequency range in the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound is output from the plate unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are produced. This allows the player to listen to sound with rich bass.

In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is provided with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through tube 623a extending in a cylindrical shape communicating with the through hole 621d and penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed. When the speaker unit 620a is assembled, the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. and a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a front view. A ball ejection guiding part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharged ball receiving part that opens upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guiding part 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging downward the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the discharged ball receiving portion 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball removal guide part 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving portion 628. - 特許庁

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view after guiding the ball ejection guide part 627 and the ejected ball receiving part 628. Since the ink is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the power supply board 630 (hereinafter referred to as a power supply unit 630 as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 for the sake of explanation). A transparent power supply board attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 on which electronic components are mounted. and a cover 631 . The surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 is covered with the transparent power supply board cover 631 so that the power supply board 630 is housed in the transparent power supply board cover 631 . The front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the power supply board 630 are coated with a green resist solution to form a green coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid green resist”). ), and a power switch 630a having an operation unit for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply substrate 630. As shown in FIG. On the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630, in addition to the power switch 630a, the attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as the part number of the surface-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is arranged (further, the surface The shape of the electronic parts on the front side, the size of the electronic parts on the front side, the mounting direction of the electronic parts on the front side (mounting direction), and the model number of the electronic parts on the front side. It is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist with a conspicuous white paint. The power switch 630 a is exposed from the transparent power board cover 631 . Since the power switch 630a is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of a transparent power board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board housed in the payout control board box 632. a substrate 633 (see FIG. 97); The payout control board 633 activates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like. It is for controlling and paying out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby enhancing deterrence against fraud.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a rear side of the interface substrate 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 .

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward to the rear of the body-frame speaker 622 . The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501 b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The rear cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically, and its left side attached to the dispensing base 551. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

[4-10. locking unit]
Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 98(b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lock units protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 protruding backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the direction of rotation. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. The frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward, thereby opening the main body frame relative to the outer frame 2 . 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. FIG. 99(a) is a plan view of the body frame, and FIG. 99(b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind. FIG. 101(a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails and the like, viewed from the front and above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the front and bottom. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101(a) exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by means of the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer circumference of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body that is attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base 501 in a front view on the rear side. A payout base 551, a sphere tank 552 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) that extends left and right and opens upward, and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opens upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 leftward in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the payout base 551, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 and for paying out game balls B to the player side, It has

The sphere tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a. It is The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b to the opposite side (right side wall 552e side) of the front wall 552b with a length of about 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction. It is formed over

The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 on the right end side (upstream side) when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552 . . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the direction of circulation of the game ball B. have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In a plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end parallel to the axis extending in the leftward and rightward direction from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the leftward and rightward directions, and then leftward. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move rearward as it goes, and extending from there to the left end in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction. . The main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 has a portion extending from the left end to the right in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the passage through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) at which only one can be circulated.

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main guide portion 553a is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guide portion 553a and that changes in width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. there is By means of this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Moreover, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end toward the main guide portion 553a downward. Thus, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is aligned in a row toward the downstream side and downward side.

The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is arranged on the inner side, and the bulging portion 553b is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight bulge at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved swelling portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the swelling portion 553b acts depends on the position of the contacting swelling portion 553b. Since the direction changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spheroids in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b is always subjected to reaction force in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game ball B inside is always pushed in a fixed direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and ball clogging (ball jam) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed are dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball jam) can be made difficult to occur.

The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball jam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the place where the ball is jammed can be specified quickly. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging of the balls can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be enhanced. A decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen through the tank rail 553 from the rear. When a problem occurs in the movement of the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the effects of

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552 and extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552 d of the ball tank 552 . In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is inclined so that the height is higher. and the overflow surface portion 501m extending rearward from the outer side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b in which the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. , and the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is inclined to be lower, and a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g that guides the

In addition, the body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the part of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge portion 551j. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. and a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the body frame base 501 . The overflow surface portion 501m is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. extended to The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the horizontal direction is about 1/3 of the length in the horizontal direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in a front view extends from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is positioned to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the horizontal direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap with a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and includes a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The upper end of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right outer sides, and extends in the front-rear direction in a strip shape. and a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. In addition, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right stepped portion 501o is longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. Further, the right stepped portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is raised. The gap between is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in the front view. The right end of the right stepped portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG. Note that the container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as the sphere tank 552 below. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h that is inclined so that the front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is lower. and a dam portion extending upward from the opposite side of the passage surface 552h to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 at the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side when viewed from the front. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes from the right end side. In addition, the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be horizontally inclined in the horizontal direction.

The detour passage 552g is arranged so that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is aligned with the front end side of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank-like shape and that extends obliquely in the left-right direction. extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552g changes its circulation direction from the slanted rear end so as to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, since the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g A game ball B from can be received. In addition, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a substantially vertical direction (perpendicular direction) to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552g Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released to the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball slugs in the tank rail 553 by discharging the fuel to a wide area.

In the tank rail 553, the part where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the front view left part of the rear wall 552c. A game ball B that passes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flows through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the detour passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The tank rail 553 can surely receive the game ball B guided backward by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not fall backward from the tank rail 553.例文帳に追加

The sphere tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d in the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side extending from the left end of the front wall 552b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to about 1/2 of the full length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the full length, it extends in parallel with the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the spherical tank 552, in plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. and has an opening 552k penetrating in the vertical direction. The ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l is equal to the upper edge of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501). upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end of the tank rail 553 (right end in front view) is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552 . In addition, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are positioned (protruded) behind the ball tank 552 . )doing. The rear end side of the left detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is positioned at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The discharge part 551j is arranged in the ball tank 552 so that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the height lower than the bypass passage 552g is lowered rearward in a stepwise manner to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, it extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). position in the vicinity), and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a arranged in the lateral direction on the rear surface thereof. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the gripping portion can be opened by operating a lever so that the tip of the electric wiring can be gripped. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551 . The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lowered as indicated by the white arrows in FIG. The left stepped portion 501n has a rear right corner, and the right stepped portion 501o has a rear left corner. Also, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, first, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery, is crossed. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jam) due to engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 .

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game balls B overflowing the overflow surface portion 501m from the ball tank 552 can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are clogged. can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m can be prevented from spilling outside (rear side) of the body frame 4. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled outside the body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and the body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer periphery of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, after overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m over the overflow portion 552f, the game ball B circulating from the overflow surface portion 501m to the detour passage 552g is on the left side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the side of the detour passage 552g presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball is released. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552 .

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is positioned from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) with respect to the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552g is prevented from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and getting caught due to the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being varied, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, thereby aligning in the horizontal direction. Since they are aligned, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, the game ball released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since they are changed so as to coincide with each other, a plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B circulates decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) By circulating a plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction to the downstream side through the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and a row is formed. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the capacity inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552 .

An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , the contact of the game ball B does not cause a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is placed in the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent upstream of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 104) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and clogging of the game ball B occurs in the ball tank 552. can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, these inclinations can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g, and the game ball B spills outside the body frame 4, causing a problem. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls are piled up on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) capable of stacking the game balls B upward can be secured. , the game ball B guided by the detour passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 to 115. FIG. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which front components, game panels, front units, etc. are made opaque. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 viewed from the front right, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 viewed from the front left, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the rear. . FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board with the front constituent members, the game panel, the front unit, etc. made transparent. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. FIG. 114 is a cross-sectional view taken along the CC line in FIG. 107. FIG. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate and the obstacle nails.

In the following, when the shape of the LED mounted on the decoration substrate is square when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decoration substrate, the LED emits light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decoration substrate. When the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative board is rectangular, it means that the LED emits light in a direction parallel to the surface of the decorative board (side-view LED). detailed description is omitted.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 . In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion, and a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. 2003, a second start-up opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening in the game area 5a. 2006, etc., to perform a game that allows the user to enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a so as to be received or passed.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N (see FIG. 115, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a. In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A game is performed by hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 114 and 211, etc.) for controlling contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side. A drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided.

An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁A drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600 .

The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape.

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 116, etc.) attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the game panel 1100 has a transparent panel plate 1110, it is arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the game panel 1100 from the front of the game panel 1100 (that is, the front of the game board 5). The presence of various members on the game panel 1100 can be easily visually recognized (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “transparent game panel 1100”).

The drive board unit 1700 includes various boards (for example, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200 and the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400) electrically connected to the door frame secondary relay board 105 described above. , the side window inner decoration part decoration board 413 and the door frame right side decoration board 418 of the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc.), the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control The panel relay board 1710 relaying the connection with the board 1510 and the decoration board provided in the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 according to commands from the peripheral control board 1510, drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. are driven. A performance drive board 1720 and a drive board box 1730 housing the panel relay board 1710 and the performance drive board 1720 are provided. The drive board box 1730 is hinge-rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 on the left side when viewed from the rear, and detachably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 on the right side when viewed from the rear. For example, the effect drive board 1720 has a green coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as “solid green resist”) formed by applying a green resist liquid to its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface). ) forms a green resist layer. A plurality of electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the effect drive board 1720, and the attributes of the electronic components such as the part number of the electronic component and the area indicating the position where the electronic component is arranged are displayed in the vicinity of these electronic components. (It may also include the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the electronic component, and the model number of the electronic component.) are printed on a solid green resist by silk printing.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the game areas. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the 5a, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, A second start port 2004 that enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 A first big prize winning opening 2005, a first starting opening 2002 or a second starting opening that enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B. A second big prize winning opening 2006 is provided in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to 2004. - 特許庁

In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a and has an out port 2010 that discharges the game ball B from the game area 5a, and is provided in the middle of the vertical direction in the game area 5a and the game ball B is provided with a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 for discharging from inside the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 attached directly above the lower end of the playing area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the playing area 5a, and a front surface of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit provided on the left side of the side unit 2200 and slightly above the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300 is provided on the right side of the starter unit 2100 in the front view, which is the lower right corner of the game area 5a in the front view, and has a second starter outlet 2004, a first big prize-winning outlet 2005, and a first sub-outer outlet 2011. a first attacker unit 2400, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a, and a center role A second attacker unit 2600 provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the object 2500 and having a second large winning opening 2006, and a second attacker unit 2600 provided above the second attacker unit 2600 and one Equipped with a side right center unit 2700 having a general prize winning port 2001 and a second sub-out port 2012, and a gate member 2800 provided above the side right center unit 2700 and having a gate portion 2003. there is

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100, and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010, which has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600 is provided.

The back unit 3000 includes flat plate-shaped back front left decorations 3030 and back front right decorations 3030 and 3040 which are provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, respectively, and is provided below the front end inside the back box 3010. a back guidance unit 3050, a back rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end in the back box 3010, and a rear side guidance unit 3050 at the bottom in the back box 3010, provided separately to the left and right behind the back guidance unit 3050 a back bottom left effect unit 3200 and a back bottom right effect unit 3250, and a back bottom middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have it.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back upper effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back rear effect unit 3100 in the upper part inside the back box 3010, and a back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. a back rear left effect unit 3500, a back rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decoration 3040 in the back box 3010, and a back front left decoration 3030 and back rear left A back front left effect unit 3700 provided between the effect unit 3500 and a back front right effect unit provided between the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800 and .

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 116(a) is a front perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel of the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel.

The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in a front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear (out port 2010).

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 and the impact part 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 2010 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The out port 2010 penetrates with a width sufficient for two game balls B to be aligned in the horizontal direction. The game ball B guided backward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the out port 2010 and an out ball detection member 3080 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, and is discharged to the rear of the front structural member 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1010 is aligned with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes a function display unit attachment portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner in a front view, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp attachment portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. there is

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like, which are arranged on the rear side, can be visually recognized from the front. Since the front structural member 1000 is formed transparently together with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, when the game board 5 is assembled, the boundary of the game area 5a can be prevented from being clearly seen. , it is possible to give the player a feeling of openness, and to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the front structural member 1000 is transparent together with the game panel 1100, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). It is possible to make it look as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 116 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and having the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface thereof. On the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 115, etc.).

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum required thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front structural member 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in the form of round holes and short elongated holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge thereof are separated in the left-right direction. and a plurality of engaging stepped portions formed with a thin plate thickness. The positioning holes are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting projecting pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . The engaging stepped portion is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . be.

As shown in FIG. 116, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 offset from the center to the upper right in front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) has a plurality of left and lower sides from the center. It has a wide width in which the balls B can be lined up, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding stepped portion (not shown) recessed from the front side toward the rear side and having approximately the same size as the panel plate 1110, and the holding stepped portion has the same size as the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed to match the notch portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion and penetrates the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the full ball path unit 610 face forward.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 extending upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and recessed forward from the rear surface. Out recessed portion 1123 communicates with out port 2010 at its upper portion. A cylindrical portion 3081 of an out-ball detection member 3080 in a back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 to be described later is inserted into the out recess 1123 .

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of protruding pins protruding forward from the holding stepped portion and inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and arranged outside the holding stepped portion. The panel plate 1110 has three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging stepped portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 that protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the holding stepped portion. and a pair of engaging pieces that engage with the two engaging stepped portions on the lower side of the . The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging stepped portion on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper side and the lower left side. The panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being accommodated in the holding stepped portion by elastically engaging the engaging stepped portion of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is held with the engaging claw. At this time, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110 to position the panel plate 1110 at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

Since this game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front structural member 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, the boundary of the game area 5a can be reduced from being clearly visible. It is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 is made transparent together with the front structural member 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). It is possible to make it look as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

In addition, on the back side of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, when viewed from the front of the game board 5, in the vicinity of the right side of the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, there is an illegal A magnetic sensor 1111 for detecting magnetism is attached (see FIG. 113, etc.).

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state assembled to the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A transparent main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the ejecting portion 1201 is positioned directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and is positioned outside the back unit 3000. It is positioned directly below the ball detection member 3080 . The substrate holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000, and discharges them from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharged ball receiving part 628 below. can be done.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 211) for controlling game content, payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. and have.

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting opening sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3051, a first big winning opening sensor 2402, and a second big winning opening. It is connected to the sensor 2601, the out-port sensor 3053, the first sub-out-port sensor 2403, the second sub-out-port sensor 3054, and the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 276 to 279 in addition to FIG. 276 is a perspective view (a) of the function display unit as seen from the front, a perspective view (b) of the function display unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 277 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit as seen from the front. FIG. 278 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit viewed from behind, and FIG. 279 is a schematic diagram of the front surface (surface) of the function display board housed in the function display unit.

The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the play area 5a, as shown in FIG. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and a normal pattern indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate section 2003. , and a normal holding indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball B through the gate section 2003 .

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the first big prize winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "win" or the like. A round indicator consisting of five LEDs displaying

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc. can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 276 to 278, the function display unit 1400 includes a box 1400a having an opening at the rear and an opening, a flat plate-like cover 1400b closing the opening, the box 1400a and the cover 1400b. and a function display substrate 1400c that is sandwiched and accommodated in the space between. The shape (that is, outer shape) of the side surface of the box 1400a and the shape (that is, outer shape) of the side surface of the cover 1400b are the same. , the sides of the box 1400a and the sides of the box 1400a are flush with each other. The outer shape of the function display board 1400c is smaller than the outer shapes of the box 1400a and the cover 1400b. In addition, in this embodiment, the box 1400a and the cover 1400b are molded with colored opaque resin (black resin). As the colored opaque resin, in addition to black, resins such as gray, red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, and yellow may be used. Further, the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b may be molded with a milky-white resin instead of a colored opaque resin, or may be molded with a colorless and transparent resin.

[5-5-1. box]
The box 1400a has a plurality of through-holes 1400az at positions corresponding to a plurality of LEDs 1400ca (in this embodiment, LED bare chips) mounted in a matrix on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. LED insertion cylinders 1400aa arranged in a matrix and having a cylindrical shape communicating with the through holes 1400az are provided so as to protrude rearward from the back side of the box body 1400a, and function display substrates. 1400c is sandwiched and accommodated in the space between the box 1400a and the cover 1400b, the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa is in contact with the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c. there is That is, when the function display board 1400c is sandwiched and housed in the space between the box 1400a and the cover body 1400b, the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c correspond to each other. Since it is housed in the LED insertion tube 1400aa, the LED insertion tube 1400aa functions as a partition wall so that the lit or blinking light of the LED 1400ca is not misidentified as the lit or blinking light of the adjacent LED 1400ca. .

Further, plate-shaped ribs 1400ab that connect adjacent through holes 1400az and reinforce the through holes 1400az are provided in the box 1400a so as to protrude rearward from the back side of the box 1400a. The tip of the rib 1400ab is formed so as not to protrude from the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa (that is, the tip of the rib 1400ab is formed shorter than the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa). As described above, the box 1400a is molded from colored and opaque resin (black resin), so the LED insertion tube 1400aa and the ribs 1400ab are also colored (black). The tip of the rib 1400ab may be flush with the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa.

The inner diameter of the through-hole 1400az and the inner diameter of the LED insertion cylinder 1400aa are the same, and there is no step at the portion where the through-hole 1400az and the LED insertion cylinder 1400aa communicate. Projections 1400ac to be inserted into locking holes 1400baa formed in four mounting pieces 1400ba provided on the cover 1400b are formed on the upper, left, lower and right sides of the box 1400a. It is provided in a recess formed in the side surface. The side surfaces of each protruding portion 1400ac are flush with the side surfaces of the box 1400a and do not protrude from the side surfaces of the box 1400a. In addition, the side surface of each projecting portion 1400ac is partly inclined upward from the opening of the box 1400a toward the front surface (surface) of the box 1400a. facilitates insertion into the protrusion 1400ac. Incidentally, when the projecting portion 1400ac of the box 1400a is inserted into the locking hole 1400baa formed in the mounting piece 1400ba of the cover 1400b, the locking hole 1400baa formed in the mounting piece 1400ba of the cover 1400b is inserted into the box 1400a. , the side surface of the mounting piece 1400ba of the cover body 1400b and the side surface of the box 1400a are flush with each other, and if the mounting piece 1400ba of the cover body 1400b is not destroyed, the cover body 1400b can not be removed from the box 1400a. In other words, the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b constitute a sealing board box that seals the function display board 1400c.

Further, the box 1400a has a plurality of positioning projections 1400ad along the inner peripheral surface of the box 1400a for regulating the movement of the function display board 1400c in the up, down, left, right, and front and rear directions, and for holding the function display board 1400c therebetween. is provided.

A white function display sticker (not shown) is attached to the front surface of the box 1400a. In this function display sticker, a transparent portion having a circular shape is formed at a position corresponding to each LED insertion tube 1400aa when stuck on the front surface of the box 1400a. That is, the lighting or blinking of the LED 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c is guided by the LED insertion tube 1400aa and can be visually recognized through the through hole 1400az and the transparent portion. ing.

[5-5-2. Cover body]
Mounting pieces 1400ba are provided on the upper, left, lower, and right sides of the cover body 1400b, and are provided so as to protrude forward from the surface side of the cover body 1400b. Holes 1400baa are formed respectively. As described above, the recessed portion is provided on the side surface of the box 1400a, and the projecting portion 1400ac is formed in this recessed portion. When the locking hole 1400baa formed in the mounting piece 1400ba is inserted into the projecting portion 1400ac, the mounting piece 1400ba is accommodated in the recess provided on the side surface of the box 1400a ( As for the mounting piece 1400ba provided on the upper side of the cover body 1400b, the tip of the mounting piece 1400ba is flush with the front surface (surface) of the box 1400a and does not protrude from the front surface (surface) of the box 1400a).

Further, the cover body 1400b is provided with a connector opening 1400bb at a position corresponding to the surface mount type connector 1400cb mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c so as to block the opening of the box 1400a. When the cover body 1400b is attached to the box body 1400a, the connector 1400cb of the function display board 1400c protrudes and is exposed from the rear surface (rear surface) of the cover body 1400b through the connector opening 1400bb. A wiring cable through which control signals from the main control board 1310 are transmitted is electrically connected to the connector 1400cb. The color of the housing of the connector 1400cb is black or close to black (eg, dark gray, dark blue, dark green, etc.). Note that the connector 1400cb may be of a surface mount (SMD) type instead of a surface mount type.

In addition, the cover body 1400b is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 1400bc for mounting the function display unit 1400 to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, projecting rearward from the back side of the cover body 1400b (in this embodiment, three mounting bosses 1400bc are provided). As described above, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 includes a flat panel plate 1110 formed slightly larger than the inner circumference of the front component 1000 that defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 that holds the . As described above, the front structural member 1000 is formed with the function display unit attachment portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached at the upper left corner in front view. On the front surface (surface) of the panel holder 1120, fixing holes (not shown) having through holes at positions corresponding to three mounting bosses 1400bc provided on the cover body 1400b of the function display unit 1400, which are upper left corners in front view. are formed respectively. The function display unit 1400 inserts the three mounting bosses 1400bc provided on the cover body 1400b into the three fixing holes provided on the front surface (surface) of the panel holder 1120, and the three fixing holes from the rear surface (back surface) of the panel holder 1120. The function display unit 1400 is fixed to the front surface (surface) of the panel holder 1120 by inserting and screwing screws into the through holes of the function display unit 1400 to fix the cover body 1400b of the function display unit 1400 to the front surface (surface) of the panel holder 1120. It will be in a state where By attaching the panel holder 1120 to the rear surface of the front component 1000 while holding the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110 in this state, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the function display unit attachment portion 1011 of the front component 1000 to display the function. The front surface (surface) of the box 1400a of the unit 1400 and the front surface (surface) of the front structural member 1000 are flush with each other, and there is no step.

Further, the cover body 1400b is provided with a rib portion 1400bd along the inner periphery of the cover body 1400b, which protrudes forward from the surface side of the cover body 1400b. When the cover 1400b is attached to the box 1400a so as to close the opening of the box 1400a, the outer peripheral surface of the rib 1400bd comes into contact with the inner side of the opening of the box 1400a. Further, on the cover body 1400b, along the inner peripheral surface of the rib portion 1400bd, a plurality of protrusions 1400bda for sandwiching the function display board 1400c are provided at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1400ad provided on the box 1400a. is provided.

Although not shown, the product control number (for example, FDU-TYP-A) of the function display unit 1400 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b.

[5-5-3. Function display board]
A plurality of LEDs 1400ca (in this embodiment, LED bare chips (also referred to as “LED elements”)) are mounted on a front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, and a plurality of front side electronic components such as LEDs are mounted. In addition to the pads to which the (surface-side electronic components) are soldered, through-holes (the inner peripheral walls of the penetrating holes are plated with copper and have conductivity; the same shall apply hereinafter), lands, etc. A black resist layer is formed by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid black resist") over the entire area except for the . In the present embodiment, the front (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c indicates the part numbers of the front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components) and the positions where the front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components) are arranged. Attributes of the front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components) such as areas (furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components), the size of the front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components), the front-side electronic components ( The mounting orientation (mounting direction) of front-side electronic components) and the model number of front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components) may be included. For example, the white or yellow paint, which is a bright color that stands out against black, is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid black resist.

Various ICs, various resistors, various capacitors, etc. may be mounted on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c in addition to the connector 1400cb to which the wiring cable is connected. A black color formed by applying a black resist solution to the entire area, excluding pads to which resistors, various capacitors, and other back-side electronic parts (back-side electronic parts) are soldered, as well as through holes, lands, etc. A black resist layer is formed by the coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid black resist”). In this embodiment, the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c indicates the part numbers of the rear surface side electronic components (rear surface side electronic components) and the positions at which the rear surface side electronic components (rear surface side electronic components) are arranged. Attributes of rear-side electronic components (back-side electronic components) such as areas (furthermore, the shape of the rear-side electronic components (back-side electronic components), the size of the rear-side electronic components (back-side electronic components), the rear-side electronic components ( back side electronic parts) mounting orientation (mounting direction), rear side electronic parts (back side electronic parts) model number may be included. For example, it is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid black resist with a paint of white or yellow, which is a bright color that stands out against black.

As described above, a plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. A connector 1400cb to which a distribution cable for signal transmission is electrically connected is mounted. A plurality of terminals provided on a connector 1400cb electrically connected to a wiring cable through which control signals from the main control board 1310 are transmitted are connected to a plurality of LEDs 1400ca via various wiring patterns formed on the function display board 1400c. electrically connected. The wiring cable includes wiring for transmitting control signals from the main control board 1310, wiring for supplying power (for example, +12 V), and wiring for making the board ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 the same. included. Of the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c, one surface may be solid ground, both surfaces may be solid ground, or both surfaces may be solid ground. It doesn't have to be.

The front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c and the rear (back) side wiring pattern formed on the rear (back) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c are land lines. (Lands include front (surface) side lands and rear (rear) side lands) through through-holes 1400cc having . are electrically connected to a plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c.

When the through-hole 1400cc having a land is arranged in the vicinity of the plurality of LEDs 1400ca, the light emitted from the LED 1400ca is reflected by the land of the through-hole 1400cc. Although the LED 1400ca of the LED 1400ca does not emit light, it may be in a light emission mode such as a state in which it shines, and the light emitted by the other LED 1400ca may be mixed with the light emitted by the other LED 1400ca. In some cases, it becomes a light emission mode, and in other cases, it becomes a light emission mode in which the color is blurred. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs 1400a based on control signals from the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, etc. Since it is a display device, if such a light emitting mode occurs, there is a risk of misreading or misrecognition by the player.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 279, the through holes 1400cc having lands are positioned apart from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca, and the LED insertion cylinders 1400aa and the ribs formed on the back side of the box 1400a It is arranged outside the area corresponding to the area of 1400ab. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca from being reflected by the land of the through hole 1400cc. can contribute to

Although it is difficult to prevent disturbance light from entering through the gap between the connector opening 1400bb of the cover body 1400b and the connector 1400cb, the connector 1400cb is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c on which the plurality of LEDs 1400ca are not mounted. Since it is mounted, disturbance light can be prevented from proceeding directly toward the plurality of LEDs 1400ca.

Further, when the function display board 1400c is sandwiched and accommodated in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, as described above, the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa faces the front surface of the function display board 1400c ( surface) 1400cx. That is, when the function display board 1400c is sandwiched and housed in the space between the box 1400a and the cover body 1400b, the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c correspond to each other. Since it is housed in the LED insertion tube 1400aa, the LED insertion tube 1400aa functions as a partition wall so that the lit or blinking light of the LED 1400ca is not misidentified as the lit or blinking light of the adjacent LED 1400ca. . As a result, disturbance light entering from the gap between the connector opening 1400bb of the cover 1400b and the connector 1400cb passes through the through-hole 1400cc having a land, and is emitted from the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c to the front surface of the function display substrate 1400c. (Surface) Even if it penetrates into 1400cx, the LED insertion cylinder 1400aa functioning as a partition wall can suppress the disturbance light from entering the LED insertion cylinder 1400aa. Mixing of ambient light colors can be suppressed (mixing of colors of light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca and ambient light can be reduced).

Thus, in this embodiment, the front (front) surface 1400cx and rear (back) surface 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c have no silk printing on the solid black resist. In addition, in the present embodiment, the front (surface) side wiring pattern, which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the front (surface) side wiring pattern is formed, is formed on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. Even if the information for specifying what kind of electronic component each side electronic component (surface side electronic component) is is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information and forming the information Alternatively, on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c, the rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern is a copper foil layer (copper plane) in which the rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern is formed. The information for specifying what kind of electronic parts each of the back side electronic parts is is not formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information and forming the leftover foil. In other words, in the present embodiment, the information for specifying what kind of electronic component is the front-side electronic component (surface-side electronic component) mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c is the function display substrate. It specifies what kind of electronic components are rear-side electronic components (rear-side electronic components) mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c while nothing is written on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. No information is written on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c.

A black resist layer is formed by applying a black resist solution to the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. This is because the use of a black resist solution prevents reflection of light emitted from a plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, thereby preventing light emitted from the LEDs 1400ca arranged nearby. This is because it can contribute to avoiding mixing with

In addition, since the box 1400a and the cover 1400b are molded from a colored and opaque resin (black resin), light passes through the box 1400a and the cover 1400b into the space between the box 1400a and the cover 1400b. can be prevented from intruding. Even if light enters the space between the box 1400a and the cover 1400b, a black resist solution is applied to the front (surface) 1400cx and the rear (back) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. Since the black resist layer is formed by the black coating film, the reflected light is directed toward the plurality of LEDs 1400ca by suppressing reflection on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. can be suppressed.

By the way, since the function display unit 1400 is an important display device that is controlled to display lottery results, game status, etc. by the main control board 1310, the function display board 1400c housed in the box 1400a of the function display unit 1400 is illegal. , the lottery results, game status, etc. cannot be displayed correctly. In this case, for example, although the game ball has not actually entered the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, an illegal signal is input to the main control board 1310 as if it had entered. Even if a fraudulent act to obtain many chances of lottery is performed, the function display unit 1400 cannot correctly display the lottery result, the game state, etc., and it is difficult for staff members such as store clerks in the game hall to notice it.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the front (front) surface 1400cx and the rear (back) surface 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c have no silk printing on the solid black resist. That is, on the front (surface) 1400cx and the rear (rear) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c, the front surface side (surface side) and rear surface (rear side) printed by silk printing are completely printed. not formed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the front (surface) side wiring pattern, which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the front (surface) side wiring pattern is formed, is formed on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. Even if the information for specifying what kind of electronic component each side electronic component (surface side electronic component) is is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information and forming the information Alternatively, on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c, the rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern is a copper foil layer (copper plane) in which the rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern is formed. The information for specifying what kind of electronic parts each of the back side electronic parts is is not formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information and forming the leftover foil. This makes it difficult to identify the electronic components mounted on the function display board 1400c and grasp the circuit configuration.

In this embodiment, instead of mounting an LED package containing an LED bare chip on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. We adopted a configuration that is directly mounted on the LED bare chips (also called "LED elements") are extremely small electronic components that are enclosed in packages such as surface-mount type (top type and side type), chip-on-board type, and shell-type packages. be. For this reason, compared to the case where the LED package is mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, the depth distance dimension in packages such as surface mount type (top type or side type), chip on board type, and cannonball type is smaller. , and the function display unit 1400 can be miniaturized. Since the LED bare chip is an extremely delicate electronic component, even if the door frame 3 or the like is hit by the player and the impact is directly transmitted to the door frame 3, the impact is not transferred to the function display unit 1400 provided on the game board 5. By weakening the impact caused by such a pounding, the possibility of damaging a plurality of LED bare chips mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c by the impact caused by such a pounding is low.

Methods for electrically connecting the electrodes of the LED bare chip to the predetermined electrodes on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c include wire bonding and flip chip bonding. It was adopted. In this flip chip bonding, unlike wire bonding, wires are used to electrically connect the electrodes of the LED bare chip to the predetermined electrodes on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. are formed and electrically connected to predetermined electrodes on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. This connecting portion is reinforced with solder, resin, or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the front (front) surface 1400cx and the rear (back) surface 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c do not have any area printed by silk printing. As a result, the process of silk printing can be omitted, and the board manufacturing cost can be reduced by reducing the cost of silk printing and the number of board manufacturing processes.

In the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c have no silk printing on the solid black resist. Instead, the box 1400a and the cover 1400b are configured as a sealing board box that seals the function display board 1400c. Therefore, on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, the front surface side marking portion (surface side marking portion) is colored in a predetermined color (for example, white or black, which is a bright color that stands out from black). (yellow) paint may be printed by silk printing on a solid black resist, and rear side electronic components (back side electronic components) may be printed on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. , a paint of a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow, which is a bright color that stands out against black) may be printed on a solid black resist by silk printing.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the box 1400a is provided with the LED insertion tubes 1400aa having a cylindrical shape communicating with the through holes 1400az so as to protrude rearward from the back side of the box 1400a. , instead of the LED insertion cylinder 1400aa having a cylindrical shape, a plurality of LEDs 1400ca arranged in a matrix on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, separately from the box 1400a A grid-shaped spacer may be provided. The grid-like spacers are molded from a colored opaque resin (black resin) in the same manner as the box 1400a and the cover 1400b. Even with this configuration, when the function display board 1400c is sandwiched and accommodated in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, the function display board 1400c is mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx. LEDs 1400ca are accommodated in rectangular openings formed in the corresponding grid-like spacers, so that the lighting or blinking light of the LED 1400ca is not mistaken for the lighting or blinking light of the adjacent LED 1400ca. The grid-like spacer can function as a partition wall, like the LED insertion tube 1400aa.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the through holes 1400cc having lands are positioned away from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca and correspond to the areas of the LED insertion cylinders 1400aa and the ribs 1400ab formed on the back side of the box 1400a. However, if it is difficult to dispose the through hole 1400cc having the land at a position away from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca, the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa and the corresponding region should be provided. It may be arranged in an area smaller than the area (that is, within the area where the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa and the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c abut, and is large enough not to protrude from this area. inside the outer peripheral area of each LED insertion cylinder 1400aa (that is, inside the LED insertion cylinder 1400aa, which is the area where the LED 1400ca is accommodated, the tip of the LED insertion cylinder 1400aa, and the function display It may be arranged in a region excluding a region where the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the substrate 1400c abuts and a combined region).

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c are provided with front-side electronic components (surface-side electronic components) mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. The information for specifying what kind of electronic component the component is is not written on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, and is mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. Although no information for specifying what kind of electronic component the rear surface side electronic component (back side electronic component) is is written on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c, the substrate of the function display substrate 1400c The control number may be written on the front surface (surface) 1400cx and/or the rear surface (rear surface) of the function display substrate 1400c. As a method of notating this board control number, silk printing is performed with a paint of a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow, which is a bright color that stands out against black, or gray that is close to black, which is a dark color that stands out against black). or a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, and the board control number is formed by removing the copper foil around the board control number. It may be formed by leaving foil.

In the above-described embodiment, the model of the connector 1400cb mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c is not indicated on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. may be written on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and/or the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. As a method of notating the type of the connector housing, silk is painted with paint of a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow, which is a bright color that stands out against black, or gray that is close to black, which is a dark color that stands out against black). It may be printed by printing, or the connector 1400cb type is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the connector 1400cb type with the wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. It may be formed by leaving a foil after removing the foil.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the product control number of the function display unit 1400 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b. The product control number of the function display unit 1400 may be engraved on any one of the left side wall, the upper side wall, the right side wall, and the lower side wall.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the product control number of the function display unit 1400 is stamped on the rear surface (rear surface) of the cover body 1400b. colors (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.) may be directly printed on the rear surface (rear surface) of the cover body 1400b, or may be a colorless transparent sheet, a colored transparent sheet, or an opaque sheet. may be attached to the rear surface (rear surface) of the cover body 1400b. Also, instead of the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b, the product control number of the function display unit 1400 is attached to one of the left side wall, the upper side wall, the right side wall, and the lower side wall of the box 1400a. It may be directly printed with paint of a predetermined color (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.), or the product management of the function display unit 1400 may be printed on a colorless transparent sheet, a colored transparent sheet, or an opaque sheet. You may make it stick what the number printed.

Further, in the present embodiment described above, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c by applying a black resist liquid to form a black coating film. However, on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c on which no LEDs 1400ca are mounted, a green resist layer is formed by applying a green resist liquid instead of black. Alternatively, the white resist layer may be formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist liquid. For example, a green resist solution is inexpensive because it is commonly used.

Further, in the present embodiment described above, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the functional display substrate 1400c by applying a black resist liquid to form a black coating film. However, instead of black, a green resist layer may be formed by applying a green resist solution to form a green resist layer, or a white resist solution may be applied to form a white coating film. A white resist layer may be formed by For example, a green resist solution is inexpensive because it is commonly used.

Further, in the present embodiment described above, instead of mounting the LED package containing the LED bare chip on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is mounted on the front surface of the function display substrate 1400c. (Surface) Although the configuration of directly mounting on the 1400cx was adopted, instead of the LED bare chip, surface-mounted type (top type or side type), chip-on-board type, bullet type, etc. LED packages were used on the function display substrate 1400c. It may be mounted on the front (surface) 1400cx.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, flip-chip bonding is used as a method of electrically connecting the electrodes of the LED bare chips to the predetermined electrodes on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. Wire bonding may be employed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front (front) side wiring pattern, which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) in which the front (front) side wiring pattern is formed, is formed on the front (front) side 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. Information for specifying what kind of electronic parts each of the front side electronic parts (surface side electronic parts) that are a plurality of LEDs 1400ca is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information Although it was not formed by leaving foil, a foil removal standard is formed by making a circle symbol near the position corresponding to the terminal (anode terminal or cathode terminal) of a plurality of LEDs 1400ca and removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol Terminal symbols are formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, and black (green or white may be used instead of black) solidly painted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. It may be configured such that each of the foil-cut reference terminal symbols is covered with a resist. The front (surface) side wiring pattern forming the foil-cut reference terminal symbol is formed electrically insulated from the LED 1400ca. As the foil-cut reference terminal symbol, if the surrounding area is a so-called solid ground (substrate ground), the circle symbol itself may be used as the foil-cut reference terminal symbol. Further, as the symbol for the reference terminal without foil, instead of the circular symbol, a symbol representing the polarity of the LED 1400ca may be used (a symbol used in the circuit diagram (a symbol that can distinguish between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal), or Symbols to be used (symbols by which anode terminals and cathode terminals can be discriminated) may be simplified). In addition, when the mounting directions of the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c are substantially the same As for the direction (when there is no one to be mounted in the opposite direction) rule is set in advance, the foil-cut reference terminal symbol is placed near the position corresponding to the terminal of one of the LEDs 1400ca among the plurality of LEDs 1400ca. It may be formed on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. may be formed. In this case as well, the symbol for the reference terminal without foil may be a symbol representing the polarity of the LED 1400ca instead of the circle symbol (a symbol used in a circuit diagram (a symbol that can distinguish between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal), Symbols used in circuit diagrams (symbols for distinguishing anode terminals and cathode terminals) may be simplified).

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs 1400a based on control signals from the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game to display the game state (game situation), ordinary lottery results, Since it is an important display device for displaying special lottery results, etc., the front (front) 1400cx and rear (rear) surfaces 1400cx and 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c are coated with a black resist liquid to form a black color. By forming the resist layer, the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c is prevented from being reflected, so that the light emitted from the LEDs 1400ca arranged nearby does not mix. I was able to contribute to making it so. Therefore, for the substrates housed in other display devices of the function display unit 1400 as well as the function display substrate 1400c housed in the function display unit 1400, A black resist layer may be formed by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist liquid. This prevents reflection of light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on a substrate housed in the display device, thereby contributing to preventing mixing with light emitted from the LEDs 1400ca arranged in the vicinity. be able to.

This display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 280 is a schematic diagram of the game board side matrix display device provided on the game board and the door frame side matrix display device provided on the door frame. As a display device, as shown in FIG. 280, a game board 5 is provided separately from an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, which accommodates a board on which a plurality of LEDs arranged in a matrix are mounted. A circular game board side matrix display device UDPC provided in the upper center of the center accessory 2500, and a device housing a plurality of substrates on which a plurality of LEDs arranged in a matrix are mounted is the left side of the door frame of the door frame 3. Door frame side matrix display devices TDPL and TDPR provided in the unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, respectively, can be mentioned. The game board side matrix display device UDPC and the door frame side matrix display devices TDPL and TDPR are different from the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 which controls the progress of the game, and are controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 (which controls the progress of the performance). The difference is that they are controlled by a later-described peripheral control board 1510) capable of controlling. The game board side matrix display device UDPC and the door frame side matrix display devices TDPL and TDPR have the same configuration, and the game board side matrix display device UDPC will be described later in detail as a "dot matrix display device".

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110, 113, 114 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 211) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

A peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center. The performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . The effect display device 1600 is covered with a protective cover body 1601 molded from a non-conductive transparent resin except for the display area of the effect display device 1600 . A plurality of L-shaped wiring treatment pieces 1601a are formed on the back side of the protective cover body 1601 along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601 to hold various wirings. A plurality of holes are formed in alignment vertically and horizontally.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED backlight, and has substantially the same width as the width of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the horizontal direction. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixed pieces 1601b protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixed piece 1601c protruding downward from the lower end surface. This performance display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opened in the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixed pieces 1601b obliquely behind the 3010, the lower fixed piece 1601c side is moved forward to insert the lower fixed piece 1601c into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right at .

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 117(a) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board, and FIG. 117(b) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end part of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate part 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , to the second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Different from the first big winning hole 2005 and the first big winning hole 2005 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B. The game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A second big prize winning port 2006 is provided.

A plurality (here, four) of the general prize winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction in the lower part in the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vertical direction in the right part in the game area 5a. placed above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 2010 at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the vertical direction. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a lower right corner of the game area 5a at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 . The second big prize winning opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

The first sub-out port 2011 is arranged below the second start-up port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2012 is arranged on the right side of the general prize winning port 2001 on the right side.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 attached directly above the lower end of the playing area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the playing area 5a, and a front surface of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit provided on the left side of the side unit 2200 and slightly above the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300 is provided on the right side of the starter unit 2100 in the front view, which is the lower right corner of the game area 5a in the front view, and has a second starter outlet 2004, a first big prize-winning outlet 2005, and a first sub-outer outlet 2011. and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. ing.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 includes a second attacker unit 2600 which is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and which has a second prize winning opening 2006, and a second attacker unit 2600. A side right center unit 2700 provided above and having one general prize winning port 2001 and a second sub-out port 2012, and a gate part 2003 provided above the side right center unit 2700 and a gate member 2800 that is in contact with.

[5-8a. starting unit]
Starting unit 2100 of table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. Figure 118 (a) is a front perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit, (b) is a rear perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit, and (c) ) is a left side view of the starting port unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general prize winning opening and the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing parts of the starter unit and the side unit on the game board. The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out port 2010 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starter opening unit 2100 has a first starter opening 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

The starting port unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102. A flat plate-shaped flange portion 2103 extending outward in the left-right direction from the middle in the front-rear direction is provided, and the whole is formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 is formed in such a shape as viewed from the front that a rectangular portion elongated in the left and right direction and a semicircular portion having a lower side of the rectangular portion as a chord are combined. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101 excluding the upper side, and is formed in a gutter shape with an open top. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered, and the game ball B can be guided backward.

The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 with the flange portion 2103 extending in the left-right direction from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, and the front wall portion 2101 projecting forward from the panel plate 1110 and the peripheral wall portion 2102 form the first starting port 2002 capable of receiving the game ball B. forming.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, and the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is formed. located just below the center of Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the central release portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

The starting port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the inclination of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall part 2102 in a state attached to the game panel 1100, and the back unit 3000 can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 in . The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

Although illustration is omitted, a decorative seal is attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2101 so that it is more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 . As a result, the player's attention can be directed to the first starting hole 2002 rather than the general prize winning hole 2001, and the player can be encouraged to hit the game ball B aiming at the first starting hole 2002.例文帳に追加At the same time, by allowing the first start port 2002 to receive the game ball B, a special lottery result (first special lottery result) in which an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot" game is advantageous to the player is generated. Therefore, it is possible to heighten expectations for the result of the special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002, and to suppress the decline in the interest of the player.

In this starting port unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B backward is inclined at a looser angle (an angle close to the horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B relatively backward is slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 can be seen for a longer period of time. The reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 can be surely recognized, and the joy (feeling of superiority) for the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 can be felt through the general winning hole 2001. can be savored for a longer period of time than when it is received by the

120, when the starter unit 2100 is assembled on the game board 5, the rear lower middle production unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 is positioned behind the rear lower middle production unit 3300, as shown in FIG. Light emitted from the LEDs of the first lower-side decorative substrate 3322 and the second lower-side decorative substrate 3329 of the lower-side inner decoration unit 3320 is used for decoration.

Furthermore, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the starting port unit 2100 , a rib may be provided that spans the front wall portion 2101 and the bottom portion of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the first starting port 2002 . This rib is formed in a triangular shape (a part of which may be rounded) when viewed from the side, and the upper surface of the rib is inclined from the right side of the side unit 2200 to the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning openings 2001. In addition, the distance from the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 to the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 is longer than the distance from the upper end to the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203. (the rib is positioned below the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). As a result, the timing at which the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 abuts against the rib and is guided backward is determined when the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is in the first front wall portion 2203. It is possible to delay the timing of contacting the slanted portion and being guided backward, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

[5-8b. side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general prize winning openings 2001 which are open to receive game balls B at all times. The three general prize winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002 . The two general prize winning openings 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general prize winning opening 2001 on the left side is open toward the upper left.

The side unit 2200 includes a flat plate-shaped base plate, and extends forward and backward from the base plate in the shape of a gutter. One induction gutter, a first front wall portion closing the front end sides of the two first induction gutters, and a gutter-like extending back and forth from the base plate on the left side of the two first induction gutter. and a second front wall closing the front end side of the second guide gutter. The side unit 2200 is made entirely of a transparent member.

The first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. The first guide gutter 2202 has a U-shaped open portion directed upward, and the second guide gutter 2204 has a U-shaped open portion directed to the upper left. The front end of the first guide trough 2202 extends vertically from the upper part of the first guide gutter 2202 at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom, and the lower part moves backward toward the base plate 2201 as it goes downward. extends obliquely to Therefore, the first front wall portion 2203 closing the front end side of the first guide gutter 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a position about 3/4 of the height from the bottom.

The second guide gutter 2204 has a vertical front end. Therefore, the second front wall portion 2205 closing the front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201 .

The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 with the base plate 2201 in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . Then, the portion of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110, and the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205 can receive the game ball B. A general winning opening 2001 is formed. In addition, when the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the portions of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 that protrude rearward from the base plate 2201 pass through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . The bottom surfaces of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined so as to become lower toward the rear, and can guide the game ball B received in the general prize winning opening 2001 to the rear.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the three general prize winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁This side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064 . The game ball B delivered to any of the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port 3064 of the back guidance unit 3050 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051, and then It is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 .

The side unit 2200 differs from the starter opening unit 2100 in that no decorative stickers are attached to the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205 that form the front surface of the general prize winning opening 2001. It is made less conspicuous than the first starting port 2002 . In addition, since the front ends of the two general prize-winning ports 2001 in the side unit 2200 are inclined, the three-dimensional effect of the general prize-winning ports 2001 can be emphasized. , it doesn't look bad.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. Light emitted from the LED of the substrate 3203 can be used for luminous decoration, and the back-bottom-left-rotation decorative body 3201 can be visually recognized in a good condition. In addition, since the side unit 2200 has a slanted portion on the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general prize winning openings 2001, the portion of the side unit 2200 makes it possible to The light emitted forward from the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the production unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) near the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 It can make you look better.

In this side unit 2200, since the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 is relatively rearward. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is faster. The bottom surfaces of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100 . Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B disappears in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being unnecessarily long with respect to the general winning opening 2001, while ensuring that the player recognizes that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player's interest can be easily directed to other winning openings such as the next game ball B, the first starting opening 2002, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, and continuously It is possible to keep the player entertained in the game in the game area 5a and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In other words, the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the start opening unit 2100, so that the normal winning opening 2001 The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 can be seen for a longer period of time. The reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 can be surely recognized, and the joy (feeling of superiority) for the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 can be felt through the general winning hole 2001. can be savored for a longer period of time than when it is received by the

By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning holes 2001 is inclined, the first front wall portion 2203 can be seen from the side of the first guide gutter 2202. It is possible for the game ball B to pass in front of the inclined part of the . When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front. Since the game ball B is not paid out, the player may feel distrustful of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall, and may lose interest in the game. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of the present embodiment, as described above, the slanted portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guide gutter 2202 are received in the general winning opening 2001 and move backward. Since the guided game ball B can be visually recognized by the player for a short period of time, the player can recognize that the game ball B has been received in the general prize winning opening 2001 . Therefore, even if the game ball B passing in front of the first front wall portion 2203 is mistakenly received in the general winning hole 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

In addition, in this side unit 2200, since a part of the game ball B can pass through the front of the first front wall portion 2203, When B passes, if most of the game ball B (at least half or more of the game ball B) overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in a front view, the game ball B may enter the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. The illusion of acceptance can be created and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap the general prize winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been received in the general prize winning opening 2001, and it may be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall even if the benefits (payout of the game ball B and the lottery of the first special lottery result) are not granted after that. This allows the player to continue to enjoy the game and suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (left end) general prize winning port 2001 out of the three general prize winning ports 2001 parallel to the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) by the second front wall portion 2205. It has the same shape as the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is received in the general winning hole 2001 at the left end, some players can be given the illusion that it has been received in the starting hole. Even if the game ball B is accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001 which is mistaken as the starting opening, the lottery for the special lottery result is not performed, so the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side feel distrustful. There is fear. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 away from the first starting opening 2002 in the center in the left-right direction (a position that cannot be accepted by "right hitting"), and the second Since no decorative sticker indicating the starting opening is attached to the front surface of the front wall part 2205, the player can be reconfirmed that it is not the starting opening, and the player feels a sense of suspicion, thereby increasing interest in the game. You can avoid dropping it.

In addition, since the side unit 2200 has the front ends of the two general winning holes 2001 slanted, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 is greater than when the front ends are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced because no decorative seal is attached to the front surface of the general prize winning opening 2001.例文帳に追加

Although not shown, the angle of inclination of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general prize-winning port 2001) from the horizontal is such that variable prize-winning ports such as the big prize-winning port and the accessory prize-winning port can be opened and closed. The angle of inclination from the horizontal is larger than that of the winning opening door when it is opened by rotating about the lower side so that the upper side moves forward so as to guide the game ball B to the winning opening side. angle. More specifically, depending on the player, when the number of game balls B paid out by accepting the game balls B into the variable winning opening is larger than the general winning opening 2001, the number of game balls B to the variable winning opening is increased. I want to win a prize. Alternatively, even with a variable winning opening (large winning opening) in which a prescribed number of prizes is determined, the player wishes to win more than the prescribed number of prizes. Therefore, by making the inclination of the variable winning opening door gentler than that of the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall portion 2203), the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slowed down. As described above, when the game ball B is received in the variable winning opening, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 can be seen for a longer time. 2001 can surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted in the variable winning hole, and can give the general winning hole 2001 the joy (feeling of superiority) that the game ball B has been accepted in the variable winning hole. It can be savored for longer than when it is received. In addition, since the angle of the prize winning port door in the open state is gentle, it takes a long time for the prize winning port door in the open state to close, so that more than a prescribed number of game balls B win a prize for the player. can make you think to

In addition, in the two right side general winning holes 2001 in the side unit 2200, the portion extending obliquely downward from the lower end of the first front wall portion 2203 is longer than the portion extending vertically downward from the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203. is formed longer. As a result, since the winning opening is the general winning opening 2001, although the game ball B is paid out, a lottery such as a normal lottery or a special lottery is not performed. can be made out of the player's field of view early on.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the side unit 2200, the front surface of a specific general winning opening 2001 out of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 is shown with an inclined front surface. The front surface of the winning opening 2001 may be inclined. In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball B that is shot to the shooting position (so-called "left shot") in the normal game state can enter the general winning hole 2001 whose front surface is not inclined. Although the one provided at the position is shown, it is not limited to this. It may be provided at a position where the game ball B launched to the shooting position (so-called "right-handed") can enter, or may be provided at both.

Also, as shown in FIG. 119, the inclination angle of the general winning opening 2001 having the inclined front surface is larger than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening) is opened from the closed state. It has a narrow angle. When the number of game balls B to be paid out at the time of winning a prize in the big prize-winning port is larger than that of the general prize-winning port 2001, even in the big prize-winning port where the prescribed number of prizes is determined, the player cannot win more than the prescribed number of prizes. I hope Therefore, the speed at which the game ball B that has entered the big winning opening rolls to the back is slower than the speed at which the game ball B that has won in the general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is inclined rolls to the back. there is In other words, when winning the general winning opening 2001, which is smaller than the number of payouts when winning the big winning opening, the game ball B that has won the big winning opening is faster than the speed at which it rolls to the back side. ing. In other words, it can be said that the larger the payout amount, the longer it takes to disappear from the player's field of view. As a result, a prize-winning opening with a larger payout can provide a longer joyful time when a prize is won.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Side upper left unit 2300 in table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes downward to the right. The side upper left unit 2300 is entirely transparent.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf part 2301 .

[5-8d. 1st Attacker Unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125 and the like. FIG. 121(a) is a front perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit, and FIG. 121(b) is a back perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 124 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the first big winning opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a game ball path in the first attacker unit.

The first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the starter unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view, and is positioned in front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. installed. This first attacker unit 2400 has a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 (see FIG. 130, etc.). In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second start opening 2004 is provided on the upper right side of the center in the left-right direction, and the first big prize winning opening 2005 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and further than the second start opening 2004. It is provided at a low position, and the first sub-out port 2011 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a position lower than the first big prize winning port 2005 .

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a second start opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, and a first start opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the first big winning opening 2005. It is equipped with a big winning hole sensor 2402, a first sub-out hole sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub-out hole 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 for detecting illegal magnetism. Two each of the first big prize winning opening sensor 2402 and the magnetic sensor 2404 are provided.

The first attacker unit 2400 includes a unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, a front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 and forming a flow path for the game ball B, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2411. a rear cover 2413 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the second starting port 2004; a start solenoid 2415 for starting, a solenoid cover 2416 covering the start solenoid 2415, a first grand prize winning door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first grand prize winning port 2005, A first attacker solenoid 2418 for opening and closing the first major winning opening 2005 by moving the first major winning opening door 2417, and transmission to move the first major winning opening door 2417 by transmitting forward/backward movement of the first attacker solenoid 2418. a member 2419;

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413 and attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 2413 and the first large prize winning opening decoration substrate 2420 for decorating the first large prize winning opening 2005 with light emission. Second starting opening sensor 2401, first big winning opening sensor 2402, first sub-out opening sensor 2403, magnetic sensor 2404, starting opening solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, first big winning opening decoration board 2420 and panel relay board and a first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying connection with 1710 .

The unit base 2411 is made of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 has a first opening 2411a penetrating in the front-rear direction near the upper end on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, a first guide hole 2411b penetrating in the front-rear direction below the first opening 2411a, and A second opening 2411c that is long in the left-right direction and penetrates in the front-rear direction in the upper part on the left side of the center; and a first sub-out port 2011 penetrating back and forth below the guide hole 2411b.

The first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 is formed so that the left and right widths are slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 is inserted. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position below the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape and is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered. The second opening 2411c extends to the left and right with a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 is inserted. Each of the second guide holes 2411d protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape and is inclined so that the rear end side thereof is lowered.

The unit base 2411 is arranged horizontally along the upper side of the second opening 2411c, and has two triangular contact portions 2411e projecting forward. These abutting portions 2411e allow the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first big winning port door 2417 to contact with the abutting portion of the front cover 2412 when the first big winning port 2005 is closed. Together, they circulate in a large zigzag fashion in the front-rear direction.

A second starting opening sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 directly above the first guide hole 2411b with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411 . Further, directly above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first big winning hole sensor 2402 is attached with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, a first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes are aligned. Magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2411 on the left side of the first guide hole 2411b and on the right side of the two second guide holes 2411d.

The front cover 2412 is formed in a box-like shape that is open rearward, and is formed as a transparent member. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage for the game balls B on the front surface of the unit base 2411 . As shown in FIG. 125, the front cover 2412 includes a first shelf portion 2412a extending downward from the upper right corner to the left and a game ball extending leftward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. It extends shorter than the first shelf portion 2412a so as to be lower leftward from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a and is spaced slightly longer than the diameter of B, and between the first shelf portion 2412a The second shelf portion 2412b forming the second starting port 2004, and the second shelf portion 2412b so as to be lower left than the left end of the second shelf portion 2412b and lower than the diameter of the game ball B. A third shelf portion 2412c extending shorter than the portion 2412b, and a space of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B to the left from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c. and a fourth shelf portion 2412d that extends lower leftward from a lower position than the third shelf portion 2412c and forms the first big winning opening 2005 with the third shelf portion 2412c.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2412a is away from the right side of the front cover 2412 slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B to the left. The first shelf portion 2412a, the second shelf portion 2412b, and the third shelf portion 2412c are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf portion 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf portions 2412a and so on. ing.

In addition, the front cover 2412 has a first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a, and a lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. A second standing wall portion 2412f extending to a height, a third standing wall portion 2412g extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e, and a third shelf portion 2412c. A fourth vertical wall portion 2412h extending vertically downward from the right end of the front cover 2412 to the lower side of the front cover 2412, a fifth vertical wall portion 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c, and a right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. and a seventh standing wall portion 2412k extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

The fifth standing wall portion 2412i extends from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lower leftward. , further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412 . In addition, the sixth standing wall portion 2412j extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to extend downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then lower rightward. It extends upward and further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412 . The horizontal interval between the lower portions of the fifth vertical wall portion 2412i and the sixth vertical wall portion 2412j is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Furthermore, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2412l connecting lower ends of a first standing wall portion 2412e, a second standing wall portion 2412f, and a third standing wall portion 2412g, and a first standing wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of 2412e to the middle of the fourth vertical wall portion 2412h on the left side after inclining to the left to leave an interval that allows the game ball B to circulate between the first horizontal wall portion 2412l. and a second lateral wall portion 2412m that slopes upward. The first horizontal wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. The second lateral wall portion 2412m is formed so that the portion of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

In addition, the front cover 2412 extends from the vicinity of the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j to the vicinity of the center between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j in the direction of approaching each other. It has an extending third lateral wall portion 2412n and a partition portion 2412o extending upward while connecting the respective opposing ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2412n. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG.

Furthermore, the front cover 2412 extends stepwise along the upper side of the front cover so as to be lower leftward, and the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c allows the game ball B to flow. are provided with an opening. It has an upper shelf 2412p. The right end of the upper shelf 2412p is located directly above the left end of the first shelf 2412a, and the left end is located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. Also, the upper shelf 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lower rightward.

Although not shown, the front cover 2412 has a triangular shape on the front side of the abutting portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and alternately in the horizontal direction with respect to the two abutting portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two rearwardly projecting abutments in shape. These abutting portions move the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first big winning port door 2417 to the abutting portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 when the first big winning port 2005 is closed. Together, they circulate in a large zigzag fashion in the front-rear direction.

The rear cover 2413 is shaped like a box that opens forward and is made of a transparent member. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold a second starting door 2414, a solenoid cover 2416, a first big prize winning door 2417, a first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. In addition, the rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to sandwich and hold the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, and the first sub-out opening sensor 2403.

The second starting door 2414 includes a flat plate-like door portion 2414a, an arm portion 2414b extending downward from the door portion 2414a, and extending in the left-right direction from the lower end of the arm portion 2414b. and a connecting portion 2414d provided at a portion apart from the rotating shaft 2414c in the lower portion of the arm portion 2414b and connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415. .

The door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The arm portion 2414b of the second starting door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a and then bends forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotating shaft 2414c of the arm portion 2414b.

The second starting port door 2414 can close the second starting port 2004 with a door portion 2414a. The second starter door 2414 rotates (turns) about a rotating shaft 2414c by advancing and retreating the plunger of the starter solenoid 2415 in the front-rear direction. The starting port 2004 can be opened and closed.

The starting port solenoid 2415 is mounted so that the direction in which the plunger protrudes faces forward. The plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown) when not energized, and the plunger retracts when energized.

The first big prize winning opening door 2417 includes a horizontally long flat plate-shaped door portion 2417a, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from the left and right ends of the door portion 2417a, and a pair of arm portions 2417b. It has a rotating shaft 2417c coaxially extending from the lower end in the horizontal direction, and a columnar link pin 2417d protruding rightward from the lower portion of the right arm portion 2417b.

The door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The pair of arm portions 2417b extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a and then bends forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotating shaft 2417c in the lower portion of the arm portion 2417b. This link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a slit 2419c extending vertically in a transmission member 2419, which will be described later.

The first big winning opening door 2417 can close the first big winning opening 2005 with a door portion 2417a. As the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, the first big prize opening door 2417 rotates (turns) about the rotary shaft 2417c, thereby moving the door portion 2417a in the front-rear direction. The first big prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

The first attacker solenoid 2418 is mounted so that the direction in which the plunger protrudes faces forward. The plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown) when not energized, and the plunger retracts when energized.

The transmission member 2419 includes a base portion 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, an extension portion 2419b extending forward from the base portion 2419a, and penetrating in the left-right direction near the front end of the extension portion 2419b. and a slit 2419c extending vertically. Into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419, the link pin 2417d of the first big winning opening door 2417 is slidably inserted.

A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front surface of the first prize winning opening decoration board 2420 . The plurality of LEDs of the first prize winning opening decoration board 2420 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The first big prize winning hole decoration board 2420 can light-embellish the first big prize winning hole 2005 by causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

In the normal state of the first attacker unit 2400, the starting port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are in a non-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the starter solenoid 2415 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second starter door 2414 passes through the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411. protruding forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the door portion 2414a makes it impossible to accept the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. It's becoming That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 125).

In addition, in a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is the second opening of the unit base 2411. It protrudes forward through 2411c. In this state, the door portion 2417a of the first big prize winning port door 2417 is positioned above the first big prize winning port 2005, and the door portion 2417a makes it impossible to accept the game ball B into the first big prize winning port 2005. It is in a good state. That is, the first big winning opening 2005 is closed by the first big winning opening door 2417 (door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 124 and 125).

In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down on the first shelf portion 2412a, the game ball B rolls leftward due to the inclination of the first shelf portion 2412a, and the door portion 2414a of the second start door 2414 After rolling on the upper surface and the second shelf 2412b, it is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b falls on the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first big winning entrance door 2417 according to its momentum, and is tilted to the left due to their inclination. roll in the direction In addition, when the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b contacts the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and rebounds to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c may enter the

At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a that closes the first big prize opening 2005 is, with respect to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412, They come into contact with each other alternately, and roll leftward while zigzag in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that rolls leftward on the door portion 2417a rolls on the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and is then released to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 from the left end thereof.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf portion 2412a, it passes through the right side of the first vertical wall portion 2412e and falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, whereupon the second horizontal wall Due to the inclination of the part 2412m, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2011. Also, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c, it passes through between the third vertical wall portion 2412g and the fourth vertical wall portion 2412h, and the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. It drops near the left end, rolls rightward due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.例文帳に追加

The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is not returned into the game area 5a, and reaches the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It is delivered and discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In this first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B that circulated on the right side of the first shelf portion 2412a and the game ball B that passed through the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c It is formed to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting port solenoid 2415 is energized (turned on) according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, the plunger moves against the urging force of the spring. retreats, and the connecting portion 2414d of the arm portion 2414b of the second starting door 2414 above the rotating shaft 2414c (door portion 2414a side) is pulled rearward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second starting door 2414 rotates about the rotating shaft 2414c in the direction in which the door portion 2414a moves rearward. By rotating the door portion 2414a so as to retreat from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper portion of the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004. becomes. That is, the second starting port 2004 is opened.

When the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and the second starting port sensor 2401 After being detected, it falls onto the first lateral wall portion 2412l. The portion between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g in the first horizontal wall portion 2412l is inclined so as to be lowered rearward, and the inclination causes the game ball B to roll backward, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged rearward from the rear end. The game ball B released rearward from the rear end of the first guide hole 2411b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is transferred from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. Ejected.

On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger retreats together with the transmission member 2419 attached to its tip against the biasing force of the spring. When this transmission member 2419 retreats, the link pin 2417d of the first big prize door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 slides in the slit 2419c and is pressed backward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c. It will happen.

As a result, the first big prize winning opening door 2417 rotates about the rotating shaft 2417c so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward, and the front end of the door portion 2417a moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. will have to move. By moving the door portion 2417a of the first large prize winning port door 2417 rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the first large prize winning port 2005 is opened upward, and the first large prize winning port 2005 opens. A game ball B can be accepted (see FIG. 124). That is, the first big prize winning opening 2005 is opened.

When the game ball B is received in the first large prize winning port 2005 when the first large prize winning port 2005 is in an open state, the fifth vertical wall after passing between the fifth vertical wall portion 2412i and the sixth vertical wall portion 2412j. Passing between the portion 2412i and the partition portion 2412o, or between the sixth standing wall portion 2412j and the partition portion 2412o, and after being detected by one of the two first prize winning opening sensors 2402, the second It falls on the three horizontal wall portions 2412n. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is inclined downward from the upper surface toward the rear, and the game ball B dropped on the third horizontal wall portion 2412n rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit base 2411 It is discharged rearward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B released rearward from the second guide hole 2411d is transferred to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. .

As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, in the first large prize winning opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first large winning opening 2005, the vicinity of the front end of the door portion 2417a that closes the first large winning opening 2005 By rotating the door portion 2417a centering on the rotating shaft 2417c extending to the left and right at the same position in the front and rear direction as the first big prize winning port 2005 (the first big prize winning port 2005 The depth in the front-rear direction of the attacker unit 2400) can be shortened as much as possible. This effect is the same for the second starting port 2004 that is opened and closed by the second starting port door 2414 . Thereby, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

In addition, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first big winning hole 2005 is divided into two by the partition part 2412o, and each is detected by the different first big winning hole sensor 2402, and the unit base 2411 Since the game ball B is released backward, it is possible to suppress the game ball B from stagnation between the first big prize hole 2005 and the first big prize hole sensor 2402, and to increase the number of game balls in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127 and the like. FIG. 126(a) is a front perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit, and FIG. 126(b) is a rear perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit. FIG. 127 is a front view of the center accessory. The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in the shape of a transparent frame, and the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. .

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a part that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B hit into the game area 5a is projected inside the frame. It is impenetrable.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped portion that protrudes from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 . The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward until the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is aligned with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5 . Moreover, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening portion 1112 of the panel plate 1110 into which the center accessory 2500 is inserted. This peripheral wall part 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the frame in a state assembled to the game board 5 .

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502 ) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 .

A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 . The support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501 . In addition, the support portion 2503 has an edge protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a linear shape, so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), thereby exerting a reinforcing effect while allowing the player to It is made to be inconspicuous from.

More specifically, a plurality of support portions 2503 of the center accessory 2500 are provided. For example, in a support portion 2503 provided at a portion where the peripheral wall portion 2501 protrudes most to the left above a warp entrance 2511, which will be described later, the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at that portion is midway between the vertically extending portions. has a shape that bulges out to the left. The tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on both upper and lower sides of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that bulges leftward. It has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and is formed linearly so as to connect the upper and lower portions (see FIG. 135). The support part 2503 of this part is the back front left decorative body in the back unit 3000 in which the part extending linearly up and down at the tip side of the support part 2503 is provided in the back in the state assembled to the game board 5. 3030 along part of the right side. Therefore, since the tip side of the support part 2503 coincides with the edge of the back front left decoration body 3030, the support part 2503 is difficult to distinguish, and the back front left decoration provided at the rear is relatively small. The decoration of the body 3030 can be made conspicuous.

Further, among the plurality of support portions 2503, the support portion 2503 below the warp entrance 2511 extends rightward in a rectangular shape while the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends obliquely. The support part 2503 of this part is located in front of the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in the assembled state on the game board 5 (see FIG. 107, etc.). ). The laterally extending tip side of the support portion 2503 extends parallel to the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. , and the support portion 2503 is difficult to distinguish (see FIG. 111).

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance that is open to allow the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter, at the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in front view and in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). 2511, a warp exit 2512 which is open in the frame on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1100 so that the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 can be released, and the game ball B released from the warp exit 2512. A stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in the horizontal direction, and a stage cover 2515 provided to cover the upper side of the stage 2513 are provided (see FIG. 127, etc.). The stage cover 2515 bounces back the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 to the stage 2513 side, thereby preventing the game ball B from entering from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 into the frame.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with the central side in the left-right direction depressed, and the position corresponding to the position directly above the first start port 2002 of the starter unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is positioned on the panel board of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) so that when it is attached to 1110, the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2513 has a portion (central release portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (side release portions 2513b) on both left and right sides, which are arranged in a forward direction. It is inclined so that it may become low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the elevated portion (central release portion 2513a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2513 is located directly above the first starter opening 2002 of the starter unit 2100. ing. Thereby, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 has a guide passage group 2520 which is provided in the upper right corner and consists of two passages through which the game balls B can flow. When the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center role 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the impact of the front component 1000). It is almost in contact with the right rail 1005 near the part 1006 , and is formed so that the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 always passes through the guide path group 2520 .

The guide passage group 2520 has a length in the vertical direction that is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in the shape of a groove that is open forward, and the game balls B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good condition.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and includes a first guide passage 2521 away from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and a guide passage 2521 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521 along the peripheral wall portion 2501. and a second guide passage 2522 extending along the The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated left and right. In addition, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are laterally adjacent to each other and open obliquely downward and to the right along the arc above the right rail 1005 .

The guide path group 2520 is positioned above the gate section 2003 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5 . In addition, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly below the lower end of the impinging portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B that have hit the impinging portion 1006 are first guided. It is configured to enter passageway 2521 .

Further, the center accessory 2500 protrudes rightward from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and has a lower right guide passage 2530 that guides the game ball B from above to the right and then releases it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance opening upward across the front width in the left-right direction, and an exit opening obliquely downward to the left with a width of one game ball B.

This lower right guide passage 2530 has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 in the state assembled to the game board 5 and is positioned between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600 . Therefore, between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged.

According to the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is located at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it becomes the outer edge, the inner side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (inside the frame of the center role 2500) can be relatively wide, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 and the back unit can be displayed through the frame of the center role 2500. The decoration of 3000 can be made more visible.

In addition, since the supporting portion 2503 projecting inward is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. As a result, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the part of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support part 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection mold without being deformed.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 protrudes short from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided on the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided behind the back. It is possible to reduce hindrance to the visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000, the effect image of the effect display device 1600, and the like. In addition, the center accessory 2500 such as the support part 2503 is transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are positioned as close as possible to the rear surface of the center accessory 2500. is arranged, it is possible to suppress blurring of the decorations of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 on the rear side due to the lens effect of the transparent center accessory 2500. - 特許庁For this reason, according to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the visibility of the decorative body or the like provided in the rear can be improved, and the decorative effect thereof can be reliably exhibited.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 and the like are made transparent and the support part 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body capable of emitting light decoration and the effect display device 1600, the light emitted from them can be used for the light emitting decoration, and the appearance is improved. can do. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, the back front left effect unit 3700 and the effect display device 1600 in the back unit 3000 are provided behind the support portion 2503 (the cross-hatched portion in FIG. 135). The LED of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 in the back front left effect unit 3700, the light emitted forward from the effect display device 1600, etc. is transmitted, reflected, refracted, or diffused to create a gorgeous light emitting decoration. can be shown to the player. It should be noted that the support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like, and the step or the like can diffuse the light from the rear, thereby making the display more gorgeous.

In addition, by providing the support portion 2503, there is provided a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. In the near portion, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501 . As a result, the game area of the plurality of obstacle nails N can be made as wide as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to enjoy the original game.

In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has the same shape as the inner peripheral shape of the opening portion 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. is provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the support part 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, compared to the case where the support part 2503 is provided over the entire circumference, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be further expanded. It can be widened, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear can be made more visible. In other words, if the non-distribution area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 is to be made to look larger, the support portion 2503 is provided along a portion of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided behind in a front view.

The edge of the support portion 2503 may be formed in the same shape as the front cover 3711 (decorative shape) of the back front left effect unit 3700 provided on the rear side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the support portion 2503 from conspicuously lowering the decorativeness of the rear decorative body due to the support portion 2503 being different from the rear decoration. can increase

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position close to the back front left decorative body 3030 of the back unit 3000 and the back front left effect unit 3700, which are provided at the rear, so that these decorations are displayed by the lens effect. Although the one that suppresses blurring is shown, it is not limited to this, and the support part 2503 is provided near the front end of the peripheral wall part 2501 away from the rear unit 3000 at the rear. The back front left decorative body 3030 of the back unit 3000 and the back front left effect unit 3700 may be intentionally made to appear blurred.

In the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an opening 1112 penetrating therethrough, and the rear side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. However, this is not the case. However, the peripheral wall portion 2501 may have no rear portion to be inserted into the opening 1112. In this case, it may be attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112. . Also, when the center role 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112, the support part 2503 may be attached to the game panel 1100. In this case, the center role 2500 is not provided with the flange part 2502. You can do it.

[5-8f. Second Attacker Unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129 and the like. 128(a) is a front perspective view of the second attacker unit, the side middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit, and (b) is the second attacker unit, the side middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the gate member from the back. FIG. 129 is an explanatory view showing a cross-section of a game ball path in the second attacker unit and the side middle unit.

The second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is arranged on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is attached to the front surface of panel plate 1110 in panel 1100 . The second attacker unit 2600 has a second big prize winning opening 2006 openable to the left (see FIG. 129).

The second attacker unit 2600 includes a second large winning hole sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second large winning hole 2006, and a magnetic sensor that detects an illegal timing acting near the second large winning hole 2006. 2602 and . In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second large winning opening door 2611 for opening and closing the second large winning opening 2006 and the second large winning opening door 2611 to close the second large winning opening 2006. A second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, a transmission member (not shown) that transmits the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second large winning opening door 2611, and the second large winning opening 2006 and a guide passage 2613 for guiding the received game ball B and releasing it backward.

The second attacker unit 2600 has a second large winning opening 2006 that opens leftward from the center in the left-right direction toward the right, and a second large winning opening 2006 that closes the second large winning opening 2006 from the left. A winning entrance door 2611 is provided.

The second big winning entrance door 2611 has a semicircular lower side that bulges downward, a right side that extends linearly upward in contact with the right end of the lower side, and a left side that bulges out from the upper end of the right side. and an arc-shaped left side in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second prize winning door 2611 has a cylindrical rotating shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction around the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape, and a link projecting in a columnar shape rearward from a position distant from the rotating shaft. A pin (not shown) is provided. The second big prize winning opening door 2611 is attached so that the lower rotating shaft can rotate so that the upper end moves to the left.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger protrudes downward. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates the base portion attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 and extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so that the link pin of the second big winning opening door 2611 can slide. It has a slit to be inserted, and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The second attacker unit 2600 is positioned so that its right side is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front structural member 1000 in the state assembled on the game board 5, and the peripheral wall portion of the second prize winning opening 2006 and the center accessory 2500. A space in which the game ball B can flow is formed between the right side of 2501 . In addition, when the second attacker unit 2600 is assembled on the game board 5 , the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 .

In the normal state, the second attacker unit 2600 has the second attacker solenoid 2612 in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second large prize winning opening door 2611 is upright, and the second large winning prize opening 2006 is closed by the second large winning prize opening door 2611 . In other words, in a normal state, the game ball B cannot be accepted into the second big winning hole 2006.例文帳に追加

In this normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the second When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (turned on), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second big winning door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member pulls up. At the same time, by sliding in the slit, the second big winning opening door 2611 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the rotating shaft 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the second large prize winning opening door 2611 moves leftward, the second large winning prize opening 2006 opens leftward, and the right end side of the second large winning prize opening door 2611 becomes lower. It will be in a tilted state. That is, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the falling game ball B abuts on the second big winning gate door 2611 , it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is received by the second big winning gate 2006 . The game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2006 is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2601, then guided by the guide passage 2613 and discharged backward. The game ball B released rearward from the guide passage 2613 is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 and discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8g. Side right center unit]
Next, the side right center unit 2700 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129 and the like. The side right center unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a and attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . This side right middle unit 2700 has one general prize winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012 .

The side right center unit 2700 has a general winning opening 2001 that is always open upward with a width of one game ball B in the left and right direction, and is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001, and the left and right direction is the game ball. A second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with a width of two spheres B.

In addition, the side right center unit 2700 includes a first guide passage 2701 that guides backward the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a second guide passage 2701 that guides backward the game ball B received in the second sub-out opening 2012. two guide passages 2702; The first guide path 2701 extends rearward from the general prize winning opening 2001, bends rightward, and further bends rearward to form a crank shape. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out port 2012 more than the first guide passage 2701 and then bends rearward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are arranged vertically.

In this side right center unit 2700, when assembled on the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. there is

In addition, the side right center unit 2700, in a state assembled on the game board 5, has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front structural member 1000, and a lower end substantially in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600, Between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, a space is formed in which the game ball B can flow. In this side right center unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 opens upward at a position slightly to the left of the second big winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It is open upward over substantially the entire space (see FIG. 130, etc.).

The side right center unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide passage 2701, It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the unit 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is detected by the general prize winning port sensor 3051 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In addition, the side right center unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 by the second guide passage 2702, and then the back unit provided behind. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guiding unit 3050 at 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 128 and the like. The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right center unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is The gate member 2800 includes a gate portion 2003 for performing a lottery for the ordinary lottery result that opens and closes the second starting port 2004 when the game ball B passes through, and a gate sensor for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate portion 2003. 2801 and . A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate portion 2003 .

The gate member 2800 has a guiding piece 2802 projecting obliquely downward to the left from near the right end of the bottom surface. The guiding piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 to the lower left. This guide piece 2802 is inclined so that its extension line passes through the vicinity of the left end of the general prize winning opening 2001 in the side right center unit 2700 in the state assembled to the game board 5 .

The gate member 2800 is positioned substantially in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front structural member 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in a state assembled to the game board 5, and is positioned on both left and right outer sides of the game board. A gap is formed through which the sphere B can flow. This gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the right above the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115, 130 and the like. FIG. 130 is an enlarged explanatory diagram of the right part of the game area in FIG. 115 . In the state assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in both the right and left outer portions and the lower portion of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG. A windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300 .

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center role 2500 mainly enter the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W for the game ball B struck on the left side of the center role 2500.例文帳に追加, and is adjusted to enter a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability. As a result, the game ball B can enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 with a certain probability by hitting it so as to flow down the left side of the center role 2500 .

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate member 2800 are more difficult than the game ball B which has circulated through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. It is adjusted so that the game ball B that has passed through the second guide path 2522 on the left side of the guide path group 2520 passes through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability. In addition, the plurality of obstructing nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are mainly adjusted so that the game balls B flow through the left side of the gate member 2800 rather than the right side thereof. ing.

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are mainly adjusted so that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 .

In the game area 5a, a game ball B is guided by an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 and hit upward along the periphery of the game area 5a from the left side. When the game ball B is hit so as to circulate on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. N is guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and the part on the left side of the center of the windmill W has a lower probability than these. induced to enter the

The game ball B guided to the left part of the center of the windmill W is guided rightward by the shelf part 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200 . Then, there is a possibility that it will be accepted in the three general prize winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 . The game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then is guided to the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. 3064 , and after being detected by the general prize winning slot sensor 3051 , it is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 . When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3051, the privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided. A game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W is hardly accepted by the first starting port 2002 . Then, the game ball B that has not been received by the general winning hole 2001 is discharged from the out hole 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is moved to the center in the horizontal direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N diagonally arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It may be guided to the side and accepted into the first starting port 2002 . In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general prize gate 2001 of

A game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512 . The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the center release portion 2513a is located directly above the first start port 2002, so there is a high probability that it will be the first ball. It is received in the starting port 2002 . When the game ball B is released from the side release portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release portion 2513a, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a certain degree of probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is detected by the first starting port sensor. After being detected by 3052 , it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 . When the game ball B is detected by the first starting hole sensor 3052, a lottery for the first special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received by the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

In addition, the game ball B that circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003, or is received by the second starting port 2004, the first big prize winning port 2005, and the second big prize winning port 2006. There is no possibility of being taken.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the probability that the game ball B hit to the right side of the center role 2500 is accepted in the second start opening 2004 is higher than that of the game ball B hit to the left side of the center role 2500 The probability of being accepted at the first starting port 2002 is set higher. As a result, when the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is not open, it is possible to prompt the operation of hitting the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500 ("left hitting").

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is moved with such a force that the game ball B enters above the portion of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that is lowered toward the right from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction. When hit, the game ball B circulates through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 .

More specifically, the game ball B is struck with a strength that makes contact with the impinging portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 that constitutes a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B in contact with the impingement portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521 . The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is released downward at a position slightly rightward from the position just above the gate portion 2003 .

A game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is caught by a plurality of obstructing nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 to the left side of the gate member 2800, the gate portion. 2003 and the right side of the gate member 2800 are guided so that the probability decreases in order, and flow down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 emitted downward from The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide path 2522 is guided such that the probability of the gate part 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 is substantially the same, and the probability of the right side of the gate member 2800 is lower than them. and flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

A game ball B that has passed through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received in the second sub-out port 2012 . The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and after being delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, the second sub-out port sensor After being detected by 3054, it is discharged outside the game area 5a. Also, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is released to the side right center unit 2700 after being detected by the gate sensor 2801 . When the game ball B is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery for a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes is performed.

A game ball B passing through the left side of the gate part 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of hitting the side right center unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right center unit 2700. It flows down the left side of , and is sometimes accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 or rarely accepted in the second sub-out opening 2012 . The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then delivered to the eighth delivery opening 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, After being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3051 , it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 . At this time, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

A game ball B flowing down the left side of the right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and enters the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. flows down the left side of

At this time, when the game ball B is accepted by the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, the second big prize is won. Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted by the second big winning opening 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2006 is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2601, and after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a, the game ball B in the back unit 3000 The substrate is transferred to the seventh transfer port 3067 of the back guide unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 . When the game balls B are detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2601, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

The game ball B, which was not accepted in the second big prize-winning hole 2006 and flowed down to the left of the second big prize-winning hole 2006, enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 and exits the lower right guide passage 2530. to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 downward (diagonally lower left) flows down onto the first shelf 2412 a of the first attacker unit 2400 . In addition, since a plurality of obstructing nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B can directly enter the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf portion 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls leftward due to its inclination, and the upper surface of the door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 and the second shelf portion 2412b. After rolling, it is released leftward from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b falls on the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 according to its momentum, and the inclination of them After rolling leftward from the door portion 2417a to the fourth shelf portion 2412d, it is discharged to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400 from the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it may reach the upper shelf 2412p without flowing down to the first shelf 2412a by coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N. It may run down. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf portion 2412p rolls leftward due to its inclination, is released leftward from the left end of the upper shelf portion 2412p, and hits the obstacle nail N planted leftward. After contacting and turning downward and flowing down near the left end of the upper surface of the door portion 2417a in the first grand prize opening door 2417, the door portion 2417a and the fourth shelf portion 2412d roll leftward and the first It is released outside the attacker unit 2400 . Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, depending on the timing when the game ball B is released from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing when the first big winning opening 2005 opens, It may be accepted in the winning slot 2005 .

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it bounces rightward due to contact with the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf 2412p, and the first shelf 2412a. By flowing upward, the first shelf 2412a may roll rightward against its inclination and be discharged rightward (downward) from the right end of the first shelf 2412a. The game ball B released to the right from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a passes between the first standing wall portion 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and flows down near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. Then, it rolls leftward due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m and is received by the first sub-out port 2011. As shown in FIG. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and then passes through the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a. , and discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When the game ball B is discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the passing of the game ball B through the gate part 2003 results in the lottery of "ordinary hit" as the ordinary lottery result, the second start. Since the opening door 2414 is moved and the second start opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling leftward on the first shelf 2412a is accepted by the second start opening 2004. there is a possibility. When the game ball B is received by the second starting hole 2004, it is detected by the second starting hole sensor 2401 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, a lottery for the second special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided.

Also, when the game ball B is released to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b, the game ball B is accepted in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery As a result, when a "big hit" is drawn, the first big prize opening door 2417 moves and the first big prize opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the ball is released to the left from the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B will be accepted into the first big winning hole 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2005 is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game balls B are detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402, the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is provided.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b, by contacting the step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p, it flows down diagonally to the right and the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412b. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf 2412c. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h and reaches near the left end of the second lateral wall portion 2412m. It falls, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and is received in the first sub-out port 2011.例文帳に追加

The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is received by any of the second start opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2011. If not, it is discharged downward behind the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a from the out port 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a.

For this reason, in order to open and close the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006, the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 is made to receive the game ball B, and "small win". It is necessary to draw a lottery for the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result such as "big hit". While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 needs to allow the game ball B to pass through the gate part 2003 to draw a "normal hit" as a normal lottery result. Therefore, the chances of receiving the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 are lower than the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, in a normal state, the player hits the game ball B so that the game ball B can be received by the first starting port 2002 and the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500. The operation can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first start port 2002 can be enjoyed. It can raise expectations for the acceptance of

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first start opening 2002, and a "small hit" or "big hit" is drawn as a result of the first special lottery, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006. is opened and closed, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right-handed" so that the game ball B can be received in the first big prize hole 2005 or the second big prize hole 2006, and the first big prize hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 to increase the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and the guide passage for circulation facilitates passage through the gate section 2003. , the second sub-out port 2012 can be easily received, so that the game ball B can be adjusted in striking strength so that the game ball B circulates in a desired guide passage, and the game ball B can be adjusted to the player. B's driving operation can be enjoyed.

In addition, by performing "right hitting", by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, the second start opening 2004 is in an open state "normal hit" may be drawn, and the open state To increase the expectation for a game and to suppress the decrease in interest because a ``small win'' or a ``big win'' may be drawn by receiving a game ball B in a second starting port 2004.例文帳に追加can be done.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. 131 is a front perspective view of the back unit of the game board, and FIG. 132 is a rear perspective view of the back unit of the game board. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the performance display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the back wall and having a box shape with an open front. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600 is provided.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a flat plate-like back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, and a flat plate-like back front right decorative body 3040 provided below the front end inside the back box 3010. a back guidance unit 3050 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010; a back bottom left effect unit 3200 and a back bottom right effect unit 3250, and a back bottom middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back upper effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back rear effect unit 3100 in the upper part inside the back box 3010, and a back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. a back rear left effect unit 3500, a back rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decoration 3040 in the back box 3010, and a back front left decoration 3030 and back rear left A back front left effect unit 3700 provided between the effect unit 3500 and a back front right effect unit provided between the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800 and .

[5-9a. back box]
The back case 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 . In the back box 3010, the back front left decoration body 3030, the back front right decoration body 3040 and various production units are installed, and the production display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are installed on the rear side. This back box 3010 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall and a plate frame-like shape protruding rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a at intervals. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b into which upper fixing pieces 1601b of the effect display device 1600 are inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A cutout portion 3010d is provided near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction from the rear end to the rear wall of the back case 3010 and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . Also, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the performance display device 1600 to be fitted within the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear side as viewed from the rear so as to be slidable to the left and right.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting decorations, production units, etc., at appropriate positions.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a strip-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. The reinforcing plate 3011 reinforces the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b.

[5-9b. Back front left decoration and back front right decoration]
Next, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of the pachinko machine showing an enlarged upper left corner of the game board with the door frame made transparent. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 so as to be separated from each other to the left and right.

The back front left decorative body 3030 includes a flat base 3031 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3032 attached to the front surface of the base 3031 . The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 , and the left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 . Although illustration is omitted, the decoration seal 3032 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The back front left decorative body 3030 is formed opaque, and can make the rear member invisible from the front.

The back front right decorative body 3040 includes a flat base 3041 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3042 attached to the front surface of the base 3041 . The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to near the center in the vertical direction, and the right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 . Although illustration is omitted, the decoration sticker 3042 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The back front right decorative body 3040 is formed opaque and can make the rear member invisible from the front.

The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extend in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outside, is located outside the game area 5a in a front view when assembled on the game board 5. (See FIGS. 111 and 135, etc.). Furthermore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are formed in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outside, is located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. extended to

More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, in a front view, the back front left decorative body 3030 is positioned halfway from the bottom of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 provided at the upper left corner of the back rear left effect unit 3500. It is extended to the position of In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward beyond the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 .

As a result, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the lower half of the back left lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered with the back front left decorative body 3030 (the shaded portion in FIG. The elevation drive motor 3554 can be made difficult to see. In addition, in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 is outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (the hatched portion in FIG. 135). Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3 can make the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 invisible from the player side. Therefore, functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the back front left decorative body 3030 can be made invisible from the player side, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. can do.

In addition, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554, and in the state assembled to the game board 5, the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 is extended. A part (upper half) can be seen from the front, but by assembling it to the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered with the door frame 3 and hidden. Therefore, it is not necessary to extend the back front left decorative body 3030 so as to cover the entire back rear left lifting drive motor 3554, and it is possible to suppress the back front left decorative body 3030 from being unnecessarily large, thereby pachinko. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outside the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the upper left corner of the front structural member 1000 when viewed from the front, the function display unit The back front left decorative body 3030 can be used instead of 1400 to hide the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 (functional component) and the like provided at the rear.

On the other hand, the back front right decorative body 3040 extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 in the back rear right effect unit 3600 in a front view, and has a transparent front. Even through the component 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is invisible from the front (player side). Therefore, the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved by making the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 invisible from the player side. , and effects similar to those of the back front left decorative body 3030 can be exhibited.

As described above, according to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the present embodiment, at least part of the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided on the rear side are covered. Therefore, it is possible to make the functional parts hard to see from the player side, and to improve the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

In addition, as described above, since the front of the functional parts provided in the rear can be covered by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Also, the functional parts can be made invisible from the player side. That is, the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, the transparent front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 make it possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, thereby giving the player a sense of openness and the actual game area 5a. Although the size does not change, it is possible to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player. At this time, the parts of the decorative seal 3032 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the decorative seal 3042 of the back front right decorative body 3040, which are decorated with a predetermined decoration, are located outside the game area 5a. Since it can be visually recognized from the front through them, the outside of the game area 5a can be decorated with them, and the game area 5a can be made to appear larger than it actually is, so that the game can strongly attract the player's interest. It can be a board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as described above, the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, so that the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000 and the back unit can be made transparent. 3000, etc., can be reflected or refracted forward (toward the player) by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. It can be displayed, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

In addition, functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided in the rear can be accessed from the player side by the portions of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 that are extended outside the game area 5a. Since it can be made invisible, all the functional parts may be provided outside the game area 5a when viewed from the front. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, the size of the game area 5a is relatively reduced in order to secure a space for providing all the functional parts outside the game area 5a. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, part of the functional parts are placed outside the game area 5a with a balance that allows the game area 5a to be large with respect to the size of the game board 5. It is desirable to have

Moreover, it is desirable that the decorations of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 are decorations related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a when viewed from the front. As a result, the design in the game area 5a can be extended to the outside of the game area 5a by the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. The pachinko machine 1 can make the 5a appear larger than it actually is and can strongly attract the player's interest.

[5-9c. Back guidance unit]
Next, the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 136 and the like. FIG. 136(a) is a front perspective view of a back guide unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit. The back guide unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end inside the back box 3010, and is formed in such a shape that both ends extending to the left and right are bent upward. The back guide unit 3050 is formed substantially entirely transparent.

The back guidance unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening sensor 3052 that detects the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, An out-port sensor 3053 for detecting the game ball B received in the out-port 2010, a second sub-out port sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012, and a warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500. and a magnetic sensor 3055 that is provided at a portion behind the and detects an illegal magnetism.

In addition, the back guidance unit 3050 is received in the first delivery port 3061 to which the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 is delivered, and the general winning port 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. A second delivery port 3062 through which the game ball B is delivered, a third delivery port 3063 through which the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 on the middle side of the side unit 2200 is delivered, and a general delivery port on the left side of the side unit 2200. A fourth delivery port 3064 where the game ball B received in the winning port 2001 is delivered, and a fourth delivery port 3064 where the game ball B accepted by the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 are delivered. The fifth delivery port 3065, the sixth delivery port 3066 where the game ball B received in the first large winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered, and the second large winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 A seventh delivery port 3067 where the received game ball B is delivered, an eighth delivery port 3068 where the game ball B accepted by the general winning port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is delivered, and the side right middle unit 2700 A ninth delivery port 3069 through which the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is delivered.

Further, the back guidance unit 3050, although not shown in detail, guides the game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 to the right and then discharges it downward. The game ball B delivered to the delivery port 3062 and the game ball B delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are merged and delivered to the second discharge path and the fourth delivery port 3064. A third discharge path that guides the game ball B downward and discharges it obliquely to the lower right, and a position below the sixth delivery port 3066 for the game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 and a fourth discharge path for guiding the liquid to the left to a position on the left side of the sixth delivery port 3066, and then discharging the liquid obliquely downward to the left. A fifth delivery port 3065, a sixth delivery port 3066, a seventh delivery port 3067, and a ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with the fourth discharge path.

The game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and delivered to the first delivery port 3061 is discharged downward after being detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path. be done. A game ball B received by the general winning port 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the second delivery port 3062, and a game ball B received by the general winning port 2001 on the middle side and delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are played. The ball B joins with the second discharge path and is discharged downward after being detected by the general prize winning opening 2001 . The game ball B received by the general prize winning port 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general prize winning port 2001 in the middle of the third discharge path. .

The game ball B received by the second starting port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 and transferred to the fifth delivery port 3065, and the first big winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 The game ball B delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 and the game ball B accepted by the second big winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 are the fourth It is discharged through the discharge channel.

The game ball B received by the general prize winning port 2001 of the side right center unit 2700 and delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is upstream of the part communicating with the ninth delivery port 3069 in the fourth discharge path. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054, then merges with the fourth discharge path, It is discharged through four discharge channels.

This back guidance unit 3050 is provided with an out ball detecting member 3080 for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 2010. - 特許庁The out-ball detection member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a and received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006. To detect the game balls B received in the out port 2010 opened at the lower end of the game area 5a among the game balls B that did not receive the privilege (game balls B to which no privilege was given, also referred to as "out balls"). belongs to.

The out-ball detection member 3080 is inserted from the rear into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100, and includes a tubular portion 3081 extending in the front-rear direction so that the game ball B can flow, and the tubular portion 3081. A partition portion 3082 that divides the interior into left and right, a flange portion 3083 projecting in the left-right direction from the outer periphery of the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081, and a game ball B that is continuous with the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081 and is positioned downward. and a rear cover 3084 that can be guided to and ejected (see FIG. 114). Out ball detection member 3080 is provided with out opening sensor 3053 between cylindrical portion 3081 and rear cover 3084 .

The cylindrical portion 3081 has substantially the same size as the out port 2010, and has a width in the left-right direction that allows two game balls B to be lined up sufficiently (a width that does not allow three game balls B to line up), and a lower inner surface It slopes down toward the rear. The partition part 3082 is provided in the vicinity of the rear end of the cylinder part 3081, and is partitioned into a size through which one game ball B can pass on both left and right sides. The front end of the partition 3082 is curved so as to protrude forward as it goes downward, and is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B and protrudes forward.

In the out-ball detection member 3080, two out-hole sensors 3053 are provided side by side on the left and right. The left outlet sensor 3053 detects the game ball B that circulates on the left side of the partition 3082 in the tubular section 3081, and the right outlet sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition 3082 in the tubular section 3081. It detects a game ball B that has been distributed. The out port sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

The two outlet sensors 3053 are provided so that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the lower inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3081 . As a result, the circulation direction of the game ball B circulating in the cylindrical portion 3081 does not change even at the portion of the outlet sensor 3053, so the game ball B can be smoothly detected by the outlet sensor 3053. can be discharged quickly to prevent it from staying in front of the outlet sensor 3053 .

This out-ball detecting member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5, and the cylindrical portion 3081 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 114).

When the out-ball detection member 3080 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper front end of the cylindrical portion 3081 protrudes forward beyond the rear end of the out-guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (see FIG. 114). That is, the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 3081 . Also, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 through the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 .

This out ball detection member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a, and then is guided backward by the out guide portion 1003 and is received in the out port 2010. The game ball B passed through the cylindrical portion 3081 is detected by one of the two outlet sensors 3053, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 to be discharged. The out ball detecting member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharged ball receiving portion 628 of the body frame 4 without contacting the board holder 1200 .

According to the out-ball detection member 3080 of this embodiment, the partition 3082 separates the two out-hole sensors 3053 provided on the left and right, so that the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 is detected. The game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be guided to the right side of the out sensor 3053 side while being guided to the left side of the out side sensor 3053 . Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the player tends to "hit left" or "hit right" according to the number of game balls B detected per hour by the left and right outlet sensors 3053, respectively. Based on the determination, it is possible to encourage the player to perform the most suitable driving operation for the game situation, thereby allowing the user to enjoy the intended game.

In addition, in the out-ball detection member 3080, the forward projection of the partition part 3082 is shortened to make it easier for the game ball B to get over, so when many game balls B enter the out port 2010 per time, the partition is detected. The game ball B can be released to the left side or the right side of the part 3082 where the circulation amount of the game ball B is relatively small, and the game ball B can be discharged at the out port 2010 without delay.

In addition, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 protrudes below the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, The game ball B received by the second big winning hole 2006, the first sub-out hole 2011, and the second sub-out hole 2012 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 is reversed by the out ball detection member 3080 and is detected by the out hole sensor 3053. It is possible to prevent being detected, and it is possible to accurately detect only the "out ball" received in the out port 2010. - 特許庁

In this embodiment, the out-ball detection member 3080 is provided in the back unit 3000 , but the configuration is not limited to this, and the out-ball detection member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100 . At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recess 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so that the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1123 can be supported. In addition, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.例文帳に追加

Further, according to the present embodiment, it is driven into the game area 5a, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 Since the game ball B (“out ball”) that has not been accepted by any of them can be detected by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054, for example, a specific winning If the game ball B is continuously detected in the mouth, but the "out ball" is not detected, it means that a particular winning hole is being cheated. It is possible to report that a fraudulent act is being carried out.

In addition, since the number of "out balls" can be counted by detecting "out balls", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening The number of "winning balls" and the number of "out balls" counted by detecting the game ball B accepted in 2006, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first large From the number of "safe balls" paid out by accepting game balls B into the winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006, the "ball output rate" of the pachinko machine 1 can be known. Although not shown, a display section for displaying the "ball output rate" is provided on the rear side of the game board 5. As shown in FIG.

Also, in the game board 5, all game balls B ("whole ball") hit into the game area 5a are detected, or all game balls B ("whole ball") ejected from the game area 5a are detected. ), the out-out sensor 3053, the first sub-out sensor 2403, and the second sub-out sensor 3054 detect only the "out ball". ” and “global ball”, it is possible to detect the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5 .

[5-9d. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141 and the like. FIG. 137(a) is a front perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit, and FIG. 137(b) is a back perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the back-after effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the after-behind effect unit as seen from the back. FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the movable structure of the back effect unit. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back effect unit.

The back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost part (the front surface of the back wall) in the back box 3010 . The back-side effect unit 3100 has a U-shape opened downward when viewed from the front, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010 . The back-side effect unit 3100 includes a back-side movable decorative body 3110 extending in the left-right direction, and a back-side movable mechanism 3120 for moving the back-side movable decoration body 3110 in the vertical direction.

The back rear movable decoration 3110 includes a transparent plate-like decoration 3111 extending in the left-right direction and having a relief-like decoration on the front surface, and a plurality of first decorations provided behind the decoration 3111 and on the front surface. It has a rear rear decoration substrate 3114 on which LEDs 3114a and a second LED 3114b are mounted, and a decoration base 3115 attached to the decoration 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the rear rear decoration substrate 3114. - 特許庁The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the rear decorative substrate 3114 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. A plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b of the back decoration substrate 3114 can light-embellish the decoration 3111 (back movable decoration 3110).

In addition, the back rear movable decoration 3110 includes a left slider 3116 vertically extending on the left side of the decoration 3111 and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decoration 3111 . The left slider 3116 has a movable protrusion 3116a protruding leftward from near its lower end, a locking protrusion 3116b protruding leftward from near its upper end in a triangular shape, and a detection piece 3116c provided at its upper end. have.

The back rear movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U-shape that opens downward when viewed from the front. A slide shaft 3122 that supports the left slider 3116 of the back and rear movable decoration 3110 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a slide shaft 3122 that extends vertically in parallel with the slide shaft 3122 on the left side of the slide shaft 3122. and a spiral shaft 3123 in which a shaped groove is formed.

In addition, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3124 attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3125 meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and the motor gear 3125 as a rotating shaft. A rear rear drive motor 3126 attached, a motor base 3127 mounting the rear rear drive motor 3126 to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and an upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 rotatably mounted to the unit base 3121. A bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123 are provided.

In addition, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a slide guide 3130 which is screwed to a spiral shaft 3123 and can abut against the movable projection 3116a of the back rear movable decoration 3110 from below, and a slide guide 3130 on the left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 that extends vertically and is capable of moving up and down, the lower end of which can contact the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 that biases the transmission slider 3131 upward, and the transmission slider 3131 a link member 3133 that rotates around an axis in the front-rear direction due to the elevation of the link member 3133; It has

Further, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a back rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, a rear rear lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, A front left cover 3137 attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and a right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 from the front. Attached front right cover 3138 and back rear drive motor 3126 attached to the front lower part of the front left cover 3137, back rear upper detection sensor 3135, back rear lower detection sensor 3136 and connection of effect drive board 1720 and the back rear left relay board 3139 that relays the connection between the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138 and the back rear decoration board 3114 of the back rear movable decoration 3110 and the effect drive board 1720. and a rear right relay board 3140 that is relayed.

The unit base 3121 has an impact absorbing member 3121a that abuts against the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 that has moved downward to absorb the impact. The upper end and lower end of the slide shaft 3122 are sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 .

The slide guide 3130 has a detection piece 3130 a that protrudes rightward from the vicinity of the lower end and is detected by a back rear bottom detection sensor 3136 . The slide guide 3130 is vertically slidable between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 , and is prevented from rotating about the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by coming into contact with them. The upper end surface of the slide guide 3130 can be brought into contact with the lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 . The lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can contact the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 .

The transmission slider 3131 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be vertically movable. A front left cover 3137 allows the transmission slider 3131 to move vertically only within a predetermined range. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower protrusion 3131a protruding rightward on the lower end side, an upper protrusion 3131b protruding rightward on the upper end side, and a columnar shape protruding rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the upper protrusion 3131b. and a protruding pin 3131c. In the transmission slider 3131, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can contact the upper surface of the lower projection 3131a. Moreover, the transmission slider 3131 has a projecting pin 3131c slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 .

The spring 3132 has an upper end attached to the unit base 3121 and a lower end attached to an upper protrusion 3131b of the transmission slider 3131, thereby urging the transmission slider 3131 upward.

The link member 3133 is formed in a triangular shape in which each vertex is R-chamfered when viewed from the front. The link member 3133 is attached to the unit base 3121 near one vertex so as to be rotatable about the longitudinal axis. The link member 3133 has an elongated first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left vertex of the rotation axis, and an elongated slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the vertex above the rotation axis. It has a second slit 3133b. In the link member 3133, the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

Lock member 3134 is attached between unit base 3121 and front left cover 3137 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by front left cover 3137 .
The locking member 3134 protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, forms a transmission pin 3134a slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and forms a flat upper end face, and extends in the left-right direction. The contact surface 3134b, which extends and can contact the lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110, is inclined so as to move leftward as it goes downward from the right end of the contact surface 3134b, and a guide surface 3134c with which the locking projection 3116b can abut.

The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to support the right slider 3117 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 so as to be vertically slidable.

Next, the operation of the back effect unit 3100 will be described. 140 (FIG. 141(a)), the rear back effect unit 3100 is in a retracted position in which the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward, and the slide guide 3130 is in a normal state. is positioned near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 is moved to the right and positioned at the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the back movable decoration 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is in contact with the back movable decoration. The lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of 3110 abuts.

In a normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is positioned at the upper end of movement due to the biasing force of the spring 3132 . Since the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, the spring The biasing force of 3132 acts on the link member 3133 in the clockwise direction around the rotation shaft, and biases the lock member 3134 in the direction of sliding rightward. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained at the lock position by the biasing force of the spring 3132 .

In this state, the downward movement of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is restricted by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134 . Therefore, even if one of the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134 moves from the corresponding position for some reason (malfunction), the remaining can prevent the downward movement (fall) of the back movable decorative body 3110. can.

In a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is positioned above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b into which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. located to the right of the axis. Further, the rear upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the rear rear lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130. FIG.

The rear rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the upper rear effect unit 3400 in the normal state of the retracted position, and is invisible from the front (player side).

In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise direction in plan view) by the rear rear drive motor 3126, the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 is moved downward. move to Even if the slide guide 3130 moves downward, the locking protrusion 3116b of the back movable decorative body 3110 is in contact with the locking member 3134, so the movable back decorative body 3110 cannot move downward from the retracted position. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward away from the movable projection 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110 .

Then, when the slide guide 3130 moves downward due to the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123 and the detection piece 3130a is detected by the rear-rear-lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 moves to the lower projection 3131a of the transmission slider 3131. It abuts on the upper end surface (see FIG. 141(b)). When the slide guide 3130 moves further downward while the back-rear-bottom detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward, The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the biasing force of the spring 3132 .

As the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 into which the projecting pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise around its rotation axis. It will rotate in the direction of rotation. As the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and the transmission pin 3134a inserted into the second slit 3133b The lock member 3134 moves leftward (see FIG. 141(c)).

When the locking member 3134 moves to the left of the locking protrusion 3116b of the back movable decoration 3110, the locking (downward regulation) by the locking member 3134 is released, and the back movable decoration 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, which is moving downward, is in a non-detection state with respect to the rear rear bottom detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the rear rear driving motor 3126 is stopped.

Then, the dropped rear back movable decorative body 3110 comes into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121, thereby stopping the falling and being in the appearance position (see FIG. 141(c)). In this appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is positioned below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the back movable decoration 3110, and the back movable decoration 3110 does not come into contact with it.

In the back-back effect unit 3100, the back-back movable decoration 3110 can be visually recognized from the front (player's side) in the appearance position where the back-back movable decoration 3110 has fallen. In this state, the back movable decoration 3110 (decoration 3111) can be decorated with light emission by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back decoration substrate 3114 to emit light. A player can be entertained by the luminous decoration.

When the rear movable decorative body 3110 is returned from the appearance position of the lower movement end to the retracted position in the normal state, the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in the reverse direction (here, clockwise in plan view) by the rear rear driving motor 3126. direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 due to the biasing force of the spring 3132 . As the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 rotates clockwise and the lock member 3134 moves rightward and stops at the lock position. Become.

In addition, as the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower projection 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable projection 3116a upward. By pressing the back movable decorative body 3110 upward (see FIG. 141(d)).

Then, when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward to the vicinity of the retracted position by the slide guide 3130, the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 from below. When the locking projection 3116b contacts the guide surface 3134c from below and pushes the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c exerts a force to move the lock member 3134 to the left. As a result, the lock member 3134 slides rightward against the biasing force of the spring 3132 that moves rightward through the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133 .

When the locking projection 3116b is positioned above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 due to the upward movement of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the upward pressure of the locking projection 3116b against the guide surface 3134c disappears. The locking member 3134 slides rightward by the biasing force of the spring 3132 to reach the locked position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is positioned below the locking projection 3116b of the back movable decoration 3110, and the lock member 3134 prevents the back movable decoration 3110 from moving downward. can be regulated.

At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 is detected by the rear rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the rear rear driving motor 3126 is stopped. In this way, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can return from the appearing position to the retracted position, which is the normal state.

According to the rear back effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 extending to the left and right can be dropped from the retracted position invisible to the player to the appearing position visible to the player. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

In addition, since the locking member 3134 that locks (regulates) the back rear movable decorative body 3110 in the state of the retracted position is moved to the left to release the lock, it can be rotated around the longitudinal axis. Compared to the case where the lock is released by moving, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward when the lock is released.

[5-9d-1. Back rear movable decoration]
Next, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 in the back-back effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. FIG. FIG. 142 is a front view showing the rear movable decorative body together with the rear decorative substrate. 143(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. FIG. 144(a) is a front perspective view of the rear movable decorative body, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rear movable decorative body. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back movable decorative body as seen from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the back movable decorative body as seen from the rear. 147 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 148 is an explanatory view showing the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate in the front view of FIG. 147 with dashed lines. FIG. 149(a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back rear movable decorative body, and (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body in (a), (c) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration substrate in the same part as the decoration of (a).

FIG. 150 is an enlarged sectional view showing an enlarged upper portion of FIG. 143(a). 151 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 exploded. FIG. 152 is an explanatory view showing the relation between the decoration by the decorative body and the decorative sheet, the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the rear movable decorative body. FIG. 153(a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate at the position of the first LED, and FIG. 153(b) shows the position of the second LED on the optical axis of the first LED. FIG. 10C is an explanatory view showing from the front the action of the light guide radiation plate at the part where the light guide radiation plate is formed, and (c) is an LED housing part of the light guide radiation plate with respect to the second decoration part of the decoration body and the decoration sheet, and the second decoration substrate behind the back It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement|positioning of one LED from a front. FIG. 154 is a front view showing an enlarged part of the back decoration substrate together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. FIG. 155(a) is a front view of the rear decorative substrate, and FIG. 155(b) is a rear view of the rear decorative substrate. FIG. 156(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back movable decorative body, and (b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative part with a form different from that of (a). It is an enlarged cross-sectional view, and (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion of a form further different from those of (a) and (b).

As shown in FIG. 142 and the like, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction, and is provided with a decorative portion 3150 having a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. More specifically, the decorative portion 3150 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 includes two first decorative portions 3151 provided near both left and right ends in a front view, and two first decorative portions 3151 arranged in the horizontal direction between the two first decorative portions 3151. and a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row. Each of the first decorative portions 3151 imitates one cherry blossom. In addition, although illustration is omitted, the second decoration part 3152 imitates a predetermined character, and is arranged in rows on the left and right, so that the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, pachinko) A predetermined logo is formed in line with the world view of the machine 1 (game board 5). In this way, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is decorated with a logo between two cherry blossoms.

As shown in FIGS. 142 to 146 and the like, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back rear effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction and forms a part of the decoration part 3150 with relief-like unevenness. and a translucent part (region) provided behind the decoration body 3111 and constituting the rest of the decoration part 3150 and having decoration (pattern) applied. A sheet-like decorative sheet 3112 having a transparent portion (area), a transparent plate-like light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the decorative sheet 3112, and a light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113. A rear decorative substrate 3114 having a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “surface (mounting surface)”) and the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 A plate-shaped decoration base 3115 attached to the decoration 3111 so as to cover it, a left slider 3116 extending vertically on the left side of the decoration 3111, and a right slider extending vertically on the right side of the decoration 3111. A slider 3117 is provided.

In addition, the part number of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114, the surface of the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic components are arranged, etc. Indicates the attributes of the electronic component on the front side (may also include the shape of the electronic component on the front side, the size of the electronic component on the front side, the mounting orientation of the electronic component on the front side (mounting direction), and the type of the electronic component on the front side). The surface-side inscription portion is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and a translucent portion ( A sheet-like decorative sheet 3112 having a transparent portion (area), a transparent plate-like light guide radiation plate 3113, and a rear decoration substrate 3114 are arranged in this order. Although there are portions (regions) having properties, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 by silk printing is not applied to the light guide radiation plate 3113, the sheet-like decorative sheet 3112, and the It is visible through the decorative body 3111, and in a state where the first LED and the second LED are turned off, the area corresponding to the part (area) having translucency and the color of the predetermined paint is visible, it is only possible to confirm the existence of the predetermined paint color, and it is not possible to determine whether the predetermined paint color indicates a character or symbol or a shape. On the other hand, if the region corresponds to the transparent part (region) and the predetermined paint color can be seen, characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the surface indicated by the surface side inscription portion) (attributes of side electronic components) can be discriminated.

[5-9d-2. Decorative body of the rear movable decorative body]
The decorative body 3111 has flat general surfaces on the front side and the rear side. The decorative body 3111 includes a first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward from a general surface on the front side, a second decorative protrusion 3111b shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and protruding forward, and a second decorative protrusion 3111a. and a third decorative protrusion 3111c that is shorter than the portion 3111b and protrudes forward. The first decorative protrusion 3111 a is provided at a portion that forms the contours of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 . The first decorative protrusion 3111a in the first decorative portion 3151 is formed on the outer periphery of the petals of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms and on the part imitating the stamen and pistil in the center, respectively. . The first decorative protrusion 3111a at the second decorative portion 3152 is formed so as to surround the outer circumference of each second decorative portion 3152 in a double (two-line) manner. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is curved such that the front surface bulges forward.

The second decorative projection 3111 b is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 . The second decorative projection 3111b is shaped like a cherry blossom or petal smaller than the first decorative portion 3151 . The second decorative protrusion 3111b is curved such that the front surface bulges forward.

The third decorative projection 3111c is provided within the frame of the first decorative projection 3111a. The third decorative projection 3111c corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 has a curved front surface. The third decorative projection 3111c corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 has a flat front surface.

The first decorative projection 3111a and the third decorative projection 3111c of the decorative body 3111 constitute part of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 of the decorative portion 3150, respectively.

In addition, the decorative body 3111 has a metallic luster at a portion of the first decorative projection 3111a that protrudes forward from the second decorative projection 3111b (first foil stamping region (see FIG. 156(a))). It has a metal decoration portion 3111d (a dark shaded portion in FIGS. 147 to 149). The decoration body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent except for the metal decoration portion 3111d. As shown in FIGS. 150 and 156(a), the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment is provided on the curved front portion of the first decorative projection 3111a. is not provided on the side of the As a result, the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration part 3111d of the decoration body 3111 to the rear decoration substrate 3114 can be made longer than when the metal decoration part 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. It is possible to improve the insulation against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a projecting forward, the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d can impart a sense of quality. In addition, the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative projection 3111a can be emphasized by the curvature of the metal decorative portion 3111d. The metal decorative portion 3111d is provided in the second decorative portion 3152, as shown in FIG. is made difficult to see from the front.

In addition, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the light from the first LED 3114a and the like of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is emitted by the rear surface (rear surface) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. The light can be reflected backward to illuminate the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided in the rear, and the decoration (first outline portion 3112a) of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible.

The metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by hot-stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). More specifically, first, an intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is formed by injection molding of synthetic resin. The intermediate product of the formed decorative body 3111 is mounted in a predetermined position of a hot stamping device with the front side where the first decorative protrusions 3111a and the like protrude upward. At this time, above the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat plate-shaped hot plate whose lower surface side is elastic and heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged. . Then, the hot plate is lowered to a predetermined distance downward from the upper end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111 (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative protrusion 3111b), and the hot plate is lowered. The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil stamped) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. As a result, a metal decoration portion 3111d is formed in the portion of the first foil stamping region FS1 above (in front of) the second decoration protrusion 3111b of the decoration body 3111 (see FIG. 156(a)). .

The hot plate of the hot stamping device used for forming the metal decoration portion 3111d of the present embodiment has elasticity at the portion of the transfer sheet that contacts the decoration body 3111 to which the metal foil is transferred. Even if the front surface of the first decorative projection 3111a) is not flat but curved, it can be elastically deformed along the surface, and the metal foil can be kept in a good state even on a three-dimensional shape such as a curved surface. It can be transferred (foil stamped) with As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily formed without requiring large-scale equipment compared to the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, the decoration body 3111 is provided with the metal decoration portion 3111d only at the tip portion of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by a hot stamping device, the hot plate is lowered to a position lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c, thereby forming the first decorative protrusion. A decoration body 3111 can be formed by providing a metal decoration portion 3111d at the tip portions of the portion 3111a and the second decoration protrusion 3111b.

Alternatively, in a state in which the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is mounted on the hot stamping device, the hot plate is first pressed using a transfer sheet having a metal foil of a predetermined color (first metal foil). It is lowered to a position (second foil stamping area FS2) that is lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the tip portion of the second decorative protrusion 3111b Transfer metal foil. Subsequently, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) of a color different from the first metal foil, the hot plate is set lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. It is lowered to the position (first foil stamping area FS1) to transfer the second metal foil to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (see FIG. 156(b)). As a result, the decoration body 3111 having the metal decoration parts 3111d of different colors for the first decoration protrusion 3111a and the second decoration protrusion 3111b is formed without masking the intermediate product of the decoration body 3111. be able to.

Moreover, in the above embodiment, the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil stamping), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after forming a metal film on the surface of the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 by plating or vapor deposition, the metal film is peeled off (laser peeling) at a portion other than the first decorative projection 3111a by laser light. Alternatively, a decoration body 3111 having a metal decoration portion 3111d on the first decoration protrusion 3111a may be formed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 156(c), the metal decoration portion 3111d may be provided not only on the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a but also on the side surface thereof.

The decorative body 3111 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a rear concave portion 3111e that is concave forward from the general surface on the rear side. The rear recessed portion 3111e is provided so as to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. The plate thickness of the decorative body 3111 is made uniform by the recess 3111e after this, so that deformation due to shrinkage of the resin during injection molding can be suppressed.

The rear recessed portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be recessed forward at portions corresponding to the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, and the third decorative projection 3111c on the flat rear surface. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear recessed portion 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of the first outline portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, which will be described later. As a result, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 are in close contact with each other, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. The pattern of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly visually recognized through the transparent decorative body 3111. - 特許庁

In addition, since the rear recessed portion 3111e is provided at a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, it is located in front of the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112, which will be described later. provided in the part. As a result, a gap is formed between the rear concave portion 3111e and the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112, and the light emitted from the front to the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is blocked by the gap. , the light is irregularly reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the light from the front brightens the rear recess 3111e. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114 are not illuminated, the light from the front causes the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112, that is, , a first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom and a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 forming a logo are brightened and easily visible from the front.

Furthermore, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface. The attachment boss 3111f is for attaching the decoration base 3115 to the rear side of the decoration 3111 . The mounting boss 3111f is provided at a portion immediately behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c. This makes it difficult to see the attachment boss 3111f from the front (player's side) due to the lens effect of the third decorative protrusion 3111c. In other words, the third decorative projection 3111c is provided in front of the mounting boss 3111f, and the lens action of the third decorative projection 3111c makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Decorative sheet for back movable decorative body]
The decorative sheet 3112 is a thin sheet and has an outer shape approximately the same size as the outer shape of the decoration 3111 . The decorative sheet 3112 is a transparent resin sheet with a pattern on the rear surface. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 at a portion of the decorative body 3111 excluding the rear portion of the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151. and a second contour portion 3112b provided at a portion between the first decorative projections 3111a corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 and formed in duplicate on the decorative body 3111, a first light diffusing portion 3112c provided at a portion corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 and inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decoration body 3111 (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c); A second light provided in a portion inside the first decorative projection 3111a provided doubly on the decoration body 3111 corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 (a portion behind the third decorative projection 3111c). and a diffusion portion 3112d.

In addition, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transparent portion 3112e provided behind the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, and the third decorative projection 3111c of the decorative body 3111. have.

The first outline portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, as shown in FIG. It is a part where light interference fringes are displayed by a hologram. The first outline portion 3112a is formed opaque. In this embodiment, the portion of the hologram in the first outline portion 3112a is the same gold color as the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111 . In addition, the part imitating the cherry blossoms in the first contour part 3112a is white or pink (pink in this embodiment is the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) It is colored according to the view).). It should be noted that the ink (paint) used for the pattern or the like may be one having glitter particles.

The first outline portion 3112a is located outside and behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. Since it has a portion of the same color (gold in this embodiment) as the decorative portion 3111d, it is possible to impart continuity to the decoration of the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, the perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be emphasized, and the thinness of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made difficult to perceive.

Further, the first outline portion 3112a is formed in bright gray or white on the rear surface side. This improves the coloring of the pattern and hologram on the front side. In addition, the light emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be reflected back to the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light gray or white back surface of the first contour portion 3112a, so that the light guide radiation Since the plate 3113 can be made to emit brighter light, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted forward from the light-transmitting portion of the decorative sheet 3112, so that the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be decorated with brighter light. In addition, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be decorated with more uniform light emission.

Furthermore, since the first contour portion 3112a is provided outside the first decorative projection 3111a and the second decorative projection 3111b of the decoration 3111, the rear surface of the decoration 3111 is flat except for the rear recess 3111e. Located behind the part. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into close contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a, so that light is emitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. There is no irregular reflection, and the design and hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111. - 特許庁

The second outline portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed in a black linear shape with a predetermined width as shown in the drawing. The second outline portion 3112b is positioned behind a portion of the second decorative portion 3152 between the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portions 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 provided doubly. In other words, since the black second outline portion 3112b is provided between the gold metal decoration portions 3111d that are formed in two layers, the black color of the second outline portion 3112b complements the double metal decoration portions 3111d. The decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be further enhanced.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has translucency and is formed of a plurality of minute projections and depressions capable of disturbing light. Specifically, the first light diffusing portion 3112c is formed in a pear-skin-like pattern by a plurality of short linearly extending ridges in random directions. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149(b) and the like, in the first light diffusing portion 3112c, in one petal of a cherry blossom flower modeled by the first decorative portion 3151, light is emitted from the center to the peripheral edge of the petal. A predetermined color (this embodiment (Pink) is applied by printing. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 for emitting light from behind to the first light diffusion portion 3112c emits light, the pear-skin pattern of the first light diffusion portion 3112c causes a slight Therefore, the luminous decoration of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom can be given a three-dimensional effect.

The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 has translucency and is formed of a plurality of fine unevennesses capable of disturbing light. The second light diffusing portion 3112d is provided entirely inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative portions 3152, as indicated by the light and shade hatching in FIGS. It is The second light diffusing portion 3112d has translucency and is formed of a plurality of fine unevennesses capable of disturbing light. A plurality of fine unevennesses forming the second light diffusion portion 3112d are formed in a dot-like pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the present embodiment is formed in translucent milky white. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 for emitting light from behind to the second light diffusing portion 3112d emits light, the halftone dot pattern of the second light diffusing portion 3112d emits a predetermined amount of light. The second decorative portion 3152 consisting of characters can be illuminated with uniform brightness.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind the portion of the decorative body 3111 that is inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the rear surface of the portion of the decorative body 3111 is provided with a rear recessed portion 3111e recessed forward. Therefore, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed in the front surface of the decorative body 3111 due to the presence of the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 at the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d. state. Due to this gap, the light irradiated from the front to the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is diffusely reflected between the front surface of the decoration sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the light from the front is the primary light. The diffusion part 3112c and the second light diffusion part 3112d become bright. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decoration substrate 3114 are not illuminated, the light from the front will cause the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decoration sheet 3112, that is, , a first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom and a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 forming a logo are brightened and easily visible from the front.

The decorative sheet 3112 forms a predetermined pattern by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d, and the decoration of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is formed. The portion 3150 except for the decoration by the decorative body 3111 constitutes the remainder. In the decorative sheet 3112 of this embodiment, the first outline portion 3112a, the second outline portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d are provided on the rear surface side of the transparent base sheet. there is The first outline portion 3112a and the second outline portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. Also, the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by attaching a predetermined light diffusion film (diffuser film). Note that the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d may be lens films or prism films.

A transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed transparent. Since this transmitting portion 3112e is provided behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 emits light from the light guide radiation plate 3113. A part of the light emitted forward can be transmitted and irradiated to the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative projection 3111a projecting forward, the metal decoration 3111d is provided only on the front side, and the side faces remain transparent. The light irradiated to the first decorative protrusion 3111a leaks to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. As a result, the light transmitted through the transmitting portion 3112e can provide the player with a luminous decoration that looks like a halo is shining on the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d). In addition, the first outline portion 3112a located outside the first decorative projection 3111a can be illuminated from the front by the light transmitted through the transmission portion 3112e and radiated to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative projection 3111a. Therefore, the patterns and holograms provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be made more visible, and the decorative effect of the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exhibited.

Since the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or a hologram can decorate up to the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111. The decoration of the back rear movable decoration 3110 can be made to look larger. Since the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered. At the same time, the performance display device 1600 provided on the rear side displays a performance image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, so that the player can see a performance with a sense of unity, thereby playing the game. The visual impact can be given to the player to attract attention, and the large decoration can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest of the player.

In addition, in the decorative sheet 3112 of the above-described embodiment, the transparent transmitting portion 3112e is provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) of the decorative body 3111, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, the first outline portion 3112a may also be provided at a portion behind the metal decoration portion 3111d. As a result, when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear side can be seen through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112. , the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be prevented from becoming poor. In addition, by providing the first contour portion 3112a to the rear portion of the metal decoration portion 3111d, the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decoration body 3111 passes through the first decorative protrusion of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a can be seen, the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated with the portion of the first outline portion 3112a, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be used as the first decorative protrusion. Even if it is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiating plate of rear movable decorative body]
As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a transparent plate-like main body portion 3113a extending left and right, a flange portion 3113b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3113a, and a main body portion 3113a. A plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c that pass through the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and into which the first LEDs 3114a of the rear decoration board 3114 are inserted; A plurality of second LED housing portions 3113d into which the second LEDs 3114b are inserted, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and a first LED housing portion on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. It has a leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the peripheral edge of 3113c, and an auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g provided along the rear edge of the leg portion 3113f on the side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c. .

The light guide radiation plate 3113 also has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the right end of the main body portion 3113a when viewed from the front.

The body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface with which the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112 abuts. The flange portion 3113b protrudes rearward by about 1.5 times the thickness of the body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the rear end of the flange portion 3113b protrudes further rearward than the rear decorative substrate 3114 when assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110 .

The first LED housing portion 3113c has a rectangular inner peripheral shape. As shown in FIG. 148, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided behind the low-transparency portion of the decorative portion 3150 when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. More specifically, in the region of the first decorative portion 3151, a plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided behind the region where the first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 is darkened in pink due to the dots. ing. More specifically, the first LED housing portion 3113c provided in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is positioned closer to the center than the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom. The center of the long side of the rectangular inner periphery is positioned on the center line of the petal.

On the other hand, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c provided in the second decorative portion 3152 are provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second outline portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. It is For this reason, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c (first LEDs 3114a) are difficult to see from the front.

Also, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113 c are provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decorative portion 3152 at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 . Moreover, when the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are close to each other to some extent, the respective first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other as shown in FIGS. It is formed in a By connecting the first LED housing portions 3113c that are close to each other, it is possible to avoid forming a portion thinner than the thickness of the main body portion 3113a, and damage the light guide radiation plate 3113. can be difficult.

By the way, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c has a rectangular inner periphery and penetrates through the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a inside (within the plate thickness) of the main body portion 3113a reaches the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light is A part of the light is reflected straight toward the inside of the main body 3113a by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, and the rest of the light passes through the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and passes through the first LED accommodating portion. 3113c will be radiated inside. Then, when the light radiated inside from one of the four inner peripheral surfaces of the first LED housing portion 3113c reaches another inner peripheral surface, part of the light on the surface reaches the first LED housing portion 3113c. The light is reflected inward, and the remainder enters the main body 3113a. That is, in the interior of the main body portion 3113a, when the light that is guided in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a tries to pass through the first LED housing portion 3113c, it is radiated inside the first LED housing portion 3113c. Part of the light is reflected by the portion of the inner peripheral surface and the portion of the inner peripheral surface that is incident on the main body portion 3113a side of the first LED housing portion 3113c. , the amount of light is greatly reduced compared to before passing through.

As such, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can block the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a. In addition, since the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is housed inside the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light that is about to pass through the first LED housing portion 3113c can be blocked by the first LED 3114a. In the portion where the first LED 3114a is accommodated, light does not pass to the opposite side of the first LED accommodation portion 3113c. Accordingly, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at an optimum position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decorative portion 3152, the light from the first LED 3114a accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is It is possible to prevent the light from being guided to another second decoration part 3152 to be decorated with light emission, and it is possible to surely decorate only the desired second decoration part 3152 in the plurality of second decoration parts 3152 with light emission. .

More specifically, the operation of the first LED housing portion 3113c as described above is described. For example, as shown in FIG. In order to illuminate the decoration, a first LED housing portion 3113c is provided on the outer periphery of each second decoration portion 3152, and light is irradiated toward the inside of the second decoration portion 3152 in each first LED housing portion 3113c. A first LED 3114a is provided so that the In this embodiment, since the first LED housing portions 3113c provided between "i" and "ro" and between "ro" and "ha" are close to each other, they are connected to each other. is a single hole. As a result, the body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 does not have a thin portion that is easily damaged. Further, in this embodiment, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the first LED 3114a for decorating the "☆" placed below the "I" are provided below the "☆". Therefore, if the first LED 3114a for illuminating the "☆" is illuminated, there is a risk that the "I" provided above the "☆" will be illuminated. A first LED housing portion 3113c housing a first LED 3114a for decorating part of the letter "I" with light emission is provided with an extending portion 3113j extending so as to cover the top of the "☆". ing. The extending portion 3113j can reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for luminous decoration of "☆" from being guided to the "I" side. As a result, even if "☆" is decorated with light emission, "I" is not decorated with light emission. In addition, the extension 3113j can reduce (block) the light for luminous decoration of "I" from being guided to the "☆" side. Only the desired second decorative portion 3152 such as “I” or “☆” can be reliably illuminated, and the desired rendering effect can be fully exhibited.

The second LED accommodating portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference as shown in FIG. 152 and the like. The plurality of second LED housing portions 3113d are provided behind five circular portions resembling stamens provided around the center of the first decorative portion 3151 resembling a cherry blossom. More specifically, the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided in each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms behind circular portions resembling stamens positioned on the center line of the petals. Thus, in each of the five petals, one first LED housing portion 3113c and one second LED housing portion 3113d are provided on the center line of the petal.

The second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner periphery and penetrates through the main body portion 3113a. Accordingly, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a inside (within the plate thickness) of the main body portion 3113a reaches the second LED housing portion 3113d, the light is A portion of the light is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing portion 3113d so as to diffuse into the inner side of the main body portion 3113a in a fan shape. In this embodiment, in each of the five petals of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom, the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a. As shown, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the inside of the main body portion 3113a is reflected in a fan shape toward the first LED 3114a by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing portion 3113d. The light can make the petals more brightly luminous and decorated.

One of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e is formed in the shape of a quadrangular pyramid, and is arranged in a row so as to be continuous in the vertical and horizontal directions. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e are formed on the rear surface of the body portion 3113a except for the portion of the flange portion 3113b, the portion around the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, and the portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed almost all over the surface. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e can mainly reflect forward the light irradiated in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the main body portion 3113a, and radiate the light forward from the front surface of the main body portion 3113a. The light guide radiating plate 3113 of this embodiment is formed so that it is difficult to visually recognize the rear when viewed from the front due to the existence of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e.

In addition, since the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface. Even if the design of the decoration part 3150 made up of the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 is changed due to a change or the like, there is no need to change the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the design change or the like can be easily dealt with, and the cost is reduced. can be suppressed.

The leg portion 3113f protrudes rearward from the rear end side of a portion of the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that faces the light emitting surface of the inserted first LED 3114a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the leg portion 3113f has a surface on the side of the first LED housing portion 3113c that is flush with the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. As a result, the area of the light receiving portion 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body portion 3113a can be widened, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted into the main body portion 3113a. can be done. In addition, when the leg portion 3113f is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear surface thereof abuts the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114, and a gap is formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114. can be formed.

The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is provided in a chamfered shape along the side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c at the rear end of the leg portion 3113f. The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is for reflecting forward the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the leg portion 3113f.

The right slider front portion 3113h is for forming a right slider 3117 in cooperation with a right slider rear portion 3115d of the decoration base 3115, which will be described later.

When the light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the flange portion 3113b covers the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, the flange portion 3113b covers the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 It is possible to make the surface difficult to see and prevent the appearance from becoming poor. In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flange portion 3113b that protrudes rearward from the rear decorative substrate 3114, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 extends from the rear decorative substrate. The creeping distance EL to 3114 (copper foil 3114d and electronic component 3114e) can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the rear decoration substrate 3114, and the rear decoration substrate 3114 is damaged. You can prevent it from being lost.

In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are holes penetrating the main body portion 3113a. The heat from the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed in the second LED housing portion 3113d can be released to the front of the main body portion 3113a, and the thermal effect on the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

Further, since the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed as through holes, the front sides of the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are blocked by the decoration sheet 3112, the decoration body 3111, and the like. However, compared to the case where the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed in a bottomed concave shape (groove shape) that does not penetrate, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d The volume (heat capacity) of 3113d can be increased. As a result, a rapid temperature rise due to heat from the housed first LED 3114a and second LED 3114b can be mitigated, and the thermal influence on the rear decorative substrate 3114 and the like can be suppressed. In addition, in the first LED housing portion 3113c that is closely connected to each other and the first LED housing portion 3113c that has the extending portion 3113j, the volume of the first LED housing portion 3113c is large. For the same reason as above, more heat can be radiated from the first LED 3114a, and a rapid temperature rise can be mitigated.

In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED housing portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from behind. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a can be brought as close to the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 as possible. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has leg portions 3113f projecting rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the rear ends of the leg portions 3113f can be brought into contact with the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114. , a gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113 a and the front surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 . As a result, the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 can be released through the gap, and the temperature rise in the back decoration substrate 3114 can be suppressed to prevent the influence of heat. can be reduced. In addition, the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the substrate main body 3114c of the back decoration substrate 3114 is set from "half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a" to "from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the second The distance to the front surface of one LED 3114a" is desirable. This is because if the gap is smaller than this, the heat may not be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the rear decorative substrate 3114. FIG. Further, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident on the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the first LED 3114a decreases, so that the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a fear that it will not be possible to decorate it.

In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 guides the light from the first LEDs 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions of the rear decorative substrate 3114, and directs the light forward by the reflecting portion 3113e on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. Since the light can be radiated forward, the light from the first LED 3114a can be radiated forward even in a portion where the rear decorative substrate 3114 is not provided on the rear side of the main body portion 3113a. In other words, even if the rear decorative substrate 3114 is made smaller than the size of the body portion 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the body portion 3113a. Therefore, since the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made smaller than the main body portion 3113a, the distance between the outer periphery of the main body portion 3113a and the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made longer. By increasing the creeping distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface, it is possible to make it easier to exhibit the above effects.

[5-9d-5. Back-back decoration substrate of back-back movable decoration]
On the front surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114, a plurality of surface-mounted and side-view type first LEDs 3114a, a plurality of surface-mounted and top-view type second LEDs 3114b, and a surface-mounted type connector 3114g (in FIG. 155(a), one surface mount type connector 3114g is arranged on the right side of the surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114). Each package of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector 3114g has a white (natural color) housing. It is also said to be made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as the natural color). Electronic components 3114e (see FIG. 155(b)) such as an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) and a resistor are mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 . The back decoration board 3114 has a flat board main body 3114c, and a copper foil 3114d (see FIG. 154, etc.).

In addition, on the surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114, a first LED 3114a (surface mounting type), a second LED 3114b (surface mounting type), and a connector 3114g (surface mounting A white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid white resist") over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. where the type) is soldered. ) forms a white resist layer. On the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114, there are provided pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which the area on the rear surface (rear surface) of the substrate main body 3114c where electronic components 3114e (surface mount type) are mounted is soldered. A white resist layer is formed by solid white resist over the entire area except for the area. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114, although not shown, front surface electronic components such as the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the connector 3114g are mounted in the vicinity of the front surface electronic components. attributes of front-side electronic components such as the part number of the front-side electronic component, the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is placed (furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction), may include the type of electronic parts on the front side) is silk-printed on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less noticeable against white printed by Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114, the part numbers of the back side electronic components and the positions where the back side electronic components are arranged are shown near the back side electronic components such as the electronic component 3114e. Attributes of back-side electronic components such as areas (may also include back-side electronic component shape, back-side electronic component size, back-side electronic component mounting orientation (mounting direction), and back-side electronic component type) ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less noticeable than white.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. While the written part (the red written part on the back side of the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the structure of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow color is inconspicuous, and the surface When the side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous against the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light emission effects by means of illumination by light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are arranged as described above. Second, it is a full-color LED that can emit light in multiple colors, and its light emission mode changes in various ways when it is turned on (lighted) or turned off. For this reason, on the surface (front) of the back decoration substrate 3114, as described above, the pad to which the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the connector 3114g are soldered, which is the surface (front) of the substrate main body 3114c, A white resist is formed by applying a white resist solution to the entire area except for through holes and lands (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A layer is formed, and furthermore, on this solidly coated white resist, a surface side notation part that enables identification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is printed with a yellow paint by silk printing, so that multicolor light emission In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side marking part inconspicuous with respect to the white resist when the full-color LED is turned off, in addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor is turned on (at the time of light emission) , a solid white resist with high reflectance, and a surface-side marking section printed by silk printing with a yellow paint that is very close to the reflectance of white. ) can maintain a high reflectance.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

The rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape that substantially follows the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and has a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b between it and the flange portion 3113b. It is formed to have a substantially constant size. In addition, the rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, which will be described later. It is formed in a size that is formed to be constant. In other words, the rear decoration substrate 3114 is sized to be accommodated inside the flange portion 3115 b of the decoration base 3115 .

At the first decorative portion 3151 of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, as shown in FIG. It is provided so that light is emitted toward the center of the flower near the tip inside (the metal decorative portion 3111d). As a result, the first LEDs 3114a in the first decorative portion 3151 can light-embellish each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms.

In addition, at the part of the second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, in each of the second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right, the first decorative protrusions provided doubly on the decorative body 3111 It is provided near the rear of 3111a so that light is emitted toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152 . As a result, the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right sides can be illuminated one by one by the first LEDs 3114a of the second decorative portion 3152 .

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are arranged in a circular portion resembling stamens positioned on the center line of the five petals in the center resembling a cherry blossom in the first decorative portion 3151. located at the rear. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a corresponding to one petal imitating a cherry blossom in the first decorative portion 3151 . As a result, the five central stamen-like portions of the first decorative portion 3151 can be decorated with light emission by the second LEDs 3114b.

Since the second LED 3114b is a top-view type that can irradiate light forward, when the second LED 3114b emits light, the part that imitates the stamen in the central part of the first decorative part 3151 is illuminated more than the other parts. It is possible to emit point light with high luminance, and to strongly attract the player's interest. Therefore, in the light-emitting decoration of the decorative portion 3150, it is possible to provide a portion that emits planar light from the first LED 3114a and a portion that emits point-like light from the second LED 3114b. A variety of lighting effects can be performed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

The substrate main body 3114 c is a rigid substrate slightly thinner than the main body portion 3113 a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 . The substrate main body 3114c of this embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the substrate body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to have a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and forms a circuit pattern by etching (shaded portion in FIG. 154). As shown in FIG. 154, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is separated inward from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (SL=1 mm in this embodiment). ing. With this predetermined distance SL, the creepage distance EL and the spatial distance from the conductive member (for example, the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111) outside the back decoration substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d are increased, thereby discharging static electricity and the like. Insulation against short circuits can be enhanced, and damage to the back decoration substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, the outer peripheral edge of the copper foil 3114d is provided from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c to a portion within a predetermined distance, and the area of the copper foil 3114d is made as wide as possible. As a result, part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e can be transferred to the copper foil 3114d, so that the heat can be dissipated from the copper foil 3114d. , and the electronic component 3114e can be prevented from being damaged by heat.

In addition, the rear decorative substrate 3114 has a predetermined width for facilitating forward reflection of the light emitted from the first LED 3114a toward the substrate main body 3114c on the light emitting surface side of the side-view type first LED 3114a on the front side. (the area surrounded by the dashed line in FIG. 154). As shown in FIGS. 151 and 153(a), the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of this embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d. As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted. 1. The angle of the light emitted from the LED 3114a into the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is close to the vertical line of the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c, so that the light emitted to the substrate main body 3114c side can be easily reflected forward. can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 153(a) and the like, the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, and the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is Since they are in contact with each other, the leg portion 3113f can be lengthened rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be enlarged, the light (light amount) emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be increased, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) can be decorated with brighter light emission.

In addition, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 abuts within the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f (see FIG. 153(a), etc.). As a result, even if the white coating (white resist) applied to the surface is worn or flipped due to the contact of the leg portion 3113f, only the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c is exposed, and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. never do. Therefore, the exposure of the copper foil 3114d lowers the insulating properties, and damage due to short circuit such as static electricity can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 3113b and 3113b, the outer periphery is double-enclosed, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surface from the outside, thereby preventing the appearance from deteriorating. In addition, in a state in which the rear decorative substrate 3114 is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the outer circumference of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. In addition, the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115 is inserted from the rear into the gap between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface of the decoration 3111 to the rear decoration substrate 3114 is the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115. Since it meanders around, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the rear decoration substrate 3114, and the rear decoration substrate 3114 is damaged. can be prevented. In this embodiment, the creepage distance EL is set to 10 mm or longer, or to a distance capable of supporting a discharge voltage of 10 kV.

In addition, since the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the back rear decoration substrate 3114 allows the member provided behind the back rear movable decorative body 3110 (in this embodiment, Light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 from being irradiated with the light from the effect display device 1600 or the like provided behind, so that the decorative portion 3150 may be illuminated in an unintended state. The rear movable decorative body 3110 can be caused to reliably perform the desired light emission effect. In addition, since the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the rear decorative substrate 3114 can prevent the rear from being seen through the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the rear movable decoration can be prevented. The deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110 can be suppressed.

In addition, the rear decorative board 3114 has only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, which are accommodated from behind with respect to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113, provided on the front surface. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be brought as close as possible to the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 has electronic components 3114e such as an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) and a resistor mounted on the rear surface. An LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit), a resistor, and the like as the electronic component 3114e are generally black components. The electronic component 3114e can be made invisible, and the appearance of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be improved. In addition, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114, which cannot be seen from the front, it is not necessary to apply white or other color paint to the electronic component 3114e to make it difficult to see. The cost of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

[5-9d-6. Back rear movable decoration base]
The decoration body base 3115 is formed transparent as a whole. The decoration base 3115 includes a plate-like cover plate portion 3115a that covers the rear side of the rear decoration substrate 3114, a flange portion 3115b that protrudes forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover plate portion 3115a, and a cover plate portion 3115a that extends through the cover plate portion 3115a. and a right slider rear portion 3115d extending downward from the right end of the covering plate portion 3115a in front view.

The cover plate portion 3115a has an outer peripheral shape that substantially follows the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed between the outer periphery of the flange portion 3113b and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b. It is formed in a size that That is, the covering plate portion 3115a (decorative body base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. As shown in FIG. Since the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered by the covering plate portion 3115a, it is possible to protect the rear decorative substrate 3114 by preventing other members from coming into contact with the rear decorative substrate 3114 from behind. It is possible to prevent damage to the rear decorative substrate 3114 .

As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3115b enters the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114, and extends forward beyond the rear decorative substrate 3114. protrudes so that the The flange portion 3115b is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114, and makes the outer peripheral surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 difficult to see from the outside, thereby improving the appearance. In addition, when the flange portion 3115b is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the flange portion 3115b is inserted into the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114. The shortest route from the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface of the decoration 3111 to the rear decoration substrate 3114 can meander around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115. Out. Therefore, the creeping distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be prevented from flowing to the rear decorative substrate 3114 and damaging the rear decorative substrate 3114.

The plurality of openings 3115c has a slit-shaped portion that is elongated in the left-right direction and a portion that is larger than the slit-shaped portion. The plurality of openings 3115c allow the heat from the electronic components 3114e mounted on the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 to escape to the outside of the rear movable decorative body 3110. can be reduced.

The right slider rear portion 3115d is for forming the right slider 3117 in cooperation with the right slider front portion 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113 .

In addition, the decoration base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e that slightly protrude from the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a. The plurality of projections 3115e are arranged so as to abut on the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114, near the outer periphery thereof, where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. A gap can be formed between the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a by bringing the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 into contact with the front surfaces of the plurality of protrusions 3115e. . As a result, heat from the electronic component 3114e can be easily released through the gap between the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main functions and effects of back-rear movable decorative body]
Next, main functions and effects of the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 in this embodiment will be described. The back rear movable decorative body 3110 of this embodiment has a decorative sheet 3112 sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration. The mounting bosses 3111f of the decoration 3111 are attached to the decoration base 3115 while the back decoration substrate 3114 is sandwiched between the decoration base 3115 and the decoration base 3115 (see FIG. 143, etc.). As a result, the back movable decorative body 3110 has a relatively thin thickness in the front-rear direction.

The back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a transparent plate-like decorative body 3111 and a first decorative projection 3111a, a second decorative projection 3111b, and a third decorative projection 3111c projecting forward, Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first outline portion 3112a with the hologram that displays the pattern and the interference fringes of light, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 Thus, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c can impart a three-dimensional effect, and the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c provide a lens effect. and a hologram can give a sense of depth. As a result, even if the back movable decorative body 3110 is thin in the front-rear direction, the player does not feel thinness, and the decoration effect of the decorative part 3150 of the back movable decorative body 3110 is sufficiently obtained. It can be displayed to entertain the player.

In addition, as described above, the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, the third decorative projection 3111c, the first contour portion 3112a, and the like can impart a three-dimensional effect and a sense of depth. , the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner. As a result, the space required for installing the back movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the back movable decorative body 3110 can be increased, and the inside of the game board 5 can be positioned more effectively. By providing the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the pachinko machine 1 that entertains the players can be easily realized. In addition, since the back movable decorative body 3110 can be made thin, it is relatively easy to secure a space for arranging other decorative bodies. To provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of providing a pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance, providing a pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining various performances, and being highly appealing to players and capable of further differentiation. can do.

The back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative portion 3111d made of metal foil on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. Therefore, the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be made conspicuous by the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. In addition, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the metal decoration portion 3111d can be given a three-dimensional effect and a high-class feeling. As a result, when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves from the retracted position invisible to the player to the appearing position visible to the player, the luxurious decorative part 3150 can be seen, giving the player a premium feeling. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly think that something good will happen, and to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a flat rear surface of the decorative body 3111, and the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the outer circumference of the decorative body 3111. , the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated, and the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made to look larger. In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 of the back movable decorative body 3110 has substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearing position, the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear displays a performance image that is continuous with the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110, thereby playing a performance with a sense of unity. It is possible to show the decorations to other people, to give a visual impact to the players to attract their attention, to make them enjoy the large decorations, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the players.

In addition, since the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a behind the metal decorative part 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour part 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112, the metal decorative part 3111d and the second The two contoured portions 3112b can make it difficult to see the first LED 3114a from the front, thereby suppressing deterioration of the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 and sufficiently exhibiting the decorative effect.

Furthermore, since the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 3114a so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152, the first decorative portion 3151 , and the second decorative portion 3152 can be individually decorated with light emission. As a result, the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right sides can be illuminated in order, or only specific first decorative portions 3151 and second decorative portions 3152 can be illuminated, By properly lighting up the first decoration part 3151 and the plurality of second decoration parts 3152, it is possible to show the player various lighting effects, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decline in interest. can.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 irradiates light in the direction along the surface within the plate thickness of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the side-view type first LED 3114a. The light from the first LED is radiated forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 because the light is radiated forward by the reflecting portion 3113e of the first LED and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are decorated with light. distance can be increased. As a result, the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, even if the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction is thin, the decorative body 3111 The decorative sheet 3112 can be evenly and uniformly decorated with light, and the player can be entertained by the good-looking light-emitting decoration. In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the side-view type first LED 3114a can uniformly illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be increased. The pachinko machine 1 that can be made thin and has the above-described effects can be reliably embodied.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has the first LED 3114a of the side-view type used for planar light emission, and the second LED 3114b of the top-view type. ), it is possible to add a part that emits light with high brightness in a dotted manner by the second LED 3114b to the part that is planarly decorated with the first LED 3114a. As a result, since the light emission of the second LED 3114b can give a sharpness to the light emission effect, the optimum light emission effect corresponding to the game state can be easily presented, and the player can be more entertained and the game can be played. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a first LED housing portion 3113c into which a side-view type first LED 3114a is inserted in the light guide radiation plate 3113, so that light is received by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. The portion 3113i is irradiated with light from the first LED 3114a so that the light enters the inside of the main body portion 3113a. As a result, by providing the first LED housing portion 3113c at a position close to the desired portion to be decorated with light emission by the first LED 3114a, the desired portion can be decorated with brighter light emission, resulting in a more dramatic effect. The player can be entertained by the luminous decoration with high brightness.

Furthermore, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED housing portion 3113c into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear side of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the accommodation portion 3113d is provided, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a can be changed to the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodation portion 3113c and the second LED accommodation portion 3113d. , and the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

In addition, in the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 abuts on the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114, and the main body portion 3113a and the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 are in contact with each other. Since a gap is formed in the back decoration board 3114, the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 can escape through the gap. It is possible to suppress the temperature rise and reduce the influence of heat. In addition, the gap between the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the substrate main body 3114c of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is defined as “half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a” to “substrate The distance from the front surface of the main body 3114c to the front surface of the first LED 3114a is preferably within the range of ". This is because if the gap is smaller than this, the heat may not be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back decoration substrate 3114 . If the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident on the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the first LED 3114a is reduced, so that the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a fear that it will not be possible to decorate it.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can form a gap between the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the rear decorative substrate 3114 by means of the leg portion 3113f. Since it has the part 3115c, by raising and lowering the back rear decorative body 3110, the surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 can be ventilated through the gap and the opening 3115c, and the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, Also, the heat from the electronic component 3114e and the like can be released, and the temperature rise of the back decoration substrate 3114 can be suppressed.

A temperature sensor is provided in the rear movable decorative body 3110, and when the temperature of the rear movable decorative body 3110 (the rear decorative substrate 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature, the movable rear decorative body 3110 moves up and down. may be executed with a higher frequency (probability). As a result, the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, so that the surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated, and the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be cooled to suppress the occurrence of problems due to heat.

Further, the rear movable decorative body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 from the rear side with the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, and the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b is surrounded by the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decoration portion 3111d of the metal foil provided on the front surface of the decoration body 3111 to the rear decoration substrate 3114 is the light guide radiation due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115. Since the plate 3113 meanders around the flange portion 3113b, a long creepage distance EL can be obtained, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the rear decorative substrate 3114, and the rear decorative substrate 3114 flows. 3114 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is arranged such that the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit is provided in the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 at a position separated from the outer periphery of the substrate main body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL. The predetermined distance SL can also increase the creepage distance EL and the spatial distance, improve insulation against discharge of static electricity and short circuits, and suppress damage to the rear decorative substrate 3114 due to discharge.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. not As a result, the creepage distance EL to the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be increased by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the same effects as described above can be achieved. In addition, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decoration portion 3111d is reduced compared to the case where the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The size can be reduced, and the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d can be reduced. Therefore, since the discharge voltage can be lowered, even if discharge occurs to the rear decorative substrate 3114, its influence can be reduced.

By the way, as described above, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down (moves) between the retracted position moved upward and the appearing position moved downward by driving the back rear driving motor 3126. Therefore, friction occurs in the left slider 3116, the right slider 3117, and the like each time the slider 3116 moves up and down, and the static electricity generated by the friction tends to accumulate on the surface of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. FIG. Since the decoration body 3111 and the decoration body base 3115 constituting the surface of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 are formed of a synthetic resin with low conductivity, even if a lot of static electricity is accumulated, the surfaces of the decoration body 3110 and the decoration base 3115 are It is difficult to discharge the static electricity accumulated in the whole at once. On the other hand, since the metal decoration portion 3111d made of the metal foil of the decoration body 3111 has high conductivity, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decoration portion 3111d is easily discharged at once. For this reason, in the back rear movable decoration 3110 of the present embodiment, static electricity is likely to accumulate in the metal decoration 3111d on the front surface of the decoration 3111. However, as described above, the metal decoration 3111d Since the creeping distance EL to the rear decorative substrate 3114 is sufficiently long, the rear decorative substrate 3114 is not damaged by the discharge of static electricity, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved up and down, and the rear movable decorative body is provided. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that entertains both the 3110 with a luminous performance decorated with luminescence.

When the area of the metal decoration portion 3111d where static electricity is accumulated is greater than or equal to a predetermined area (for example, 100 cm 2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decoration portion 3111d to GND (ground). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the back decoration substrate 3114. FIG.

[5-9d-8. Another embodiment of back movable decorative body]
Next, referring mainly to FIG. 157, a back movable decoration 3160, a back movable decoration 3170, a back movable decoration 3180, etc., which are different from the back movable decoration 3110 described above, are described. I will explain in detail. FIG. 157(a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the configuration of the movable back decoration of the second embodiment different from the movable back decoration of FIG. 142, and (b) is a movable back of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a decoration in a cross section, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the back rear movable decoration of 4th Embodiment in a cross section.

The back rear movable decorative body 3160 of the second embodiment includes a decorative body 3161 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and a decorative body 3161 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3161, as schematically shown in FIG. 157(a). A sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3162 with a predetermined decoration, a light guide radiation plate 3163 provided on the rear side of the decorative sheet 3162 and internally emitting light in a direction along the front surface forward, and a light guide radiation plate. 3163 is equipped with a back decoration substrate 3164 on which a plurality of LEDs 3164a for irradiating light in a direction along the front surface are mounted on the front surface.

The decoration body 3161 of the back rear movable decoration body 3160 includes a transparent plate-shaped body part 3161a, a flange part 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the body part 3161a, and a metal body provided on the front surface of the body part 3161a. and a decorative portion 3161c. The body portion 3161a may be flat, or may be decorated with an uneven relief. The metal decoration portion 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3161a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decoration portion 3161c may be formed by foil stamping, plating, or vapor deposition.

The decoration sheet 3162 is a transparent sheet on which a predetermined decoration (pattern) is printed. This decorative sheet 3162 has a portion with low transparency in the decoration located in front of the LED 3164a of the rear decorative substrate 3164 (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED 3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed in a size smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161 b of the decorative body 3161 .

The light guide radiating plate 3163 is formed in a flat plate shape of the same size as the decorative sheet 3162, and has an LED housing portion 3163a into which the LEDs 3164a of the rear decorative substrate 3164 are inserted from the rear, and a plurality of LEDs provided on the rear surface. and a reflecting portion 3163b. The LED housing portion 3163a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery thereof is formed in a quadrangular shape along the outer periphery of the LED 3164a. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is recessed forward in a triangular cross section, and is provided only at a predetermined portion. The plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are provided so as to forwardly reflect the light from the determined LED housing portion 3163a, and are arranged in a fan shape of concentric circles centered on the determined LED housing portion 3163a. . That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b may be configured to reflect light forward from an unspecified direction in the same manner as the reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The rear decorative substrate 3164 is formed to have the same size as the decorative sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163 . A plurality of side-view type LEDs 3164a are mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3164. The side-view type LEDs 3164a are inserted into the LED housing portions 3163a of the light guide radiation plate 3163 from behind. Although illustration is omitted, the rear decorative substrate 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil on the front and rear surfaces of the rear decorative substrate 3164 within a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3164 . In addition, the rear decorative substrate 3164 has a white coating film made of a white resist formed on its front surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the back rear movable decorative body 3160 of this embodiment, the decorative sheet 3162 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161, and the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162 is in contact with the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. are in contact with each other, and the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163 . As a result, the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3160 in the front-rear direction is thin. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3164 . Thus, in the rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer peripheries of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the rear rear decorative substrate 3164 are covered with the flange portion 3161b, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surfaces thereof from the outside. and make it look good.

In this back rear movable decoration 3160, the flange 3161b extends rearward from the main body 3161a of the decoration 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back rear decoration substrate 3164. Therefore, the metal decoration on the front surface of the main body 3161a The creepage distance EL from 3161c to (copper foil of) the back decoration substrate 3164 can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3161c flows to the back decoration substrate 3164, and the back decoration is achieved. Damage to the substrate 3164 can be prevented.

Thus, according to the rear-back movable decorative body 3160 of the present embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. In the rear movable decorative body 3160, a decorative body base covering the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3164 may be provided.

Next, as schematically shown in FIG. 157(b), the back rear movable decorative body 3170 of the third embodiment includes an outer decorative body 3171 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3171 (frame and a light guide radiation plate 3173 which is provided behind the interior decoration 3172 and radiates light forward in a direction along the entire surface inside. and a rear decorative substrate 3174 on which a plurality of LEDs 3174a are mounted on the front surface for irradiating the interior of the light guide radiation plate 3173 with light in the direction along the front surface.

The outer decoration body 3171 of the back rear movable decoration body 3170 includes a main body part 3171a extending forward and backward in a frame shape, a supporting part 3171b protruding inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body part 3171a in a flat plate shape, and the main body part 3171a. and a metal decorative portion 3171c provided on the front surface of the . The distance from the front end of the main body portion 3171a to the front surface of the support portion 3171b is the same as the thickness of the interior decoration body 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration part 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3171a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decoration portion 3171c may be formed by foil stamping, plating, or vapor deposition.

Although illustration is omitted, the interior decoration body 3172 is formed with an uneven relief-like decoration. The inner decoration 3172 is attached so as to close the front opening of the frame-shaped outer decoration 3171 .

The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have approximately the same size as the inner decoration 3172 . The light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the external decoration 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiation plate 3173 has an LED housing portion 3173a into which the LEDs 3174a of the rear decorative substrate 3174 are inserted from the rear, and a plurality of reflecting portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED housing portion 3173a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery thereof is formed in a square along the outer periphery of the LED 3174a. The reflecting portion 3173b extends in an arc around the predetermined LED accommodating portion 3173a, and is provided in a plurality of concentric circles. The reflective portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. A plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are provided so as to reflect forward the light from the respective determined LED housing portions 3173a. That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b may be configured to reflect light forward from an unspecified direction in the same manner as the reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The rear decorative substrate 3174 is formed to have the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173 . A plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a are mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3174. The LEDs 3174a are inserted from the rear into the LED housing portions 3173a of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As shown in FIG. Although illustration is omitted, the rear decorative substrate 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil on the front and rear surfaces of the rear decorative substrate 3174 at a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3174 . In addition, the back decoration substrate 3174 has a white coating film made of a white resist formed on the surface (both sides).

In the rear rear movable decorative body 3170 of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the inner decorative body 3172 is fitted in the frame of the outer decorative body 3171 from the front, and the front surface of the outer decorative body 3171 and the front surface of the inner decorative body 3172 are fitted. , and the vicinity of the outer circumference of the rear surface of the inner decoration body 3172 is in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. In the back rear movable decoration 3170, a light guide radiation plate 3173 and a back rear decoration substrate 3174 are inserted from the rear into the frame of the outer decoration 3171, and the light guide radiation plate 3173 is attached to the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The vicinity of the outer circumference of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As a result, the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3170 in the front-rear direction is thin. In addition, in the rear movable decorative body 3170, a gap having the thickness of the support portion 3171b is formed between the inner decorative body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173. As shown in FIG.

A main body portion 3171 a of the external decoration body 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 . In this back rear movable decoration 3160, the outer circumferences of the inner decoration 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the back rear decoration substrate 3174 are covered with the main body portion 3171a of the outer decoration 3171, and the outer peripheral surfaces thereof are covered from the outside. is made invisible to make it look better.

The back rear movable decoration 3170 covers the outer periphery of the back rear decoration substrate 3174 with the main body portion 3171a extending rearward of the outer decoration 3171. The creepage distance EL to (copper foil of) the rear decorative substrate 3174 can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3171c flows to the rear decorative substrate 3174, and the rear decorative substrate 3174 is discharged. can be prevented from being damaged.

Thus, according to the rear-back movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. Note that the front surface of the inner decoration 3172 may also be provided with a metal decoration. In addition, in the rear movable decorative body 3170, a decorative body base covering the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3174 may be provided.

Next, as schematically shown in FIG. 157(c), the back rear movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment includes an outer decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3181 (frame A translucent interior decoration body 3182 that closes the inside), and a back decoration substrate 3183 that is provided behind the interior decoration body 3182 and has a plurality of LEDs 3183a mounted on the front surface that can irradiate light forward. and has.

The outer decoration body 3181 of the back rear movable decoration body 3180 includes a flat plate frame-shaped body part 3181a, a flange part 3181b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the body part 3181a, and the entire surfaces of the body part 3181a and the flange part 3181b. and a covering metal decoration portion 3181c. The metal decoration part 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the external decoration body 3181. As shown in FIG. The metal decoration portion 3181c may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

The interior decoration body 3182 is made of a transparent member. The inner decoration 3182 has a flat plate-like main body 3182a whose outer shape is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body 3181a of the outer decoration 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange 3181b, and a rearward portion from the outer circumference of the main body 3182a. and a flange portion 3182b extending to the . Although illustration is omitted, the main body portion 3182a has an uneven relief-like decoration formed on substantially the entire surface thereof.

The rear decorative substrate 3183 has an outer shape smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182 b of the inner decoration body 3182 . In other words, the back rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed to have a size such that a gap of a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182 . A plurality of top-view type LEDs 3183a are mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3183 . Although illustration is omitted, the rear decorative substrate 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil on the front and rear surfaces of the rear decorative substrate 3183 at a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3183 . In addition, the rear decorative substrate 3183 has a white coating film made of a white resist formed on its front surface (both sides).

In the rear movable decorative body 3180 of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the inner decorative body 3182 and the rear decorative substrate 3183 are inserted from the rear into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decorative body 3181 . The rear movable decorative body 3180 has a front surface near the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 3181 a of the outer decorative body 3181 , and the flange portion 3182 b of the inner decorative body 3182 It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181 b of the outer decoration 3181 is covered with the flange portion 3182 b of the inner decoration 3182 . In other words, the outer periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration 3182 is covered with the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration 3181. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 prevents the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 and the rear decorative substrate 3183 from being seen from the outside.

In this back rear movable decoration 3180, the flange 3182b of the inner decoration 3182 is provided inside the flange 3181b of the outer decoration 3181 provided with the metal decoration 3181c. Since the outer circumference of the back decoration board 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body part 3182a is separated from the inner circumference of the flange part 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182, the metal decoration part 3181c is separated from the back decoration board 3183 (copper The creeping distance EL to the foil) can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration part 3181c can be prevented from flowing to the back decoration substrate 3183 and damaging the back decoration substrate 3183. can do.

Thus, according to the rear-back movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. It should be noted that the front surface of the body portion 3182a of the inner decoration body 3182 may also be provided with a metal decoration portion. Further, in the rear movable decorative body 3180, a decorative body base covering the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3183 may be provided.

[5-9e. Back bottom left production unit and back bottom right production unit]
Next, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 158 to 161 and the like. Figure 158(a) is a perspective view of the bottom left effect unit and the right bottom effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a bottom left effect unit and the right bottom effect unit in the back unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . Figure 159 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom-left effect unit and the bottom-right effect unit viewed from the front, and Figure 160 is the bottom-left effect unit and the bottom-right effect unit viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the movable configuration of the back bottom left effect unit and the back bottom right effect unit.

The back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the back back effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 . The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250 are positioned on both left and right sides of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in the state assembled on the game board 5. They are visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the front unit 2000, and the like.

First, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 will be described. The back-bottom-left effect unit 3200 includes a transparent bottom-left rotating decoration 3201 having an axial shaft 3201a projecting rearward, and a transparent bottom-left rotating decoration provided behind the bottom-left rotating decoration 3201. 3202, and a back bottom left decorative substrate provided behind the back bottom left decorative body 3202 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). 3203 is provided behind the lower back left decoration board 3203, and the lower back left rotating decoration 3201 is rotatably attached and the lower back left decoration 3202 is attached. and a unit base 3204 attached to the lower end of the left side of the .

In addition, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 is attached to the back bottom left driving motor 3205 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 so that the rotating shaft protrudes rearward, and the rotating shaft of the back bottom left driving motor 3205. a spur gear-shaped driving gear 3206, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3207 meshing with the driving gear 3206 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and the first transmission gear 3207 meshing. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3208 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204. The second transmission gear 3208 is engaged with the second transmission gear 3208 and is attached to the rear end of the shaft 3201a of the lower back left rotary ornament 3201. and a front cover 3210 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 on the lower side than the back lower left decorative body 3202 .

The back-bottom left-rotation decoration 3201 is formed in a shape that imitates a cherry blossom. A shaft 3201a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back left rotary decoration 3201 is formed to a length that penetrates the lower back left decoration 3202, the lower back left decoration substrate 3203, and the unit base 3204. . The back bottom left decoration 3202 is made by stacking two cherry blossoms having the same size as the back bottom left rotation decoration 3201 and rotating them so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that looks like it has been made.

The lower back left rotating decoration 3201 and the lower left back decoration 3202 are transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. More specifically, the bottom left rotation decoration 3201 and the bottom left decoration 3202 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in random directions. In one petal of the cherry blossom that is modeled by the decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202, the pachinko machine 1 (lower in transparency) is arranged so that the shading increases from the center to the periphery of the petal. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the view of the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is printed, but the bottom left rotation The surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decoration substrate 3203 arranged behind the lower back left decoration 3202 can be seen through the decoration 3201 and the lower back left decoration 3202 (also at the periphery of the petal). It's like

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The back bottom left decorative board 3203 is provided with a back bottom left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) for detecting the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 on the rear surface. The back bottom left detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a of the back bottom left decorative board 3203 . When the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a, the back bottom left rotating decoration 3201 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3206 is rotated by the back bottom left driving motor 3205, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 of this embodiment transmits the back side through the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotary decoration 3201 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back bottom left decoration substrate 3203, so that the back bottom left rotating decoration 3201 and the back bottom left decoration 3202 are illuminated. It can be decorated with luminescence.

In addition, surface-side electronic components such as part numbers of surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower left decorative board 3203, and areas indicating positions where the surface-side electronic components are arranged Front-side notation indicating the attributes of the front-side electronic components (further, the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model of the front-side electronic components.) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent lower back left rotating decoration 3201, a transparent lower back left decoration is printed. 3202, and the back bottom left decoration board 3203 are arranged in order, so that the predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back bottom left decoration board 3203 by silk printing is applied to the back bottom left decoration body 3202, Then, it is possible to visually recognize through the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, and in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, if a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized, characters and symbols are displayed in the predetermined paint color. , shape (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be discriminated.

In addition, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 are each made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connectors are: The housing is made of white resin (also called natural color, which is recognized as being the same color as white (natural color)).

Next, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 will be described. The back bottom right effect unit 3250 includes a transparent back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 having a rearward projecting shaft 3251a and a back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 provided behind the back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251. 3252, and a back-bottom-right decorative board provided behind the back-bottom-right decorative body 3252, and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). 3253 is provided behind the lower back right decoration board 3253, the lower back right rotating decoration 3251 is rotatably attached and the lower right ornament 3252 is attached, and the back rear effect unit 3100 and a unit base 3254 attached to the lower end of the right side of the .

In addition, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 is attached to the back bottom right drive motor 3255 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward, and the rotation shaft of the back bottom right drive motor 3255. a spur gear-shaped driving gear 3256, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257 meshing with the driving gear 3256 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and the first transmission gear 3257 meshing. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3258 rotatably attached to the unit base 3254 and the second transmission gear 3258 are meshed and attached to the rear end of the axial shaft 3251a of the back lower right rotation ornament 3251. and a front cover 3260 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 on the lower side than the back lower right decorative body 3252 .

The lower back right rotation decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. A shaft 3251a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower right rotary decoration 3251 is formed to have a length that penetrates the lower right lower back decoration 3252, the lower right decoration substrate 3253, and the unit base 3254. . The back bottom right decorative body 3252 is made by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 in the front-to-rear direction and rotating such that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that looks like it has been made.

The lower back right rotating decoration 3251 and the lower right back decoration 3252 are transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. More specifically, the lower back right rotation decoration 3251 and the lower back right rotation decoration 3251 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short linearly extending ridges in random directions. In one petal of the cherry blossom that is modeled by the decorative body 3251 and the lower right decorative body 3252, the pachinko machine 1 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed according to the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), but the bottom right rotation The surface (mounting surface) of the lower back right decoration substrate 3253 arranged behind the lower back right decoration 3252 can be seen through the decoration 3251 and the lower back right decoration 3252 (also at the periphery of the petal). It's like

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back lower right decorative substrate 3253 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The back bottom right decorative board 3253 is provided with a back bottom right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The back bottom right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259 a that protrudes forward and is detected by a back bottom right detection sensor 3253 a of the back bottom right decorative board 3253 . When the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the back bottom right detection sensor 3253a, the back bottom right rotation decoration 3251 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the back bottom right driving motor 3255, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 of the present embodiment rotates the back side through the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right rotary decoration 3251 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 can cause the back bottom right rotating decoration 3251 and the back bottom right decoration 3252 to emit light by causing a plurality of LEDs of the back bottom right decoration board 3253 to emit light.

In addition, surface-side electronic components such as part numbers of surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower right decorative substrate 3253, areas indicating positions where the surface-side electronic components are arranged, etc. Front-side notation indicating the attributes of the front-side electronic components (further, the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model of the front-side electronic components.) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent lower back right rotating decoration 3251, a transparent lower back right decoration is printed. 3252, and the back bottom right decoration board 3253 are arranged in order, so that the predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back bottom right decoration board 3253 by silk printing is applied to the back bottom right decoration body 3252, Then, it is possible to visually recognize through the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, and in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, if a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized, characters and symbols are displayed in the predetermined paint color. , shape (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be discriminated.

In addition, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 3253 are each made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connectors are made of resin. The housing is made of white resin (also called natural color, which is recognized as being the same color as white (natural color)).

A plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), connectors (surface mount type), a bottom left detection sensor 3203a (lead type), and a bottom left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) are provided on the front surface (front surface) of the bottom left decorative board 3203 and the bottom right decorative board 3253. A white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid white A white resist layer is formed by the white resist. Pads to which a lower back left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) and a lower back right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) are soldered are attached to the back surfaces (rear surfaces) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3253. A white resist layer is formed of solid white resist over the entire area except holes, lands, and the like. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower right decorative substrate 3253, although not shown, near surface side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the surface side. The part number of the electronic component, the attributes of the front electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the front electronic component is placed (In addition, the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting orientation of the front electronic component (mounting direction), may include the model number of the front side electronic component. It is printed by silk printing. On the rear surface (rear surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower right decorative substrate 3253, although not shown, in the vicinity of the back side electronic components such as the lower back left detection sensor 3203a and the lower back right detection sensor 3253a, Attributes of back-side electronic components such as the part number of the back-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the back-side electronic component is placed (In addition, the shape of the back-side electronic component, the size of the back-side electronic component, the Mounting direction (mounting direction), may include the type of electronic components on the back side. It is printed by silk printing on the top.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. While the written part (the red written part on the back side of the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the structure of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow is inconspicuous, and the surface When the side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion for white resist) does not stand out against the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light emission effects by means of illumination by light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. , and the light emission mode changes in various ways by turning on (light emitting) and turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the front surfaces (front surfaces) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower right decorative substrate 3253 are covered with the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs and connectors are soldered. In the above, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"), and further, this solid By silk-printing the surface side notation part that enables identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light on the applied white resist with yellow paint, the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is white when turned off. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side marking part inconspicuous with respect to the resist, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is lit (at the time of light emission), the solid coating with high reflectance The surface (front) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 is formed by a combination of white resist and a surface side marking portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint that is very close to the reflectance of white. can maintain a high reflectance.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

[5-9f. Behind the scenes production unit]
Next, the back lower middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 162 to 169 and the like. FIG. 162(a) is a front perspective view of the back-bottom middle effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back-bottom view of the back-bottom middle effect unit in the back unit. Fig. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the lifting mechanism for the back-lower middle effect unit and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the lower-back middle decoration unit of the lower-back middle effect unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 167 is an explanatory view showing the lifting and lowering of the lower back decoration body unit by the lower back middle elevating mechanism in the lower back middle effect unit. FIG. 168(a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the back-lower middle rotating decoration of the back-lower middle decoration unit in the back-lower middle effect unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the back-lower middle rotating decoration. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a stop position and each detection sensor with a table|surface. FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing, from the front, the arrangement of the LEDs of the lower back middle decorative body unit in the lower back middle effect unit.

The back lower middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 . The back bottom middle effect unit 3300 is attached behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 . The back-lower middle effect unit 3300 includes a back-lower middle decoration unit 3320 having a back-lower middle-rotating decorative body 3310 rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-lower middle decoration unit 3320 for raising and lowering the back-lower middle decoration unit 3320. A lifting mechanism 3350 is provided.

The lower-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower-back middle effect unit 3300 is formed in a regular hexagon shape when viewed from the front. This back-bottom-middle rotary decoration 3310 has six number decorations "1" to "6" formed in a relief shape on the entire surface, which are arranged in circles at every angle of 60 degrees in a clockwise direction centering on the center. placed on the circumference. This back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a transparent inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 in a back-lower-middle decorative body unit 3320 described later, a front-end side of a back-lower-middle first decorative substrate 3322, and a substrate fixing member 3323 on the rear surface. has a concave portion 3311 that can accommodate the .

The back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310 is formed transparently, the outer peripheral portion of each of the six number decorations protrudes forward, and there is a rib portion that connects the six number decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring shape. It is formed to protrude forward. A metallic decorative portion 3310a having metallic luster is formed on the protruding outer peripheral portion and rib portion. In other words, the metal decoration part 3310a having metallic luster is arranged near the back and middle rotation decoration body 3310. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion where the metal decoration portion 3310a having metallic luster is formed are integrally formed with the back lower middle rotation decoration 3310, but the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion are formed integrally with each other. may be molded separately from the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the molded outer peripheral portion and rib portion and the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be assembled. In this case, metallic decorative portions 3310a having metallic luster are formed on the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion.

The metal luster of the metal decoration part 3310a can impart a high-class feeling, and the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be conspicuous, and the presence of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be further emphasized. It has become. The metal decoration portion 3310a is formed by hot-stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). The back bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 has a metal decoration 3310a formed only on the outer peripheral portion and the rib protruding to the front surface thereof, and the side surface of the back bottom middle rotation decoration 3310 is not formed with the metal decoration 3310a at all. No. As a result, the creeping distance from the metal decoration part 3310a of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 to the lower back middle first decoration substrate 3322 is made longer by at least the length of the side surface of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310. Therefore, it is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3310a from flowing to the back-bottom first decoration substrate 3322 and damaging the back-bottom first decoration substrate 3322. Therefore, it is possible to improve the insulation against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

In addition, as described above, the back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310 is formed with a rib portion projecting forward to connect the six number decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring shape. The back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310 extends from the peripheral edge side portion (peripheral edge side root portion) where the rib protrudes to the front surface of the back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, to the front peripheral edge of the back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, and then to the back bottom middle. The rotary decoration 3310 is formed to be transparent up to the rear edge of the side surface, and has a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 extends from the peripheral edge side portion (peripheral edge side root portion) where the rib protrudes to the front surface of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 to the front peripheral edge of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310. A pear-skin-like pattern is formed by a plurality of ridges extending short and linearly in random directions up to the rear edge of the side surface of the underside middle rotation decorative body 3310, and the rib portion is the underside middle rotation decoration. The shading increases from the peripheral side portion (peripheral side root portion) protruding to the front surface of the body 3310 toward the front peripheral edge of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 and the side trailing edge of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) so that the transparency is low) is applied by printing.

As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the lower back center decoration unit 3320 includes a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 provided behind the back lower center rotary decoration 3310 and an inner lens (diffusion lens ) 3321, and the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”) is mounted with a plurality of LEDs. A substrate fixing member 3323 having a shaft portion 3323a which is attached to an inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 so as to sandwich the middle first decorative substrate 3322 from the rear side and protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, and the shaft of the substrate fixing member 3323. A rotary base 3324 having an axial hole 3324a into which the part 3323a is relatively rotatably inserted and which is attached to the rear side of the back lower middle rotary ornament 3310 is provided.

The surface of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 is provided with a lens cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the first decoration board 3322 in the back and inside are difficult to see clearly from the player's side. In addition, the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 may have a lens cut on the front surface and the back surface (may be formed into a polyhedron), or may be replaced with the surface of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 . A lens cut may be applied to the back surface (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

In addition, the lower inner decoration body unit 3320 includes an area detection piece 3325 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 and extends in a semicircular arc coaxial with the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference detection piece 3325 that is coaxial with the area detection piece 3325. A plurality of position detecting pieces 3326 protruding from the rotation base 3324 and a spur-shaped rotation gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 are provided.

Further, the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the rotation base 3324 and has a penetrating circular opening 3328a through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass. A transparent lower back middle decoration body 3328 in which a plurality of linear grooves are formed radially from the opening 3328a toward the outer circumference with the center of the circular opening 3328a as the center point, and the back of the back lower middle decoration body 3328. A second decoration substrate 3329 in the back and a second decoration substrate 3329 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “surface (mounting surface)”), and a second decoration substrate in the back 3329, and a plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 (lead type) capable of detecting the area detection piece 3325, and attached to the front surface of the second decoration substrate 3329 in the back, bottom, and the position detection piece 3326. and a detectable location sensor 3331 (lead type).

In addition, the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the back bottom middle second decoration board 3329, and the rear end of the shaft part 3323a of the board fixing member 3323 is attached, and the back bottom middle decoration body 3328 is attached. a movable base 3332 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3332; A drive gear 3334 in the form of a spur gear meshing with a rotary gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a back-bottom-center lifting mechanism 3350 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. and a lifting slider 3336 slidably guided in the vertical direction by a slide rail 3360 .

The front end sides of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321, the first decoration board 3322, and the board fixing member 3323 are located between the rotary decoration body 3310 and the rotation base 3324 in the assembled state. , and is housed in the concave portion 3311 of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 and is not in contact with either the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 or the rotation base 3324 . By appropriately lighting the plurality of LEDs of the first decorative substrate 3322, the numerical decoration (relief) portion of the rotary decorative body 3310 can be decorated with light. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. Also, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decoration substrate 3329 are of the surface mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The area detection piece 3325 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 with a diameter larger than that of the rotation gear 3327 . As shown in FIG. 168(a), the area detection piece 3325 has numbers "3", "4", and "5" from between the number decorations "2" and "3" on the back-bottom center rotary decoration 3310. It is formed in an arc shape in a range of 180 degrees around the axis of rotation through the numeral decorations to between the numeral decorations "5" and "6".

A plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 each protrude rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 on a circumference having a diameter larger than that of the area detection pieces 3325 . Each position detection piece 3326 is provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) so that each is positioned at the center of the number decoration of the back and middle rotary decoration 3310. . In this embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape with a predetermined angle α degrees (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) around the rotation axis. A space of 2×β degrees (θ degrees−α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) is provided between the position detection piece 3326 and the rotation axis (see FIG. 168(a)). .

A plurality of (three in this case) region specifying sensors 3330 are provided so as to line up at an angular interval of θ degrees (60 degrees) centering on the rotation axis of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 . The three area identification sensors 3330 are provided in clockwise order of a first area identification sensor 3330a, a second area identification sensor 3330b, and a third area identification sensor 3330c. In the present embodiment, the three area specifying sensors 3330 detect the values of "3", "4", and "5" in a state in which the decoration "1" of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 is positioned directly above the center of rotation. It is provided at a position corresponding to the numeral decoration (see FIG. 168(a)).

The position specifying sensor 3331 is provided at an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in the counterclockwise direction around the rotation axis of the back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310. ing.

The movable base 3332 has an elevating pin 3332a projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from the lower portion of the rear surface. This elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 in the back, bottom, and middle elevating mechanism 3350 . The back-bottom middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting the rotation position.

The back-lower middle decorative body unit 3320 rotates the back-lower middle-rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotating gear 3327 by rotating the driving gear 3334 with the back-lower middle rotating driving motor 3333. can be done. In addition, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first lower back middle decoration board 3322 and the second lower back middle decoration board 3329, respectively, so that the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 And the underside inner decoration 3328 can be decorated with light.

In addition, surface-side electronic components such as part numbers of surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower middle first decoration substrate 3322, areas indicating positions where the surface-side electronic components are arranged, etc. Front-side notation indicating the attributes of the front-side electronic components (further, the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model of the front-side electronic components.) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and an inner lens (diffusion lens ) 3321, and the rear lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 are arranged in this order, the predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 by silk printing is the color of the inner lens. (diffusion lens) 3321, and through the back and middle rotary decorative body 3310, it is possible to visually recognize, and in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, if the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized, the predetermined paint Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side marking portion) can be distinguished from each other by the color of .

In addition, each package of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

A white resist solution is applied to the entire surface (front surface) of the first decoration substrate 3322, except for pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which multiple LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by the formed white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). On the back surface (rear surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322, the entire area excluding pads, through-holes, lands, etc. to which connectors (surface mount type) are soldered is coated with a solid white resist. A resist layer is formed. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the first decoration substrate 3322, the part numbers of the surface-side electronic components, the surface Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the side electronic components are placed (furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic components, the size of the surface-side electronic components, the mounting (may include the type of electronic parts.) is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out against white. . Although not shown, on the rear surface (rear surface) of the back lower middle first decoration substrate 3322, the part numbers of the rear electronic components and the positions where the rear electronic components are arranged are displayed in the vicinity of the rear electronic components such as connectors. Attributes of the back-side electronic components such as the indicated area (may also include the shape of the back-side electronic components, the size of the back-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic components, and the model of the back-side electronic components. ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less noticeable than white.

In addition, the part numbers of surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs, area-specifying sensors 3330, and position-specifying sensors 3331 to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329, and the surface-side electronic components are arranged. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position of the surface-side electronic component (furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component ) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back middle second decoration substrate 3329 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and the transparent back lower middle decoration body 3328 Since the second decorative substrate 3329 in the back lower middle is arranged behind the , the predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the back lower middle is printed by silk printing. It is possible to visually recognize through the decorative body 3328, and when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, letters, symbols, shapes (that is, attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side description portion) can be discriminated.

In addition, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decoration substrate 3329 on the back and inside are each packaged in a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It has become.

Pads to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), area identification sensors 3330 (lead type), and position identification sensors 3331 (lead type) are soldered are mounted on the surface (front surface) of the second decoration substrate 3329 under the back, A white resist is formed by applying a white resist solution to the entire area except for through holes and lands (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). layers are formed. Pads to which the region specifying sensor 3330 (lead type), the position specifying sensor 3331 (lead type), and a plurality of connectors (surface mounting type) are soldered on the back surface (rear surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329, A white resist layer is formed of solid white resist over the entire area except through holes, lands, and the like. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329, the part number of the surface-side electronic components, the surface Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the side electronic components are placed (furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic components, the size of the surface-side electronic components, the mounting (may include the type of electronic parts.) is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out against white. . Although not shown, on the rear surface (rear surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329, the part number of the rear electronic component and the position of the rear electronic component are displayed near the rear electronic component such as a connector. Attributes of the back-side electronic components such as the indicated area (may also include the shape of the back-side electronic components, the size of the back-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic components, and the model of the back-side electronic components. ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less noticeable than white.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. While the written part (the red written part on the back side of the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the structure of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow is inconspicuous, and the surface When the side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion for white resist) does not stand out against the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light emission effects by means of illumination by light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. , and the light emission mode changes in various ways by turning on (light emitting) and turning off the light. For this reason, pads, through-holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered are provided on the front surfaces (front surfaces) of the back lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 and the back lower middle second decoration substrate 3329, as described above. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") over the entire area except , On the solid white resist, a surface-side notation portion that enables identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, thereby extinguishing the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side marking part inconspicuous with respect to the white resist at times, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is lit (during light emission), a solid surface with high reflectance The first decoration substrate 3322 in the back and the second decoration in the back and the back are formed by the combination of the applied white resist and the surface-side marking portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the reflectance of white. A high reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the substrate 3329 can be maintained.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, the back-bottom middle lifting mechanism 3350 extends to the left and right, and both ends thereof are attached to the back-bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back-bottom right effect unit 3250. A unit base 3351 and a unit base 3351 3352 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3351 so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward; A gear-shaped drive gear 3353 , a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3354 that meshes with the drive gear 3353 and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 , and meshes with the first transmission gear 3354 . A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3355 rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3356a meshing with the second transmission gear 3355, and an outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a and an elevation cam gear 3356 which has a drive pin 3356b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity thereof and which is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 at the upper center in the left-right direction.

In addition, the base end extending in the left-right direction is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, and the driving pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted in the longitudinal direction of the back, bottom, and middle lifting mechanism 3350. a second slit 3357b extending in the longitudinal direction on the distal end side of the first slit 3357a and into which the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted. , and a detection piece 3357c provided at the tip thereof; and a rear lower middle relay board 3358 attached to the front surface.

Further, the rear-lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the lifting cam gear 3356, and the lifting arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 having an elevating slit 3359a extending vertically through which an elevating pin 3332a of a movable base 3332 in the decoration unit 3320 is inserted; A slide rail 3360 that guides the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, a gear cover 3361 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the driving gear 3353 from the rear, and a tip end of the lifting arm 3357 moving upward (frontward). and a spring 3362 biasing the lift arm 3357 to pivot in a clockwise direction with respect to view.

The rear bottom center elevation drive motor 3352 is attached to the lower left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The lifting arm 3357 is rotatably mounted on the right side of the lifting cam gear 3356 at the same height as the center of the lifting cam gear 3356 . The elevating arm 3357 extends leftward from the elevating cam gear 3356 at its distal end side.

The back-bottom middle relay board 3358 includes the back-bottom middle first decoration board 3322, the back-bottom middle second decoration board 3329, the area specifying sensor 3330, the position-specifying sensor 3331, the back-lower middle rotation drive motor 3333, and the back-lower middle elevation drive motor. 3352 , the connection between the rear lower middle elevation detection sensor 3358 a and the production drive board 1720 is relayed.

The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and the elevating slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. An elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the lower inner decoration body unit 3320 is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359 . The slide rail 3360 is provided on the right side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction of the front cover 3359 . With the elevating slits 3359a and the slide rails 3360, the underside inner decoration body unit 3320 can be supported so as to slide straight up and down.

When the driving gear 3353 is rotated by the driving motor 3352, the lifting cam gear 3350 moves through the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a of the lifting cam gear 3356. 3356 can be rotated. Then, the drive pin 3356b that revolves by the rotation of the lift cam gear 3356 can rotate the lift arm 3357 through the first slit 3357a into which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted. The lower back center decoration body unit 3320 can be lifted and lowered together with the back lower center rotary decoration body 3310 via the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 which is slidably inserted into the two slits 3357b.

Next, a detailed description will be given of the movement of the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310 and the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 in the lower back middle effect unit 3300 . In a normal state, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 is in a lowered position where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the lowest position. In this normal state, the tip side of the elevating arm 3357 in the back-bottom-middle lifting mechanism 3350 is positioned lower than the base-end side, and the detection piece 3357c at the tip moves the back-bottom-middle lifting mechanism of the back-bottom-middle relay board 3358. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 167(a)).

In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 is positioned below its center of revolution, and is positioned near the proximal end of the first slit 3357a of the elevation arm 3357. . More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3356. As shown in FIG. As a result, even if an urging force is applied to rotate the lifting arm 3357 in the clockwise direction by the spring 3362, the line of force of the urging force is applied to the drive pin 3356b in contact with the first slit 3357a. , the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3356 passes through, so the elevation cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 does not revolve, so that the elevation arm 3357 does not rotate, and the underside decoration body unit 3320 does not move from the lowered position due to the biasing force of the spring 3362. The urging force of 3362 does not act on the rear lower/middle elevation drive motor 3352 via the elevation arm 3357 or the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the proximal end portion of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the lifting arm 3357 tries to rotate clockwise due to the biasing force of the spring 3362, the force acting from the first slit 3357a through the drive pin 3356b causes the lifting cam gear 3356 to rotate counterclockwise. try to rotate. At this time, the driving pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the proximal end of the lifting arm 3357, but the driving pin 3356b is in contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. , the driving pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting arm 3357 is locked, and the upward movement of the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320 can be prevented.

In the normal state, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 has the uppermost number decoration among the plurality of number decorations in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 placed inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. 111, etc.). In addition, in a normal state, the lowermost numeric decoration is positioned behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and the lower back center first decoration substrate 3322 and the back lower center third decoration are located behind the first starting port 2002. By making the LED of the second decoration substrate 3329 emit light, in addition to the light emission decoration of the back, bottom, and middle rotary decorations, the first start port 2002 formed of a transparent member can also be light emission decoration (see FIG. 120, etc.). ).

In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the back, bottom, and middle elevation drive motor 3352, the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a are rotated. As a result, the elevation cam gear 3356 rotates clockwise, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 revolves clockwise. As the driving pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a in contact with the driving pin 3356b is pressed upward, and the driving pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the tip side, and the lifting arm The distal end of 3357 is rotated clockwise around the proximal end so that the distal end of the 3357 moves upward.

As the lifting arm 3357 rotates clockwise, the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted into the second slit 3357b on the distal end side of the lifting arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. As a result, the lower back inner decoration body unit 3320 moves upward via the lifting pin 3332a. Then, when the drive pin 3356b moves upward from the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the base end side. At this time, since the lifting arm 3357 is biased clockwise by the spring 3362, the biasing force assists the upward movement of the underside decoration unit 3320. The load applied to the up-and-down drive motor 3352 is reduced.

When the drive pin 3356b further revolves clockwise and reaches near the end on the base end side of the first slit 3357a, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the back, bottom, middle, and lift drive motor 3352 stops, and at the same time, the drive The revolution of pin 3356b stops. As a result, the movement of the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 by the lifting arm 3357 is stopped, and the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is moved to the highest position and is in the raised position.

When the underside inner decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3356. As shown in FIG. As a result, even if a force is applied to rotate the lifting arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction by the weight of the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320, the line of force of that force hits the first slit 3357a. Since the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3356 passes through the contacting drive pin 3356b, the elevation cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevation arm 3357 does not rotate, the underside decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position, and the underside decoration unit 3320 does not move downward. The self-weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the rear lower/middle elevation drive motor 3352 via the elevation arm 3357 or the like.

In addition, in the state in which the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevation cam gear 3356 may be further revolved to bring the drive pin 3356b into contact with the proximal end portion of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the elevating arm 3357 tries to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320, the force acting from the first slit 3357a through the drive pin 3356b causes the elevating cam gear 3356 to move clockwise. Attempt to rotate in the direction of rotation. At this time, the driving pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the proximal end of the lifting arm 3357, but the driving pin 3356b is in contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. , the driving pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting arm 3357 is locked, and the downward movement of the underside decoration body unit 3320 can be prevented.

In the state in which the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, most of the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310 is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (furthermore, the game ball rolling in the game area 5a B is located above the rebound prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided in the center accessory 2500 that prevents B from rebounding from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501), and is positioned forward (the player All the numeral decorations can be seen well from the side) (see Fig. 201).

In order to return the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 from the raised position to the lowered position, the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the opposite direction by the lower back middle lifting drive motor 3352, and the lifting arm 3357 is rotated. rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 moves downward from the raised position. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the lifting arm 3357 is detected by the rear-lower-middle elevation detection sensor 3358a of the rear-lower-middle relay board 3358, the rear-lower-middle elevation driving motor 3352 stops the rotation of the driving gear 3353. , the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is in the normal state of the lowered position (furthermore, the center position that prevents the game ball B rolling in the game area 5a from rebounding from the outside of the center frame (surrounding wall part 2501) to the inside) The rebound prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the overlapping position when viewed from the front in the pachinko machine 1).

The back-bottom middle effect unit 3300 of this embodiment rotates the back-bottom middle-rotational driving motor 3333 in the back-bottom middle-decorative body unit 3320 to rotate the drive gear 3334 , thereby rotating the back-bottom middle-rotation decoration body 3310 via the rotation gear 3327 . can be rotated about a longitudinal axis. By rotating the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310, the six number decorations provided on the front surface rotate like a roulette wheel. The back-bottom middle rotary decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the back-bottom middle rotation drive motor 3333 in any position such as the lowered position or the raised position of the back-bottom middle decoration body unit 3320 .

In the normal state, one of the plurality of (here, six) number decorations in the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is positioned directly above the center of rotation (stop position). doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 168(a), in a state where the numeral decoration “1” on the back-bottom-middle rotary decoration 3310 is positioned upward, the area detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 is used to identify the first area. Three area-specific sensors 3330, a sensor 3330a, a second area-specific sensor 3330b, and a third area-specific sensor 3330c, are used for detection. is not detected.

Here, first, the relationship between the three area specifying sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described. When the numeral decoration “1” is set to the stop position, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are connected to the area detecting piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 as described above. is detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 168(b), when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detecting, the number decoration "1" is centered around the stop position. It is located within the range of ±30 degrees.

Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are detected and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is not detected, the numeral decoration "2" is displayed in the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. located within the range.

Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c do not detect, the numeral decoration "3" is displayed in the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. located within the range.

Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are non-detecting, the numeral decoration of "4" is displayed within a range of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located inside.

Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are non-detecting, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is detecting, the numeral decoration of "5" is displayed in the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. located within the range.

Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a is non-detecting, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detecting, the number decoration "6" is in the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. located within the range.

In this way, any combination of the detection and non-detection of the three area identification sensors 3330, ie, the first area identification sensor 3330a, the second area identification sensor 3330b, and the third area identification sensor 3330c, determines which number decoration indicates the stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether it is positioned within the stop area including.

Since the back-bottom middle rotation driving motor 3333 of the present embodiment is a stepping motor, when the area specifying sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325 and rotates 30 degrees, the back-bottom middle rotation driving motor 3333 is rotated by 30 degrees. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it is possible to stop the desired number decoration on the back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310 at the stop position. However, when such control is performed, it is necessary to recognize the origin for stopping at the stop position while specifying the stop position region by the three region specifying sensors 3330. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of 3310 becomes complicated and the load increases. Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specifying sensor 3331 for detecting the position detection strips 3326 are provided. This suppresses the complication of the control for stopping the rotation of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 and reduces the load.

More specifically, when it is desired to stop the desired number decoration on the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 at the stop position, the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 rotates and the three area specifying sensors 3330 detect the desired stop position. If the combination satisfies the position, the position specifying sensor 3331 is shifted in the rotational direction by an angle of 30 degrees with respect to the first area specifying sensor 3330a. ing. In this state, the desired digit is 30 degrees of rotation away from the stop position.

In this state, when the back and middle rotary decoration 3310 is further rotated by α/2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees) which is the length of the position detection piece 3326, the position detection piece 3326 is separated from the position specifying sensor 3331. Then, the position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detection. The angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detected is taken as the origin. Then, after rotating β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees) from there (from the origin), the rotation of the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310 by the lower back middle rotation driving motor 3333 is stopped, thereby obtaining the desired number. The decoration can be stopped exactly at the stop position.

In the above description, the stoppage of rotation of the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 is explained by the angle, but the rotation may be stopped by the rotation step of the back-lower middle-rotation drive motor 3333, which is a stepping motor. For example, when one rotation is 396 steps, in a state in which the combination of the three area specifying sensors 3330 satisfies the desired stop position, when the back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates 13 steps further, the position detection piece 3326 is Moving away from the location sensor 3331, the location sensor 3331 becomes non-sensing. When the angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detected is set as the origin, the rotation of the lower back center rotary decoration body 3310 by the back lower center rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped when rotating 20 steps, thereby stopping the desired number decoration. It can be stopped exactly in position.

Next, the light-emitting decoration in the back-lower middle effect unit 3300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 169, the back-lower middle production unit 3300 is a back-lower-middle primary decoration unit 3320 mounted with a plurality of LEDs for luminous decoration of the back-lower middle rotating decorations 3310 . It has a decoration substrate 3322 and a second decoration substrate 3329 in the lower back. A plurality of LEDs of the first decoration substrate 3322 in the back side are located behind the six number decorations in the rotary decoration in the back side 3310, and each number decoration can be illuminated independently.

On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the lower back center second decoration substrate 3329 are positioned behind the portion outside the plurality of number decorations in the back lower center rotating decoration 3310, and are located outside the back lower center rotating decoration 3310. The periphery can be decorated with luminescence.

As described above, this back-lower middle effect unit 3300 can detect the rotational position of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 to some extent by the three area specifying sensors 3330. Therefore, based on the detection of the area specifying sensors 3330, By properly illuminating a plurality of LEDs of the back and inside first decoration substrate 3322, only specific numeral decorations are illuminated, or each numeral decoration is illuminated in a different color, and rotated. It is possible to show the player an effect that strongly attracts the player's interest.

In addition, when the lower back center decoration body unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the number decoration on the lower side of the lower back center rotary decoration body 3310 is located behind the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, By illuminating the corresponding portion of the LED on the back and middle first decoration substrate 3322, the first starting port 2002 can be decorated with light. This allows the player's interest to be directed to the first start port 2002 . In addition, when the game ball B has won the first start port 2002, the LED of the first decoration board 3322 in the back and bottom is emitted (or one emission mode is determined from among a plurality of emission modes to emit light. ).

As described above, according to the lower back middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the rotating lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions can detect an area having a length covering three stop positions. A piece 3325 and six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position are provided, and three area identification sensors 3330 for detecting the area detection pieces 3325 and one position identification sensor for detecting the position detection piece 3326 are provided. Since the sensors 3331 and 3331 are provided, when the back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates, the three area-specifying sensors 3330 for detecting the area-detecting pieces 3325 sequentially increase from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. By repeating this process, all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not become non-detection once, and the area detection pieces 3325 are detected even until the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. By combining the area specifying sensors 3330 that are connected to each other, it is possible to roughly grasp the current rotational position of the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 .

Since the back-lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 is provided with six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the three area-specifying sensors 3330 causes the back-lower middle rotation. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331, and the deviation of the stop position can be corrected. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 having a plurality of stop positions as few as possible.

In addition, since the stop position of the back-lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the back-lower middle-rotation decoration body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to entertain the performance (movable performance) by the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress the deterioration of interest.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 is increased, the stop position deviation can be suppressed. By rotating the lower middle rotary decoration 3310, the moving speed (rotation speed) of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 is increased compared to the case where the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is reciprocated. can be faster. Therefore, the fast-rotating back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest, and the rotation of the back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 can be strongly attracted. It is possible to keep the player entertained and suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the back-bottom middle rotary ornament 3310 rotates around the axis in the front-rear direction and a plurality of number decorations are provided on the front surface, the roulette wheel stops rotating at an arbitrary stop position after rotating round and round. Since it is possible to show such an effect to the player, it is possible to excite the player depending on whether or not the desired number decoration stops rotating at the stop position. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the number of stop positions of the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position , and the number of stop positions of the back and middle rotary decorations 3310 are the same, and the ability (grasp of stop positions) of the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be maximized, and there are more stop positions. The back-bottom middle rotation decorative body 3310 can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates together with the back and middle rotary decorative body 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can be changed. It is possible to further increase the positioning accuracy of the stop position.

In the above-described embodiment, the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally (together with) the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is provided with the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326. Without limitation, the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member such as the drive gear 3334 that rotates with the rotation of the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 .

[5-9g. Backstage production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 177 and the like. FIG. 170(a) is a front perspective view of an upper back effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the upper back effect unit in the back unit. Fig. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the upper back effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the upper back effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. be. Fig. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the upper back elevating decorative body unit in the upper back effect unit and is seen from the front. It is a diagram.

FIG. 175 is an explanatory view showing from the front the rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotary decoration in the back-up production unit. FIG. 176(a) is an explanatory view showing the lifting mechanism of the upper lifting decorative body unit in the upper rear effect unit from the front, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering mechanism of a raising/lowering decoration body unit, and the rotation mechanism of a back upper back rotary decoration body from a front. FIG. 177 is an explanatory view showing the decoration substrate from the front in a state in which the rear up/down lifting decorative body unit is moved to the appearing position in the back up production unit.

The back up effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached above the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back back effect unit 3100 . As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the back side effect unit 3400 includes a transparent back side front rotary decoration body 3410 having an axis shaft 3410a projecting rearward from the center of the back side, and a back side front rotary decoration body. A transparent back upper front decoration body 3421 extending to the left and right through which the axial shaft 3410a of the 3410 penetrates in the center in the left-right direction, and a front surface (hereinafter referred to as "surface (mounting)" provided behind the back upper front decoration body 3421. A back top front decoration board 3422 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a back top front decoration body 3421 provided behind the back top front decoration board 3422 and on the front surface. and a unit base 3423 that rotatably supports the shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410.

In addition, the rear effect unit 3400 is mounted between a rear cover 3424 attached so as to form a space with the rear surface of the unit base 3423, and a unit base 3423 having a rotation axis in front of the rear surface of the rear cover 3424. A rear upper front rotation drive motor 3425 attached so as to protrude into the space of the rear upper front rotation drive motor 3425, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3426 attached to the rotation shaft of the rear upper front rotation drive motor 3425, and meshing with the drive gear 3426 A rotating gear 3427 having a spur gear-like shape and attached to the rear end of the shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 and having a detecting piece 3427a projecting forward, and a back upper front decoration substrate 3422. and a rear upper rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type) attached to the rear surface of the rotary gear 3427 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427.

In addition, the rear side effect unit 3400 includes a rear side lifting drive motor 3429 attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that the rotating shaft protrudes into the space between the front unit base 3423, and a rear side lifting drive motor 3429. A spur-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotating shaft of a motor 3429, a gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430, and a portion protruding outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431a penetrates the rear cover 3424. an elevation cam gear 3431 rotatably attached to a rear cover 3424, having a drive pin 3431b projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape and a detection piece 3431c projecting forward from near the outer circumference of the gear portion 3431a; , the back top elevation detection sensor 3432 (lead type) attached to the rear surface of the back top front decoration board 3422 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431, and the tip where the back top rear rotation decoration 3440 is provided. A rear upper elevating decoration unit 3450 whose base end side is attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so as to be rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction so that the upper side moves up and down by revolving the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431; A spring 3433 is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424 and a spring 3433 biasing the elevating decorative body unit 3450 so that the front end side of the elevating decorative body unit 3450 rotates in a direction to move upward. and a rod-like restricting member 3434 that restricts the movement of the .

As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450 is a transparent upper rear rotary decoration body 3440 in which an axial shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the transparent back upper rear rotation decoration body 3440 penetrates at the center. A rear upper back decorative body 3451 and a back side provided behind the upper rear decorative body 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”). An upper rear decorative board 3452 and a rear upper rear decorative body 3451 are attached to the front surface from the rear of the upper rear decorative board 3452, and are rotatably mounted to a unit base 3423. and a lift unit base 3453 that rotatably supports the shaft 3440a.

In addition, the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 includes a back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward, and the rotation shaft of the back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454. A spur gear-shaped driving gear 3455 attached to the driving gear 3455, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3456 meshing with the driving gear 3455 and rotatably attached to the lifting unit base 3453, and a first transmission gear 3456 and a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3457 that is rotatably attached to the lifting unit base 3453 and the shaft shaft 3440a of the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3457. and a spur-like rotating gear 3458 attached to the rear end.

Furthermore, the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450 is attached to the rear surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the driving gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotating gear 3458 from behind. 3459, and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the lifting unit base 3453 so as to cover the back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

The back top front rotating decorative body 3410 of the back top effect unit 3400 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. An axial shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 penetrates the back upper front decoration 3421, the back upper front decoration substrate 3422, and the unit base 3423, and passes through the unit base 3423 and the rear. It extends to the space between the cover 3424 . The back upper front decoration 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 in the center in the left-right direction. It has a decoration that looks like it is rotated so that it is positioned in the

The back top front decoration substrate 3422 extends left and right over substantially the entire length of the back top front decoration body 3421 in the left-right direction. By causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back top decoration substrate 3422 to emit light, the back top rotary decoration 3410 and the back top front decoration 3421 can be decorated with light. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 are surface-mounted full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The front upper back rotary decoration 3410 and the front upper back decoration 3421 are transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. More specifically, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short linearly extending ridges in random directions. The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is such that the shading (transparency decreases) of one petal of the cherry blossom flower modeled by the decorative body 3421 increases from the center of the petal toward the periphery. That is, a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) are applied by printing, and the upper back front decoration 3421 The pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is made to have a constant shading in the area excluding the area corresponding to the rotating decorative body 3410 (so that the shading is lighter than the shading at the periphery of the petals and the transparency is high). ) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed by printing, but the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 And through the front upper back decoration body 3421 (also at the peripheral edge of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the front upper back decoration substrate 3422 arranged behind the front upper back decoration body 3421 can be visually recognized. ing.

Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as part numbers of surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decoration board 3422, and areas indicating positions where the surface-side electronic components are arranged (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model number of the front-side electronic components.) The surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decoration substrate 3422 is printed with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and behind the transparent back upper front rotary decoration 3410, a transparent back upper front decoration 3421, Since the back upper front decoration substrates 3422 are arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decoration substrate 3422 by silk printing is printed through the back upper front decoration body 3421. , or through the back upper front decoration 3421 and the back upper front rotary decoration 3410, and in a state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, if the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side writing portion) can be distinguished from the predetermined paint color.

In addition, each package of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). ing.

A plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), a back rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a back up elevation detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the surface (front surface) of the back top front decoration board 3422. A white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") over the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. of resist layer is formed. A plurality of connectors (surface mount type), a rear rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a rear elevation detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear upper front decorative board 3422. A white resist layer is formed of solid white resist over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, and the like. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the back upper front decoration board 3422, although not shown, near the surface side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs, the part numbers of the surface side electronic components, the surface side electronic Attributes of front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position to place the component (furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component ) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back upper front decoration board 3422, there is an area indicating the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is arranged near the back side electronic component such as a connector. Attributes of back-side electronic components such as (further include shape of back-side electronic components, size of back-side electronic components, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of back-side electronic components, model of back-side electronic components. ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white.

The unit base 3423 has a through hole 3423a through which the upper back rotation detection sensor 3428 and the upper back elevation detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the upper back decoration board 3422 are inserted. The rear cover 3424 is coaxial with the shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410, and has a cylindrical support shaft 3424a protruding rearward from the rear surface, and an arcuate shape through which the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 is inserted. and an elongated slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453. As shown in FIG.

A detection piece 3427a of the rotary gear 3427 is detected by a rear upper rotation detection sensor 3428 which penetrates through a through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward. The elevation cam gear 3431 has a gear portion 3431a formed in a semicircular arc shape, and a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward is provided at a portion that protrudes outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The driving pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 penetrates the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevation unit base 3453 of the rear upper elevation decorative body unit 3450. Further, the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by a rear elevation detection sensor 3432 that penetrates through the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward.

The back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. A shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the upper back rotary decoration 3440 penetrates the upper back decoration 3451, the upper back decoration substrate 3452, and the elevation unit base 3453, and extends through the elevation unit base 3453. extends to the rear of the The back top rear decoration 3451 stacks two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back top rear rotary decoration 3440 in front and behind, and rotates so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it has been made.

The back top decoration substrate 3452 can make the top back rotary decoration 3440 and the back top decoration 3451 emit light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back upper decoration substrate 3452 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back upper rear decoration 3451 are transparent, and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. More specifically, the back top post-rotation decorative body 3440 and the back top post-rotation decoration 3451 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short linearly extending ridges in random directions. In one petal of the cherry blossom that is modeled by the decorative body 3440 and the rear upper back decorative body 3451, the pachinko machine 1 (lower in transparency) becomes darker from the center of the petal toward the periphery. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is printed, but the back side is rotated after rotation. Through the decoration body 3440 and the back top decoration body 3451 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back top decoration substrate 3452 arranged behind the back top decoration body 3451 can be visually recognized. It's like

In addition, surface-side electronic components such as part numbers of surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper decoration substrate 3452, and areas indicating positions where the surface-side electronic components are arranged Front-side notation indicating the attributes of the front-side electronic components (further, the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model of the front-side electronic components.) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back top decoration substrate 3452 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent back top rotation decoration 3440, a transparent top back decoration is printed. 3451 , and the back top decoration substrate 3452 are arranged in order, so that the predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back top decoration substrate 3452 by silk printing is applied to the top back decoration body 3451 . or through the upper back decoration 3451 and the upper back rotary decoration 3440, and when the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized. , characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side marking portion) can be discriminated by the predetermined paint color.

In addition, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper decoration board 3452 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white) in each package, and the connector is The housing is made of white resin (also called natural color, which is recognized as being the same color as white (natural color)).

A white resist solution is applied to the entire surface (front surface) of the back upper decoration substrate 3452 except for pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a "solid white resist"). On the back surface (rear surface) of the back top decoration board 3452, a white resist layer is formed by solidly coating white resist over the entire area excluding pads, through-holes, lands, etc. where connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. is formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the rear upper back decoration board 3452, although not shown, near the surface-side electronic components of the plurality of mounted LEDs, the part numbers of the surface-side electronic components, the surface-side electronic components Attributes of front-side electronic components such as areas indicating positions to place ) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less noticeable than white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back upper decoration board 3452, although not shown, there are areas near the back side electronic components of the connector, such as the part numbers of the back side electronic components and the positions where the back side electronic components are arranged. Attributes of back side electronic components (In addition, the shape of the back side electronic components, the size of the back side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back side electronic components, and the model of the back side electronic components may be included.) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less noticeable than white.

The elevating unit base 3453 is provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a through which the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so that the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is rotatably inserted through the base end side (the right end side in the front view). and an elongated slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. In the slit 3453b of the elevation unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted. The motor cover 3460 has a cherry blossom-like decoration on the front surface.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. While the written part (the red written part on the back side of the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the structure of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow color is inconspicuous, and the surface When the side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous against the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light emission effects by means of illumination by light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. , and the light emission mode changes in various ways by turning on (light emitting) and turning off the light. For this reason, as described above, the front surface (front surface) of the front upper decoration substrate 3422 and the rear upper decoration substrate 3452 has the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs etc. are soldered. , A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"), and further, this solid coating On the white resist that has been applied, the surface side notation part that allows the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light to be specified is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white color is displayed. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side marking part inconspicuous with respect to the resist, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is lit (during light emission), it is a solid white color with high reflectance. and the surface side marking portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint that is very close to the reflectance of white. A high reflectance can be maintained.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

Next, the movement of the back top front rotary decoration 3410, the back top rear rotation decoration 3440, and the back top lifting decoration unit 3450 in the back top effect unit 3400 will be described. In the normal state of the back side effect unit 3400, the detection piece 3427a of the rotary gear 3427 attached to the shaft 3410a of the back side front rotary decoration 3410 is detected by the back side rotation detection sensor 3428. The upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 175). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back top front rotation drive motor 3425, the back top front rotation decoration body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

In addition, in a normal state, the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450 having the back upper rear rotating decoration body 3440 provided on the tip side extends in the left-right direction, and the whole except the tip side is It is positioned behind the back upper front decoration 3421 and is in a retracted position that is invisible from the front (see FIG. 176(a)). In addition, the part of the back upper elevating decoration unit 3450 protruding leftward from the back upper front decoration 3421 is located behind the back front left effect unit 3700 in the state assembled to the game board 5, Not visible from the front.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3431 c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by the rear elevation detection sensor 3432 . In addition, the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 is located below the center of revolution, and near the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the elevation unit base 3453 of the rear elevation decoration unit 3450. positioned.

More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431 b of the elevation cam gear 3431 with the slit 3453 b extends through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3431 . As a result, even if a force acts to rotate the lifting unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward due to the weight of the back upper lifting decorative body unit 3450, the force is not applied. Since the line of force passes through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b in contact with the slit 3453b, the elevation cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 does not revolve either, the elevation unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back upper elevation decoration body unit 3450 rotates from the retracted position so that the tip side moves downward. no. Therefore, the weight of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back upper elevating drive motor 3429 via the elevating unit base 3453 and the elevating cam gear 3431 .

In a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 tries to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the rear lifting decorative body unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 rotates counterclockwise due to the force acting from the slit 3453b through the drive pin 3431b. Attempt to rotate in the direction of rotation. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevation unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b abuts the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, so that the counterclockwise rotation of the back upper lifting decorative body unit 3450 can be prevented. .

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated counterclockwise by the rear elevation driving motor 3429, the elevation cam gear 3431 is rotated clockwise by the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430. As a result, the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise. As the driving pin 3431b revolves in the clockwise direction, the driving pin 3431b moves leftward and upward, and the driving pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a. The vertical lifting unit base 3453 rotates counterclockwise about the shaft hole 3453a by the weight of the rear lifting decorative body unit 3450 so that the tip side thereof moves downward.

When the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise and moves above the straight line connecting the rotation center of the elevation cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevation unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b It slides in the slit 3453b in the direction away from the shaft hole 3453a. Then, when the drive pin 3431b revolves further clockwise and reaches near the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 is stopped by the rear elevation drive motor 3429, and simultaneously, the drive pin 3431b stops revolving.

As a result, the counterclockwise rotation of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 via the elevating unit base 3453 is stopped, and the front end side of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 including the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 is moved. , the state of the appearance position moved downward from the back upper front decoration body 3421 (see FIG. 176(b)). In this appearance position, the tip side of the upper back up/down decoration unit 3450 is positioned lower than the front upper back decoration 3421, so that the upper back rotation decoration 3440 and the like are visible from the front. becomes possible.

In the state in which the back-upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is at the appearing position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the driving pin 3431b with the slit 3453b extends through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431 . As a result, even if a force is applied to further rotate the lifting unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back upper lifting decorative body unit 3450, the line of force of that force hits the slit 3453b. Since the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3431 passes through the contacting drive pin 3431b, the elevation cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevation unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the rear elevation decoration unit 3450 rotates counterclockwise so that the tip side moves downward from the appearance position. , and the weight of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back upper elevating drive motor 3429 via the elevating cam gear 3431 .

In addition, when the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearing position, the elevating cam gear 3431 may be further revolved to bring the drive pin 3431b into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 tries to rotate further counterclockwise due to the weight of the rear lifting decorative body unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 rotates clockwise due to the force acting from the slit 3453b through the driving pin 3431b. Attempt to rotate in the direction of rotation. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevation unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b abuts on the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the driving pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, so that the counterclockwise rotation of the back upper lifting decorative body unit 3450 can be prevented. .

When the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position side, the back upper back rotating decoration body 3440 provided on the tip side can be visually recognized from the front. In the back upper elevating decoration unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454, the rear upper rear rotation decoration is rotated via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458. Body 3440 can be rotated about an anterior-posterior axis (see FIG. 176(b)). Therefore, when the back top rear rotary decoration 3440 is visible from the front, by rotating the drive gear 3455 by the back top rear rotation driving motor 3454, the rotating back top rear rotary decoration 3440 can be visually recognized. .

When the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is returned from the appearance position to the retracted position, the motor gear 3430 is rotated in the opposite direction by the back upper elevating drive motor 3429, so that the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 moves up and down. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the lifting unit base 3453 rotates clockwise, and the front end side of the back lifting decorative body unit 3450 moves upward. Then, when the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by the rear elevation detection sensor 3432, by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the rear elevation drive motor 3429, the rear elevation decoration unit 3450 is moved to the retracted position. can be restored.

At this time, the spring 3433 urges the upper back elevating decorative body unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, assisting the rotation of the upper elevating back decorative body unit 3450 to the retracted position side, thereby elevating the upper back elevating. The load on the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 177, the back side effect unit 3400 of the present embodiment is provided with the back side front decoration substrate 3422 behind the back side front rotary decoration 3410 and the back side front decoration 3421. By appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decoration substrate 3422 to emit light, the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 and the back upper front decoration 3421 can be decorated with light. In addition, since the back top decoration board 3452 is provided behind the back top back rotary decoration body 3440 and the back top back decoration body 3451, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back top back decoration board 3452 are appropriately emitted. By doing so, it is possible to light-embellish the back top rotating decorative body 3440 and the back top rear decorative body 3451 .

At this time, in a state in which the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearing position side, the LED of the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452 is caused to emit light, so that the back upper rear rotation decoration which is light-emitting decorated. The body 3440 and the back top decoration 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Back left production unit]
Next, the back-left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to the main FIGS. 178 to 184 and the like. FIG. 178(a) is a front perspective view of the rear left effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the back left effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. It is a diagram. Fig. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left decoration unit of the rear left effect unit and viewed from the front. Fig. 182 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left decoration unit of the rear left effect unit. 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 183 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the back-left effect unit from the front. FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-left decoration unit in the back-left effect unit.

The back rear left effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the left end in the back box 3010 and in front of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100 . The back-left rendering unit 3500 includes a transparent back-left rotating decorative body 3510 rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-left left-back decoration rotatably supporting the back-left rotating decorative body 3510 on the lower end side. A body unit 3520 and a back left driving unit 3550 mounted in the back box 3010 for rotating the upper end side of the back left decorative body unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided.

The back-left rotation decorative body 3510 of the back-left effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The back-rear-left rotating decorative body 3510 has an axial shaft 3510a projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from the center of the rear surface (see FIG. 182).

As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the rear left decoration unit 3520 includes a transparent rear left decoration 3521 through which the shaft 3510a of the transparent rear left rotation decoration 3510 penetrates at the center, and a rear left decoration 3521. A rear left decoration substrate 3522 provided behind the rear left decoration body 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”); A front cover 3523 attached to the rear side of the rear left decoration body 3521 from the rear of the left decoration substrate 3522 and rotatably supporting the shaft 3510a of the rear rear left rotary decoration body 3510, and the front cover 3523. and a movable base 3524 which is attached to the rear side of the rear left drive unit 3550 and whose upper end side is rotatably attached to the rear rear left drive unit 3550 .

In addition, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 includes a back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3524 so that the rotating shaft protrudes between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523, and a rear rear left rotary drive motor 3525. A drive gear 3526 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of a left rotation drive motor 3525 and a spur gear 3526 engaged with the drive gear 3526 and attached to the rear end of an axial shaft 3510a of a back rear left rotation decoration 3510 A gear-shaped rotary gear 3527 is provided.

The rear left decoration 3521 of the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is composed of two cherry blossoms having the same size as the rear left rotating decoration 3510, and the rear petals are arranged so that the front petals overlap each other. It is formed in a shape as if rotated so as to be positioned between A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The back-left rotating decoration 3510 and the back-left left decoration 3521 are transparent, and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. More specifically, the back left rotation decorative body 3510 and the back left left decoration body 3521 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in random directions. The pachinko machine 1 (lower in transparency) is arranged so that, in one petal of a cherry blossom flower modeled by the decorative body 3510 and the rear-left decorative body 3521, the shading becomes darker (lower in transparency) from the center of the petal toward the periphery. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is printed, but the reverse side is rotated to the left. Through the decoration 3510 and the back left decoration 3521 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back left decoration substrate 3522 arranged behind the back left decoration 3521 can be visually recognized. It's like

Attributes of front-side electronic components such as part numbers of front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522, and areas indicating positions where front-side electronic components are arranged. (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model number of the front-side electronic components.) A predetermined paint color is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 by silk printing. Since the rear left decorative substrate 3522 is arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 by silk printing is applied to the rear left decorative body 3521 and then the rear left decorative substrate 3521 . It is visible through the rear left rotation decoration 3510, and when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state in which a plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters, symbols, and shapes are displayed in the predetermined paint color. (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side description section) can be discriminated.

In addition, each package of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

The front surface (front surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 is formed by applying a white resist liquid over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a "solid white resist"). On the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522, a white resist layer is formed by solidly coating a white resist over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. where connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. is formed. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522, although not shown, the part numbers of the surface-side electronic components, the surface-side electronic Attributes of front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position to place the component (furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component ) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white. On the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear left decorative board 3522, although not shown, an area indicating the part number of the rear electronic component and the position where the rear electronic component is arranged is located in the vicinity of the rear electronic component such as a connector. Attributes of back-side electronic components such as (further include shape of back-side electronic components, size of back-side electronic components, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of back-side electronic components, model of back-side electronic components. ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. While the written part (the red written part on the back side of the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the structure of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow is inconspicuous, and the surface When the side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion for white resist) does not stand out against the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light emission effects by means of illumination by light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. , and the light emission mode changes in various ways by turning on (light emitting) and turning off the light. For this reason, the front surface (front surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 is coated with a white resist liquid over the entire area except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the plurality of LEDs are soldered, as described above. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a “solid white resist”) formed by the above method, and furthermore, a large amount of white resist is formed on the solid white resist. The front surface side that enables identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting color is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the yellow surface side is displayed against the white resist. In addition to being able to make the writing part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is lit (at the time of light emission), a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance A high reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 can be maintained by combination of the surface side marking portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to .

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

The front cover 3523 is formed in a shape that combines a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the rear left decorative body 3521 in a front view and a portion extending upward from the upper left of the portion in a rectangular shape. . The front cover 3523 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of the portion extending upward in a rectangular shape. The front cover 3523 is shaped like a shallow container that opens rearward.

The movable base 3524 is formed to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523 , and the upper end side thereof extends upward beyond the upper end of the front cover 3523 . The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper end side, and an operating pin 3524b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3524a. A support shaft 3551a of a reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear left drive unit 3550 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3524b protrudes forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

When the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back left rotation drive motor 3525, the left back back decoration body unit 3520 rotates the left back back decoration body 3510 through the rotation gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. Can be rotated around an axis of orientation.

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the back left driving unit 3550 includes a vertically extending flat reinforcing plate 3551 having a support shaft 3551a for rotatably supporting the back left decoration unit 3520. , a vertically extending unit base 3552 attached to the front surface of a reinforcing plate 3551 and attached inside the back box 3010; a unit cover 3553 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3552; A back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 mounted so that its shaft protrudes between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped motor gear mounted on the rotation shaft of the rear rear left elevation drive motor 3554 3555 and .

In addition, the rear rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3556 that meshes with a motor gear 3555 and is rotatably attached to a unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a that meshes with the transmission gear 3556. , a drive pin 3557b projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a, and a detection piece 3557c projecting forward from near the front periphery of the gear portion 3557a; A first slit 3558a extending horizontally into which a driving pin 3557b of 3557 is slidably inserted, and an operating pin 3524b of a movable base 3524 in the back rear left decoration unit 3520 extending horizontally below the first slit 3558a. has a second slit 3558b into which is slidably inserted, and a link member 3558 attached between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553 so as to be vertically slidable.

Further, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 that biases the link member 3558 upward, a flat partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevation cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. 3553, and a rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 (lead type) and

A white resist solution is applied to the front and rear surfaces of the rear left relay board 3561, excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors and the rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as a "solid white resist") formed by the coating. Also, although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the rear-left relay board 3561, the part numbers of the front-side electronic components, the front-side electronic Attributes of front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position to place the component (furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component ) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white. Although not shown, on the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear left relay board 3561, the part numbers of the rear electronic components, the rear electronic components, and the like are displayed in the vicinity of the rear electronic components such as the connector, the rear rear left elevation detection sensor 3562, and the like. Attributes of the back side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the components are placed (In addition, the shape of the back side electronic components, the size of the back side electronic components, the mounting direction of the back side electronic components (mounting direction), the back side electronic components ) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less noticeable than white. The rear left relay board 3561 is not a decorative board and is not mounted with LEDs, but is a board provided in the game board 5. By functioning as a board), when light emitted by LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, this light is emitted toward the front of the game board 5. It is designed to be able to contribute to the production.

The reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear rear left drive unit 3550 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3551a protrudes forward from the top. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear left decoration body unit 3520 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3552 extends longer in the vertical direction than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is positioned near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the unit base 3552, and is formed in a shallow container shape that opens rearward.

The elevation cam gear 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558 with the drive pin 3557b passing through the slit 3560a of the partition plate 3560 . The detection piece 3557c is detected by a rear rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 that penetrates the unit cover 3553 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically and has a first slit 3558a near its upper end and a second slit 3558b near its lower end. The spring 3559 has its lower end attached to the link member 3558 and its upper end attached to the partition plate 3560 .

The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semicircular arc through which the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 is inserted. The rear left relay board 3561 relays the connection between the rear left decoration board 3522, the rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rear left elevation drive motor 3554, the rear rear left elevation detection sensor 3562, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for

Next, the operation of the rear-left effect unit 3500 will be described. 183 and 184(a), the back-left effect unit 3500 normally has a back-left rotating decoration 3510 provided on the lower end side (tip side). The unit 3520 is in a retracted position in which it hangs down. In this normal state, the back left decorative body unit 3520 (back left rotating decorative body 3510) is located behind the back front left effect unit 3700 and cannot be visually recognized from the front (player side). It's becoming

In addition, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, most of the back-left effect unit 3500 is located behind the back-front left decorative body 3030 and the back-front left effect unit 3700, and the back-left elevating drive motor. Only part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 131, etc.). In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the portion facing the front of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 is covered with the portion outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3, and the player can invisible from the side (see Figure 135).

In this normal state, the detection piece 3557 c of the elevation cam gear 3557 is detected by the back rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 . Also, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 is positioned directly below the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3557 and positioned near the left end of the link member 3558 in the first slit 3558a. In addition, in a normal state, the link member 3558 is positioned at the lower movement end, and the operating pin 3524b positioned to the right of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is It is positioned near the left end of the link member 3558 inside the second slit 3558b.

In this normal state, the link member 3558 is urged upward by the spring 3559, but the normal line passing through the contact point of the driving pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 that is in contact with the first slit 3558a is Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevation cam gear 3557 (the revolution center of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3557b through the first slit 3558a due to the biasing force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 never moves upward. Therefore, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the rear left decoration unit 3520 (back left rotary decoration 3510) moves from the retracted position about the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3559 does not act on the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, elevation cam gear 3557 and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. As a result, when the link member 3558 attempts to move upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3559, the elevation cam gear 3557 attempts to rotate clockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 tries to revolve in the leftward direction. cannot revolve, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevation cam gear 3557, and the rotation of the back rear left decoration body unit 3520 from the retracted position can be prevented.

In this normal state, when the rear left elevation drive motor 3554 rotates the motor gear 3555 counterclockwise, the elevation cam gear 3557 rotates counterclockwise via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. As a result, the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 revolves counterclockwise. When the drive pin 3557b revolves counterclockwise, it slides rightward in the first slit 3558a while pressing upward the inner surface of the first slit 3558a, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It will happen.

When the link member 3558 moves upward, the actuating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the rear left decoration unit 3520 protruding below and to the right of the support shaft 3551a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. , and while the operating pin 3524b slides rightward in the second slit 3558b, the movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 3551a, and the rear left decorative body unit 3520 moves. It rotates counterclockwise from the retracted position (see FIGS. 184(a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is assisted by the biasing force of the spring 3559, and the load applied to the back rear left elevation driving motor 3554 is reduced.

In this way, the rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 3551a, so that the rear left rotary decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side moves rightward. As a result, the back-left rotating decorative body 3510 moves to the right of the back-front-left effect unit 3700 and becomes visible from the front (player's side).

In the rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the rotation of the rear left decoration unit 3520 when the elevation cam gear 3557 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (retracted position). The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 184(b)). In the state of the first appearing position, the rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated about 44 degrees counterclockwise from the retracted position.

When the elevation cam gear 3557 further rotates counterclockwise from the first appearing position, the drive pin 3557b slides leftward in the first slit 3558a. Then, when the drive pin 3557b moves to just above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. .

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, and the counterclockwise rotation of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 is stopped, resulting in the state of the second appearing position (Fig. 184 (c) )). In the state of the second appearing position, the back left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated counterclockwise by about 74 degrees from the state of the retracted position.

The drive pin 3557b is located directly above the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3557 when the rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearing position. In this state, the weight of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 causes a force to rotate the left rear decorative body unit 3520 in the clockwise direction about the support shaft 3551a. The link member 3558 tries to move downward through the operating pin 3524b of 3524 and the second slit 3558b, but the driving pin 3557b inserted in the first slit 3558a is positioned right above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the elevation cam gear 3557 does not rotate, so the link member 3558 does not move downward, and the rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates from the second appearing position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the back left decorative body unit 3520 does not act on the back left lifting drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the lifting cam gear 3557, and the like.

When the rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearing position, the elevation cam gear 3557 is further rotated counterclockwise so that the driving pin 3557b contacts the left end of the first slit 3558a. Also good. As a result, when the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 attempts to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a by its own weight, the link member 3558 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3524b. A force acting from the one slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b causes the elevation cam gear 3557 to rotate counterclockwise. At this time, the driving pin 3557b tries to revolve to move leftward, but since the driving pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the driving pin 3557b cannot revolve. Without this, the downward movement of the link member 3558 is blocked, and the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 can be unrotatably locked in the state of the second appearing position.

When the rear left decoration unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the rear left rotation decoration 3510 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). becomes visible from

In this back left decorative body unit 3520, the driving gear 3526 is rotated by the back left rotating driving motor 3525, so that the back left rotating decorative body 3510 is rotated via the rotating gear 3527 meshing with the driving gear 3526. It can be rotated about an anterior-posterior axis (see FIG. 183). Therefore, when the back left rotating decorative body 3510 is visible from the front (player side), when the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back left rotating driving motor 3525, the rotating back left rotating decorative body 3510 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When returning the rear left decorative body unit 3520 from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the motor gear 3555 is rotated by the rear rear left elevation drive motor 3554 in the opposite direction to the above. By rotating in the direction of , the link member 3558 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557, and as the link member 3558 moves downward, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 moves. It rotates in the direction of the retracted position (clockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3557c of the elevation cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear rear left elevation detection sensor 3562, the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear rear left elevation driving motor 3554 is stopped, thereby retracting the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520. It can be returned to the state of position.

As shown in FIG. 183, the back-left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment is provided with a back-left decorative substrate 3522 behind the back-left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back-left left decorative body 3521. By appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back left decoration substrate 3522 to emit light, the back left rotating decoration 3510 and the back left decoration 3521 can be decorated with light. At this time, the rear left decoration unit 3520 is turned from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, and the LED of the rear left decoration substrate 3522 is caused to emit light, thereby producing light emitting decoration. The back-left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back-left left decorative body 3521 can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Back rear right production unit]
Next, the back-right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to the main FIGS. 185 to 191 and the like. FIG. 185(a) is a front perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit. Fig. 186 is an exploded perspective view of the back right effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. It is a diagram. Figure 188 is an exploded perspective view of the back right decoration unit of the back rear right effect unit, viewed from the front. 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the back-right effect unit from the front. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-right decoration unit in the back-right effect unit.

The back right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the right end in the back box 3010 and in front of the right side of the back back effect unit 3100 . The back-right direction unit 3600 includes a transparent back-right rotating decorative body 3610 rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-right rotating decorative body 3610 rotatably supported on the lower end side. A body unit 3620 and a rear right driving unit 3650 mounted in the back box 3010 for rotating the upper end side of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided.

The back-right rotating decorative body 3610 of the back-right effect unit 3600 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The back rear right rotation ornament 3610 has a columnar shaft 3610a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface (see FIG. 188).

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the rear right decoration unit 3620 includes a transparent rear right decoration 3621 through which the shaft 3610a of the transparent rear right rotation decoration 3610 penetrates at the center, and a rear right decoration 3621. A rear right decoration board 3622 provided behind the rear right decoration body 3621 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"); A front cover 3623 attached to the rear side of the rear right decoration body 3621 from the rear of the right decoration substrate 3622 and rotatably supporting the shaft 3610a of the rear rear right rotation decoration body 3610, and the front cover 3623. and a movable base 3624 that is attached to the rear side of the rear right drive unit 3650 and whose upper end side is rotatably attached to the rear rear right drive unit 3650 .

In addition, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that the rotating shaft protrudes between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623, A drive gear 3626 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of a right rotation drive motor 3625 and a drive gear 3626 meshing with the drive gear 3626 and attached to the rear end of the shaft 3610a of the back rear right rotation decoration 3610 A gear-shaped rotating gear 3627 is provided.

The rear right decoration 3621 of the rear rear right decoration unit 3620 is composed of two cherry blossoms having the same size as the rear rear right rotating decoration 3610, and the rear petals are arranged so that the front petals overlap each other. It is formed in a shape as if rotated so as to be positioned between A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear-right decorative substrate 3622 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The back-right rotation decoration 3610 and the back-right rotation decoration 3621 are transparent, and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. More specifically, the back-right rotation decoration 3610 and the back-right rotation decoration 3621 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short linearly extending protrusions in random directions. The pachinko machine 1 (lower in transparency) is arranged so that, in one petal of a cherry blossom flower modeled by the decorative body 3610 and the rear-right decorative body 3621, the shading becomes darker (lower in transparency) from the center of the petal toward the periphery. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the view of the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is printed, but the reverse side rotates to the right. Through the decoration body 3610 and the back right decoration body 3621 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back right decoration substrate 3622 arranged behind the back rear right decoration body 3621 can be visually recognized. It's like

Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as the part numbers of surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622 and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic components are arranged (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model number of the front-side electronic components.) A predetermined paint color is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622 by silk printing. Since the rear right decorative substrate 3622 is arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622 by silk printing is applied to the rear right decorative body 3621 and then the rear right decorative substrate 3621 . It is visible through the rear right rotation decorative body 3610, and in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, if a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized, characters, symbols, and shapes are displayed in the predetermined paint color. (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side description section) can be discriminated.

In addition, each package of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

The surface (front surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622 is formed by applying a white resist liquid over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a "solid white resist"). On the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear-right decorative board 3622, a white resist layer is formed by solidly coating a white resist over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. is formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622, although not shown, the part numbers of the front electronic components, the front electronic Attributes of front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position to place the component (furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component ) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white. On the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear-right decorative board 3622, although not shown, there is an area indicating the part number of the rear-side electronic component and the position where the rear-side electronic component is arranged near the rear-side electronic component such as a connector. Attributes of back-side electronic components such as (further include shape of back-side electronic components, size of back-side electronic components, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of back-side electronic components, model of back-side electronic components. ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. While the written part (the red written part on the back side of the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the structure of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow is inconspicuous, and the surface When the side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion for white resist) does not stand out against the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light emission effects by means of illumination by light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. , and the light emission mode changes in various ways by turning on (light emitting) and turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the front surface (front surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622 is coated with a white resist solution over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as a “solid white resist”) formed by the above method, and a multi-layer coating is formed on the solid white resist. By printing the surface side notation part that can identify the full-color LED capable of emitting color by silk printing with yellow paint, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the yellow surface side against the white resist In addition to being able to make the writing part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is lit (at the time of light emission), a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance A high reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622 can be maintained by combining the surface side marking portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to .

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

The front cover 3623 is formed in a shape that combines a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the rear right decorative body 3621 in a front view and a portion extending upward from the upper right of the portion in a rectangular shape. . The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of the portion extending upward in a rectangular shape. The front cover 3623 is shaped like a shallow container that opens rearward.

The movable base 3624 is formed to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623 , and the upper end side thereof extends upward beyond the upper end of the front cover 3623 . The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3624b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3624a. A support shaft 3651a of a reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3624b protrudes forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

When the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the rear right rotation driving motor 3625, the right rear rear decoration body unit 3620 rotates the right rear rear decoration body 3610 through the rotation gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626. Can be rotated around an axis of orientation.

As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a vertically extending flat reinforcing plate 3651 having a support shaft 3651a for rotatably supporting the rear right decoration unit 3620. , a vertically extending unit base 3652 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and attached in the back box 3010, a vertically extending unit cover 3653 whose upper part is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3652, and a unit cover. A back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is attached to the upper front surface of the 3653 so that the rotation shaft protrudes between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653, and the rotation shaft of the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is attached. and a motor gear 3655 having a spur gear shape.

In addition, the rear rear right drive unit 3650 includes a gear portion 3657a in the shape of a spur gear meshing with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3657a, and a front surface of the gear portion 3657a. A lift cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer circumference, a first slit 3658a extending left and right into which a drive pin 3657b of the lift cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit. It has a second slit 3658b extending left and right under the 3658a and into which the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decoration unit 3620 is slidably inserted. and a link member 3658 attached so as to be vertically slidable between.

Further, the back rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3659 that biases the link member 3658 upward, a flat partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevation cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. 3653, and a back rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 (lead and a lower base 3663 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652 and to which the lower portion of the unit cover 3653 is attached to the front surface.

On the front and rear surfaces of the rear right relay board 3661, a white resist solution is applied over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors and the rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as a "solid white resist") formed by the coating. In addition, although not shown, on the surface (front) of the rear-right relay board 3661, the part numbers of the surface-side electronic components, the surface-side electronic Attributes of front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position to place the component (furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component ) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white. On the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear-right relay board 3661, although illustration is omitted, the part numbers of the rear-side electronic components, the rear surface, and the like are displayed in the vicinity of the rear-side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors and the rear-right elevation detection sensor 3662. Attributes of the back side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the side electronic components are placed (In addition, the shape of the back side electronic components, the size of the back side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back side electronic components, the back side (This may include the model number of the electronic component.) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out against white. . The rear right relay board 3661 is not a decoration board and is not mounted with LEDs, but is a board provided in the game board 5. By functioning as a board), when light emitted by LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, this light is emitted toward the front of the game board 5. It is designed to be able to contribute to the production.

A reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear rear right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3651a protrudes forward from the upper portion. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decorative body unit 3620 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3652 extends above the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the supporting shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically with substantially the same length from the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663), and is shaped like a shallow container that opens rearward.

The elevation cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658 with the drive pin 3657b passing through the slit 3660a of the partition plate 3660 . The detection piece 3657c is detected by a back rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically and has a first slit 3658a near its upper end and a second slit 3658b near its lower end. The spring 3659 has its lower end attached to the link member 3658 and its upper end attached to the partition plate 3660 .

The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semicircular arc through which the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 is inserted. The rear-right relay board 3661 relays the connection between the rear-right decoration board 3622, the rear-right rotation drive motor 3625, the rear-right elevation drive motor 3654, the rear-right elevation detection sensor 3662, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for

Next, the operation of the back-right effect unit 3600 will be described. The back right effect unit 3600, in a normal state, has a back right rotating decoration 3610 provided on the lower end side (front end side), as shown in FIGS. 190 and 191(a). The unit 3620 is in a retracted position in which it hangs down. In this normal state, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is positioned behind the back front right effect unit 3800, and is invisible from the front (player side). It's becoming

In addition, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, the rear right effect unit 3600 is located behind the right front decorative body 3040 and the right rear effect unit 3800, and the whole is forward (player side). is not visible from

In this normal state, the detection piece 3657 c of the elevation cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 . Also, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 is positioned directly below the rotation center of the elevation cam gear 3657 and positioned near the right end of the link member 3658 in the first slit 3658a. In addition, in a normal state, the link member 3658 is positioned at the lower movement end, and the operating pin 3624b positioned to the left of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is It is located near the right end of the link member 3658 in the second slit 3658b.

In this normal state, the link member 3658 is urged by the spring 3659 in the upward direction. Since it passes through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3657 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3657b through the first slit 3658a due to the biasing force of the spring 3659, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction and the link member 3658 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the rear right decoration unit 3620 (rear rear right rotation decoration 3610) moves from the retracted position about the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3659 does not act on the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the elevation cam gear 3657 and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. As a result, when the link member 3658 tries to move upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3659, the lifting cam gear 3657 tries to rotate counterclockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b. . At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the right. cannot revolve, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevation cam gear 3657, and the rotation of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position can be prevented.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated counterclockwise by the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654, the elevation cam gear 3657 rotates clockwise via the gear portion 3657a. drive pin 3657b revolves clockwise. When the drive pin 3657b revolves clockwise, it slides leftward in the first slit 3658a while pressing upward the inner surface of the first slit 3658a, and the link member 3658 moves upward. becomes.

When the link member 3658 moves upward, the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the rear right decoration unit 3620 projecting below and to the left of the support shaft 3651a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. As the operating pin 3624b slides leftward in the second slit 3658b, the movable base 3624 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, and the back right decoration unit 3620 retreats. It rotates clockwise from the position (see FIGS. 191(a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is assisted by the biasing force of the spring 3659, and the load applied to the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is reduced.

In this way, the rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, so that the rear right rotary decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side moves leftward. As it moves upward, the back-rear right rotating decorative body 3610 moves to the left of the back-front-right effect unit 3800 and becomes visible from the front (player's side).

In the back right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment, the rotation position of the back right decorative body unit 3620 when the elevation cam gear 3657 is rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state (retracted position state). is the first appearance position (see FIG. 191(b)). In the state of the first appearing position, the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated clockwise by about 44 degrees from the state of the retracted position.

When the elevation cam gear 3657 further rotates clockwise from the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b slides rightward within the first slit 3658a. Then, when the drive pin 3657b moves to just above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 stops, and at the same time the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. .

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, and the clockwise rotation of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is stopped, resulting in the state of the second appearing position (FIG. 191(c)). ). In the state of the second appearing position, the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated clockwise by about 74 degrees from the state of the retracted position.

The drive pin 3657b is located directly above the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3657 when the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearing position. In this state, the weight of the right back decoration unit 3620 causes a force to rotate the right back decoration unit 3620 about the support shaft 3651a in the counterclockwise direction. The link member 3658 tries to move downward via the operating pin 3624b of the base 3624 and the second slit 3658b, but the driving pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is positioned just above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the elevation cam gear 3657 does not rotate, so the link member 3658 does not move downward, and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates from the second appearing position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 does not act on the rear right elevation driving motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the elevation cam gear 3657, and the like.

In addition, when the back rear right decoration unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevation cam gear 3657 may be further rotated clockwise to bring the drive pin 3657b into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. As a result, when the rear right decorative body unit 3620 attempts to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a by its own weight, the link member 3658 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3624b. A force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b causes the elevation cam gear 3657 to rotate clockwise. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve to move to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b cannot revolve. Without this, the downward movement of the link member 3658 is blocked, and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 can be unrotatably locked in the state of the second appearing position.

In a state in which the rear right decoration unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the rear rear right rotation decoration 3610 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). becomes visible from

In this rear right decoration body unit 3620, the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625, so that the rear rear right rotation decoration body 3610 is rotated through the rotation gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated about an anterior-posterior axis (see FIG. 190). Therefore, when the rear right rotating decorative body 3610 is visible from the front (player's side), when the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the right rear rotating driving motor 3625, the rotating right rear rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is returned from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the motor gear 3655 is rotated by the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654 in the opposite direction to the above. By rotating in the direction of , the link member 3658 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657, and as the link member 3658 moves downward, the back rear right decoration unit 3620 moves. It rotates in the direction of the retracted position (counterclockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3657c of the elevation cam gear 3657 is detected by the rear rear right elevation detection sensor 3662, the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is stopped, thereby retracting the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620. It can be returned to the state of position.

As shown in FIG. 190, the back-right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment is provided with a back-right decorative substrate 3622 behind the back-right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back-right right decorative body 3621. By appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back right decorative substrate 3622 to emit light, the back right rotating decoration 3610 and the back right decoration 3621 can be decorated with light. At this time, in a state in which the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the LED of the rear right decoration substrate 3622 is caused to emit light, thereby producing light emitting decoration. The back-right rotating ornament 3610 and the back-right right ornament 3621 can be shown to the player.

[5-9j. Back front left production unit]
Next, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195 and the like. FIG. 192(a) is a front perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 193 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decoration unit in the back front left effect unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 194 is an exploded back front left decoration unit in the back front left effect unit. and is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 195(a) is a front view showing the closed state of the shutter group in the back front left effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing the open state of the shutter group in the back front left effect unit.

The back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back box 3010 so that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 . The back-front-left effect unit 3700 includes three back-front-left decorations in order from the top: a first back-front-left decoration unit 3710A, a second back-front-left decoration unit 3710B, and a third back-front-left decoration unit 3710C. It is composed of a body unit 3710 .

In the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195, the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C. It is slanted so that the upper end side moves to the right. Also, the shape of the rear cover 3715 of the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is slightly different from those of the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C.

As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, the back-front-left decoration unit 3710 of the back-front-left effect unit 3700 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating in the front-rear direction and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. A shutter support member 3712 having a shape is arranged vertically on the front surface of the shutter support member 3712 and supported so as to be rotatable about an axis in the horizontal direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3730 is provided.

The back front left decoration unit 3710 closes the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from behind, and is provided behind the back front left decoration 3713 and the back front left decoration 3713 in the form of a transparent plate. The back front left decorative substrate 3714 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”) and the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are covered from behind. A rear cover 3715 attached to the front cover 3711 and attached to the front surface of the back rear left effect unit 3500 is provided.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, a back front left A transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger of the left drive solenoid 3717 and a support plate 3716 are attached so as to be rotatable around a horizontal axis. It is provided with a link member 3719 that rotates, and an opening/closing slider 3720 that slides vertically as the link member 3719 rotates to open and close the shutter unit 3730 .

The front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 is formed in a shape (a shape stylized as a “pine tree”) in which the corners are rounded by tilting the letter “convex” to the right. The front surface of the front cover 3711 is provided with a portion in which a metal decorative portion 3711a having metallic luster is formed. In other words, a portion having a metallic decorative portion 3711a with metallic luster is arranged near the front cover 3711. As shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the portion having the metallic decorative portion 3711a with metallic luster is molded integrally with the front cover 3711, but is molded separately from the front cover 3711 so that the molded portion and the front cover 3711 may be assembled.

The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3711a can impart a high-class feeling, and the front cover 3711 can be made conspicuous, so that the presence of the front cover 3711 can be emphasized. The metal decoration portion 3711a is formed by hot-stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). The front cover 3711 has a metal decorative portion 3711a formed only on the front surface thereof, and no metal decorative portion 3711a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3711 at all. As a result, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 to the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be increased by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3711. Therefore, the metal decorative portion 3711a It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the back front left decoration substrate 3714 and damaging the back front left decoration substrate 3714 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the insulation against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3712 a that rotatably support the shaft portions 3733 of the shutter members 3731 in the shutter unit 3730 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from near the left end of the front surface. The boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening/closing slider 3720, and a support plate 3716 is attached to the tip.

The shutter unit 3730 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3731 . The shutter member 3731 includes a plate-like shutter 3732 extending in the left and right direction, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a columnar shape from both left and right ends of the shutter 3732, and a left shaft portion 3733 protruding from the tip of the left shaft portion 3733 in the direction perpendicular to the axis. and a crankshaft 3734 extending cylindrically in the direction.

The shutter 3732 is formed to have a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is arranged with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3711 . The shaft portion 3733 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crankshaft 3734 is located behind the shaft portion 3733 .

The shaft portion 3733 of the shutter member 3731 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712, so that the shutter member 3731 can rotate around the shaft portion 3733 in the horizontal direction. The crankshaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the opening/closing slider 3720. As shown in FIG.

Although illustration is omitted, the back front left decorative body 3713 has characters, items, logos, etc. in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). It has a pattern. The back front left decorative body 3713 functions as an inner lens capable of diffusing light from the LEDs of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 . The surface of the back front left decorative body 3713, which is an inner lens, is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the arranged back front left decorative board 3714 is difficult to clearly see from the player side. The back surface of the back front left ornament 3713 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron) together with the front surface of the back front left ornament 3713 . may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is visible from the front, as will be described later. In this open state, since the back front left decoration 3713 is formed transparent, the surface (mounting) of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 arranged behind the back front left decoration 3713 is passed through the back front left decoration 3713 . surface) can be visually recognized.

Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as part numbers of surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714, and areas indicating positions where the surface-side electronic components are arranged. (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model number of the front-side electronic components.) The surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 is printed with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and the back front left decoration substrate 3714 is arranged behind the back front left decoration body 3713 which is transparent. Therefore, in the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened, the predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 by silk printing is applied through the back front left decoration body 3713. In a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, if the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized, characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the surface side inscription part is Attributes of the surface-side electronic components shown) can be discriminated.

In addition, each package of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

The front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is coated with a white resist liquid over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a "solid white resist"). On the back surface (rear surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered is coated with a solid white resist. layers are formed. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, although not shown, near the surface side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs, the part numbers of the surface side electronic components, the surface side electronic Attributes of front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position to place the component (furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component ) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, the part numbers of the back side electronic components and the positions where the back side electronic components are arranged are displayed in the vicinity of the back side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors. Attributes of the back-side electronic components such as the indicated area (may also include the shape of the back-side electronic components, the size of the back-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic components, and the model of the back-side electronic components. ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less noticeable than white.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. While the written part (the red written part on the back side of the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the structure of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow color is inconspicuous, and the surface When the side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous against the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light emission effects by means of illumination by light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. , and the light emission mode changes in various ways by turning on (light emitting) and turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is coated with a white resist liquid over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a “solid white resist”) formed by the above method, and furthermore, a large amount of white resist is formed on the solid white resist. The front surface side that enables identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting color is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the yellow surface side is displayed against the white resist. In addition to being able to make the writing part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is lit (at the time of light emission), a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance A high reflectance of the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be maintained by combining the surface side marking portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to .

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

The support plate 3716 extends vertically with its plate surface directed in the left-right direction, and has a shape in which the front end side is bent rightward. The support plate 3716 has a portion bent rightward on the front end side attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. there is The support plate 3716 also has a columnar support pin 3716a that protrudes rightward from the vicinity of the lower end. The support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719. As shown in FIG.

The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 so that the plunger moves downward. The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. By inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716, the link member 3719 can rotate around the axis in the horizontal direction around the support pin 3716a. The link member 3719 has a first connection portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side with the support pin 3716a inserted therebetween, and a second connection portion 3719a connected to the opening/closing slider 3720. A connecting portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

The opening/closing slider 3720 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3730 composed of a plurality of shutter members 3731, and has a transmission groove into which each crank shaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3720a and a slit 3720b into which the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is vertically slidably inserted.

Next, the operation of the back front left effect unit 3700 will be described. In the normal state of the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is closed by the shutter 3732 of the closed state. In this normal state, the back front left ornament 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is invisible from the front (player's side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (the plurality of shutters 3732) has a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front left decorative body 3713. It is

In a normal state, the back front left driving solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the biasing force of the spring. In a normal state, the opening/closing slider 3720 is positioned at the upper movement end, and the crankshaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is positioned above the shaft portion 3733 .

In this normal state, when the back front left driving solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. move to As the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connection portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates about the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connection portion 3719b opposite to the first connection portion 3719a moves downward. The downward movement of the second connection portion 3719b of the link member 3719 causes the opening/closing slider 3720 connected to the second connection portion 3719b to move downward.

When the opening/closing slider 3720 moves downward, the crankshaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted in the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3734 is positioned below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates around the shaft portion 3733 . As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 faces the vertical direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the front cover 3711 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is opened. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 195(b)).

After that, by deenergizing (OFF) the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the plunger, which had been moving upward, moves downward due to the biasing force of the spring. The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front left effect unit 3700 of the present embodiment, the shutter unit 3730 is opened and closed by the back front left driving solenoid 3717 , so that the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3730 is changed to the back front left decorative body 3713 . The decoration (picture) can be switched to a different decoration (picture), and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

In addition, since the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decorative body 3713, a plurality of LEDs of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be illuminated when the shutter unit 3730 is closed. , the shutter unit 3730 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 are caused to emit light, thereby the back front left decorated with light emission. The ornament 3713 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front left effect unit 3700, there are three back front left decoration units: a first back front left decoration unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration unit 3710C. 3710 can independently open and close the shutter unit 3730 and can be decorated with light, so that by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front left decoration units 3710, a variety of effects can be provided to the player. I can show you.

[5-9k. Back front right production unit]
Next, the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 to 199 and the like. FIG. 196(a) is a front perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of one back-front-right decoration unit in the back-front-right effect unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 198 is an exploded view of one back-front-right decoration unit in the back-front-right effect unit. and is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 199(a) is a front view showing the closed state of the shutter group in the back front right effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing the open state of the shutter group in the back front right effect unit.

The back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010 so that the upper part near the right end is positioned behind the back front right decorative body 3040. . The back-front-right effect unit 3800 has three back-front-right decorations in order from the top: a first back-front-right decoration unit 3810A, a second back-front-right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back-front-right decoration unit 3810C. It is composed of body unit 3810 .

In the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199, the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decoration unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C. It is slanted so that the upper end side moves to the left. Also, the shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is slightly different from those of the second back front right decoration unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C.

As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the back front right decoration unit 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3811 penetrating back and forth and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. A shutter support member 3812 having a shape is arranged vertically on the front surface of the shutter support member 3812, and each member is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis in the horizontal direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3830 is provided.

The back front right decorative body unit 3810 closes the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from behind, and is provided behind the back front right decorative body 3813 and the back front right decorative body 3813 in the form of a transparent plate. The back front right decorative substrate 3814 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”) and the back front right decorative substrate 3814 are covered from behind. A rear cover 3815 attached to the front cover 3811 and attached to the front surface of the back rear right effect unit 3600 is provided.

Further, the back front right decoration unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816. A transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger of the right drive solenoid 3817 and a support plate 3816 are attached so as to be rotatable around a horizontal axis. It has a rotatable link member 3819 and an opening/closing slider 3820 that slides vertically by the rotation of the link member 3819 to open and close the shutter unit 3830 .

A front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 is formed in a shape (a shape stylized as a “pine tree”) in which the corners are rounded by tilting the letter “convex” to the left. The front surface of the front cover 3811 is provided with a portion in which a metal decorative portion 3811a having metallic luster is formed. In other words, a portion having a metal decorative portion 3811a with metallic luster is arranged near the front cover 3811. As shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the portion having the metallic decorative portion 3811a with metallic luster is molded integrally with the front cover 3811, but is molded separately from the front cover 3811 so that the molded portion and the front cover 3811 may be configured to assemble.

The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3811a can impart a high-class feeling, and the front cover 3811 can be made conspicuous, so that the presence of the front cover 3811 can be emphasized. The metal decoration portion 3811a is formed by hot-stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). The front cover 3811 has a metal decorative portion 3811a formed only on its front surface, and no metal decorative portion 3811a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3811 at all. As a result, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 to the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be increased by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3811, so that the metal decorative portion 3811a It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the back front right decoration substrate 3814 and damaging the back front right decoration substrate 3814 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the insulation against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3812a that rotatably support the shaft portions 3833 of the shutter members 3831 in the shutter unit 3830 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss portion 3812b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from near the right end of the front surface. The boss portion 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening/closing slider 3820, and a support plate 3816 is attached to the tip.

The shutter unit 3830 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3831 . The shutter member 3831 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3832 extending in the left and right direction, a shaft portion 3833 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends of the shutter 3832 in the left and right direction, and a right shaft portion 3833 protruding from the tip of the right shaft portion 3833 in the direction perpendicular to the axis and then extending to the right. and a crankshaft 3834 extending cylindrically in the direction.

The shutter 3832 is formed to have a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is arranged with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3811 . The shaft portion 3833 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crankshaft 3834 is located behind the shaft portion 3833 .

The shaft portion 3833 of the shutter member 3831 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812a of the shutter support member 3812, so that the shutter member 3831 can rotate around the shaft portion 3833 in the horizontal direction. The crankshaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the opening/closing slider 3820. As shown in FIG.

Although illustration is omitted, the back front right decorative body 3813 has characters, items, logos, etc. along with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). It has a pattern. The back front right decorative body 3813 functions as an inner lens capable of diffusing the light from the LED of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 . The surface of the back front right decorative body 3813, which is an inner lens, is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the arranged back front right decorative board 3814 is difficult to clearly see from the player side. In addition, the back surface of the back front right ornament 3813 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron) together with the front surface of the back front right ornament 3813. may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is visible from the front, as will be described later. In this open state, the back front right decorative body 3813 is formed transparent, so that the surface (mounting) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 arranged behind the back front right decorative body 3813 is passed through the back front right decorative body 3813 . surface) can be visually recognized.

Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as part numbers of surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814, and areas indicating positions where the surface-side electronic components are arranged. (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model number of the front-side electronic components.) A surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 is printed with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and the back front right decoration substrate 3814 is arranged behind the transparent back front right decoration body 3813 . Therefore, in the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened, a predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 by silk printing is applied through the back front right decoration body 3813. In a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, if the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized, characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the surface side inscription part is attributes of the front-side electronic components shown) can be discriminated.

In addition, each package of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

The front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is formed by applying a white resist liquid over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a "solid white resist"). On the back surface (rear surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. where various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered is coated with a solid white resist. layers are formed. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814, although not shown, near the surface side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs, the part numbers of the surface side electronic components, the surface side electronic Attributes of front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position to place the component (furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component ) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous against white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, although illustration is omitted, the part numbers of the back side electronic components and the positions at which the back side electronic components are arranged are displayed in the vicinity of the back side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors. Attributes of the back-side electronic components such as the indicated area (may also include the shape of the back-side electronic components, the size of the back-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic components, and the model of the back-side electronic components. ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is less noticeable than white.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color will stand out. While the written part (the red written part on the back side of the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the structure of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow color is inconspicuous, and the surface When the side marking portion (back side marking portion) is yellow, the yellow front side marking portion (yellow back side marking portion with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous against the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs brilliant light emission effects by means of illumination by light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. , and the light emission mode changes in various ways by turning on (light emitting) and turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is coated with a white resist solution over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as a “solid white resist”) formed by the above method, and a multi-layer coating is formed on the solid white resist. By printing the surface side notation part that can identify the full-color LED capable of emitting color by silk printing with yellow paint, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the yellow surface side against the white resist In addition to being able to make the writing part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is lit (at the time of light emission), a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance A high reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be maintained by combining the surface side marking portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to .

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow.

The support plate 3816 extends vertically with its plate surface directed in the left-right direction, and its front end side is bent leftward. The support plate 3816 has a left bent front end portion attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. there is In addition, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a projecting leftward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the lower end. The support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819. As shown in FIG.

The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 so that the plunger moves downward. The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. By inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816, the link member 3819 can rotate around the axis in the horizontal direction around the support pin 3816a. The link member 3819 has a first connection portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side with the support pin 3816a inserted therebetween, and a second connection portion 3819a connected to the opening/closing slider 3820. A connecting portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

The opening/closing slider 3820 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the height of a shutter unit 3830 composed of a plurality of shutter members 3831, and has a transmission groove into which each crank shaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3820a and a slit 3820b into which the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is vertically slidably inserted.

Next, the operation of the back front right effect unit 3800 will be described. In the normal state of the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed by the shutter 3832 of the closed state. In this normal state, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is invisible from the front (player's side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (the plurality of shutters 3832) has a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front right decorative body 3813. It is

In a normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the biasing force of the spring. In a normal state, the opening/closing slider 3820 is positioned at the upper movement end, and the crank shaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is positioned above the shaft portion 3833 .

In this normal state, when the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. move to As the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connection portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates about the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connection portion 3819b opposite to the first connection portion 3819a moves downward. The downward movement of the second connection portion 3819b of the link member 3819 causes the opening/closing slider 3820 connected to the second connection portion 3819b to move downward.

When the opening/closing slider 3820 moves downward, the crankshaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted in the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3834 is positioned below the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 rotates around the shaft portion 3833 . As a result, since the plate surface of the shutter 3832 faces the vertical direction, the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832 . The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 199(b)).

After that, by deenergizing (OFF) the back front right driving solenoid 3817, the plunger, which had been moving upward, moves downward due to the biasing force of the spring. The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front right effect unit 3800 of the present embodiment, the shutter unit 3830 is opened and closed by the back front right driving solenoid 3817 , so that the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3830 is changed to the back front right decorative body 3813 . The decoration (picture) can be switched to a different decoration (picture), and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

In addition, since the back front right decoration substrate 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back front right decoration body 3813, the plurality of LEDs of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 can be illuminated when the shutter unit 3830 is closed. , the shutter unit 3830 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 are caused to emit light, thereby the back front right decorated with light emission. The ornament 3813 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front right effect unit 3800, there are three back front right decoration units, a first back front right decoration unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration unit 3810C. Since the shutter units 3830 of the 3810 can be independently opened and closed, and the lighting can be decorated, by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front right decoration units 3810, a variety of effects can be provided to the player. I can show you.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects (movable effects) on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 200 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-back movable ornament of the rear-back effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body of the back-bottom middle effect unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. Fig. 202 shows the back top rear rotating decoration of the back top rear effect unit moving from the retracted position to the appearing position, the back left rotating decorative body of the back rear left effect unit moving from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and back back right. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing the rear-right-rotating ornaments of the production unit moved from the retracted position to the first appearing position, respectively; Fig. 203 shows the rear left rotation decoration of the rear left production unit from the retreat position to the second appearance position, and the rear rear right rotation decoration of the rear rear right production unit from the retreat position to the second appearance position, respectively. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board shown in a moved state; FIG. 204 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back-front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back-front right effect unit, respectively, from the closed state to the open state.

Fig. 205 shows the back rear movable decoration of the back rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearing position, the back upper rear rotary decoration of the back upper rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearing position, and the back rear left effect unit to the back rear. Move the left-hand rotation decoration from the retracted position to the first appearance position, move the back-right rotation decoration of the back-right production unit from the retraction position to the first appearance position, and move the back-lower middle rotation decoration of the back-lower middle production unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being moved from the lowered position to the raised position;

The game board 5 of this embodiment includes a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially entirely transparent, in a normal state 111, through them, the back front left decoration 3030, the back front right decoration 3040, and the back bottom left effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are rotated to the back bottom left. Decoration body 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251 of back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310 of back bottom middle effect unit 3300, back top front rotation decoration body 3410 and back top of back top effect unit 3400 The front decorative body 3421, the front cover 3711 and the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left effect unit 3700, the front cover 3811 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right effect unit 3800, etc. can be visually recognized well, and the center accessory 2500 Through the frame of , the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well.

More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 extends from the impinging portion 1006 of the front component 1000 to the right rail 1005. It is positioned along the side to the vicinity of the right middle unit 2700 . In addition, the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear rear effect unit 3100 is positioned behind the upper rear effect unit 3400 and is invisible from the player side.

In addition, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the general prize opening 2001 on the center and left side of the side unit 2200, and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the first big prize winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 . The bottom-left rotating decorative body 3201 and the bottom-right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and the front unit 2000 .

In addition, the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is in the state of the lowered position, and is located behind the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 so that the upper part projects into the frame of the center accessory 2500. ing. Since the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees the back-bottom middle-rotating decoration body 3310 obliquely from above, the number decoration above the center of rotation is displayed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be visually recognized well.

Further, the upper front decorative body 3421 of the upper rear effect unit 3400 extends left and right in the upper part of the game area 5a in front view, and the upper part on the left side from the center in the horizontal direction is a transparent game panel 1100 and a center accessory. 2500 , and the rest can be visually recognized well through the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The back upper front rotating decoration 3410 is in the center in the left-right direction in front of the back upper front decoration 3421, and is in a state in which one petal is directed upward. can be visually recognized. In a normal state, the upper back elevating decorative body unit 3450 having the upper back rotating decorative body 3440 of the upper back effect unit 3400 is in a retracted position behind the front upper back decorative body 3421. Not visible from the side.

In addition, the back-left decoration unit 3520 having the back-left rotating decoration 3510 of the back-left effect unit 3500 is in a retracted position behind the back-front left effect unit 3700 in a normal state. , are invisible from the player side. In addition, the back-right decoration unit 3620 having the back-right rotating decoration 3610 of the back-right effect unit 3600 is in a retracted position behind the back-front-right effect unit 3800 in a normal state. , are invisible from the player side.

In addition, the three back front left decorative body units 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 are arranged vertically along the left side of the game panel 1100, are positioned within the game area 5a in a front view, and are transparent. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁The upper first back front left decoration unit 3710A of the three back front left decoration units 3710 is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in a front view, The lower part is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The middle second back front left decorative body unit 3710B is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view. The lower third back front left decorative body unit 3710C is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in a front view, and the right part is within the frame of the center accessory 2500. positioned.

In the normal state of the back front left effect unit 3700, in each of the three back front left decoration units 3710, the shutter units 3730 are closed and the back front left decorations 3713 are invisible. Along with this, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

Further, the three back front right decorative body units 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 are arranged vertically along the right side of the game panel 1100, are positioned within the game area 5a in a front view, and are transparent. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁The first back front right decoration unit 3810A on the upper side of the three back front right decoration units 3810 has its right side behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in front view, The left side is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The second back front right decoration unit 3810B on the middle side and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C on the bottom side have a transparent game panel 1100 and a center panel on the right side from the left side of the center in the horizontal direction in front view. It is positioned behind the role object 2500 and the remaining left side is positioned within the frame of the center role object 2500 .

In the normal state of the back front right effect unit 3800, in each of the three back front right decoration units 3810, the shutter units 3830 are closed and the back front right decorations 3813 are invisible. Along with this, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

The game board 5 performs a rear back performance of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Unit 3100, back bottom left effect unit 3200, back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom middle effect unit 3300, back top effect unit 3400, back back left effect unit 3500, back back right effect unit 3600, back front left effect unit 3700 , and the back front right effect unit 3800 performs a predetermined effect (movable effect and light emitting effect).

Specifically, as an effect using the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. is released, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearing position. As a result, the player can see an effect (movable effect) in which the large rear movable decorative body 3110 straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the horizontal direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) in which the player has an advantage over the player is generated. It is possible to make the player think that it may be possible, and it is possible to heighten the expectation for the game.

Although not shown, in the back rear effect unit 3100, after dropping the back rear movable decorative body 3110 to the appearing position, the rear rear drive motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 upward to move the back rear movable decorative body. 3110 is returned to the retracted position, by appropriately changing the forward/reverse rotation of the back driving motor 3126, the back movable decorative body 3110 is moved up and down on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 via the slide guide 3130. In the vicinity of the center of the direction, it may be reciprocated up and down. As a result, the rear back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the back rear movable decorative body 3110 and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved. The movable decorative body 3110 can be focused on, and the movement of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be enjoyed.

As an effect using the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, and the back-lower-middle rotary drive motor 3333 rotates the back-lower-middle rotary decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction. As a result, the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward so as to block part of the effect image on the effect display device 1600 and is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500, which is favorable from the player's side. Since it can be visually recognized and rotates round and round, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be entertained.

Since six number decorations are provided on the back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310, by rotating the back-lower-middle-rotation decoration body 3310, the player has the impression that the roulette wheel is spinning. can give Therefore, when rotating the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the performance display device 1600 is caused to display a performance image such as "Sugoroku", and at the same time, the numbers of the number decorations of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 that has stopped rotating are displayed. The "piece" may advance according to the . As a result, the player can feel nervous depending on whether or not the rotating back-lower middle rotary decoration 3310 stops rotating at the position of the desired number decoration so that the "piece" advances to the desired "masu". It can make the player's heart beat faster and entertain the player. In addition, the advance of the "pieces" can make the player feel that the expectation value is increasing, and the expectation for the game can be heightened.

As an effect using the back bottom left effect unit 3200, back bottom right effect unit 3250, back top effect unit 3400, back back left effect unit 3500, and back back right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, FIG. As shown, in the bottom-left effect unit 3200, the bottom-left driving motor 3205 rotates the bottom-left rotating decoration 3201, and in the bottom-right effect unit 3250, the bottom-right driving motor 3255 rotates the bottom-right rotating decoration. Rotate the 3251. In addition, in the back upper effect unit 3400, the back upper front rotary drive motor 3425 rotates the back upper front rotary decoration body 3410, and the back upper lift drive motor 3429 moves the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450 downward from the retracted position. At the same time when it is rotated to the appearing position, the back top rear rotary drive motor 3454 rotates the back top rear rotary decoration body 3440 . Further, in the back left effect unit 3500, the back left up-down drive motor 3554 moves the back left decoration unit 3520 from the retracted position to the upper right first appearance position, and the back left rotation drive motor 3525 moves the back left decoration body unit 3520 to the first appearance position. Rotate the left rotation decoration 3510 . In addition, in the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 moves the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly to the upper left, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 to the first appearance position. Rotate the right rotation decoration 3610 .

As a result, the back top/rear rotation decoration 3440, the back left rotation decoration 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration 3610 move to the front of the effect display device 1600 and become visible, and the back bottom left rotation decoration. Since the body 3201, the back bottom right rotation decoration 3251, the back top front rotation decoration 3410, the back top rear rotation decoration 3440, the bottom back left rotation decoration 3510, and the bottom back right rotation decoration 3610 rotate respectively, Rotating the six ornaments can give a strong impact to the player, making them feel that something good will happen and increasing their expectations for the game.

At this time, the back upper elevating drive motor 3429, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 are appropriately rotated forward and reverse to rotate the upper back elevating decorative body unit 3450 and the back rear left decoration. The body unit 3520 and the back right decorative body unit 3620 may be respectively swung. As a result, the back upper/rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 rotate while swaying, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Players can be entertained.

Also, at this time, the back-lower middle rotary decoration 3310 may be rotated. As a result, the seven decorations rotate round and round, so that the player can strongly feel that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) in which the player has an advantage will occur. It is possible to heighten expectations for the game.

As an effect using the back-left effect unit 3500 and the back-right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The left decoration unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the upper right second appearance position, and the rear left rotation decoration 3510 is rotated by the rear rear left rotation driving motor 3525 . In addition, in the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 moves the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper left, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 to the second appearance position on the upper left. The rotary decoration 3610 is rotated. As a result, the two decorations rotate at a position approximately at the height of the eyes of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, so that the player is surprised and something good happens. It is possible to make the player think that this is not the case, and it is possible to heighten expectations for the game.

At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the back-left rotating ornament 3510 and the back-right rotating ornament 3610 at the second appearance position are the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1 It is also possible to display an effect image that corresponds to the position of the eyes of a predetermined character's face in accordance with (the world view of the game board 5)). As a result, it is possible to present the player with an effect in which the character's eyes are rolling, and the player can be entertained.

As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The closed state is changed to the open state, and the shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the back front right driving solenoid 3817 in the back front right effect unit 3800 . As a result, the back front left decorative body 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 become visible from the player side. The decoration of the decoration body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

In addition, as an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, since each has three back front left decoration units 3710 and three back front right decoration units 3810, , the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed, or a combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 to be opened and closed. Therefore, it is possible to show a variety of performances to the player, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored.

In the back unit 3000, a back-back effect unit 3100, a back-bottom left effect unit 3200, a back-bottom right effect unit 3250, a back-bottom middle effect unit 3300, a back-up effect unit 3400, a back-left effect unit 3500, and a back-right effect unit 3600. , back front left effect unit 3700, and back front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 205, all decorations may be moved. This will
By moving all the ornaments, the player can be convinced that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) will occur, and the expectation for the advantageous game state can be heightened. In this case, in the back-left effect unit 3500 and the back-right effect unit 3600, the back-left decoration unit 3520 and the back-right decoration unit 3620 are moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is avoided.

In the above description, the movement of each decoration has been described. It can be shown, and the player's interest can be further attracted.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately combine the movable effect and the light emitting effect as described above, and the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can also be combined. be able to. As a result, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining light emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. The player can be entertained, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[5-11. Main effects of the game board]
Next, the main functions and effects of the game board 5 of this embodiment having the above configuration will be described. The game board 5 of this embodiment has an opening 1112 penetrating the game panel 1100 having the game area 5a on the front side. A frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500, which is divided into an impossibility non-circulation area and formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening part 1112, has its front end projected forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加Since the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112 in this state, it is likely that the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 will be the circulation area and the inner side will be the non-circulation area. A flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 thinner than the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 extends from a position in the peripheral wall portion 2501 in which the front surface of the game panel 1100 is the same in the longitudinal direction toward the non-distribution area side (inner side). At the same time, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided with a flange portion 2502 that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided to the distribution area side (outside). Since nothing extends to the circulation area side of the part where the support part 2503 is provided, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall part 2501. Thus, the substantial circulation area can be made up to the position where it touches the peripheral wall portion 2501, and the substantial circulation area can be made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. That is, even if the non-distribution area (within the frame of the center role 2500) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 is enlarged, the substantial distribution area will not become smaller as in the conventional pachinko machine. . Therefore, by enlarging the non-circulation area partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 while suppressing the substantial reduction of the circulation area in which the game ball B circulates in the game area 5a, the non-circulation area is increased. The performance image of the performance display device 1600 as a performance device provided behind the area, the movable body of the performance unit, the decorative body, etc. can be made more visible, and the game ball B can be played in the circulation area and the non-circulation area. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining both the performance and the performance.

In addition, in the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced from the non-distribution area side (inside) by the support portion 2503, and the peripheral wall portion is formed by the flange portion 2502 provided in a portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. The portion 2501 can be reinforced from the distribution area side (outside), and the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved by attaching the center accessory 2500 to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502. , Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a contacts (abuts) the part of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support part 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall 2501 can be maintained by the support part 2503 and the like, Deformation and breakage of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) can be prevented.

In addition, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by attaching the support portion 2503, the flange portion 2502, and the game panel 1100, when the game ball B contacts, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be prevented from elastically deforming and flipping the game ball B like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B, which circulates in the game area 5a, from making a strange movement different from the conventional one due to contact with the peripheral wall part 2501, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to prevent the loss of interest and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, the support portion 2503 extending from the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-distribution area side can be made difficult to see, and the support portion 2503 (center The performance image of the performance display device 1600 as a performance device provided behind and the movable body and decoration of the performance unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen through the accessory 2500), so the non-distribution area. It is possible to enlarge the range in which the production images, movable bodies, decorations, etc. provided behind the can be seen, making it easier to demonstrate the production effect of the production device, and providing behind the non-distribution area. The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by making the performance image of the performance display device 1600, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. visible, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the players. can.

In addition, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, the transparent part can be used to light the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the light of the pachinko machine 1. Since it is possible to reflect, refract, diffuse, or transmit the light from the light-emitting means (LED, effect display device 1600, etc.), transparent parts such as the support part 2503 and the peripheral wall part 2501 can be illuminated. It is possible to make it look lively, improve its appearance, and enhance its appeal to the player. At this time, the transparent support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like to further enhance the diffusion effect.

Furthermore, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, the movable body provided behind the support part 2503 (for example, the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back rear left effect unit 3500) is provided with The above effect can be obtained by the light emitted by the light emitting means (LED), and the transparent support portion 2503 enables the player to recognize the presence of the movable body.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 extends in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the peripheral wall portion 2501 as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the front-rear direction, the support portion 2503 can be attached to the game panel. Compared to when it is extended with the same thickness as 1100, the lens effect by the support part 2503 can be reduced, and the support part 2503 can be attached to the rear back front left decorative body 3030 and the effect device (effect display device 1600 etc.), the lens effect of the transparent support portion 2503 is further reduced, and the portion behind the support portion 2503 (design ) can be improved, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the production image can be made more visible.

Furthermore, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the portion of the tip side of the support portion 2503 having a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Since a line different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be shown by the tip side of , compared to the case where the shape is along the peripheral wall portion 2501, it is difficult to see a single design, and it seems that the details are particular. A pachinko machine 1 with a deep design can be provided.

In addition, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant at that portion of the support portion 2503, and is different. Therefore, by setting the extending amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the reinforcing effect of the peripheral wall portion 2501 by the support portion 2503 can be improved.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 extends from the peripheral wall part 2501 in the front and back directions of the game panel 1100 at the same position, the support part 2503 is a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. It is possible to create an illusion as if it were so, and it is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the support part 2503 .

In addition, the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front and rear directions of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and extends from the middle (middle) of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the front and rear direction. Compared to the case where the support part 2503 extends from the end side, the deterioration of the reinforcing effect of the support part 2503 on the tip side of the peripheral wall part 2501 can be reduced, so that the strength of the peripheral wall part 2501 can be sufficiently increased. It is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (the center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged even if the game medium abuts against it.

Furthermore, since the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 so that the rear side can be inserted into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 can be The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or obscured by the peripheral wall portion 2501 .

In addition, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be seen from the peripheral wall portion 2501 when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100. The pachinko machine appears to protrude forward from the peripheral edge of the opening 1112, can give a sense of unity between the peripheral wall part 2501 (the center accessory 2500) and the game panel 1100, and has a good appearance in the game area 5a. Machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, it is partitioned by the peripheral wall 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 regardless of whether the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque. The performance image of the performance display device 1600 provided behind the non-distribution area, the movable body of the performance unit, the decorative body, etc. can be satisfactorily viewed from the front (player side), and the performance display device 1600 It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exhibiting the performance effect of the game, etc.

Furthermore, since the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed obliquely, the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since it appears to protrude outward, the player can easily notice the presence of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and can easily recognize the circulation area and the non-circulation area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 .

In addition, a flange portion 2502 extending to the distribution area side (outside) is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 where the support portion 2503 does not extend, and the portion at which the flange portion 2502 is provided Since the support part 2503 extending to the non-distribution area side (inside) is not provided, the support part 2503 interferes with the visibility of the production device (the production display device 1600 and the production unit of the back unit 3000). Instead, it is possible to enlarge the area where the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the movable body of the effect unit, etc. can be seen, and it is possible to make it easier to exhibit the effect of the effect device, and to the player. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by entertaining the performance by.

Furthermore, in the center accessory 2500, the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502 can maintain the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same level as that of the conventional product. Deformation of the molded product can be prevented when it is removed from the mold.

In addition, since the support portion 2503 extends in a flat plate shape that is thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is integrally molded with synthetic resin, only the support portion 2503 is in contact with the other portions. It is possible to prevent the difference in shrinkage amount from becoming large, and to prevent deformation of the center accessory 2500 during molding.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the frame-shaped front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 from the rear side are provided. , and are transparent, and behind the back left elevation drive motor 3554 and back rear right elevation drive of the back rear right production unit 3600 as functional parts of the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The motor 3654 is arranged so that at least a part of it is outside the game area 5a when viewed from the front. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extend from the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a so as to cover at least the parts in the game area 5a of the lifting drive motor 3554 and the rear right lifting drive motor 3654. , the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654, The back rear left elevation driving motor 3554 and the rear rear right elevation driving motor 3654 can be made difficult to see from the player side through the transparent front component member 1000, the game panel 1100 and the inside of the game area 5a, and the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 is improved. In addition, instead of the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654, the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 can be seen. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 as a whole can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more appealing to players.

In addition, since the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the boundaries of the game area 5a defined by the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are difficult to understand. A feeling of openness can be given by looking like this, and even if the game area 5a has the same size as that of a conventional pachinko machine, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger. Therefore, by making the game area 5a appear larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the expectation for the game by the pachinko machine 1 can be heightened, and the player can enjoy the game. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more appealing to the players.

In addition, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged to cover at least the part in the game area 5a in front of the functional parts such as the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654. Therefore, the front left decorative body 3030 and the right front rear decorative body 3040 can prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area 5a, so that the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved. In addition to being able to achieve the same effect as described above, the functional parts can be made difficult to see even when viewed obliquely from the central side of the game area 5a.

Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have a continuous decoration over the entire surface, and in a front view, the back front extends from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. Since the decorations of the left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the continuous decoration can make the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area 5a difficult to understand, giving a sense of openness to the game. The size of the area 5a can be made to appear larger than the actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040, and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. By making it stand out, the appeal to the player can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are made opaque, the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear left effect unit 3500 provided on the rear side through the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 It is possible to prevent the back-right effect unit 3600 and the like from being seen, and the back-left effect unit 3500 and the back-right effect unit 3600 and the like can be seen from the player side through the front constituent member 1000 and the game panel 1100, which makes the game look good. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by preventing the deterioration of the pachinko machine.

In addition, at least a part of the rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654 as functional parts are arranged outside the game area 5a when viewed from the front (the rear rear left elevation drive motor 3554 completely (entirely) outside the game area 5a), in order to arrange the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654, the front component 1000 and the outer circumference of the game area 5a The rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear right elevation drive motor 3654 can be arranged without increasing the space between them. It is possible to suppress the space of the game area 5a from becoming smaller by taking balance. In other words, since a part of the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is arranged in the game area 5a when viewed from the front, the space between the front component member 1000 and the outer circumference of the game area 5a can be reduced. , the space of the game area 5a can be relatively increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can further exhibit the above-described effects. Further, by providing a part of the drive source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the movable character inside the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space inside the game area 5a can be increased. The range of effects performed in the game area 5a is widened. All drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) for the accessories that move within the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

Furthermore, since the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the light from the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, the performance display device 1600, etc. It is possible to transmit, reflect, refract, or diffuse the light from the pachinko machine 1 as if the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 were emitting light. can improve the appearance of Further, although opaque decorative seals 3032 and 3042 are applied to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the bases 3031 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are respectively attached. And the base 3041 (which may include the decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042) is made of a transparent member, so that the light from the various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be emitted from the back front left decoration 3030 or the back It is possible to give an impression that the light reaches the front right decoration 3040 and the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 emit light. It can also be said that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged at positions where light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 reaches.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 covers at least a part of the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 as a functional component, it can be understood that it is a functional component by covering it to some extent even if it is not entirely covered. It can be spicy and made to look like part of the decoration. Therefore, even if the back front left ornament 3030 does not have a size that covers the entire back rear left elevation drive motor 3554, it is possible to achieve the same effects as described above. While reducing the cost of 3030, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger. At least a part of the rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is covered and hidden by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040. 1 (a portion closer to the boundary line dividing the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). In addition, it extends from within the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a for a predetermined location where there is no drive source outside the game area 5a (such as the lower left location in FIG. 131, that is, the lower left corner location on the game board 5). By providing the decoration, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger.

In addition, the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a is closed from behind by a transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is positioned in front of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are provided behind the game area 5a. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from behind by the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. The same effect can be achieved, and the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 do not interfere with the game ball B in the game area 5a, so that the game can be smoothly played in the game area 5a. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest by entertaining the user.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a front view, the back front left decorative body The back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 behind the back front right decorative body 3040 and the like can be made invisible, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the rear front left decorative body 3030 is extended to such an extent that the inside portion of the door window 101a in the rear rear left lifting drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the rear front left decorative body 3030 is used to move the rear rear left lifting and lowering. Since the uncovered portion can be covered with the frame-shaped door frame 3 without covering the entire drive motor 3554, the back front left decorative body 3030 can be prevented from being longer than necessary, The cost of the back front left decorative body 3030 (pachinko machine 1) can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right side of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is inclined toward the game panel 1100. On the other hand, in the first starting port 2002 in the starting port unit 2100, the front wall portion 2101 forming the front surface is parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front surface is decorated with translucency. Since the seal is attached, the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 faces forward (toward the player), and the first starting opening 2002 can be made more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001 . Therefore, since it is possible to make it easier to direct the player's consciousness to the first starting port 2002 rather than the general winning port 2001, the number of game balls B accepted in the first starting port 2002 is reduced (or the first starting A lottery of the first special lottery result performed by accepting the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 can avoid the player's concentration on the general prize winning opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress the decline of interest by increasing the expectation for the game, and to make the player recognize the position of the first starting port 2002 that the player should aim at, so that the player can aim at the first starting port 2002. You can enjoy the game.

Depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is accepted by the first starting port 2002, the player can be nervous, and when the game ball B is accepted by the first starting port 2002 Depending on whether or not the lottery of the first special lottery result generates an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot"), the player can be excited and excited, and the expectation for the game can be heightened. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. After that, when a winning lottery is drawn by lottery of the first special lottery result, an advantageous game state occurs in which the first big prize winning port 2005 and the second big prize winning port 2006 open and close in a predetermined pattern, which greatly entertains the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game. At this time, if the game ball B aimed at the first starting hole 2002 is accepted by the general prize winning hole 2001, the lottery for the first special lottery result is not performed, but the game ball B is paid out as a privilege. , the player can continue to enjoy the game without being discouraged, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting opening 2002 is parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Since the shape (appearance) of the general prize winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 is greatly different, a sticker is attached to the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 and a sticker is attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, the player does not feel uncomfortable, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the player enjoys the game with the pachinko machine 1 and loses interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be visually recognized through the transparent member. As a result, the player can surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001 or the first start opening 2002, and can fully enjoy the joy of being accepted. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. In addition, since the general prize winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are made of a transparent material, the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1 can be used. Since it is possible to reflect, refract, or diffuse the light from the means (the LED of the decorative substrate), the general prize winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be made to look gorgeous, and the appearance is improved. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the appeal to the player.

Furthermore, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the received game ball B is placed in the general winning opening. Since the game ball B received in the 2001 is guided backward later than the game ball B received in the first special lottery result lottery, the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is guided to the general prize winning opening 2001.例文帳に追加Since it can be guided backward at a later timing than the received game ball B, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 where the lottery for the first special lottery result is performed, the joy (feeling of superiority) due to the reception of the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 is given to the general winning. The player can enjoy the game ball B for a longer time than when the game ball B is received into the mouth 2001, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is immediately pushed backward ( Since it can be guided to the game panel 1100 side) and discharged faster than the game ball B accepted in the first start opening 2002, it is unnecessary for the game ball B to be accepted in the general winning opening 2001 It is possible to prevent the player from experiencing the game for a long time, direct the player's interest to the next game ball B, and smoothly advance the game to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, in the general prize winning port 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined with respect to the game panel 1100, and a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203. Therefore, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps the general winning opening 2001 in a front view. Then, depending on the player, an illusion can be given as if the game ball B has been received in the general winning hole 2001, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap the general prize winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001, and it may be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, even if the privilege (lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given after that, it is possible to avoid the distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side, and the player can avoid it. Therefore, it is possible to keep the game enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of materials applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning opening can be reduced. A decoration such as a sticker on the front surface of the mouth 2001 can be omitted. Therefore, since the cost for the general prize winning opening 2001 can be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more amusing to the players by using the reduced cost for the performance device or the like.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the back-bottom middle decorative body unit 3320 of the back-bottom middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, a rotating back-bottom middle rotation having a plurality of even-numbered (here, six) stop positions The decorative body 3310 is provided with an area detection piece 3325 whose length is half the length of the stop position, and a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 (here, six) corresponding to each stop position, and the area detection piece 3325 A plurality (here, four) of sensors consisting of a plurality (here, three) of area identification sensors 3330 consisting of half of the stop positions that detect the Since it is provided, when the back-lower-middle rotary decorative body 3310 rotates, the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 for detecting the area detecting pieces 3325 repeats increasing and then decreasing in order from one side in the rotating direction. By combining the area specifying sensor 3330 that detects the area detecting piece 3325, the current rotational position of the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

More specifically, in the case of the back-bottom center rotary decoration 3310 having six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, the area detection pieces 3325 are half and three stop positions are arranged side by side. and the minimum number of area-specific sensors 3330 required to detect movement to any stop position is three, which is half the number of stop positions. Then, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are set to a first area specifying sensor 3330a, a second area specifying sensor 3330b, and a third area specifying sensor 3330c in the rotation direction, and the back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 is positioned at the first stop position. It is assumed that only the first area specifying sensor 3330a is detecting the area detection piece 3325 at (the position of the decoration number "3"). From this state, when the back and middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the second stop position (the position of the decoration number "2"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detection piece 3325. do. Furthermore, when the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the third stop position (the position of the decorative number "1"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are activated. The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

Furthermore, when the back and middle rotation decoration 3310 rotates to the fourth stop position (the position of the decoration number "6"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a becomes non-detecting, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor Sensor 3330 c detects area detection piece 3325 . Further, when the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the fifth stop position (the position of the decorative number "5"), the second area specifying sensor 3330b becomes non-detecting, and only the third area specifying sensor 3330c is the area detection piece. 3325 is detected. Then, when the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position of the decoration number "4"), the third area specifying sensor 3330c also becomes non-detecting, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 detect the area detecting piece 3325. is not detected. After that, when the back-lower middle rotary decoration 3310 further rotates, it rotates to the first stop position (the position of the decoration number "3"), and only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detection piece 3325. In the initial state where the bottom back middle rotary decorative body 3310 rotates, detection/non-detection of the area specifying sensor 3330 as described above is repeated.

In this way, since the area detection pieces 3325 are provided with a length that covers half the number of stop positions, a combination of the detections of the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 enables the back and bottom middle rotation decoration. Since the rotation of the body 3310 can be detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not become non-detected until the back underside middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the next stop position, the back underside can be detected. The current position of the middle rotation decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

Further, since the back and middle rotation decorative body 3310 is provided with a plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 After roughly detecting the rotation of the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position by detection, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331. By minimizing the deviation of the stop position, it is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the back-lower middle rotary ornament 3310 having a plurality of stop positions.

In addition, since the stop position of the back-lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the back-lower middle-rotation decoration body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable (unpleasant feeling), and it is possible to entertain the performance (movable performance) by the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress the decrease in interest. The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310) that does not give discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is increased, the stop position deviation can be suppressed, and the back By rotating the lower middle rotary decoration 3310, the moving speed (rotation speed) of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 is increased compared to the case where the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is reciprocated. can be faster. Therefore, the fast-rotating back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest, and the rotation of the back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 can be strongly attracted. It is possible to amuse the player and suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, by rotating the back-bottom middle-rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotating surface of the back-bottom middle-rotating decorative body 3310 faces forward toward the player side, and after rotating in circles, an arbitrary Since the player can see a roulette-like performance in which rotation is stopped at the stop position of , the player is thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the desired stop position. It is possible to entertain the movable presentation by the back-lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 and suppress the deterioration of interest.

In addition, since the number of stop positions of the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 is an even number, the minimum number of sensors (region specifying sensors 3330) necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position can correspond to the stop position. and the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 are the same, and the ability (grasping of stop positions) by a plurality of sensors (region specifying sensor 3330 and position specifying sensor 3331) is maximized. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest by the back-lower middle-rotation decorative body 3310 having more stop positions.

It should be noted that, in the above-described embodiment, as the back-lower center rotary decorative body 3310 in the back-lower center effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, six stop positions are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may have 4 to 10 stop positions.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable body having a plurality of stop positions (back and middle rotating decorative body 3310) was shown to rotate, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body having a plurality of stop positions. For example, it may be “rotating”, “moving linearly”, “moving in an arc”, “moving in a curved line”, or the like.

[5-12. Improving reflectance by insulating coating on the land of each decorative board provided for the game board]
Next, a configuration for covering the lands of the through-holes formed on each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 with an insulating coating (hereinafter referred to as "configuration for covering the lands of the through-holes according to the first to fourth embodiments with an insulating coating ”) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 281 is a schematic diagram (a) for explaining the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes according to the first embodiment formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 with an insulating film, 282 is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section along line XX in a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modification of (b), and FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram (a) for explaining a configuration for covering a land of a through hole to be formed with an insulating film according to a second embodiment, and a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along the line XX in (a); 283 is a schematic diagram (c) of a modification of (b), and FIG. Schematic diagram (a) for explaining a configuration for covering with a coating, schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in (a), schematic diagram (c) of a modification of (b), and FIG. Reference numeral 284 is a schematic diagram (a) for explaining a configuration for covering the lands of the through-holes according to the fourth embodiment formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 with an insulating coating. ) is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along the line XX, and a schematic diagram (c) of a modification of (b). In FIGS. 281 to 284, elements having the same function are denoted by the same reference numerals, and each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is represented as a decorative board KB.

As described above, the through-hole is a hole through which the inner peripheral wall is plated with copper and has electrical conductivity. The configuration of covering the lands of the through-holes with an insulating coating according to the first to fourth embodiments is adopted for through-holes in which electronic components are not mounted. In addition to the through holes, non-through holes are also provided on the decoration board KB as each of the decoration boards provided on the game board 5, and the non-through holes are not plated with copper on the inner peripheral walls of the holes penetrating through the decoration board KB. Since there are no lands on the front surface (front surface) and rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board KB, the inner peripheral wall of the through hole is plated with copper, and the front surface (front surface) and rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board KB are landed. It is very different from a through hole with A non-through hole is formed to attach a substrate to a member or to fix an electronic component to which an external force is applied (such as a connector to which wiring is attached/detached) to the substrate. The configuration in which the lands of the through-holes are covered with an insulating coating may be applied to through-holes for mounting electronic components.

Here, first, each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 will be briefly described, the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the first to fourth embodiments with an insulating film, and the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate. Each connector will be described in turn.

In addition, the configuration of covering the land of the through-hole with an insulating film according to the first to fourth embodiments is based on the fact that the heat source such as the LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) is mounted among the decorative substrates provided in the game board 5. However, it is not applied to a decorative board on which a heat source such as an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) is mounted. In addition, the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes with an insulating film according to the first to fourth embodiments uses a drive circuit 1310va (Fig. 217.), a drive circuit 1310vb (see FIG. 217) for the second sorting drive motor (described later) for driving the second sorting drive motor, which is an electric drive source, and a drive solenoid, which is an electric drive source. It does not apply to the main control board 1310 on which a heat source such as a drive solenoid drive IC 1310da (see FIG. 218), which will be described later, is mounted. ) is not applied to the payout control board 633 mounted with a heat source such as a peripheral control IC 1510a (see FIG. 206) that is air-cooled by an air-cooling fan FAN (see FIG. 206) described later. It does not apply to the mounted peripheral control board 1510 .

Each board on which these heat sources are mounted (that is, the decoration board provided on the game board, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510) is each IC (that is, the LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) , drive circuit 1310va of the first sorting drive motor, drive circuit 1310vb of the second sorting drive motor, drive solenoid drive IC 1310da, payout motor drive IC 633adb) are electrically connected to the pads to which the terminals are soldered. Although the configuration of covering the through-hole lands with an insulating film according to the first to fourth embodiments is not applied to the through-hole lands formed on the pattern, the through-hole lands according to the first or second embodiment are not applied. Each IC (that is, LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit), first sorting drive motor drive circuit 1310va, second sorting drive motor drive circuit 1310vb, drive solenoid drive IC 1310da, payout motor drive It may be applied to the pad portion to which each terminal of the IC633adb) is soldered.

Also, the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes with an insulating film according to the first to fourth embodiments is not applied to a power supply substrate 630 (to be described later) on which heat dissipation fins are mounted. Of the decorative substrates provided on the game board 5, the decorative substrate may be configured so as to mount heat radiation fins. , is not applied to the decorative board on which the radiating fins are mounted, but is applied to the decorative board without the radiating fins. Also, the peripheral control board 1510 or the liquid crystal output board 1530 (see FIG. 206) may be configured to mount heat radiation fins. The configuration of covering with an insulating film is not applied to the peripheral control board 1510 or the liquid crystal output board 1530 on which heat dissipation fins are mounted.

As will be described later, an amplifier board having circuits for amplifying various sounds consumes a large amount of power and generates heat. Housed or mounted in a metal partial case. Therefore, the configuration of covering the land of the through hole with an insulating film according to the first to fourth embodiments is not applied to the amplifier board.

[5-12-1. Each decorative board provided on the game board]
First, as described above, the decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 include the rear-back decoration substrate 3114 provided in the rear-back movable decoration body 3110 shown in FIG. Back bottom left decoration board 3203, back bottom right decoration board 3253 provided in back bottom right effect unit 3250 shown in FIG. Back lower middle second decoration board 3329, back upper front decoration board 3422 provided in back upper effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. A rear decoration board 3452, a rear left decoration board 3522 provided in the rear left decoration unit 3520 shown in FIG. 181, and a rear right decoration board 3622 provided in the rear right decoration unit 3620 shown in FIG. There is a back front left decoration substrate 3714 provided in the back front left decoration unit 3710 shown in FIG. 197, and a back front right decoration substrate 3814 provided in the back front right decoration unit 3810 shown in FIG. A white coating film formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating film to almost the entire front surface (front surface) and rear surface (rear surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 (hereinafter simply referred to as “solid coating”) is applied. A white resist layer is formed by "white resist" in some cases. In addition, on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5, a full-color LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light), which is an electronic component, can be specified on a solid white resist. part number, attributes of electronic parts such as the area where the full-color LED is placed (furthermore, the shape of the electronic part, the size of the electronic part, the mounting direction of the electronic part (mounting direction), and the model of the electronic part ) is printed with yellow paint by silk printing. Solid lines, dashed lines, and characters are used as attributes of electronic components.

The whiteness of the resist solution may be light white or deep white, dark white or bright white depending on the variation. In addition, the ink companies that supply the resist liquid also have a range of white colors (for example, yellow that is closer to the bright side, yellow that is darker), so white is used as the resist liquid for the same substrate manufacturing company or multiple substrate companies. Even if it is specified, it will not be completely the same white (it is difficult to make it completely the same white), and it will be a color with a range of white.

Here, the reasons for adopting white as the color of the resist liquid and adopting yellow as the paint for silk printing will be explained. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, while it decreases as the color approaches black. Yellow reflectance is much closer to white reflectance than red reflectance, and red reflectance is much farther to white reflectance than yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red color stands out. and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow color is inconspicuous, and if the marking portion is yellow, the yellow marking portion is less noticeable against the white resist.

When a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his head (face), his line of sight changes depending on the direction of his head (face). Even if is visible, the part number of the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is arranged are displayed on the white resist that is solidly painted on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5. Since the notation part indicating the attribute of the electronic component such as the indicated area is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, the yellow notation part is hardly conspicuous against the white resist, and the player has no relation to the game at all. It is possible to prevent a player from viewing the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs are arranged.

In addition, the notation part indicating the attribute of the electronic component such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which makes it possible to specify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) that are electronic components , The front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 was printed with yellow paint by silk printing. It may be printed with a paint by silk printing, or may be a color different from yellow (for example, a non-bright color such as black, or a color such as blue, green, or red). ) may be printed by silk printing. In this case, there is nothing printed by silk printing on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5, and only the rear surface (back surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 is printed by silk printing. There exists what is done. In this way, the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is solidly coated with white resist to increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs. can contribute. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from viewing the part numbers of the electronic parts and the attributes of the electronic parts, which have no relation to the game for the player.

In addition, the notation part indicating the attributes of electronic components such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which makes it possible to specify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) that are electronic components , The front (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 was printed with yellow paint by silk printing. On the copper foil surface, the characters are formed with a copper foil wiring pattern and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form characters), and the attributes of the full-color LED are excluded from each terminal (not shown) and the wiring pattern (not shown). The front surface of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5, which is formed as a foil-cut area (that is, an area formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface on which the wiring pattern is formed, excluding each terminal and wiring pattern). The foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters may be covered with a solid white resist (on the surface). Specifically, for example, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is formed as a foil-extracted area on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5, and the full-color LED and the full-color LED are formed in the vicinity of the foil-extracted area. A corresponding part number is formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 as a blank character, and the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 is solidly coated with a white resist to remove the foil. The area and its foil lettering are covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed electrically insulated from the electronic component. In this way, the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is coated with white resist to increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs. can contribute. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from viewing the part numbers of the electronic parts and the attributes of the electronic parts that have no relation to the game for the player.

In addition, the notation part indicating the attributes of electronic components such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which makes it possible to specify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) that are electronic components , The front (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 was printed with yellow paint by silk printing, but instead of this, the part number of the full-color LED was printed twice using a white resist. It may be formed as resist-extracted characters, and may also be formed as a white resist-extracted area using two coats of white resist with the attributes of a full-color LED. Specifically, for example, the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 is approximately the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 as the first of the two-coat white resist. The whole is covered with a white resist (that is, a white resist solution is applied to the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 as the first of two white resist coatings). Then, the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 is an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged (an area for instructing the arrangement of a predetermined pin number) as the second time of the two-coat white resist. (including cutouts)) are masked as white resist removal areas, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs are masked as white resist removal characters in the vicinity of these white resist removal areas. The entire front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in 5 is covered with a white resist. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5, the whole is covered with the white resist of the first layer, and the second layer is covered with the white resist. By covering the entire area except for the masked area with the white resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is formed as a white resist removal area. Part numbers corresponding to the LEDs are formed as white resist-cut letters. By adopting the same transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer, the white resist of the first layer and the second layer Through the white resist of the second layer, the front (surface) base (copper foil surface (copper foil portion) and copper foil surface (copper foil portion) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 through the second layer of white resist When looking at the region excluding the foil portion), the same applies below), the second layer white resist appears darker in the region where the second layer white resist and the first layer white resist overlap. On the other hand, the white resist of the first layer covers the white resist of the second layer in the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap because of the masking. The white resist of the first layer looks light because it is exposed without cracking. In other words, when looking at the base of the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removed area and the white resist removed characters in the first layer of white resist can be identified. You can do it. In this way, the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is solidly coated with white resist to increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs. can contribute. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from viewing the part numbers of the electronic parts and the attributes of the electronic parts that have no relation to the game for the player.

In addition, the notation part indicating the attributes of electronic components such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which makes it possible to specify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) that are electronic components , The front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 was printed with yellow paint by silk printing. ) may have no area printed by silk printing. In this way, the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is solidly coated with white resist to increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs. can contribute. In addition, it is possible to completely prevent the player from seeing the part numbers of the electronic parts and the attributes of the electronic parts, which have no relationship with the game for the player. In addition, since the process of silk printing can be omitted, it is possible to reduce the substrate manufacturing cost by reducing the cost of silk printing and the number of manufacturing steps of the substrate.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decoration board KB, and a connector for connecting electrical wiring to the decoration board KB, resistors, capacitors, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) of the decoration board KB. In some cases, one or a plurality of electronic components such as a circuit for controlling light emission (for example, a constant current driving circuit) is mounted. An LED is an electronic component whose package color is white or close to white (for example, ivory, beige, or cream), and a connector is an electronic component whose housing is white or close to white ( for example, ivory color, beige color, cream color), and the constant current drive circuit is housed in an IC package that can have black color as an integrated circuit and is a surface mount type (SMD type) LED driver. An electronic component that is an IC, a resistor is a surface mount type (SMD type) electronic component having black, blue, or white, etc., and a capacitor is a surface mount type having black, brown, gray, or white, etc. (SMD type) electronic component. In addition, on the rear surface (back surface) of the decoration board KB, electronic parts (connectors, resistors, capacitors, circuits for controlling light emission of multiple LEDs, etc.) can be specified on a solid white resist. The part number, the area indicating the attribute of the electronic component, etc. may be printed with yellow paint by silk printing, or a color different from yellow (for example, a non-bright color such as black) or colors such as blue, green, red, etc.) may be printed by silk printing.

Surface mount type (SMD type) resistors should be placed only on the rear surface (back surface) of the decoration board KB where no LEDs are mounted, and should not be placed on the front surface (surface) of the decoration board KB where multiple LEDs are mounted. The area of the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of the decoration substrate KB can be increased. This is because most surface mount type (SMD type) resistors generally have a black upper surface (sometimes called a protective film) except for the terminal area, and the resistor with a black upper surface is used as a decorative substrate. When placed on the front surface (surface) of the KB, the reflectance is different from that of the white resist. Therefore, the presence of dark black in the bright white resist causes the white color to be solidly painted on the front surface (surface) of the decoration substrate KB. The reflectance due to the resist is lowered, and the uniformity of the reflectance is impaired. In addition, the resistor whose upper surface is black (dark color) is a conspicuous color (a color that is easy to see) when combined with the white (bright color) of the resist. Therefore, there is a possibility that the performance effect is lowered. In addition, the upper surface (protective film) of a surface mount type (SMD type) resistor may have a resistance value written on it. If the upper surface (protective film) is black, white numbers or symbols are used to indicate the resistance value. However, since the area of the black background is overwhelmingly larger than the numbers or symbols that indicate the resistance value, the top surface (protective film) is recognized as black even if the resistance value is indicated. be. Note that resistors may also be arranged on the front surface (surface) of the decoration board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, depending on the mounting density of the decoration board KB, heat dissipation measures, and the arrangement position of the decoration board KB.

A surface mount type (SMD type) capacitor (ceramic capacitor) is placed only on the rear surface (back surface) of the decoration board KB where no LEDs are mounted, and is placed on the front surface (surface) of the decoration board KB where multiple LEDs are mounted. By not arranging it, the area of the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of the decoration substrate KB can be increased. This is because surface mount type (SMD type) capacitors (ceramic capacitors) generally have a Except for the terminals, most of them are brown. If a capacitor (ceramic capacitor) with a brown upper surface is placed on the front (surface) of the decoration board KB, the reflectance will be different from that of the white resist. The existence of a dark brown color on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB lowers the reflectance of the solid white resist, impairing the uniformity of the reflectance. Also, when a capacitor (ceramic capacitor) whose top surface is brown (dark color) is combined with a white (light color) resist. Since it is a conspicuous color (a color that is easy to see), there is a risk that the performance effect will be reduced when the player sees the unnecessary brown color. A capacitor (ceramic capacitor) may also be arranged on the front surface (front surface) of the decoration board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, depending on the mounting density of the decoration board KB, heat dissipation measures, and the arrangement position of the decoration board KB.

When the connector is mounted on the front surface (surface) of the decoration board KB, it is desirable that the connector has a white housing that is the same color as the white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of the decoration board KB. . When the connector is mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) of the decoration board KB, colors such as white, black, and blue may be used except for special cases.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations depending on the printing machine, or it may look orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the silk printing paint also have a range of yellow (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies can use it as a silk printing paint. Even if yellow is specified, it will not be completely the same yellow (it is difficult to make completely the same yellow), and it will be a color with a range of yellow. For this reason, the description part is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, but in addition to yellow, the description part is printed with paint that has a color close to the brightness of white, such as pastel color (for example, light green, light blue, etc.) Even when printing by silk printing, as with the yellow paint described above, the color does not come close to the completely same white brightness (it is difficult to make the color close to the completely same white brightness), and the white brightness It becomes a color with a width in the color close to . Even when a color different from yellow is used as a silk-printed paint for the description portion, the color has a wide range, similar to the yellow paint described above.

Further, the LED is a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light, but may be a single-color LED such as white, red, green, yellow, orange, blue, or green, or a surface-mounted top-view type. may be used, or a surface-mounted side-view type may be used. In addition to using surface-mount type LEDs, bullet type LEDs may also be used.

Also, a connector for connecting electrical wiring to the decoration board KB was mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) of the decoration board KB, but the color of the housing of the connector was white or a color close to white (for example, ivory). If the electronic component has a beige color or cream color, it may be mounted on the front surface (surface) of the decoration board KB. This is done by mounting a white connector (or a connector with a color close to white) having the same color as the white coating film that is an insulating coating formed on the front surface (surface) of the decoration board KB. This is because it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the front surface (surface) of the substrate KB.

[5-12-2. Configuration for covering the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment with an insulating film]
281(a) and 281(b), the thickness direction of the base material KBo of the decoration board KB (the base material of the decoration board KB A thin through hole is formed in the direction perpendicular to the surface of KBo (perpendicular to the back surface), and the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB and the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB. By removing the copper foil at , front (front) side land KRDx1 and rear (back) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed, and front (front) side wiring pattern and rear (back) side are formed. A wiring pattern is formed. A through-hole KTH1 is formed by applying conductive plating to the entire inner peripheral surface of the through-hole. The outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decoration board KB and the outer diameter of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB are different. They have a diameter KTHD1 and are of the same size.

The front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB and one end of the front (surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB are electrically connected. The other end of the front (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to a pad to which specific terminals of one full-color LED or a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are soldered. ing.

Note that the front (surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB electrically connected to the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB includes: has a first front (surface) side wiring pattern and a second front (surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, and is connected to the second front surface. One end of the (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, and two wires are connected from the front (surface) side land KRDx1. front (surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first front (surface) side wiring pattern and the second front (surface) side wiring pattern). In addition, the rear (back) side wiring pattern formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB electrically connected to the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB. has a first rear (back) side wiring pattern and a second rear (back) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, and is electrically connected to the second rear surface. One end of the (rear) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear (rear) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (rear) surface KBy of the decoration board KB. The rear (back) side wiring pattern (that is, the first rear (back) side wiring pattern and the second rear (back) side wiring pattern) is exposed.

The rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB is electrically connected to one end of the rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB. In addition, the other end of the rear (back) side wiring pattern, a pad to which the specific terminal of the IC that controls the light emission of the full-color LED is soldered, the pad to which the specific terminal of the resistor is soldered, and the specific terminal of the connector are attached. are electrically connected to any pad, such as a soldered pad.

The front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decoration board KB are connected via through holes KTH1. , are in an electrically connected state, and the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decoration board KB and the rear (back) formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB The front (front) side lands KRDx1 and through holes KTH1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decoration board KB, and the rear (back) side wiring pattern formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB. ) side land KRDy1.

On the copper foil surface of the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, a white resist solution is applied as an insulating film to form a front (surface) side resist layer KBxr. A front (surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed in a region of the layer KBxr corresponding to the front (surface) side land KRDx1. . On the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr. A rear (back) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 is formed in a region of the resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear (back) side land KRDy1. there is

The opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front (surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the rear (back) side resist opening KByra are the same size. A substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB and a substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB (that is, solid ground) ground) are electrically connected to each other by through holes (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

The decorative substrate KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of substrates from one copper-clad laminate (base material) of a standard size and finally cutting them out. There are processes such as the process of fixing a sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) of a fixed size to the manufacturing equipment and coating, the drying process, the process of making holes, and other processes, and finally each board is cut out. .

In this way, on the front (surface) side KBx of the decoration board KB, the area corresponding to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 in the front (surface) side resist layer KBxr has an outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (surface) side land KRDx1. Since the front (front) side resist opening KBxra having a smaller opening diameter KBxrD1 is formed, the front (front) side lands KRDx1 are opened from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 toward the center of the front (front) side land KRDx1. The outer peripheral portion of the (front) side land KRDx1 is covered with a white resist as an insulating film. As a result, the entire peripheral portion of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB can be covered with a white resist as an insulating coating, so that the copper foil is exposed. The area of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 can be kept small.

In addition, since the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 both have exposed copper foil, the front (front) side land KRDx1 of the decoration board KB can be Electrical inspection (confirmation of operation and abnormal potential) of the decoration board KB can be performed by bringing the tips of the contact probes into contact with each other. It is possible to perform an electrical inspection (operation check and abnormal potential check) of the decoration board KB by bringing the tips of the contact probes into contact with each other. That is, the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing an electrical inspection of the decoration board KB. The contact probes may be dedicated probes, or may be test leads of a so-called "tester" for continuity check.

Further, since the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front (surface) side land KRDx1 from the front (surface) side of the decoration board KB, for example, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, Since the front surface (surface) of the decoration board KB faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front (surface) land KRDx1 from the front surface (surface) side of the decoration board KB. If it is possible, it is also possible to conduct an electrical inspection (confirmation of operation and confirmation of abnormal potential) of the decoration board KB as a defect inspection of the decoration board KB without performing work for removing the decoration board KB.

By the way, if the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decoration board KB is of a type with a small irradiation angle (a type with a narrow irradiation angle), it looks like a point light source and becomes an aggregate of the point light sources and is visually recognized by the player. There is a risk that it will cause discomfort. For this reason, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decoration board KB are of a type with a large irradiation angle (a type with a wide irradiation angle) so as not to be visually recognized as a point light source by the player.

However, when the irradiation angle of the LED is increased (when the irradiation angle of the LED is widened), the range illuminated by the LED is widened. Many will return to. Therefore, if the light returning to the decoration board KB can be reflected so that it can be emitted forward of the decoration board KB, the front surface (surface) of the decoration board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, in addition to the light emitting surface of the LEDs, can be used. is used as a reflective surface, the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED can be efficiently used for the light emitting effect.

As described above, the decoration board KB has a front (front) wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decoration board KB and a rear (back) wiring pattern formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB. Front (surface) side lands KRDx1 are formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB with respect to the through holes KTH1 electrically connecting the side wiring patterns. On the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, as described above, a solid white resist is formed as an insulating film, and the front surface (surface) side lands KRDx1 are formed. Since the front (surface) side land KRDx1 has an exposed copper foil, the reflectance due to the solid white resist (white coating) as an insulating film and the reflection due to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 Therefore, it is difficult to make uniform the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

Therefore, in the configuration of covering the through-hole lands with an insulating film according to the first embodiment, the entire outer peripheral portion of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB is covered with a white resist as an insulating film. In this state, the area of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed is kept small, and the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform. It is designed to be able to contribute to making it look like (uniform).

In addition, the decoration substrate KB is made visible to the player by covering the entire outer peripheral portion of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB with a white resist as an insulating coating. , the ratio of exposed copper foil exposed on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB can be reduced, so that the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB is made uniform. This makes the copper foil portion inconspicuous and contributes to the enhancement of the light emission effect of the decorative substrate KB.

In addition, as described above, the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is provided with an inner lens that is cut (polyhedron-shaped) so that light can be irregularly refracted. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 and the holes of the through holes KTH1 on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB. By adopting the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes according to the first embodiment with an insulating film, the existence of the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 and the holes of the through holes KTH1 on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB can be more played. can be difficult for people to understand. In addition, if there is a difference in reflection efficiency due to the thickness of the white resist that is solidly coated as an insulating film on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB or the color density, this difference is suppressed by the inner lens. can enhance the performance effect.

In addition, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 is the largest visible object of the player, the decorative substrate around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) and the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) ), and the decorative substrate movably arranged at a position covering the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) are the through-holes according to the first embodiment, which are insulated from the land. In the film-covering structure, by minimizing the portion not covered by the insulating film with respect to the lands of the through holes, the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform). , the effect of making the copper foil portion inconspicuous, and the effect of making the presence of the through-hole holes less noticeable to the player. Also, in other places, for example, the decorative substrate is placed in a place where the player can see it through an inner lens that is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. In some cases, the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes with an insulating film according to the first embodiment makes the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform). There are effects such as the effect of making the copper foil portion inconspicuous, and the effect of making the presence of the through-hole holes less noticeable to the player. Note that each decoration substrate provided on the door frame 3 and each decoration substrate provided on the game board 5 are closer to the effect display device 1600 than each decoration substrate provided on the door frame 3 compared to each decoration substrate provided on the game board 5. Therefore, in the configuration of covering the lands of the through-holes with an insulating film according to the first embodiment, the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is said to have a uniform (uniform) reflectance. It can be said that the effect, the effect of making the copper foil portion inconspicuous, the effect of making the presence of the through-hole hole less noticeable to the player, etc., is high.

In the configuration of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating film according to the first embodiment, the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB corresponds to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 in the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr. A rear (back) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 is formed in the area where the rear (back) side land KRDy1 has an outer diameter KTHD1. 281(c), the outer peripheral portion of the rear (rear) side land KRDy1 was covered with a white resist as an insulating film from the outer periphery toward the center of the rear (rear) side land KRDy1. In addition, a region of the rear (back) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear (back) side land KRDy1 has an opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear (back) side land KRDy1. A rear surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra may be formed. This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, and light emitted from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB is ) KBy cannot be used as a reflective surface in the first place, there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB uniform (uniform) as described above, and the rear surface (back surface) of the decoration substrate KB This is because KBy cannot efficiently use the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED for the light emitting effect.

In addition, in the configuration in which the lands of the through holes are covered with an insulating film according to the first embodiment, the front (surface) KBx and the rear (rear) surfaces KBy of the decoration board KB are coated with a white resist solution as an insulating film almost entirely. A white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed by the above method, but the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is almost entirely coated with a white resist solution as an insulating coating. While a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying A resist layer of a different color may be formed by applying a resist solution of a different color from white (for example, green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.). This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, and light emitted from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB is ) KBy cannot be used as a reflective surface in the first place, there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB uniform (uniform) as described above, and the rear surface (back surface) of the decoration substrate KB This is because KBy cannot efficiently use the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED for the light emitting effect.

In addition, in the configuration in which the lands of the through holes are covered with an insulating film according to the first embodiment, the front (surface) KBx and the rear (rear) surfaces KBy of the decoration board KB are coated with a white resist solution as an insulating film almost entirely. A white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed by the coating, but one or both of the front (surface) KBx and the rear (rear) surfaces KBy of the decoration substrate KB were covered almost entirely. A white silk-printed layer may be formed by a white coating film formed by silk-screening a white paint as an insulating coating. In this case, on the white silk-printed layer formed on one side or both sides, the part number of the electronic part, which makes it possible to identify the electronic part, and the description part indicating the attributes of the electronic part are printed with yellow paint. Printed by printing. In addition to yellow, the notation part may be printed by silk printing with a paint having a color close to the lightness of white such as pastel color (for example, light green, light blue, etc.). When forming the white silk-printed layer on one side or both sides, the base material KBo or the copper foil side (the pad to which electronic components are soldered, the copper foil side excluding a predetermined area) ) may be formed, or may not be formed. In the case of forming a resist layer, a white paint is silk-printed as an insulating coating so as to cover this resist layer. A white silk-printed layer is formed by the white coating film formed by printing. The resist layer may be a white resist solution, or may be a resist solution of colors other than white (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.).

Also, the configuration of covering the through-hole lands with an insulating film according to the first embodiment can be applied to the through-hole lands of the function display substrate 1400c in the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. FIG. As described above, a black resist layer is formed by applying a black resist solution to the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. When the black resist liquid is used, as described above, the LEDs 1400ca arranged in the vicinity are prevented from reflecting light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. can contribute to avoiding mixing with the emitted light. For this reason, a black resist as an insulating coating covers the entire peripheral portion of the front (surface) side lands on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, whereby the copper foil is exposed on the front surface ( To contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c on which the plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted uniform (uniform) by reducing the area of the land on the front surface side to reduce the reflectance. can be done.

In addition, as described above, the through-hole is a hole through which the inner peripheral wall is plated with copper and has conductivity. The lands of both through holes are covered with an insulating film for the lands of the through holes according to the first embodiment. The configuration of covering the lands of the through-holes with the insulating coating according to the first embodiment may not be adopted for those provided immediately below the electronic components are mounted. That is, of the through-holes in which electronic components are not mounted, the entire copper foil on the land of the through-holes provided directly under the electronic components may be exposed. In this case, the entire copper foil on the front (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decoration board KB is exposed. do. Since the electronic components are arranged so as to cover the entire land of the through-hole where the entire copper foil is exposed, there is no need to make the copper foil part inconspicuous in the first place, and the existence of the through-hole hole is not required. This is because there is no need to make it difficult for the player to understand, and the presence of through-hole lands and through-hole holes is visually confirmed in the electrical inspection of the decoration board KB from the surface on which electronic components are not mounted. It is also possible to conduct an electrical inspection (confirmation of operation and abnormal potential) of the decoration board KB by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the land of the through hole.

[5-12-3. Configuration for covering the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment with an insulating film]
In the configuration in which the through-hole lands are covered with an insulating film according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Thin through holes are formed in the direction perpendicular to the surface (perpendicular to the rear surface) of the base material KBo, and the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB and the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB. A front (front) side land KRDx1 and a rear (back) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed by removing the copper foil from the foil surface, and a front (front) side wiring pattern and a rear (back) side land KRDx1 are formed. ) side wiring pattern is formed. A through hole KTH1 is formed by subjecting the through hole to a conductive plating process. The outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decoration board KB and the outer diameter of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB are different. The diameter KTHD1 is the same size, and the outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDx1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film. It has the same size as the outer diameter of KRDy1.

The front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB and one end of the front (surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB are electrically connected. The other end of the front (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to a pad to which specific terminals of one full-color LED or a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are soldered. ing.

The rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB is electrically connected to one end of the rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB. In addition, the other end of the rear (back) side wiring pattern, a pad to which the specific terminal of the IC that controls the light emission of the full-color LED is soldered, the pad to which the specific terminal of the resistor is soldered, and the specific terminal of the connector are attached. are electrically connected to any of the pads, such as pads to be soldered.

Note that the front (surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB electrically connected to the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB includes: has a first front (surface) side wiring pattern and a second front (surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, and is connected to the second front surface. One end of the (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, and two wires are connected from the front (surface) side land KRDx1. front (surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first front (surface) side wiring pattern and the second front (surface) side wiring pattern). In addition, the rear (back) side wiring pattern formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB electrically connected to the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB. has a first rear (back) side wiring pattern and a second rear (back) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, and is electrically connected to the second rear surface. One end of the (rear) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear (rear) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (rear) surface KBy of the decoration board KB. The rear (back) side wiring pattern (that is, the first rear (back) side wiring pattern and the second rear (back) side wiring pattern) is exposed.

The front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decoration board KB are connected via through holes KTH1. , are in an electrically connected state, and the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decoration board KB and the rear (back) formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB Front (front) side lands KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decoration board KB, through holes KTH1, and rear (back) side wiring patterns formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB. ) side land KRDy1.

On the copper foil surface of the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, a white resist solution is applied as an insulating film to form a front (surface) side resist layer KBxr. A region of the layer KBxr corresponding to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 has a diameter smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 and is insulated from the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment described above. A front (surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the structure covered with the film and larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1 is formed. The inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 takes into account the resist liquid penetration prevention region that spreads concentrically outward from the inner peripheral edge of the front surface (surface) side of the through hole KTH1. ) from the side inner periphery (the resist liquid penetration prevention distance dimension is at least 0.5 mm or more in order to prevent the white resist liquid from entering the through holes KTH1 of the decoration substrate KB). A distance dimension is required, and in the configuration in which the lands of the through holes are covered with an insulating film according to the second embodiment, a distance of 0.5 mm is adopted.). Therefore, the inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is the sum of the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1 and the resist liquid penetration prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm) doubled. It is larger by 1.0 mm.

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr. A rear (back) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 is formed in a region of the rear (back) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear (back) side land KRDy1. formed. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 is the same size as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the structure in which the lands of the through-holes according to the first embodiment are covered with an insulating film.

A substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB and a substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB (that is, solid ground) ground) are electrically connected to each other by through holes (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

The decorative substrate KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of substrates from one copper-clad laminate (base material) of a standard size and finally cutting them out. There are processes such as the process of fixing a sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) of a fixed size to the manufacturing equipment and coating, the drying process, the process of making holes, and other processes, and finally each board is cut out. .

As described above, on the front (surface) side KBx of the decoration board KB, the area corresponding to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 in the front (surface) side resist layer KBxr has an outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (surface) side land KRDx1. An opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller and is smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film according to the above-described first embodiment, and is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1. Since the front (front) side resist opening KBxra is formed, the front (front) side land KRDx1 except for the resist liquid penetration prevention region (that is, the region extending from the front (surface) side inner periphery of the through hole KTH1 to the position separated by the resist liquid penetration prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm)) is covered with a white resist as an insulating coating. As a result, the front (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB extends from substantially the inner side to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the front (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB). Since the white resist can be covered as an insulating film over the area excluding the resist liquid penetration prevention area), the part where the copper foil is exposed becomes the resist liquid penetration prevention area. As a result, the area of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed can be kept extremely small compared to the structure in which the lands of the through holes are covered with an insulating film according to the first embodiment. can.

In addition, since a resist liquid penetration prevention region is provided for the through hole KTH1 of the decoration board KB, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating on the copper foil surface of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB. When applied, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB faces vertically upward (the decoration board KB is actually made up of a plurality of boards from one copper-clad laminate (base material) of a standard size. Since it is manufactured by arranging and finally cutting out, it is fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that the front surface of one sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward, and the white resist solution actually flows. Even when applied, the white resist liquid penetrates into the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the decoration board KB and is dried without blocking the holes.

In addition, since the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 both have exposed copper foil, the front (front) side land KRDx1 of the decoration board KB can be Electrical inspection (confirmation of operation and abnormal potential) of the decoration board KB can be performed by bringing the tips of the contact probes into contact with each other. It is possible to perform an electrical inspection (operation check and abnormal potential check) of the decoration board KB by bringing the tips of the contact probes into contact with each other. That is, the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing an electrical inspection of the decoration board KB. The contact probes may be dedicated probes, or may be test leads of a so-called "tester" for continuity check.

Further, since the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front (surface) side land KRDx1 from the front (surface) side of the decoration board KB, for example, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, Since the front surface (surface) of the decoration board KB faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front (surface) land KRDx1 from the front surface (surface) side of the decoration board KB. If it is possible, it is also possible to conduct an electrical inspection (confirmation of operation and confirmation of abnormal potential) of the decoration board KB as a defect inspection of the decoration board KB without performing work for removing the decoration board KB.

By the way, if the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decoration board KB is of a type with a small irradiation angle (a type with a narrow irradiation angle), it looks like a point light source and becomes an aggregate of the point light sources and is visually recognized by the player. There is a risk that it will cause discomfort. For this reason, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decoration board KB are of a type with a large irradiation angle (a type with a wide irradiation angle) so as not to be visually recognized as a point light source by the player.

However, when the irradiation angle of the LED is increased (when the irradiation angle of the LED is widened), the range illuminated by the LED is widened, and the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED is reflected by a plurality of other members, and the decorative substrate KB Many will return to. Therefore, if the light returning to the decoration board KB can be reflected so that it can be emitted forward of the decoration board KB, in addition to the light emitting surface of the LED, the front surface (surface) of the decoration board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. is used as a reflective surface, the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED can be efficiently used for the light emitting effect.

As described above, the decoration board KB has a front (front) wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decoration board KB and a rear (back) wiring pattern formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB. Front (surface) side lands KRDx1 are formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB with respect to the through holes KTH1 electrically connecting the side wiring patterns. On the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, as described above, a solid white resist is formed as an insulating film, and the front surface (surface) side lands KRDx1 are formed. Since the front (surface) side land KRDx1 has an exposed copper foil, the reflectance due to the solid white resist (white coating) as an insulating film and the reflection due to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 Therefore, it is difficult to make uniform the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

Therefore, in the configuration in which the lands of the through holes are covered with an insulating film according to the second embodiment, the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB extend from substantially the inner side to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, The white resist as an insulating coating can cover the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, excluding the resist liquid penetration prevention area. The area of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed is reduced to the area of the through-hole land according to the first embodiment because the portion where the foil is exposed serves as the resist liquid penetration prevention area. In the first embodiment, the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform) by suppressing it to a very small value compared to the structure in which the insulating film is covered with an insulating film. Compared with the configuration in which the lands of the through-holes according to the embodiment are covered with an insulating coating, this configuration can contribute more.

In addition, the front (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB extends from almost inside to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the front (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB In the decoration board KB, which is made visible to the player by covering the white resist as an insulating film over the area except the resist liquid penetration prevention area, the front surface (front surface) of the decoration board KB ) Since it is possible to reduce the ratio of the exposed copper foil exposed to KBx, by making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB uniform (uniform), the copper foil portion becomes inconspicuous. However, it can contribute to the improvement of the light emitting effect by the decoration board KB.

In addition, as described above, the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is provided with an inner lens that is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the presence of the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 and the holes of the through holes KTH1 on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB. By adopting the configuration in which the lands of the through holes according to the second embodiment are covered with an insulating film, the presence of the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 and the holes of the through holes KTH1 on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB can be more fully realized. can be difficult for people to understand. In addition, if there is a difference in reflection efficiency due to the thickness of the white resist that is solidly coated as an insulating film on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the color density, this difference can be suppressed by the inner lens. can enhance the performance effect.

In addition, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 is the largest visible object of the player, the decorative substrate around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) and the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) ), and the decorative substrate movably arranged at a position covering the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) are the through-holes according to the second embodiment, which are insulated from the land. In the configuration of covering the film, compared to the configuration of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating film according to the first embodiment, by minimizing the portion where the land of the through hole is not covered with the insulating film, the plurality of LEDs The effect of uniformizing the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative board on which the is mounted, the effect of making the copper foil portion inconspicuous, and the existence of the through-hole hole being more difficult for the player to understand. The effect of, etc., is increased. Also, in other places, for example, the decorative substrate is placed in a place where the player can see it through an inner lens that is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. In some cases, the configuration of covering the lands of the through-holes with an insulating coating according to the second embodiment allows a plurality of LEDs to be mounted compared to the configuration of covering the lands of the through-holes with an insulating coating according to the first embodiment. The effect of making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil portion inconspicuous, and the effect of making the presence of the through-hole hole more difficult for the player to understand. etc. Note that each decoration substrate provided on the door frame 3 and each decoration substrate provided on the game board 5 are closer to the effect display device 1600 than each decoration substrate provided on the door frame 3 compared to each decoration substrate provided on the game board 5. Therefore, in the configuration of covering the through-hole lands with an insulating film according to the second embodiment, the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is said to have a uniform (uniform) reflectance. It can be said that the effect, the effect of making the copper foil portion inconspicuous, the effect of making the presence of the through-hole hole less noticeable to the player, etc., is high.

In the configuration in which the lands of the through holes are covered with an insulating film according to the second embodiment, the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB corresponds to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 in the rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr. A rear (back) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 is formed in the area where the rear (back) side land KRDy1 has an outer diameter KTHD1. 282(c), the outer peripheral portion of the rear (rear) side land KRDy1 was covered with a white resist as an insulating film from the outer periphery toward the center of the rear (rear) side land KRDy1. In addition, a region of the rear (back) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear (back) side land KRDy1 has an opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear (back) side land KRDy1. A rear surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra may be formed. This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, and light emitted from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB is ) KBy cannot be used as a reflective surface in the first place, there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB uniform (uniform) as described above, and the rear surface (back surface) of the decoration substrate KB This is because KBy cannot efficiently use the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED for the light emitting effect.

In the configuration in which the lands of the through-holes are covered with an insulating coating according to the second embodiment, the front surface (top surface) KBx and the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decoration board KB are almost entirely coated with a white resist solution as an insulating coating. A white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed by the above method, but the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is almost entirely coated with a white resist solution as an insulating coating. While a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying A resist layer of a different color may be formed by applying a resist solution of a different color from white (for example, green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.). This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, and light emitted from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB is ) KBy cannot be used as a reflective surface in the first place, there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB uniform (uniform) as described above, and the rear surface (back surface) of the decoration substrate KB This is because KBy cannot efficiently use the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED for the light emitting effect.

In the configuration in which the lands of the through-holes are covered with an insulating coating according to the second embodiment, the front surface (top surface) KBx and the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decoration board KB are almost entirely coated with a white resist solution as an insulating coating. A white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed by the coating, but one or both of the front (surface) KBx and the rear (rear) surfaces KBy of the decoration substrate KB were covered almost entirely. A white silk-printed layer may be formed by a white coating film formed by silk-screening a white paint as an insulating coating. In this case, on the white silk-printed layer formed on one side or both sides, the part number of the electronic part, which makes it possible to identify the electronic part, and the description part indicating the attributes of the electronic part are printed with yellow paint. Printed by printing. In addition to yellow, the notation part may be printed by silk printing with a paint having a color close to the lightness of white such as pastel color (for example, light green, light blue, etc.). When forming the white silk-printed layer on one side or both sides, the base material KBo or the copper foil side (the pad to which electronic components are soldered, the copper foil side excluding a predetermined area) ) may be formed, or may not be formed. In the case of forming a resist layer, a white paint is silk-printed as an insulating coating so as to cover this resist layer. A white silk-printed layer is formed by the white coating film formed by printing. The resist layer may be a white resist solution, or may be a resist solution of colors other than white (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.).

Also, the configuration of covering the lands of the through-holes with an insulating film according to the second embodiment can be applied to the lands of the through-holes of the function display substrate 1400c in the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. FIG. As described above, a black resist layer is formed by applying a black resist solution to the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. When the black resist liquid is used, as described above, the LEDs 1400ca arranged in the vicinity are prevented from reflecting light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. can contribute to avoiding mixing with the emitted light. For this reason, the front (surface) side land on the front (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c extends from substantially the inside to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the front (surface) side land on the front (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. Since the black resist can be covered as an insulating film over the area excluding the resist liquid penetration prevention area), the part where the copper foil is exposed becomes the resist liquid penetration prevention area. As a result, the area of the front (surface) side lands where the copper foil is exposed is significantly reduced compared to the function display substrate 1400c that employs a configuration in which the through-hole lands are covered with an insulating film according to the first embodiment. The through-hole according to the first embodiment is designed to keep the reflectance small and reduce the reflectance so that the reflectance of the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c on which the plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted is uniform. This can contribute more than the function display substrate 1400c that employs a configuration in which the lands are covered with an insulating film.

In addition, as described above, the through-hole is a hole through which the inner peripheral wall is plated with copper and has conductivity. The lands of both through holes are covered with an insulating film for the lands of the through holes according to the second embodiment. The configuration of covering the lands of the through-holes with the insulating coating according to the second embodiment may not be adopted for those provided immediately below the electronic components to be mounted. That is, of the through-holes in which electronic components are not mounted, the entire copper foil on the land of the through-holes provided directly under the electronic components may be exposed. In this case, the entire copper foil on the front (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decoration board KB is exposed. do. Since the electronic components are arranged so as to cover the entire land of the through-hole where the entire copper foil is exposed, there is no need to make the copper foil part inconspicuous in the first place, and the existence of the through-hole hole is not required. This is because there is no need to make it difficult for the player to understand, and the presence of through-hole lands and through-hole holes is visually confirmed in the electrical inspection of the decoration board KB from the surface on which electronic components are not mounted. It is also possible to conduct an electrical inspection (confirmation of operation and abnormal potential) of the decoration board KB by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the land of the through hole.

[5-12-4. Configuration for covering the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment with an insulating film]
In the configuration in which the lands of the through holes are covered with an insulating coating according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Thin through holes are formed in the direction perpendicular to the surface (perpendicular to the rear surface) of the base material KBo, and the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB and the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB. A front (front) side land KRDx1 and a rear (back) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed by removing the copper foil from the foil surface, and a front (front) side wiring pattern and a rear (back) side land KRDx1 are formed. ) side wiring pattern is formed. A through hole KTH1 is formed by subjecting the through hole to a conductive plating process. The outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decoration board KB and the outer diameter of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB are different. The diameter KTHD1 is the same size, and the outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDx1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film. It has the same size as the outer diameter of KRDy1.

The front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB and one end of the front (surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB are electrically connected. The other end of the front (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to a pad to which specific terminals of one full-color LED or a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are soldered. ing.

Note that the front (surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB electrically connected to the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB includes: has a first front (surface) side wiring pattern and a second front (surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, and is connected to the second front surface. One end of the (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, and two wires are connected from the front (surface) side land KRDx1. front (surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first front (surface) side wiring pattern and the second front (surface) side wiring pattern). In addition, the rear (back) side wiring pattern formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB electrically connected to the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB. has a first rear (back) side wiring pattern and a second rear (back) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, and is electrically connected to the second rear surface. One end of the (rear) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear (rear) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (rear) surface KBy of the decoration board KB. The rear (back) side wiring pattern (that is, the first rear (back) side wiring pattern and the second rear (back) side wiring pattern) is exposed.

The rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB is electrically connected to one end of the rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB. In addition, the other end of the rear (back) side wiring pattern, a pad to which the specific terminal of the IC that controls the light emission of the full-color LED is soldered, the pad to which the specific terminal of the resistor is soldered, and the specific terminal of the connector are attached. are electrically connected to any pad, such as a soldered pad.

The front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decoration board KB are connected via through holes KTH1. , are in an electrically connected state, and the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decoration board KB and the rear (back) formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB The front (front) side lands KRDx1 and through holes KTH1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decoration board KB, and the rear (back) side wiring pattern formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB. ) side land KRDy1.

On the copper foil surface of the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, a white resist solution is applied as an insulating film to form a front (surface) side resist layer KBxr. A front (surface) side resist layer KBxr is formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating film to a region of the layer KBxr corresponding to the front (surface) side land KRDx1.

The decorative substrate KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of substrates from one copper-clad laminate (base material) of a standard size and finally cutting them out. There are processes such as the process of fixing a sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) of a fixed size to the manufacturing equipment and coating, the drying process, the process of making holes, and other processes, and finally each board is cut out. . For this reason, when a white resist solution is applied as an insulating coating onto the copper foil surface of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB, the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB is oriented vertically upward. (The decorative board KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. The plate (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing apparatus so that the front surface of the plate (base material) faces vertically upward. It will be blocked. The white resist liquid that has entered the through-holes KTH1 of the decoration board KB dries in a recessed state from the inner periphery of the through-holes KTH1 on the front (surface) side toward the center of the hole due to its own weight. becomes.

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr. A rear (back) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 is formed in a region of the rear (back) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear (back) side land KRDy1. formed. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 is the same size as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the structure in which the lands of the through-holes according to the first embodiment are covered with an insulating film.

A substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB and a substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB (that is, solid ground) ground) are electrically connected to each other by through holes (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

In this way, on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, the regions of the front (surface) side resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 are also covered with white resist as an insulating coating. At the same time, the white resist liquid penetrates from the front (surface) side inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the decoration board KB to block the hole. As a result, the entire front (surface) side lands KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB and the holes of the through holes KTH1 can be covered with white resist as an insulating coating. ) The side land KNDx1 is arranged so that the copper foil is not exposed and the electroconductive plated portion applied to the entire inner peripheral surface of the through hole KTH1 is not exposed from the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB. can be In addition, since the through holes KTH1 of the decoration board KB are closed, light from the rear of the decoration board KB passes through the through holes KTH1 toward the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB. can stop you from moving forward.

By the way, if the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decoration board KB is of a type with a small irradiation angle (a type with a narrow irradiation angle), it looks like a point light source and becomes an aggregate of the point light sources and is visually recognized by the player. There is a risk that it will cause discomfort. For this reason, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decoration board KB are of a type with a large irradiation angle (a type with a wide irradiation angle) so as not to be visually recognized as a point light source by the player.

However, when the irradiation angle of the LED is increased (when the irradiation angle of the LED is widened), the range illuminated by the LED is widened. Many will return to. Therefore, if the light returning to the decoration board KB can be reflected so that it can be emitted forward of the decoration board KB, the front surface (surface) of the decoration board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, in addition to the light emitting surface of the LEDs, can be used. is used as a reflective surface, the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED can be efficiently used for the light emitting effect.

As described above, the decoration board KB has a front (front) wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decoration board KB and a rear (back) wiring pattern formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB. Front (surface) side lands KRDx1 are formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB with respect to the through holes KTH1 electrically connecting the side wiring patterns. On the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, as described above, a solid white resist is formed as an insulating film, and the front surface (surface) side lands KRDx1 are formed. Since the front (surface) side land KRDx1 has an exposed copper foil, the reflectance due to the solid white resist (white coating) as an insulating film and the reflection due to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 Therefore, it is difficult to make uniform the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

Further, when the player can visually recognize the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 and the holes of the through holes KTH1 formed on the front (surface) of the decoration board KB, the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 and the through holes KTH1 are The presence of holes may be an eyesore to the player.

Therefore, in the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes with an insulating film according to the third embodiment, the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 of the front (surface) side resist layer KBxr correspond to the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 of the front (surface) side resist layer KBxr of the decoration board KB. In addition, the white resist liquid penetrated from the front (surface) side inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the decoration board KB and blocked the hole. Because of this state, it is possible to contribute to uniformity (uniformity) in the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted.

In addition, on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB, a region of the front (surface) side resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 is also covered with a white resist as an insulating film. , White resist liquid enters from the front (surface) side inner periphery of the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decoration board KB, and the hole is blocked, so that the decoration board can be visually recognized by the player. In KB, it is possible to reduce the ratio of the exposed copper foil on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB (at least, because the copper foil on the front (surface) side land KRDx1 is not exposed at all). By making the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB uniform (uniform), the copper foil portion becomes inconspicuous and contributes to the improvement of the light emission effect of the decoration board KB.

In addition, as described above, the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is provided with an inner lens that is cut (polyhedron-shaped) so that light can be irregularly refracted. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 and the holes of the through holes KTH1 on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB. By adopting the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes according to the third embodiment with an insulating film, the presence of the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 and the holes of the through holes KTH1 on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB can be more played. can be difficult for people to understand. In addition, if there is a difference in reflection efficiency due to the thickness of the white resist that is solidly coated as an insulating film on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB or the color density, this difference is suppressed by the inner lens. can enhance the performance effect.

In addition, the white resist liquid penetrated from the front (surface) side inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the decoration board KB, and although the hole was blocked, the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decoration board KB The rear surface (rear surface) side is in an open state. That is, the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the decoration board KB are closed on the front (surface) side with the white resist liquid, but are open on the rear (back) side. This is because the white resist liquid penetrates from the front (surface) side inner peripheral edges of the through holes KTH1 of the decoration board KB, and the decoration board KB is removed while air remains inside the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the decoration board KB. If the rear surface (back surface) side of the through hole KTH1 is blocked, liquid such as a resist remover may remain inside the through hole KTH1. Poor contact may occur due to corrosion of the plating provided, or the liquid inside the through-hole KTH1 may momentarily evaporate and expand (so-called "steam explosion") during soldering (reflow, etc.) processes where heat is applied. This is because there is a risk that the conductive plating inside the through hole KTH1 may be damaged, causing electrical disconnection of the through hole KTH1.

Although the front (front) side lands KRDx1 and through holes KTH1 are present, they can be hidden by the white resist. The front (surface) side land KRDx1 can be made inconspicuous and the through hole KTH1 can be made inconspicuous with respect to the white resist applied. As a result, the front (surface) side land KRDx1 and the hole of the through hole KTH1 can be prevented from becoming an eyesore for the player. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the holes of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 as a pattern or pattern, thereby reducing the performance effect.

In addition, since each decoration board provided on the game board 5 may be arranged in the front-rear direction, a plurality of decoration boards mounted on the front surface (surface) of another decoration board KB arranged behind one decoration board KB may be arranged. Even if the LED emits light, it cannot pass through the through hole KTH1 of the one decoration board KB because the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the one decoration board KB is blocked by the white resist. LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of another decoration board KB emit light of different colors through holes KTH1 of one decoration board KB. By passing through, it is possible to prevent the colors of light emitted from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of another decoration board KB from being mixed. In addition, when another decoration board KB is not arranged behind one decoration board KB, the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the one decoration board KB must not be blocked with the white resist. looks like a black dot, the color of the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the decoration board KB appears as a black dot due to the through hole KTH1 of the decoration board KB. In other words, black color is mixed, whereas if the hole of the through hole KTH1 of one decoration board KB is blocked with white resist, the area corresponding to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 is also covered with a white resist as an insulating film, the hole of the through hole KTH1 is mixed with (assimilates into) the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB. The through holes KTH1 formed on the front surface (surface) of one decoration substrate KB can prevent color mixture of colors emitted by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the decoration substrate KB.

In addition, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 is the largest visible object of the player, the decorative substrate around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) and the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) ), and the decorative substrate movably arranged at a position covering the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) are the through-holes according to the third embodiment that are insulated from the land. In the structure covered with the film, the parts of the through-hole lands on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate that are not covered with the insulating film are eliminated, and the holes of the through-holes are closed on the front surface (surface) side of the decorative substrate. Thus, the effect of making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil portion inconspicuous, and the existence of the through-hole holes are enhanced. This increases the effect of making it difficult for the user to understand. Also, in other places, for example, the decorative substrate is placed in a place where the player can see it through an inner lens that is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. In some cases, the effect of making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil portion inconspicuous, the effect of the hole of the through hole There is an effect of making its existence more difficult for the player to understand. Note that each decoration substrate provided on the door frame 3 and each decoration substrate provided on the game board 5 are closer to the effect display device 1600 than each decoration substrate provided on the door frame 3 compared to each decoration substrate provided on the game board 5. Therefore, in the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes with an insulating film according to the third embodiment, the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is said to have a uniform (uniform) reflectance. It can be said that the effect, the effect of making the copper foil portion inconspicuous, the effect of making the presence of the through-hole hole less noticeable to the player, etc., is high.

In the configuration of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating film according to the third embodiment, the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB corresponds to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 in the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr. A rear (back) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 is formed in the area where the rear (back) side land KRDy1 has an outer diameter KTHD1. 283(c), the outer peripheral portion of the rear (rear) side land KRDy1 was covered with a white resist as an insulating film from the outer periphery toward the center of the rear (rear) side land KRDy1. In addition, a region of the rear (back) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear (back) side land KRDy1 has an opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear (back) side land KRDy1. A rear surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra may be formed. This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, and light emitted from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB is ) KBy cannot be used as a reflective surface in the first place, there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB uniform (uniform) as described above, and the rear surface (back surface) of the decoration substrate KB This is because KBy cannot efficiently use the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED for the light emitting effect.

In addition, in the configuration in which the lands of the through holes are covered with an insulating film according to the third embodiment, the front (front) surface KBx and the rear (rear) surface KBy of the decoration board KB are almost entirely coated with a white resist solution as an insulating film. A white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed by the above method, but the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is almost entirely coated with a white resist solution as an insulating coating. While a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying A resist layer of a different color may be formed by applying a resist solution of a different color from white (for example, green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.). This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, and light emitted from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB is ) KBy cannot be used as a reflective surface in the first place, there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB uniform (uniform) as described above, and the rear surface (back surface) of the decoration substrate KB This is because KBy cannot efficiently use the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED for the light emitting effect.

In addition, in the configuration in which the lands of the through holes are covered with an insulating film according to the third embodiment, the front (front) surface KBx and the rear (rear) surface KBy of the decoration board KB are almost entirely coated with a white resist solution as an insulating film. A white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed by the coating, but one or both of the front (surface) KBx and the rear (rear) surfaces KBy of the decoration substrate KB were covered almost entirely. A white silk-printed layer may be formed by a white coating film formed by silk-screening a white paint as an insulating coating. In this case, on the white silk-printed layer formed on one side or both sides, the part number of the electronic part, which makes it possible to identify the electronic part, and the description part indicating the attributes of the electronic part are printed with yellow paint. Printed by printing. In addition to yellow, the notation part may be printed by silk printing with a paint having a color close to the lightness of white such as pastel color (for example, light green, light blue, etc.). When forming the white silk-printed layer on one side or both sides, the base material KBo or the copper foil side (the pad to which electronic components are soldered, the copper foil side excluding a predetermined area) ) may be formed, or may not be formed. In the case of forming a resist layer, a white paint is silk-printed as an insulating coating so as to cover this resist layer. A white silk-printed layer is formed by the white coating film formed by printing. The resist layer may be a white resist solution, or may be a resist solution of colors other than white (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.).

Also, the configuration of covering the through-hole lands with an insulating film according to the third embodiment can be applied to the through-hole lands of the function display substrate 1400c in the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. FIG. As described above, a black resist layer is formed by applying a black resist solution to the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. When the black resist liquid is used, as described above, the LEDs 1400ca arranged in the vicinity are prevented from reflecting light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. can contribute to avoiding mixing with the emitted light. Therefore, on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, regions of the front surface (surface) side resist layer corresponding to the front (surface) side lands are also covered with a black resist as an insulating coating. , the black resist liquid enters from the front (surface) side inner peripheral edge of the through hole 1400cc of the function display substrate 1400c, and the hole is blocked. can contribute to making uniform the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c on which is mounted.

In addition, as described above, the through-hole is a hole through which the inner peripheral wall is plated with copper and has conductivity. The lands of both through holes are covered with an insulating film for the lands of the through holes according to the third embodiment. The configuration of covering the lands of the through-holes with the insulating coating according to the third embodiment may not be adopted for those provided immediately below the electronic components are mounted. That is, of the through-holes in which electronic components are not mounted, the entire copper foil on the land of the through-holes provided directly under the electronic components may be exposed. In this case, the entire copper foil on the front (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decoration board KB is exposed. do. Since the electronic components are arranged so as to cover the entire land of the through-hole where the entire copper foil is exposed, there is no need to make the copper foil part inconspicuous in the first place, and the existence of the through-hole hole is not required. This is because there is no need to make it difficult for the player to understand, and the presence of through-hole lands and through-hole holes is visually confirmed in the electrical inspection of the decoration board KB from the surface on which electronic components are not mounted. It is also possible to conduct an electrical inspection (confirmation of operation and abnormal potential) of the decoration board KB by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the land of the through hole.

[5-12-5. Configuration for covering the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment with an insulating film]
In the configuration in which the lands of the through holes are covered with an insulating coating according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Thin through holes are formed in the direction perpendicular to the surface (perpendicular to the rear surface) of the base material KBo, and the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB and the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB. A front (front) side land KRDx1 and a rear (back) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed by removing the copper foil from the foil surface, and a front (front) side wiring pattern and a rear (back) side land KRDx1 are formed. ) side wiring pattern is formed. A through hole KTH1 is formed by subjecting the through hole to a conductive plating process. The outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decoration board KB and the outer diameter of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB are different. The diameter KTHD1 is the same size, and the outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDx1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film. It has the same size as the outer diameter of KRDy1.

The front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB and one end of the front (surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB are electrically connected. The other end of the front (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to a pad to which specific terminals of one full-color LED or a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are soldered. ing.

Note that the front (surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB electrically connected to the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB includes: has a first front (surface) side wiring pattern and a second front (surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, and is connected to the second front surface. One end of the (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, and two wires are connected from the front (surface) side land KRDx1. front (surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first front (surface) side wiring pattern and the second front (surface) side wiring pattern). In addition, the rear (back) side wiring pattern formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB electrically connected to the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB. has a first rear (back) side wiring pattern and a second rear (back) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, and is electrically connected to the second rear surface. One end of the (rear) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear (rear) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (rear) surface KBy of the decoration board KB. The rear (back) side wiring pattern (that is, the first rear (back) side wiring pattern and the second rear (back) side wiring pattern) is exposed.

The rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB is electrically connected to one end of the rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB. In addition, the other end of the rear (back) side wiring pattern, a pad to which the specific terminal of the IC that controls the light emission of the full-color LED is soldered, the pad to which the specific terminal of the resistor is soldered, and the specific terminal of the connector are attached. are electrically connected to any pad, such as a soldered pad.

The front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decoration board KB are connected via through holes KTH1. , are in an electrically connected state, and the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decoration board KB and the rear (back) formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB Front (front) side lands KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decoration board KB, through holes KTH1, and rear (back) side wiring patterns formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB. ) side land KRDy1.

On the copper foil surface of the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, a white resist solution is applied as an insulating film to form a front (surface) side resist layer KBxr. A front (surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed in a region of the layer KBxr corresponding to the front (surface) side land KRDx1. . The outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 is the same size as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 in the structure in which the land of the through-hole according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film.

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr. A region of the (back) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear (back) side land KRDy1 is also coated with a white resist liquid as an insulating film to form a rear (back) side resist layer KByr.

The decorative substrate KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of substrates from one copper-clad laminate (base material) of a standard size and finally cutting them out. There are processes such as the process of fixing a sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) of a fixed size to the manufacturing equipment and coating, the drying process, the process of making holes, and other processes, and finally each board is cut out. . Therefore, when a white resist solution is applied as an insulating coating on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB, the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB should be vertically upward. (The decorative board KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. The plate (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing apparatus so that the rear surface of the plate (base material) faces vertically upward, and the white resist liquid enters from the inner peripheral edge of the rear surface (back surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decoration substrate KB. It will be blocked. The white resist liquid that has entered the through-holes KTH1 of the decoration board KB dries in a recessed state toward the center of the through-hole KTH1 from the inner peripheral edge of the rear surface (rear surface) side of the through-hole KTH1 due to its own weight. becomes.

A substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB and a substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB (that is, solid ground) ground) are electrically connected to each other by through holes (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

As described above, on the front (surface) side KBx of the decoration board KB, the area corresponding to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 in the front (surface) side resist layer KBxr has an outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (surface) side land KRDx1. Since the front (surface) side resist opening KBxra having a smaller opening diameter KBxrD1 is formed, the front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed from the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 toward the center of the front (surface) side land KRDx1. The outer peripheral portion of the (front) side land KRDx1 is covered with a white resist as an insulating film. In addition, on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB, a region corresponding to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 in the rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr is also covered with a white resist as an insulating film. , the white resist liquid penetrates from the rear surface (rear surface) side inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the decoration board KB, and blocks the hole. As a result, the entire peripheral portion of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB can be covered with a white resist as an insulating coating, so that the copper foil is exposed. The area of the front (front) side land KRDx1 can be kept small, and the light from the rear of the decoration board KB is prevented from traveling toward the front (front) KBx of the decoration board KB through the through holes KTH1. can do.

In addition, since the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 both have exposed copper foil, the front (front) side land KRDx1 of the decoration board KB can be Electrical inspection (confirmation of operation and abnormal potential) of the decoration board KB can be performed by bringing the tips of the contact probes into contact with each other. It is possible to perform an electrical inspection (operation check and abnormal potential check) of the decoration board KB by bringing the tips of the contact probes into contact with each other. That is, the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing an electrical inspection of the decoration board KB. The contact probes may be dedicated probes, or may be test leads of a so-called "tester" for continuity check.

Further, since the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front (surface) side land KRDx1 from the front (surface) side of the decoration board KB, for example, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, Since the front surface (surface) of the decoration board KB faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front (surface) land KRDx1 from the front surface (surface) side of the decoration board KB. If it is possible, it is also possible to conduct an electrical inspection (confirmation of operation and confirmation of abnormal potential) of the decoration board KB as a defect inspection of the decoration board KB without performing work for removing the decoration board KB.

By the way, if the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decoration board KB is of a type with a small irradiation angle (a type with a narrow irradiation angle), it looks like a point light source and becomes an aggregate of the point light sources and is visually recognized by the player. There is a risk that it will cause discomfort. For this reason, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decoration board KB are of a type with a large irradiation angle (a type with a wide irradiation angle) so as not to be visually recognized as a point light source by the player.

However, when the irradiation angle of the LED is increased (when the irradiation angle of the LED is widened), the range illuminated by the LED is widened. Many will return to. Therefore, if the light returning to the decoration board KB can be reflected so that it can be emitted forward of the decoration board KB, the front surface (surface) of the decoration board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, in addition to the light emitting surface of the LEDs, can be used. is used as a reflective surface, the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED can be efficiently used for the light emitting effect.

As described above, the decoration board KB has a front (front) wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decoration board KB and a rear (back) wiring pattern formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decoration board KB. Front (surface) side lands KRDx1 are formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB with respect to the through holes KTH1 electrically connecting the side wiring patterns. On the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, as described above, a solid white resist is formed as an insulating film, and the front surface (surface) side lands KRDx1 are formed. Since the front (surface) side land KRDx1 has an exposed copper foil, the reflectance due to the solid white resist (white coating) as an insulating film and the reflection due to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 Therefore, it is difficult to make uniform the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

Further, when the player can visually recognize the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 and the holes of the through holes KTH1 formed on the front (surface) of the decoration board KB, the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 and the through holes KTH1 are The presence of holes may be an eyesore to the player.

Therefore, in the configuration of covering the through-hole lands with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, the entire outer peripheral portion of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB is covered with a white resist as an insulating film. In addition, the white resist liquid penetrates from the rear (rear) side inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the decoration board KB, blocking the hole. It can contribute to make the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the mounted decoration board KB uniform (uniform).

In addition, a white resist as an insulating coating covers the entire outer peripheral portion of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, and the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decoration board KB is covered with a white resist. A white resist liquid enters from the inner peripheral edge of the rear surface (rear surface) side and closes the holes. ) Since it is possible to reduce the ratio of the exposed copper foil exposed to KBx, by making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB uniform (uniform), the copper foil portion becomes inconspicuous. However, it can contribute to the improvement of the light emitting effect by the decoration board KB.

In addition, as described above, the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is provided with an inner lens that is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the presence of the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 and the holes of the through holes KTH1 on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB. By adopting the configuration of covering the lands of the through-holes with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, the presence of the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 and the holes of the through-holes KTH1 on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB can be more played. can be difficult for people to understand. In addition, if there is a difference in reflection efficiency due to the thickness of the white resist that is solidly coated as an insulating film on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the color density, this difference can be suppressed by the inner lens. can enhance the performance effect.

In addition, the white resist liquid penetrated from the rear (rear) side inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the decoration board KB, and although the hole was blocked, the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decoration board KB The front (surface) side is in an open state. That is, the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the decoration board KB are closed on the rear surface (rear surface) side with the white resist liquid, but are open on the front surface (front surface) side. This is because the white resist liquid penetrates from the rear (rear) side inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the decoration board KB, and the decoration board KB is removed while air remains inside the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decoration board KB. If the front (surface) side of the through-hole KTH1 is blocked, liquid such as a resist remover may remain inside the through-hole KTH1. Poor contact may occur due to corrosion of the plating provided, or the liquid inside the through-hole KTH1 may momentarily evaporate and expand (so-called "steam explosion") during soldering (reflow, etc.) processes where heat is applied. This is because there is a risk of electrical disconnection of the through hole KTH1 due to breakage of the conductive plating inside the through hole KTH1.

Although the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 are present, the presence of the front (front) side land KRDx1 can be hidden by the white resist on the front (surface) of the decoration board KB. Since the presence of the hole KTH1 can be hidden by the white resist on the rear surface (rear surface) of the decoration substrate KB, the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB is used. In contrast, the front (surface) side land KRDx1 can be made inconspicuous, and the hole of the through hole KTH1 can be made inconspicuous. As a result, the front (surface) side land KRDx1 and the hole of the through hole KTH1 can be prevented from becoming an eyesore for the player. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the holes of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 as a pattern or pattern, thereby reducing the performance effect.

In addition, since each decoration board provided on the game board 5 may be arranged in the front-rear direction, a plurality of decoration boards mounted on the front surface (surface) of another decoration board KB arranged behind one decoration board KB may be arranged. Even if the LED emits light, it cannot pass through the through hole KTH1 of the one decoration board KB because the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the one decoration board KB is blocked by the white resist. LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of another decoration board KB emit light of different colors through holes KTH1 of one decoration board KB. By passing through, it is possible to prevent the colors of light emitted from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of another decoration board KB from being mixed. In addition, when another decoration board KB is not arranged behind one decoration board KB, the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the one decoration board KB must not be blocked with the white resist. looks like a black dot, the color of the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the decoration board KB appears as a black dot due to the through hole KTH1 of the decoration board KB. In other words, black color is mixed, whereas if the hole of the through hole KTH1 of one decoration board KB is blocked with a white resist, the front surface of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB will be black. Since the entire outer peripheral portion of the (front) side land KRDx1 is covered with white resist as an insulating film, the white resist blocking the hole of the through hole KTH1 and the front (front) side land KRDx1 are separated. Due to the arrangement close to the white resist that covers the entire outer peripheral portion, the hole of the through hole KTH1 is mixed with (assimilated into) the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB. Therefore, the through holes KTH1 formed on the front surface (surface) of one decoration board KB prevent the colors of light emitted from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of one decoration board KB from being mixed. can be done.

In addition, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 is the largest visible object of the player, the decorative substrate around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) and the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) ), and the decorative substrate movably disposed at a position covering the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) are the through-holes according to the fourth embodiment, which are insulated from the land. In the structure covered with the film, the portion of the through-hole land not covered with the insulating film is minimized, and the hole of the through-hole is closed on the rear surface (back surface) side of the decorative substrate, so that the plurality of LEDs The effect of uniformizing the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative board on which the is mounted, the effect of making the copper foil portion inconspicuous, and the existence of the through-hole hole being more difficult for the player to understand. The effect of, etc., is increased. Also, in other places, for example, the decorative substrate is placed in a place where the player can see it through an inner lens that is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. In some cases, the effect of making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil portion inconspicuous, the effect of the hole of the through hole There is an effect of making its existence more difficult for the player to understand. Note that each decoration substrate provided on the door frame 3 and each decoration substrate provided on the game board 5 are closer to the effect display device 1600 than each decoration substrate provided on the door frame 3 compared to each decoration substrate provided on the game board 5. Therefore, in the configuration of covering the lands of the through-holes with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is said to have a uniform (uniform) reflectance. It can be said that the effect, the effect of making the copper foil portion inconspicuous, the effect of making the presence of the through-hole hole less noticeable to the player, etc., is high.

In the configuration of covering the lands of the through-holes with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, the front (surface) side lands KRDx1 of the front (surface) side resist layer KBxr correspond to the front (surface) side KBx of the decoration board KB. By forming a front (surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 in the region where the front (surface) side land KRDx1 284(b), the outer peripheral portion of the front (front) side land KRDx1 was covered with white resist as an insulating film from the outer periphery toward the center of the front (front) side land KRDx1. Furthermore, in the front (surface) side resist layer KBxr, a region corresponding to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 has an outer diameter smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 and further than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1. A front (surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD2 that is small and larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1 may be formed. The inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 takes into account the resist liquid penetration prevention region that spreads concentrically outward from the inner peripheral edge of the front surface (surface) side of the through hole KTH1. ) from the side inner periphery (the resist liquid penetration prevention distance dimension is at least 0.5 mm or more in order to prevent the white resist liquid from entering the through holes KTH1 of the decoration substrate KB). A distance dimension is required, and in the configuration in which the lands of the through holes are covered with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, a distance of 0.5 mm is adopted.). Therefore, the inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is the sum of the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1 and twice the resist liquid penetration prevention distance (0.5 mm). It is larger by 1.0 mm.

As a result, the front (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB extends from substantially the inner side to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the front (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB). Since the white resist can be covered as an insulating film over the area excluding the resist liquid penetration prevention area), the part where the copper foil is exposed becomes the resist liquid penetration prevention area. As a result, the area of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed can be kept extremely small.

In addition, since a resist liquid penetration prevention region is provided for the through hole KTH1 of the decoration board KB, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating on the copper foil surface of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB. When applied, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB faces vertically upward (the decoration board KB is actually made up of a plurality of boards from one copper-clad laminate (base material) of a standard size. Since it is manufactured by arranging and finally cutting out, it is fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that the front surface of one sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward, and the white resist solution actually flows. Even when applied, the white resist liquid penetrates into the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the decoration board KB and is dried without blocking the holes.

In addition, the front (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB extends from almost inside to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the front (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB A white resist is covered as an insulating film over the area excluding the resist liquid penetration prevention area), so that the part where the copper foil is exposed becomes the resist liquid penetration prevention area and becomes small. However, it is possible to conduct electrical inspection (confirmation of operation and abnormal potential) of the decoration board KB by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the front (surface) side land KRDx1 of the decoration board KB. Therefore, the front (surface) side land KRDx1 can be used as a check terminal when performing an electrical inspection of the decoration board KB. Since the front surface (surface) of the KB faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front surface (surface) land KRDx1 from the front surface (surface) side of the decoration board KB. In this case, it is also possible to conduct an electrical inspection (confirmation of operation and confirmation of abnormal potential) of the decoration board KB as a defect inspection of the decoration board KB without carrying out the operation for taking out the decoration board KB. The contact probes may be dedicated probes, or may be test leads of a so-called "tester" for continuity check.

In the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, the front (front) surface KBx and the rear (rear) surface KBy of the decoration board KB are almost entirely coated with a white resist solution as an insulating film. A white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed by the above-described process. and may be different colors. For example, on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, a white resist layer is formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating film to almost the entire surface of the decoration board KB. The front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) side KBx is entirely covered with a white resist as an insulating coating, whereas the rear (back) side KBy of the decoration board KB is almost entirely coated with a white resist. By forming a black resist layer with a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution as an insulating film, the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the decoration substrate KB can be blocked with the black resist. can.

In the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, the front (front) surface KBx and the rear (rear) surface KBy of the decoration board KB are almost entirely coated with a white resist solution as an insulating film. A white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed by the coating, but one or both of the front (surface) KBx and the rear (rear) surfaces KBy of the decoration substrate KB were covered almost entirely. A white silk-printed layer may be formed by a white coating film formed by silk-screening a white paint as an insulating coating. In this case, on the white silk-printed layer formed on one side or both sides, the part number of the electronic part, which makes it possible to identify the electronic part, and the description part indicating the attributes of the electronic part are printed with yellow paint. Printed by printing. In addition to yellow, the notation part may be printed by silk printing with a paint having a color close to the lightness of white such as pastel color (for example, light green, light blue, etc.). When forming the white silk-printed layer on one side or both sides, the base material KBo or the copper foil side (the pad to which electronic components are soldered, the copper foil side excluding a predetermined area) ) may be formed, or may not be formed. In the case of forming a resist layer, a white paint is silk-printed as an insulating coating so as to cover this resist layer. A white silk-printed layer is formed by the white coating film formed by printing. The resist layer may be a white resist solution, or may be a resist solution of colors other than white (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.).

Also, the configuration of covering the lands of the through-holes with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment can be applied to the lands of the through-holes of the function display substrate 1400c in the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. FIG. As described above, a black resist layer is formed by applying a black resist solution to the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. When the black resist liquid is used, as described above, the LEDs 1400ca arranged in the vicinity are prevented from reflecting light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. can contribute to avoiding mixing with the emitted light. For this reason, the entire peripheral portion of the front (surface) side land on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c is covered with a black resist as an insulating coating, and the through holes 1400cc of the function display substrate 1400c are covered. Since the black resist liquid enters from the inner periphery of the rear surface (back surface) side of the hole and blocks the hole, the reflectance is reduced, and the front surface of the function display substrate 1400c on which the plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted. (Surface) It can contribute to making the reflectance of 1400 cx uniform (uniform).

In addition, as described above, the through-hole is a hole through which the inner peripheral wall is plated with copper and has conductivity. There are through holes that are not mounted, and the lands of both through holes are covered with an insulating film for the lands of the through holes according to the fourth embodiment. The configuration of covering the lands of the through-holes with the insulating film according to the fourth embodiment may not be adopted for those provided directly under the electronic components to be mounted. That is, of the through-holes in which electronic components are not mounted, the entire copper foil on the land of the through-holes provided directly under the electronic components may be exposed. In this case, the entire copper foil on the front (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decoration board KB is exposed. do. Since the electronic components are arranged so as to cover the entire land of the through-hole where the entire copper foil is exposed, there is no need to make the copper foil part inconspicuous in the first place, and the existence of the through-hole hole is not required. This is because there is no need to make it difficult for the player to understand, and the presence of through-hole lands and through-hole holes is visually confirmed in the electrical inspection of the decoration board KB from the surface on which electronic components are not mounted. It is also possible to conduct an electrical inspection (confirmation of operation and abnormal potential) of the decoration board KB by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the land of the through hole.

[5-12-6. Connector mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) of the decorative board]
Here, the connector mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 285 is a schematic diagram (a) of the rear (reverse) side of the decoration board on which the DIP type connector is mounted, and (b) a schematic diagram of the front (surface) side. It is a schematic diagram (c) of the back surface (back surface) side of the mounted decorative substrate and a schematic diagram (d) of the front surface (front surface) side. In the following description, the front surface (surface) of the connector is assumed to be mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the decoration board KB.

[5-12-6a. DIP type connector]
As shown in FIGS. 285(a) and 285(b), various terminals of the DIP type connector KCN (in this embodiment, four terminals are provided, the first terminal is the ground terminal, the second terminal is the power supply terminal (for example, +12 V), third terminal: data signal terminal 1 (for example, serial signal terminal), and fourth terminal: data signal terminal 2 (for example, clock signal terminal). A through-hole KTH (hereinafter simply referred to as "land KRD") having a land KRD through which a plurality of power supply terminals and a plurality of data credit terminals can be allocated and soldered. ), the through holes KTH are formed in the base material KBo of the decoration board KB described above, and the copper foil surface of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB and the rear surface (rear surface) of the decoration board KB are formed. A land KRD having a predetermined outer diameter is formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of KBy (in this embodiment, four through holes KTH are formed). In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the land KRD formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB and the outer diameter of the land KRD formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB are the same. there is One end of the wiring pattern is electrically connected to the land KRD formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB.

On the copper foil surface of the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, a resist liquid is applied to form the front (surface) side resist layer KBxr described above. The area corresponding to the land KRD is not coated with the resist solution, and the copper foil surface of the land KRD is exposed. The resist liquid may not be applied to a region larger than the outer diameter of the land KRD on the copper foil surface of the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB. In this case, the copper foil surface of the land KRD is exposed, and part of the surface of the base material KBo is exposed. Also, on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, a resist solution is applied to form the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr described above. Of these areas, the areas corresponding to the lands KRD are not coated with the resist solution, and the copper foil surfaces of the lands KRD are exposed. On the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, the resist liquid may not be applied to a region larger than the outer diameter of the land KRD. In this case, the copper foil surface of the land KRD is exposed, and part of the surface of the base material KBo is exposed.

The decoration board KB has a single reverse-insertion prevention through-hole KBa through which the connector reverse-insertion prevention boss KCNa provided on the DIP-type connector KCN is inserted, and two connector mounting locking pieces provided on the DIP-type connector KCN. KCNb (instead of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb, two screws (or two rivets) for fixing the DIP-type connector to the decoration board KB may be used) are inserted into two mounting holes. A through hole KBb is formed. The single reverse-insertion prevention through-hole KBa and the two mounting through-holes KBb are not plated with copper on the inner peripheral walls of the above-mentioned through-holes, and the front (surface) KBx and the rear (rear) surfaces KBy of the decoration board KB. These are formed in the decoration board KB as non-through holes that do not have lands inside.

The single connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa provided on the DIP-type connector KCN is arranged on the front surface (surface) of the housing having a laterally long rectangular shape, whereas the DIP-type connector KCN has two bosses provided on the connector KCN. The connector attachment locking pieces KCNb are arranged on the left and right side surfaces of the housing having a laterally long rectangular shape. The connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa and the connector mounting locking piece KCNb are made of the same resin as the housing of the DIP type connector KCN and have the same color.

The mounting of the DIP type connector KCN on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB will be briefly described. Various terminals (four terminals) of the connector KCN are inserted, and the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa provided in the housing of the DIP type connector KCN is inserted into the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa from the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB. Two connector mounting locking pieces KCNb provided on the housing of the DIP type connector KCN are inserted into the two mounting through holes KBb from the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decoration board KB.

The rear surface (back surface) of the housing of the DIP type connector KCN is pushed toward the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, so that the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa stays in the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. (In addition, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa may protrude forward from the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa, or the tip of the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa may be positioned on the front surface (surface) of the decoration board KB. ), and the tip of the connector mounting latching piece KCNb protrudes forward from the mounting through hole KBb of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB to extend to the front surface (surface) of the decoration board KB. ) KBx, and various terminals (four terminals) of the connector KCN protrude from the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB. In this state, various terminals (four terminals) of the connector KCN are soldered from the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB to the lands KRD of the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB.

As described above, the housing of the DIP type connector KCN, the boss KCNa for preventing reverse insertion of the connector, and the connector mounting locking piece KCNb are of the same color, and the color is white or close to white (for example, ivory color). , beige, and cream), when the DIP type connector KCN is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa stays inside the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. As a result, the reverse-insertion prevention through-hole KBa is closed, and the tip portion of the connector reverse-insertion prevention boss KCNa is visible from the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB. Alternatively, the color is close to white, so that the reverse-insertion prevention through hole KBa has a white or close-to-white circular shape, and the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB is solidly coated with a white resist. can contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform). In addition, when the DIP type connector KCN is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, the tip of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb extends forward from the mounting through hole KBb of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB. Although it protrudes and is locked to the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, and the tip of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb is visible from the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, the tip of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb is visible from the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB. is the same as the color of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb, so that the connector mounting locking piece KCNb and its tip end are solidly painted on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB. It is possible to contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform), and the presence of the through holes can be recognized by the player. The effect of making it difficult to understand is obtained. In addition, even if there is a through hole, which is a through hole through which electronic components are not mounted, in the portion of the substrate facing the housing of the connector mounting portion, the same effect as in the case of the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa can be obtained, and the reflectance can be improved. It is possible to contribute to uniformity (uniformity) and to obtain the effect of making it difficult for the player to understand the existence of the through holes.

If the DIP type connector KCN is not provided with the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa described above, the reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB. Since there is nothing to block the inside of the through hole KBa, the front surface (surface) of the housing of the DIP type connector KCN can be seen through the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa from the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB. Since the color of the housing of the DIP type connector KCN is white or close to white, the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is also white or close to white as the housing of the DIP type connector KCN. The insertion-prevention through-hole KBa becomes a circular shape having a white color or a color close to white and blends into the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted. It can contribute to make the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB uniform (uniform).

285(a) and 285(b), on which the DIP type connector KCN is mounted, the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decoration board KB is configured as follows: When the connector 1400cb is mounted, it can be applied to the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. By doing this, the housing of the DIP type connector 1400cb and the connector reverse insertion prevention boss are the same color, and the color is black or a color close to black (for example, dark gray, dark blue, dark green, etc.). Therefore, when the surface mount type connector 1400cb is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss stays within the reverse insertion prevention through-hole formed in the function display board 1400c. , the tip of the connector's reverse insertion prevention boss is visible from the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c, but the tip of the connector's reverse insertion prevention boss is black or nearly black. Because of the color, the reverse-insertion prevention through-hole KBa becomes a circular shape having a black color or a color close to black and blends into the black resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. , the reflectance can be reduced, and the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c on which the plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted can be made uniform (uniform).

The decoration board KB has two connector mounting locking pieces KCNb provided on the DIP type connector KCN (instead of the connector mounting locking pieces KCNb, the DIP type connector is fixed to the decoration board KB. Although two mounting through holes KBb through which two screws (or two rivets may be inserted) are formed as non-through holes, the inner peripheral walls of the through holes are not plated with copper. It may be formed as a conductive through hole and fixed by soldering. In this case, the two connector attachment locking pieces KCNb are made of metal. The land of the through hole is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) of the decoration substrate KB. By soldering and fixing the two metal connector mounting locking pieces KCNb to the decoration board KB, the two metal connector mounting locking pieces KCNb and the board ground (GND) of the decoration board KB (that is, and the solid ground) are electrically connected to each other, and the noise entering the DIP type connector KCN can be released to the board ground (GND) (that is, the solid ground) of the decorative board KB, thereby improving the noise resistance. can contribute to Instead of the two metal connector mounting locking pieces KCNb, two metal screws or two metal rivets for fixing the DIP type connector to the decoration board KB may be used. In this case as well, by fixing two metal screws or two metal rivets to the decoration board KB, the two metal screws or two metal rivets and the decoration board KB is electrically connected to the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) of the decorative board KB, and the noise that enters the DIP type connector KCN is released to the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) of the decorative board KB. As a result, it can contribute to the improvement of noise immunity.

[5-12-6b. Surface mount type connector]
As shown in FIGS. 285(c) and (d), various terminals of the surface mount (SMD) type connector KCN (in this embodiment, four terminals are provided, the first terminal is the ground terminal, the second terminal is the power supply terminal). terminal (for example, +12 V), third terminal: data signal terminal 1 (for example, serial signal terminal), and fourth terminal: data signal terminal 2 (for example, clock signal terminal). It is not limited to this, and the number of terminals can be increased to allocate a plurality of power supply terminals and a plurality of data credit terminals. A predetermined rectangular shape is formed by removing the copper foil on each surface (in this embodiment, four pads KSP are formed). One end of the wiring pattern is electrically connected to the pad KSP formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB. In addition, a metal connector fixing portion provided on the housing for fixing the housing of the surface mount (SMD) type connector KCN to the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB (in this embodiment, two metal connector fixing portions are ) are soldered to each fixed pad KSPF having a predetermined rectangular shape (in this embodiment , two fixed pads KSPF are formed). Although not shown, the four corners of the fixing pad KSPF in the periphery of the fixing pad KSPF are decorated with a cross-shaped pattern by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB. A thermal pattern electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) of the substrate KB is provided. With this thermal pattern, the heat that melts the solder when soldering the metal connector fixing part provided on the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN to the fixing pad KSPF on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB is applied to the fixing pad KSPF. It can be prevented from being stolen from the outer periphery.

On the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, a resist liquid is applied to a region corresponding to the pad KSP to form the front (surface) side resist layer KBxr described above. On the copper foil surface of the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, a resist solution is applied to form the rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr described above. In the area corresponding to the pad KSP, the copper foil surface of the pad KSP is exposed without being coated with the resist solution. On the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, the resist liquid may not be applied to a region larger than the outline of the pad KSP. In this case, the copper foil surface of the pad KSP is exposed, and part of the surface of the base material KBo is exposed.

The decoration board KB is formed with a single reverse-insertion prevention through-hole KBa through which the connector reverse-insertion prevention boss KCNa provided on the surface mount type connector KCN is inserted.

The single connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa provided on the surface mount type connector KCN is arranged on the front surface (surface) of the housing having a horizontally long rectangular shape, whereas the surface mount type connector KCN is provided with the boss KCNa. The two metal connector fixing portions are respectively arranged on the left and right side surfaces of the housing having a laterally long rectangular shape. The connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa is made of the same resin as the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN and has the same color.

The mounting of the surface mount type connector KCN on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB will be briefly explained. Various terminals (four terminals) of the connector KCN and fixing pads KSPF (two fixing pads KSPF) on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB are fixed to the metal connector provided in the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN. (two metal connector fixing portions) are aligned, the connector provided in the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is reversely inserted from the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB to the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. Insert the prevention boss KCNa.

Then, the rear surface (back surface) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is pushed toward the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, so that the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa stays in the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. (Note that the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa may protrude forward from the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa, or the tip of the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa may be located on the decoration board KB. may be flush with the front surface (surface) of KBx). In this state, the pads KSP (four pads KSP) on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB and various terminals (four terminals) of the connector KCN are soldered, and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB is soldered. The fixing pads KSPF (two fixing pads KSPF) and the metal connector fixing parts (two metal connector fixing parts) provided on the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN are soldered.

As described above, the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN and the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa have the same color, and the color is white or a color close to white (for example, ivory, beige, cream). ), when the surface mount type connector KCN is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa stays in the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa to prevent reverse insertion. Although the through hole KBa is blocked and the tip of the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is visible from the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, the tip of the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is white or a color close to white. This can contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

In the case where the surface mount type connector KCN is not provided with the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa described above, the surface mount type connector KCN mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decoration board KB may not be mounted in the reverse direction. Since there is nothing to block the inside of the insertion prevention through hole KBa, the front surface (surface) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN can be seen from the front surface (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB through the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. However, since the color of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is white or close to white, the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is also white or white as the same color as the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN. The colors are close to each other, and can contribute to making uniform the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

285(c) and (d), on which the surface-mounted (SMD) type connector KCN is mounted, the configuration of the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decoration board KB is described as the function display unit of the game board 5 described above. When a surface mount (SMD) type connector 1400cb is mounted on 1400, it can be applied to the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c. By doing this, the housing of the surface mount type connector 1400cb and the connector reverse insertion prevention boss are the same color, and the color is black or close to black (for example, dark gray, dark blue, dark green, etc.). Therefore, when the surface mount type connector 1400cb is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss stays within the reverse insertion prevention through-hole formed in the function display board 1400c. Thus, the reverse insertion prevention through-hole is closed, and the tip of the reverse insertion prevention through-hole is visible from the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, but the tip of the reverse insertion prevention through-hole is colored black or black. Having similar colors reduces the reflectance and contributes to making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c on which the plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted uniform (uniform).

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with a game board provided with light emitting means such as a board lamp (for example, JP-A-2017-217381 (paragraph [0023] and FIG. 5)). By the way, the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted is required to efficiently reflect the light emitted by the light emitting means.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which a display device is provided in the lower right portion of the game board (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0023] and FIG. 5)). By the way, when a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the display panel of the display device, when the light emitted by the light emitting means is reflected on the surface of the display substrate, the color of the light emitted by one light emitting means and the color of the light emitted by the other light emitting means are reflected. There is a problem that the color of the light emitted by the light emitting means (the light emitted by the other light emitting means with respect to the one light emitting means becomes disturbance light) is mixed with the color of the light emitted by the other light emitting means, making it difficult to visually recognize the light.

In addition, conventionally, there are a game board provided with light emitting means such as a board lamp, a main control board for controlling game progress and game profit, a sub control board for controlling effects executed as the game progresses, etc. A game machine provided has been proposed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-217381 (paragraphs [0023], [0051], FIGS. 2 and 5)). By the way, since the board on which the light-emitting means is mounted has a through-hole formed by the routing of the wiring pattern, there is a possibility that the presence of the through-hole may be visually recognized by the player, thereby degrading the presentation effect. rice field.

[6. Game content]
Game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 130 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are played. is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182. The more the handle 182 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nail N, the game ball The flowing speed of B is suppressed, and various motions are imparted to the game ball B so that the motion can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails N, The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. When the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opening in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2512 to the stage 2513.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the center release portion 2513a is located directly above the first start port 2002, so there is a high probability that it will be the first ball. It is received in the starting port 2002 . When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state (for example, "big hit", "middle hit", "small hit", "probability variation (probability variation) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) A special lottery result (first special lottery result) for generating a "hit" is performed.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 .

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it will be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200 , or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit above the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500, the center role 2500 is guided. Through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520, the plurality of guide passages 2520 and 2520 are discharged above the gate portion 2003 and implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003. After coming into contact with the obstructing nail N, it passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

The group of guide passages 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first guide passage 2521 whose entrance is open near the impinging portion 1006, and an entrance which is spaced leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. and a second guide passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with the strength to contact the impingement portion 1006 (so-called right hitting), it enters the first guide passage 2521 and does not hit the impingement portion 1006 (right hitting). When the game ball B is hit with a strength somewhat weaker than the ball B, it enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the hitting strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 at a higher probability when the second guide passage 2522 is used than the first guide passage 2521 . Further, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521 .

When the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the normal lottery result of the lottery is "normal win", the first attacker unit. The closed second starting port 2004 at 2400 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 becomes possible.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0 .01-600 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. In addition, the normal fluctuation time from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result is set to a relatively long time (600 seconds in this example) in normal times (non-time saving state). Time saving state) is designed to be changed in a short time. Thereby, derivation|leading-out of a normal lottery result comes to be performed frequently at the time of time saving (time saving state), and the second starting port 2004 comes to be made into an open state frequently by this. In this way, the second starting port 2004 is frequently opened in the time saving time (time saving state), so the game aiming at entering the game ball to the second starting port 2004 (so-called "right hitting") will do.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the ordinary lottery result ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of reservations of the ordinary lottery result is four, and even if the game balls B pass through the gate section 2003, the game balls B exceeding the upper limit are discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

A game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 has a high probability of hitting the side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 occasionally and is accepted in the second sub-out opening 2012 rarely. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 , a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out in the same manner as the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 . On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012, it is discharged out of the game area 5a without an opportunity to be received in the second big prize-winning port 2006, the second starting port 2004, or the first big prize-winning port 2005. .

In addition, the game ball B that has passed through the right side of the gate portion 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right center unit 2700, and the side right center unit 2700 has a general winning port 2001, a second big winning port 2006, a second There is no opportunity to be accepted in the starting port 2004 or the first big prize winning port 2005, and it is discharged out of the game area 5a.

In this way, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide path group 2520, the game ball B is discharged outside the game area 5a. It is possible to prompt a hitting operation such that the game ball B cannot be received by the mouth 2012.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, in the guide path group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide path 2522 has a lower acceptance probability of the game ball B at the second sub-out port 2012 than the first guide path 2521. , the driving operation of the game ball B aimed at the second guide passage 2522 can be encouraged. In other words, it is possible to encourage a hitting operation that requires fine adjustment of the rotation operation of the handle 182 rather than a "right hitting" in which the game ball B contacts the impingement portion 1006, and the hitting operation of the game ball B can be encouraged. It is possible to entertain the original game of the pachinko machine 1 mainly having .

A game ball B passing through the left side of the right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstructing nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and enters the second big winning hole 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. , it is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 .

At this time, when the game ball B is accepted by the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, the second big prize is won. Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is received in the second big winning opening 2006 with a high probability. When the second large winning opening 2006 is open, when the game ball B is received in the second large winning opening 2006, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 from the payout device 580 a predetermined number (for example, 10, or , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 .

The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the second big winning opening 2006 is the first shelf part 2412a, the second starting door 2414, and the second shelf part 2412b, the upper left After rolling in the direction, it is released to the left, and further rolls leftward on the third shelf 2412c, the first big winning opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d into the game area 5a. released.

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second starting door 2414, the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003 is "normal hit", and the second starting door When 2414 is retreating, the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 . When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "middle hit", "small hit", "probability variation (probability variation) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) A special lottery result (first special lottery result) for generating a "hit" is performed.

In addition, when the game ball B is rolling on the first big winning opening door 2417, the special lottery result (the second If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot"), after the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the first big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. , the game ball B can be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first big winning opening 2005 when the first big winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 . Therefore, when the first big winning hole 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the first big winning hole 2005 to accept the game ball B, it is possible to pay out a lot of the game balls B, and the player is encouraged. can entertain.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 enters an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot", A lottery will be held for special lottery results that generate "middle hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability variation) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit".Then, the special lottery results that have been drawn are Predetermined time (for example, 0.1 ~ 360 seconds, also referred to as special fluctuation time) suggested to the player.In addition, the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 lottery The special lottery results include "loss", "small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "15R jackpot", "variable (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", " There are "probable short-time hit", "non-probable short-time hit", "second big hit", etc.

When the special lottery result is a "small hit", the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state capable of accepting the game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern is repeated multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "jackpot", the first big prize winning opening 2005 becomes open for receiving the game ball B, and then a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or the first big prize winning opening 2005 When any of the conditions of acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B into the prize winning opening 2005 is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is 1 round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big win game, change the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn ("variable hit"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. There is a "hit" to do ("time saving hit").

If the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is the "second jackpot", after the first big winning port 2005 is able to accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, ST (special・Time) is generated. This ST maintains the state of probability variation and time saving during a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. Reserved. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, it is discarded without holding the special lottery result. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern row displayed in a state in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and each pattern row is varied. are sequentially stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are in a combination corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than ``losing'', after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a "small winning" game, a "big winning" game, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image does not appear). The time until display is different), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is operated according to the special lottery result. A player-participation type effect can be performed in which the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate the rotary operation unit 302, vibrate it, assist the rotary operation, or inhibit the rotary operation, and the operation button elevation drive motor By 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the operation of the production operation section 301 can entertain the player participation type production.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided on the door frame 3, each decoration board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back effect unit 3100, Bottom left effect unit 3200, back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom middle effect unit 3300, back top effect unit 3400, back rear left effect unit 3500, back rear right effect unit 3600, back front left effect unit 3700, and back front left effect unit 3700 By appropriately using the right effect unit 3800, etc., it is possible to perform lighting effect, display effect, etc., and various effects can entertain the player, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player participation type presentation in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated. to notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is requested, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation portion 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 is caused to vibrate. The effect display device 1600 is made to display that effect.

[7. Configuration of Peripheral Control Unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged behind the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 206 to 208. FIG. 206 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 207 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 208 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500 . 207, the terminals of various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of the various connectors are inserted into the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. , but is omitted for the sake of clarity of the drawing.

As shown in FIGS. 206 and 207, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a cover body 1501 having an open rear and a box shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510 and an electric It has a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 which is directly connected, and a base body 1502 which closes the opening of the cover body 1501 . Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 .

[7-1. Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data (peripheral data) that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is stored in the various boards mounted in the inner space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 . Peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having an area of about two-thirds of cover body 1501 when viewed from the back, and is arranged close to the left side of cover body 1501 . Peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530 are located on the upper right side of cover body 1501, with peripheral data ROM board 1520 having a square shape in the remaining one-third area when cover body 1501 is viewed from the back. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape that is twice as large as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and is placed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 .

The peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector to be described later, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector to be described later. properly connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to form the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. there is

The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color. , bottom side, and right side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e protrude rearward (toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening.

The cover flat plate 1501a has an air-cooling fan FAN attached at a slightly upper right side of the center when viewed from the front and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of cover body 1501 . A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles centered at the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa, there are provided cylindrical predetermined through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square air cooling fan FAN. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN) are formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, respectively. By forming the arc-shaped slit holes 1501 aaa , it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510 .

A pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a in the vicinity of the fan mounting recess 1501aa and diagonally. When the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa and attached, the front surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) (screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated) is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the seated pan head screw, comes into contact with the front surface of the cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the cooling fan FAN protrudes from the fan mounting recess 1501aa. can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a shorter distance than the distance from the front surface of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). ), a wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is formed so as to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 . When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the fan mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN can be pulled out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab.

The cover flat plate 1501a has connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which are attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side when viewed from the front, and a volume control switch. The position corresponding to 1510d is defined as one closed, substantially horizontally long rectangular area (more precisely, a convex area with the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 at the top and the connectors CN2 to CN7 at the bottom) as a connector recess. 1501ac faces the opening side of cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa (position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa). It is formed so as to protrude. Connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d. formed. The bottom surface of the connector concave portion 1501ac generally occupies the lower right region when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a sound volume adjuster. Two vertically elongated reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed at positions that do not interfere with the hole 1501ac8 and protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8.

The cover flat plate 1501a is arranged along its lower side when viewed from the front thereof so that the positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are aligned by 1. Connector recess 1501ad is positioned lower than the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa as two closed oblong rectangular regions (position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa). Further, the connector recess 1501ad and the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed in the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. are exposed from each other.

Also, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae along its left side when viewed from the front, at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . A mounting recess 1501af for mounting a wiring cover body 1503 having a laterally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae and can close the wiring draw-out opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a shorter distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of fan mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is formed in a cylindrical shape at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover 1503, and is inserted into the through hole 1503a. dimension) is formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and mounting holes 1501afb1 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are respectively formed.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover 1503. , the wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring drawer opening 1501ae is closed and a flexible flat cable (FFC) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is connected. An abbreviation for Cable, a flexible flat cable has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600, and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator. )) so that they cannot be touched, the wiring cover body 1503 can function. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.

Plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left cover side wall 1501c when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, and protrude upward and downward respectively outward with a predetermined interval in the center. In addition, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc that is arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and protrudes outward, and a hinge hook portion 1501cd that is arranged below the guide portion 1501cb and protrudes outside are formed. The left ends of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are chamfered on the rear surface side. On the other hand, L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea projecting outward is formed in the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged close to the left side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. Four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed at positions protruding from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. The four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are surrounded by circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed. , 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Further, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil, which is the surface thereof, is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are opened. are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. By screwing it in, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws. Become. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw. are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. As a result, cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of peripheral control board 1510 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw, so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is grounded (GND). The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

Note that when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 become the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are arranged so as not to protrude outward from the opening side end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are diagonally projected from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions where It is Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed. 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and circular copper foils for soldering (so-called lands) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Wiring patterns 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, respectively. Further, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil, which is the surface thereof, is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are mounted. 1520r1 and 1520r3 are inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM board 1520. Then, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss projections 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. ) and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw. lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are electrically connected. As a result, cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of peripheral data ROM board 1520 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal round head screw, whereby the peripheral control board 1510 is grounded (GND). The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are attached to the side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the rear surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the cover flat plate. The rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the rear surface side of 1501a is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the rear so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed at positions that are diagonally projected from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. The four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are surrounded by copper foils for soldering (so-called lands) 1530rf1 to 1530rf having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. 1530rf4 and copper foils for soldering (so-called lands) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape on the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed. , 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively. Further, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil, which is the surface thereof, is not exposed.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is directed toward the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are closed. are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to secure the cover flat plate. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are in contact with each other. The seat surface of the pan head screw made of , and are in contact with each other. Further, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan head screw. are electrically connected to the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4. Thereby, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal round head screw, thereby grounding the peripheral control board 1510. (GND) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 become the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the cover flat plate 1501a. A rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the rear surface side and a rear surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane. It is designed to be

In this way, when various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (the cover plate 1501a A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, a gap (2.3 mm in this embodiment) having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is provided between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model type are printed) and the rear surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. is formed.

A cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 has a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By drawing in air from outside the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (in particular, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed with a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width of 6.5 mm in the horizontal direction, and a pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm in the vertical direction.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, gaps are formed between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501. At the same time, a gap is formed between the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501. FIG. Further, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are connected. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. , air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, and the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connectors formed on the cover body 1501 Gaps formed in connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, gaps formed in volume control switch 1510d provided in peripheral control board 1510, volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in cover body 1501, and liquid crystal output board 1530. The two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided and the gap formed in the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are taken in.

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arcuate slit holes 1501aaa formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, The above-described gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, gaps formed in the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, volume control switches 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, , a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap formed in the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. , and the area in the gap formed in ) are smaller than the sum of Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. , when taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 The flow velocity of the air flowing into each can be kept small.

When the blades of the cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 However, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes air to be sucked in through the blades to the surroundings. Air may be sent out toward the control IC 1510a. In other words, the main purpose of the cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover member 1501 and the base member 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[7-2. Base body]
The base member 1502 that closes the opening of the cover member 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color. Base side walls 1502b to 1502e project forward (back side of the pachinko machine 1) on the left side, the bottom side, and the right side to form a box shape having an opening. The size of the opening formed by base side walls 1502b to 1502e of base body 1502 is one size larger than the size of the opening formed by cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of cover body 1501 . Thus, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are located inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. are fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a is positioned along the lower side at predetermined intervals so as not to interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, the peripheral control board Each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y. 1510y, the peripheral control board 1510 is warped due to the force when inserting the connectors for connecting the wires to these connectors CN2 to CN7 (positions that do not interfere with the protruding terminals). Disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 that are elongated in the vertical direction are formed to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the control board 1510 from being disconnected.

An engaging portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed near the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left side wall 1502c when the base body 1502 is viewed from the front. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the above-described L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Engageable.

A base side sealing portion 1502ea projecting outward is formed in the center of the right base side wall 1502e at a position corresponding to the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. Through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are formed on the upper and lower sides of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[7-3. Various connectors]
On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the inner space of the cover body 1501, the above-described peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding various ROM functions) and effect display control unit 1512 (various ROM functions). ), CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I / O interfaces etc. A peripheral control IC 1510a integrated on a single semiconductor chip, various programs capable of controlling the progress of game effects and demonstrations (demonstration effects performed while the player is waiting), and various schedule data that define the progress of the effects. (including the function of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above and the function of the display control ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above), and the peripheral data provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 An SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing various control information (peripheral data) stored in the ROM 1520a, and a slide system capable of adjusting the volume. A volume adjustment switch 1510d, a backup power supply 1510e capable of supplying power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is off, a power supply generation circuit (not shown) for producing various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. I have. The backup power supply 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

The control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. A peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

Various I/O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I/Os, various parallel I/Os, and the like. Various serial I/O include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5). SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to (communication is performed via the corresponding connector among connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

In this embodiment, using SPI communication and I2C communication, electrical drive sources provided on the game board 5 (for example, various motors and various solenoids, communicating via the connector CN6.) and door frames Drive data is sent to the drive control IC that drives the electrical drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicate via the connector CN3) provided on the 3 side, and the game board 5 side light emission data to the LED control IC for a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN7) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN3) provided on the door frame 3 side , receives signals from various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (communicating via connector CN6) as detection data, and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (via connector CN3 are communicating.) as detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate for SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer rate for I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

Various parallel I/O include GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output). In this embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that transmits the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of non-controlled objects and the origin position are input to GPIO (via connector CN6), and control signals for controlled objects (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are sent from GPIO (connector CN6 ), or output a signal from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to connector CN3 (that is, connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector with both SPI communication and GPIO), and connector CN7 is assigned SPI communication. is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, realizing a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can achieve a high data communication speed. Various control information (peripheral data) from a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is further provided with a special connector SCN1 for inter-board connection with the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and a special connector SCN2 for inter-board connection with the liquid crystal output board 1530. I have. A surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector SCN3 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. A surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector SCN4 for connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in a plurality of types of video signal formats. Examples of the multiple types of video signal systems include RGB, LVDS, MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface), eDP (Embedded Display Port), and clockless systems. , four systems (four systems in total) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. In addition, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. In addition, instead of the MIPI method, for example, the eDP method is adopted, and the RGB method is one system, the LVDS method is two systems (first LVDS method, second LVDS method), and the eDP method is one system Peripheral control board 1510 can also be created.

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, there are LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. , is equipped with The peripheral control board 1510 is supplied with various voltages (+24 V, +12 V, and +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via an interface 635 . The LEDML1 confirms (monitors) the state in which +5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which +5V is supplied. The LEDML2 confirms (monitors) the state in which +12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which +12V is supplied. The LEDML3 confirms (monitors) the state in which +24V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which +24V is supplied. The LEDML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and is kept lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surface of the various boards (cover A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface facing the back surface of the flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space thus formed can be illuminated brightly by lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 The provided special connector SCN4 has a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from CN10. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, and the sockets and the plugs are fitted by inserting and pushing in the plugs of the corresponding connectors in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. FIG. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 are so structured that they do not move vertically when viewed from the front of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 at the time of fitting.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs respectively, the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530. (Mounting surface) The special connectors SCN4 provided on the 1530x are sockets.

The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. are mated. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is oriented forward and backward when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing by moving within a predetermined distance range toward the back and front of the machine 1 . The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. , even if the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum extent within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not face the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the back surface of the 1501a.

The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the plug and the socket are connected. Mate. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket moves forward and backward (pachinko machine 1 The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving within a predetermined distance range toward the direction of the rear surface and the front surface of the housing. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed in a state where the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum extent within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the .

Here, the reasons for adopting the special connector SCN3 for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly explained. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral data ROM 1520a (function of the image ROM of the effect display control section 1512 described above, etc.). including.). Various types of control information (peripheral data) include image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided for the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs etc. mounted in a plurality, Sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc. Driving data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effects provided can be mentioned.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory, which is less expensive than a NOR flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

By adopting a NAND type flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a in this way, it is possible to reduce the cost, contribute to the suppression of power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer rate. can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can reduce power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. In addition, it is necessary to transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520 a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510 accurately and reliably. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a special connector SCN3 socket on its own surface (mounting surface) 1520x mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral control board 1510 ( Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a after inserting and pushing in the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the mounting surface 1510x, By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the floating mechanism described above, along with this peripheral control board 1510, the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is absorbed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket from being damaged, and to reliably form the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 .

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although the distance is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 together with the peripheral control board 1510 are fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above floating mechanism. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when connecting, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is secured. It can be formed reliably.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, thereby causing the effect display device 1600 to display the progress of the game effect (for example, An image to convey that a jackpot game state will occur which is more advantageous than the normal state, an image to convey that the jackpot game state will not occur, and a state in which a jackpot game state will occur compared to the normal state although the jackpot game state will not occur. It is an important board for drawing images such as images that convey the fact that the game is approaching) and demonstrations (demonstration effects that are performed while the player is waiting). Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are not electrically connected via a wiring (harness). 1510 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, thereby reducing the influence of noise entering the board-to-board transmission path.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a special connector SCN4 socket provided on its own surface (mounting surface) 1530x mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510x, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 must be fixed to the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a. By adopting the special connector SCN4 socket provided with a floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is pushed into the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket from being damaged, and to reliably form the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 .

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although the distance is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above floating mechanism. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at that time, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is secured. can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are connected as described above. Since the rear surface and the rear surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, it is said that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the front surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Since the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced compared to the case of performing a three-dimensional arrangement, for example, a large movable effect unit (movable effect body can be operated) can be attached to the game board 5. It can contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging the electrical drive source and drive mechanism that can be used, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position.

[7-4. Assembling method of peripheral control unit]
Here, a method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are mounted. The mounting surface 1520x and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are directed toward the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are directed toward the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a. The through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss projections 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. . As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in .

Subsequently, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by , and metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a pan head screw made by the manufacturer and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this way, out of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is restrained from moving vertically and horizontally by being inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached to the cover plate 1501a. Movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is constrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the rear surface side, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for constraining the vertical and horizontal directions. No projecting portion is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are restrained, and the dimensional error caused by such restraint is eliminated. 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are dimensional. This is because it can be absorbed with a sufficient margin.

Subsequently, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are It is inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed in the cover body 1501 are engaged with the base body. It is inserted into U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502 .

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. In the state where the base body 1502 is wrapped around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is covered with a metal (not shown). A metal one-way screw with an anchor rivet inserted is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 . A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed in the cover body 1501 and a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed in the base body 1502 are formed by screwing in the metal one-way screw and expanding the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet toward the outside at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea. The base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in contact with each other (surface contact). The front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y. As described above, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are brought into a conductive state. In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is possible to deter unauthorized actions on the peripheral control board box 1505. is raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) is screwed into each of the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

Subsequently, to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected through the wiring drawer opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 . Metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) when viewed from the front. The engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the side) is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. is inserted and screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix it.

Among the above-described assembling methods, in the procedure for mounting various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is first placed at the above-described predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control substrate 1510. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the rear side of the cover body 1501.) side (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back). The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on (mounting surface) 1520x is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is moved to the predetermined position described above (the peripheral control board 1510 is (located close to the left side of the cover body 1501 when the body 1501 is viewed from the back). Even in such mounting procedures for various substrates, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, errors in the front-rear direction that occur when pushing in the plugs and sockets can be absorbed. 1520 and peripheral control board 1510 can be reliably formed, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines with different game specifications. In this embodiment, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three and attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 stores the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. , and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board dependent on the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 .

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and does not depend on the system of the video signal that is input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 having the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As for the method of the video signal input to the display device such as the effect display device, for example, as described above, there are multiple types of methods such as the RGB method, the LVDS method, the MIPI method, the eDP method, and the clockless method. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these multiple types of systems are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. That is, the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced according to the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 . In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. is adopted, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the video signal system (LVDS system) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the board-to-board connector described above.

In this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side with metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and connected to the same ground. Since it is configured to be the ground (GND), the noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is sent to the board ground (the ground (GND) of various boards) to remove the noise. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "noise countermeasure effect by peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin"). As a result, there is no need to equip each substrate with a dedicated filter for removing such noise, which contributes to cost reduction of each substrate.

Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. These plural circular ventilation holes 1501az can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 as described above, and also have the function of confirming the presence or absence of tampering.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b can be visually recognized, that is, the multidirectional angle In order to confirm the state of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins from the top, they are arranged separately so as to form an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. As a result, modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LEDML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b is maintained in a lighting state when +5 V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied via the interface board 635. , +5V is supplied, it also has a function as a spotlight to brightly illuminate the control ROM 1510b. It can contribute to the improvement of visibility.

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked. An area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) Further, the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the state of the IC pins can be almost confirmed from multiple angles. As a result, modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be performed in a plurality of circular shapes. can be checked through a vent 1501az having a In addition, the LEDML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 is kept lit while +24 V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied via the interface board 635. Originally, it has a function to check (monitor) the state that +24V is supplied, but the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ) 1520x has a function as a spotlight to brightly illuminate the board-to-board connector, so that the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 The special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x can contribute to improving the visibility of the board-to-board connector.

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be checked. A larger area than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530) are distributed and arranged so that As a result, modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be performed using a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az. In addition, the LEDML4, which is arranged near the special connector SCN2, is designed to keep the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Although it has a function, it brightly illuminates the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. By having the function as a spotlight, the board-to-board connector can be visually recognized by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is now possible to contribute to the improvement of sexuality.

A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with the product numbers printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and The SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c1, 1510c2 are designed so that the type and the status of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 and the status of the IC pins can be confirmed from multiple angles. They are arranged separately so as to form an area larger than the shape of 1510c2. As a result, modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Also, the LEDML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state when +12V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied through the interface board 635. Therefore, the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAM 1510c1, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) and the state of the IC pin.

In addition, among the plurality of blades constituting the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN) , the product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. As a result, it is possible to confirm through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a.

In the present embodiment, the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are of a surface mount type with a wide angle of about 120 degrees and of a type with weak directivity. is adopted, it is also suitable for use as lighting. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (cover A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface facing the rear surface of the flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By turning on the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting, the space thus formed can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, LEDML1 to LEDML4 are emitted from the area on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and its surroundings, which face the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Reflecting portions (not shown) are formed to reflect the emitted light and direct it toward the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflecting portions (not shown) may be colored paint having a bright color such as white, or colored paint having gloss, or a metallic sheet having luster may be adhered.

In the vicinity of the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5. , the game balls rub against each other and become charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby becoming a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, other pachinko machines may become noise sources and be affected by noise. Thus, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data A configuration in which the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND) is employed. As a result, noise entering through the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is suppressed by the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the like. Noise can be removed by flowing to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 .

[7-5. Partial foil removal of solid ground]
By the way, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the area other than the area where the wiring pattern for transmitting control signals, the wiring pattern for supplying power, and various land patterns are formed is grounded (GND). , is formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) (also referred to as “solid ground”), and the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 also has wiring patterns for transmitting control signals and wiring patterns for supplying power. , are formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) (also referred to as a "solid ground"), in which the other areas other than the area where various land patterns are formed are grounded (GND). The solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the solid ground (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are different from each other. A plurality of through-holes (both sides (front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of peripheral control board 1510) formed on both surfaces (top (mounting surface) and back (solder surface)) of 1510 (holes (copper The same ground (GND) is established by being electrically connected through a plated hole).

Further, as described above, the base flat plate 1502a does not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 along the lower side of the base plate 1502a at predetermined intervals. Position (that is, each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y. 1510 protruding from the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the connector 1510, the force when inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at a position that does not interfere with the protruding terminals causes the peripheral Elongated disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed in the vertical direction to prevent the control board 1510 from warping and disconnection of the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510. As shown in FIG.

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled and the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 are sealed, as described above, , the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in inscribed (surface contact), and the disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa1 formed on the base body 1502 is formed. 1502aa3 are brought into contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As shown in FIG.

As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side with metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and connected to the same ground. Since it is configured to be the ground (GND), the noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is sent to the board ground (the ground (GND) of various boards) to remove the noise. It is possible to do so.

By the way, the front surfaces of disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 are in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. A solid ground was formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in this contacting portion, and the solid grounding was covered with a resist. A solid ground is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate 1510 and covered with a resist, and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 in the contact portion is covered with a resist without forming a solid ground. 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in the abutting portion was covered with a resist instead of forming a solid ground. .

When electromagnetic wave noise enters through the base body 1502, a high voltage is applied to the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 contacts the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist and enters the solid brand. When electromagnetic wave noise intrudes through such an unexpected route, disconnection prevention ribs are formed on the base body 1502 to form electronic components susceptible to electromagnetic noise and wiring patterns electrically connected to these electronic components. If the front surfaces of the portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are adjacent to the portions in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, malfunction or damage may occur.

Further, electromagnetic wave noise passes through the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts which one of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 on the front side. Since it is not possible to predict whether or not the noise will enter, it is difficult to place electronic components that are susceptible to electromagnetic noise and wiring patterns that are electrically connected to these electronic components away from specific disconnection prevention ribs.

A high voltage is applied to the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, whereby electromagnetic wave noise passes through the resist and becomes solid. When the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 and the solid-state ground are in contact with each other through a resist in order to intrude into the brand, high voltage due to electromagnetic wave noise entering the base body 1502 is applied to the contacting portion. As a result, it is considered that an unnecessary loop wiring is formed through which electromagnetic noise enters from the disconnection prevention rib portion to the solid plane.

Here, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is solid. The shape of the ground will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a diagram showing the shape of the solid ground at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portion formed on the base body contacts the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. is a schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface of the peripheral control board, and a schematic diagram (b) of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

As described above, the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 have an elongated shape in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 209(a), the corresponding positions and their surroundings are, as shown in FIG. 1510yp respectively. In other words, a region where a part of the solid plane is removed (removed) is formed on the lower side of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

In these foil-free areas 1510ya, the distance dimension dg0 between the left side and the left side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to or greater than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the horizontal direction. formed respectively. The length of the distance dimension dg0 between the left side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the left side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg0 between the left side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the left side surfaces of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to the length of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. is 1.5 times longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the horizontal direction.

In addition, in these foil extraction regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side and the right side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is greater than or equal to the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the horizontal direction. Each is formed The length of the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the right side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of the foil extraction region 1510ya and the right side of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to the length of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. is 1.5 times longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the horizontal direction.

In addition, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is greater than or equal to the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the horizontal direction. Each is formed The length of the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the upper side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the upper side surfaces of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to the length of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. is 1.5 times longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the horizontal direction.

That is, by forming the foil extraction area 1510ya on the copper foil surface 1510yp where the solid ground is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, the foil extraction area 1510ya is not electrically connected to the solid ground. It is an insulated area.

When the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, as shown in FIG. is formed. Disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 come into contact with the resist layer 1510yr on the foil extraction region 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. A solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board corresponding to the foil extraction area 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. No foil-punched regions of the same shape are formed.

As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed with metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) to form the same ground ( GND). For this reason, in the present embodiment, noise entering the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is transmitted from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502 through the foil extraction region 1510ya to perform peripheral control. A "route through which noise does not escape" is formed, which cannot penetrate into the solid ground on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate, and the noise penetrates into the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 as described above. Noise can be removed by forming a "noise exiting route" that flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via the metal pan screw.

[7-6. Reuse of peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board, and is a board that does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused).

As described above, the periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is surrounded by circular soldering copper foil (so-called " lands") 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and copper foils for soldering having a circular shape (so-called lands) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 faces the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the mounting surface 1510x is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 to open the mounting boss holes. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are brought into contact with the bearing surface of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw (the bearing surface of the head).

In this way, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan head screw (the seat surface of the head). By reusing the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by repeatedly screwing and removing the metal pan screws. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 rub against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 and come off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. The base of the peripheral control board 1510 rubs against the seat surface of the screw head (the seat surface of the head), and the peripheral control board 1510 comes off from the base material. If the copper foil of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4y on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the board is exposed, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot be reused due to oxidation and poor electrical connectivity. There is a problem of difficulty.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 have They are soldered so that the copper foil is not exposed. This solder electrically connects the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the bearing surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan head screw are electrically connected together. It is covered so that it can be connected. This prevents the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 from rubbing against the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In addition, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from coming off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. The copper foil portions of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are not exposed and can be prevented from being oxidized. It is possible to improve electrical connectivity in a state in which the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. electrical connection between the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw due to the viscosity of can improve the properties.

As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, the noise entering the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is transmitted to the board ground (the ground (GND) of various boards) through the metal pan screw. ), it is possible to stably maintain the noise countermeasure effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin.

Further, in this embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are separated as described above. , are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface is not exposed. As described above, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 come into contact with the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws, so they are soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. If the thickness of the applied solder is not uniform (that is, if there is a portion where the solder rises), the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw will be separated from each other. There is a problem that the contact area is reduced and the electrical connectivity is deteriorated. As described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 serve as mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) for the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, if the thickness of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, is not made uniform (that is, if there is a raised portion of the solder), the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 must be uniform. The contact area between the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the side and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a is reduced, resulting in poor electrical connectivity. There's a problem. It should be noted that if the thickness of the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is not uniform (that is, if there is a raised portion of the solder), the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal round head screw and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the peripheral Distortion of the control board 1510 will occur, and it may cause disconnection of various wiring patterns.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 with which the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw abuts, is A metal mask is placed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510 y of the peripheral control board 1510 , and a squeegee (like a spatula) is used to spread the solder paste on the metal mask. By placing the back surface (solder surface) 1510y in a reflow oven and drying the solder paste with heat, the thickness soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4, is made uniform as the plate thickness of the metal mask. can be done. In addition, the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The foil is formed into a metal mask by placing a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and spreading the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (something like a spatula). The solder paste is applied through the holes, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste. The plate thickness of the metal mask can be made uniform.

[7-7. Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 have their surfaces are soldered so that the copper foil is not exposed, but the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 abuts against the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4, respectively, and is in contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. (Mounting surface) The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the side of 1510x, may be coated with a resist solution and covered. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with the resist solution. be. Even with this configuration, metal pan head screws are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By screwing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 are electrically connected via the metal pan screws. state can be In addition, the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By coating and covering the foil with a resist solution, the thickness of the resist layer coated on the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thickness of the resist layer in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 becomes the same thickness. 1510r4 and inserting metal pan head screws into mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 of the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 contacting the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil, which is the surface of 1510rf4, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee (like a spatula) is used to spread the solder paste on the metal mask. The solder paste is applied through the holes formed in the metal mask, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste with heat. ) can be flowed into the solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. In order not to reduce the area and deteriorate the electrical connectivity, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, should be soldered so that it does not partially bulge. need to be uniform. FIG. 210 is a diagram showing the shape of the resist with respect to the land when the peripheral control board is flowed into the solder bath.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr is formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with a resist solution. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered to areas of a copper foil having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as the “predetermined shape”, resist is applied to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 210(a). A shape in which a plurality of circles having a width are concentrically formed (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width of the resist is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 210(c), a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined length are arranged in a ring around the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. and horizontal lines (the resist may have a predetermined width and only vertical lines may be formed in a plurality of lines spaced apart by a predetermined distance, or the resist may have a predetermined width). 210(d), lines having a predetermined width are separated by a predetermined distance and rise to the right. A shape in which a plurality of lines are formed obliquely (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are spaced apart by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines are formed obliquely downward to the right), and a small circular shape (not shown). An aggregated shape and the like can be mentioned.

In this way, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape is formed by coating part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with the resist solution. Since soldering is made to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as the predetermined shape coated with the resist liquid). 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is not soldered. It can be applied evenly so that it does not swell in one part. The solder thus soldered is applied to the mounting surface (boss surface) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of cover plate 1501a and lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

It should be noted that a predetermined pattern formed by such a resist is applied to a land on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the bearing surface (the bearing surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be performed on the copper foil, which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to Also, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4.

In the above-described embodiment, a metal pan screw was used to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a washer (also referred to as a “chrysanthemum washer”).

In the above-described embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the conductive resin cover 1501, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover flat plate 1501a are formed. are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, and the land 1510rb1 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rb4 and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are brought into contact with each other, so that the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan head screw. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4, and the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected. A metal cover 1501′ may be used instead of the resin cover 1501. FIG. In this case, the base body 1502 closing the opening of the cover body 1501 may be made of conductive resin, or may be made of metal instead of the conductive resin. The wiring cover body 1503 that closes the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae may be made of conductive resin or may be made of metal.

An amplifier board having circuits for amplifying various sounds consumes a large amount of power and generates heat. Therefore, the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or attached to a metal partial case. When the amplifier board is accommodated in the metal board box, the air heated by the heat generated by the amplifier board and the heat of the amplifier board itself are efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal board box. Further, when the amplifier board is attached to the metal partial case, the heat of the amplifier board itself can be efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal partial case.

The amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or is attached to a metal partial case. noise may intrude into the partial case of Therefore, like the peripheral control board 1510 described above (that is, so that the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected), a plurality of amplifier boards formed on the amplifier board The land and the mounting surface (boss surface) of a plurality of mounting boss holes formed on the rear surface side of the metal cover body of the metal board box or the metal partial case are brought into contact with each other. , the plurality of lands formed on the back side (solder side) of the amplifier board and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are brought into contact with each other. The metal cover body or the metal partial case of the board box made of metal is in a state of being electrically connected to a plurality of lands formed on the amplifier board, and the metal cover body or the metal part case of the metal board box The partial case and the ground (GND) of the amplifier board can be electrically connected. In addition, the heat of the amplifier board itself is transferred from the ground (GND) of the amplifier board to the metal cover body of the metal board box or the metal partial case via the metal round head screws, thereby efficiently dissipating the heat to the outside air. can also

In the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501 (flat cover plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan screws. Thus, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 were electrically connected, but it can also be used in a two-story board (so-called "turtle child board"). can. For example, a plurality of lands on the parent board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the parent board, a plurality of lands on the child board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the child board, and a plurality of lands on the parent board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the child board. and multiple lands of the sub-board are screwed to both ends of metal struts (spacers), respectively. can be directly connected. As a result, the ground (GND) of the parent board and the ground (GND) of the child board can be the same ground (GND) via the metal support (spacer).

In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin. If the payout control board box 632 is made of a conductive resin, the main control board box 1320 and the payout control board box 632 must be transparent according to regulations. However, the board box for housing the power supply board and the various relay board boxes for housing various relay boards are made of conductive resin, and the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the peripheral control board box. It may be fixed in the same way. In this way, the same noise countermeasure effect as the above-described peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin can be obtained for the board box that houses the power board and various relay board boxes that house various relay boards. can.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with the peripheral control unit 1500. A board-to-board connector by a special connector SCN1 and a special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a board-to-board connector by a special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. By arranging it near the center of 552 , it can be arranged away from the tank rail 553 . As described above, the tank rail 553 has a plurality of notches 553aa formed on its lower side (lower rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front) to the outside through the metal powder of the game ball B. can be dropped, by arranging the board-to-board connector away from the tank rail 553, the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B in the board-to-board connector can be prevented. can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inter-board connectors, and the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected. A board-to-board connector by means of a special connector SCN4 is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). As shown in FIG. 206, when the connector 1500 is attached, the area above the board-to-board connector can be reduced by arranging it to be long in the vertical direction. The area of adhesion can be minimized. When the above-described board-to-board connector is arranged to be long in the horizontal direction, the upper area of the board-to-board connector becomes large, so that the area on which dust, metallic powder, etc., adheres is greatly increased. Become. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are elongated in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. As described above, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac becomes Even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN9 are inserted by the protruding wall of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plugs are hidden and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Even if dust, metallic powder, etc. adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN1 to CN9. there is In order to prevent dust, metallic powder, etc. from adhering to the respective electrical terminals, the direction in which the above-described board-to-board connector is arranged, the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged, is selected.

In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 has the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 plugs, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has the special connector SCN3 socket, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 has the special connector SCN4 socket. However, they may be arranged so that the direction in which information or signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and correspondingly, the side that receives information or signals can be a socket (or plug). For example, in the above-described embodiment, various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. The ROM board 1520 is on the transmitting side and the peripheral control board 1510 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a socket) that serves as a plug, and the peripheral control board 1510 has a special connector (or a socket that serves as a plug). a special connector) can be provided. In the above-described embodiment, since the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a plurality of types of video signal formats to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is on the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that becomes a socket), and correspondingly, if the liquid crystal output board 1530 becomes a socket, it becomes a special connector (or a plug). special connector).

In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, cover side walls 1501b to 1501az provided on the upper, left, lower and right sides of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. Except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in one or a combination thereof. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate 1510a may be combined to form a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az. . Even with this configuration, foreign matter produced by the game ball B (for example, metal powder produced by abrasion of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by falling foreign matter onto various boards in the peripheral control board box 1505 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to falling foreign matter from the tank rail 553 . The reason why the ventilation holes 1501az are not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation holes 1501az were formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 would be exposed to the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the box 1505 and enters the various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because the probability of trouble occurring is increased.

In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501az provided on the upper, left, lower and right sides of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover side wall 1501e except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. By doing so, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the bottom side, and the right side, respectively, thereby contributing to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505. FIG. The reason why the ventilation holes 1501az are not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side were formed with the ventilation holes 1501az, through the ventilation holes 1501az, Foreign matter produced by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 and enters, causing the peripheral control board box 1505 to fall onto various boards. This is because there is a high probability that an electrical trouble will occur due to foreign matter.

[8. control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, and each control is shared. It is The main control board 1310 can control game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 is capable of controlling the progress of the effects, and includes a peripheral control unit 1511 capable of controlling various effects during the game based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control unit. and an effect display control unit 1512 capable of controlling the display of effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on various commands from 1511 . The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a capable of controlling the payout of the game ball B, etc., and a launch control unit 633b capable of controlling the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182. there is

[8-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 capable of controlling the progress of the game is housed in the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. For convenience of explanation, the board holder 1200 is connected to the board holder 1200 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. The surface opposite to the front side of the main control board 1310 facing the rear surface (that is, the rear side) is sometimes referred to as the "surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310" on which electronic components are mounted. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game has a green coating film (hereinafter referred to as A green resist layer is formed by this method, which controls the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that stores various processing programs such as a main control program that controls game operations to be executed later, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., and various sensors A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a predetermined A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage applied, a RAM clear switch 1310f having a press operation part for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, It has The main control MPU 1310 a is operated by a high-frequency circuit of a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided on the main control board 1310 .

Main control MPU 1310a, main control input circuit 1310b, main control output circuit 1310c, main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, RAM clear switch 1310f, various connectors, etc. The DIP type electronic component is mounted, and the through hole has a mounting surface side land through which various terminal pins of the DIP type electronic component are inserted, and a through hole having a mounting surface side land through which the DIP type electronic component is not inserted. Along with the holes being formed, a green resist layer is formed with a solid green resist over the entire area except for the mounting surface side lands and through holes. In addition, on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310, solder surface side lands corresponding to the through holes are formed, and the entire area excluding the solder surface side lands and through holes is coated with solid green resist. A green resist layer is formed. The mounting surface side lands, the through holes, and the soldering surface side lands are electrically connected. The mounting surface side lands are electrically connected to the mounting surface side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and the soldering surface side lands are formed on the rear surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310. It is electrically connected to the solder surface side wiring pattern to be applied. When various terminal pins of DIP type electronic components are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 into the through holes having the mounting surface side lands, the rear surface of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the inserted through holes. The DIP type electronic component is fixed to the main control board 1310 by soldering the protruding terminal pins and the solder surface side lands. state. In this way, the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are coated with a green resist liquid to form a green coating film (that is, a solid green resist layer formed by a green resist layer). are formed, but the mounting surface side lands, the through holes, and the soldering surface side lands are not covered with the green paint film at all. A plurality of rows are arranged opposite each other, and the game balls heated to a high temperature by polishing are supplied to the pachinko machine 1, and the heat released from the pachinko machine 1 is also added to create a closed space called an island facility. In order to prevent the main control board 1310, which is an important board that controls the progress of the game, from being affected by heat and causing thermal runaway due to the internal temperature rising, the mounting surface side land, through hole, and solder The copper foil portion of the surface-side land is exposed, thereby improving the heat radiation efficiency of the main control board 1310 and contributing to the prevention of thermal runaway of the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a to identify the individual (a unique code that exists only in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "internal reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and if the contents of the register change to inconsistent contents, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly affected by electrical noise. This is the reset circuit. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and disabled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is applied without executing the main control side power-off processing described later, and the main control side power-on processing described later is executed again. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power failure processing has not been executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( cleared). In addition, even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in a started state.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in hardware Random number circuit”) is built in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and the clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without overlapping, and the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When all the values of are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a jackpot judgment random number. is set as

On the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, in addition to the RAM clear switch 1310f, the attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as the part number of the surface-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is arranged (and further , the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation of the front-side electronic components (mounting direction), and the model number of the front-side electronic components.) is green. It is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist with a white paint that stands out against the background. A pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is exposed from a transparent main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 . Since the main control board 1310 is provided on the rear side of the game board 5, it is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Also, since the main control board 1310 is provided on the rear side of the game board 5, the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the main control board 1310 is also arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various sensors are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, so that the various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground of the main control substrate 1310). A main control output circuit with a reset function that has a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which various signals are input for output to the substrate, etc., and a reset function that does not have a reset terminal. and a main control output circuit without a reset function. The main control output circuit with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with a reset function outputs signals based on the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by resetting the main control system. is configured as a circuit that does not output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without a reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. by resetting the main control system. It is configured as a circuit that outputs from its various output terminals.

A first starting hole sensor 3052 for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting hole 2002, a gate sensor 2801 for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate part 2003, and a game ball B received in the second starting hole 2004. 2nd start opening sensor 2401 for detecting, general winning opening sensor 3051 for detecting game ball B received in general winning opening 2001, first big winning opening for detecting game ball B received in first big winning opening 2005 A mouth sensor 2402, a second big winning hole sensor 2601 for detecting a game ball B received in a second big winning hole 2006, an out hole sensor 3053 for detecting a game ball B received in an out hole 2010, and a first sub-out hole. A first sub-out port sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2011, a second sub-out port sensor 3054 that detects the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012, and illegal magnetism in the game area 5a. Detected signals from the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function, thereby driving the main control solenoid from the main control output circuit with reset function. By outputting a control signal to the circuit 1310d, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d outputs a drive signal to the starting solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2612, etc. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of to the main control output circuit with reset function, from the main control output circuit with reset function to the function display unit 1400 status indicator, normal symbol display, normal hold display, first special Design indicator, first special reserved number indicator, second special pattern indicator, second special reserved number indicator, round indicator, etc. to output respective drive signals.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a, by outputting various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function, payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit with reset function By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the main control with reset function by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the output circuit to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In this embodiment, the first start sensor 3052, the second start sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first grand prize sensor 2402, the second grand prize sensor 2601, and the outlet sensor 3053 While contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used, the general prize winning opening sensor 3051, the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, and the second sub-out opening sensor 3054 are contact type ON/OFF mechanical switches. I am using a switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, and the gate portion 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 3052, the second starting hole sensor 2401, and Detection of game ball B by gate sensor 2801 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starter sensor 3052, the second starter sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801. FIG.

In addition, when an advantageous game state (“jackpot” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are opened and the game ball B enters frequently. , The detection of the game ball B by the first big winning hole sensor 2402 and the second big winning hole sensor 2601 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the first big winning slot sensor 2402 and the second big winning slot sensor 2601 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3051 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning hole sensor 3051 .

Furthermore, since the game ball B frequently enters the out port 2010, the out port sensor 3053 uses a proximity switch with high durability and long life. On the other hand, since the game ball B does not enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012 frequently, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switch. is used.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function, whereby the payout control board 633 is sent from the main control output circuit without reset function. Sends various commands as serial data to When the payout control board 633 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs to the main control board 1310 a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the main control MPU 11310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. A signal (main payment ACK signal) is output to the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit with a reset function.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510 .

Various voltages (DC +24 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 . A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. described.). This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal ( RAM clear signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b, and with this as a trigger, the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) by the main control MPU 1310a. It's like This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the main control output circuit without reset function, and is also output to the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit without reset function.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with DC +12V and DC +24V from the power supply board 630, and monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these DC +12V and DC +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of DC +12V and DC +24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 1310a. While being input to the input terminal, the main control board 1310 (output via the main control output circuit 1310c), and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa through the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 4110 is entered in In addition to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, the power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display device 1600, and furthermore, from the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635, the door frame 3 are input to various substrates and the like attached to the . It should be noted that the power failure warning signal may be configured so as not to be input to various substrates or the like attached to the door frame 3 .

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to two power lines, a power line to which DC +12V is supplied (+12V power line) and a power line to which DC +24V is supplied (+24V power line). By monitoring the voltages individually, signs of power interruptions such as power outages or momentary power outages can be more accurately grasped than in the case of monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line. is now possible.

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is provided on the main control board 1310 as described above, but is supplied with DC +12V and DC +24V from the power supply board 630, and these DC +12V and DC +12V are supplied. Since signs of +24V power failure or momentary power failure are monitored, it may be provided on the power supply board 630 instead of the main control board 1310 . In this way, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e does not have to be provided on the main control board 1310, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is not required each time the game board 5 is manufactured, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

[8-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633, which controls the discharge of game balls B, controls the delivery of the game balls B, and the like, is detachably attached to the rear side of the transparent power board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c. It is accommodated in the board box 632, and for the sake of explanation, the surface opposite to the front side of the payout control board 633 facing the rear surface of the power supply board cover 631 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front (that is, the rear side) It may be described as "the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633" on which electronic components are mounted. The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game ball B, has a green coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as “solid coating”) formed by applying a green resist liquid to its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface). A green resist layer is formed by a green resist layer, and a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a firing control by a firing solenoid 542, and a ball feed solenoid 145. A firing control unit 633b that performs ball feed control, an error LED display 633c that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an error release having a pressing operation unit for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display 633c. and a switch 633d.

On the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633, a payout control unit 633a, a launch control unit 633b, an error LED indicator 633c, an error release switch 633d, various connectors, and other DIP type electronic components are mounted. , a through hole having a mounting surface side land through which various terminal pins of a DIP type electronic component are inserted and a through hole having a mounting surface side land through which the DIP type electronic component is not inserted are formed, and the mounting surface side land and the through hole are formed. A green resist layer is formed of a solid green resist over the entire area except for the through holes. In addition, on the rear surface (solder surface) of the payout control board 633, solder surface side lands corresponding to the through holes are formed, and the entire area excluding the solder surface side lands and through holes is coated with solid green resist. A green resist layer is formed. The mounting surface side lands, the through holes, and the soldering surface side lands are electrically connected. The mounting surface side land is electrically connected to the mounting surface side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the dispensing control board 633, and the soldering surface side land is formed on the rear surface (solder surface) of the dispensing control board 633. It is electrically connected to the solder surface side wiring pattern to be applied. When various terminal pins of DIP type electronic components are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633 into through holes having mounting surface side lands, the through holes that are inserted and the corresponding back surface of the payout control board 633 The DIP type electronic component is fixed to the payout control board 633 by soldering the protruding terminal pins and the solder surface side lands. state. In this way, the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the payout control board 633 are coated with a green resist liquid to form a green coating film (that is, a green resist layer formed by solidly coating a green resist). are formed, but the mounting surface side lands, the through holes, and the soldering surface side lands are not covered with the green paint film at all. A plurality of rows are arranged opposite each other, and the game balls heated to a high temperature by polishing are supplied to the pachinko machine 1, and the heat released from the pachinko machine 1 is also added to create a closed space called an island facility. In order to prevent the payout control board 633, which is an important board for controlling the payout of game balls, from thermal runaway due to the influence of heat due to the increase in the temperature inside, the mounting surface side land, through hole, and The copper foil portion of the land on the solder side is exposed, which contributes to the prevention of thermal runaway of the payout control board 633 by enhancing the heat dissipation efficiency of the payout control board 633 .

On the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633, in addition to the error release switch 633d, attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as the part number of the surface-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is arranged (further , the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation of the front-side electronic components (mounting direction), and the model number of the front-side electronic components.) is green. It is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist with a white paint that stands out against the background. A pressing operation portion of the error release switch 633d is exposed from the transparent payout control board box 632 that accommodates the payout control board 633 . Since the payout control board 633 is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Further, since the payout control board 633 is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, the error release switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is also arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

[8-2-1. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and controls the game media payout operation which is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on. A payout control MPU 633aa, which is a microprocessor containing various processing programs including a payout control program to be controlled, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., and detection signals from various sensors related to payout are input. a payout control input circuit 633ab, a payout control output circuit 633ac for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, a payout motor drive circuit 633ad for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580, It has

The payout control MPU 633aa includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”), and its operation ( A watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in WDT") that monitors the system) and a function to prevent fraud are also built-in.

The payout control input circuit 633ab is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 633ab does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset, so that the various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

The payout control output circuit 633ac is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (the board ground of the payout control board 633), and various signals are sent to its various input terminals. A payout control output circuit with a reset function that has a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which various signals are input for output to the board etc., and a reset function that does not have a reset terminal and a payout control output circuit without a reset function. The payout control output circuit with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the payout control output circuit with a reset function outputs various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like. is configured as a circuit that does not output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit without reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board etc. by the payout control system reset, so that the signal based on that information is It is configured as a circuit that outputs from its various output terminals.

A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guide unit 570, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, and a dispensing detection of the dispensing device 580. A detection signal from the sensor 591 and a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

A detection signal from the door frame open switch for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and a detection signal from the main body frame open switch for detecting opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to a payout control input circuit. 633ab, it is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa.

Also, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received by the serial data method at the input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. Moreover, the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f from the main control board 1310 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

When the payout control MPU 633aa completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs a payout control signal with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit with reset function.

In addition, the payout control MPU 633aa transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the circuit to the main control board 1310 . When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 633 to that effect. This signal (primary payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

In addition, the payout control MPU 633aa drives from the payout control output circuit with reset function by outputting a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function. A signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 633ad, and a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 633ad to the payout motor 584, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the state of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the error LED indicator 633c. By outputting the drive signal for display to the payout control output circuit with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function to the error LED indicator 633c.

The error LED indicator 633d is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 633d include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it is notified that there is no game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is a "ball ball" (specifically Specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout blade 589 is engaged with the game ball B to notify that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate), and the number "3" is displayed. If it is, it informs that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 is malfunctioning based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and the number "5" is displayed. When the number "6" is displayed, it informs that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the fact that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates "full (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154, the lower tray 202 is full with game balls B stored), and the number "7" is displayed. When it is set, it informs that it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is disconnected in any part from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1). , when the number "9" is displayed, the fact that it is "stocked (with prize balls stocked (not paid out))" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has been reached).

In addition, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs the number of game balls B actually put out as prize balls from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function, thereby performing payout control with reset function. The number of game balls actually put out as prize balls is output from the output circuit to the external terminal plate 558 via a resistor (not shown).

In addition, the payout control board 633 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 558 via resistors (not shown). The external terminal plate 558 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers not shown (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). ), the number of game balls B and various information (game information, contents of errors related to the payout operation of game balls or the fact that there was an error) are communicated to the hall computer installed in the game ball B. The external terminal board 558 and the hall computer are in a state of being electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers. The computer is designed not to malfunction or break down, and it is possible to control the main control board 1310 that can progress the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, payouts, etc. Abnormal voltage is applied to the payout control board 633 and the peripheral control board 1510, which can control the progress of the performance, to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer grasps the number of game balls B actually paid out as prize balls by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like, thereby obtaining the payout information of the game balls B by the payout operation of the pachinko machine 1. , ball output information) and the game played by the player.

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. . The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner. It is designed to be input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining degree of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a remaining degree display signal to the ball rental operation unit 220. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display section of the rental operation unit 220 .

Various voltages (DC +24 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the payout control board 633 . The power board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 has a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when power is cut off, as described above. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 633aa in addition to the main control MPU 1310a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) is Through the payout control input circuit 633ab, it is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa, and is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM by the payout control MPU 633aa. there is

[8-2-2. Launch control unit]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors related to firing are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and a clock signal based on this clock signal. A firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a firing solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on this firing reference pulse, and a firing reference. and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the pulse. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, the launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , to generate a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and output it to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. Triggered by the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to move. One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

[8-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 1510 has a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution on its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) (hereinafter simply referred to as “solid green resist”). ) forms a green resist layer, and as shown in FIG. It also has the function of the effect display control unit 1512 described above, which can control the display of effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on various commands from the control unit 1511, and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, A peripheral control IC 1510a in which a sound source, a SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. are integrated on a single semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b that stores in advance various schedule data that defines the progress of various programs and effects, and a peripheral data ROM. An SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing various control information (peripheral data) stored in a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the substrate 1520, and a slide-type volume adjustment capable of adjusting the volume. It has a switch 1510d, a backup power supply 1510e capable of supplying power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is off, a power supply generating circuit (not shown) for generating various power supply voltages, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). ing. Examples of various I/O interfaces include various serial I/O ports, various parallel I/O ports, and the like.

A peripheral control IC 1510a, a control ROM 1510b, an SDRAM 1510c, a volume control switch 1510d, a backup power supply 1510e, a power source generation circuit (not shown), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown), various connectors, etc. are formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Surface mount (SMD) type electronic components are mounted, pads to which various terminals of surface mount (SMD) type electronic components are soldered, through holes with mounting surface side lands (that is, various terminals of electronic components A green resist layer is formed with solid green resist over the entire area except for the pads, mounting surface side lands, and through holes. . In addition, on the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510, back-side lands corresponding to the through-holes are formed, and a green resist layer is formed with a solid green resist over the entire area excluding the back-side lands and through-holes. It is The mounting surface side lands, the through holes, and the back surface side lands are electrically connected. The mounting-surface-side lands are electrically connected to the mounting-surface-side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 , and the back-side lands are electrically connected to the back-side wiring pattern on the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 . properly connected. Various terminals of a surface mount (SMD) type electronic component are arranged on pads formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the various terminals and the pads are soldered to form surface mount (SMD) components. type electronic components are fixed to the peripheral control board 1510 . In this way, the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 are coated with a green resist liquid to form a green coating film (that is, a green resist layer is formed by solidly coating the green resist). However, in addition to the pads, the mounting surface side lands, the through holes, and the back side lands are not covered at all with the green coating film.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stores various control information (peripheral data) to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Since the transfer rate between the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is 2 Gbps, the control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed. . The control information (peripheral data) includes image data such as background images, character images, pattern images, etc. for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided for the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, turning off, etc.) of various LEDs to be mounted, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc. Various types provided for the door frame 3 and the game board 5 It is driving data and the like for driving and controlling the movable effect body.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information associated with processing or delete the information. In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system, based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 to proceed with the effect. .

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b. Various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are read out according to the schedule data, and control is performed to draw images on the effect display device 1600, and various LED light emission modes according to various effects are performed. Various performances are progressed by performing control such that sound such as music and sound effects in accordance with various performances flows.

The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and generates drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. and control to output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . This drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output board 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. FIG. When the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a becomes ready to receive the screen data defining the configuration of the screen, it notifies the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a by outputting a V blank signal.

The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, generates and outputs the sound data, thereby generating vibration speakers provided in the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the like. 354, the top central speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played in accordance with various presentations. When a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, this volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4, outputs an acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to provide a sound effect (sound performance) with a more realistic feeling than before.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands, and stores the read schedule data. SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 store various game board side emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals for full-color LEDs and monochromatic color LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the game board 5. and send it to each decoration board of the game board 5 from various serial I / O ports via the effect drive board 1720, various drive motors and various drive solenoids provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 Various game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the game board side electric drive source such as are read from SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 and transmitted from various serial I / O ports to the effect drive board 1720, door A door frame side electrical drive source such as an operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the frame 3 and an operation button elevation drive motor 367 (including a drive solenoid if the door frame 3 side is provided with a drive solenoid). Output various door frame side drive data for outputting drive signals to, lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals for full color LEDs and single color LEDs etc. provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 Various kinds of door frame side light emission data are read out from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted to the door frame 3 side from various serial I/O ports.

Detection signals from various detection sensors provided in various effect units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the panel drive board 1720 and the peripheral control input circuit. It is In addition, the detection signal from the press detection sensor 381 of the production operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3, the detection signal from the lifting detection sensor 382, the detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 Detection signals from are received (inputted) to various serial I/O ports (or may be various parallel I/O ports) of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. Also, signals from the air cooling fan FAN that transmit the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. .

The peripheral control IC 1510a has an external WDT (watch dog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is running out of control.

[9. power supply system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213. FIG. FIG. 212 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko game machine, and FIG. 213 is a block diagram continuing from FIG. First, the power supply board will be described, followed by a description of a backup power supply, power supply to each control board, etc., and a method of fixing fuses. The board ground (GND) of various boards and the board ground (GND) of various terminal plates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 and are the same ground (GND).

[9-1. Power board]
The power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the board unit 620 shown in FIGS. 95 and 96 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is connected to the power outlet of the island equipment of the game hall. plugged in. In the island facilities of game halls, a system is normally adopted in which AC power (AC 24V) is supplied to one transformer as a group of, for example, four pachinko machines 1 . For example, in an island facility of a game hall where 20 pachinko machines 1 are installed in one row, four pachinko machines 1 are managed as five groups, and one transformer is provided for each group. Since a system is adopted in which AC power (AC 24V) is supplied (by a total of five transformers), each transformer is provided with a maximum allowable capacity of 1000VA.

When the power switch 630a is turned on, AC power (AC 24V) supplied from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power board 630, and the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on. is turned off, AC power (AC 24V) supplied from the island facilities of the game hall is no longer supplied to the power supply board 630, and the pachinko machine 1 can be powered off. The power switch 630a is normally kept in an ON state, and when a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall starts operating, the breaker installed in the game hall is turned on (turned on) to turn on the island of the game hall. A plurality of pachinko machines 1 installed in a facility are turned on all at once. After the end of the business, a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall turns off (turns off) a breaker installed in the game hall to simultaneously cut off the power supply of the pachinko machines 1 arranged in a plurality of rows on the island facilities of the game hall. conduct. For this reason, among the pachinko machines 1 arranged in a row on the island facility of the game hall, when turning on or off the power of each of the pachinko machines 1 individually, for example, a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall performs maintenance. When the power switch 630a is turned off at times, and when the power switch 630a is turned on again after the maintenance is finished, the pachinko machine 1 in which some kind of trouble has occurred is dealt with by a store clerk in the game hall or the like in order to solve the trouble. A staff member turns off the power switch 630a, and when the trouble is resolved, turns on the power switch 630a again.

As shown in FIG. 212, the power supply board 630 includes, in addition to a power switch 630a, fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power breakdown circuit 630g, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply It has a production circuit 630f and a backup power supply circuit 630h. The AC power supply (24V AC (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V")) supplied from the island facilities of the game hall is supplied to the interface board via the power supply board 630 regardless of whether the power switch 630a is ON/OFF. 635 and supplied from this interface board 635 to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 .

When the power switch 630a is turned on, the AC 24V supplied from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and the power switch 630a, and noise is generated in the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. removed. The noise-removed AC 24V is supplied to the rectifier circuit 630c, where it is rectified (converted from alternating current to direct current (AC-DC conversion)) to become a direct current power supply. This rectified DC power supply is supplied to a power factor correction circuit 630d via a power breakdown circuit 630g, and a power factor corrected DC +35V (hereinafter referred to as "+35V") is created in the power factor correction circuit 630d. be done. The generated +35V is supplied to the smoothing circuit 630e, where the +35V ripple is removed and smoothed. This smoothed +35V is supplied to the power generation circuit 630f. When the voltage supplied to itself exceeds a predetermined voltage, the power supply breaking circuit 630g causes the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to flow a large current exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current (predetermined breaking current) to melt and cut the fuses from the island equipment of the game hall. It electrically disconnects the supplied AC24V. When a large current (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current (breaking current) flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the element parts of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are fused and the AC 24V to the succeeding fuses is supplied through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. block the

The power generation circuit 630f supplied with the smoothed +35V includes a +5V power generation circuit 630fa, a +12V power generation circuit 630fb, and a +24V power generation circuit 630fc. The +5V power generation circuit 630fa generates DC +5V (hereinafter referred to as "+5V") from +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. The +12V power generation circuit 630fb generates DC +12V (hereinafter referred to as "+12V") from +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. The +24V power generation circuit 630fc generates DC +24V (hereinafter referred to as "+24V") from the +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. +5V, +12V, and +24V are supplied to the payout control board 633 and the interface board 635, respectively. The power supply system to which +5V is applied and supplied by the power supply board 630 is the +5V power supply line, the power supply system to which +12V is applied and supplied by the power supply board 630 is the +12V power supply line, and the power supply board 630 is formed. A +24V power line is a power supply system to which +24V is applied and supplied.

[9-2. Backup power]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") built in main control MPU 1310a of main control board 1310, and capacitor BC1 controls payout control in payout control board 633. A backup power source is supplied to the RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") built in the payout control MPU 633aa of the unit 633a.

+5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f is supplied to the payout control board 633 . +5V supplied to the payout control board 633 becomes +5V power supply line in the payout control board 633 through the payout control filter circuit 633h, is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU633aa, payout control built-in RAM through the diode PD0 is applied to the power supply terminals of the +12V generated by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. This +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V from +12V from the payout control board 633 as a local power source to be the control power source of the main control MPU 1310a. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "main control board side generated +5V") passes through the main control filter circuit 1310h and the main control board side generated +5V power supply in the main control board 1310. line, which is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. The +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 (+5V generated on the main control board side) are electrically are not physically connected and are independent of each other.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 633, and the payout It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 633. FIG. That is, the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f in the power supply substrate 630 flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, and the power supply of the payout control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode PD0 A current flows toward the terminal and the positive terminal of capacitor BC1. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f in the power supply substrate 630, and the payout control substrate 633 returns to the power supply substrate 630 again. With such a connection method, +5V can be supplied and charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f is no longer supplied to the payout control board 633, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 633 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa because it is blocked by the diode PD0, the payout control MPU 633aa does not operate, but the payout VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. The storage contents of the payout control built-in RAM are held by.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. , and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 on the main control board 1310 . That is, the +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g (+5V generated on the main control board side) flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction due to the diode MD0. , and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. Thus, the capacitor BC0 is an electrical connection method in which +5V (+5V generated by the main control board side) generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the power supply board 630. Therefore, +5 V generated on the main control board side is supplied and can be charged. As a result, the +12V generated by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f in the power supply substrate 630 is no longer supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 633, and the +5V generation circuit 1310g is +5V. (main control board side creation +5V), the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 as the main VBB. Therefore, although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main control MPU 1310a is blocked by the diode MD0 and the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The stored contents of the built-in RAM are held.

[9-3. Power supply supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline about the power supply supplied to each control board etc. is demonstrated, Then, the power supply mainly supplied to a payout control board, and the power supply supplied to a main control board are demonstrated.

The three types of power supplies of +5V, +12V, and +24V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa, +12V power generation circuit 630fb, and +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply substrate 630 are as shown in FIG. In addition, it is supplied to the payout control board 633 , and among these three types of power supplies, two power supplies of +12V and +24V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 . The three types of power sources, +5V, +12V, and +24V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa, the +12V power generation circuit 630fb, and the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f in the power supply substrate 630, are supplied to the interface substrate 635. It is also supplied to the peripheral control board 1510, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothes relay board 105, etc. through the interface board 635, respectively.

Three types of power supplies of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., respectively, are melted down by overcurrent flowing to these power lines. A +5V fuse (not shown), a +12V fuse (not shown), and a +24V fuse (not shown) may be provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, and the like.

In particular, the +12V power line and the +24V power line are monitored for potential drop by a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, as will be described later. When the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the payout control MPU 63aa of the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a executes the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described later. The payout control MPU 633aa stops the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) by performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later. It will be done.

Therefore, when the +12V fuse (not shown) and the +24V fuse (not shown) are provided in the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., the main control board 1310 constituting the main board , when the payout control board 633 is operating normally, the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame main relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 105, etc. Due to electrical trouble for some reason in the relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., a leakage current or a short circuit may occur, and the interface board 635 and the door frame main relay board 104 , +12V fuses and +24V fuses provided in the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc. are blown when an overcurrent flows through the door frame clothing relay board 105 and the like. be able to. This suppresses the decrease in the potential of the +12V power line and the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the power failure warning signal is the main control by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. No output to the MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 63aa is required, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the processing when the power is turned off on the main control side in the processing when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later. The control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later.

The three types of power supplies of +5V, +12V and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are supplied to the effect drive board via +5V fuse SF5, +12V fuse SF12 and +24V fuse SF24, as shown in FIG. 1720 respectively. The +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the effect drive board 1720 via the +12V fuse SF12, and is also supplied to the effect display device 1600 via the +12V fuse SF12 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is That is, the liquid crystal output board 1530 relays +12V supplied through the +12V fuse SF12 of the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display device.

The +5V fuse SF5 takes into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the +5V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the current used by subsequent boards such as the effect drive board 1720 via the peripheral control board 1510. The capacity is set in advance, and the current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the +5V power supply line peripheral control board (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the +5V power supply line peripheral control board flows through the +5V fuse SF5, the element part of the +5V fuse SF5 melts and the +5V fuse SF5 is supplied to the following. +5V power supply line.

The +12V fuse SF12 is the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the +12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510, and the subsequent boards such as the performance drive board 1720 and various decoration boards of the game board 5 via the peripheral control board 1510. The current used in the peripheral control board 1510 and the current used in subsequent devices such as the effect display device 1600 via the peripheral control board 1510 are taken into account to set the capacity in advance, and the +12V power line peripheral control board allowable current Current can flow up to the upper limit (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power line peripheral control board flows through the +12V fuse SF12, the element part of the +12V fuse SF12 melts and the +12V fuse SF12 is supplied to the following. +12V power supply line.

The capacity of the +24V fuse SF24 is preset in consideration of the current used in subsequent boards such as the effect drive board 1720 via the peripheral control board 1510 in the +24V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510, and +24V. Current can flow up to the allowable current upper limit (breaking current) of the power line peripheral control board. In addition, when a +24 V system driver circuit is provided as an electrical drive source (for example, a drive solenoid) using +24 V in the peripheral control board 1510, the capacity of the +24 V fuse SF24 is the capacitance of the +24 V power supply line. The current used by itself and the current used by subsequent boards such as the effect drive board 1720 through the peripheral control board 1510 are taken into account and set in advance. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power supply line peripheral control board flows through the +24V fuse SF24, the element part of the +24V fuse SF24 melts, and the +24V fuse SF24 is supplied to the following. +24V power supply line.

Note that the +5V fuse SF5, +12V fuse SF12, and +24V fuse SF24 are the main source of supply of the +5V power line, +12V power line, and +24V power line from the peripheral control board 1510 to the subsequent boards such as the effect drive board 1720. Since it is a fuse, the current flowing is large and it may generate heat. Therefore, it is placed away from electronic components such as the peripheral control IC 1510a so as not to cause a failure due to the thermal shutdown built into the IC due to the influence of this heat. near the connector to which +5V, +12V and +24V are supplied from the interface board 635 (in particular, near the connector of the terminal to which the power supply line to which +5V, +12V and +24V are supplied from the interface board 635 is connected). ).

The peripheral control board 1510 controls to create DC 3.3V (hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") as a local power source for controlling the peripheral control IC 1510a from +12V supplied through the +12V fuse SF12. A power generation circuit 1510z is provided. The +3.3 V generated by the control power supply generation circuit 1510z is supplied to the peripheral control IC 1510a (integrated on one semiconductor chip as the peripheral control IC 1510a, CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA) via the control power supply fuse SF3. Controller, various I/O interfaces, etc.), and the local power source of the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the peripheral control data ROM board 1520 . The +3.3 V generated by the control power generation circuit 1510z becomes the +3.3 V power line on the peripheral control board 1510 and the +3.3 V power line on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via the control power supply fuse SF3. The control power generation circuit 1510z is supplied with a +5V power line through a +5V fuse SF5 and/or a +24V fuse SF24, except for the +12V power line through a +12V fuse SF12. Even if an abnormal current flows to the +24V power supply line and fuses, +12V from the +12V power supply line can be used to generate +3.3V, which is a local power supply that serves as a control power supply for the peripheral control IC 1510a. The control IC 1510a does not stop and continues to operate, and if the +24V fuse SF24 is blown, it becomes difficult to drive the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid), but the performance continues. can do.

In addition to +3.3 V, the control power supply generation circuit 1510z also includes a plurality of control power supplies corresponding to each device such as the control ROM 1510b and SDRAM 1510c of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM 1520a of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 as local power supplies. (For example, DC 1.5V (hereinafter referred to as “+1.5V”), DC 1.25V (hereinafter referred to as “+1.25V”), etc.) may be generated. In this case, the control power supply fuse SF3 is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of control power supplies (for example, a +3.3V fuse for +3.3V and a +1.5V fuse for +1.5V). and +1.5V fuses for +1.25V, respectively. Through the +3.3V fuse, it becomes a +3.3V power supply line, through the +1.5V fuse, it becomes a +1.5V power supply line, and +1 +1.25V power supply line via a .25V fuse).

The control power supply fuse SF3 takes into consideration the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via the peripheral control board 1510 in the +3.3V power supply line. The capacity is set in advance, and the current can flow up to the +3.3V power supply line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the control board peripheral to the +3.3V power supply line flows through the control power fuse SF3, the element portion of the control power fuse SF3 melts, and the current flows through the control power fuse SF3. Cut off the +3.3V power supply line to the succeeding supply. When the control power supply fuse SF3 is provided corresponding to each of a plurality of control power supplies (for example, a +3.3V fuse for +3.3V, a +1.5V fuse for +1.5V, and a +1.5V fuse for +1.5V), 25V with +1.25V fuses), the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 through the peripheral control board 1510 This current and its capacity are set in advance in consideration of this current, and the current can flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (breaking current) of the control board peripheral to the power supply line of each of the plurality of control power sources. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the power supply line peripheral control board flows, the element part of the control power supply fuse SF3 provided corresponding to each of the plurality of control power supplies melts, and the melted control power supply fuse Cut off the power line of the control power supplied to the following via SF3.

The control power supply fuse SF3 is the main fuse of the +3.3V power supply line that serves as the control power supply for the peripheral control IC 1510a and the like. In order to prevent troubles due to thermal shutdown built into the peripheral control IC 1510a, it is preferable to place it away from electronic components such as the peripheral control IC 1510a. and +3.3 near the terminal supplied as the power supply line).

In this embodiment, the +5V fuse SF5, +12V fuse SF12, +24V fuse SF24, and control power supply fuse SF3 of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses, and are predetermined. When the current exceeds the allowable current upper limit (predetermined breaking current for each), it will blow. It is an electronic component that cannot be supplied. The +5V fuse SF5, +12V fuse SF12, +24V fuse SF24, and control power fuse SF3 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be lead type fuses instead of SMD type chip fuses. As the +5V fuse SF5, +12V fuse SF12, +24V fuse SF24, and control power fuse SF3 of the peripheral control board 1510, resettable fuses such as SMD type or lead type thermistors may be used. In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power supply line cannot be supplied to the succeeding fuse, but when the current drops, the succeeding fuse can be supplied again. A power line can be supplied to it.

Of the three power supplies of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the effect drive board 1720, +5V is supplied to the input buffer circuit 1720a through the +5V fuse EF5, and +24V is through the +24V fuse EF24. It is supplied to the +24V driver circuit 1720c1 that drives and controls the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the board 5, and the +12V powers the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 via the +12V fuse EF12. It is supplied to a +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 that drives and controls, and is also supplied to a plurality of decoration boards provided on the game board 5 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each decoration board of the game board 5").

The capacity of the +5V fuse EF5 in the +5V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720 is preset in consideration of the current used by the effect drive board 1720 itself. ). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the +5V power supply line production drive board flows through the +5V fuse EF5, the element part of the +5V fuse EF5 melts and the +5V fuse EF5 is supplied to the following. +5V power supply line.

The +12V fuse EF12 is the current used by the effect drive board 1720 itself in the +12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720, and the current used by the subsequent board such as each decoration board of the game board 5 via the effect drive board 1720. , and the capacity is set in advance, and the current can flow up to the +12V power supply line production drive board allowable current upper limit (breaking current). When the +12V fuse EF12 is overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power supply line production drive board, the element part of the +12V fuse EF12 melts and the +12V fuse EF12 is supplied to the following. +12V power supply line.

The capacity of the +24V fuse EF24 is set in advance in consideration of the current used by the effect drive board 1720 itself in the +24V power line of the effect drive board 1720, and the +24V power line effect drive board allowable current upper limit (breaking current ). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power supply line production drive board flows, the +24V fuse EF24 melts the element part of the +24V fuse EF24, and the +24V fuse EF24 is supplied to the following. +24V power supply line.

The +5V fuse EF5, the +12V fuse EF12, and the +24V fuse EF24 are fuses for supplying the +5V power line, the +12V power line, and the +24V power line. Compared to the fuse SF12 for +24V and the fuse SF24 for +24V, the current flowing is small, but the current is large and may generate heat. It is preferable to place them away from electronic components such as the +12V driver circuit 1720c2 so as not to cause failures due to shutdown due to their functions. It is preferable that it be arranged in the vicinity of the connector of the terminal to which the power supply line to which +5V, +12V, and +24V from the peripheral control board 1510 are supplied.

The input buffer circuit 1720a receives a control signal (either a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510, and removes noise from the input control signal. are output to the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 and the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2. Specifically, the input buffer circuit 1720a is supplied to a plurality of wires (harnesses) electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the production drive board 1720 via +5V fuses EF5. It is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to the ground (GND) are electrically connected to eliminate noise that has entered multiple wiring (harnesses). By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise tolerance.

The +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 includes a driver IC that drives the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5, and a fuse that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC (hereinafter referred to as "the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 It is mainly composed of The +24V supplied through the +24V fuse EF24 is supplied to the driver IC through the fuse.

The fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit 1720c1 takes into account the current used in the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 and the +24V driver circuit 1720c1 in the +24V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. The capacity is set in advance, and the current can flow up to the game board side driving solenoid allowable current upper limit (breaking current). The fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 blows the element part of the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the game board side driving solenoid flows, and the +24V system driver It cuts off the +24V power supply line to the succeeding one through the fuse provided in circuit 1720c1.

The +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 includes a driver IC that drives the +12V system electric drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5, and a fuse that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC (hereinafter referred to as "the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 It is mainly composed of The +12V supplied through the +12V fuse EF12 is supplied to the driver IC through the fuse.

The fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit 1720c2 takes into account the current used in the +12V electrical drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5 and the +12V driver circuit 1720c2 in the +12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. The capacity is set in advance, and the current can flow up to the game board side drive motor allowable current upper limit (breaking current). The fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 blows the element part of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side flows, and the +12V system driver It cuts off the +12V power supply line to the succeeding one through the fuse provided in circuit 1720c2.

In this embodiment, the +5V fuse EF5, the +12V fuse EF12, the +24V fuse EF24, the fuses provided in the +24V driver circuit 1720c1, and the fuses provided in the +12V driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 are surface mount type. (So-called SMD type) chip fuse, which melts when a current exceeding a predetermined upper limit of allowable current (predetermined breaking current for each) flows. It is an electronic component that cannot supply a power line to the following even if the current drops. The +5V fuse EF5, +12V fuse EF12, +24V fuse EF24 of the effect drive board 1720, the fuses provided in the +24V driver circuit 1720c1, and the fuses provided in the +12V driver circuit 1720c2 are SMD type chip fuses. Alternatively, a lead type fuse may be used. In addition, the +5V fuse EF5, +12V fuse EF12, +24V fuse EF24 of the effect drive board 1720, the fuses provided in the +24V driver circuit 1720c1, and the fuses provided in the +12V driver circuit 1720c2 are SMD type or lead type. A resettable fuse such as a thermistor may also be used. In this way, when a resettable fuse is used, if a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power supply line cannot be supplied to the succeeding fuse, but when the current drops, the succeeding fuse can be supplied again. A power line can be supplied to it.

The +12V supplied to each decorative board of the game board 5 is supplied to a plurality of LEDs such as full-color LEDs and single-color LEDs (hereinafter referred to as "various LEDs of the game board 5") provided on the game board 5 via +12V fuses DF12. ) is supplied to an LED constant current drive circuit that controls various light emission such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and gradation lighting. The LED constant current drive circuit is a sink type constant current drive circuit that can pass a constant current to various LEDs of the game board 5, and sets the maximum current to be passed to the various LEDs of the game board 5. and a maximum current setting circuit. If an input buffer circuit corresponding to the above-described input buffer circuit 1720a is not provided in the LED constant current drive circuit, an input buffer circuit corresponding to the above-described input buffer circuit 1720a is provided in the preceding stage of the LED constant current drive circuit. may be provided.

The capacity of the +12V fuse DF12 is set in advance in the +12V power supply line of each decoration board of the game board 5 in consideration of the current used in each decoration board of the game board 5, and the capacity of the fuse DF12 is set in advance. Current can flow up to the allowable current upper limit (breaking current). +12V fuse DF12, when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side decorative board flows, the element part of the +12V fuse DF12 melts and the +12V fuse DF12 is supplied to the succeeding Cut off the +12V power supply line.

The +12V fuse DF12 is a fuse that supplies the +12 power supply line, and although the current flowing through it is small compared to the original +12V fuse SF12 on the peripheral control board 1510 and the +12V fuse EF12 on the effect drive board 1720, , Since the current is large and may generate heat, it is preferable to place it away from the various LEDs and the LED constant current drive circuit so that the various LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are not damaged by the influence of this heat generation. It is preferably arranged near the connector to which +12V from the effect drive board 1720 is supplied (especially near the connector of the terminal to which the power supply line to which +12V is supplied from the effect drive board 1720 is connected).

In this embodiment, the +12V fuse DF12 of each decorative board of the game board 5 is a surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuse, and exceeds a predetermined allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current). It melts when current flows through it, and unlike resettable fuses, it is an electronic component that cannot supply a power line to subsequent devices even if the current drops once it melts. As the +12V fuse DF12 of each decorative board of the game board 5, a lead type fuse may be used instead of the SMD type chip fuse. As the +12V fuse DF12 for each decorative substrate of the game board 5, a resettable fuse such as an SMD type or lead type thermistor may be used. In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power supply line cannot be supplied to the succeeding fuse, but when the current drops, the succeeding fuse can be supplied again. A power line can be supplied to it.

The +12V supplied to the effect display device 1600 is passed through a +12V fuse PF12 as a pre-stage fuse that is the primary fuse of the effect display device 1600, and a +12V fuse PF12a1 as a first post-stage fuse that is a branch first system fuse. and a +12V fuse PF12a2 as a second post-stage fuse that is a fuse of the branched second system. The +12V supplied through the +12V fuse PF12a1 as the first post-stage fuse is supplied to the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z that generates the liquid crystal panel power to be supplied to the liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z may supply the generated liquid crystal panel power to the liquid crystal panel as well as to the backlight and drive circuit. The +12V supplied via the +12V fuse PF12a2 as the second post-stage fuse is supplied to the backlight and drive circuit. The +12V supplied through the +12V fuse PF12a2 is supplied to the backlight and drive circuit, and may also be supplied to the liquid crystal panel.

The capacity of the +12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse, is set in advance in consideration of the respective currents used by the production display device 1600 in the +12V power supply line of the production display device 1600, and the main allowable current upper limit ( breaking current). The +12V fuse PF12, which serves as the main fuse, is supplied through the +12V fuse PF12 when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the main allowable current flows, the element part of the +12V fuse PF12 melts and the subsequent fuse is supplied through the +12V fuse PF12. Cut off the +12V power line to

The +12V fuse PF12a1, which is the fuse of the first branch system, is the current used in the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z in the +12V power line supplied via the +12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600. , the current used in the liquid crystal panel, the backlight, the drive circuit, etc., and the capacity is set in advance. The +12V fuse PF12a1, which is the fuse for the first branch system, is blown when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the first branch system flows, the element part of the +12V fuse PF12a1 melts and the +12V fuse PF12a1 is closed. cuts off the +12V power supply line to the following supplied through.

The +12V fuse PF12a2, which is the fuse of the second branch system, is used in the liquid crystal panel, the backlight, the drive circuit, etc. on the +12V power supply line supplied via the +12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600. The capacity is set in advance in consideration of the current to be applied, and the current can flow up to the allowable current upper limit (breaking current) of the second branch system. The +12V fuse PF12a2, which is the fuse for the second branch system, is blown when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the second branch system flows, the element of the +12V fuse PF12a2 melts and the +12V fuse PF12a2 is closed. cuts off the +12V power supply line to the following supplied through.

Note that the +12V fuses PF12, PF12a1, and PF12a2 are fuses that supply the +12 power supply line. Although the current is small, the current is large and may generate heat. , the liquid crystal panel power supply generation circuit 1600z and the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit of the effect display device 1600, preferably in the vicinity of the connector to which +12 V is supplied from the liquid crystal output board 1530 (particularly, the liquid crystal output It is preferable that it is arranged in the vicinity of the connector of the terminal to which the power supply line to which +12 V is supplied from the substrate 1530 is connected.

In this embodiment, the +12V fuse PF12, the +12V fuse PF12a1, and the +12V fuse PF12a2 of the effect display device 1600 are surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses, and have predetermined allowable current upper limits (each Unlike resettable fuses, once a fuse blows, even if the current drops, it cannot supply the power line to subsequent fuses. is a part. The +12V fuse PF12, +12V fuse PF12a1, and +12V fuse PF12a2 of the effect display device 1600 may be lead type fuses instead of SMD type chip fuses. As the +12V fuse PF12, +12V fuse PF12a1, and +12V fuse PF12a2 of the effect display device 1600, resettable fuses such as SMD type or lead type thermistors may be used. In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power supply line cannot be supplied to the succeeding fuse, but when the current drops, the succeeding fuse can be supplied again. A power line can be supplied to it.

The three types of power supplies of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the door frame clothing relay board 105 are supplied to the door frame side drive board (not shown) provided in the door frame 3 (hereinafter referred to as "each drive board of the door frame 3"). ) and a plurality of decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “each decorative substrate of the door frame 3”) are supplied with the power required by themselves, and the power supply and corresponding fuses (not shown) are provided on the substrate.

Each drive board of the door frame 3 has a power supply and corresponding fuses (eg, +5V fuse, +24V fuse, +12V fuse), as well as, for example, a +24V electrical drive source (eg, drive solenoid). A fuse provided in a +24V system driver circuit for drive control, a fuse provided in a +12V system driver circuit for drive control of a +12V system electric drive source (for example, a drive motor), and the like are also provided. The capacity of the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply is set in advance in consideration of the current used by each drive board of the door frame 3 in the power supply line corresponding to the power supply of each drive board of the door frame 3. Upper limit of allowable current for each power supply line drive board (for example, upper limit of allowable current for door frame side +5V power line drive board (breaking current), door frame side +24V power line drive board allowable current upper limit (breaking current), door frame side +12V power line A current can be passed up to the drive substrate allowable current upper limit (breaking current). The fuses (not shown) corresponding to the power supply are the upper limit of the allowable current of each power supply line drive board on the door frame side (for example, the upper limit of the allowable current of the +5V power line drive board on the door frame side, the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power line drive board on the door frame side, and the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side +24V power line drive board. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the +12V power supply line drive board allowable current upper limit) flows, the element part of the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply melts, and the fuse (not shown) corresponding to this melted power supply is supplied. cut off the power supply line to the following.

The fuses provided in the +24V driver circuit take into consideration the current used in the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 and the +24V driver circuit in the +24V power line of each drive board of the door frame 3. The capacity is set in advance, and the current can flow up to the door frame side driving solenoid allowable current upper limit (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side drive solenoid flows, the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit melts the element part of the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit, and the +24V system driver circuit It cuts off the +24V power supply line to the following supplied through the provided fuse. The fuses provided in the +12V driver circuit take into consideration the current used in the +12V electrical drive source (driving motor) of the door frame 3 and the +12V driver circuit in the +12V power line of each drive board of the door frame 3. The capacity is set in advance, and the current can flow up to the door frame side drive motor allowable current upper limit (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side drive motor flows, the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit melts the element part of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit, and the +12V system driver circuit It cuts off the +12V power supply line to the following supplied through the provided fuse.

The capacity of the fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3 is set in advance in the +12V power supply line of each decorative board of the door frame 3, taking into consideration the current used by each decorative board of the door frame 3. Therefore, current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (breaking current) of the decorative board on the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the door-frame-side decorative board flows in the fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3, the element part of the fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3 melts. , the +12V power supply line supplied to the following through the fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3 is cut off.

For example, if one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +12 V, the door frame 3 is provided with +12 V fuses (not shown). Supplied to a +12V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the drive motor that is an electric drive source (for example, the drive motor of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 (the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button lifting drive motor 367). The +12V system driver circuit is mainly composed of a driver IC (not shown) for driving the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 and a fuse (not shown) for interrupting overcurrent to the driver IC. The +12 V supplied through the +12 V fuse is supplied to the driver IC through the fuse, and the fuse of the +12 V system driver circuit is connected to the +12 V power supply line of the drive board by the +12 V system electricity of the door frame 3 . The capacity is set in advance considering the current used in the actual drive source (drive motor) and the +12V system driver circuit, and the current can flow up to the upper limit of the door frame side drive motor allowable current (breaking current) +12V. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side drive motor flows, the fuse of the +12V system driver circuit is blown and supplied through the fuse of the +12V system driver circuit. cut off the +12V power supply line to the following connected.

Of the drive boards of the door frame 3, a +5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer circuit (not shown) are provided for the drive board on which the +12V system driver circuit is provided (mounted, mounted). A control signal (this control signal may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from a peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 is input, and this input It removes noise from the control signal and outputs it to the +12V system driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and the drive board of the door frame 3 with multiple wires (harnesses) electrically connected to each other for +5V. It is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied through a fuse is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to the ground (GND) are electrically connected. By removing the intruding noise, the noise tolerance can be improved. The same effect (improvement of noise resistance) can be obtained by supplying +12V through a +12V fuse instead of +5V supplied to this resistor.

Further, for example, if one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +24 V, the door frame 3 is connected via a +24 V fuse (not shown). is supplied to a +24V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of an electric drive source (for example, a drive solenoid) provided in the . The +24V system driver circuit is mainly composed of a driver IC (not shown) for driving the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) for cutting off overcurrent to the driver IC. ing. The +24V supplied through the +24V fuse is supplied to the driver IC through the fuse. The capacity of the +24V driver circuit fuse is set in advance in consideration of the current used in the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the +24V driver circuit in the +24V power supply line of the drive board. It is set, and the current can flow up to the door frame side drive solenoid allowable current upper limit (breaking current). If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side drive solenoid flows through the fuse of the +24V driver circuit, the element part of the fuse of the +24V driver circuit melts and the +24V driver circuit fuse Cut off the +24V power supply line to the succeeding supply.

Of the drive boards of the door frame 3, the drive board on which the +24V system driver circuit is provided (mounted, mounted) has a +5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer (not shown) as described above. A circuit is provided, and a control signal (this control signal may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from a peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 is input. , removes noise from the input control signal and outputs it to the +24V system driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit applies +5 V to multiple wires (harnesses) that electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and the drive boards of the door frame 3 . It is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V is applied via a fuse and one end of a resistor grounded to the ground (GND) are electrically connected. It is possible to improve the noise resistance by removing the noise that has entered the system. In place of +5V supplied to this resistor, +24V supplied through a +24V fuse, or +12V supplied through a +12V fuse when +12V is also supplied, has the same effect (that is, the noise resistance is improved). improvement) can be played.

Further, for example, if one decoration substrate, a plurality of decoration substrates, or all the decoration substrates among the decoration substrates of the door frame 3 require +12 V, the door frame 3 is connected via a +12 V fuse (not shown). Multiple LEDs such as full-color LEDs and single-color LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various LEDs of the door frame 3") Control various light emission such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and gradation lighting is supplied to the LED constant current drive circuit. The LED constant current drive circuit is a sink type constant current drive circuit that can pass a constant current to various LEDs on the door frame 3, and sets the maximum current to be passed to the various LEDs on the door frame 3. and a maximum current setting circuit. The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is set in advance in consideration of the current used by each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the +12V power supply line of the decorative board. breaking current). In the +12V fuse (not shown), when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the decorative board on the door frame side flows, the element part of the +12V fuse (not shown) melts and the +12V fuse (not shown) is supplied. Cut off the +12V power supply line to the following.

In addition, one of the decorative boards of the door frame 3 (for example, the left side upper decorative board 402a constituting the door frame left side decorative board 402 provided in the door frame 3), and the LED constant current drive circuit is provided on another decoration substrate of the door frame 3 (for example, the left side lower decoration substrate 402b constituting the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 provided in the door frame 3) is provided on one decoration substrate by the LED constant current drive circuit When light emission of a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon is controlled, a +12V fuse (not shown) may or may not be provided on one decorative substrate. Further, when the LED constant current drive circuit is not provided with an input buffer circuit corresponding to the input buffer circuit provided (mounted, mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3 described above, the LED constant current drive An input buffer circuit corresponding to this input buffer circuit may be provided in the previous stage of the circuit.

In this embodiment, each of the above-described fuses provided on the side of the door frame 3 is a surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuse, and the current exceeding the predetermined upper limit of allowable current (predetermined breaking current) Unlike a resettable fuse, it is an electronic component that cannot supply a power supply line to the following even if the current is reduced once it is blown. As the above-described fuses provided on the door frame 3 side, lead type fuses may be used instead of SMD type chip fuses. Moreover, resettable fuses such as SMD type or lead type thermistors may be used as the above-described fuses provided on the door frame 3 side. In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power supply line cannot be supplied to the succeeding fuse, but when the current drops, the succeeding fuse can be supplied again. A power line can be supplied to it.

[9-3-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 212, the payout control board 633 includes a payout control filter circuit 633h and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 633aa and the like. This payout control filter circuit 633h is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 630, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 630 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control unit 633a. +12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a, and is supplied to the external communication circuit 558z of the external terminal board 558 via the payout control board 633. The external communication circuit 558z of the external terminal plate 558 is a circuit for outputting a signal that conveys the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. to a hall computer installed in the game hall. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc., from signals output from the external communication circuit 558z. Note that +24 from the power supply board 630 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 without being used in the payout control board 633 .

[9-3-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 212, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, etc., in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and generates +5V, which is the control power supply for the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In this embodiment, the +5V created by the +5V power creation circuit 630fa of the power source creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 and the main control board side created +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected. Therefore, the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310. In addition, the main control board side generated +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g (+5V generated on the main control board side), and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to the main control MPU 1310a, for example. +12V from the payout control board 633, for example, is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b and the like, +24V from the payout control board 633, for example, is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 1310a. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU 633aa via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633. Also, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310 . 213, the blackout warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 through the peripheral control board 1510, the interface board 635, and the door frame relay board 105. Via the liquid crystal output board 1530, it is input to the effect display device 1600 and the like.

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltage applied to each of the +12V power line and the +24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line. Signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure can be detected more accurately than when monitoring the voltage applied to the power supply.

Thus, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the +5V power generation circuit 630fa, the +12V power generation circuit 630fb, and the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f on the power substrate 630 generate +5V, Of the three power sources of +12V and +24V, the two power sources of +12V and +24V are the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect drive board 1720, as described above. supplied to the board. That is, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the +12V power supply has the same potential on the various boards, and the +24V power supply has the same potential on the various boards. Also, the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 and the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. are at the same potential.

In addition, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, except for the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 has the +12V fuse SF12 and the +24V fuse SF24. In addition to being provided (mounted, mounted), the effect drive board 1720 is provided with a +12V fuse EF12 and a +24V fuse EF24 (mounted, mounted).

Furthermore, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, the +12V power supply and the +24V power supply are both monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, as described above.

That is, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, +12V which is the power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 and +12V provided (mounted, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510 fuse SF12 and the +12V fuse EF12 provided (mounted, mounted) on the production drive board 1720 are at the same potential, and the power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 +24V, a +24V fuse SF24 provided (mounted, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510, and a +24V fuse EF24 provided (mounted, mounted) on the effect drive board 1720. are at the same potential.

Further, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all drive boards of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +12V, the above-mentioned As described above, the drive motor (for example, the drive motor of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 (the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button lifting It is supplied to a +12V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the drive motor 367), and among the drive boards of the door frame 3, one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all drive boards require +24V. In this case, as described above, it is supplied to the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the electrical drive source (for example, drive solenoid, drive motor) provided in the door frame 3 via the +24V fuse (not shown). In this case, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, +12 V, which is the power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, and the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5 +12V fuse SF12 provided (mounted, mounted), +12V fuse EF12 provided (mounted, mounted) on the effect drive board 1720 of the game board 5, and the drive board of the door frame 3 The +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, mounted) has the same potential, and +24V, which is the power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, A +24V fuse SF24 provided (mounted, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5 and a +24V fuse EF24 provided on the performance drive board 1720 of the game board 5 (mounted, mounted). and a +24V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3 are at the same potential.

[9-4. Fuse fixing method]
Next, each fuse provided on the power supply board 630, each fuse provided on the peripheral control board 1510, each fuse provided on the effect drive board 1720, each fuse provided on each decoration board of the game board 5, and the effect display device 1600. A method of fixing each fuse provided in the door frame 3 and each fuse provided on the door frame 3 side will be described.

The fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (including the fuse FUSE3 (see FIGS. 214 and 215)) provided on the power supply substrate 630 are composed of support terminals having metal ends of a transparent glass tube. Support terminals at both ends of the tube are detachably attached to support metal fittings (also referred to as fuse holders) (not shown) that are soldered to the power supply board 630. The fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (including the fuse FUSE3 (Figs. ).) can be replaced with a new fuse. On the other hand, the +5V fuse SF5, +12V fuse SF12, +24V fuse SF24, and control power fuse SF3 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +5V fuse EF5 and +12V fuse provided on the effect drive board 1720. EF12, a +24V fuse EF24, a fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1, a fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2, a +12V fuse DF12 provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, and the effect display device 1600. The +12V fuse PF12, +12V fuse PF12a1, and +12V fuse PF12a2 provided, and each fuse provided on the side of the door frame 3, are surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses and are rectangular chip fuses. There are ceramic type, mold type, etc., and they are directly soldered to the board.

In this way, each fuse provided on the power supply board 630 is detachable, and when a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit (predetermined breaking current) flows through the fuse and melts, it is replaced with a new fuse. Each fuse provided in the peripheral control board 1510, each fuse provided in the effect drive board 1720, each fuse provided in each decoration board of the game board 5, each fuse provided in the effect display device 1600 , and each fuse provided on the side of the door frame 3 is a chip fuse directly soldered to the board, so if a current exceeding a predetermined upper limit of allowable current (predetermined breaking current for each) flows through the fuse, it will melt. , cannot be replaced with a new fuse.

Note that the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (including the fuse FUSE3 (see FIGS. 214 and 215)) provided on the power supply substrate 630 are composed of transparent glass tubes with metal support terminals at both ends. Whether or not the element portions of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (including the fuse FUSE3 (see FIGS. 214 and 215)) provided on the power supply board 630 are blown can be visually confirmed through the transparent glass tube. . On the other hand, the +5V fuse SF5, +12V fuse SF12, +24V fuse SF24, and control power fuse SF3 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +5V fuse EF5 and +12V fuse provided on the effect drive board 1720. EF12, a +24V fuse EF24, a fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1, a fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2, a +12V fuse DF12 provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, and the effect display device 1600. The +12V fuse PF12, +12V fuse PF12a1, and +12V fuse PF12a2 provided, and each fuse provided on the side of the door frame 3 are surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses, so they are square chip type. , ceramic type, and molded type chip fuses, it is not possible to visually confirm whether or not the element portion arranged inside the chip fuse is fused.

[10. Power board]
Next, the power supply board 630 provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 94 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board.

The island equipment of the game hall has a transformer (not shown), and the commercial power supply voltage of AC 100V (hereinafter referred to as "AC100V") is changed to AC 24V (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V") power supply for game machines. voltage is stepped down. When the plug of the power cord (not shown) is inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the game machine power supply voltage of the island facility of the game hall, AC 24V is supplied to the power supply board 630 . The power supply board 630 supplies various power supplies (DC +24V (hereinafter referred to as “+24V”), DC +12V (hereinafter referred to as “+12V”), DC +5V ( Various DC power supplies such as "+5V" are hereinafter described) are created and supplied from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 .

[10-1. Circuit configuration of power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 214, the circuit of the power supply board 630 includes a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, a power breakdown circuit 630g, and a backup power supply. It is mainly composed of a circuit 630h.

AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 through a power cord (not shown). AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 through a power line (not shown), and the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm) (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and are input to the input terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a via a B-type fusing defined by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law. Specifically, the input terminal 3 of the power switch 630a is connected to the AC 24V line 1 (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V1" (sometimes referred to as "L side")). 24V AC line 2 (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V2" (sometimes referred to as "N side") to the input terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. ) is input via a fuse FUSE2 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2). Output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b.

When a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall turns on the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically connected, and AC 24V1 is sent to various circuits of the power supply board 630 through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. As soon as the supply is started, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 are electrically connected, and the AC 24V2 is started to be supplied to various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on by turning on the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall turns off the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically disconnected, and the AC 24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630. As the supply is interrupted, the input terminal 1 and the output terminal 2 are electrically disconnected, and the supply of AC 24V2 to various circuits of the power supply board 630 is interrupted. As a result, power to the pachinko machine 1 can be cut off by turning off the power switch 630a.

While the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall remains in the ON state, a staff member such as a game hall clerk turns on the breaker of the game hall to turn on the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. The power may be turned on all at once, and the pachinko machines installed in the game hall may be powered off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall.

[10-1-1. Noise countermeasure circuit]
The noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC that is a circuit for countermeasures against common mode noise, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC that is a circuit for countermeasures against normal mode noise, and a choke coil L1. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC is composed of capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. The capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacity and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers) and have the same varistor voltage. The varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that cannot be reduced by the capacitors C1 and C2.

One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 through the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is electrically connected to the AC24V2 through the power switch 630a. electrically connected. One end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 through the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is through the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input as the frame ground FG2 to the ground connection terminal DCN5. This ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to a ground terminal of a frame ground substrate (not shown) arranged near the external terminal plate 558 shown in FIG. 86 through a power supply ground wire (not shown).

When viewed from the front, the dispensing base 551 is arranged so that the mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, the ground terminals are provided) is mounted on the frame ground board is horizontal with the mounting surface facing downward. 86, which is arranged in front of the external terminal plate 558 and attached to the circuit board accommodating portion and covered with the terminal cover 551k shown in FIG. That is, the frame ground board is housed in the space formed by the board housing portion and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, the frame grounding substrate accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodating portion and the terminal cover 551k can be visually recognized from the outside of the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

A normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC is composed of a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 removes normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that could not be removed by the capacitor C3.

One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. One end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 through a power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 through a power switch 630a.

AC 24V1 output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 through the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC 24VA. 24 VAC output from the output terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input to the power line connector DCN2 as 24 VAC. . The choke coil L1 is a countermeasure component for common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise interference. The power line connector DCN2 is installed outside the pachinko machine 1 via the interface board power line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 96, and the CR unit power line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) to supply AC24VA and AC24V to the CR unit (not shown).

AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise is reduced by choke coil L1 are input to rectifier circuit 630c.

[10-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c is composed of N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as "FETs") Q1 and Q2 and a peripheral circuit 630ca. A peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit for the FETs Q1 and Q2, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes and Zener diodes.

The AC 24V1 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. It is directly input to the drain terminal of FETQ2 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The AC 24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. It is directly input to the drain terminal of the FETQ1 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are respectively input to the CAI terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

AC24V1 and AC24V2, the common mode noise of which has been reduced by the choke coil L1, are rectified into a DC power supply by switching by the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode of the Schottky barrier diode D2. are output from terminals 2, respectively. The type of package of FETQ1, FETQ2, Schottky barrier diode D1, and Schottky barrier diode D2 is so-called TO-220F, which are of the same type and fixed to one radiation fin (not shown). The radiation fins are soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630 to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 .

AC24V1 and AC24V2, the common mode noise of which has been reduced by the choke coil L1, are input to the rectifier circuit 630c as described above, and are also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. are respectively output from and input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

The rectified DC power output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 is input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[10-1-3. Power factor correction circuit]
The power factor correction circuit 630d is composed of N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as "FETs") Q3 and Q4 and a peripheral circuit 630da. A peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit for the FETs Q3 and Q4, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes and inductors.

The DC power supply whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminals 1 and 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and directly to the drains of the FETs Q3 and Q4 without going through the peripheral circuit 630da. input to each terminal. The gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 receive the gate signal for the power factor correction circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminals and drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

The DC power supply, whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2, suppresses the generation of harmonics through switching by the FETs Q3, Q4, and the peripheral circuit 630da, and improves the power factor. 2 are output respectively. The package type of the FETs Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D9, D10 is the same as the package type of the FETs Q1, Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2 (TO-220F described above). Each is fixed to one radiating fin that does not. The radiation fins are soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630 to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 .

The DC power supply whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improvement circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[10-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e is composed of a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The negative terminals of these electrolytic capacitors are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630, and the positive terminals of the electrolytic capacitors are input to the DC power supply whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d. be done. The smoothing circuit 630e gently (smoothes) the pulsating current from the DC power supply whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d, and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply generating circuit 630f. In the embodiment, a transparent glass tube having the same shape as the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are made of metal) is used as a class B fusing specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). +24 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 via the power supply board 630 . The power line supplied through the fuse FUSE3 becomes the +24V power line for each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1. FIG. The fuse FUSE3 is a glass tube fuse for the +24V power supply line (DC power supply line). The fuse FUSE3 cuts off the +24V power supply line to the succeeding fuse.

[10-1-5. Power supply generation circuit]
When the DC power supply from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power generation circuit 630f generates +12 V and +5 V from the input DC power. The power generation circuit 630f outputs the generated +12V from the +12V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and outputs the generated +5V from the +5V terminal and outputs it from the power supply board 630 to the inside of the pachinko machine 1. supplied to each substrate. The power line supplied from the +12V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f becomes the +12V power line for each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and the power line supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f becomes the +5V power line for each board inside the pachinko machine 1. power supply line.

The power generation circuit 630f controls switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 in the power factor improvement circuit 630d and the peripheral circuit 630da by controlling output of the power factor improvement gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor improvement circuit 630d. to suppress the generation of harmonics.

In the power generation circuit 630f, AC 24V1 and AC 24V2, the common mode noise of which is reduced by the choke coil L1, are input to the AC-DET terminal via diodes D5 and D6. The power generation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal and determines whether or not to output a gate signal for the power destruction circuit from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power destruction circuit 630g.

The plug of the power cord (not shown) is not inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for game machines in the island facility of the game hall, and is mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V power supply voltage for game machines. When inserted, a power supply voltage higher than +24 V is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

The power supply generation circuit 630f is based on the power supply voltage input to the AC-DET terminal, the common mode noise of which has been reduced by the choke coil L1. is set to about 50 V.), the gate signal for the power supply breaking circuit can be output to the power supply breaking circuit 630g.

When the power generation circuit 630f outputs a gate signal for the power destruction circuit to the power destruction circuit 630g, the power destruction circuit 630g self-destructs and enters the short mode. When the power supply breaking circuit 630g enters the short mode and the power supply switch 630a is in the ON state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 flows through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply breaking circuit 630g. A large amount of current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are fused.

A GND terminal of the power generation circuit 630 f is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 . The ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 to which the GND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is electrically connected becomes the ground (GND) line of each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1 .

[10-1-6. power supply destruction circuit]
The power breakdown circuit 630g is composed of an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as "FET") Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of FETQ5 is electrically connected to cathode terminals 2 of Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FETQ5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FETQ5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the other end opposite to the resistor R25 whose one end is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. , the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected in addition to the other end of the resistor R25.

In the power breaking circuit 630g, when the gate signal for the power breaking circuit is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FETQ5 via the resistor R25, the FETQ5 is activated and the drain terminal of the FETQ5 is switched to the source terminal. (The drain terminal and the source terminal of FETQ5 become overcurrent), the FETQ5 is destroyed, and the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of FETQ5 are connected is maintained. be done. The package type of FETQ5 is the same as the package type of FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 (TO-220F described above). , Q2, Q3, Q4, and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, the heat dissipation fins (specifically, FET Q1, FET Q2, Schottky barrier diode D1, and Schottky barrier diode D2 are fixed, and a heat dissipation fin (not shown) to which the FETs Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D9, D10 are fixed. It is placed in a position where it cannot be Specifically, the FET Q5 is arranged between the radiation fins and is not fixed to the radiation fins at all. The purpose of this is to cool down the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 by absorbing the heat through each radiation fin so that they are not destroyed by the heat. On the other hand, when the FETQ5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FETQ5 (an overcurrent occurs between the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FETQ5), heat is generated in a short period of time. It is to contribute to be destroyed.

In other words, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, and is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V power supply voltage for the game machine. When it is plugged in, the power generation circuit 630f adjusts the magnitude of the power supply voltage to a predetermined value (threshold : In this embodiment, it is set to about 50V.), the gate signal for the power supply breakdown circuit is output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g to control the FET Q5 to self-destruct. As a result, the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FETQ5 are electrically connected is maintained, and the source terminal of the FETQ5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. When the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are turned ON, the currents flowing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 pass through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FET Q5, which is in the short mode state in the power supply breakdown circuit 630g, to the power generation circuit 630f. A large amount of current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, blowing one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. Even if it is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the power supply voltage, it is possible to reliably prevent each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the power board 630 from being destroyed.

In addition, the plug of the power cord was not inserted into the power outlet of AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for game machines of the island facility of the game hall, and was mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage for game machines of AC 24V. When the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is destroyed by being inserted, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are replaced with ones that are not blown, and the plug of the power cord is connected to AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall. , the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained. Then, a large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f via the FET Q5 in the short mode state in the power supply destruction circuit 630g. One or both of FUSE1 and FUSE2 will blow again. In other words, unless the power supply board 630 in which the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is not destroyed, the plug of the power cord must be replaced with the island equipment of the game hall. Even if it is plugged into an AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine, the game cannot be started.

The fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are detachably attached to supporting metal fittings (also called fuse holders) (not shown) that are soldered to the power supply board 630. When the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are blown, It can be replaced with a new fuse.

[10-1-7. Backup power supply circuit]
The backup power supply circuit 630h is composed of capacitors BC0 and BC1. The minus (-) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), while the plus (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is built in the main control of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the main VBB which is a backup power line to the RAM. The minus (-) terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), while the plus (+) terminal of the capacitor BC1 is provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to payout VBB which is a backup power supply line to payout control built-in RAM of MPU633aa.

When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the power supply line supplied from the +12V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +12V power supply line) is connected to the payout control board 633, Then, it is supplied to the main control board 1310, and the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The +5V power supply line is not electrically connected to the power supply line supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line) as the main VBB, but is independent.) is shown in FIG. is supplied as the main VBB to the capacitor BC0 provided on the power supply board 630 via the diode MD0 provided on the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It holds various information supplied to the RAM and stored in the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the power supply line supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line) is connected to the payout control board. 633, and supplied to the capacitor BC1 provided on the power supply board 630 as payment VBB via the diode PD0 provided on the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the control unit 633a.

On the other hand, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is cut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), power failure or momentary power failure. occurs, the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 cannot generate +5V from the power supply line supplied from the +12V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f (that is, the +12V power supply line). In response, capacitor BC0 starts discharging. This discharge is interrupted by the diode MD0 provided on the main control board 1310 to the power supply line supplied from the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 (that is, +5V power supply line generated on the main control board side). Various information supplied as VBB to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 and stored in the main control built-in RAM is held. In addition, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is turned off at the same time by turning off the breaker of the game hall), power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Then, +5V from the power supply line supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line) is no longer supplied to the capacitor BC1. In response, capacitor BC0 starts discharging. This discharge is prevented from being supplied to the power supply line supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line) by the diode PD0 provided in the payout control board 633, and the payout control board 633 pays out the discharge as the payout VBB. Various information supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the control unit 633a and stored in the payout control built-in RAM is held.

In other words, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off (including the case where the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is turned off at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Then, due to the discharge of the capacitors BC0 and BC1, various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB is held, and payout control is performed as the payout VBB. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the substrate 633 is held.

In this embodiment, the power supply substrate 630 includes, as described above, the fuse FUSE1 serving as a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power line 1) and the fuse FUSE2 serving as a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power line 2). and a fuse FUSE3 serving as a glass tube fuse for the +24V power supply line (direct current power supply line (DC power supply line)). As a result, the load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (the electrical drive source, the sensor to which +24V is supplied among various sensors (or the sensor to which +24V is supplied instead of the sensor to which +12V is supplied) A sensor (+24V power supply alternative sensor) to which this +24V is supplied when used, and a load electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (electrical drive source, sensor to which +24V is supplied among various sensors (Or, if a sensor to which +24V is supplied is used instead of a sensor to which +12V is supplied, a sensor to which +24V is supplied (+24V power supply alternative sensor)) and a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 The fuses corresponding to the power supply line (+24V, the same potential (+24V)) supplied to , are a fuse FUSE1 that is a glass tube fuse for AC 24V1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply board 630, and a power supply A fuse FUSE2 that serves as a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power line 2) provided on the board 630, and a fuse that serves as a glass tube fuse for the +24V power line (direct current power line (DC power line)) provided on the power board 630. FUSE 3 corresponds to the peripheral control board 1510 which is the production side board and the +24V power supply among the power lines supplied to the specific loads among the loads corresponding to the boards subordinate to the peripheral control board 1510. The lines are a fuse FUSE1 that serves as a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply board 630, and a fuse FUSE2 that serves as a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) provided on the power supply board 630. , the fuse FUSE3 which is a glass tube fuse for the +24V power supply line (direct current power supply line (DC power supply line)) provided on the power supply board 630, the +24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510 which is a chip fuse, and the effect drive board 1720. +24V fuse EF24 corresponds.

If the power supply board 630 is not provided with the fuse FUSE3 that serves as a glass tube fuse for the +24V power supply line (DC power supply line), that is, the power supply board 630 is provided with a 24V AC1 (AC power supply line 1) fuse. When a fuse FUSE1 serving as a glass tube fuse and a fuse FUSE2 serving as a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) are provided, the load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 ( An electrical drive source, a sensor supplied with +24V among various sensors (or a sensor supplied with +24V when using a sensor supplied with +24V instead of a sensor supplied with +12V (alternative sensor with +24V power source) )), a load electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (an electrical drive source, a sensor to which +24V is supplied among various sensors (or a sensor to which +24V is supplied instead of a sensor to which +12V is supplied) is used, the sensor (+24V power supply alternative sensor) to which this +24V is supplied, and the power supply line (+24V) supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310, and the same potential (+24V The fuses corresponding to )) are a fuse FUSE1 that is a glass tube fuse for 24V AC (AC power line 1) provided on the power supply board 630, and a glass tube fuse for 24V AC (AC power line 2) that is provided on the power supply board 630. Among the loads corresponding to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the board on the production side, and the board subordinate to the peripheral control board 1510, the power supply line supplied to the specific load , the +24V power line is a fuse FUSE1 that is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power line 1) provided on the power supply board 630, and a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power line 2) that is provided on the power supply board 630. The fuse FUSE2 corresponds to the +24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510 and the +24V fuse EF24 of the effect drive board 1720, which are chip fuses.

In the present embodiment, +12V (+12V power line) generated by the power generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 is supplied to the power supply board 630 as described above. ) is not provided. As a result, the load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (an electrical drive source, a sensor to which +12 V is supplied among various sensors, and a load electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (electrical The fuse corresponding to the power supply line (+12V, the same potential (+12V)) supplied to the drive source, the sensor to which +12V is supplied among various sensors, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 , a fuse FUSE1 serving as a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply board 630, and a fuse FUSE2 serving as a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) provided on the power supply board 630. Yes.

For the +12V (+12V power line) generated by the power supply generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, the power supply board 630 has a +12V glass tube fuse for the +12V power line (DC power line 2 (DC power line 2)). If a glass tube fuse is provided and +12V is supplied from the power supply generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 via this glass tube fuse for +12V, the load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (electrically Drive source, sensor to which +12V is supplied among various sensors, load electrically connected to payout control board 633 (electrical drive source, sensor to which +12V is supplied among various sensors, main control board 1310 The fuse corresponding to the power supply line (+12 V and the same potential (+12 V)) supplied to the power supply board 630 is a glass tube fuse for AC 24 V 1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply board 630 a fuse FUSE1 that serves as a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) provided on the power supply board 630; and a +12V power supply line (DC power supply line 2 (DC power supply line 2) ) and a glass tube fuse for +12V, which is a glass tube fuse for +12V. Among the power lines supplied to the load, the +12V power line includes a fuse FUSE1 that is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power line 1) provided on the power supply board 630, and an AC24V2 (AC power line 1) provided on the power supply board 630. 2), a +12V glass tube fuse serving as a glass tube fuse for the +12V power supply line (DC power supply line 2 (DC power supply line 2)) provided on the power supply board 630, and a chip fuse. The +12V fuse SF12 of the peripheral control board 1510, the +12V fuse EF12 of the effect drive board 1720, the +12V fuse DF12 of each decoration board of the game board, and the +12 fuses PF12, PF12a1, and PF12a2 of the effect display device 1600 are It will be dealt with.

In addition, the "specific load on the production side" means that, among the plurality of loads on the production side, the probability of failure is higher than the other loads, or the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the main control board at the time of failure 1310 has a great influence on the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. A load against the generated wiring (harness) can be mentioned.

A load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (an electrical drive source, a sensor supplied with +24V among various sensors (or a sensor supplied with +24V instead of a sensor supplied with +12V) is a sensor to which +24V is supplied (+24V power supply substitute sensor)), a load electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (an electrical drive source, a sensor to which +24V is supplied among various sensors (or +12V is supplied If a sensor to which +24 V is supplied is used instead of the sensor to which +24 V is supplied, the sensor to which +24 V is supplied (+24 V power supply alternative sensor)), the power supply supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e provided on the main control board 1310 When the fuse FUSE3, which is a glass tube fuse (glass tube fuse) of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the line (+24 V and the same potential (+24 V)), is blown (cut), the function of progressing the game is impaired. On the other hand, when the +24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510 and the +24V fuse EF24 of the performance drive board 1720, which are chip fuses on the effect side, are fused (cut) For example, although the game machine malfunctions due to the malfunction that the +24V system electric drive source of the game board is not operated, the payout of game balls is not affected when a big win game state that is advantageous to the player occurs. Therefore, the damage (stress) to the player can be minimized.

A +12V glass tube fuse is provided on the power supply board 630 for +12V (+12V power supply line) created by the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, and the power supply of the power supply board 630 is generated via this +12V glass tube fuse. When supplying +12V from the circuit 630f, the load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (an electrical drive source, a sensor to which +12V is supplied among various sensors, a payout control board 633 and an electrical The power supply line (+12V, the same potential If the glass tube fuse for +12V of the power supply board 630 corresponding to (+12V) blows (breaks), the function of progressing the game is impaired, so the game is substantially stopped. +12V fuse SF12 of the peripheral control board 1510, +12V fuse EF12 of the effect drive board 1720, +12V fuse DF12 of each decoration board of the game board, and +12 fuse PF12, PF12a1, PF12a2 of the effect display device 1600. If the is fused (cut), for example, the +12V system electric drive source of the game board will not operate, and various LEDs on the game board and door frame will not light up. When a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the payout of game balls is not affected, so damage (stress) to the player can be minimized.

In this embodiment, the AC power supply (AC24V) supplied from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the interface board 635 via the power supply board 630, regardless of the ON/OFF operation of the power switch 630a, as described above. It is supplied from this interface board 635 to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 . As described above, the power line connector DCN2 of the power board 630 is connected to the pachinko machine via the interface board power line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 96, and the CR unit power line (not shown). 1 is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the unit, and AC 24VA and AC 24V are supplied to the CR unit (not shown). In this embodiment, the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 is provided with glass tube fuses (not shown) corresponding to AC24VA and AC24V respectively (or glass tube fuses (not shown) corresponding to only one of AC24VA and AC24V). Glass tube fuses (not shown) corresponding to AC24VA and AC24V from the power supply board 630 are supplied to the CR unit provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 through glass tube fuses provided on the interface board 635 .

In addition, in this embodiment, the power generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, the control power generation circuit 1510z of the peripheral control board 1510, and the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z of the effect display device 1600 are provided with an overcurrent protection circuit (so-called OCP ( An abbreviation for Over Current Protection)) may be installed.

In this embodiment, a +5V glass tube fuse is provided on the power supply board 630 for +5V (+5V power supply line) created by the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, and the power supply is supplied via this +5V glass tube fuse. +5V may be supplied from the power generation circuit 630f of the substrate 630. FIG.

Next, countermeasures against the commercial power supply voltage are taken in the event that the plug of the power cord for supplying AC power from the island facility of the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is erroneously inserted into the power outlet of the commercial power supply voltage (AC 100V). Another configuration of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as "commercial power supply voltage countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment") will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 shows a configuration for dealing with the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 215, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. expressed.

[Comparison between the configuration for measures against commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment and the configuration for measures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the power supply breakdown circuit 630g is composed of the FET Q5, the resistors R25 and R24, and the capacitor C22 as described above, and the power supply breakdown circuit 630f is connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. When a circuit gate signal is input to the gate terminal of FETQ5 via resistor R25, FETQ5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of FETQ5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of FETQ5 are overloaded). FET Q5 is destroyed by the current), so that the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of FET Q5 are electrically connected is maintained.

Further, in the configuration for countermeasures against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, as described above, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, which is a circuit for countermeasures against common mode noise, and the circuit for countermeasures against normal mode noise. The output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the common mode noise suppression circuit CMC, the normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1. there is

In addition, in the configuration for dealing with the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, the AC 24V1 and AC24V2, the common mode noise of which is reduced by the choke coil L1, are input to the rectifier circuit 630c as described above, and are also input to the diodes D5, They are input to the anode terminal of D6, respectively output from the cathode terminals of diodes D5 and D6, and input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. Then, the L side (24 VAC 1) is input to the input terminal 3 of the power switch 630a via the fuse FUSE1, and the N side (24 VAC 2) is directly input to the input terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. be done.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the fuse FUSE2 in the configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment is omitted for AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall. Briefly explaining this, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the AC24V from the island facility of the game hall is connected to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 on both power cords (L side (AC24V1), N side ( AC 24V 2)), but a test conducted by the applicant found that omitting one side (the N side (AC 24V 2)) did not cause any problems. As a result, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. Cost reduction is realized by inputting as it is.

Further, in the configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the same switch as the power switch 630a in the configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment is adopted. Briefly explaining this, with respect to the power switch 630a, it is necessary to reliably connect/disconnect both the L side and the N side of the AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall. As a result, the power switch 630a in the configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment is similar to the power switch 630a in the configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment. Both the L side and the N side can be disconnected/connected simultaneously.

In addition, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to one of the microgap type arresters AL1 in between. The other end of the microgap type arrester AL1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the earth connection terminal DCN5. The microgap type arrester AL1 sends the surge voltage to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5 when a high voltage (referred to as "surge voltage") enters the AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall due to a lightning strike. Surge voltage is limited by flowing current to prevent surge voltage from being applied to the power switch 630a. The surge voltage is limited by passing a surge current through the frame ground FG2 so that the surge voltage is not applied to the power switch 630a. In addition, the micro-gap type arrester AL1 is installed in a pachinko machine 1 in a game hall by mistakenly by an operator, and is placed near the external terminal plate 558 shown in FIG. If you forget to electrically connect the ground terminal (island equipment ground) and the ground connection terminal of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, electromagnetic noise will be emitted from the island equipment of the game hall as collateral. The noise tolerance can be improved by leading to the N side (AC24V2) of AC 24V and removing it.

Further, in the configuration for countermeasures against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC that is a circuit for countermeasures against common mode noise, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC that is a circuit for countermeasures against normal mode noise, and the choke coil In addition to L1, it is composed of a surge absorber SA1 that constitutes a power supply breakdown circuit 630g', and the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power supply switch 630a are connected to a common mode noise suppression circuit CMC, a normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and a power supply breakdown circuit. 630g', and is input to the choke coil L1. The surge absorber SA1 constituting the power breakdown circuit 630g' has a faster response speed than the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 of the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the varistor ZNR3 of the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC (for example, surge absorber SA1 A silicon surge absorber can be mentioned.), one end of which is electrically connected to the L side of AC 24V (AC24V1) via the power switch 630a, and the other end is connected to the N side of AC 24V via the power switch 630a ( AC 24V 2), and when a circuit voltage exceeding the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) is input, a large current flows and is destroyed, causing a short circuit and a short mode.

A varistor may be used as the surge absorber SA1, but here, a silicon surge absorber (also called a semiconductor varistor, VRD, etc.) is used. A silicon surge absorber can absorb a surge voltage that rises more rapidly than a normal varistor, and utilizes the avalanche (electron avalanche) effect of a pn junction of silicon. This silicon surge absorber is characterized by very quick response to surges, excellent control voltage characteristics, and very small leakage current. Since the surge absorber SA1 is an AC circuit, a bidirectional type should be used, and a rated voltage (breakdown voltage) of 47V, which is about twice the input voltage, should be selected.

Further, in the configuration for dealing with the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are electrically connected to the No. 2 (COM) terminal of the relay RL1. , is electrically connected to one end of the thermistor TH1. The other end of the thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to the third (NO) terminal of the relay RL1 and also electrically connected to one end of the choke coil L2. The other end of choke coil L2 is electrically connected to power factor improvement circuit 630d. Four terminals of the relay RL1 are electrically connected to the ground (GND), and a first terminal of the relay RL1 is electrically connected to a relay drive circuit 630i which will be described later. As a result, both ends of the thermistor TH1 are electrically connected between terminals (that is, between contacts) of the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1. The thermistor TH1 is of a type whose resistance value decreases as the temperature rises. , the capacitor has a curve in which the value of the allowable capacitor capacity decreases, and is selected so that it will not be destroyed even if AC 100 V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, is applied.

The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e, to the power generating circuit 630f, and to the relay driving circuit 630i. When receiving the direct current from the smoothing circuit 630e, the relay driving circuit 630 generates an operating voltage (+24V) capable of operating the coil of the relay RL1 and supplies it to the first terminal of the relay RL1.

When the power switch 630a is turned on, the rectified DC power output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is depleted due to power shortage from the relay drive circuit 630i (relay drive Since the coil of the relay RL1 is not activated (due to insufficient +24V power supply from the circuit 630i), the relay RL1 cannot be turned ON (that is, the relay RL1 remains OFF). ), input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the thermistor TH1 and the choke coil L2 without passing through the relay RL1 while the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 are in a non-conducting state. be done. As a result, the rectified DC power output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c flows only toward the thermistor TH1. Although a weak current flows through the load subsequent to the thermistor TH1, the current flowing through the thermistor TH1 gradually increases the temperature of the thermistor TH1. A strong current is passed through the load of

On the other hand, when the power switch 630a is turned on and the power from the relay drive circuit 630i (+24V power supply from the relay drive circuit 630i) switches the coil of the relay RL1 from the inoperative state to the operative state, the relay RL1 is turned ON, the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are brought into a state of conduction, and the rectified DC power supply output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is supplied. passes through the thermistor TH1 and between the second (COM) and third terminals of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts), and passes through the choke coil L2 to the power factor correction circuit 630d. is entered. As a result, the rectified DC power output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is applied between the terminals 2 (COM) and 3 of the relay RL1 (that is, the contact point). ), the current to the thermistor TH1 decreases, the temperature of the thermistor TH1 decreases, and the resistance of the thermistor TH1 rises accordingly, causing the 2nd (COM) terminal and 3rd terminal of the relay RL1. and the current flowing between the terminals (that is, between the contacts) will increase.

As described above, the thermistor TH1 is of a type whose resistance value decreases as the temperature rises. When flowing through thermistor TH1, the current to the load following thermistor TH1 increases as the temperature of thermistor TH1 increases and the resistance decreases. In other words, the current flowing through the choke coil L2 is limited until the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises. When this function is used, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for game machines of the island facility of the game hall, and the power supply of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage for game machines of AC 24V. If it is accidentally plugged into an outlet, the circuit voltage applied to the surge absorber SA1 will greatly exceed the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) before the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises, causing a surge current to flow through the surge absorber SA1. Absorber SA1 can be destroyed to set short mode.

In such a state, when the power switch 630a is turned on, a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1 through the surge absorber SA1 in the short mode state in the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the fuse FUSE1 is closed. It will be fused. In addition, since the fuse FUSE1 is blown while the surge absorber SA1 is in the short mode, a large current does not continue to flow through the surge absorber SA1. Can prevent being destroyed in open mode. As a result, only the power board 630 is destroyed, and even if the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, each board inside the pachinko machine 1 other than the power board 630 is destroyed. can be reliably prevented.

In the configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the AC-DET terminal for monitoring the power supply voltage with common mode noise reduced by the choke coil L1 in the configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment. , the FUSE-GATE terminal for outputting the gate signal for the power supply breakdown circuit and the CGND terminal for causing large currents to flow through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are not required, so that the circuit configuration is not complicated.

In addition, the plug of the power cord was not inserted into the power outlet of AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for game machines of the island facility of the game hall, and was mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage for game machines of AC 24V. In the state where the surge absorber SA1 that is inserted and constitutes the power supply breaking circuit 630g' is destroyed, the fuse FUSE1 is replaced with one that is not blown, and the plug of the power cord is connected to the game machine power supply voltage of the island facility of the game hall. , the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g' has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained, so the fuse replaced through the surge absorber SA1 A large current flows through FUSE1, and the fuse FUSE1 is melted again. In other words, unless the power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g' has already been destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g' has not been destroyed, Even if the plug of the power cord is inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines of the island facility of the game hall, the game cannot be started.

In the above-described embodiment, a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, and a power supply breaker circuit 630g are provided on a single power supply substrate 630. , various electronic parts and the like are provided, but it is also possible to provide them separately on two substrates. For example, the power supply board 630 is composed of a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly comprises the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B includes the diodes D5 and D6, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, the power breakdown circuit 630g, and the choke coil L2 shown in FIG. , fuse FUSE3, and wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via power supply wiring. The AC 24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power supply board 630A pass through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring to the second power supply board 630B. When input to the connector B, it is input to the rectifier circuit 630c, is also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the power generation circuit 630f. It will happen. Various DC power sources such as +24V, +12V, and +5V generated in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the first power supply board 630A.

Also, the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 215 can be divided into two substrates, a first power supply substrate 630A and a second power supply substrate 630B. In this case, the circuits of the first power supply board 630A include the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuse FUSE1, the microgap type arrester AL1, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B, which is mainly composed of the connector A, includes the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, the relay drive circuit 630i, the relay RL1, the It mainly consists of thermistor TH1, choke coil L2, fuse FUSE3, and wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via power supply wiring. The AC 24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power supply board 630A pass through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring to the second power supply board 630B. Input to connector B. Various DC power sources such as +24V, +12V, and +5V generated in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the first power supply board 630A.

[11. Main control board circuit, payout control board circuit, production drive board circuit]
Next, the main control board 1310, the circuit of the payout control board 633, the circuit of the effect driving board 1720, etc. shown in FIG. 211 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 216 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 217 is a circuit diagram of the motor drive circuit, FIG. 218 is a circuit diagram of the main control solenoid drive circuit, and FIG. 220 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of a payout control board, FIG. 221 is a circuit showing a payout motor drive circuit, FIG. 222 is a circuit diagram showing an effect control solenoid drive circuit, FIG. 223 is a circuit diagram showing the performance control motor drive circuit, and FIG. 224 is a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the board on which the fuse is mounted. First, the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be explained, and then the circuit of the payout control board 633 and the circuit of the effect drive board will be explained. Wiring to power supply and input signal boards in circuits on various boards will also be described as appropriate.

[11-1. Main control board circuit]
Of the power supplies in the circuit of the main control board 1310, the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with +12V from the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and this supply +5V is generated as a local power supply which is a control power supply for the main control board 1310 in the +12V to +5V generation circuit 1310g. This +5V local power supply has the same potential as the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply substrate 630 .

As shown in FIG. 216, +5V as a local power supply which is the control power supply for the main control board 1310 in the +5V generating circuit 1310g is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310h. The main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its 1st terminal applied with +5V from the +5V generation circuit 1310g, its 2nd terminal electrically connected to the ground (GND), and removes noise components from its 3rd terminal. +5V is output. The +5V applied to the No. 1 terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), so that ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) has been removed and smoothed.

The +5 V output from the third terminal is connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). Ripple is further removed and smoothed by being electrically connected to each other. This smoothed +5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is released after the instantaneous power failure occurs. It is applied as +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

A VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC3, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0. The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC3. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0. The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via the . As a result, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is supplied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, via the resistor MR0. The diode MD0 prevents the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 from being supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of , through the resistor MR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3051, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052, and the second starting opening sensor 2401 , the detection signal from the first big winning hole sensor 2402, the second big winning hole sensor 2601, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1111, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, etc. They are respectively input to the input circuit 1310b.

A detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3051, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052, a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, and a detection from the first big winning opening sensor 2402. Signals, detection signals from the second prize winning opening sensor 2601 and the magnetic sensor 1111 are respectively input to the input terminals PA0 to PA6 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminal PA7 is an empty terminal. The input terminal PA7, which is an empty terminal, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal.

The operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is paid out via the main control output circuit 1310c. It is output to the control board 633 . This input port PB is composed of 8 bits like the input port PA. A power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to the input terminal PB1 of the input port PB (not shown). An input terminal that is input to each of the predetermined input terminals and becomes a free terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) as a free terminal process, like the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs various signals from the output terminal of its predetermined output port through the main control output circuit 1310c. For example, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e via the main control output circuit 1310c from the output terminal of its predetermined output port, or outputs a drive signal via the main control output circuit 1310c. output to the main control solenoid circuit 1310d.

In some cases, detection signals from other sensors are input to predetermined input terminals of the port PC instead of being input to the port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b. is electrically connected to the ground (GND) as a free terminal, like the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA. Port PC, like input ports PA and PB, consists of 8 bits.

[11-1-1. Main control input circuit]
Next, the main control input circuit 1310b will be described. Since the main control input circuit 1310b is the same circuit, the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input will be described here as an example.

As shown in FIG. 216, the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input has one end connected to the +12V power line (the power line generated and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f). (that is, the +12V power supply line), and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR4, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310, in addition to the resistor MR3. The emitter terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 connects The +5V power supply line generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is electrically different from the power supply line generated and supplied by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line). The non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 is electrically connected to the other end of the connected resistor MR5 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the signal input to one of them (MIC10A)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a via a shaping and outputting without inverting the logic of the waveform.

[11-1-2. Motor drive circuit under control of main control board]
Next, the motor drive circuit under the control of main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIG. In some cases, the game board is provided with a member that distributes the path to the downstream side using a distribution piece that swings like a wiper for the game ball that has entered a ball entry portion (not shown) provided in the game area 5a of the game board 5. . A stepping motor, which is a driving motor, can be mentioned as an electric driving source for operating such sorting pieces. This drive motor is driven by a motor drive circuit 1310v of the main control board 1310. FIG. Rotational motion of the rotary shaft of the drive motor is converted into wiper-like oscillating motion by the distributing piece via a gear mechanism (not shown). Here, a first distribution drive for distributing a game ball that has entered a ball entering portion (not shown) provided in the game area 5a of the game board 5 to a downstream path using a first distribution piece that swings like a wiper. A drive circuit for the motor and a drive circuit for the second sorting drive motor that sorts the game balls sorted by the first sorting piece to a further downstream path using the second sorting piece that swings like a wiper. do.

The motor drive circuit 1310v includes a drive circuit 1310va for the first sorting drive motor and a drive circuit 1310vb for the second sorting drive motor. The drive circuit 1310va of the first sorting drive motor switches between the operating voltage and the stopping voltage as excitation to φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 according to the rotation state of the first sorting drive motor. and a first sorting drive motor drive IC 1310n capable of driving the first sorting drive motor. The drive circuit 1310vb of the second sorting drive motor switches between the operating voltage and the stopping voltage as excitation to φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 according to the rotation state of the second sorting drive motor. and a second sorting drive motor drive IC 1310q capable of driving the second sorting drive motor. Since the drive circuit 1310va for the first sorting drive motor and the drive circuit 1310vb for the second sorting drive motor are the same circuit, the drive circuit 1310va for the first sorting drive motor will be described here, and the second sorting drive will be described. The motor drive circuit 1310vb may be indicated in parentheses following the reference numerals referred to in the description of the first distribution drive motor drive circuit 1310va.

The first sorting drive motor always swings the first sorting piece like a wiper, and the second sorting drive motor always swings the second sorting piece like a wiper. must be driven all the time. However, when the first and second sorting drive motors are driven all the time, the first and second sorting drive motors generate excessive heat, which drives the first and second sorting drive motors or the first and second sorting drive motors. In addition, the rotary motion of the rotary shaft of the drive motor may cause a wiper-like oscillating motion of the sorting piece via a gear mechanism (not shown). Therefore, if the gear mechanism fails for some reason and becomes difficult to rotate, the first and second sorting drive motors that have a problem with the gear mechanism and become difficult to rotate will Due to the overload and excessive heat generation, there is a risk that the sorting drive motor and the sorting drive motor driving IC that drives the sorting drive motor may malfunction or malfunction. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress heat generation even if the first and second sorting drive motors are constantly driven.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first and second sorting drive motors are driven to swing the first and second sorting pieces like wipers, the operating voltage is used, whereas the first , When the second sorting drive motor is driven to stop the first and second sorting pieces, the voltage switching circuit is controlled to use the stopping voltage, and the current flowing to the first and second sorting drive motors is limited using a polyswitch as a resettable fuse to protect the first and second sorting drive motors and the first and second sorting drive motor drive ICs that drive the first and second sorting drive motors. Heat generation due to constant driving of the first and second sorting drive motors is suppressed.

[11-1-2a. First and second distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit]
The first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) mainly comprises a transistor MTR50 (MTR60), a field effect transistor (FET) MF50 (MF60), a diode M50 (M60), and a polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) as a resettable fuse. It is The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) and electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR51 (MR61) whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is connected to the. The other end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) is electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310c as a line for transmitting the voltage switching 1 signal.

Specifically, the other end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) is connected to a first distribution piece voltage switching D-type flip-flop (not shown as a line for transmitting a signal called voltage switching 1) (not shown as a line for transmitting a signal called voltage switching 2). It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop for switching the voltage of the second distributing piece that does not operate). The input terminal of this first distribution piece voltage switching D type flip-flop (second distribution piece voltage switching D type flip-flop) is the first distribution piece voltage switching output terminal (second distribution piece voltage switching) of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. is electrically connected to the two-segment voltage switching output terminal).

The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to the gate terminal G of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) through the resistor MR52. It is connected to the. A gate terminal G of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to a source terminal S of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) via a resistor MR53 (MR63). The source terminal S of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is connected to the +12V power line (the power line created and supplied by the +12V power source creation circuit 630fb of the power source creation circuit 630f on the power source substrate 630 (that is, the +12V power source line)). properly connected. The drain terminal D of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 (MD60), which is a rectifying diode, and is also electrically connected to one end of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60). . The anode terminal of the diode MD50 (MD60) is a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310), It is electrically connected to the power supply line generated and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa (that is, different from the +5V power supply line). The other end of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) is electrically connected to the anode terminals of Zener diodes MD51 and MD52 (MD61 and MD62), respectively, and supplies power to the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor). It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power supply line of +12V-U (+12V-D).

[11-1-2b. First and second sorting drive motor drive IC]
The first sorting drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) incorporates four chipped NPN-type Darlington transistors and four diodes in the same package. Of the four elements of the NPN Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR54 (MR64), and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN Darlington transistor is Electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR55 (MR65), the base terminal 8 of the third NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR56 (MR66) and the base of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor. Terminal 12 is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR57 (MR67).

A collector terminal 2 of the first NPN-type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to a terminal of a connector as a Uφ1 line (Dφ1 line) through which a current for exciting φ1 of the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) flows, The collector terminal 4 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as the U/φ1 line (D/φ1 line) through which the current that excites /φ1 of the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) flows. The collector terminal 9 of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as the Uφ2 line (Dφ2 line) through which the current that excites φ2 of the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) flows. and the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor serves as a U/φ2 line (D/φ2 line) through which a current that excites /φ2 of the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) flows. It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector.

The other ends of the resistors MR54-MR57 (MR64-MR67) are electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control output circuit 1310c. Specifically, the other end of the resistor MR54 (MR64), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the first NPN-type Darlington transistor, instructs the start or stop of the excitation of φ1 of the first sorting drive motor. As a line for transmitting the signal MPD0 (MPD4), it is electrically connected to the output terminal of the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first sorting drive motor (not shown) (the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the second sorting drive motor (not shown)). It is The input terminal of the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first sorting drive motor (φ1 D-type flip-flop of the second sorting drive motor) is the φ1 output of the first sorting drive motor of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the terminal (output terminal for φ1 of the second sorting drive motor).

The other end of the resistor MR55 (MR65), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor, is the MPD1 (MPD5 ) is electrically connected to the output terminal of the /φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first sorting drive motor (not shown) (the /φ1 D-type flip-flop of the second sorting drive motor (not shown)). there is The input terminal of the /φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first sorting drive motor (the /φ1 D-type flip-flop of the second sorting drive motor) is the / It is electrically connected to the φ1 output terminal (the /φ1 output terminal of the second distribution drive motor).

The other end of the resistor MR56 (MR66), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor, is MPD2 (MPD6) for instructing the start or stop of the excitation of φ2 of the first sorting drive motor. is electrically connected to the output terminal of the φ2 D-type flip-flop of the first sorting drive motor (not shown) (the φ2 D-type flip-flop of the second sorting drive motor, not shown). The input terminal of the φ2 D-type flip-flop of the first sorting drive motor (the φ2 D-type flip-flop of the second sorting drive motor) is the φ2 output of the first sorting drive motor of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the terminal (output terminal for φ2 of the second sorting drive motor).

The other end of the resistor MR57 (MR67), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor, is the MPD3 (MPD7 ) is electrically connected to the output terminal of the /φ2 D-type flip-flop of the first sorting drive motor (not shown) (the /φ2 D-type flip-flop of the second sorting drive motor (not shown)). there is The input terminal of the /φ2 D-type flip-flop of the first sorting drive motor (the /φ2 D-type flip-flop of the second sorting drive motor) is the / It is electrically connected to the φ2 output terminal (the /φ2 output terminal of the second distribution drive motor).

The emitter terminal of the first NPN Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the first sorting drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The emitter terminal of the third NPN Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the first sorting drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The first sorting drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) has four built-in diodes. are placed in the package.

The anode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected inside the package to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN Darlington transistor, and the anode terminal of the second diode is connected to the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN Darlington transistor. are electrically connected inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected inside the package to the cathode terminal 3 of the first sorting drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q). It is The cathode terminal 3 of the first sorting drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD51 (MD61).

The anode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected inside the package to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN Darlington transistor, and the anode terminal of the fourth diode is connected to the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor. are electrically connected inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected inside the package to the cathode terminal 10 of the first sorting drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q). It is The cathode terminal 10 of the first sorting drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD52 (MD62).

The first to fourth diodes convert into heat the back electromotive force generated when the excitation of φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 of the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) is stopped. The first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors are protected by removing the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors.

The +12V-U (+12V-D) power supply line that supplies power to the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) is connected to the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) via connector terminals and wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to the third pin φ2C (common) and the fourth pin φ1C (common) of the connector of the motor). The Uφ1 line (Dφ1 line) through which the current that excites φ1 of the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) flows is connected to the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) via a connector terminal and wiring (not shown). is electrically connected to φ1 of the sixth pin of the connector. The U/φ1 line (D/φ1 line) through which the current that excites /φ1 of the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) flows is connected to the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) via a connector terminal and wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to /φ1 of the second pin of the connector of the dual-dividing drive motor). The Uφ2 line (Dφ2 line) through which the current that excites φ2 of the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) flows is connected to the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) via a connector terminal and wiring (not shown). is electrically connected to φ2 of the fifth pin of the connector. The U/φ2 line (D/φ2 line) through which the current that excites /φ2 of the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) flows is connected to the first sorting drive motor (second It is electrically connected to /φ2 of the first pin of the connector of the dual-dividing drive motor).

MPD0 to MPD3 instructing start and stop of excitation for φ1, /φ1, φ2, and /φ2 of the first sorting drive motor, and start of excitation for φ1, /φ1, φ2, and /φ2 of the second sorting drive motor. When the main control MPU 1310a outputs the oscillation drive data MPD0 to MPD7, which is 8-bit information including MPD4 to MPD7 instructing to stop, the corresponding D-type flip-flops and each resistor described above. are input to the base terminals 1, 5, 8, 12 of the first sorting drive motor drive IC 1310n and the base terminals 1, 5, 8, 12 of the second sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310q, respectively. When the system of the main control board 1310 is started, the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) starts the main control side timer interrupt processing (port output processing) described later after the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. Then, according to the swing drive data MPD0 to MPD3 (MPD4 to MPD7) from the main control MPU 1310a in the port output process, the voltage for operation or the voltage for stop is changed by the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p). A current that excites φ1, /φ1, φ2, and /φ2 of the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) flows with the voltage switched to .

Here, the operation of the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) will be briefly described. The first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) operates when the system of the main control board 1310 is activated (main control side power-on processing described later is performed and main control side timer interrupt processing (port output process) is started), the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is turned off when the logic of the signal voltage switch 1 (voltage switch 2) from the main control MPU 1310a in the port output process is output as the operating voltage logic, The voltage of the power supply line of +12V-U (+12V-D) that supplies power to the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) is raised to the +12V side by the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60), thereby performing the first sorting drive. +12 V is supplied as an operating voltage to the motor (second sorting drive motor) as a power supply line of +12 V-U (+12 V-D) through the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60). It should be noted that the +12V-U (+12V-D) power supply line is not supplied to the +5 power supply line through the diode MD50 (MD60).

On the other hand, when the logic of the signal voltage switching 1 (voltage switching 2) from the main control MPU 1310a is output as the voltage logic for stopping which is the inversion of the voltage logic for operation, the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is turned ON. Then, the +12 V is cut off by the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60), and the power line voltage of +12 V-U (+12 V-D) that supplies power to the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) is applied to the diode MD50. (MD60), +5V is applied to the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) as a stop voltage of +12V-U (+12V-D) through the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60). ) is supplied as a power supply line.

Here, a brief description will be given of the difference in temperature rise between the power consumption of the operation voltage and the power consumption of the stop voltage. The power consumption W can be calculated according to Ohm's law: Voltage V×Voltage V÷Resistance R. The power consumption Wo due to the operating voltage +12V is 144/resistance R (the square of the voltage V/resistance R), and the power consumption Ws due to the stop voltage +5V is 25/resistance R (the square of the voltage V/resistance R). Then, the power consumption Wo at +12V, which is the operating voltage, is more than five times (5.76=144/25) the power consumption Ws at +5V, which is the stopping voltage, so the temperature rise is also about five times or more. becomes. This also applies to the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q).

In other words, even if the temperature rise becomes a problem when driving (continuously driving) a single power supply with +12V, which is the operating voltage, the temperature rise can be suppressed to about one-fifth or less by driving with the +5V, which is the stopping voltage. .

The package of the first sorting drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) consists of first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors that excite φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 of the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor). Absorbing heat generation and heat generated by the first to fourth diodes that convert back electromotive forces from φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 of the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) into heat, This absorbed heat is released to the outside air (surroundings of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q)). Since the island facilities of the game hall are arranged in a line with other pachinko machines facing each other, the temperature inside the island facilities of the game hall is high due to the heat emitted from the power board and various control boards of the pachinko machine.

Therefore, even if the package of the first sorting drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) absorbs the heat generated by the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors and the first to fourth diodes, the first sorting drive motor can still be driven. When the ambient temperature of the IC 1310n (1310q), that is, the temperature of the outside air is high, the efficiency of releasing the absorbed heat to the outside air decreases, so heat is stored in the package of the first sorting drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q). It will happen. Then, when the temperature of the package of the first sorting drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) rises and the junction temperature of the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors rises to the junction temperature, the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors Transistors may fail.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) is driven to rotate the rotating shaft CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise), the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) is rotated. φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 of the drive motor (second sorting drive motor) are continuously excited as much as possible, so that φ1, φ2, and /φ1 of the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) are , /φ2 is stopped, and counter electromotive force generated when excitation of φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 of the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) is stopped is reduced. It is possible to reduce the number of times that power is converted into heat by the first to fourth diodes and removed. As a result, the heat generated by the first to fourth diodes can be kept small, which can contribute to reducing the temperature rise of the package of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors from being damaged by heat.

In this embodiment, the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) does not use a relay, but uses a semiconductor field effect transistor (FET) MF50 (MF60). This is because it is difficult to accurately control the sorting operation due to the time lag that occurs in relays and the large variation in performance between individual relays.

[11-1-2c. poly switch]
Here, a polyswitch will be described as a resettable fuse. The operating voltage or stopping voltage is supplied as a +12V-U (+12V-D) power supply line via the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60) to the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor). In the PolySwitch MPS50 (MPS60), the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature shows that the resistance value increases sharply from a certain temperature, causing the body to generate heat. When cooled, the conductivity returns and recovers, and when this is used, the current flowing to the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor), which is the load, is limited to limit the first sorting drive motor, which is the load. (second distribution drive motor) can be protected. Fuses can be cited as limiting the current to the load. This fuse can cut off the current flowing to the load by melting when an overcurrent flows, but it is necessary to replace the fuse itself with a new one.

However, like the pachinko machine 1, it is necessary to prevent anyone from obtaining illegal game balls by illegally altering the important main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. For this reason, the main control board 1310 is housed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover and a transparent base, and the cover and the base form a sealing mechanism such as a one-way caulking portion. It is crimped with a screw or the like. This crimping part is a sealing mechanism, and has a plurality of crimping parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part using one sealing mechanism. It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed, the cover cannot be removed from the base. Then, if a fuse is mounted on the main control board 1310 and the fuse blows, the crimped portion must be destroyed. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the caulked portion of the main control board box 1320 provided in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be destroyed, so the fuse cannot be replaced and the game cannot be played. is in a state where it cannot be done.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a polyswitch is adopted as an element for limiting overcurrent, like the fuse. As a result, when an overcurrent flows through the polyswitch, the load can be protected by limiting the current flowing to the load by specifying the polyswitch. In other words, unlike a fuse, the PolySwitch itself will not be destroyed by overcurrent, and there is no need to replace it. ) can be protected, and there is no need to destroy the crimped portion.

The polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) has a rectangular parallelepiped main body and a lead shape with two leads protruding downward from the bottom surface. In the PolySwitch MPS50 (MPS60), as described above, in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value increases sharply from a certain temperature, causing the main body to generate heat. When it is cut off and the main body cools down, the conductivity returns and returns. Therefore, in order to efficiently cool the heat generated by the PolySwitch MPS50 (MPS60), the two leads of the PolySwitch MPS50 (MPS60) are arranged in the vertical direction so that the thickness of the main body of the PolySwitch MPS50 (MPS60) is increased. The smaller surface can be oriented vertically, facilitating upward convection of heat generated by the main body of PolySwitch MPS50 (MPS60).

In addition, since a large current flows through the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60), the terminal for supplying power to the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) and each phase of the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) It is arranged near a connector having terminals for exciting (φ1, /φ1, φ2, /φ2). This can contribute to reducing the influence of noise due to the current on the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) with respect to other electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 .

In addition, since the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) can limit the current flowing to the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor), it protects the first sorting drive motor (second sorting drive motor) from overheating. be able to.

In this embodiment, one polyswitch MPS50 is provided exclusively for the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m of the main control board 1310 for the first distribution drive motor, and the polyswitch MPS50 is provided for the second distribution drive motor. A switch MPS 60 is provided exclusively for the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p of the main control board 1310. It may be configured such that one poly-switch is provided exclusively between 9, 11 and the corresponding terminals of the connectors of the first and second sorting drive motors.

Further, in the present embodiment, one poly switch MPS50 is provided exclusively for the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m of the main control board 1310 for the first distribution drive motor, and the poly switch MPS50 is provided for the second distribution drive motor. The switch MPS60 is provided exclusively for the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, it is supplied to the first and second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p, respectively. It may be configured such that one common poly-switch is dedicated to each of the +12V and +5V motor power sources, or +12V is supplied to the first and second sorting stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p, respectively. A configuration may be adopted in which one common polyswitch is dedicated to only the motor power supply.

Further, for example, when a stepping motor is driven as another drive motor together with the first sorting drive motor (the first sorting drive motor is driven by the first sorting drive motor drive IC 1310n, and the other drive motor is driven by the other drive motor When it is driven by a drive IC), the motor power supply to be supplied to the other drive motors together with the first distribution drive motor can be switched by the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m. In this case, the polyswitch MPS50 is a common polyswitch for the first sorting drive motor and the other drive motors. supplied respectively.

Also, in this embodiment, a unipolar stepping motor is used as the first and second sorting drive motors, but instead of this, a bipolar stepping motor may be used. In this case, one polyswitch is dedicated to each terminal to which the motor power supply of +12V and +5V is supplied to the bipolar stepping motor.

In this embodiment, the polyswitch adopted as the resettable fuse is a PPTC (Polymer Positive Temperature Coefficien) such as a thermistor.
However, even if a ceramic PTC (positive temperature coefficient) element or bimetal is used as the resettable fuse, the same effects as those of the polyswitch described above can be obtained.

[11-1-3. Main control solenoid drive circuit]
Next, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d will be described with reference to FIG. A main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d operates a starter solenoid 2415, which is a driving solenoid, as an electrical drive for moving (operating) the second starter door 2414 to open and close the second starter 2004, and a first grand prize winner. The first attacker solenoid 2418, which is a driving solenoid, and the second large winning opening door 2611 are moved (operated) as an electric drive for opening and closing the first large winning opening 2005 by moving (operating) the door 2417. A second attacker solenoid 2612, which is a driving solenoid, is driven as an electrical drive for opening and closing the two major prize winning openings 2006, respectively.

The driving solenoids such as the starter solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2612, etc. are driven by the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and a predetermined condition is established. is driven by The main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d is mainly composed of a drive solenoid drive IC 1310da that drives the drive solenoid.

The starter solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 are connected to the main control solenoid drive circuit of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and a predetermined condition is established, as described above. 1310d, and like the first and second sorting drive motors described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the system of the main control board 1310 starts up (main control side power-on processing described later) is performed and the main control side timer interrupt processing (port output processing), which will be described later, is started). However, while driving the starting solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612, for some reason, the starting solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 generate excessive heat. As a result, malfunction or failure occurs in the starter solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2612 or the drive solenoid drive IC that drives the starter solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2612. Also, the mechanism that opens and closes the second starting port 2004, the mechanism that opens and closes the first large prize winning port 2005, and the mechanism that opens and closes the second large prize winning port 2006 has a problem and is difficult to move (difficult to operate). ), one of the starter solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 malfunctions and becomes difficult to move (difficult to operate). There is a possibility that a problem or failure may occur in the solenoid that has become difficult to move (difficult to operate) or the drive solenoid driving IC that drives the solenoid. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress heat generation even when the starting solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 are driven.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the current flowing through the starter solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 is limited by using a poly switch as a resettable fuse to , the second attacker solenoid 2612 and the starter solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2412, by protecting the drive solenoid drive IC that drives the starter solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2415. Heat generation due to driving of the attacker solenoid 2612 is suppressed.

[11-1-3a. Drive solenoid drive IC]
One end of the PolySwitch MPS40 is electrically connected to a +24V power line (a power line generated and supplied by the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, +24V power line). The other end is electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes MD45 and MD46, respectively. electrically connected to the terminal.

The drive solenoid drive IC 1310da incorporates four chipped NPN-type Darlington transistors and four diodes in the same package. Of the four elements of the NPN Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR45, and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN Darlington transistor is connected to the resistor MR46. The base terminal 8 of the third NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR47.

The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as an S-SOL line through which the current that excites the coil of the starting solenoid 2415 flows, and the collector terminal of the second NPN Darlington transistor. 4 is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a D1-SOL line through which a current that excites the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418 flows, and the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor is connected to the It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as the D2-SOL line through which the current that excites the coil flows.

The other ends of the resistors MR45-MR47 are electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control output circuit 1310c. Specifically, the other end of the resistor MR45, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the first NPN-type Darlington transistor, receives a signal called MPC0 for instructing the start or stop of excitation of the coil of the starting solenoid 2415. is electrically connected to the output terminal of a D-type flip-flop for the coil of the starting solenoid (not shown) as a line for transmitting the . The input terminal of the D-type flip-flop for the coil of the starting solenoid is electrically connected to the output terminal for the coil of the starting solenoid of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The other end of the resistor MR46, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor, is a line for transmitting a signal MPC1 instructing the start or stop of excitation of the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418. is electrically connected to the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop for the coil of the first attacker solenoid (not shown). The input terminal of the D-type flip-flop for the coil of the first attacker solenoid is electrically connected to the output terminal for the coil of the first attacker solenoid of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The other end of the resistor MR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor, is a line for transmitting a signal MPC2 instructing the start or stop of excitation of the coil of the second attacker solenoid 2612. is electrically connected to the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop for the coil of the second attacker solenoid (not shown). The input terminal of the D-type flip-flop for the coil of the second attacker solenoid is electrically connected to the output terminal for the coil of the second attacker solenoid of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The emitter terminal of the first NPN Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The emitter terminal of the third NPN Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the ground (GND), while the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor is connected to the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da. Not connected to the outside.

The drive solenoid drive IC 1310da has four built-in diodes. A pair of first and second diodes are arranged in the package, and a pair of third and fourth diodes are arranged in the package. are placed.

The anode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected inside the package to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN Darlington transistor, and the anode terminal of the second diode is connected to the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN Darlington transistor. are electrically connected inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected inside the package to the cathode terminal 3 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da. The cathode terminal 3 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD45.

The anode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected inside the package to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN Darlington transistor, and the anode terminal of the fourth diode is connected to the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor. and are electrically connected inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected inside the package to the cathode terminal 10 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da. The cathode terminal 10 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD46.

Among the first to fourth diodes, the first to third diodes are energized when the excitation of the coil of the starting solenoid 2415, the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the coil of the second attacker solenoid 2612 is stopped. The first to third NPN-type Darlington transistors are protected by converting the generated back electromotive force into heat and removing it.

A power supply line called SOL+24V that supplies power to the starting solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 is connected to the starting solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, It is electrically connected to each connector of the second attacker solenoid 2612 . The S-SOL line through which the current that excites the coil of the starter solenoid 2415 flows is electrically connected to the connector of the starter solenoid 2415 via a connector terminal and wiring (not shown). A D1-SOL line through which a current that excites the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418 flows is electrically connected to the connector of the first attacker solenoid 2418 via a connector terminal and wiring (not shown). The D2-SOL line through which the current that excites the coil of the second attacker solenoid 2612 flows is electrically connected to the connector of the second attacker solenoid 2612 via a connector terminal and wiring (not shown).

When the system of the main control board 1310 is activated (the main control side power-on processing, which will be described later, is performed, and the main control side timer interrupt processing (port output processing), which will be described later, is started), it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition has been established. Accordingly, in the port output process, the main side drive solenoid which is the information of MPC0 to MPC2 instructing the start and stop of the excitation of the coil of the starter solenoid 2415, the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the coil of the second attacker solenoid 2612. When the drive data MPC0 to MPC2 are output from the main control MPU 1310a, they are input to the base terminals 1, 5 and 8 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da through the corresponding D-type flip-flops and resistors. The drive solenoid drive IC 1310da excites the coil of the starting port solenoid 2415, the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the coil of the second attacker solenoid 2612 in accordance with the main drive solenoid drive data MPC0 to MPC2 from the main control MPU 1310a. pass an electric current.

[11-1-3b. poly switch]
Here, a polyswitch will be described as a resettable fuse. The +24V power line (the power line generated and supplied by the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +24V power line) is the starting solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612. The polyswitch MPS 40 is supplied as a power supply line of SOL + 24 V via the polyswitch MPS 40. In the polyswitch MPS 40, the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature shows that the resistance value increases sharply from a specific temperature, and the body generates heat. When the main body is cooled, the conductivity decreases and the current is cut off, and the conductivity returns and recovers. It is possible to limit the current flowing to the attacker solenoid 2612 to protect the loads, which are the starting solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612. The current to the load is limited by a fuse. This fuse can cut off the current flowing to the load by melting when an overcurrent flows, but the fuse itself must be replaced with a new one.

However, like the pachinko machine 1, it is necessary to prevent anyone from obtaining illegal game balls by illegally altering the important main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Therefore, as described above, the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 composed of the transparent cover and the transparent base, and the cover and the base constitute a sealing mechanism. It is crimped by, for example, a one-way screw of the crimped portion. This crimping part is a sealing mechanism, and has a plurality of crimping parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part using a single sealing mechanism. It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed, the cover cannot be removed from the base. Then, if a fuse is mounted on the main control board 1310 and the fuse melts, the crimped portion must be destroyed. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the caulked portion of the main control board box 1320 provided in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be destroyed, so the fuse cannot be replaced and the game cannot be played. is in a state where it cannot be done.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a polyswitch is adopted as an element for limiting overcurrent, like the fuse. As a result, when an overcurrent flows through the polyswitch, the load can be protected by limiting the current flowing to the load by specifying the polyswitch. In other words, unlike a fuse, the poly switch itself will not be destroyed by overcurrent, and there is no need to replace it. The drive solenoid drive IC 1310da that drives the attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612 can be protected, and there is no need to destroy the crimped portion.

[11-1-4. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 2192, the main control board 1310 has two types: +12V from the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f on the power substrate 630 and +24V from the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f on the power substrate 630. is supplied through the payout control board 633, and +12V and +24V are input to the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and when a power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, a power failure warning signal is sent as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 1310a and a payout control board. It outputs to payout control MPU 633aa of 633, peripheral control board 1510, effect display device 1600 and the like. When a power failure warning signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, for example, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs main control side power failure processing in the main control side power on processing described below to stop the progress of the game. Then, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 performs the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later, stops the progress of payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls), and stops the peripheral The control board 1510 performs backup processing of the effect information, and the effect display device 1600 can reliably complete the main control side power failure processing by the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control unit power failure processing by the payout control 633aa. In order to cut power consumption, an inverter (not shown) that creates a power source for the backlight is turned off to stop the progress of the presentation.

Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of +24 V power failure or momentary power failure, +12 V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring, and the output of a power failure warning signal.

[11-1-4a. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 219, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

One end of the REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 is connected to a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (created by a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310). +5V power supply line, which is different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line). It is electrically connected to the end and +5 V produced on the main control board side is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in this embodiment) that serves as a comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled by the capacitor MC20. (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is connected to the +24V power supply line (the power supply line created and supplied by the +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, the +24V power supply line) monitor voltage V1 (hereinafter referred to as "+24 V monitor voltage V1") and the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC 21B) is used to connect the +12 V power supply line (power supply line) to the reference voltage Vref. A monitor voltage V2 (hereinafter referred to as “+12V monitor voltage V2”) of a power supply line (that is, a +12V power supply line) created and supplied by a +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the creation circuit 630f and a reference voltage Vref. A monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the positive terminal No. 5, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the negative terminal No. 6 of the MIC 21B. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment.The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, , one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the other end of a capacitor MC21, which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The ripple is removed and smoothed by the MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

[11-1-4b. +24V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +24V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitor voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 219, one end of the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied, is connected to the +24V power line (which is generated by the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f). The other end of the resistor MR21 electrically connected to the supplied power line (that is, the +24V power line) and the other end of the resistor MR22 electrically connected to the ground (GND) are electrically connected. and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC23, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). A monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V applied to a certain terminal No. 3 is divided by +24 V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC23. , when +24V has a power failure or momentary power failure, +24V is monitored when the voltage starts to drop from +24V and reaches a preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The voltage V1 is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. and the other end of a capacitor MC24, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. . Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is controlled by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal raised to the +5V side created on the control board side and having a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[11-1-4c. +12V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +12V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 219, one end of the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21 to which +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is connected to the +12V power supply line (which is generated by +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb of power supply generating circuit 630f). The other end of the resistor MR24 electrically connected to the supplied power line (that is, the +12V power line) and the other end of the resistor MR25 electrically connected to the ground (GND) are electrically connected. The other end of the resistors MR24 and MR25 connected together and the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), are electrically connected to the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V applied to a certain terminal No. 5 is divided by +12 V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC25. , +12V is monitored when the voltage starts to drop from +12V and reaches a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V). The voltage V2 is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A described above. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC24 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). are electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

When the +12V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is mainly controlled by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal raised to the +5V side created on the control board side and having a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the side and has a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[11-1-4d. Power failure warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW at the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, it releases the latched state and resets the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal). (a logic signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a logic HI signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state by inputting a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the logic of the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is LOW. is input, the state of outputting a signal with logic HI from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is maintained (at this time, the signal output from 1Q with the logic inverted is negative logic maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a 1D terminal as a D input terminal and a 1CK terminal as a clock input terminal, both of which are electrically connected to the ground (GND), and thus are clock input terminals. So that the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal does not change, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. circuit is configured. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors momentary power failure, is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC22, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The applied +5V generated by the main control board side is smoothed by removing ripples by a capacitor MC22, and the GND terminal, which is a ground terminal, is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the logic of the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal. is electrically unconnected to the outside.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a through the main control output circuit 1310c to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal. This power failure clear signal is designed to be started and stopped after a predetermined time has passed in the processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a when power is turned on on the main control side, which will be described later. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310c with the logic being LOW. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit 1310c and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is adapted to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state in which the logic is LOW to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. A signal output from the terminal is input to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a as a blackout warning signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310c, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, 1310c outputs to the payout control board 633 as a payout power outage warning signal and outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b, which electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a, is a D-type flip-flop as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. is electrically connected to The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27 and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. and a non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 comprises eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (MIC23A) shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to it without inverting it. ) to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR20. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5 V created on the main control board side, and the transistor The MTR 20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the +5V side generated by the main control board side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the main control MPU 1310a. It is input to the input terminal of port PB.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. is entered in

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310c that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 633 as a payout power outage warning signal is an open collector output type, as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b, and is connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 via the resistor MR30. electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage has a resistor MR32 electrically connected to a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. , and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33 and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). , and is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 633a shown in FIG. 211 in the payout control board 633 In the circuit 633ab, one end is electrically connected to a +12V power supply line (a power supply line created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, a +12V power supply line), and a pull-up resistor (not shown). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the prescribed input port of the payout control MPU 633aa shown in FIG.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is a switching circuit of the preceding stage, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 of the succeeding stage is a switching circuit of the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 .

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the preceding transistor MTR21 is turned off, the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is applied to the main control board side by the resistor MR32. By pulling up to the positive +5V side, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5 V created on the main control board side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up by the resistor MR32 to the +5V side created on the main control board side and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning ON the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. . As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 633 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21. The input turns ON the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness). A payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 633 .

219, the main control output circuit 1310c that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal is an open collector output type. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. It is connected to the. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), one end of the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) in the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the +12V power supply line (power supply generator). It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the +12V power supply line) generated and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the circuit 630f, and is shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR23. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +5 V created on the main control board side, and the transistor The MTR 23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. is input to the peripheral control board 1510 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness). 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a blackout warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A main control output circuit 1310c that outputs a signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal and a transistor each have one transistor, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral control board 1510 The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is applied to the payout control board 633 as the payout power outage notice signal. There are two transistors in the main control output circuit 1310c that outputs as , and the logic of the output power failure warning signal is input to the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a The logic is the inversion of the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal, which is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

One end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR29 which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, and the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is connected to the other end of the resistor MR29. is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the wiring (harness), the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310c is connected to the payout control In the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a on the substrate 633, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the transistor of the main control output circuit 1310c The collector terminal of the MTR 23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is This is because the main control board 1310 connects the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is mounted on the main control board 1310a, the power failure warning is performed by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using +5V created on the main control board side, which is the control power supply of the main control board 1310a, whereas the main control board 1310 and Between the payout control board 633 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main Power outage notice is performed by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage notice signal using +12V, which is a DC power supply higher than +5V, for example, which is the control power supply for the control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU 633aa, and the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Thus, the power supply line (that is, the +12V power supply line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 is the main control input circuit of the main control board 1310 as described above. 1310b, the motor drive circuit 1310v of the main control board 1310, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 212, and the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 213, the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 shown in FIG. 213, the LED constant current drive circuit of each decoration board of the game board 5 shown in FIG. 213, the effect display device shown in FIG. It is supplied to a liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z of 1600, and the liquid crystal panel, backlight, drive circuit, etc. of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. In other words, the +12V power supply line is supplied to the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the effect drive board 1720, each decoration board of the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, etc. in addition to the main control board 1310. Even if the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, for example, due to an electrical trouble in the control power generation circuit 1510z of the peripheral control board 1510, the control power generation circuit 1510z, the potential of the +12V power supply line drops, or the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z of the effect display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel of the effect display device 1600, the backlight, and the drive circuit for some reason. Due to trouble, an overcurrent flows to any of the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z of the effect display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel, backlight, drive circuit, etc. of the effect display device 1600, causing the potential of the +12V power line to drop, When the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is driven by the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the board 1720 (or the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is on standby. ), due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, an overcurrent flows to the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the +12V driver circuit 1720c2, causing the +12V power line The +12V power supply line is affected by an overcurrent flowing through the LED constant current drive circuit of the decoration board of the game board 5 due to a drop in potential or an electrical trouble for some reason in the LED constant current drive circuit of the decoration board of the game board 5. potential drops. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530 that supplies the +12V power supply line from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display device 1600, the effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 1720, the board such as each decoration board of the game board 5 Even if a leakage current or a short circuit occurs due to some electrical trouble in the wiring pattern that is formed or the wiring (harness) that electrically connects between boards, etc., +12 V due to overcurrent The potential of the power line drops. Then, a power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, so that the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power failure processing in the main control side power on processing to be described later. The progress of the game will be stopped.

In addition, the power supply line generated and supplied by the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +24V power supply line) is, as described above, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d of the main control board 1310, the main control board In addition to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of 1310, payout control board 633 (the main control board 1310 is supplied with a +12V power supply line through the payout control board 633.), peripheral control board 1510, effect drive shown in FIG. It is supplied to the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 of the substrate 1720. In other words, the +24V power supply line is supplied to the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the effect drive board 1720, etc. in addition to the main control board 1310, so that the main control board 1310 and the payout control board constituting the main board 633 is operating normally, when the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is driven by the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 of the effect drive board 1720 (or the +24V system of the game board 5 While waiting for the electric drive source (drive solenoid) to be driven), due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) or +24V system driver circuit of the game board 5 The potential of the +24V power supply line drops due to overcurrent flowing to 1720c1. In addition, leakage due to some electrical trouble in wiring patterns formed on boards such as the peripheral control board 1510 that supplies the +24V power supply line and the effect drive board 1720, wiring (harness) that electrically connects between boards, etc. The potential of the +24V power supply line also drops when a current is generated or a short circuit occurs. Then, a power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, so that the main control MPU 1310a performs main control side power failure processing in the main control side power on processing to be described later. The progress of the game will be stopped.

[11-1-5. Overcurrent protection for +12V power line and +24V power line]
[11-1-5a. Overcurrent protection to +12V power supply line]
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 213, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the +12V power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit as an overcurrent countermeasure for the +12V power line as an overcurrent protection for the +12V power line. A +12V fuse SF12 capable of passing current up to the upper limit of the allowable current is provided in the performance display device 1600, and the performance display device 1600 is provided with a +12V fuse PF12 capable of flowing current up to the upper limit of the allowable current as the primary fuse of the performance display device 1600. 1600 is provided with a +12V fuse PF12a1 capable of allowing current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the first branching system as a fuse of the first branching system that branches from the +12V fuse PF12 into two systems, and a +12V fuse PF12 in the effect display device 1600. A +12V fuse PF12a2 is provided as a branch second system fuse that branches into two systems to allow current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the second branch system. A +12V fuse EF12 capable of passing current is provided, and a +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 in the effect drive board 1720 is provided with a fuse capable of passing current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side, and each decoration board of the game board 5. Among them, the decoration board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted is provided with a +12V fuse DF12 that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side decoration board (Note that regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit First, a +12V fuse DF12 may be provided that can pass a current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side decoration board to all the decoration boards of the game board 5 to which the +12V power supply line is supplied). The +12V supplied through the +12V fuse PF12a1 as the fuse of the first branch system is used to generate liquid crystal panel power in the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z. Since it is supplied to the light and the drive circuit, the liquid crystal panel, the backlight and the drive circuit of the effect display device 1600 are created from the +12V supplied through the +12V fuse PF12a1 as the fuse of the first branch system. A panel power supply and +12V supplied via a +12V fuse PF12a2 as a second branch system fuse are supplied.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, in the +12 V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510, to the control power generation circuit 1510z of the peripheral control board 1510 If an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power supply line peripheral control board flows to the control power generation circuit 1510z due to an electrical trouble for some reason, the +12V fuse SF12 of the peripheral control board 1510 is blown. . In this way, the +12V fuse SF12 is provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +12V fuse SF12 is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power line peripheral control board. By suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the control board 633, the power failure warning signal is not output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 63aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing main control side power interruption processing in the main control side power on processing to be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa controls the payout in the payout control unit power on processing to be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the power-off processing of the control unit.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the liquid crystal panel power supply of the effect display device 1600 is generated in the +12V power supply line of the effect display device 1600. Due to an electrical problem with the circuit 1600z for some reason, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the branch 1 system flows to the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z, the +12V fuse of the branch 1 system of the effect display device 1600 will flow. fuse PF12a1 is blown. Also, in this embodiment, due to an electrical trouble for some reason in the liquid crystal panel, the backlight, and the drive circuit of the effect display device 1600, the +12V supplied via the +12V fuse PF12a2 as the fuse of the second branch system is reduced. When an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the first branch system flows to the liquid crystal panel power supply generation circuit 1600z that generates the liquid crystal panel power supply, the +12V fuse PF12a1, which is the fuse of the first branch system of the effect display device 1600, is blown. Due to an electrical trouble for some reason in the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit of the effect display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel, backlight, drive circuit, etc. of the effect display device 1600 are branched. When an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the two systems flows, the +12V fuse PF12a2, which is the fuse of the second branch system of the effect display device 1600, is blown. In this embodiment, the +12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, has a capacity of +12V fuse PF12a1, which is the fuse of the first branch system, and +12V, which is the fuse of the second branch system. The fuse PF12a2 is selected in advance to have a larger capacity than any of the fuses and a smaller capacity than the sum of the two fuses. Therefore, in the +12V power line, the +12V fuse PF12, which is the primary fuse, is divided into the +12V fuse PF12a1, which is the first branch system fuse, and the +12V fuse PF12a2, which is the second branch system fuse. Even if an overcurrent flows and one of the fuses blows, if the overcurrent still flows through the system of the blown fuse and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current, the fuse may blow. As the capacity of the +12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, the capacity of the +12V fuse PF12a1, which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the capacity of the +12V fuse PF12a2, which is the fuse of the second branch system. and , the +12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse, is connected to the +12V fuse PF12a1, which is the first branch system fuse, and the second branch system fuse PF12a1 in the +12V power supply line. If an overcurrent flows and one of the +12V fuses PF12a2, which is a fuse in the above, is blown, if overcurrent still flows in the system of this blown fuse and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current, it will be blown. In some cases, if an overcurrent flows through the +12V fuse PF12a1, which is the first branch system fuse, and the +12V fuse PF12a2, which is the second branch system fuse, both fuses are blown. In this way, the effect display device 1600 is provided with the +12V fuse PF12, which is the primary fuse of the effect display device 1600, the +12V fuse PF12a1, which is the first branch system fuse, and the +12V fuse PF12a2, which is the second branch system fuse. The +12V fuse PF12 that is the primary fuse, the +12V fuse PF12a1 that is the fuse for the first branch system, and the +12V fuse PF12a2 that is the fuse for the second branch system are blown by overcurrent. The main control board 1310, suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the payout control board 633, the power failure warning signal by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is not output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 63aa After that, the main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main-control-side power-off processing in the main-control-side power-on processing to be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa is a payout control unit to be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off process in the power-on process.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the +12V system driver circuit of the production drive board 1720 in the +12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720 While the +12V electrical drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5 is being driven by 1720c2 (or while waiting for the +12V electrical driving source (driving motor) of the game board 5 to be driven), Due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side drive motor flows into the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2, +12V A fuse provided in the system driver circuit 1720c2 is blown. The +12V supplied through the +12V fuse EF12 of the effect drive board 1720 is supplied to each decoration board of the game board 5 in addition to the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2. The capacity is selected in advance based on the upper limit of allowable current of the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 for the game board side drive motor and the upper limit of allowable current of each decoration board of the game board 5 on the game board side.

Since the +12V electric drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5 requires a considerable amount of current to drive, the effects of the +12V electric drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5 and the decoration substrates of the game board 5 Among the various LED light emission effects, the light emission effects of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 are given priority over the effect by the +12V electric drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5. It has become. For this reason, the fuses provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 are blown before the +12V fuses DF12 of the decoration boards of the game board 5 are blown. The capacity of the +12V fuse DF12 and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 are selected in advance, and the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 The capacity of the +12V fuse EF12 of the effect drive board 1720 is set in advance so that the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decoration board of the game board 5 can be continued with priority over the effect.

In the case of continuing the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 with priority over the effect by the +12V system electric drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5, for example, the capacity of the +12V fuse EF12 is , the capacity of each decoration board of the game board 5 is larger than the capacity selected for use up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decoration board on the game board side, and the capacity of the selected capacity and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2. If the fuse EF12 for +12V is selected in advance, the fuse EF12 for +12V is set in a state where each decoration board of the game board 5 is used up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decoration board on the game board side. Even if the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 is melted due to an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side drive motor flowing into the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2. If the overcurrent still flows and exceeds the allowable current upper limit of the +12V power supply line production drive board, it may melt. Also, for example, as the capacity of the +12V fuse EF12, the capacity selected so that each decoration board of the game board 5 can be used up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decoration board on the game board side, and the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2. If the same thing as the capacity plus is selected in advance, the +12V fuse EF12 is set in a state where each decoration board of the game board 5 is used up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side decoration board. , the +12V system electric drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5 and the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 flowed an overcurrent exceeding the game board side drive motor allowable current upper limit, and the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 was blown. However, if the overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power supply line effect drive board, it may melt.

Of the effect by the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decoration board of the game board 5, the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 Contrary to the case where the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 is given priority over the effect by the motor), the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 is prioritized. 5 +12V system electric drive source (driving motor) is preferentially continued, each decoration of the game board 5 rather than the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 is blown. The capacity of the +12V fuse DF12 of each decorative board of the game board 5 and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 are set in advance so that the +12V fuse DF12 of the board melts first. At the same time as being selected, the effect drive is performed so that the effect by the +12V electric drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5 can be given priority over the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decoration board of the game board 5 and can be continued. The capacity of the +12V fuse EF12 on the board 1720 is set in advance.

In addition, due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason on the 12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720, an overcurrent flows through the 12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720, and the +12V system electric drive source (drive) of the game board 5 When stopping both the effect by the motor) and the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decoration board of the game board 5, the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720, The capacity of the +12V fuse EF12 of the effect drive board 1720 is set in advance to be equal to or smaller than the capacity of the +12V fuse DF12 of each decoration board of the game board 5, whichever is smaller.

In this way, the +12V fuse EF12 is provided on the effect drive board 1720, and the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 is provided with a fuse, so that the +12V fuse EF12 and the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 are fused by overcurrent. Therefore, the main control board 1310, suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the payout control board 633, the power failure warning signal by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 to the main control MPU1310a and payout control MPU63aa Without output, the main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power interruption processing in the main control side power on processing described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the game. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing.

Further, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, each decoration of the game board 5 is connected to the +12V power supply line of each decoration board of the game board 5. Due to the +12V fuse DF12 of the decoration board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decoration board on the game board side flows through each LED of the game board 5 and the decoration board of the game board 5. Then, the +12V fuse DF12 on the decorative board of the game board 5 is blown. A +12V fuse DF12 is provided to allow current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side decoration board to all the decoration boards of the game board 5 supplied with the +12V power supply line regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit. In this case, when the +12V fuse DF12 of all the decoration boards of the game board 5 causes overcurrent to flow through each LED of the game board 5 and all the decoration boards of the game board 5, exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decoration board on the game board side, The +12V fuses DF12 of all the decorative substrates of the game board 5 are blown. In this way, the +12V fuse DF12 is provided on the decoration board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted among the decoration boards of the game board 5, and the +12V fuse DF12 (In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit, the current is applied to all the decoration boards of the game board 5 to which the +12V power line is supplied, up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decoration board on the game board side. If a +12V fuse DF12 that can flow is provided, the +12V fuse DF12 is provided on all the decoration boards of the game board 5 so that the +12V fuse DF12 will melt due to an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decoration board on the game board side. Because it is), the main control board 1310, suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the payout control board 633, the power failure warning signal by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 main control MPU1310a and The output to the payout control MPU 63aa can be avoided, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa. can continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, the effect display device 1600, and the effect drive board 1720 , In the +12V power supply line of each decoration board of the game board 5, the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, the effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 1720, each decoration board of the game board 5, etc. Due to such trouble, a leakage current or a short circuit may occur, and the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, the effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 1720, each decoration board of the game board 5, etc. , the +12V fuses SF12, PF12, PF12a1, PF12a2, EF12, DF12 provided on each board are fused and supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. By suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +12V power line, the power failure warning signal is not output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 63aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The progress of the game can be continued without performing the main control side power-off processing in the power-on processing, and the payout control MPU 633aa performs the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later. It is possible to continue the progress of payout (the action of paying out game balls as prize balls) without doing so. If a leakage current or a short circuit occurs due to an electrical problem with the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 for some reason, an overcurrent flows through the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is closed. Since an overcurrent also flows through the peripheral control board 1510, which is a host board, the +12V fuse SF12 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is blown.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the +12V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3 is used to drive the door frame 3. While the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 is being driven by the +12V driver circuit of the board (or waiting for the drive of the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 ), due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 or the +12V driver circuit is overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the door frame side drive motor allowable current. When it flows, the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit is blown. The capacity of the +12V fuse for each drive board of the door frame 3 is selected in advance based on the allowable current upper limit of the door frame side drive motor of the +12V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 . The +12V fuse on each drive board of the door frame 3 prevents the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) and +12V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 from overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the door frame side drive motor. Even if the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit is blown by the current flow, if the overcurrent still flows and exceeds the allowable current upper limit of the +12V power supply line drive board on the door frame side, the fuse is blown. In this way, a +12V fuse is provided in each drive board of the door frame 3 and a fuse is provided in the +12V system driver circuit, so that the +12V fuse and the fuse of the +12V system driver circuit are melted by overcurrent. Therefore, the main control board 1310, suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the payout control board 633, the power failure warning signal by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 output to the main control MPU1310a and payout control MPU63aa The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the game. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the control unit power-on processing.

In addition, in this embodiment system, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, each decoration of the door frame 3 is connected to the +12V power supply line of each decoration board of the door frame 3. When the +12V fuse of the decoration board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted among the boards causes an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the door frame side decoration board to flow through each LED of the door frame 3 and the decoration board of the door frame 3 , the +12V fuse on the decorative board of the door frame 3 is blown. In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit, when providing a +12V fuse capable of passing a current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side decoration board to all the decoration boards of the door frame 3 to which the +12V power supply line is supplied. , the +12V fuse for all the decorative boards of the door frame 3 causes overcurrent to flow through each LED of the door frame 3 and all the decorative boards of the door frame 3, exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side. +12V fuses of all the decoration boards of 3 are blown. In this way, a +12V fuse is provided on the decoration board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted among the decoration boards of the door frame 3, and the +12V fuse is blown by overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side decoration board. (In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit, all the decoration boards of the door frame 3 to which the +12V power line is supplied must be supplied with current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side decoration board. When installing a +12V fuse that can be ), suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and outputting a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and payout control MPU 63aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the game. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the control unit power-on processing.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the +12V power supply for each drive board of the door frame 3, each decoration board of the door frame 3, etc. In the production line, due to electrical trouble for some reason in each drive board of the door frame 3, each decoration board of the door frame 3, etc., a leakage current or a short circuit may occur, causing the door frame to malfunction. 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc., the +12V fuse provided on each board is blown, so that the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 By suppressing the decrease in the potential of the supplied +12V power line, the power failure warning signal is not output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 63aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a is described later. The progress of the game can be continued without performing the process when the main control side power is turned off in the process when the main control side power is turned on, and the payout control MPU 633aa can turn off the power of the payout control part in the process when the payout control part is turned on, which will be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing time processing.

[11-1-5b. Overcurrent protection for +24V power line]
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 213, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the +24V power supply line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit as a countermeasure against overcurrent, as shown in FIG. A fuse SF24 for +24V capable of passing a current up to the upper limit of the allowable current is provided in the performance display device 1600, and a fuse PF12 for +12V capable of passing a current up to the upper limit of the allowable current is provided in the performance display device 1600 as the main fuse of the performance display device 1600, and the performance drive board is provided. 1720 is provided with a +24V fuse EF24 that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power supply line production drive board, and the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 in the production drive board 1720 can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side drive solenoid. A fuse that can

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 constituting the main board and the payout control board 633 are operating normally, in the +12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 itself and/or the peripheral If an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power supply line peripheral control board flows due to an electrical trouble for some reason in the performance drive board 1720 or the like which is the succeeding board of the control board 1510, the +24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated. is fused. In this way, the +24V fuse SF24 is provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +24V fuse SF24 is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power supply line peripheral control board. By suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the control board 633, the power failure warning signal is not output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 63aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing main control side power interruption processing in the main control side power on processing to be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa controls the payout in the payout control unit power on processing to be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the power-off processing of the control unit.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the +24V system driver circuit of the effect drive board 1720 in the +24V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720 While the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is being driven by 1720c1 (or while waiting for the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 to be driven), Due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the game board side flows into the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 or the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1, +24V A fuse provided in the system driver circuit 1720c1 is blown. The +24V fuse EF24 is designed to be blown if the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 is blown, but an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the allowable current upper limit of the +24V power supply line production drive board. In this way, the +24V fuse EF24 is provided on the effect drive board 1720, and the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 is provided with a fuse, so that the +24V fuse EF24 and the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 fuse will melt due to overcurrent. Therefore, the main control board 1310, suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the payout control board 633, the power failure warning signal by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 to the main control MPU1310a and payout control MPU63aa Without output, the main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main-control-side power-off processing in the main-control-side power-on processing, which will be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa, which will be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, the peripheral control board 1510, the effect drive board 1720, etc. in the +24V power supply line, the peripheral control board 1510, due to electrical trouble for some reason in the production drive board 1720, etc., a leakage current or a short circuit occurs, and an overcurrent occurs in the peripheral control board 1510, the production drive board 1720, etc. When it flows, the +24V fuses SF24 and EF24 provided on each board are fused, thereby suppressing the potential drop of the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, The power failure warning signal is not output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 63aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power failure processing in the main control side power activation processing described later. The payout control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of the game without performing the payout control MPU 633aa without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing to be described later (game balls can be replaced with prize balls). ) can be continued.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the +24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3 is used to drive the door frame 3. While the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 is being driven by the +24V system driver circuit of the board (or waiting for the drive of the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 ), due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 or the +24V driver circuit is overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the door frame side drive solenoid. When it flows, the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit is blown. The +24V fuse capacity of each drive board of the door frame 3 is selected in advance based on the allowable current upper limit of the door frame side drive solenoid of the +24V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 . The +24V fuse on each drive board of the door frame 3 prevents the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) and the +24V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 from overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the door frame side drive solenoid. Even if the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit is blown by the current flow, if the overcurrent still flows and exceeds the allowable current upper limit of the +24V power supply line drive board on the door frame side, the fuse is blown. In this way, a +24V fuse is provided in each drive board of the door frame 3 and a fuse is provided in the +24V system driver circuit, so that the +24V fuse and the fuse of the +24V system driver circuit are melted by overcurrent. Therefore, the main control board 1310, the decrease in the potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a and payout control MPU 63aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the game. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the control unit power-on processing.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the +24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3 is connected to each of the door frame 3. Due to an electrical problem with the drive board or the like for some reason, a leakage current or a short circuit occurs. By blowing the provided +24V fuse, the main control board 1310, suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the payout control board 633, power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 , the power failure warning signal is not output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 63aa, and the main control MPU 1310a continues the game without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described later. In addition, the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later. can be done.

[11-2. Circuit of Payout Control Board]
Of the power supplies in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power supply of the payout control MPU 633aa is supplied with +5V from the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, and the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa The backup power supplied to is supplied from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 as VBB.

+5V from the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633h as shown in FIG. The payout control filter circuit 633h mainly includes a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 has its 1st terminal applied with +5V from the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f of the power supply substrate 630, and its 2nd terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND). , +5V from which the noise component has been removed is output from the 3rd terminal. The +5V applied to the No. 1 terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), so that ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is generated. has been removed and smoothed.

The +5 V output from the third terminal is connected to the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). Ripple is further removed and smoothed by being electrically connected to each other. This smoothed +5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa. It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, when an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is released after the instantaneous power failure occurs. It is applied as +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). In addition, since the power consumption of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is larger than the power consumption of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 (In this embodiment, the capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)) is larger than the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 (in this embodiment, the capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)). is selected. As a result, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, when an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 Each charged charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary interruption occurs.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU633aa is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 while one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 electrically connected to the ground (GND). The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0. In addition, the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via the . As a result, the payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is supplied via the resistor PR0 to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa. A diode PD0 prevents the voltage VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 from being supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of , through the resistor PR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633, for example, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout detection sensor 591 A detection signal and a RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are input to the payout control input circuit 633ab.

The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball end detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are These are input to the input terminals PA0 to PA5 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. This input port PA consists of 8 bits, and input terminals PA6 and PA7 are empty terminals. These empty input terminals PA6 and PA7 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) as empty terminals.

The payout power outage notice signal, which is a power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. are inputted to predetermined input terminals of the input port PB of the payout control MPU 633aa through the payout control input circuit 633ab, respectively. , PA7 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal.

[11-2-1. Payout control input circuit]
Next, the payout control input circuit 633ab will be described. Since the payout control input circuit 633ab is the same circuit, here, as an example, the payout control input circuit 633ab to which the payout power failure warning signal, which is the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input will be described. .

As shown in FIG. 220, one end of the payout control input circuit 633ab to which the payout power failure notice signal, which is the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input, has one end connected to the +12V power supply line (the power source generated in the power supply board 630). It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR40 electrically connected to the power supply line generated and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the circuit 630f (that is, the +12V power supply line), and via the resistor PR41. are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the payout control board 6330 in addition to the resistor PR41. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the payout control board 633 (substrate ground). One end of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line (the power supply line generated and supplied by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f on the power supply substrate 630 (that is, the +5V power supply line)). The non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (PIC40A) is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43). ) is electrically connected to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the payout control MPU 633aa.

[11-2-2. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, the payout motor drive circuit 633ad will be described with reference to FIG. The payout motor drive circuit 633ad is a circuit that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 89 according to the control signal from the payout control MPU 633aa. When the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 rotates, the payout vane 589 shown in FIG. 89 rotates and the game balls can be paid out as prize balls.

The payout motor driving circuit 633ad is a voltage switching circuit 633ada that can switch between an operating voltage and a stopping voltage as excitation to φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 according to the rotation state of the payout motor 584. and a payout motor drive IC 633adb capable of driving the payout motor 584.

The acceleration period from when the rotary shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is stopped until it rotates at a constant rotational speed and the deceleration period from when the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates at a constant rotational speed to when it stops are high torque. In order to prevent step-out, it is necessary to apply a high voltage as excitation to φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the payout motor 584. , high torque is not required. Therefore, regardless of whether the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is stopped or rotated, the payout motor 584 may be excessively driven when a high voltage is applied to φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 of the payout motor 584. Heat generation may cause malfunction or failure of the dispensing motor 584, and it is necessary to suppress heat generation.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the acceleration period from when the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is stopped until it rotates at a constant rotational speed, During the deceleration period, +12V is used as the operating voltage, which is a high voltage. During the period, the voltage switching circuit 633ada is controlled to use +5V as the stopping voltage which is lower than the operating voltage, and the current flowing to the payout motor 584 is resettable by using a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. Heat generation of the payout motor 584 is suppressed by limiting and protecting the payout motor 584 and the payout motor drive IC 633adb that drives the payout motor 584 .

[11-2-2a. voltage switching circuit]
The voltage switching circuit 633ada mainly includes a transistor PTR50, a field effect transistor (FET) PF50, a diode P50, and a polyswitch PPS50 as a resettable fuse. A base terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR50 and electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The other end of the resistor PR50 is electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control output circuit 633ac as a line for transmitting a voltage switching signal.

Specifically, the other end of the resistor PR50 is electrically connected to an output terminal of a voltage switching D-type flip-flop (not shown) as a line for transmitting a voltage switching signal. An input terminal of this voltage switching D-type flip-flop is electrically connected to a voltage switching output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa.

The emitter terminal of transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to gate terminal G of field effect transistor PF50 via resistor PR52. A gate terminal G of the field effect transistor PF50 is electrically connected to a source terminal S of the field effect transistor PF50 via a resistor PR53. The source terminal S of the field effect transistor PF50 is electrically connected to the +12V power line (the power line generated and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply substrate 630 (that is, the +12V power line)). It is A drain terminal D of the field effect transistor PF50 is electrically connected to a cathode terminal of a diode PD50, which is a rectifying diode, and electrically connected to one end of the polyswitch PPS50. The anode terminal of the diode PD50 is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line (the power supply line generated and supplied by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f on the power supply substrate 630 (that is, the +5V power supply line)). . The other end of the polyswitch PPS50 is electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes PD51 and PD52, respectively, and is also electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power supply line MOTH+12V for supplying power to the payout motor 584.

[11-2-2b. Dispensing motor drive IC]
The payout motor drive IC 633adb incorporates four chipped NPN-type Darlington transistors and four diodes in the same package. Of the four elements of the NPN Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR54, and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN Darlington transistor is connected to the resistor PR55. The base terminal 8 of the third NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR56, and the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR57. electrically connected.

The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as an Hφ1 line through which current for exciting φ1 of the dispensing motor 584 flows, and the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN Darlington transistor is The H/φ1 line through which the current for exciting /φ1 of the dispensing motor 584 flows is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector, and the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor receives the current for exciting the φ2 of the dispensing motor 584. The collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as the H/φ2 line through which the current that excites /φ2 of the dispensing motor 584 flows. It is connected to the.

The other ends of the resistors PR54 to PR57 are electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU633aa through the payout control output circuit 633ac. Specifically, the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the first NPN-type Darlington transistor, outputs a signal HPD0 that instructs the start and stop of the excitation of the payout motor 584 to φ1. As a line for transmission, it is electrically connected to the output terminal of the D type flip-flop for φ1 of the payout motor 584 (not shown). The input terminal of the D-type flip-flop for φ1 of the payout motor 584 is electrically connected to the output terminal for φ1 of the payout motor 584 of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa.

The other end of the resistor PR55, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor, serves as a line for transmitting a signal PPD1 instructing the start or stop of excitation of /φ1 of the dispensing motor 584. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the /φ1 D-type flip-flop of the payout motor 584 (not shown). The input terminal of the /φ1 D-type flip-flop of the payout motor 584 is electrically connected to the /φ1 output terminal of the payout motor 584 of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa.

The other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor, is illustrated as a line for transmitting a signal PPD2 instructing the start or stop of excitation of φ2 of the payout motor 584. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop for φ2 of the payout motor 584 . The input terminal of the D-type flip-flop for φ2 of the payout motor 584 is electrically connected to the output terminal for φ2 of the payout motor 584 of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa.

The other end of the resistor PR57, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor, serves as a line for transmitting a signal PPD3 instructing the start or stop of excitation of /φ2 of the dispensing motor 584. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the /φ2 D-type flip-flop of the payout motor 584 (not shown). The input terminal of the /φ2 D-type flip-flop of the payout motor 584 is electrically connected to the /φ2 output terminal of the payout motor 584 of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa.

The emitter terminal of the first NPN Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the dispensing motor drive IC 633adb inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the payout motor drive IC 633adb is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The emitter terminal of the third NPN Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the dispensing motor drive IC 633adb inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the payout motor drive IC 633adb is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The payout motor drive IC 633adb has four built-in diodes. The first and second diodes are paired and arranged in the package, and the third and fourth diodes are paired and arranged in the package. are placed.

The anode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected inside the package to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN Darlington transistor, and the anode terminal of the second diode is connected to the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN Darlington transistor. and are electrically connected inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected inside the package to the cathode terminal 3 of the payout motor drive IC 633adb. The cathode terminal 3 of the payout motor drive IC 633adb is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PD51.

The anode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected inside the package to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN Darlington transistor, and the anode terminal of the fourth diode is connected to the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor. and are electrically connected inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected inside the package to the cathode terminal 10 of the payout motor drive IC 633adb. The cathode terminal 10 of the payout motor drive IC 633adb is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PD52.

The first to fourth diodes convert the back electromotive force generated when the excitation of the payout motor 584 to φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 is stopped and remove it by converting the first to fourth diodes into heat. It protects the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor.

A power supply line MOTH+12V for supplying power to the payout motor 584 is electrically connected to φ2C (common) of the third pin and φ1C (common) of the fourth pin of the payout motor 584 through connector terminals and wiring (not shown). connected to The Hφ1 line through which the current for exciting φ1 of the payout motor 584 flows is electrically connected to the sixth pin φ1 of the connector of the payout motor 584 via a connector terminal and wiring (not shown). The H/φ1 line through which the current for exciting /φ1 of the payout motor 584 flows is electrically connected to the /φ1 of the second pin of the payout motor 584 connector via a connector terminal and wiring (not shown). The Hφ2 line through which the current for exciting φ2 of the payout motor 584 flows is electrically connected to the fifth pin φ2 of the connector of the payout motor 584 via a connector terminal and wiring (not shown). The H/φ2 line through which the current for exciting /φ2 of the dispensing motor 584 flows is electrically connected to the first pin /φ2 of the connector of the dispensing motor 584 via a connector terminal and wiring (not shown).

When payout motor drive data HPD0 to HPD7, which are 8-bit information including HPD0 to HPD3 instructing start and stop of excitation of φ1, /φ1, φ2, and /φ2 of the payout motor 584, are output from the payout control MPU 633aa. , corresponding D-type flip-flops and respective resistors, are input to the base terminals 1, 5, 8, 12 of the payout motor drive IC 633adb, respectively. When the system of the payout control board 633 is activated (when the payout control part power-on processing described later is started), the payout motor drive IC 633adb controls the payout control part power-on based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. According to the payout motor drive data HPD0 to HPD3 from the payout control MPU 633aa in the port output process of the process, the voltage switched to the operation voltage or the stop voltage by the voltage switching circuit 633ada φ1, /φ1, φ2 of the payout motor 584 , and /φ2.

Here, the operation of the voltage switching circuit 633ada will be briefly described. When the signal logic of voltage switching from the payout control MPU 633aa in the process is output as the operating voltage logic, the transistor PTR50 is turned off, and the power supply line voltage of MOTH+12V that supplies power to the payout motor 584 is changed by the field effect transistor PF50. By being pulled up to the +12V side, +12V is supplied to the payout motor 584 as an operating voltage via the polyswitch PPS 50 as a power supply line called MOTH+12V. It should be noted that the MOTH +12V power supply line is supplied to the +5 power supply line (that is, the +5V power supply line generated by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f on the power supply substrate 630) through the diode PD50. never

On the other hand, when the logic of the voltage switching signal from the payout control MPU 633aa is output as a stop voltage logic obtained by inverting the logic of the operating voltage logic, the transistor PTR50 is turned on, and +12V is generated by the field effect transistor PF50. When the voltage of the power supply line MOTH+12V that supplies power to the payout motor 584 is cut off, it is pulled up to the +5V side through the diode PD50, and +5V is applied to the payout motor 584 as a stop voltage through the poly switch PPS50. It is supplied as a power supply line called MOTH+12V.

Here, a brief description will be given of the difference in temperature rise between the power consumption of the operation voltage and the power consumption of the stop voltage. The power consumption W can be calculated according to Ohm's law: Voltage V×Voltage V÷Resistance R. The power consumption Wo due to the operating voltage +12V is 144/resistance R (the square of the voltage V/resistance R), and the power consumption Ws due to the stop voltage +5V is 25/resistance R (the square of the voltage V/resistance R). Then, the power consumption Wo at +12V, which is the operating voltage, is more than five times (5.76=144/25) the power consumption Ws at +5V, which is the stopping voltage, so the temperature rise is also about five times or more. becomes. This is the same for the payout motor 584 as well.

In other words, even if the temperature rise becomes a problem when driving the single power source with the operating voltage of +12V, the temperature rise can be suppressed to about one-fifth or less by driving with the stopping voltage of +5V.

The package of the payout motor drive IC 633adb includes heat generated by the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors that excite φ1, φ2, /φ1 and /φ2 of the payout motor 584 and φ1, φ2, /φ1 and / Heat generated by the first to fourth diodes that convert back electromotive force from φ2 into heat is absorbed, and this absorbed heat is released to the outside air (surroundings of dispensing motor 584). Since the island facilities of the game hall are arranged in a line with other pachinko machines facing each other, the temperature inside the island facilities of the game hall is high due to the heat emitted from the power supply board, various control boards, etc. of the pachinko machine.

Therefore, even if the package of the dispensing motor 584 absorbs the heat generated by the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors and the first to fourth diodes, the surroundings of the dispensing motor 584, that is, the temperature of the outside air increases. In this state, the heat is accumulated in the package of the dispensing motor 584 because the efficiency of releasing the absorbed heat to the outside air decreases. Then, when the package temperature of the dispensing motor 584 rises and the junction temperature of the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors rises to the junction temperature, the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors may fail. .

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the payout motor 584 is driven to rotate the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584, the excitation of the payout motor 584 to φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 is continued as much as possible. By doing so, the number of times the excitation of φ1, φ2, /φ1 and /φ2 of the payout motor 584 is stopped is reduced, and when the excitation of φ1, φ2, /φ1 and /φ2 of the payout motor 584 is stopped It is possible to reduce the number of times the back electromotive force generated in the first to fourth diodes is converted into heat and removed. As a result, the heat generated by the first to fourth diodes can be kept small, which contributes to reducing the temperature rise of the package of the dispensing motor 584. FIG. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors from being damaged by heat.

In this embodiment, the voltage switching circuit 633ada does not use a relay, but uses a semiconductor field effect transistor (FET) PF50. This is because relays have a time lag and have large variations in performance between individuals. The use of a field effect transistor (FET) PF50 allows precise control of the dispensing action.

[11-2-2c. poly switch]
Here, a polyswitch will be described as a resettable fuse. A voltage for operation or a voltage for stopping is supplied to the payout motor 584 via a polyswitch PPS 50 as a power supply line MOTH+12V. In the PolySwitch PPS50, in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value increases sharply from a specific temperature, the body generates heat, and the heat lowers the conductivity, cuts off the current, and cools the body. By using this, the current flowing to the payout motor 584, which is a load, can be restricted to protect the payout motor 584, which is a load. Fuses can be cited as limiting the current to the load. This fuse can cut off the current flowing to the load by melting when an overcurrent flows, but the fuse itself needs to be replaced with a new one.

However, like the pachinko machine 1, it is necessary to prevent someone from obtaining illegal game balls by illegally altering the important payout control board 633 that controls the payout operation of game balls to the player. For this reason, the payout control board 633 is accommodated in a payout control board box 632 composed of a transparent cover and a transparent base, and the cover and the base form a sealing mechanism such as a one-way caulking portion. It is crimped with a screw or the like. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism, and has a plurality of them. The payout control board box 632 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part using one sealing mechanism. It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed, the cover cannot be removed from the base. Then, if a fuse is mounted on the payout control board 633 and the fuse blows, the crimped portion must be destroyed. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the caulked portion of the payout control board box 632 provided in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be destroyed, so the fuse cannot be replaced and the game cannot be played. is in a state where it cannot be done.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a polyswitch is adopted as an element for limiting overcurrent, like the fuse. As a result, when an overcurrent flows through the polyswitch, the load can be protected by limiting the current flowing to the load by specifying the polyswitch. In other words, unlike a fuse, the polyswitch itself will not be destroyed by an overcurrent, and there is no need to replace it. not at all.

The PolySwitch PPS 50 has a rectangular parallelepiped main body and a lead shape in which two leads protrude downward from the bottom surface. As described above, in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, the PolySwitch PPS 50 has a resistance value that increases sharply from a specific temperature, causing the main body to generate heat. When the body cools down, it regains conductivity and recovers. For this reason, in order to efficiently cool the heat generated by the PolySwitch PPS 50, the two leads of the PolySwitch PPS 50 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the surface where the thickness of the body of the PolySwitch PPS 50 is reduced is vertical. This facilitates upward convection of the heat generated by the body of the PolySwitch PPS50.

Also, since a large current flows through the polyswitch PPS 50, the vicinity of a connector having a terminal for supplying power to the payout motor 584, a terminal for exciting each phase (φ1, /φ1, φ2, /φ2) of the payout motor 584, etc. are placed in This can contribute to reducing the influence of noise caused by the current to the payout motor 584 with respect to other electronic components mounted on the payout control board 633 .

Also, since the polyswitch PPS 50 can limit the current flowing to the payout motor 584, it is possible to protect the payout motor 584 from overheating.

Although the unipolar stepping motor is used in this embodiment, a bipolar stepping motor may be used instead. In this case, one polyswitch is dedicated to each terminal to which the motor power supply of +12V and +5V is supplied to the bipolar stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, the polyswitch adopted as the resettable fuse is a PPTC (Polymer Positive Temperature Coefficien) such as a thermistor.
However, even if a ceramic PTC (positive temperature coefficient) element or bimetal is used as the resettable fuse, the same effects as those of the polyswitch described above can be obtained.

[11-3. Circuit of production drive board]
+5V from +5V power generation circuit 630fa of power generation circuit 630f on power supply substrate 630, +12V from +12V power generation circuit 630fb of power generation circuit 630f on power substrate 630, +24V power generation circuit 630fc of power generation circuit 630f on power substrate 630 When the +24 V from the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 through the interface board 635, the +24 V is supplied to the effect drive board 1720 through the +5 V fuse SF5, the +12 V fuse SF12, and the +24 V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510. , respectively, via the +5V fuse EF5, +12V fuse EF12, +24V fuse EF24 of the performance drive board 1720, in addition to the performance drive board 1720 itself, supplied to subsequent boards such as each decoration board of the game board 5 +5V power line, +12V power line, and +24V power line.

The +24V power supply line supplied via the +24V fuse EF24 of the effect drive board 1720 is supplied to the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1, which is the effect control solenoid drive circuit, as described above, and the +12V fuse EF12 of the effect drive board 1720. The +12V power supply line supplied through is supplied to the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2, which is the effect control motor drive circuit, and each decoration board of the game board 5, as described above. Here, as the circuit of the effect drive board 1720, the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 will be described first, and the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 will be described.

[11-3-1. +24V system driver circuit]
The +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 drives and controls the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 . As the +24V system electric drive source (driving solenoid) of the game board 5, the back side provided in the third back front left decorative body units 3710A, 3710B, and 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. Front left drive solenoids 3717 (three back front left drive solenoids 3717 in total) and third back front right decoration units 3810A, 3810B and 3810C in back front right effect unit 3800 of back unit 3000 shown in FIG. and a back front right drive solenoid 3817 (a total of three back front right drive solenoids 3817).

The +24V system driver circuit 1720c1, as shown in FIG. A driver IC 1720c1a1 for driving and controlling each of the back front left drive solenoids 3717), and a back front right drive solenoid provided in each of the third back front right decorative body units 3810A, 3810B, and 3810C in the back front right effect unit 3800 of the back unit 3000. 3817 (a total of three back front right drive solenoids 3817) and a driver IC 1720c1a2 for driving and controlling each of them. Since the driver IC 1720c1a1 and the driver IC 1720c1a2 are the same circuit, the circuit of the driver IC 1720c1a1 will be described here, and the driver IC 1720c1a2 may be indicated in parentheses following the reference numerals referred to in the description of the driver IC 1720c1a1.

[11-3-1a. +24V system driver IC]
Back front left drive solenoids 3717 (a total of three back front left drive solenoids 3717) respectively provided in the third back front left decorative body units 3710A, 3710B, and 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000; The back front right drive solenoids 3817 (a total of three back front right drive solenoids 3817) provided in the third back front right decorative body units 3810A, 3810B, and 3810C in the back front right effect unit 3800 are activated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. , the system of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (peripheral control unit power-on processing, which will be described later, is performed, and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing (motor and solenoid drive processing), which will be described later, is started), and a predetermined condition is established. It is driven occasionally and not always. However, when the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 and the three back front right drive solenoids 3817 are being driven, for some reason, there is a possibility that the driver IC 1720c1a1 and the driver IC 1720c1a2 may malfunction or malfunction. In addition, a mechanism for opening and closing a plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter units 3730 provided in the third back front left decorative body units 3710A, 3710B, and 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000, and a back front right effect of the back unit 3000 When a malfunction occurs in the mechanism for opening and closing the plurality of shutters 3832 of the shutter units 3830 provided in the third back front right decorative body units 3810A, 3810B, and 3810C in the unit 3800 and it becomes difficult to move (difficult to operate), the three backs The front left drive solenoid 3717 and the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, which are difficult to move (difficult to operate) due to a problem, become overloaded and generate excessive heat, causing the driver to drive the solenoids and the solenoids. There is a risk that the IC may malfunction or malfunction.

If such a problem or failure occurs, the driver IC 1720c1a1 that drives and controls the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 and the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 will not operate. If an overcurrent flows to the driver IC that drives the front left drive solenoid, or if the driver IC 1720c1a2 that drives and controls the three rear front right drive solenoids 3817 or the three rear front right drive solenoids 3817 malfunctions or malfunctions. The potential of the +12V power supply line drops due to overcurrent flowing to the driver IC that drives and controls the front right drive solenoid and the back front right drive solenoid. Then, as described above, this +12V power line is +12V from the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, and this +12V is the main board constituting the main board in addition to the effect drive board 1720. Since it is also supplied to the control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a will be described later. When the main control side power is turned off in the main control side power turned on process, the progress of the game is stopped, and the payout control MPU 633aa performs the payout control part power turned off process in the payout control part power turned on process to be described later, and pays out. progress (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) will be stopped.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the driver IC 1720c1a1 for driving and controlling the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 is provided with the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 and the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 in the +24 V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. The driver IC 1720c1a2 that drives and controls the three back front right drive solenoids 3817 is provided with a fuse that cuts off overcurrent flowing to the driver IC 1720c1a1 that drives and controls the left drive solenoid 3717. A fuse is provided to cut off overcurrent flowing to the three back front right drive solenoids 3817 and the driver IC 1720c1a2 that drives and controls the three back front right drive solenoids 3817. FIG.

A +24V fuse EF24a1 that is a fuse provided in the driver IC 1720c1a1 that drives and controls the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 (a +24V fuse that is a fuse provided in the driver IC 1720c1a2 that drives and controls the three back front right drive solenoids 3817). One end of the EF 24a2) is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. The other end of the +24V fuse EF24a1 (+24V fuse EF24a2) is electrically connected to the anode terminals of Zener diodes ED50 and ED51 (ED52 and ED53), respectively, and is connected to three back front left drive solenoids 3717 (three is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power supply line called SOLL+24V (SOLR+24V) for supplying power to the back front right drive solenoid 3817).

The driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) incorporates four chipped NPN-type Darlington transistors and four diodes in the same package. Of the four elements of the NPN Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER50 (ER53), and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN Darlington transistor is The base terminal 8 of the third NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER51 (ER54) and electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER52 (ER55) and the base of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor. Terminal 12 is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR57 (MR67).

The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN-type Darlington transistor is connected to the back front left drive solenoid 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids) provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710A among the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as an LU-SOL line (RU-SOL line) through which a current that excites the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817) provided in the third back front right decorative body unit 3810A among 3817 flows, The collector terminal 4 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor is connected to the back front left drive solenoid 3717 (three back front right drive solenoid It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as an LC-SOL line (RC-SOL line) through which the current that excites the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817) provided in the third back front right decoration unit 3810B among 3817 flows, The collector terminal 9 of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor is the back front left drive solenoid 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids) provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710C among the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as an LL-SOL line (LL-SOL) through which a current that excites the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817) provided in the third back front right decoration unit 3817C of 3817 flows. .

The other ends of the resistors ER50 to ER55 are electrically connected to the effect drive input circuit (not shown) of the effect drive board 1720, the connector of the effect drive input circuit (not shown) and the effect drive board 1720, the effect drive board 1720 and the peripheral control board. 1510 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness) and a connector of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, one end is the first NPN type The other end of the resistor ER50 (ER53) electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the Darlington transistor is the back front left drive solenoid provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710A among the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. 3717 (the back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decoration unit 3810A among the three back front right drive solenoids 3817) transmits a signal SPD0 (SPD3) that instructs the start or stop of excitation of the coil. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the performance drive input circuit (not shown) of the performance drive board 1720. The input terminal of the performance drive input circuit is connected to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. is electrically connected to the output terminal of the output port of

A brief description of the effect driving input circuit (not shown) will be given. The effect driving input circuit includes the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. They have the same circuit. One end of the input terminal of the performance drive input circuit is a +12V power line (a power line generated and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, and the +12V fuse EF12 of the performance drive board 1720 216 and the resistor PR40 in FIG. 220) electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line supplied via the It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor (corresponding to the transistor MTR0 in FIG. 216 and the transistor PTR40 in FIG. 220) via two resistors (corresponding to the resistor MR3 in FIG. 216 and the resistor PR41 in FIG. 220). ing. In addition to the second resistor, the base terminal of the transistor includes a third resistor (resistor MR4 in FIG. 216, resistor PR42 in FIG. ) is electrically connected to the other end of the The emitter terminal of the transistor is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the effect drive board 1720 (board ground). One end of the collector terminal of the transistor is a +5V power supply line (a power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, and is supplied via the +5V fuse EF5 of the effect drive board 1720). 216, and the other end of the fourth resistor (corresponding to the resistor MR5 in FIG. 216 and resistor PR43 in FIG. The non-inverting buffer IC (the non-inverting buffer IC has eight non-inverting buffer circuits and inverts the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the non-inverting buffer circuits A) forming the input buffer circuit 1720a. (corresponding to MIC10 in FIG. 216 and PIC40 in FIG. 220). The output terminal of the non-inverting buffer circuit A of the non-inverting buffer IC constituting the input buffer circuit 1720a becomes the output terminal of the performance drive input circuit.

The other end of the resistor ER51 (ER54), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor, is connected to the third back front left decoration unit 3710B among the three back front left driving solenoids 3717. Back front left drive solenoid 3717 (back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decoration unit 3810B among the three back front right drive solenoids 3817) SPD1 instructing start and stop of excitation of the coil of the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in (SPD4) It is electrically connected with the output terminal of the production|presentation drive input circuit which the production drive board|substrate 1720 does not illustrate as a line which transmits a signal. The input terminal of this effect driving input circuit is electrically connected to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

The other end of the resistor ER52 (ER55), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor, is connected to the third back front left decoration unit 3710C among the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. Back front left drive solenoid 3717 (back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decoration unit 3810C among the three back front right drive solenoids 3817) SPD2 instructing start and stop of excitation of the coil It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the performance drive input circuit (not shown) of the performance drive board 1720 as a line for transmitting the signal (SPD5). The input terminal of this effect driving input circuit is electrically connected to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

The lines for transmitting the signals SPD0 to SPD5 are separate lines, and are electrically connected to output terminals of predetermined output ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, that is, to different output terminals. .

The emitter terminal of the first NPN Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The emitter terminal of the third NPN Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the ground (GND), while the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor is connected to the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2). ) is not connected to the outside.

The driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) has four built-in diodes. placed inside.

The anode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected inside the package to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN Darlington transistor, and the anode terminal of the second diode is connected to the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN Darlington transistor. are electrically connected inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected inside the package to the cathode terminal 3 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2). The cathode terminal 3 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ED50.

The anode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected inside the package to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN Darlington transistor, and the anode terminal of the fourth diode is connected to the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor. are electrically connected inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected inside the package to the cathode terminal 10 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2). The cathode terminal 10 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ED51.

Of the first to fourth diodes, the first to third diodes are turned on when the excitation of the coils of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids 3817) is stopped. The first to third NPN-type Darlington transistors are protected by converting the generated back electromotive force into heat and removing it.

A power line called SOLL+24V (SOLR+24V) that supplies power to the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids 3817) is connected to the three back front solenoids 3717 via connector terminals and wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to each connector of the front left drive solenoid 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids 3817). Of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710A (out of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, the third back front right decoration unit 3810A The LU-SOL line (RU-SOL line) through which the current that excites the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817) provided is the first of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 via connector terminals and wiring (not shown). The connector of the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710A (the back front right drive solenoid 3817 of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817 provided in the third back front right decoration unit 3810A) connector and electricity connected. Of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710B (out of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, the third back front right decoration unit 3810B The LC-SOL line (RC-SOL line) through which the current that excites the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817) provided is the first of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 via a connector terminal and wiring (not shown). The connector of the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710B (the back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decoration unit 3810B among the three back front right drive solenoids 3817) and the electric connected. Of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710C (out of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, the third back front right decoration unit 3810C The LL-SOL line (RL-SOL line) through which the current that excites the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817) provided is the first of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 via a connector terminal and wiring (not shown). Back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in third back front left decoration body unit 3710C (back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in third back front right decoration body unit 3810C among three back front right drive solenoids 3817) Second attacker solenoid 2612 connector is electrically connected.

Whether the system of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (peripheral control unit power-on processing, which will be described later, is performed, and peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing (motor and solenoid drive processing), which will be described later, is started) and a predetermined condition is satisfied Depending on whether or not, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the information of SPD0 to SPD5 instructing the start or stop of excitation of the coils of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids 3817). When certain drive solenoid drive data SPD0 to SPD5 are output from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the driver IC 1720c1a1 ( They are input to the base terminals 1, 5 and 8 of the driver IC 1720c1a2). The driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) drives three back front left drive solenoids 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids 3817) according to drive solenoid drive data SPD0 to SPD5 from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. current to excite the coil of

[11-3-1b. Arrangement of fuses provided in +24V system driver IC]
The +24V fuse EF 24a1, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC 1720c1a1, generates heat when a large current such as an overcurrent flows to the driver IC 1720c1a1 that drives the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 and the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. Therefore, in the vicinity of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (especially in the vicinity of the cathode terminals 3 and 10 of the driver IC 1720c1a1), or the connector connected as the above SOLL+24V power supply line, LU-SOL line, LC-SOL line, and LC-SOL line It is preferably arranged in the vicinity (especially in the vicinity of the connector of the terminal to which the SOLL+24V power supply line is connected). In addition, the +24V fuse EF24a2, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC 1720c1a2, generates heat due to a large overcurrent flowing to the driver IC 1720c1a2 that drives the three back front right drive solenoids 3817 and the three back front right drive solenoids 3817. Therefore, in the vicinity of the driver IC 1720c1a2 (in particular, in the vicinity of the cathode terminals 3 and 10 of the driver IC 1720c1a2) or the above-mentioned SOLR+24V power supply line, the RU-SOL line, the RC-SOL line, and the RC-SOL line are connected. It is preferably arranged near the connector (in particular, near the connector of the terminal to which the SOLR+24V power supply line is connected).

[11-3-2. +12V system driver circuit]
The +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 drives and controls the +12V system electric drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5 . As the +12V system electric drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5, the rear rear driving motor 3126 in the rear rear effect unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 shown in FIGS. Back bottom left drive motor 3205 in back bottom left effect unit 3200 of back unit 3000 shown in FIG. Back-bottom middle rotation driving motor 3333 of back-bottom middle decorative body unit 3320 in back-bottom middle effect unit 3300 of back unit 3000 shown in b), back-bottom middle effect unit 3300 of back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 170(a) and 170(b), the back upper front rotary drive motor 3425 in the back upper production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIGS. 170(a) and 170(b) Back up lifting drive motor 3429 in back up effect unit 3400 of back unit 3000 shown in FIG. Back left rotation drive motor 3525 of back left decoration unit 3520 in back left effect unit 3500 of back unit 3000 shown in 178(b), back left rotation drive motor 3525 of back unit 3000 shown in FIGS. Back left elevation drive motor 3554 in back rear left effect unit 3500, back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 of back rear right decoration unit 3620 in back rear right effect unit 3600 of back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 185(b), 185(a) and 185(b), there is a back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 in the back rear right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000, and there are a total of 12 drive motors (hereinafter referred to as "game board 5 side drive motor”).

As shown in FIG. 223, the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 drives and controls the driver IC 1720c2a1 that drives and controls the rear rear drive motor 3126 and the rear lower left drive motor 3205 corresponding to each of the drive motors on the game board 5 side. a driver IC 1720c2a3 that drives and controls the back bottom right drive motor 3255; a driver IC 1720c2a4 that drives and controls the back bottom middle rotation drive motor 3333; A driver IC 1720c2a6 that drives and controls the top front rotation drive motor 3425, a driver IC 1720c2a7 that drives and controls the back top lift drive motor 3429, a driver IC 1720c2a8 that drives and controls the back top rear rotation drive motor 3454, and a back rear left rotation drive motor 3525. , a driver IC 1720c2a10 that drives and controls the rear left elevation drive motor 3554, a driver IC 1720c2a11 that drives and controls the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625, and a driver that drives and controls the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654. IC1720c2a12. Since the total of 12 driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are all the same circuit, the circuit of the driver IC 1720c2a1 will be mainly described here, and the description of the driver ICs 1720c2a2 to 1720c2a12 may be omitted.

[11-3-2a. +12V system driver IC]
The drive motor on the game board 5 side is activated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the system of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (peripheral control unit power-on processing, which will be described later, is performed, and peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing (motor and the solenoid drive process) is started) and a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is not always driven. However, there is a risk that the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 may malfunction or malfunction for some reason while the drive motor on the game board 5 side is being driven. If a problem occurs and it becomes difficult to operate, the drive motor on the game board 5 side, which is difficult to operate due to a problem, will be overloaded and generate excessive heat, causing the drive motor and the drive motor to operate. There is a risk that the driver IC that drives the device may malfunction or malfunction.

When such a problem or failure occurs, the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 that drive and control the drive motor on the game board 5 side or the drive motor on the game board 5 side drive and control the drive motor or the drive motor in which the problem or failure has occurred. The potential of the +12V power supply line drops due to the overcurrent flowing to the driver IC. Then, as described above, this +12V power line is +12V from the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, and this +12V is the main board constituting the main board in addition to the effect drive board 1720. Since it is also supplied to the control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, the power failure warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a will be described later. When the main control side power is turned off in the main control side power turned on process, the progress of the game is stopped, and the payout control MPU 633aa performs the payout control part power turned off process in the payout control part power turned on process to be described later, and pays out. progress (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) will be stopped.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 that drive and control the drive motor on the game board 5 side are provided with the drive motor on the game board 5 side and the drive motor on the game board 5 side in the +12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. fuses for cutting off overcurrents flowing to the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 that drive and control the .

Specifically, in the driver IC 1720c2a1 that drives and controls the rear driving motor 3126, overcurrent flowing to the driver IC 1720c2a1 that drives and controls the rear driving motor 3126 and the rear driving motor 3126 in the +12V power supply line of the effect driving board 1720 A driver IC 1720c2a2 for driving and controlling the back bottom left driving motor 3205 is provided with a back bottom left driving motor 3205 and back bottom left driving motor 3205 in the +12 V power supply line of the effect driving board 1720. A +12 V fuse EF 12 a 2 is provided to cut off an overcurrent flowing to the driver IC 1720 c 2 a 2 that controls driving, and the driver IC 1720 c 2 a 3 that drives and controls the back bottom right driving motor 3255 is connected to the back bottom right driving motor in the +12 V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. 3255 and the driver IC 1720c2a3 that drives and controls the back bottom right drive motor 3255 is provided with a +12V fuse EF 12a3 that cuts off the overcurrent flowing to the driver IC 1720c2a3. A +12V fuse EF12a4 is provided to cut off overcurrent flowing to the rear-lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 and the driver IC 1720c2a4 that drives and controls the rear-lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 in the +12V power supply line.

In addition, to the driver IC 1720 c 2 a 5 that drives and controls the back bottom middle lifting drive motor 3352, the driver IC 1720 c 2 a 5 that drives and controls the back bottom middle lifting drive motor 3352 and the back bottom middle lifting drive motor 3352 in the +12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720 A +12V fuse EF12a5 that cuts off the flowing overcurrent is provided, and the driver IC 1720c2a6 that drives and controls the back top front rotation drive motor 3425 is connected to the back top front rotation drive motor 3425 and back top rotation drive motor 3425 in the +12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. A +12V fuse EF 12a6 is provided to cut off the overcurrent flowing to the driver IC 1720c2a6 that drives and controls the front rotation drive motor 3425, and the driver IC 1720c2a7 that drives and controls the back up and down drive motor 3429 is connected to the +12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. A +12 V fuse EF 12a7 is provided to cut off an overcurrent flowing to the driver IC 1720c2a7 that drives and controls the back up/down drive motor 3429 and the back up/down drive motor 3429. A +12V fuse EF12a8 is provided in the +12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720 to cut off overcurrent flowing to the back top rear rotation drive motor 3454 and the driver IC 1720c2a8 that drives and controls the back top rear rotation drive motor 3454.

In addition, to the driver IC 1720c2a9 that drives and controls the rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the driver IC 1720c2a9 that drives and controls the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 and the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 in the +12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720 A +12 V fuse EF 12 a 9 that cuts off the flowing overcurrent is provided, and the driver IC 1720 c 2 a 10 that drives and controls the rear left elevation drive motor 3554 has the rear rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear rear left elevation drive motor 3554 in the +12 V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. A +12V fuse EF 12a10 is provided to cut off an overcurrent flowing to the driver IC 1720c2a10 that drives and controls the left elevation drive motor 3554, and the driver IC 1720c2a11 that drives and controls the rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is connected to the +12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. , a +12V fuse EF12a11 is provided to cut off an overcurrent flowing to the driver IC 1720c2a11 that drives and controls the rear right rotation drive motor 3625 and the rear right rotation drive motor 3625, and the driver that drives and controls the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654. The IC 1720c2a12 is provided with a +12V fuse EF12a12 that cuts off overcurrent flowing to the driver IC 1720c2a12 that drives and controls the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 and the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654 in the +12V power supply line of the effect drive board 1720. there is

One end of the +12V fuse EF12a1, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC 1720c2a1 that drives and controls the rear driving motor 3126, is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The other end of the +12V fuse EF12a1 is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the Zener diode ED60, and is also electrically connected to a connector terminal as a power supply line MOT1+12V for supplying power to the rear drive motor 3126. FIG. One end of the +12V fuse EF12a2, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC 1720c2a9 that drives and controls the rear left rotation drive motor 3525, is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The other end of the +12V fuse EF12a2 is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the Zener diode ED61, and is also electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power supply line MOT2+12V for supplying power to the back-rear left rotation drive motor 3525. be. The driver ICs 1720c2a3 to 1720c2a11 have the same circuit configuration, and one end of the +12V fuse EF12a12, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC 1720c2a12 that drives and controls the rear right elevation drive motor 3654, is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. there is The other end of the +12V fuse EF12a12 is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the Zener diode ED71, and is also electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power supply line called MOT12+12V that supplies power to the rear-rear-right elevation drive motor 3654. be.

The driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are equipped with 4-channel low-side drivers, overcurrent protection, short-circuit protection, thermal shutdown, undervoltage lockout, diodes that clamp turn-off transient voltages generated by inductive loads, and serial interfaces. The driver IC 1720c2a1 at the first stage to the driver IC 1720c2a12 at the final stage are electrically connected in a daisy chain. The driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 provide information from the overcurrent protection unit (status information indicating the current state), information from the short circuit protection unit (status information indicating the presence or absence of a short circuit), and information from the thermal shutdown (indicating the shutdown state due to overheating). status information) and information from the low-voltage lockout section (status information indicating a standby state when the input voltage drops below a predetermined voltage) can be read via the serial interface.

Terminal 14 (SDATIN terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a serial data input terminal, and terminal 15 (SDATOUT) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a serial data output terminal. The drive data signal SDAT for the drive motor, which is serial data from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, is connected to the connector of the peripheral control board 1510, and the wiring ( Harness), the connector of the performance drive board 1720, the performance drive input circuit (not shown) described above, and the resistor ER60. A data signal SDAT is output and input to the terminal 14 of the driver IC 1720c2a2 in the subsequent stage of the driver IC 1720c2a1 in the first stage via the resistor ER64.

The driver IC 1720c2a2 outputs the drive data signal SDAT for the drive motor, which is serial data, from its 15 terminal to the driver IC 1720c2a3, which is the subsequent driver IC. Then, the drive data signal SDAT for the drive motor, which is serial data output from the 15 terminal of the driver IC 1720c2a11, which is the driver immediately before the driver IC 1720c2a12, which is the driver of the final stage, is transmitted through the resistor ER82 to the final stage, which is the latter stage. It is input to terminal 14 of driver IC 1720c2a12 of the stage. In this way, the drive data signal SDAT for the drive motor, which is serial data, is sent from the first-stage driver IC 1720C2a1 to the final-stage driver IC 1720C2a12, which are electrically connected in a daisy chain.

Since the driver IC 1720c2a12 is the final stage driver IC, there is no subsequent stage driver IC. Therefore, the terminal 15 (SDATOUT) of the final stage driver IC 1720c2a12 is not connected to the outside.

In addition, in the drive motor drive data signal SDAT, which is serial data from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to drive data for driving the drive motor on the game board 5 side, the internal data of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 There is a command (status information acquisition data) for confirming the state by status information. Status information includes information from the overcurrent protection unit (status information indicating the current state), information from the short circuit protection unit (status information indicating whether there is a short circuit), information from thermal shutdown (status indicating shutdown due to overheating). information), and information from the low voltage lockout section (status information indicating a standby state when the input voltage drops below a predetermined voltage). The driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 output status information as serial data from a terminal 16 (FAULT), which will be described later.

A terminal 13 (SCLK terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a serial clock signal input terminal. The drive motor clock signal SCLK, which is a serial clock signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, is connected to the connector of the peripheral control board 1510, and the wiring ( Harness), it is input to the effect drive board 1720 via the connector of the effect drive board 1720 . The drive motor clock signal SCLK, which is a serial clock signal input to the effect drive board 1720, is branched toward the terminals 13 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 via the above-described effect drive input circuit (not shown). For example, the drive motor clock signal SCLK, which is a serial clock signal branched via a performance drive input circuit (not shown), is input to the terminal 13 of the driver IC 1720c2a1 via the resistor ER61, and is input to the terminal of the driver IC 1720c2a2 via the resistor ER64. 13, and input to the terminal 13 of the driver IC 1720c2a12 via the resistor ER83. In other words, the terminals 13 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are electrically connected in parallel, unlike the terminals 14 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 to which serial data is input and daisy-chained electrically.

The resistors ER60 to ER83 function as damping resistors for reducing signal reflection in the path for transmitting the drive data signal SDAT for the drive motor, which is serial data. This is because, of the input terminals of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, the terminals 13 and 14 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are terminals to which signals related to serial communication are input, and the signal transmission speed is faster than the other input terminals. is. It is to be noted that there is no problem even if a damping resistor is provided for a terminal 11 (LATCH terminal) and a terminal 8 (ENBL terminal), which are other input terminals and will be described later. For example, when a set resistor (resistor array) is a component that is commonly used on multiple boards, surface mount type resistors (SMD type resistors) are mounted on the terminals 13 and 14 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12. Compared to , the number of parts can be reduced, and the use of a set of resistors (resistor array) may be advantageous in terms of packaging density.

A terminal 11 (LATCH terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a latch signal input terminal. The drive motor latch signal SLAT, which is a latch signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, is connected to the connector of the peripheral control board 1510, the wiring (harness ), is input to the effect drive board 1720 via the connector of the effect drive board 1720 . The drive motor latch signal SLAT, which is a latch signal input to the effect drive board 1720, is branched toward the terminals 11 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 via the above-described effect drive input circuit (not shown).

A terminal 8 (ENBL terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is an enable signal input terminal, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the effect drive board 1720 (board ground) in this embodiment. Terminals 8 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are internally pulled down, but are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the effect drive board 1720, so that the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 When the drive motor latch signal SLAT, which is a latch signal, is input to the terminal 11 of the driver IC 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, when the drive motor latch signal SLAT is input to the terminal 11 of the driver IC 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, when the logic of the drive motor latch signal SLAT is the take-in permission logic (for example, HI), the clock signal is input to the terminal 13 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12. Based on the motor clock signal SCLK, the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 respectively take in the drive motor drive data signal SDAT, which is serial data input to the terminals 14, convert the taken in serial data into parallel data, and output the data to an output terminal, which will be described later. Output from 3, 4, 6, 7. On the other hand, when the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 receive the drive motor latch signal SLAT, which is a latch signal, at the terminal 11 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 and the logic thereof is a take-in permission logic (for example, LOW), the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 Based on the driving motor clock signal SCLK, which is a clock signal input to the terminal 13 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, the driving data signal SDAT for the driving motor, which is serial data input to the terminal 14 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, is not captured. , maintains the current output state (that is, maintains the state in which the previous data was captured and converted and output from the output terminals 3, 4, 6, and 7).

A terminal 9 (RESET terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a reset signal input terminal, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the effect drive board 1720 (board ground) in this embodiment. By electrically connecting the reset signal input terminal to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the effect drive board 1720, the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are prevented from unintentionally by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 due to disturbance such as noise. to prevent it from being reset.

Terminals 5 (GND terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are ground terminals and are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the effect drive board 1720 (board ground).

Terminal 1 (VM terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a power input terminal, a connector of the peripheral control board 1510, a wiring (harness) electrically connecting between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the production drive board 1720, +12V fuses EF12a1 to EF12a1, which are fuses provided in the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, are electrically connected to the +12V power line supplied through the connector of the effect drive board 1570 and the +12V fuse EF12 of the effect drive board 1720. One end of the EF 12a12 is also electrically connected. The other ends of the +12V fuses EF12a1 to EF12a12, which are the fuses provided in the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, respectively, are electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes ED60 to ED71, respectively, and the game board 5 are electrically connected to terminals of the connector as power supply lines MOT1+12V to MOT12+12 for supplying power to the side drive motors.

Terminal 2 (VCLAMP terminal) of driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is an output terminal for outputting a clamp voltage, and is electrically connected to cathode terminals of Zener diodes ED60 to ED71, respectively.

The terminal 3 (OUT1 terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is an output terminal to the load 1, and serves as connector terminals as MOT1-A to MOT12-A through which the current that excites the phase A of the driving motor on the game board 5 side flows. electrically connected.

Terminal 4 (OUT2 terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is an output terminal to the load 2, and serves as a connector terminal as MOT1-B to MOT12-B through which a current that excites the B phase of the driving motor on the game board 5 side flows. electrically connected.

Terminal 6 (OUT3 terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is an output terminal to the load 3, and is a connector as MOT1-/A to MOT12-/A through which the current that excites the /A phase of the drive motor on the game board 5 side flows. are electrically connected to the terminals of

The terminal 7 (OUT4 terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is an output terminal to the load 4, and is a connector as MOT1-/B to MOT12-/B through which the current that excites the /B phase of the drive motor on the game board 5 side flows. are electrically connected to the terminals of

Terminals 10 (NC terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are not connected to the outside.

Terminals 10 (NC terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are not connected to the outside.

A terminal 16 (FAULT terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a serial data output terminal, and outputs information from the overcurrent protection unit (status information indicating the current state), information from the short circuit protection unit (status information indicating whether there is a short circuit), Status information including thermal shutdown information (status information indicating shutdown status due to overheating) and low voltage lockout information (status information indicating standby status when input voltage drops below a predetermined voltage) are output as error signals 1 to 12, which are serial data. The error signal 1 to error signal 12, which are serial data output from the terminal 16 (FAULT terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, are input to the logical sum circuit (OR circuit) by the logic circuit 1720c2b of the effect drive board 1720 and calculated. The result of this calculation is serial data, and the driver circuit error signal is electrically connected between the effect drive output circuit (not shown) of the effect drive board 1720, the connector of the effect drive board 1720, and the board between the effect drive board 1720 and the peripheral control board 1510. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the connecting wiring (harness) and the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 .

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a driver circuit error signal, which is serial data, via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). As described above, the error signals 1 to 12 are calculated by the OR circuit (OR circuit) of the logic circuit 1720c2b of the effect drive board 1720. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a receives the status signal included in the driver circuit error signal. Based on the information, it is not possible to individually determine which of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 of the effect drive board 1720 the status information is for. It is possible to determine whether or not a problem has occurred, and various effect devices (various LEDs and effect display devices 1600) provided on the game board 5 and various effect devices provided on the door frame 3 (various LEDs and effect operation button unit 360).

In this embodiment, as described above, the error signals 1 to 12 are calculated by the OR circuit (OR circuit) of the logic circuit 1720c2b of the effect drive board 1720. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a is a driver Based on the status information included in the circuit error signal, it is not possible to individually determine which of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 of the effect drive board 1720 the status information is for. 1 to error signal 12 may be input to the peripheral control IC 1510a. In this way, based on the status information included in the driver circuit error signal, the status information and the driver IC among the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 of the effect drive board 1720 can be associated with each other and grasped. It is possible to determine whether or not a problem has occurred.

[11-3-2b. Arrangement of fuses provided in +12V system driver IC]
The +12V fuses EF12a1 to EF12a12, which are fuses provided in the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, may generate heat due to overcurrent flowing to the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 that drive the drive motor on the game board 5 side. 1720c2a12 (especially near terminal 1 (VM terminal) and terminal 2 (VCLAMP terminal) of driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12) or the power supply lines MOT1+12V to MOT12+12V mentioned above, MOT1-A line to MOT12-A line, MOT1- Near the connectors connected as B line to MOT12-B line, MOT1-/A line to MOT12-/A line, MOT1-/B line to MOT12-/B line (in particular, the power lines MOT1+12V to MOT12+12V are connected) It is preferably located in the vicinity of the connector of the terminal that is connected).

[11-3-3. Copper foil surface on the surface of the substrate on which the fuse is mounted (fuse mounting surface)]
The copper foil surface on the surface (fuse mounting surface) side of the board on which the fuse is mounted will be described. The fuses are the +5V fuse SF5 of the peripheral control board 1510, the +12V fuse SF12 of the peripheral control board 1510, the +24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the control power supply fuse SF3 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. , +12V fuses PF12, PF12a1, PF12a2 of the effect display device 1600, +5V fuse EF5 of the effect drive board 1720, +12V fuse EF12 of the effect drive board 1720, +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 ( +12V fuses EF12a1 to EF12a12 shown in FIG. 223), +24V fuse EF24 of effect drive board 1720, fuses provided in +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 of effect drive board 1720 (+24V fuses EF24a1 and EF24a2 shown in FIG. 223) In addition to the +12V fuse DF12 of each decoration board of the game board 5, there are +12V fuses and +24V fuses of each drive board of the door frame 3, +12V fuses of each decoration board of the door frame 3, and the like.

Each of these fuses in this embodiment employs a surface mount type (so-called SMD type) and is mounted on the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of each substrate. An effect in which the +12V fuse EF12 of the effect drive board 1720 and the fuse EF12a1 provided in the driver IC 1720c2a1 that drives and controls the back drive motor 3126 among the fuses provided in the +12V system driver IC 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 are mounted. The copper foil surface on the surface (fuse mounting surface) side of the drive substrate 1720 will be described, and a method for selecting each fuse will be described.

[11-3-3a. Copper foil surface on the surface (fuse mounting surface) side of the effect drive board on which the +12V fuse is mounted]
The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 on which the +12V fuse EF1 is mounted is, as shown in FIG. A plurality of connector soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) are arranged in two rows along the vertical direction. Among the plurality of connector soldering copper foils, power supply terminals are assigned to the first terminal on the left side and the second terminal on the right side, and the third and second terminals are below the first terminal. A terminal for GND (terminal for ground) is assigned to the fourth terminal below , and a control signal is assigned to other terminals (not shown). The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 is long in the vertical direction for mounting the +12V fuse EF12 in the vicinity of the second terminal assigned as the power supply terminal among the plurality of connector soldering copper foils. Out of a pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12xpa and EF12xpb (so-called “pads”) having a rectangular shape, the connector side fuse soldering copper foil EF12xpa is formed so as to be disposed, and is formed as the land of the first terminal. A connector-side wiring pattern 1720xpa is formed to electrically connect the land of the second terminal and the fuse soldering copper foil EF12xpa.

The connector is inserted through the connector soldering copper foil and soldered on the back surface (fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y of the effect drive board 1720, and the pair of terminals of the +12V fuse EF12 is connected to the pair of fuse soldering copper foil EF12xpa. , EF12xpb and soldered respectively, the longitudinal direction of the connector and the longitudinal direction of the +12V fuse EF12 are arranged perpendicular to each other.

Of the pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12xpa and EF12xpb, in the vicinity of the fuse soldering copper foil EF12xpb away from the connector, a plurality of through holes EF12t are formed in three rows along the vertical direction. , the vertical and horizontal distances of the through holes EF12t formed in three rows are compared with the vertical and horizontal distances of the fuse soldering copper foil EF12xpb. Both are about twice as large. This through-hole EF12t is electrically connected by a hole (copper-plated hole) penetrating both surfaces (front surface (fuse mounting surface) and back surface (fuse non-mounting surface)) of the effect drive board 1720. On the back surface (fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y of the effect drive board 1720, a rectangular copper foil area (not shown) covering the through hole EF12t is located at a position corresponding to the through hole EF12t. It is formed as an island that is not electrically connected to the fuse non-mounting surface (copper foil area formed on 1720y).

The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 electrically connects the fuse soldering copper foil EF12xpb away from the connector and the through hole EF12t out of the pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12xpa and EF12xpb. A trailing wiring pattern 1720xpb is formed for connecting and supplying a +12V power line to a plurality of trailing electronic components (not shown) and trailing boards (each decorative board of the game board 5).

The line width Pw2 of the succeeding side wiring pattern 1720xpb is larger than the line width Pw1 of the connector side wiring pattern 1720xpa, and is formed to be about twice as large in this embodiment. The connector soldering copper foil to which the connector-side wiring pattern 1720xpa is electrically connected is formed close to each other in the vertical and horizontal directions, so it is difficult to increase the width of the wiring pattern. If the wiring pattern through which the line-supply current flows is routed inside the effect drive board 1720 with a thin line, the wiring pattern may burn out within the capacity selected for the +12V fuse EF12. Therefore, in the present embodiment, since it is difficult to ensure a large line width Pw1 of the connector-side wiring pattern 1720xpa, the wiring pattern 1720xpa on the connector side is made of copper foil for soldering so that the line length of the connector-side wiring pattern 1720xpa can be shortened as much as possible. A +12V fuse EF12 is arranged in the vicinity of the second terminal assigned as the power supply terminal.

The +12V fuse EF12 must not be blown by an inrush current when the power is turned on or by using a normal steady current, but must be blown by an overcurrent. The reason for providing the through-hole EF12t is that the subsequent wiring pattern 1720xpb carries current from the +12V power supply line, so the temperature rises. The hole and the rectangular copper foil area (not shown) formed on the back surface (fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y of the effect drive board 1720 increase the surface area for cooling.

The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 is coated with a resist liquid of a predetermined color except for the connector soldering copper foil, the pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12xpa, EF12xpb, and the through hole EF12t. Then, the directions of the electronic components, part numbers, pin numbers, etc. are printed by silk printing with paint of a predetermined color. The color of the resist liquid and the color of the paint include, for example, white, yellow, green, black, red, blue, etc., and are used in appropriate combinations.

[11-3-3b. Copper foil surface on the surface (fuse mounting surface) side of the effect drive board on which the fuse provided in the +12V driver IC is mounted]
Of the fuses provided in the +12V driver IC 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720, the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 on which the fuse EF12a1 provided in the driver IC 1720c2a1 that drives and controls the back drive motor 3126 is mounted is As shown in FIG. 224(b), a branch wiring pattern 1720xpc branched from the succeeding wiring pattern 1720xpb for supplying the +12 V power supply line has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction for mounting the fuse EF12a1 provided in the driver IC 1720c2a1. of a pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12a1xpa and EF12a1xpb (so-called "pads") provided, the branch side fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpa is arranged, and the branch side fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpa and a VM terminal copper foil VMp (so-called “pad”) having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction on which a terminal 1 (VM terminal) of the driver IC 1720c2a1 is mounted. is formed. In addition, on the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720, in addition to the VM terminal and VCLAMP terminal of the driver IC 1720c2a1, wiring copper foils (so-called "pads") for each terminal are provided for other terminals. formed respectively.

The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 is a copper foil VCLAMPp (so-called “pad”) for the VCLAMP terminal having a rectangular shape elongated in the horizontal direction on which the terminal 2 (VCLAMP terminal) of the driver IC 1720c2a1 is mounted. Then, the anode terminal copper foil ED60ap (so-called “pad”) having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction on which the anode terminal of the Zener diode ED60 is mounted, the VCLAMP terminal copper foil VCLAMPp and the anode terminal copper foil ED60ap are electrically connected. A VCLAMP terminal wiring pattern 1720xpe is formed to be directly connected. The line width of the VCLAMP terminal wiring pattern 1720xpe is the same as the line width of the VM terminal wiring pattern 1720xpd.

Further, the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 is separated from the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc of the pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12a1xpa and EF12a1xpb (that is, electrically connected to the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc). In the vicinity of the copper foil EF12a1xpa for soldering the fuse on the branch side and the copper foil EF12a1xpb for soldering the fuse on the other side, a plurality of through holes EF12a1t are formed in two rows along the left-right direction. The horizontal distance dimension and the vertical distance dimension of the through holes EF12a1t formed in alignment with each other are both about approx. one time bigger. This through-hole EF12a1t is electrically connected by a hole (copper-plated hole) penetrating both surfaces (front surface (fuse mounting surface) and back surface (fuse non-mounting surface)) of the effect drive board 1720. On the back surface (fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y of the effect drive board 1720, a rectangular copper foil area (not shown) covering the through hole EF12a1t is provided at a position corresponding to the through hole EF12a1t. A copper foil region different from a rectangular copper foil region (not shown) covering the hole EF12t is electrically connected to another region (a copper foil region formed on the back surface (fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y of effect drive board 1720). Formed as a disconnected island.

The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 is separated from the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc (that is, the branch electrically connected to the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc) of the pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12a1xpa and EF12a1xpb. A side fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpa and the other side fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpb, a through hole EF12a1t, and a cathode terminal copper foil having a vertically elongated rectangular shape on which the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ED60 is mounted. ED60kp (a so-called “pad”) is electrically connected to the VCLAMP terminal copper foil VCLAMPp and the anode terminal copper foil ED60ap to supply a power supply line MOT1+12V for supplying power to the rear drive motor 3126. , a motor-side wiring pattern 1720xpf is formed.

A pair of terminals of the +12V fuse EF12a1 provided in the driver IC 1720c2a1 are placed on and soldered to a pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12a1xpa and EF12a1xpb, respectively. When the foil ED60ap and the cathode terminal copper foil ED60kp are placed and soldered respectively, the longitudinal direction of the +12V fuse EF12a1 and the longitudinal direction of the Zener diode ED60 are arranged perpendicular to each other.

As described above, the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc is branched from the succeeding wiring pattern 1720xpb described above that supplies the +12V power supply line, and its line width Pa1w1 is compared with the line width Pw2 of the succeeding wiring pattern 1720xpb described above. Although it is small, it is formed larger than the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the branch-side fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpa. The line width Pa1w1 of the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc may be larger, the same, or smaller than the line width of the connector-side wiring pattern 1720xpa described above. The width is formed larger than the line width of the VCLAMP terminal wiring pattern 1720xpe. Although the line width of the VM terminal wiring pattern 1720xpd and the line width of the VCLAMP terminal wiring pattern 1720xpe are the same, they are thinner than the line width Pa1w1 of the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc.

The line width Pa1w2 of the motor-side wiring pattern 1720xpf is larger than the line width Pa1w1 of the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc, and is approximately 1.5 times larger in this embodiment. The line width of the VM terminal wiring pattern 1720xpd and the VCLAMP terminal wiring pattern 1720xpe to which the +12V power supply line is supplied is thin, whereas the line width of the motor side wiring pattern 1720xpf is thick. This is because the pattern 1720xpf supplies a power supply line of MOT1+12V for supplying power to the rear drive motor 3126, and the amount of current flowing is large.

The +12V fuse EF12a1 provided in the driver IC 1720c2a1 must not be fused due to rush current when the power is turned on or the use of normal steady current, but must be fused due to overcurrent. The reason for providing the through-hole EF12a1t is that the motor-side wiring pattern 1720xpf carries a current of MOT1+12V, which supplies power to the back and rear drive motor 3126, and thus the temperature rises. In order to prevent the +12V fuse EF12a1 from being melted, a through-hole that is copper-plated and a rectangular copper foil area (not shown) formed on the rear surface (fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y of the effect drive board 1720 (not shown) is provided. The through hole EF12t and a copper foil region different from a copper foil region having a rectangular shape (not shown) covering the through hole EF12t at a position corresponding to the through hole EF12t increase the surface area for cooling.

The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 includes the connector soldering copper foil, the pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12xpa, EF12xpb, the through hole EF12t, and a pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12xpa and EF12xpb. Except for copper foil EF12a1xpa, EF12a1xpb, through-hole EF12a1t, anode terminal copper foil ED60ap, cathode terminal copper foil ED60kp, VM terminal copper foil VMp, VCLAMP terminal copper foil VCLAMPp, and wiring copper foil for each terminal, predetermined Colored resist liquids are applied, and orientations of electronic parts, part numbers, pin numbers, etc. are printed by silk printing with paints of predetermined colors. The color of the resist liquid and the color of the paint include, for example, white, yellow, green, black, red, blue, etc., and are used in appropriate combinations.

[11-3-3c. How to select the capacity of each fuse]
Here, a method for selecting each fuse will be briefly described. Fuses must not be blown by inrush current when the power is turned on or by the use of normal steady current, but they must be blown by overcurrent. However, depending on the mounting density of the fuse, other electronic components are mounted around the fuse. If you compare the fuse with a low mounting density state where it is not mounted, even if the temperature around the fuse is the same, the temperature of the fuse itself in a state of high mounting density is higher than the temperature of the fuse itself in a state of low mounting density. Become. Therefore, it is preferable that the capacity of each fuse is selected based on the temperature at the pair of terminals of each fuse in addition to the ambient temperature of each fuse. Therefore, in this embodiment, the capacity of each fuse is selected based on the temperature at the pair of terminals of each fuse in addition to the ambient temperature of each fuse. For example, when mounting an electronic component as a heating element around a fuse mounted on a board and selecting it based on the relationship between the rated current ratio (%) and the ambient temperature (°C), the ambient temperature of the fuse is used as the ambient temperature. Use the terminal temperature of the fuse instead of If this selection method is used, for example, if the fuse capacity is selected using the fuse ambient temperature as the ambient temperature, the selection result will be that the selection cannot be made if the fuse terminal temperature is used as the ambient temperature. This is a risky selection. In addition, whether the selection is made using the fuse ambient temperature as the ambient temperature or the fuse terminal part as the ambient temperature, the selection results must indicate that the selection is possible. is more preferred.

Among the capacities of the fuses, the capacity of the +5V fuse SF5, which is the main fuse of the +5V power supply line supplied from the peripheral control board 1510, is the capacity of the +5V fuse mounted on the effect drive board 1720, which is the succeeding board. The +5V fuse, which is the largest and mounted on the subsequent board, has a smaller capacity than the fuse mounted on the previous board, and multiple fuses are mounted on the subsequent board. In this case, among the same succeeding boards, the capacity of the first-stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the fuse mounted on the preceding board, and the capacity of the first-stage fuse is equal to the capacity of the last-stage fuse. is larger than

For example, in a +5V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the last stage, and the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage is larger than that of the fuse in the last stage. The capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage is smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the first stage, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage is smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage. It may be smaller than the capacity of the second middle stage fuse. Further, for example, in a +5V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the last stage, and the fuse in the first middle stage. is smaller than the capacity of the first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the first middle stage fuse, and the capacity of the last stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the first middle stage fuse. may be the same as the capacity of the second middle stage fuse. Further, for example, in a +5V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the last stage, and the fuse in the first middle stage. is smaller than the capacity of the first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is the same as the capacity of the first middle stage fuse, and the capacity of the last stage fuse is 1 It may be smaller than or equal to the capacity of the previous second middle stage fuse. Also, for example, in a +5V power supply line, if four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is equal to the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage, and the capacity of the fuse in the last stage. may be smaller than or equal to the sum of the capacity of the fuse and the capacity of the other fuses. In the +5V power supply line, if the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the sum of the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage, and the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, the The substrate itself may catch fire due to overcurrent.

In addition, among the capacities of the fuses, the capacity of the +12V fuse SF12, which is the main fuse of the +12V power line supplied from the peripheral control board 1510, is the effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 1720, and the game board 5, which are subsequent boards. The capacity of the +12V fuse mounted on each decorative board provided in the 12V is the largest, and the subsequent board has the capacity of the fuse mounted on the previous board (no fuse mounted on the previous board). (Sometimes the fuse capacity on the previous board on which the fuse is mounted (hereinafter the same)), and when multiple fuses are mounted on the subsequent board, the same subsequent board , the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is smaller than the capacity of the fuse mounted on the previous board, and the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the last stage.

For example, in a +12V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same succeeding board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than that of the fuse in the last stage, and the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage is larger than that of the fuse in the last stage. The capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage is smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the first stage, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage is smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage. It may be smaller than the capacity of the second middle stage fuse. Further, for example, in a +12V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the last stage, and the fuse in the first middle stage. is smaller than the capacity of the first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the first middle stage fuse, and the capacity of the last stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the first middle stage fuse. may be the same as the capacity of the second middle stage fuse. Further, for example, in a +12V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the last stage, and the fuse in the first middle stage. is smaller than the capacity of the first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is the same as the capacity of the first middle stage fuse, and the capacity of the last stage fuse is 1 It may be smaller than or equal to the capacity of the previous second middle stage fuse. Also, for example, in the +12V power supply line, if four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is equal to the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage, and the capacity of the fuse in the last stage. may be smaller than or equal to the sum of the capacity of the fuses. In the +12V power supply line, if the first stage fuse capacity is larger than the sum of the first middle stage fuse capacity, the second middle stage fuse capacity, and the final stage fuse capacity, the The substrate itself may catch fire due to overcurrent.

Among the capacities of the fuses, the capacity of the +24V fuse SF24, which is the main fuse of the +24V power supply line supplied from the peripheral control board 1510, is the capacity of the +24V fuse mounted on the effect drive board 1720, which is the succeeding board. The +24V fuse, which is the largest and mounted on the subsequent board, has a smaller capacity than the fuse mounted on the previous board, and multiple fuses are mounted on the subsequent board. In this case, among the same succeeding boards, the capacity of the first-stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the fuse mounted on the preceding board, and the capacity of the first-stage fuse is equal to the capacity of the last-stage fuse. is larger than

For example, in a +24V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the last stage, and the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage is larger than that of the fuse in the last stage. The capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage is smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the first stage, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage is smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage. It may be smaller than the capacity of the second middle stage fuse. Further, for example, in a +24V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same succeeding substrate, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the last stage, and the fuse in the first middle stage. is smaller than the capacity of the first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the first middle stage fuse, and the capacity of the last stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the first middle stage fuse. may be the same as the capacity of the second middle stage fuse. Further, for example, in a +24V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same succeeding substrate, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the last stage, and the fuse in the first middle stage. is smaller than the capacity of the first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is the same as the capacity of the first middle stage fuse, and the capacity of the last stage fuse is 1 It may be smaller than or equal to the capacity of the previous second middle stage fuse. For example, in a +24V power supply line, if four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is equal to the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage, and the capacity of the fuse in the last stage. may be smaller than or equal to the sum of the capacity of the fuses. In the +24V power supply line, if the first-stage fuse capacity is larger than the sum of the first middle-stage fuse capacity, the second middle-stage fuse capacity, and the final-stage fuse capacity, The substrate itself may catch fire due to overcurrent.

[12. Each decorative substrate provided on the door frame]
Next, each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 75 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 225 to 227. FIG. FIG. 225 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical connection of each decorative board provided on the door frame, FIG. 226 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative board provided with two constant current drive circuits; Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 and the frame door sub-relay board will be described, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, and the decorative board provided with the LED constant current drive circuit will be described.

First, as described above, the door frame 3 includes the upper left plate decorative body 271, the upper right plate decorative body 276, the upper central plate decorative body 312a, the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame, the side The side window interior decoration part 410b of the window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are respectively arranged, and the dish upper left decoration body 271, the dish upper right decoration body 276, and the dish A plate lower left decoration 281, a plate lower right decoration 286, and a plate center lower decoration 312b are arranged below the central upper decoration 312a.

Behind the upper left plate decoration 271, a plate upper left decoration substrate 273 formed in a strip shape extending left and right along the upper left plate decoration 271 is arranged. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). Behind the upper right plate decoration 276, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278 formed in a strip shape extending left and right along the upper right plate decoration 276 is arranged. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (five in this embodiment). Behind the upper plate center decoration 312a, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314 formed in an elongated band plate shape having a semi-arc shape along the plate center upper decoration 312a is arranged. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 314 are used for light emission decoration.

Behind the door frame left side decoration 404, a left side upper decoration substrate 402a and a left side lower decoration substrate 402b are formed in the shape of elongated strips extending vertically along the door frame left side decoration 404. A door frame left side decorative board 402 is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, left side upper decorative board 402a 5, and 10 on the left side lower decoration substrate 402b). The side window interior decoration parts 410b are arranged in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction of the side window interior decoration member 412, and are formed in a long and narrow strip shape extending vertically along the side window interior decoration member 412 behind it. A window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 12 LEDs) mounted on the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 are decorated with light emission. Behind the door frame right side decoration 419, a right side upper decoration substrate 418a and a right side lower decoration substrate 418b are formed in the shape of elongated strips extending vertically along the door frame right side decoration 419. A door frame right side decorative board 418 is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, right side upper decorative board 418a 4, and 10 on the right side lower decorative substrate 418b).

Behind the door frame top decoration 453, a door frame top central decoration substrate 455 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decoration 453 is arranged. A door frame top left decoration board 456 formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right along the left side of the top decoration 453 is arranged, and extends left and right along the right side of the door frame top decoration 453 . A door frame top right decorative board 457 formed in a long strip shape is arranged, and a plurality of door frame top center decorative boards 455, door frame top left decorative boards 456, and door frame top right decorative boards 457 are mounted. Full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 11 LEDs on the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, 7 LEDs on the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and 6 LEDs on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457) are decorated.

Behind the lower left plate decoration 281, a lower left plate decoration board 283 formed in a strip shape extending left and right along the lower left plate decoration 281 is arranged. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). Behind the lower right plate decoration 286 is disposed a lower right plate decoration substrate 288 formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right along the lower right plate decoration 286 . A plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 6 LEDs) are mounted on the LEDs to illuminate and decorate. Behind the lower plate center decoration 312b, a lower plate center decoration substrate 316 formed in an elongated band plate shape having a semicircular arc along the lower plate center decoration 312b is arranged. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 316 are used for light emission decoration.

The effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53 provided in the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is provided with the effect operation ring decoration board 352 formed in a form in which the ring is divided into front and rear, as described above. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 includes a front decoration board 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a semi-arc shape on the front side, and a rear decoration board 352b formed in an elongated strip shape having a semi-arc shape on the rear side. , consists of The rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (nine in this embodiment) mounted on the front decoration substrate 352a, and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the rear decoration substrate 352b ( In the present embodiment, luminous decoration is provided by 9).

In this way, each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is formed in a long and narrow strip shape. Thus, by increasing the vertical and horizontal distances of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, etc. can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large display device, etc. can also be provided.

[12-1. Electrical connection between each decorative board and frame door sub-relay board]
Plate upper left decorative substrate 273, plate upper right decorative substrate 278, plate center upper decorative substrate 314, left side upper decorative substrate 402a, left side lower decorative substrate 402b, side Window interior decoration part decoration board 413, right side upper decoration board 418a, right side lower decoration board 418b, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board 456, door frame top right decoration board 457, plate lower left decoration board 283, the door frame side decorative substrates such as the plate lower right decorative substrate 288, the plate center lower decorative substrate 316, the front decorative substrate 352a, and the rear decorative substrate 352b, and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. Electrical connection with the provided door frame sub-relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

The door frame secondary relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 receives light emission data, which is the first serial system on the door frame side, serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1, light emission data SDAT2 and clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, are inputted independently. Further, the door frame secondary relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 630 is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line through an interface substrate 635 and electrically connected to the ground (GND).

[12-1-1. Door frame side 1st serial system]
The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame secondary relay board 105 are connected to the plate unit relay board of the plate unit 200 shown in FIG. 214 and the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the plate unit relay board 214 are connected to the plate lower left decorative board 283, the plate lower right decorative board 288, and the ground (GND). They are respectively input to the operation part relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the plate lower left decoration board 283 are input to the plate upper left decoration board 273, respectively. In other words, the plate lower left decoration board 283 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12 V, and the ground (GND) to the plate upper left decoration board 273, thereby providing the plate lower left decoration. The substrate 283 and the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are electrically connected in a row. A door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate unit relay board 214, +12 V, and ground (GND) are respectively input to the plate lower left decoration board 283 serving as a bridge board (not shown). An input connector is provided, and an output connector (not shown) for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12 V, and ground (GND) to the plate upper left decorative board 273 respectively. A connector is provided. On the other hand, the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 electrically connected to the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 (that is, the last stage of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283) is provided with the lower left plate decoration substrate 283. Only input connectors (not shown) are provided for inputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12 V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from output connectors that are not connected.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the plate lower right decorative board 288 are input to the plate upper right decorative board 278, respectively. In other words, the plate lower right decorative board 288 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12 V, and ground (GND) to the plate upper right decorative board 278. The lower decorative board 288 and the plate upper right decorative board 278 are electrically connected in a string. A door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate unit relay board 214, +12 V, and ground (GND) are input to the plate lower right decorative board 288 serving as a bridging board. An output (not shown) for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12 V, and ground (GND) to the plate upper right decorative board 278, respectively. A connector is provided for On the other hand, the upper right plate decoration substrate 278 electrically connected to the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 (that is, the last stage of the lower right plate decoration substrate 288) is connected to the lower right plate decoration substrate 288. Only an input connector (not shown) is provided for inputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12 V, and ground (GND) output from the output connector (not shown) of 288. there is

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the operation section relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 are connected to the plate center upper decorative board 314 and the plate center. It is input to the lower decoration board 316 and the front decoration board 352a of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, respectively.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the front decoration board 352a are respectively input to the rear decoration board 352b. In other words, the front decoration board 352a serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12 V, and ground (GND) to the rear decoration board 352b. The post-decorative substrate 352b is electrically connected in a row. The front decoration board 352a serving as a bridging board receives the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) from the operation section relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300. are provided for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12 V, and ground (GND) to the rear decoration board 352b. There is a connector for output that does not work. On the other hand, a rear decoration board 352b electrically connected to the front decoration board 352a (that is, the rear stage and final stage of the front decoration board 352a) has an output connector (not shown) of the front decoration board 352a. Only input connectors (not shown) are provided for inputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12 V, and ground (GND) respectively output from .

Here, for example, the plate lower left decoration board 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12 V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay board 214 are input will be briefly described. , the plate lower left decorative board 283 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat dissipation circuit 283c, and six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a includes a sink type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of supplying constant current to sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting capable of setting the maximum current to be supplied to sdLED1 to sdLED6. It is mainly composed of a circuit 283y and a circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x controls the constant current to flow through sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate unit relay board 214. FIG. Since the constant current drive circuit 283x is of the sink type as described above, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, the heat dissipation circuit 283c takes charge of part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x can be dispersed.

The +12V input to the lower left plate decoration board 283 is a surface mount type chip fuse that is soldered to the lower left plate decoration board 283 and surface-mounted as a +12V fuse provided on each decoration board on the side of the door frame 3. The +12V fuse SLLDF12 serves as a +12V power supply line, and an LED constant current drive circuit 283a mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish and six full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish. sdLED1 to sdLED6.

Further, for example, the plate upper left decorative board 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12 V, and ground (GND) from the plate lower left decorative board 283 are input will be briefly explained. The plate upper left decorative board 273 has an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat dissipation circuit 273c, and six full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decorative board 283, and is a sink type constant current drive circuit 273x capable of supplying a constant current to suLED1 to suLED6. , and a maximum current setting circuit 273y capable of setting the maximum current to be supplied to suLED1 to suLED6. The constant-current drive circuit 273x controls the supply of a constant current to suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door-frame-side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate lower left decorative board 283. FIG. Since the constant current drive circuit 273x is of the sink type as described above, heat is generated by absorbing the constant current flowing through suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x can be distributed by the heat dispersion circuit 273c.

The +12V input to the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish is a surface mount type chip fuse that is soldered to the upper left decorative board 273 and surface-mounted as a +12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the side of the door frame 3. The +12V fuse SLUDF12 serves as a +12V power supply line, and an LED constant current drive circuit 273a mounted on the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate and six full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted on the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate. It is supplied to suLED1 to suLED6.

[12-1-2. Door frame side 2nd serial system]
The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame secondary relay board 105 are connected to the left side lower decoration board of the door frame left side decoration board 402. 402b, the side window interior decoration board 413, the right side lower decoration board 418b of the door frame right side decoration board 418, and the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. are entered respectively.

+12V and ground (GND) input to the left side lower decoration substrate 402b of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 are input to the left side upper decoration substrate 402a of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are connected to the door frame top right decorative board 457. is entered in

The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative board 457 are input to the door frame top center decorative board 455 respectively. there is In other words, the door frame top right decorative board 457 serves as a bridging board for transmitting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top center decorative board 455. , the door frame top right decorative board 457 and the door frame top center decorative board 455 are electrically connected in a row. The door frame top right decorative board 457 serving as a bridge board receives the second serial line (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, +12 V, and ground ( GND) are input, and the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12 V, and ground (GND) are connected to the door frame top central decorative board. An output connector (not shown) is provided for outputting to 455 respectively. In addition, the door-frame top-right decorative board 457 is shown on the door-frame top-center decorative board 455 that is electrically connected to the door-frame top-right decorative board 457 (that is, is located after the door-frame top-right decorative board 457). An input connector (not shown) is provided for inputting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12 V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors that are not connected. An output connector (not shown) is provided for outputting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively.

The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top center decoration board 455 are input to the door frame top left decoration board 456 respectively. there is In other words, the door frame top center decorative board 455 serves as a bridging board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456. , the door frame top center decorative board 455 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 are electrically connected in a row. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative board 456 electrically connected to the door frame top center decorative board 455 (that is, the rear stage of the door frame top center decorative board 455 and the final stage) has a door. For input (not shown) to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) are respectively outputted from the output connectors (not shown) of the frame top central decorative board 455. Only connectors are provided.

Here, for example, the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame secondary relay board 105, +12 V, and the ground (GND) are input to the left side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. Briefly describing the side lower decorative board 402b, the left side lower decorative board 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat dissipation circuit 402bc, and ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left decorative board 273, and supplies a constant current to hdLED1 to hdLED8. and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay capable of setting the maximum current flowing through hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax supplies a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame secondary relay board 105. control.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decorative substrate 283, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the plate upper left decorative substrate 273. A sink type constant current drive circuit 402bbx capable of supplying a constant current to hdLED10 and five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the upper left decorative board 402a, hdLED9, hdLED10, and left and a maximum current setting circuit 402bby capable of setting the maximum current to be passed through the huLED1 to huLED5 of the side upper decorative substrate 402a. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame secondary relay board 105. A constant current is controlled to flow through hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5 on the upper left decorative substrate 402a.

Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is of the sink type as described above, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through huLED1 to huLED8. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is of the sink type as described above, heat is generated by absorbing the constant current flowing through hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be distributed by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc. Also, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative substrate 402a. ing.

In this way, part of the heat generated by the constant-current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed only by the heat-dissipating circuit 402bc of the substrate on which it is mounted (left-side lower decorative substrate 402b). On the other hand, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is transferred to the subsequent substrate in addition to the heat dissipation circuit 402bc of the substrate (left side lower decorative substrate 402b) on which it is mounted. The heat dissipation circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative substrate 402a can disperse the heat generated by the constant current driving circuit 402bbx.

The constant-current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to pass a constant current through the board (left-side lower decoration board 402b) on which it is mounted and to the huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decoration board 402a, which is the subsequent board. It is Therefore, the operation of electrically connecting the left side lower decorative board 402b and the left side upper decorative board 402a is always required. The operator who performs this work must have his finger on the connector of the left side lower decoration board 402b, the connector of the left side upper decoration board 402a, the heat dissipation circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration board 402b, or the heat of the left side upper decoration board 402a. Since the distributed circuit 402ac is touched, it is necessary to prevent the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the left side upper decoration substrate 402a from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat dissipating circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration board 402b and the heat dissipating circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration board 402a have the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. It also has a function that can prevent damage to electronic components due to

As described above, the left-side upper decorative board 402a receives +12 V from the left-side lower decorative board 402b and the ground (GND). are input. The left-side upper decorative substrate 402a includes the heat dissipation circuit 402ac in addition to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, as described above. As described above, the heat dissipating circuit 402ac has the function of dispersing heat generated by the constant current driving circuit 402bbx, and also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

The +12V input to the left side lower decorative board 402b is a surface mount type fuse that is soldered to the left side lower decorative board 402b and surface-mounted as a +12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the door frame 3 side. +12V power supply line via the front stage +12V fuse LLDF12a1, which is a chip fuse, LED constant current drive circuit 402ba mounted on the left side lower decoration board 402b and 8 multicolor light emission possible mounted on the left side lower decoration board 402b are supplied to hdLED1 to hdLED8, which are full-color LEDs. The +12V input to the left-side lower decoration board 402b is the above-mentioned front-stage +12V fuse LLDF12a1, and the rear-stage +12V fuse which is a surface-mount type chip fuse soldered to the left-side lower decoration board 402b and surface-mounted. An LED constant current drive circuit 402bb which becomes a +12V power supply line via a fuse LLDF12a2 and is mounted on the left side lower decorative board 402b, and hdLED9 which is two full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor and mounted on the left side lower decorative board 402b. , hdLED10, five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 that are capable of emitting multicolor light and are mounted on the upper left decorative substrate 402a.

[12-1-3. Emission data]
The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described here. It consists of key information. The ID information is information indicating which LED constant current drive circuit among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation from among gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127 is specified.

[12-2. Overview of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3 is the same circuit, so the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided in the plate lower left decorative board 283 will be described here. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of passing a constant current through sdLED1 to sdLED6, and the maximum current to be passed through sdLED1 through sdLED6 is set. and a maximum current setting circuit 283y.

[12-2-1. constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels, and each channel can output a current. In this embodiment, an output channel LR is used for an LED element emitting red (R) light, an LED element emitting green (G) light, and an LED element emitting blue (B) light, which constitute one full-color LED. , LG and LB are controlled individually, thereby using three output channels. In other words, in this embodiment, one constant-current drive circuit can control the light emission mode by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs. is now possible.

The constant current drive circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset section 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting section 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing section 283xg, a PWM section 283xh, and a constant current drive section 283xi. mainly composed of

[12-2-2. linear power supply]
The +12V input to the lower left plate decoration board 283 is a surface mounting type that is surface-mounted by soldering to the lower left plate decoration board 283 as a +12V fuse provided on each decoration board on the side of the door frame 3, as described above. +12V power supply line through +12V fuse SLLDF12 which is a chip fuse. The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit that receives the +12V from the +12V power supply line and can generate and supply an internal power supply Vreg (+5V in this embodiment) that is used in the constant current drive circuit 283x. The internal power supply Vreg generated by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset section 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting section 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing section 283xg, a PWM section 283xh, and a constant current driving section. 283xi, and the internal power supply Vreg supplies a reset section 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting section 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing section 283xg, a PWM section 283xh, and a constant current driving section 283xi. is able to work.

The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the +5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. are used in the constant current drive circuit 283x. This is because if a +5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 through various boards is used, the +5V power supply line is used by routing electrical wiring, so that the +5V power supply line that supplies +5V is used. becomes longer, making it easier for noise to enter. Then, if external noise is transmitted to the +5V power supply line and +5V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the LED may flicker under the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the +5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 via various boards is not necessary for the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the noise resistance is extremely high compared to the +5V power supply line. A configuration is adopted in which +5V is independently generated as an internal power supply Vreg in the linear power supply 283xa of the constant current drive circuit 283x from the +12V power supply line.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the internal power supply Vreg is not output from the constant current drive circuit 283x to other boards and is used only within the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg. Therefore, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. As a result, the internal power supply Vreg is stabilized, thereby contributing to prevention of flickering of the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 due to external noise. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise. In addition, the need for input electric wiring and external transmission electric wiring for the +5V power supply line is eliminated, which contributes to miniaturization of the connector.

[12-2-3. Reset section]
The reset unit 283xb creates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, outputs it to the constant current drive circuit 283x, initializes the constant current drive circuit 283x, and operates the constant current drive circuit 283x. A so-called power-on-reset circuit that can be initiated. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset section 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting section 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing section 283xg, the PWM section 283xh, and the constant current driving section 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting section 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing section 283xg, the PWM section 283xh, and the constant current driving section 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, address setting section 283xe, oscillator 283xf, logic processing section 283xg, PWM section 283xh, and constant current driving section 283xi are started to operate.

The constant current drive circuit 283x, for example, does not receive a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. there is For example, if a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter referred to as a "reset signal transmission line") is used, this reset signal transmission line can be used by routing electrical wiring. As a result, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal becomes long, and noise easily penetrates. Then, when external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the constant current drive circuit 283x may be reset by the influence of the external noise and the LED may be turned off. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by eliminating the need for the reset signal transmission line in the constant current drive circuit 283x, a configuration is adopted in which the reset signal is independently generated as the internal reset signal RST in the reset section 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x. did.

Thus, in this embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external board, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current drive circuit 283x to other boards, and only within the constant current drive circuit 283x. By using this, it is possible to make it difficult for external noise to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, so that the internal reset signal RST can be stabilized. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x is not reset by external noise, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, It is possible to contribute to prevention of unexpected extinguishing and flickering of the LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise. In addition, an input electric wiring and an external transmission electric wiring for the reset signal transmission line are not required, which contributes to miniaturization of the connector.

[12-2-4. buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc is a line (hereinafter referred to as a "data line") for transmitting serial data (here, light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. , the waveform of the signal that transmits the serial data is shaped and output to the outside of the logic processing unit 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line (hereinafter referred to as a "clock line") for transmitting a clock signal (here, clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. A clock signal is input from the circuit, and the waveform of the clock signal can be shaped and output to the outside of the logic processing unit 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x.

Data lines and clock lines are transmitted over a plurality of substrates and relay substrates, as described above. As a result, both the data line and the clock line are long, making it easier for noise to enter. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd are provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the noise entering the data line and the clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x is reduced. are shaped in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd so as not to be transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent board.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if both the data line and the clock line are long, the data line and the clock line can be formed to be resistant to noise. As a result, noise-resistant signal transmission can be realized. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise.

[12-2-5. Address setting part]
Based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, the address setting unit 283xe sets 64 different addresses as IDs (IDs for individual identification) of the constant current drive circuit 283x using three ID resistors (not shown). It is possible to do so.

As described above, in this embodiment, the ID that can identify the individual constant current drive circuit 283x is set in advance by the address setting unit 283xe by the hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). It is not set appropriately by receiving data from software.

[12-2-6. Oscillator, logic processor]
The logic processing unit 283xg receives serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) and clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal (here, clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped is inputted. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) based on the address set by the address setting unit 283xe, which is its own ID. Sometimes, gradation information is fetched from this serial data, and based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf, the gradation level in the output channel is set in the PWM unit 283xh so as to obtain the gradation information that has been fetched. On the other hand, when the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not taken in and is set in the PWM section 283xh. control to maintain the current contents of

[12-2-7. PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation) of the LED in each output channel from off to lighting (maximum luminance) in a total of 128 levels from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127. gradation is controlled by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown) for one output channel. In other words, the PWM unit 283xh has PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 individually (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the respective gradations are set, these PWM gradation control sections 1 to 24 control the constant current driving section 283xi so as to flow a current corresponding to the set gradation.

[12-2-8. constant current driver]
The constant current driver 283xi supplies one constant current driver (not shown) for one output channel so as to achieve the gradation set in the PWM gradation controllers 1 to 24 provided in the PWM unit 283xh. A current driver supplies a constant current to the LED elements forming the full-color LED. That is, the constant current driver 283xi has constant current drivers 1 to 24 corresponding to the PWM gradation controllers 1 to 24 (that is, 24 constant current drivers).

The constant current drivers 1 to 8 have one end of a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current to flow through the LED elements emitting red (R) light that constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8. They are electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded (GND). Each of the constant current drivers 9 to 16 has one end of a resistor Rg for setting the maximum current to flow through the LED elements emitting green (G) light, which constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LG1 to LG8. They are electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded (GND). Each of the constant current drivers 17 to 24 has one end of a resistor Rb that sets the maximum current to flow through the LED elements emitting blue (B) light that constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LB1 to LB8. They are electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded (GND).

The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element, which constitute the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 24, respectively. The anode terminal is electrically connected to a +12V power line and receives +12V.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current drivers) through the corresponding heat dissipation resistors. 1 to constant current drivers 8), respectively, so that the constant current flowing through the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current drivers 1 to 8, respectively. It's becoming The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat dissipation resistors. 9 to constant current drivers 16), and the constant current flowing through the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current drivers 9 to 16, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, constant current drivers) through the corresponding heat dissipation resistors. 17 to constant current drivers 24), and the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current drivers 17 to 24, respectively. ing.

The constant-current drivers 1 to 8 draw a constant current flowing through the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED, which are individually set, so that the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED are drawn. can emit light. The constant-current drivers 9 to 16 each absorb a constant current flowing through the green (G) LED elements that form the individually set full-color LEDs, thereby causing the green (G) LED elements that form the full-color LEDs. can emit light. The constant-current drivers 17 to 24 absorb the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED elements that form the individually set full-color LEDs, respectively, so that the blue (B) LED elements that form the full-color LEDs are drawn. can emit light.

In this way, the LED constant current drive circuit can perform dimming lighting by emitting light from 24 LED elements, that is, eight full-color LEDs with individually set constant currents. , it is possible to turn off, turn on with one gradation, blink with one gradation, and the like.

[12-2-9. Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes a resistor Rr for setting the maximum current to flow through the LED elements emitting red (R) light that constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8, and the output channels LG1 to LG1. Construct full-color LEDs in the eight output channels up to LG8, and the resistor Rg for setting the maximum current flowing through the LED elements that emit green (G) light, and the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LB1 to LB8. and a resistor Rb for setting the maximum current to be supplied to the LED element that emits blue (B) light.

One end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 provided in the constant current driver 283xi as described above, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded (GND). there is One end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 provided in the constant current driver 283xi as described above, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded (GND). there is One end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 provided in the constant current driver 283xi as described above, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded (GND). there is

[12-3. Decorative substrate with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a decorative substrate with an LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 226 and 227. FIG. Here, a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decorative board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. The above-described LED constant-current drive circuits provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 3 are configured as the same circuit. Therefore, in FIGS. 226 and 227, for convenience of explanation, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

[12-3-1. Decorative substrate with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. A distribution circuit 283c is provided.

As described above, the door frame secondary relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 receives the light emission data SDAT1, which is the door frame side first serial system, serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510. , the clock signal SCLK1 is input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power line of the power supply board 630 to receive +12V, and is also electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. It is

As described above, the plate lower left decorative board 283 is connected to the plate of the plate unit 200 by the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, +12 V, and ground (GND). It is input through the unit relay board 214 . The +12V input to the lower left plate decoration board 283 is a surface mounting type that is surface-mounted by soldering to the lower left plate decoration board 283 as a +12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the side of the door frame 3 as described above. +12V power supply line through +12V fuse SLLDF12 which is a chip fuse. The +12V supplied from this +12V power supply line is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, and the anode terminals of the red (R) LED elements and the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. Inputs are also made to the anode terminal of the LED element and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements composing the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 (the above-described constant current) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via heat dissipation resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements composing the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 (the above-described constant current) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a through heat dissipation resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements composing the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 (the above-described constant current) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via heat dissipation resistors sdRb1 to sdRb6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). Output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7 and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

Based on the first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) on the side of the door frame, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID, drives the LED constant current drive circuit 283a from the light emission data SDAT1. Gradation information is taken in, and sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled to perform dimming lighting so as to obtain the taken in gradation information.

Since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is of the sink type as described above, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is handled by the heat dissipation resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, and sdRb1 to sdRb6, which constitute the heat dissipation circuit 283c. As a result, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) can be dispersed.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame secondary relay board 105 is transmitted via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above) to the top left decoration of the dish. +12V and ground (GND) are input to the upper left decorative board 273 via the lower left decorative board 283 while being input to the board 273 . As a result, noise that has entered the data line or clock line just before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above) is prevented from being transmitted to the succeeding board 273, which is the top left decoration board. , the waveform can be shaped in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x).

The +12V input to the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish is surface-mounted by soldering to the upper left decorative board 273 as a +12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the side of the door frame 3 as described above. +12V power supply line via a +12V fuse SLUDF12 which is a chip fuse. The +12V supplied from this +12V power supply line is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and the anode terminals of the red (R) LED elements and the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. Inputs are also made to the anode terminal of the LED element and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 (the constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (the constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 (the constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). Output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7 and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

Based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID, Gradation information is taken in, and suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled to perform dimming lighting so as to obtain the taken in gradation information.

Since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is of the sink type as described above, heat is generated by absorbing the constant current flowing through suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is handled by the heat dissipation resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, and suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the heat dissipation circuit 273c. As a result, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) can be dispersed.

In addition to the plate lower left decorative board 283 and the plate upper left decorative board 273, the plate lower right decorative board 288, the plate upper right decorative board 278, and the door frame top left decorative board 456 are used as the decorative boards provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. , and door frame top right decorative substrate 457 .

[12-3-2. Decoration board with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. ˜hdLED 10, with heat dissipation circuit 402bc.

As described above, the door frame secondary relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 receives the light emission data SDAT2, which is the door frame side second serial system serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510. , the clock signal SCLK2 is input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power line of the power supply board 630 to receive +12V, and is also electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. It is

As described above, the left side lower decorative board 402b receives the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, +12 V, and ground (GND). . The +12V input to the left side lower decorative board 402b is soldered to the left side lower decorative board 402b and surface-mounted as a +12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the door frame 3 side, as described above. It becomes a +12V power supply line through the front stage +12V fuse LLDF12a1 which is a mounting type chip fuse. The +12V supplied from the +12V power supply line is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the anode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting hdLED1 to hdLED8 of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Inputs are also made to the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element. The +12V input to the left side lower decoration board 402b is, as described above, the front stage +12V fuse LLDF12a1 and the surface mount type chip fuse soldered to the left side lower decoration board 402b. It becomes a +12V power source line through the post-stage +12V fuse LLDF12a2. The +12V supplied from this +12V power supply line is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb, and the anode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting hdLED9 and hdLED10 out of hdLED1 to hdLED10, green (G). and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element. , the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element, respectively.

In this embodiment, as described above, one constant-current drive circuit controls the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 individually for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs to change the light emission mode. can be controlled. Therefore, of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are controlled in light emission mode by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the remaining two LEDs are controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. For hdLED9 and hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb controls the light emission mode. In addition, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a, which is the subsequent board across the board on which it is mounted (that is, the left side lower decorative board 402b). It is designed to control the light emission mode of huLED1 to huLED5.

Of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8. The output channels LR1 to LR8 (constant current drivers 1 to 8 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba are electrically connected via the heat dissipation resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, and the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via heat dissipation resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. and the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected to the output channel LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via heat dissipation resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. to LB8 (constant current drivers 17 to 24 described above).

Of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, for two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10 are respectively The output channels LR1 and LR2 (constant current driver 1 and constant current driver 2 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are electrically connected via the heat dissipation resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10, and the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are electrically connected to each other. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 and LG2 (constant current driver 9 and constant current driver 10 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via heat dissipation resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. and the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are connected to the output channel LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via heat dissipation resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. , LB2 (constant current driver 17 and constant current driver 18 described above).

In addition, for the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a that follows the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, red ( The cathode terminals of the LED elements of R) are connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb through the heat dissipation resistors huRr1b to huRr5b on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a and the heat dissipation resistors huRr1a to huRr5a on the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, respectively. are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (constant current drivers 3 to 7 described above) of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, respectively. Output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (constant current driver 11 to the constant current driver 15), and the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are respectively connected to the heat dissipation resistors huRb1b to Electrically connected to output channels LB3 to LB7 (constant current driver 19 to constant current driver 23 described above) of LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via huRb5b and heat dissipation resistors huRb1a to huRb5a in left side lower decoration board 402b. It is Output channels LR8, LG8 and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

Based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID, Gradation information is taken in, and eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 out of ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are individually controlled to perform dimming lighting so as to obtain the taken in gradation information. .

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb receives the data line buffer 402baxc and the clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402bax that constitutes the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID, the gradation information is fetched from the light emission data SDAT2, and 10 Of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the remaining two full-color LEDs, hdLED9 and hdLED10, are individually controlled for dimming and lighting, and the left-side substrate that follows the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. The five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the upper decorative substrate 402a are individually controlled for dimming lighting.

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is of the sink type, and heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through eight of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. do. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is handled by the heat dissipation resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, and hdRb1 to hdRb8 that constitute the heat dissipation circuit 402bc. As a result, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) can be dispersed.

Since the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is of the sink type as described above, it absorbs the constant current flowing through the two hdLED9 and hdLED10 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and Five full-color LEDs, huLED1 to huLED5, mounted on the upper left decorative board 402a, which follows the lower side decorative board 402b, generate heat by absorbing a constant current flowing through them. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is transferred to two of the ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, to hdLED9 and hdLED10. The heat dissipation resistors hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, and hdRb10 constituting the heat dissipation circuit 402bc are in charge of the heat dissipation resistors, and are mounted on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a, which is the substrate subsequent to the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, are heat dissipation resistors huRr1a to hudRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, and left side upper decoration substrate 402a, which constitute heat dissipation circuit 402bc in left side lower decoration substrate 402b. The heat dissipation resistors huRr1b to hudRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, huRb1b to huRb5b, which constitute the heat dissipation circuit 402ac in You can do it.

As described above, the heat dissipation circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration board 402b and the heat dissipation circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration board 402a are the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the air, it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic parts due to static electricity.

In addition to the left-side lower decorative board 402b, the decorative boards provided with two LED constant-current drive circuits include a plate center upper decorative board 314, a plate center lower decorative board 316, a side window inner decorative part decorative board 413, and a right side. There is a lower decorative substrate 418b and a door frame top central decorative substrate 455. FIG.

In addition to the left-side upper decoration substrate 402a, there is a right-side upper decoration substrate 418a as a decoration substrate that does not have any LED constant current drive circuit.

[13. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 137 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 228 to 233. FIG. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 228, and FIG. 230 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 231 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing, and FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by the movement of the initial value update type counter, main control side power on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, setting value confirmation display processing, error Display processing will be described.

[13-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big win game state or a small win game state, and an initial value for hit determination for use in determining the initial value of this special random number A decision random number, a reach determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (reach loss) when not generating a jackpot gaming state, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 A variable display pattern random number for use in determining a variable display pattern of special symbols to be variably displayed on the symbol display device, and a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot game state. A symbol random number used to determine the jackpot symbols and minor winning symbols derived and displayed on the symbol display (determining the winning type), and a random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of this symbol random number. etc are provided. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the normal symbol hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece that allows the reception of the game ball of the second start port 2004, and this normal symbol hit determination An initial value determination random number for determination of a normal symbol hit for use in determining the initial value of the random number, and a normal symbol for use in determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a variable display pattern is prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

[13-2. Movement of initial value update type counter]
For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built into the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and performs a high-speed preselection based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the MPU. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is designed to

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, various kinds of data stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU in the processing when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the information regarding the information as numerical values is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off). When clearing except for a specific area out of all areas of the main control built-in RAM, such as when it does not match, the initial value determination random number for normal design per judgment is from the non-volatile RAM that the main control MPU incorporates An ID code is taken out, and an initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a normal symbol based on the taken out ID code is executed, and the derived fixed value is It is designed to be set. That is, the initial value determination random number for determining a normal per symbol is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value set to the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU. The first security measure is to prevent the ID code from being rewritten using an external device once the ID code is stored. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code by execution is taken to prevent analysis by taking a two-step security measure.

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the taken out ID code as the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally acquires game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 5 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number obtained illegally and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval, and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece is opened and closed so that the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004. game state cannot be generated.

[13-3. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU is circuit-configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, main control side power-on processing is performed. When this main-control-side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs power failure clear processing (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is

Following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S14). The RAM clear switch has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error cancel switch), and completely erases the information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. functions as a RAM clear switch for In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear is to be performed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is to be performed and the RAM clear switch is operated. It should be noted that the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14 is extremely short. The player turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch.

When the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). In other words, the main control MPU is in a state capable of executing RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls This flag indicates whether or not to erase various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc.). . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU receives a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and detects whether the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. When the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off), the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This is done based on the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the key is turned ON. It should be noted that the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S18 is an extremely short period of time. , the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on after the setting key switch 1311a is turned on.

In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and determines that the setting key switch is activated based on the setting key ON signal. When 1311a determines that the setting key is ON, it sets the value 1 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and/or the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0 (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU (a setting value dedicated area in a specific area, which will be described later). is a flag that indicates whether or not it is permitted to change or confirm the setting of the set value 1 to set value 6 at the time when is turned ON. A value of 1 is set when display is permitted, and a value of 0 is set when setting changes of set values and confirmation display are not permitted. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. In addition, since the payout control board 633 completes booting in a short time compared to the peripheral control board 1510 at the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, the payout control board 633 is controlled by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU ) can receive various commands.

Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When the main control MPU determines in step S24 that there is an input of the power failure warning signal, it returns to the determination of step S24 and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU determines that there is no power failure warning signal input, whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 1. (step S25). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, the main control MPU determines that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. judge.

When the main control MPU determines in step S25 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 1, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1. Also, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S26). The main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, so that the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied. , it is determined to erase various information in the same manner as when a predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied.

When the main control MPU determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 0, it calculates a checksum (step S29). . This checksum is calculated by regarding the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S29, the main control MPU compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off), which will be described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When the main control MPU determines in step S30 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S29 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

When the main control MPU determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not ended normally, error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

The pachinko machine 1 is powered off, the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is shifted from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). After turning it clockwise 60 degrees and turning it on, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating the push operation part of the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310, and this routine is executed again. The main control side power-on processing is started. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is being operated in the determination of step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In step S18 described above, it is determined that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the setting key is ON and the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in the above-described step S20A, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 in the determination of the above-described step S25. Also, it is determined that the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, and that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. In the process of S38, by clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed (hereinafter referred to as "first RAM error “Release method”).

As a method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and the setting key cylinder remains at the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while depressing the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310, the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, is started again. The main control MPU determines that the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is being operated in the determination of step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. On the other hand, in step S18 described above, it is determined that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the setting key switch is turned on by the setting key ON signal. 1311a determines that the setting key is not turned ON, and sets the value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20B described above. Assuming that the value is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. It is determined that various information should be erased, and in the processing of step S38 described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, thereby canceling the RAM error and allowing the game to proceed. (hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error canceling method").

Thus, in this embodiment, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination of step S30, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally, an error is displayed in step S33, and the main control built-in RAM If there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the RAM (or it is unreliable), there are two canceling methods: the first RAM error canceling method and the second RAM error canceling method. It can be done by As a result, when there is no need to change the settings of the set values, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has ended normally, the main control built-in A working area of the RAM is set (step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU progresses the game based on the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. "Restoration of power" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and fraudulent means (e.g. A high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) is irradiated to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU itself resets and then returns.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, various types of information, checksum values (sum values), etc. are changed as a result of the subsequent various processing, so that the main control side power failure processing (to be described later) is normally terminated and the backup flag BK- is set. If FLG is not set to 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, as will be described later.

Following the determination in step S36, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 (step S27). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, the main control MPU determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. judge.

In the determination of step S27, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and that the predetermined set value display permission condition is established. When it is determined that there is, a setting value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). In this set value confirmation display process, which will be described later in detail, the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM are displayed on the setting display 1310g.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, that is, the predetermined set value is changed. When it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, setting change processing is performed (step S37). This setting change process, which will be described in detail later, is performed based on a signal from the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 . As described above, the RAM clear switch has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting switching button, and error canceling switch). functions as a function of Every time the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is operated, a signal (set value selection switching signal) is input to change the set value and display it on the setting display 1310g. Based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key cylinder is turned from ON to OFF, the changed setting value is determined and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the predetermined Although the set value change permission condition is not satisfied, when it is determined to erase various information in the same way as when the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area to clear (step S38). Here, the main control MPU writes the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (all areas of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area). In this embodiment, when the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, and when the setting change process ends, the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" includes a set value dedicated area in which set values are stored, and an out port 2010, a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port provided in the game area 5a divided and formed on the game board 5. 2012, and an out-ball counting dedicated area in which the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by 2012 is stored. The set value dedicated area stores set values to be changed in the setting change process described later, and the out ball count dedicated area stores the out hole 2010, the first sub-out hole 2011 and the first sub-out hole 2011 counted in the pitch count process described later. A counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the second sub-out port 2012 is stored.

Note that the main control MPU may read out a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM and set it as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU, when erasing various information, the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 has been operated instructs the RAM clear. If the values do not match, or if the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally, a unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is taken out, and this taken out ID code An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determination per normal symbol is performed, and this fixed value is the initial value of the random number for determination per normal symbol described above. It is set to the initial value determination random number for normal design hit determination for use in determination.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize number information output determination counter is set (set) to 0, which is the initial value. Further, the main control MPU progresses the game based on the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following steps S36, S28 or step S40, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer set value is set in the WDT control register") to activate the main control built-in WDT and start counting time until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the main control built-in WDT starts clocking, and the watch dog timer clear register built into the main control MPU ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the clocked time reaches the time set by the timer set value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU (for example, serial input/output ports (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input/output ports (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the peripheral control board 1510 ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control MPU performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is stored in a hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU in order to update the hardware. Along with making settings such as latching and acquiring, settings such as activation of the hard random number circuit incorporated in the main control are set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and the predetermined When all the values within the numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. successively extract the other values in the , without duplication. When the main control MPU acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. A random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is obtained from a hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets this acquired random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU performs reservation setting of commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). Create a power-on state command, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and use it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. memorize to In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information are stored. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure warning. be. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

In the judgment of step S54, when the main control MPU judges that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU performs non-hit-or-lose random number update processing (step S56). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big win symbol initial value determination random number, small winning symbol initial value determination random number, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination). Incidentally, the above-described random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random numbers, normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S54 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned game information and various information including other information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU, for example, outputs drive signals to various displays of the function display unit 1400, the starting solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2612, the special monitor, etc. Stop (step S62).

After step S62, the main control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This setting of RAM access prohibition disables access to the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S41, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs the main control side power-on process again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination of step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power failure processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power failure processing, and the main control side power on processing is executed again. . In other words, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power failure processing based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored because the main control side power failure processing is not executed. The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power failure processing is executed at the time of power failure, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when restarting after forced reset by the built-in reset circuit. There is no way that the value (sum value) and the value (sum value) match, and it always becomes a checksum (sum value) error in the main control built-in RAM. It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. By double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM in this way, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by fraud.

Further, when it is determined in step S25 that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is permitted to change the setting value, setting change processing is performed in step S37, In the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1). When it is determined that the various information should be erased, in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when powering on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch), the setting value is changed and determined. When changing the settings that can be performed (when the main control MPU performs the setting change processing), the main control MPU always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, probability variation (probability variation)). state, etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information described above before the start of the next business. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the operation unit. Also, when deciding to change the setting value, if the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value obtained before the setting change process is performed) It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as game information etc. from the main control built-in RAM.As described above, the setting key can change the set value as well as the current setting Since it is an important key that can be used to check the setting values, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, are allowed to possess it, and the number is limited to 2 to 3 people. is not determined to be changed, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, a staff member such as a game hall clerk can delete (clear) the game backup information from the RAM By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the clear switch, the game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 after the wait time standby process in step S22, and the subsequent processing proceeds. I will explain the problems in

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, is charged with the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off. +5V is applied for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V, and the island facility of the game hall The main control-side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply is cut off from the main control side. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power cut-off processing.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 when the power is restored, the waiting time (boot timer) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). 2.5 seconds is set.), and just before reaching the standby time, if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, a hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. is applied as +5V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main-control-side power-off processing in the main-control-side power-on processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started again when the power is restored without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch is operated by a game hall clerk or other attendant, and even if the game hall clerk or other attendant does not express his/her intention to clear the RAM, the memory is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM. There is a problem that the game backup information described above is deleted (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the game cannot be progressed. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize number information output determination counter) can be prevented from being updated, so that the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64 can be determined to match. Therefore, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1, the supply of power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, supplies game information and other information (e.g., the number of main prize balls) according to the progress of the game. Information indicating the value of the information output determination counter), which is a backup process for storing various information including the process of steps S58 to S68 and the process when the main control side power is turned off, which is composed of an infinite loop, is performed by the main control board. Since the main control MPU of 1310 can be completed, the main control MPU of the main control MPU, when it restarts, receives the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT causes the main control MPU to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power restoration, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the step immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22 In S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is continued. By repeating this, the game cannot be progressed.

By preventing the progress of the game by such software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is enabled in step S52). By blocking the progress to the control flow of setting and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later), the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output determination A mechanism was adopted in which updating of various information (including information indicating the value of the counter for use) can be avoided. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output judgment (Information indicating the value of the counter for use, etc.)) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and Other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls) and other information are not changed at all. , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls)) are reliably prevented from being changed. can be done.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, it is determined that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). In order to communicate, create a power-on state command that is classified as power-on, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and incorporate the main control as transmission information. Stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starting solenoid 2415 and information instructing the driving state of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. . Here, first, the main control return destination command at power-on includes information instructing the driving state of the starter solenoid 2415 and information instructing the driving state of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. Problems in the case where the main control return destination command at power-on is not set to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 will be described.

For example, the main control board 1310 drives the first attacker solenoid 2418 while the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen of the jackpot game state (for example, the screen of the jackpot game effect) in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Then, when the first big prize winning port 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member, or when the second attacker solenoid 2612 is driven and the second big prize winning port 2006 is opened by the opening and closing member, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the main control board 1310 detects the momentary power failure or power failure based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. is restored to the game state immediately before the occurrence of , the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to be driven, and the first big winning port 2005 is closed by the opening and closing member, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 is driven. The state in which the second big winning port 2006 is closed by the opening/closing member is shifted to the state in which it is open.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and returned, the jackpot game state It is not possible to indicate at all which round of That is, for example, when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402, the number of the game balls entering the first big winning hole 2005 is counted as one big winning hole. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits the display command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the display command, the peripheral control board 1510 enters the first big winning hole 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number of played game balls can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the first big winning port 2005 opens and closes as an opening/closing member Mainly a large winning prize opening 1 closed display command instructing a transition from an open state to a closed state by (that is, start closing the first large winning prize port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 between rounds). Transmission from the control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to open the first big winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the opening/closing member (that is, the opening of the fifth round of the first big prize hole 2005 is started). It is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 . As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen according to the probability and time-saving state described above to display the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

In addition, for example, a screen that informs the player that the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, a screen that tells the player that the movable piece is open) When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the start opening solenoid 2415 to open the movable piece and open the second start opening 2004 is in the open state, and when the power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 resets the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored, so that the starting port solenoid 2415 is started to drive and the movable piece is closed. A transition is made to a state in which the second start port 2004 is closed.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 as the game state, and the game state is generated in an advantageous game state for the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it is possible to display and return to the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is in a game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004, and it is in a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the transmitted screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised at the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2004 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is possible to forget that the game state is enabled, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 as the game state at the time of power restoration. Nevertheless, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. There is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 powers on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the command at power-on A counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the first big prize winning port 2005 is closed by the opening and closing member. Since it is possible to tell the peripheral control board 1510 that the transition to the open state is possible, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen specifying that it is 4 rounds of the jackpot game state (that is, how many rounds ) can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but in the jackpot game state, the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started and the first big winning port 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member. A screen that tells the player that the screen) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player seated in front of the pachinko machine can be instructed to enter a game ball into the first big winning hole 2005 after power is restored. Also, for example, in the above-described example, in a state in which a game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and a game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then When power is restored to , a screen ( For example, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the message "The movable piece is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second start opening." It is possible to instruct a player seated in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after power is restored by displaying it in the display area.

As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has not executed the control-side power-off processing even once, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison judgment, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the state command at power-on classified as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on By creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and the main prize ball when power is turned on. Only three commands, namely, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, these commands first transmit a power-on state command, then transmit a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then transmit the number of main prize balls when power is turned on. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is used when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure) when the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM is cleared. When the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the above-mentioned low Information indicating which state (probability and time-saving state) to return from among probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state, low probability non-time-saving state, and high probability non-time-saving state, and the model code of the pachinko machine Consists of information and Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times ), it is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) in which probability fluctuations occur in the state of being played.

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption and misunderstanding that it flows to the production line.

For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big win game state occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. The main control board 1310 is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (including when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, in addition to when the power is turned on), the model code of the pachinko machine In step S50, in order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating to the peripheral control board 1510, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on A counter notification command for main prize number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited; Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if the probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next big win game state occurs) It is also possible to discriminate whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications by looking at the inspection monitor, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[13-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 228 and 229 .

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU switches register banks as shown in FIG. 230 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second switch the register bank to the other register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the processing of saving each register to the stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 light up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmitted Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input or not. . Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU detects, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3051, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052, and the detection from the second starting opening sensor 2401. signal, the detection signal from the first major winning slot sensor 2402, the detection signal from the second major winning slot sensor 2601, the detection signal from the out slot sensor 3053, the first sub-out slot sensor 2403, and the second sub-out slot sensor 3054, Detection signals from the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, operation signals from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signals from the door frame open switch, detection signals from the body frame open switch 4b, setting key switch 1311a. A signal from, a signal from the setting switching button, and a payout control board 633 telling that the payout control board 633 normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. , is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052 and the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401 are read, respectively, the corresponding starting opening winning command classified into others is stored in the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start sensor 3052, a start win prize command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second start sensor 2401 When there is a detection signal of , the starting opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In the present embodiment, the state in which all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing) is changed when this switch input processing is started. , are read first, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball or as if the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the states in which all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing) are checked for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general prize winning opening sensor 3051, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first A detection signal from the big winning hole sensor 2402, a detection signal from the second big winning hole sensor 2601, a detection signal from the out hole sensor 3053, the first sub-out hole sensor 2403, and the second sub-out hole sensor 3054, the magnetic sensor 1111, detection signals from 2404, 2602, 3055, operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame open switch, detection signal from body frame open switch 4b, signal from setting key switch 1311a, The reliability of the signal from the setting switching button and the payout control board 633 that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later can be improved in reliability. .

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal defect monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have undergone empty terminal processing is checked based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as an idle terminal processing, so the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information obtained in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether or not the logic state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of the various input ports. based on When the main control MPU judges that the logic state of the input terminal subjected to empty terminal processing is not LOW, the main control MPU is divided into a notification display to inform that a malfunction has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. The defective command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs win-loss random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol is also updated. These big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers and small winning symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to win/lose determination (win/lose determination), each counter counts up only each time this win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win/lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this win/lose random number update process. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the non The win/lose random number update process and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-win-lose random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the small-hit symbol initial value determination random number may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs ball number counting processing (step S107). In this ball counting process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the outlet sensor 3053 is input, and the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 is entered. When the out-port sensor 3053 detects game balls collected by the provided out-port 2010, the value of the collected ball counter for counting the number of game balls collected by the out-port 2010 is incremented by 1. (Increment) operation is performed, and the detection signal from the first sub-out port sensor 2403 is input, and the game balls collected by the first sub-out port 2011 provided in the game area 5a sectioned and formed on the game board 5 are displayed in the first position. When the sub-out port sensor 2403 detects, the value of the collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the first sub-out port 2011 is added (incremented) by 1, and When the detection signal from the second sub-out port sensor 3054 is input and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 detects the game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012 provided in the game area 5a sectioned and formed on the game board 5 adds (increments) the value of a recovered ball counter that counts the number of game balls recovered through the second sub-out port 2012 by 1 (increments). That is, in the ball counting process, the out-port sensor 3053 detects game balls collected by the out-port 2010, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 detects game balls collected by the first sub-out port 2011, and the second When the second sub-out port sensor 3054 detects a game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012, a calculation is performed to add 3 to the value of the collected ball counter. The main control MPU uses the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the game balls recovered by the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012. This is stored in an out-ball counting exclusive area in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the special monitor is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. In addition, the main control MPU determines that when the value of the collected ball counter is divisible by 10, that is, the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012 reaches 10. Each time, a ball recovery command is created to notify that effect, and is stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. It should be noted that the main control MPU, when the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value is 65535) and further adds (increments) the value of the recovered ball counter by 1 to the value of the recovered ball counter, The value of the counter overflows and becomes a value of 0, and an operation to add from this value of 0 is performed.

Following step S107, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the first big prize hole 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is 10. , the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or this Self-check for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 when the payout control board 633 does not input the payer ACK signal to inform that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command within a predetermined time. A command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633 .

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area and based on this input information. , a main award number information output command classified as other is created to convey that effect, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read out from the above-described input information storage area. Various winning openings such as one starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, and first big winning opening 2005 (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided on game board 5") Based on the game ball entered The number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is counted, and in the prize ball control process of step S108, the memory is updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. there is In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. is read from the input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of 10. (that is, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize number information output command is created to notify that effect, and as transmission information In addition to storing in the output information storage area, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize number information output judgment counter value. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) divided into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU formats the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding prize balls is checked. When it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation") is being performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation counter is incremented by one. The value of this radio wave counter is incremented each time radio wave irradiation is determined in the fraudulent act detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraud detection processing. ), a radio wave irradiation notification command classified into a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Further, in the fraud detection process in step S112, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when detection signals from the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, and 3055 are input, fraud using a magnet ( hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is being performed, and the value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by one. The value of this magnet counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. A value of 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnetic goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraudulent activity detection processing. ), a magnet informing command classified into informing display indicating that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnetic goto with such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the fact that the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall can discover the magnetic goto at an early stage. It's becoming

In addition, in the fraudulent act detection process of step S112, for example, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the detection from the first big winning hole sensor 2402 or the second big winning hole sensor 2601 is performed when the game is not in the jackpot game state. When a signal is input (when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006), etc., when an abnormal winning occurs in the big winning hole, it is classified as an abnormal state into a notification display. A winning abnormality display command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraud detection process in step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goto and/or the magnet goto are detected, the value 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud, while the radio wave emission goto and the magnet When no fraud is detected, the value 0 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as no fraud is detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and is set to 0 (zero) as an initial value when the RAM is cleared. Further, when detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning of a large winning opening, the value 1 may be set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs a firing enable signal setting process (step S113). In this shooting permission signal setting process, the logic of the shooting permission signal that tells the shooting control section 633b of the payout control board 633 that the shooting of the game ball B is allowed is set. Specifically, when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is 0 based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, the main control MPU determines that fraud has not been detected. Sometimes, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing permission logic and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. is detected, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU reads the input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, receives a detection signal from the door frame opening switch to open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4. When the door frame open switch detects that the door frame open switch 4b detects that the body frame open switch 4b is open with respect to the outer frame 2, a detection signal is input from the body frame open switch 4b. is set to a firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. As an initial value (default), the logic of the firing permission signal is set after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored). It is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the firing permission logic is set until the start of the firing.

Following step S113, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is Obtained from a hard random number latch register built into the control MPU, and set this obtained random number as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU) matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (jackpot It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter for updating the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and the small hit type. It is determined (determines the hit type) whether it matches with any of the hit type determination values.

When these determination results (lottery results) are due to the first start opening sensor 3052, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, the determination results (lottery results) are the second start opening sensor 2401 If it is due to, various commands related to special figure 2 tuning effect are created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-described random number for the variable display pattern. Then, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 to light up the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern The output of the lighting signal to the display is set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands classified as related to big wins (big win opening command, big winning mouth 1 open Nth time display command, big winning mouth 1 closing display command, big win game state, etc.) Winning mouth 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or, for example, the first attacker solenoid 2418 is driven to open and close the opening and closing member. The output of the signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, and when the number of times (round) that the first big prize winning port 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is two times, the round of the function display unit 1400 The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round display lamp of the display is set so as to light the 2nd round display lamp of the display, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area. Set the output of the lighting signal to the 15 round display lamp to light the 15 round display lamp of the round indicator, store it in the output information storage area as output information, or light the presence or absence of time saving in a predetermined color The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set and stored as the output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol per judgment random number is extracted and incorporated into the main control as normal winning opening winning prize information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

0th section to 3rd section (four sections) are provided in this normal winning opening winning information storage area, and the normal winning opening is provided in order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, if the normal winning opening prize information is stored in the 0th to 2nd divisions of the normal winning opening winning information memory, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening Winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When the normal winning opening winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage and the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning entry winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage, and the normal winning entry winning information of the third section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning entry winning information storage. After shifting, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the normal winning entry winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal winning entry winning information storage, the normal winning entry winning information in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is the normal winning. The normal winning prize winning information in the second region of the normal winning prize information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the normal winning prize information storage, and the normal winning prize winning prize information in the second section of the normal winning prize winning prize information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal winning prize winning prize information storage. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening prize information storage become empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is regarded as a reserved ball, and the normal winning opening of the function display unit 1400 In order to light up the suspension indicator, the output of the lighting signal for the normal suspension indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-described normal winning opening winning information, and is stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol per determination is taken out from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not the value coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 by opening the movable piece, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-described random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified into the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the above-described transmission information storage is performed as transmission information. In addition to storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for judging normal symbol hit matches the normal hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to normal electric role performance are created and transmitted. Information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting solenoid 2415 is set to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. When the value of the random number for symbol hit determination does not match the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern. , create various commands classified into normal pattern synchronization production related, store as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and light the normal design indicator of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal design fluctuation display pattern The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to cause it to be set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In this example, the winning probability of the normal lottery (probability of winning a normal prize) is 1/2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the above-described output information storage area from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control MPU, for example, from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 633 has been normally received, the main payout control board 633 Or output a drive signal to the first attacker solenoid 2418 that performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member of the first big winning opening 2005 when it is in the jackpot game state, or a movable piece for opening and closing the second start opening 2004 In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2415 that performs the opening and closing operation, 15 rounds big hit information output signal, 2 rounds big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as information output signal, time saving information output signal, starting entrance winning information output signal etc. are output to the payout control board 633, firing permission logic or firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633, and displays the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012. A display signal is output to a special monitor, and a lighting signal is output for displaying the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands that are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands that are classified into special figure 2 tuning effect related, and are classified into jackpot related Various commands (for example, when detecting a game ball entering the first big winning hole 2005, based on the detection signal from the first big winning hole sensor 2402, the big winning hole 1 corresponding to the big winning hole count command count display command), various commands categorized as power-on, various commands categorized as related to general-purpose diagram synchronization effects, various commands categorized as normal electric role-related effects, various commands as categorized as notification displays, and status display commands. Various commands classified, various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into others (for example, the main control board 1310 can control prize balls based on game balls entered into various winning holes provided on the game board 5). Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be put out reaches 10, a main prize number information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 558 as main prize number information. main prize number information output command, etc.), and various commands classified by specific history (for example, the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 is 10) A ball recovery command that tells that every time it reaches, a setting change command that tells that the setting value has been changed, and the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable) ), and a setting key ON operation command for confirming the set values stored in the set value dedicated area described later in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating variations of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, is applied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 as +5V when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The main-circumference serial transmission port incorporated in the control MPU is capable of transferring at least the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and completing the transmission from the transmission shift register as main-circulation serial data. It is possible. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, the In order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation settings of the command to be performed, the power-on state command, which is classified as power-on, the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and the main prize number information output judgment counter when power is turned on Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the order of the status, mode, and sum value that constitutes the power-on state command as the main peripheral serial data Transmit to the peripheral control board 1510, then transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value constituting the output determination counter notification command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

In addition, every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012 reaches 10, if a ball recovery command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the control board 1510 counts the number of game balls recovered from the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 for each received ball recovery command, not shown. Updated with the ball recovery information stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (the counted value (that is, the total number of game balls recovered at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012)). date and time) is updated. It should be noted that if the ball recovery command cannot be received and the pachinko machine 1 is powered off after the business hours of the game hall have ended, the last counted value (that is, the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011 and the total number of game balls collected at the second sub-out port 2012) is stored in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) in association with the updated date and time. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall starts operating, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 stores and retains the ball collection information stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball recovery information is created again from the start date, and the ball recovery information is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as ball recovery history information. It should be noted that the counted value to be stored as ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be a value counted from 0 (zero) on that day, or a value counted from 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU. As a result, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU can be prevented from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup processing was executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. When power is turned on, a main control return destination command at power-on instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418, which are the electrical drive sources by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine, is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. It can be output. In other words, the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at step S50 in the power-on process on the main control side shown in FIG. In order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of , a power-on state command classified as power-on, When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command and when the power is turned on, the main prize number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in step S120 of this routine. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing, as main peripheral serial data, the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on state command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the main control return destination at power-on. The status, mode, and sum value constituting the command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, followed by the status, mode, and sum value constituting the counter notification command for determining the output of the main winning ball number information at power-on. are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the display area of the effect display device 1600. can be displayed in As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, since the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and notified, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the machine is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Also, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, FIG. At step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing shown in FIG. , main control return destination command when power is turned on, and main prize number information output determination counter notification command when power is turned on and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM: the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when the power is turned on. Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the state command at the time of power-on, are sent as the main peripheral serial data to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. Then, transmit to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then output main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of times of special symbol fluctuation is limited (ST machine), etc.), and detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[13-5. Setting change process]
Next, setting change processing will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current setting values as shown in FIG. 231 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU obtains the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read out or taken out. When the setting value is taken out, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total. This is the same processing as the calculation of .

Subsequent to step S202, the main control MPU stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power-off processing (when the power is turned off) in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches (step S204). When the main control MPU determines in step S204 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S206). The determination of step S204 and the determination of step S206 are the same determination as the determination of step S30 and the determination of step S32 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228, respectively. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power failure processing described later. A flag that indicates whether or not data is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power failure processing has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally. be done.

When the main control MPU determines in step S204 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off processing has not ended normally, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the "normal range" is a value that can be set and changed. It is preset to values up to a value of 6. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM by proceeding to the determination of step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally at the time of power-off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU determines that the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 are set values 1 to 6, which are within the normal range. It is determined whether or not it is in any of the values, and when it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines that it is out of the normal range in the determination of step S208, it sets the set value 1, which is the initial value, to the set value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination of step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM obtained in step S200 is within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6. However, the main control MPU determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match in the determination of step S204 without performing the determination of step S208. or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally. In some cases, the process of step S210 may proceed to set the setting value 1, which is the initial value, to the setting value obtained in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when the main control side power failure processing has been normally completed, or in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU When the MPU determines that it is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to light the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether or not the setting switching button has been operated (step S216). This determination reads the detection signal from the setting switching button, and determines whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button is input. The main control MPU determines that the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is input, and determines that the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is not input. determine that it is not.

When the main control MPU determines in step S216 that the setting switching button has been operated, it updates the setting value by adding (incrementing) the value by 1 (step S218). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in .

Following step S218, the main control MPU outputs to the setting indicator 1310g a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting indicator 1310g, and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting indicator 1310g. is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the judgment of step S216, when the main control MPU judges that the setting switching button has not been operated, the main control MPU judges whether or not the decision key has been operated (step S222). ). In this judgment, the main control MPU sets the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. When the key cylinder is rotated by 120 degrees (that is, the setting key cylinder is rotated from the rotational position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Rotation position) is turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and it is further turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it back to the second turning on position. 1311a determines that the decision key has been operated based on the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and determines that the decision key has been operated when the decision key ON signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a; When the determination key ON signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the determination key has not been operated.

When the main control MPU determines in step S222 that the decision key has not been operated, it returns to the determination in step S216 to determine whether or not the setting switching button has been operated. When the main control MPU determines in step S216 that the setting switching button has been operated, the main control MPU performs steps S218 and S220 again, determines step S222, and determines that the enter key has not been operated. When the determination is made, the process returns to the determination of step S216, and each time the setting switching button is operated, the setting value is updated by adding 1 to the setting display 1310g until the enter key is operated. , and if the setting switching button is not operated, the setting value updated by operating the setting switching button immediately before is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored before it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is used by the main controller. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when the determination in step S222 determines that the decision key has been operated, the main control MPU stores the updated set values in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area , the updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. After completion of the process of step S224, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the updated set values when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occur are stored in the main control built-in RAM. is stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of

Following step S224, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this judgment, the main control MPU moves the setting key cylinder from the initial position (that is, setting key 1311a) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the turning position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the switch 1311a. When the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. Sometimes it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

When the main control MPU determines in step S226 that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the main control MPU returns to the determination in step S226 and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, when determining in step S226 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main control MPU stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting values are hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

After step S230, the main control MPU sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to 0 (step S232). This setting change permission flag CS-FLG is, as described above, the current set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the first ON state). A flag indicating whether or not to permit setting change of setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time of operation), and when permitting setting change of setting value It is set to a value of 1, and to a value of 0 when it is not permitted to change the setting of the set value. In the processing of step S232, the value 0 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, thereby disallowing the setting change of the setting values thereafter.

After step S232, the main control MPU determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). "Normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208. It is preset to values up to a value of 6. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU determines whether the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value. A determination is made as to whether or not the value is within the range of set values 1 to 6, and if it is determined to be within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

In the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that it is within the normal range, it performs serial communication initialization (step S234), then creates a setting change command to set transmission information (step S236), Subsequently, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting of step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is mainly transmitted in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S238 prior to the serial communication initial setting of step S44. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, but this is prioritized before the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the processing at power-on on the main control side shown in FIG. This is to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). do.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S233 that it is not in the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described later in detail, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

[13-6. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, setting value confirmation display processing will be described. This setting value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

When the setting value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 (step S350), as shown in FIG. This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Each is set to the value 0 when the value is not being acknowledged.

In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0, that is, when the setting value is not displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU determines whether the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON. (step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. A setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being rotated by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed. is open, and it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the setting key ON signal, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established. On the other hand, it is determined that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. It is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not established by determining that there is no display.

When the main control MPU determines in step S352 that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU ends this routine as it is, while the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 1 (step S354), and then the current setting value is acquired (step S356). Here, the main control MPU obtains the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

After step S356, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. A value of 3, a set value of 4, a set value of 5, and a set value of 6 are set in advance. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU uses the set value acquired in step S356 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM) to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value. set value stored in ) is within the normal range of set values 1 to 6, and if it is determined to be within the normal range, use the set value as it is. do.

In the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU determines that the set value obtained in step S356 is within the normal range, it outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU creates a setting key ON operation command, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360 ) to end the routine. This setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The ON operation command of the setting key indicates that the set value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has started (that is, confirms the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). This is the command to send.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the setting key ON operation history information (set value confirmed) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is stored. (Information that associates the message with the date and time) is updated.

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the above-described ball collection history information, set value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information are generated. A predetermined specific history information display permitting condition is satisfied that the display of the specific history information can be permitted. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 is controlled by a person who confirms the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied. , the image that has been displayed so far is switched to a specific history information display image that selectively displays specific history information, and is controlled to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

On the other hand, in the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is pressed. The setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning off the setting key switch 1311a. When the setting key switch 1311a receives an off signal from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned off. On the other hand, when the OFF signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

When the main control MPU determines in step S362 that the setting key has not been turned off, it terminates this routine as it is. The confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 0 (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. Then, the acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then a setting key OFF operation command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , the OFF operation command of the setting key is set (step S368), and this routine is terminated. This setting key OFF operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The OFF operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display processing of this routine has ended (that is, the confirmation of the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been completed). is a command that tells

Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-described predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 has performed control to display the above-described specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and return to the original image.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S357, when the main control MPU judges that it is not within the normal range, it sets interrupt non-permission (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 230, which has been repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU performs error display processing (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which the main control built-in WDT continues to be cleared (step S374). Due to this infinite loop, the main control built-in WDT continues to be cleared. By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the control MPU, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and by restarting the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, the main control by the main control built-in WDT is started. The MPU does not have to be reset forcibly. In addition, the infinite loop keeps the state in which the error display processing is finished, so that the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described later in detail, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

[13-7. Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be described. This error display process is the process performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 228, and the process performed in step S37 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 232), and is the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 233 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted. On the other hand, if the logic is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to tell that the launch is to be stopped (non-permission). .

The error display process of this routine is one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 231), the main control MPU interrupts step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 230 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting processing of step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed. Since the firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with the reset function, at the time of power recovery, The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the fire enable logic.

Therefore, the error display processing of this routine is the processing performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 228 or the processing performed in step S37 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 231), the main control MPU restores the power in step S400 and then displays an error display in this routine. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being shot even after the process has started, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic), and its predetermined output port is set. output terminal to the discharge control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 through the main control output circuit with a reset function.

When the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In the determination, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 229, the error display process shown in FIG. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is performed in step S370 in the setting value confirmation display processing, when the error display processing of this routine ends, an infinite loop is entered as described above. Timer interrupt processing cannot be performed, and firing enable signal setting processing in step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display processing of this routine is started as the processing performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. Output to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400. FIG.

Following step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. A peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S410), and this routine ends.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 231 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 231 and the main control side timer interrupt process in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display processing, which is this routine, is the processing performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 232) and step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is used as main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S410. Sending to 1510.

The error display command is a command to notify that there is an abnormality (or that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stores and holds error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the received date and time) in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ).

In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays a blue background image saying "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant." Control is performed to display a message image of white characters, and an announcement of "A RAM error has occurred. Please call a member of staff." Control is performed so that the sound is forcibly set to the maximum volume without being dependent on the sound volume, and is played from various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, body frame speaker 622, etc.). The processing for notifying the RAM error by the error display command is the processing with the highest priority. Prioritize error reporting.

[14. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 237. FIG. FIG. 234 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 235 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. 234, and FIG. FIG. 237 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 237 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output setting (input/output setting of I/O) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs (phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 . Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized. ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is made based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. FIG.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, it is determined that the RAM clear is not instructed. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed, and the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the switch is operated.

When the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU makes it possible to perform RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) over a predetermined period of time from the power-on.

On the other hand, when the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The logic state of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc., and the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase the payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.). Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting enables access to the payout control built-in RAM, and enables writing (storage) or reading of payout information, for example.

After step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a temporary return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

After step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines not to erase the payout information (step S524). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in payout control unit power-off processing (at power-off) described later. (step S526). When the payout control MPU determines that they match in step S526, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in payout control unit power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the control unit power failure processing is normally completed, and to a value of 0 when the payout control unit power failure processing is not completed normally.

In the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the process at the time of power failure of the payout control unit is normally completed, payout control built-in RAM is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). Information is set in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage area (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area) Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area, in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of mismatch counter reset determination time, etc., stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "recovery of power" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, but also the state in which the power has been restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it determines to erase the payout information, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in the determination of step S528, that is, When it is determined that the processing at the time of power failure of the payout control unit has not ended normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). Due to this setting, the interrupt period set in step S536, that is, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 2 ms.

After step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in this order.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

In the judgment of step S540, when the payout control MPU judges that there is no power failure warning signal input, it judges whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU receives the power failure warning signal. Determine whether or not

On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544 ).

After step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various kinds of information are read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information that informs that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command) have been received normally, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display are stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 and the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Alternatively, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal plate 558 as a winning ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls). A prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 each time the ball is played.

Specifically, a winning ball number information output determination counter is provided for determining whether or not to output the winning ball number information. The number of game balls put out is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown for monitoring.

In the process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, the number of prize balls information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM The number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 to be described later, and the memory is updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize number information output determination counter value is read from the prize ball information storage area. In other words, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, a prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the counter for determining the number of prize balls information output), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, The BRDY signal, CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that tells that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, etc. are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, when determining whether or not the ball is stuck due to the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the ball stickiness determination time set as the determination condition; Skip determination time that is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full with the game balls stored During the full tank determination time, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is a predetermined number or more. In addition to performing time management such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 When determining whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not inconsistent game ball payouts due to inconsistency between the number of balls detected in step 1 and the number of balls detected in step 1 are repeated Time management is performed for the mismatch counter reset determination time that is set as the condition. For example, when the ball jam determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms. By setting it to 0, it accurately measures the time it takes to determine if the ball is stuck. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) are input from the CR unit. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout such as PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the signal is set.

By this process, for example, even if there is an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. just before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation of the game balls is executed by the payout device 580 and cannot be continued due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 just enough. In other words, the payout control MPU, while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process, when the game balls are being put out to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, the momentary power failure or power failure causes the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and the game ball payout cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration By restoring the value stored as payout backup information to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, the instantaneous The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power restoration, and the payout of game balls can be continued. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stoppage when the power is restored even if the momentary power failure or stoppage occurs. This prevents the various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit from changing due to the effects of an instantaneous power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to, for example, the logic state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is put out control. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. Then, in, for example, a retry operation monitoring process that is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information to determine whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball stick operation determination setting processing, As an error state output setting to the CR unit, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that informs that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible when the CR unit is not in communication is output as the PRDY signal. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read out from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after the power is restored, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. to the CR unit. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, the state is restored when the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental balls is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU to the CR unit. It is possible to inform that the game ball payout operation is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to notify that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible. While outputting the logic state of the signal as HI to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logical state of the PRDY signal to LOW in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible. is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. In addition, the logic state of the EXS signal that informs the start or end of one payout operation is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 633 and A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In this full-tank and ball-out check process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a game ball stored in the lower tray 202 is detected by a detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154. , and the number of game balls introduced into the guide passage 570a of the above-described ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 exceeds a predetermined number. and determine whether or not For example, the determination of whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full of stored game balls is made by using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms, and the full tank detection sensor 154 is detected in the current full tank and out of ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, timing of the full-tank determination time described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the full-tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full-tank determination time is reached, the full-tank and out-of-ball check process checks whether the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON. determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON, full-tank information indicating that the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls is stored in the above-described state information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full with the stored game balls, and full tank information is stored in the state information storage area.

Judgment whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also performed using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms in the current full tank and ball exhaustion check process. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is ON, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch is OFF in the previous (2ms ago) full tank and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is When it transitions from OFF to ON, it starts counting the above-mentioned dead ball determination time in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the dead ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the dead ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the dead ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and dead ball check process determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is ON, the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the ball run-out is conveyed. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Bulb-out information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command) are received. When these various commands are normally received, payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (abnormality occurs in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main action setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, rental balls, ball removal, and ball picking are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of prize balls in stock) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the above-described output information storage area. do. For example, the above-mentioned out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a corresponding action is taken. Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various kinds of information are read out from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands classified into state displays (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) are generated based on the various information. and transmit it to the main control board 1310 . For example, when out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls introduced into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is less than a predetermined number based on this out-of-ball information, frame state 1 is entered. It creates commands and transmits them to the main control board 1310 .

After step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, returning to step S539, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. At step S546, the value 0 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL at step S546, port output processing is performed at step S548, port input processing is performed at step S550, and step S552. performs timer update processing, performs CR communication processing in step S554, performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is called "payout control section main processing".

Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU will vary. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. there is Thereby, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so as to sufficiently perform other processing that fluctuates.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the payout control MPU sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). Due to this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM and protecting the rewriting of the payout information described above.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of game balls is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

After step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU performs prohibition setting of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not set to the values A, B and C in that order. For this reason, the payout control MPU is reset, and thereafter the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. It should be noted that the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and the payout control unit power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, it is checked whether or not the payout control unit power failure processing has been completed normally. are inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information has been stored by fraud.

[14-2. Dispensing Control Unit Timer Interrupt Processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on processing shown in FIGS. 234 to 236.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU, as shown in FIG. 237, disables the timer interrupt and switches (saves) the register (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of general-purpose registers used in the payout control unit main processing.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed, and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. set respectively.

After step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[15. Various control processing of the peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 238 to 242. FIG. FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 241 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt processing. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, as the priority of interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[15-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after resetting, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control IC itself. can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the command related to the control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310 and various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after executing the current time information acquisition processing so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG receives a V-blank signal from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, which indicates that the screen data (information specifying the configuration of the screen) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), it returns to step S1006 to check whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. Repeatedly determine whether or not By repeating such determinations, a standby state is established until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

In the determination in step S1006, when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when determining to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. A value of 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs 1ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by the 1 ms interrupt timer being started is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the press detection provided in the production operation unit 300 Rotation (rotation direction) and rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382 (hereinafter referred to as “various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300”). Various types of information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotating direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation Operation history information of the unit 303, etc.) is set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. It is appropriately determined whether or not to reflect the operation state of the operation unit 303 in the game presentation. Specifically, if the sound volume has been adjusted in the presentation operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness has been adjusted, the lighting mode is changed according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the schedule data for generation. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and brightness is reflected in real time, and the performance proceeds with the adjusted volume and brightness.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of LEDs used as direct light, the luminance of LEDs used as indirect light, and respectively. During the progress of the production, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, the player (or the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303), and the first When one specified brightness value ranging from the specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-described scale set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is set so as to achieve the specified specified brightness value. Tone information can be updated.

Here, the brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness specification value, one brightness specification value can be set in a range of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (lights off) to the 31st brightness specification value that is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, respectively. A player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall) operates an operable effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain a 31st luminance that is the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value. A specified brightness value can be set up to a specified value.

For example, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall) designates the 0th (zero) brightness assuming that the current brightness is the minimum brightness (turns off) when rotating the rotary operation unit 302 clockwise. When the value is set to the first specified brightness value, which is the next highest level of brightness, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be higher along the tone curve or spline tone curve), while the rotary operation unit 302 is reversed. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of the clockwise rotation operation, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear or spline tone curve), the luminance of the LED used as indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as direct light are changed to be lower. When the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the push operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is confirmed. In this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance where the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) can set the brightness while the effect is in progress. , etc.) can set a desired brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 . In addition, when the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the rotary operation unit 302, the predetermined luminance value to the 31st luminance are displayed at predetermined positions in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the effect. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator that indicates the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate in the form of an image how much brightness the player (or staff such as a game hall clerk) desires. It is possible. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance specified value is set as an initial value (default).

Normally, the pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are directly irradiated as light. be. For the normal palette value, one level is selected from among 17 levels in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value. A formula (for example, a linear tone curve , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one luminance designation in the 32-step range from the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the luminance designation value described above. (100%) is a value of 20%, and similarly for the other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the above-described brightness specified values, 0 (zero) brightness specified value ~ It is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 levels up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are directly irradiated as light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the side of the game board that are set as the gradation information described above and that are directly illuminated as light, the pallet A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special palette value is set as the gradation information described above for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and is one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0 (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are the brightness specified values described above. Palette values corresponding to luminance designations are set as the gradation information described above along predetermined mathematical expressions (for example, linear tone curves or spline curve-like tone curves).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light at the first luminance designated value, which is the next highest luminance step after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value, which is the minimum luminance (lights off). As the lowest possible brightness, it is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value Among them, one luminance designation value and the corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

Thus, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED When setting the brightness and the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) operates the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Brightness by operating While set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 and presses the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the luminance designation value by the operation of 303 . As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and sets the brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, The brightness of the LED used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights off)), and in conjunction with this Then, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (lights off)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness is set so that the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light by indirect light.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side for the LEDs used as direct light. Even without setting, the light emission mode accompanying the flow of performance is set, and the flow of performance by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side. , set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too bright (or a slightly darker luminance can produce a more dramatic effect), and other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the operable effect operation section 301 (rotation operation section 302, pressing operation section 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness. Even if one specified brightness value is set up to the specified brightness value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one specified brightness value is set for a particular decorative board. , one brightness designation value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for the other decoration boards, respectively, so that the relationship between the mutually set light emission modes (bright or dark The brightness can be adjusted very easily without destroying the relationship of

Furthermore, indirect light from the light guide plate is more difficult to adjust the brightness than direct light, but for LEDs used as indirect light, a special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent from the normal palette value) The brightness can be set by . As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is managed by the normal palette value. and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC in the display data creation process to be described later. One minute (one frame) of drawing data is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600 . In the display data output process, when drawing is performed in excess of the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time. It is a mechanism that can give priority to performances by sound effects such as music and sound effects that match various performances from various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers").

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channel. . As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, to instruct which screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. , update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate the number of light emission data to be output from the top light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for light emission mode generation. Update.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the production sounds such as music and sound effects arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, and the sound command data instructing the sound data of the notification sounds and notification sounds, The pointer is updated to indicate what number of sound command data from the first sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the drive data of which order from the head drive data is to be output. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the drive data that is originally supposed to be instructed.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, which will be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various settings of effects. Update the random number (for example, the random number used for pending lookahead-related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes various commands received. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. (extracted) and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and , respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) the schedule data for generating the lighting mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and executes the lamp palette setting process. Executed, the player (or staff such as a game hall clerk) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to become the maximum brightness from the first specified brightness value. When one luminance designated value is set up to the 31st luminance designated value, the grayscale information described above can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to achieve the set luminance designated value. It is possible.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a starting entrance winning command for instructing the start of a starting entrance winning effect, a normal symbol Ordinary design storage command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), variation pattern for instructing the start of variable performance such as variable display of decorative designs in the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special designs Analyzing whether or not the command is a pattern storage command output when the number of start pending changes, and a large winning opening 1 count display command output each time a game ball is accepted in the first large winning opening 2005, Recognize which game state it is.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power on, normal Various commands classified as related to figure synchronization effects, various commands classified as normal electric role effects related, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, and In addition, there are various commands classified. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes lottery processing related to advance notice and the like based on the received command, and based on the result of the lottery, schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical Drive source schedule data and the like are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

The peripheral control ROM stores in advance the peripheral control unit 1511, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511 and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sound for generating sound effects such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data and electric drive source schedule data for generating the driving mode of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The schedule data for generating the lighting mode is configured by arranging the lighting mode data defining the lighting modes of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which of the plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC is to be used, and a number of tracks of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , and a track number for indicating in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification displays, an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, and the like are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, are updated, and based on this updated time information, the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation is stored in the peripheral control ROM. is read out (extracted) and output to VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads out image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and renders (displays) one screen on the effect display device 1600. 10 minutes (one frame) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady-state process is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is changed based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. are identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the sound volume corresponding to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is obtained, and in the sound data output processing of step S1018, the output set in the sound data generation processing is performed. Sound data is output from each channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Specifically, by rotating the volume control switch, the resistance value is changed, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into values in 1024 steps up to a value of 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4 Music and sound effects are played from In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the volume control switch. It's like

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. subvolume values to be included.

Specifically, for the production sound, the board volume adjusted by turning the volume control switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the board volume is set as the sub-volume value. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is set for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit 0.5 seconds after receiving the variable pattern command and starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. ) can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 .

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) (in this example, peripheral Until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern after receiving the variation pattern command in the control unit, or 0.5 seconds after the peripheral control unit has received the stop display command and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. seconds), the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume control switch in the sound data creation process is applied to the substrate by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. The voltage is converted into seven levels of volume 0 to 6, and further divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume control switch. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume to set the substrate volume.

The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, the volume of the sound flowing from the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound on the main body frame 4 is amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified production sound is serialized. output as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume is amplified to the master volume value, so that the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3 , the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 are set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effects, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, the sound data of the sound effects incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the sound effects incorporated in the track to be used and the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the synthesized effect sound, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually adjusted to the center of the top on the side of the door frame 3. The speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low bass of the main body frame 4 are amplified to a master volume value, which is the sound volume, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data, and is used as a notification sound. On the other hand, the sound data of the informational sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the informational sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume of this synthesized notification sound is actually set to the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the main body for bass of the main body frame 4 It amplifies up to the master volume value which becomes the sound volume flowing from the frame speaker 622, serializes this amplified notification sound, and outputs it as audio data.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko machine To briefly explain the control of playing a notification sound to notify the staff of the hall of the fraudulent act against 1, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this sound effect is suppressed. Synthesize the sound data of the embedded track, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the informational sound is embedded, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the informational sound is set to the maximum volume. , the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are compared with the volume actually flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. is amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, the sounds that are actually emitted from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound on the main body frame 4 are only the notification sounds with the maximum volume. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. It progresses according to the sound generation schedule data.

In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the top central speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When this predetermined period elapses, the volume of the effect sound progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute until now is reduced to the substrate volume adjusted by turning the volume control switch. The volume value is set again (at this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the adjusted effect sound sub The sound is set to a volume value), and flows from the top central speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. FIG.

In this way, when the performance sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko is played. When a notification sound is played to notify a hall clerk or the like of a fraudulent act on the machine 1, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is emitted from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame. 4, but this muted effect sound progresses in accordance with the schedule data for sound generation, so that the notification sound is emitted for a predetermined period of time and the top center speaker on the side of the door frame 3 is played. 462, when the top side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 cease to flow, the effect sound does not start playing again from the point at which the informative sound began to flow, but continues for a predetermined period after the informative sound starts to flow. The sound starts to flow again from the point where it has progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until the time has passed.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral volume from muted to maximum volume by program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall rotates the volume control switch to set the volume to a low volume, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers become small, but the pachinko machine 1 does not. When a problem occurs or the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff members such as store clerks in the game hall to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's dishonesty.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Make a backup by copying to the backup area for regular processing.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as execution completion of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004. In this way, when it is determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006, steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady-state processing, first, in step S1008, the value 1 is set to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed. , and step S1036, and finally in step S1038, the normal processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 to indicate completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing, and the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. This V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, as described above, is a V-blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed when input to the CPU. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[15-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. will be explained. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045), as shown in FIG. As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, it determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, Exit the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the execution of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. They are each set to a value of 0 when no routine processing is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. When the processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG, the fact that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control of FIG. By setting the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the peripheral control unit of this routine indicates that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. By notifying the V blank signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V-blank signal is input after the V-blank signal is input, which is a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next processing will be performed in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that has failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activating a 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[15-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 238 will be described. . When this peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral controller IC determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 240 (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

In step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt process has started when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred. When the determination is made, this routine is terminated as it is. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processing is given to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments it, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In accordance with the drive data, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series. Every time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed, the pointer is updated. do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3, an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5, etc.) ) are driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 have been input. position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC, based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the original position (standby position) of the various movable bodies provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5 or acquire the movable position to grasp the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, rotation operation unit 302 rotation (rotation direction) history information and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The rotation direction of the rotary operation unit 302 and whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 is operated can be obtained from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of the effect sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top central speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be adjusted, and the brightness of various LEDs mounted in plurality on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 can be adjusted.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to the SDRAM. It is backed up by copying it to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. there is In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will cause the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the size of the liquid crystal of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag due to slight changes in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[15-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be sent as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as a trigger to transmit the main peripheral serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC by 1 byte (8 bits). ) is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral controller IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 241 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the judgment of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, out of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, reads 1-byte (8-bit) information. When it is determined that it is within the period in which reception is possible, 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that when the reception counter SRXC is not 3, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, has not been taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, following the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, reads the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. In a certain mode, and when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation is performed by considering the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second-byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, as numerical values, and summing them (sum value ).

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facilities of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become electrically charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated. in a receptive environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has been affected by noise between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 and has changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. can judge.

In step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the received main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216 ), exiting this routine.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is When it is determined that the period for which information can be received has passed, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202. and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, the routine ends.

[15-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process executed when the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 as a trigger. 242, the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300) to determine whether a power failure warning signal has been input. (step S1302). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that two macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If so, this routine is terminated as it is, while if it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

In the determination in step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, the power saving process is performed. (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially executing the turning off of the backlight of the performance display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception waiting process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control ICs can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control section command reception interrupt processing is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up.

After step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, it returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure warning signal has been input. determine whether In other words, it continues infinitely to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By endlessly continuing the determination in this way, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it is no longer possible to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314. CPU is not reset. Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 238 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure state by executing the WDT clearing process in step S1314. It is designed not to take. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It's becoming As a result, even if the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated for a period of 2 microseconds or more, and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clearing process of step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 243 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and stored in the RAM. A first start opening passing process such as storing in one special symbol reservation storage area is executed (step S232). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number A second start opening passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big win execution flag indicating that the big win game state is being controlled is set (step S235), and if the big win execution flag is set, the big win game state is controlled. A jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In addition, in the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the variable display is stopped becomes a mode suggesting "15R big hit", 15R A process of opening and closing the first big winning opening 2005 according to the big winning game state is executed. Further, when the state of suggesting "5R big win" is reached, processing for controlling the opening and closing of the first big prize winning port 2005 is executed according to the 5R big win gaming state, and when the mode of suggesting "2R big win" is reached. Then, a process of controlling the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the 2R jackpot gaming state.

Also, in the jackpot control process (step S235A), after performing the opening control of the first big winning opening 2005, each set process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating the time saving state, and the 2R jackpot game based on the fact that the result of the lottery process at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state has become a mode suggesting "2R jackpot". Set when ending the state, when ending the 5R jackpot game state based on the mode suggesting the ``5R jackpot'', when ending the 15R jackpot game state during the time saving state and the non-time saving state. . Then, when the time saving flag becomes the next big hit, or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. Reset by processing.

In addition, the time saving number counter is a counter indicating the remaining number of variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of times of continuation of the time saving state, and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. In that case, when the big hit game state is terminated, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. The time saving frequency counter is counted down every time the variable display of the special pattern is executed until the counter value becomes '0', but the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes '0'. Sometimes, it is reset by the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 254 to be described later or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) (the counter value is returned to "0").

Also, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, on the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is "0" (Step S237), execute the first special symbol process processing including the lottery processing related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S238), the second stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special design including the lottery process related to the display mode when the fluctuation display of the second special design is stopped Process processing is executed (step S239). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 244 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the processing of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 3052 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the first starting hole 2002, as shown in FIG. Then, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and this Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) of "4" (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to the following steps S243 to newly suspend the variable display control of the first special symbol. The processing of S245 is to be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S244, the random numbers obtained in step S241 are stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S241, the display result of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, whether the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( Variation pattern type) and other advance determination information are executed before the start of the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S245), and then the process is terminated.

However, in the processing of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of the first reservation memory changes based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reservation number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first reservation memory. In addition to updating to correspond to the number, a command (first reservation number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0-4). It's like

FIG. 245 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number obtained in the above step S241, specifically the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation By comparing with the random number, it is determined whether or not a big win will occur, and if a big win will occur, the type of the big win will be determined. The mode type of the game presentation is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified advance determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, if it will be a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it will not be a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win production as a game production executed by the production display device 1600 Aspect type of game production to be played), type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and reserved memory number (value of reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number (the One special reservation number counter value) and set the first special symbol pre-determination command according to (step S262).

Then, by transmitting the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), it is stored corresponding to the first start opening 2002 where the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of pending memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start winning is a big win, the kind of big win if it is a big win, and the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big win. Preliminary determination information such as whether the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect to be executed or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is performed by peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before starting the variable display according to the start winning. You will be able to understand the IC.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reservation storage area for storing pre-determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories. Store in order from the area. Then, when the advance judgment command is received when the advance judgment information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the advance judgment information notified to the (n+1)th storage area (n=1 to 3). is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the first variation pattern command received when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is received. Discard the determination information and move the advance determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). shift the stored pre-determined information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the start of the variable display is postponed, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is placed in a suspended state in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (suspended state), the degree of expectation for the big hit (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control ) can be announced in advance at a predetermined timing, such as when the pending display is newly output or when the pending display is shifted according to the completion of the pending display. .

FIG. 246 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second start opening passing process (step S234).

Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 2401 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the second starting hole 2004, as shown in FIG. Then, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value ) is "1" (step S252). In the processing of this step S252, when it is determined that the second pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253- The process of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number obtained in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

However, in the processing of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the second reservation memory number changes based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reservation number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second reservation memory. While updating to correspond to the number, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a command (second reservation number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0-1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0-1). It's like

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the number of first reserved memories based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 2002 is set to "4", while the game ball enters the second start port 2004. The upper limit of the number of second reserved memories based on entering the ball is set to "1". In addition, the second starting port 2004 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and the second special symbol variation time is shortened compared to the normal state. Even if the upper limit is set to "1", the period in which the second special symbol is not displayed for a long period of time, or the period in which the second reserved memory number is the upper limit continues for a long time, so that the second start port 2004 Even if a game ball enters the game ball, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by not being able to obtain the chance of a big winning lottery.

FIG. 247 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S238). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S238 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S239 of the special symbol process processing are similar program modules, and random numbers used for determination And only the table is different, here only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S238 of the special symbol process processing will be described. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the above-described first special symbol process flag.

1. Read the first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU, based on the read first special random number, lottery processing and the like for the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol is performed first special Design normal processing (step S280)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281 )
3. Variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which lottery process etc. are performed for
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S283) to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. Regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped determined based on the result of the lottery process is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so that

In addition, the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 274).

FIG. 248 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of 2, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state, next, as the process of step S302, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. Random numbers (for example, first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol that is stored in the first storage area out of the random number is read from the same RAM. . And next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to a display mode when the variable display of special symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurred is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

After that, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the hit/loss of the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. After that, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process is terminated.

FIG. 249 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table shown in FIG. When the second special symbol normal process is executed, it is compared with the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in FIG. 250 (A) is for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number), when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state ( A low-probability jackpot determination table used in a low-probability time-saving state)) and a high-probability jackpot determination table used in a high-probability game state (high-probability time-saving state) are provided. . Then, in the hit determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the first special random number, 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, and the setting value is 3 1/299 if the set value is 4, 1/289 if the set value is 4, 1/279 if the set value is 5, and 1/269 if the set value is 6. The first special random number coincides with the big hit determination value indicating that the small win was won with a probability of 3/319, and the other first special random numbers are the above-mentioned losers. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that there is. Also, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing, in the hit determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, when the setting value is 1, 1/319, with the setting value 2 1/309 if set value 3, 1/299 if set value 3, 1/289 if set value 4, 1/279 if set value 5, 1/269 if set value 6 The second special random number matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won the jackpot with a jackpot probability, and the second special random number matches the small hit judgment value that indicates that the second special random number has won the jackpot with a small hit probability of 144/319. The second special random numbers are associated with each other such that the second special random numbers coincide with the loss determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers are lost. That is, the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number has a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. and when the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the second starting opening 2004 is executed than when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting opening 2002 is executed is more advantageous to the player. In addition, the high-probability win determination table is constructed such that the jackpot probability for each set value is ten times higher than that of the low-probability win determination table.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special read out in the second special symbol normal process As a result of comparison with a random number), when it is determined to be a big win (step S312), a big win flag indicating that the variation wins a big win is set (step S313), and the win determination process is terminated.

Also, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the variation has been won as a small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if neither the big win nor the small win is won, that is, if it is determined to be a loss, the reach determination table and the reach random number read out in step S302 are compared (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is a time saving state. and a reach determination table at the time of state. Then, in the reach determination table during the time saving state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number will reach, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers will not reach. A random number is associated with each.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the non-time-saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time-saving state match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, The reach random numbers are associated with each of the 67 types of reach random numbers so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. Thus, in this embodiment, in the non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased more than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316), and when it is determined that the reach is lost (step S317), the change is A reach flag is set to indicate reach, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 251 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 251, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

If the big hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process with the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 250(B). to determine the type of jackpot, and determine the mode (stopped pattern of the first special pattern) of the first special pattern corresponding to the decided type of jackpot when the variation control is stopped (step S322).

In particular,
1. After opening the first big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the first big winning hole 2005, it closes. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 15R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the first big winning hole 2005, and after the big win game state ends, a special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) until the variable display is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened more than usual, and the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. Controlled 15R probability variable jackpot 2 . After the first big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2005, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern five times (five rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the first big winning hole 2005 (easily) in a 5R big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, a special symbol (first special symbol) is obtained. , Second special symbol) until the variable display is executed 77 times, 5R time-saving jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual,
3. After the first big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2005, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern twice (2 rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter (easy) the 2R jackpot game state into the first big prize hole 2005, and the time saving state is controlled before the start of the 2R jackpot game state. If it is, it is controlled to a time-saving state in which it is terminated unless a big win is achieved during the time when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of the big win game state, and 2R is performed. 2R jackpot controlled to a normal state after the end of the jackpot game state if controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the jackpot game state;
One of the three types of jackpots is determined.

In addition, the mode when the variation control of the second special symbol is stopped (stopped symbol of the second special symbol) is
In particular,
1. After the second big winning hole 2006 is open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning hole sensor 2601 detects that 10 game balls have won the second big winning hole 2006, it closes. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 15R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the second big winning hole 2006, and after the big win game state ends, a special symbol (first special pattern, second special pattern) until the variable display is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened more than usual, and the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. 15R probability variable jackpot to control 2 . After the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning hole sensor 2601 detects that 10 game balls have won the second big winning hole 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern five times (five rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the second big winning hole 2006 (easily) in a 5R big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, a special pattern (first special pattern) is obtained. , Second special symbol) until the variable display is executed 77 times, 5R time-saving jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual,
3. After the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning hole sensor 2601 detects that 10 game balls have won the second big winning hole 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern twice (2 rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the second big winning hole 2006 (easily) in a 2R jackpot game state, and before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, it is controlled in a time saving state. If it is, it is controlled to a time-saving state in which it is terminated unless a big win is achieved during the time when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of the big win game state, and 2R is performed. 2R jackpot controlled to a normal state after the end of the jackpot game state if controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the jackpot game state;
One of the three types of jackpots is determined.

In addition, in the big hit pattern determination table compared with the first pattern random number, 8 decision values are distributed when the 15R probability variable jackpot is obtained, and 100 decision values are distributed when the 5R time-saving jackpot is obtained, and the 2R jackpot is distributed. 92 judgment values are distributed when That is, when a lottery result of a big win is obtained by lottery based on the first special random number, a 15R big win has a probability of 4%, a 5R big win has a probability of 50%, and a 2R big win has a probability of 46%. Similarly, in the big hit symbol determination table compared with the second random number, 92 determination values are distributed in the case of a 15R probability variable jackpot, 100 determination values are distributed in the case of a 5R time-saving jackpot, and 2R. Eight determination values are distributed when a big hit is achieved. That is, when a lottery result of a big win is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, the probability of the 15R variable jackpot is 46%, the jackpot of the 5R is 50%, and the jackpot of 2R is 4%. . Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability that the jackpot pattern determination table compared with the second pattern random number is determined to be a 15R probability variable jackpot is higher than the jackpot pattern determination table compared with the first symbol random number. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting port 2002 The state is advantageous to the player.

Further, when the type of the big win is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big win is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 2R big win is determined, the 2R big win pattern is determined as the big win pattern, when the 5R big win is determined, the 5R big win pattern is determined as the big win pattern, and when the 15R big win is determined, the big win is determined. A 15R jackpot pattern is determined as the pattern.

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, when the big hit flag is not set in step S131, if the small hit flag is set (step S324), read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process The type of the small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small winning symbol determination table shown in FIG. mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

In particular,
1. An opening/closing pattern in which the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control a small winning game state in which a game ball can (easily) enter the second big winning hole 2006.例文帳に追加First small hit 2. An opening/closing pattern in which the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed 9 times to control a small winning game state in which a game ball can (easily) enter the second big winning hole 2006.例文帳に追加One of the two types of small wins of the second small win is determined.

In addition, 200 determination values are distributed in the small hit design determination table compared with the first design random number when the first small hit is obtained. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by lottery based on the first special random number, the first small win is obtained with a probability of 100%, and the second small win is not won. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table compared with the second random number, 20 judgment values are distributed when the first small prize is obtained, and 180 judgment values are distributed when the second small prize is obtained. ing. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by lottery based on the second special random number, the first small win is obtained with a probability of 10%, and the second small prize is obtained with a probability of 90%.

Further, when the type of the small win is determined, the stop pattern corresponding to the type of the small win is determined as the mode of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is determined as the first small hit, it is determined as the first small winning pattern as the small winning pattern, and when it is determined as the second small winning pattern, it is determined as the second small winning pattern as the small winning pattern. .

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, when neither the big-hit flag nor the small-hit flag is set, determines the winning pattern (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S328, determines the above lottery result (type of big win, small win, loss of reach, loss (It may be one that instructs the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result (step S328 ). And after that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed, and left decorative design → right decorative design → middle Stop and display in the order of the decorative patterns (the left, middle and right decorative patterns may be synchronously displayed with the same pattern and stopped and displayed at the same time)). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 specifies a small hit or a 2R big hit from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop pattern) when the variation of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. is determined to be a small hit pattern ("Final Battle"), and if the 5R short-time jackpot is specified, the 5R short-time jackpot pattern (left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same among the patterns "0" to "9" If the 15R probability variation jackpot is specified, the 15R probability variation jackpot pattern (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same odd number pattern among the patterns "0" to "9"). combination). In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the lost pattern with the reach (the left and right decorative patterns are a combination of the same patterns "0" to "9" and the middle decorative patterns are different; the reach loss If it is determined to be a design), and if a loss is specified, it is determined to be a design that does not involve reach (a combination in which at least the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are different patterns), and fluctuation When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has passed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and controlled.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after the jackpot game state, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be controlled to the time saving state until the maximum 77 times the variable display is executed, but the time saving state The time saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of big hits after the shift control is performed. Specifically, after the jackpot game state, control is performed to the time saving state, and when a predetermined number of (for example, two) jackpots occur thereafter, the time saving state is not controlled after the predetermined number of times of the jackpot game state is completed. , may be controlled to a normal state. In addition, even if the number of occurrences of big wins is less than a predetermined number, the non-time-saving state may be controlled during the big-win game state, and the time-saving state control may be performed again after the big win game state.

FIG. 252 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 252, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S341), select a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S342), and select a small hit flag. is set (step S343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit corresponding to the type of the small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop design setting process is selected (step S344). , If the reach flag is set (step S345), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S346), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal In the case of a loss (a loss in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). In addition, the main control MPU sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in such a way that it is associated with each variable random number. Thus, the main control MPU, among the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and symbol random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process is compared, and the variation time information associated with the read-out variation random number is obtained from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the fluctuation random number. . For example, in the super ready-to-win performance among the ready-to-win performances, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than that in the normal ready-to-win performance, and when the super ready-to-win performance is executed, the player's expectation for the big winning game state is increased.

Further, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, as the processing of step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter in which the number of times the time saving state continues is set is "0". do. Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S352), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short number counter is "0" (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time saving end flag indicating that the control of the time saving state (time saving control) ends is set (step S354).

When it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S351, when it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S353, at that point , the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is terminated.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, while the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second during the time saving state is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), A special pattern variation pattern is set in such a manner that the special pattern variation time information set to about 12 seconds in a non-working time state is associated with the special pattern random number (first special pattern, second special pattern). . That is, in the variation pattern at the time of loss selected during the time saving state, compared to the variation pattern at the time of loss selected in the non-time saving state, so that the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is extremely short, Variation time information of the above special design is set.

FIG. 253 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of (1), 1 is subtracted from the variable timer in which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the variable pattern is set. When it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of this step S373, this process is terminated when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 254 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined by the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative design corresponding to the stop design of the first special design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). Thereby, when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed for a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example), the time saving control (control of the time saving state) is terminated and the non-time saving control is performed. (Normal state control) will start.

Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big win start command indicating to start the big win game (step S387), and starts the big win game. The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot to a jackpot number counter indicating the number of remaining rounds is also executed. The jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process to be described later, and when the jackpot number counter becomes "0", the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the specified number of rounds has been executed. to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big win control process described later, the big win opening pre-opening process (step S401) and the big winning mouth opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the big win number counter reaches "0", and the big win is performed. When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S402), when the big win frequency counter is subtracted by 1 and becomes "0", the process shifts to the big winning mouth post-opening process (step S403) and ends the big win game. Execute control that causes

Then, a jackpot in-execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). Incidentally, the jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R probability variable jackpot start command, 5R short-time jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) is set according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot, 5R short-time jackpot, 2R jackpot). As a result, the effect of the big win game corresponding to the kind of the big win indicated by the big win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, similarly, the jackpot start command (15R probability variation jackpot start command, 5R timing short jackpot) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 5R time short jackpot, 2R jackpot) Start command, 2R jackpot start command) are set.

In addition, when the jackpot in-execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, when the jackpot game is ended, specifically, the jackpot is executed in the jackpot control processing (step S235A) after the jackpot opening (step S403). The opening and closing control of the first big winning hole 2005 according to the type (for example, after the first big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2005 is described above. Opening and closing control that repeats the opening and closing pattern that is closed when detected by the first large winning opening sensor 2402 twice, five times, or 15 times) and opening and closing control of the second large winning opening 2006 (for example, the first large winning opening 2005 After opening for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning hole sensor 2601 detects that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2005, the opening and closing pattern is closed twice, 5 times. times, or opening and closing control repeated 15 times) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). While the big hit control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114) by resetting the jackpot executing flag, the first function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set (step S386), if the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates to start the small hit game. A small-hit start command is set (step S391), and the waiting time (time for displaying the start of the small-hit game, etc.) until the start of the small-hit game is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small-hit running flag indicating that the small-hit game is being executed is set (step S393). In addition, the small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the kind of the small hit. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command) corresponding to the kind of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) is set. As a result, the production of the small-hit game corresponding to the kind of the small-hit instructed by the small-hit start command is executed by the production display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, the small hit start command (first small hit start command, second Second small hit start command) is set.

In addition, when the small hit running flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed, when the small hit game is ended, specifically, the small hit middle process (step S411) of the small hit control process (step S236A) described later ) to control the opening and closing of the second big winning hole 2006 according to the type of the small win (for example, the opening and closing pattern of opening the second big winning hole 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is repeated twice or nine times). is reset when exiting. By resetting the small hit executing flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when it becomes a loss, the waiting time (the time during which the stop design of the special design is displayed) until the variable display of the next special design is started is set in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

When the processing of steps S386 to S394 is executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value. (step S395), and the process ends.

FIG. 255 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The above-mentioned peripheral control board notifies the player that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are shifted to the above-mentioned jackpot game state based on the fact that the mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) has become a big hit symbol. 1510 or waits until the next round is started pre-opening big winning opening (step S401)
2. Based on the state at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols, the first big prize winning port 2005 or the second big prize winning port 2006 is controlled to open state based on the big hit pattern, or based on the start of the next round. After opening the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or after 10 game balls enter the first big winning hole 2005 When it is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402 that a prize has been won, or after the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or 10 game balls are placed in the second big winning hole 2006. Processing during the opening of the big winning opening which is closed when the winning is detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2601 (step S402)
3. A post-opening process for the big winning opening to wait until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot gaming state will end when all the rounds are completed (step S403).

The big win process flag is operated in the process of step S42 so as to indicate that the big winning hole pre-opening process (step S401) should be performed. Further, in the process during the opening of the big prize winning opening (step S402), at the start of the round in which the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened, a big winning round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is issued. At the end of the round for controlling the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 to be closed, a big winning round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game effect corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. It is implemented by the device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, and the like.

[Dot matrix display]
Next, a circuit board on which an LED used as a display having important functions is mounted will be described. In this example, the display unit having an important function includes information related to the profit of the player (for example, special lottery results, types of big wins and small wins, whether or not specific big wins (variable big wins, 15R big wins, etc.), high probability (whether or not state control is being performed, whether or not time saving control is being performed, etc.) is displayed. In addition to the above, a display unit having a circuit board on which LEDs for displaying information related to the profits of players and game parlors, and LEDs for displaying important information related to the progress of the game may be used as an important function. It is good also as a display part which has.

As shown in FIG. 256, in this example, instead of the back effect unit 3400, a dot matrix display 7000 is provided as a display section having an important function. Further, as shown in FIG. 257A, the dot matrix display device 7000 includes a case 7100 formed of a colored and opaque (white in this example) resin or the like that does not transmit light, and a substrate 7200 provided in the case 7100. , a plurality of LEDs 7001 arranged and mounted on the surface (front surface) of the substrate 7200, and a predetermined color (white in this example, light blue, and a translucent film 7300 attached to the surface (front) side of the case 7100 . The plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the surface of the substrate 7200 are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and the LED bare chips enclosed in the LED package are directly mounted on the surface of the substrate 7200 (LED mounting surface). . The colored opaque resin may be black, gray, red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, yellow, etc., in addition to white.

In addition, the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 are divided into separate systems so that the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be individually and independently controlled to emit light. As a result, various characters, symbols, graphics, and the like can be displayed by causing predetermined LEDs 7001 among the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 to emit light. In addition, a circuit board on which LEDs are mounted is provided, and light emitting decorations that control light emission in relation to the above-mentioned variable effect (back bottom middle rotation decoration 3310, back top rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back top front rotating decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.), a predetermined number of Light emission is controlled for each group consisting of (two or more) LEDs, and a specific region of the light-emitting decoration (or the entire light-emitting decoration may be used) by causing a plurality of LEDs included in this group to emit light. (or a part of it) is made to emit surface light. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, based on the lottery result of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), each of a plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on a substrate 7200 of a dot matrix display 7000 is controlled to emit a predetermined character. , symbols, figures, etc.

Further, on the surface of the dot matrix display 7000 (the surface of the surface cover portion 7110 described later), a portion (such as a portion corresponding to the through portion 7110a) is translucent (in this example, cloudy frosted glass). A colored and opaque (black in this example) translucent film 7300 is adhered to the portion , so that the lighting state of the LED 7001 can be visually recognized through the translucent film 7300 . Instead of adhering the translucent film 7300 to the front side of the dot matrix display 7000, a film may be adhered to the surface of another decorative member or printed on the surface of another decorative member. A dot matrix display device 7000 may be arranged behind and the lighting state of the LED 7001 may be visually recognized through another decorative member. Further, although the translucent film 7300 may not be provided on the front side of the dot matrix display device 7000, the light emitted from the LEDs 7001 can be visually recognized through the translucent film 7300, thereby is not directly visible so that the player does not feel dazzled, and the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be individually surface-emitting by the translucent film 7300. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs 7001 emit light, the light source can be made inconspicuous.

In this example, light-emitting decorations (lower back middle rotation decoration 3310, back upper rear rotation decoration 3440) made of translucent resin (for example, milky white polypropylene (PP), transparent polyethylene terephthalate (PET), etc.) , back left rotating decoration 3510, back right rotating decoration 3610, back back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotating decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration Body 3813, etc.) and controls light emission in relation to the variable effect to cover a specific area of the light-emitting decoration (LED mounting surface (surface, front surface) of the circuit board (surface (front surface) of the light-emitting decoration )) is mounted on the circuit board for mounting the LED that emits surface light, so that the light emitted by the mounted LED is reflected on the surface of the circuit board (front surface, LED mounting surface) to improve the brightness. A white insulating paint having a high density is applied to form a white insulating film (solid white resist, white resist layer) (white resist treatment is performed).

On the other hand, the substrate 7200 on which the LEDs 7001 are mounted, which is provided in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 of this example and causes the plurality of LEDs 7001 to individually emit surface light, is coated with a black insulating paint having the lowest reflection efficiency. A black insulating film (solid black resist, black resist layer) is formed (black resist processing is performed). As a result, although the light emission from the dot matrix display 7000 is less efficiently reflected on the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200, the light emitted from the LED 7001 is directed directly forward (LED irradiation direction, front direction of the substrate 7200). Interference between the emitted light and the light reflected from the substrate 7200 and emitted forward is suppressed, so that the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 can be clearly visually recognized. Thus, in this example, in order to increase the reflection efficiency of the circuit board on which the LEDs are mounted, a white insulating film is normally formed (resist treatment) to increase the luminance. A circuit board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, each of which is controlled to emit light and has an important function. The color of the insulating film (resist) formed on the circuit board is used to determine the role of the LED mounted on the circuit board. there is That is, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the circuit board is mounted with an LED having an important function.

In this way, in this example, a circuit board for improving the luminance of a light-emitting decoration, such as a circuit board provided in a light-emitting decoration that controls the light emission of a plurality of LEDs for each group in relation to the variable effect, A white insulating film is formed (resist treatment), and the light emission of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 to be mounted can be made clear, such as the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 which controls the light emission of the plurality of LEDs individually and independently. In order to form a black insulating film (resist treatment) on the substrate 7200 that is desired to be visually recognized, the circuit substrate provided on the light-emitting decoration increases the reflection efficiency of the light emitted by the mounted LED, and when the LED emits light. Since it is possible to suppress the decrease in luminance of the light-emitting decorations, it is possible to improve the rendering effect of the variable rendering performed by the rendering display device 1600 . In addition, regarding the dot matrix display 7000, when the plurality of LEDs 7001 emit light, reflection of light is suppressed to prevent interference between the light emitted directly forward from the LEDs 7001 and the light reflected from the substrate 7200 and emitted forward. In addition to being able to suppress it, the light emission of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be clearly visually recognized by contrast with the LED mounting surface on which the black insulating film is formed. In addition, a substrate 7200 provided in a dot matrix display 7000, which is individually controlled to emit light and displays important information related to the progress of the game (for example, a special lottery result), and a predetermined number of LED units (a group consisting of a predetermined number of LEDs). Each) is light emission controlled and does not display important information related to the progress of the game (it may be displayed in rare cases). , and the color of the LED mounting surface of the circuit board is made different to liven up the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600 (for the purpose of improving the effect of the effect, etc.). It is easy to determine whether or not the light-emitting means such as the LED used to display important information, and to determine the control unit of the LED (whether it is controlled for each predetermined number of LEDs or individually). As a result, it is possible to quickly deal with a problem in the light-emitting means that displays important information related to the progress of the game, so that the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, in this example, the substrate 7200 on which the black insulating film is formed is accommodated in the case 7100 formed of a colored opaque white resin that does not transmit light. That is, the substrate 7200 on which a black insulating film with low reflection efficiency (not limited to black, and may be a dark color such as green or purple) is formed with a white insulating film with high reflection efficiency (not limited to white, yellow or yellow). By housing it in the case 7100 (which may be a light color such as light blue), the case 7100 increases the reflection efficiency of the light emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 from other circuit boards on which the LEDs are mounted. be able to. On the other hand, the substrate 7200 accommodated in the case 7100 is mounted on the substrate 7200 because a black insulating film (not limited to black, but may be a dark color such as green or purple) with low reflection efficiency is formed. Interference of light from each of the LEDs 7001 is suppressed, and each light can be visually recognized clearly.

In addition, a translucent film 7300 is attached to a portion of the surface (front) side of the case 7100, and a portion of the translucent film 7300 is non-translucent and opaque black. Since the white case 7100 is exposed without the light-transmitting film 7300 attached to the side and back (rear) sides of the case 7100, the circuit board arranged behind or to the side of the case 7100 can be used as a pachinko machine. The light emitted toward the front of the machine 1 can be reflected with high efficiency to increase the brightness, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Also, in this example, a bright-colored connector 7002 (having a bright-colored housing) is arranged on the back surface of the substrate 7200 (non-LED-mounted surface). As described above, a dark-colored (black in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, so that the light-colored connector 7002 is attached to the surface of the substrate 7200 (LED mounting surface). , front surface) of the substrate 7200 increases the reflection efficiency on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, and the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 interferes, making it impossible to clearly see the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001. There is a risk. Without arranging a light-colored connector 7002 on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a dark (black in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed, the back surface of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted ( By arranging it on the LED non-mounting surface), interference of light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 is suppressed, and light emission from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be clearly visually recognized. Also, the dark connector 7002 (having a dark housing) may be arranged on the back surface of the board 7200 on which no LED is mounted (LED non-mounting surface), and the dark connector 7002 (in this example, It may be mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which an insulating film (resist) of black) is formed. The dark connector 7002 is also arranged on the back surface of the substrate 7200 on which the LEDs 7001 are not mounted (LED non-mounting surface). Even if it is mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a dark (black in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is excessively reduced. can be prevented from improving.

In addition, not only connectors but also light-colored electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, diodes, ICs, LED driver ICs (constant-current drive circuits), etc., may have light-colored parts). ) may be arranged on the rear surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, instead of being arranged on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) where the dark insulating film is formed. Also, the improvement of the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 can be suppressed. In addition, dark-colored electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, diodes, ICs, LED driver ICs (which may have parts different from dark colors (silver-colored metal parts, transparent resin parts, etc.)). constant current drive circuit, etc.) may be arranged on the back surface of the substrate 7200 on which the LEDs 7001 are not mounted (LED non-mounting surface). It may be mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the resist) is formed. By arranging the dark electronic components on the back surface of the substrate 7200 on which the LEDs 7001 are not mounted (LED non-mounting surface), it is possible to suppress the improvement of the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. Even if it is mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a dark (black in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is excessively reduced. can be prevented from improving.

In addition, light emitting decorations that control light emission in relation to the above-described fluctuation effect (back bottom middle rotation decoration 3310, back top rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back upper front rotating decoration 3410, back upper front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.) and a circuit board provided on the door frame 3 to mount LEDs (Back front left decoration board 3714 of back front left decoration unit 3710, back top front decoration board 3422 of back top effect unit 3400, back front right decoration board 3814 of back front right decoration unit 3810, back bottom right effect unit 3250 back bottom right decoration board 3253, back bottom left decoration board 3203 of back bottom left effect unit 3200, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame top left A white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the decorative substrate 456, door frame top right decorative substrate 457, etc.). In these circuit boards, a dark-colored connector (having a dark-colored housing) may be mounted on the back surface of the circuit board on which no LED is mounted (non-LED mounted surface). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (surface, front surface) on which a white insulating film (resist) is formed, and to increase the brightness of the LED, thereby improving the presentation effect. A light-colored connector (having a light-colored housing) may also be arranged on the back surface of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted (LED non-mounting surface), and the bright-colored connector 7002 may be provided with white insulation. It may be arranged on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the circuit board on which the film (resist) is formed. By arranging the light-colored connector 7002 on the back surface of the substrate 7200 on which the LEDs 7001 are not mounted (non-LED-mounted surface), it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED-mounted surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. Even if the connector 7002 is mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a white insulating film (resist) is formed, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is not excessively lowered. can be

In addition, not only connectors but also dark-colored electronic components (such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, ICs, LED driver ICs (constant current drive circuits), etc.) may be arranged on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, instead of being arranged on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) on which the light-colored insulating film is formed. can also suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 . In addition, light-colored electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, diodes, ICs, LED drivers, which may have parts different from light colors (silver-colored metal parts, transparent resin parts, etc.)) ICs (constant current drive circuits, etc.) may also be arranged on the back surface of the substrate 7200 on which the LEDs 7001 are not mounted (LED non-mounting surface). It may be mounted on the front surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 to be formed. By arranging the bright-colored electronic components on the back surface of the substrate 7200 on which the LEDs 7001 are not mounted (non-LED-mounted surface), it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED-mounted surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. Even if electronic components are mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a white insulating film (resist) is formed, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is not excessively lowered. can be

In the above example, the substrate 7200 provided in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 is coated with black insulating paint to form a black insulating film. As long as the light emission of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 provided in the case 7100 can be clearly seen, not only black insulating paint, but also purple, navy blue, dark green, etc. Apply a dark-colored insulating paint to form a dark-colored insulating film (dark-colored (purple, dark blue, dark green, etc.) solid coated resist, dark-colored (purple, dark blue, dark green, etc.) resist layer) You may make it However, a circuit board coated with a black insulating paint to form a black insulating film has a lower reflection efficiency than a circuit board coated with a dark insulating paint other than black to form a dark insulating film. Therefore, a circuit board coated with a black insulating paint to form a black insulating film is better than a circuit board coated with a dark insulating paint other than black to form a dark insulating film. Interference between the light directly emitted from the LEDs 7001 forward and the light reflected from the substrate 7200 and emitted forward can be suppressed, and the light emitted from each of the LEDs 7001 can be clearly visually recognized. At least the surface of the substrate 7200 on which the LEDs 7001 are mounted (LED mounting surface) may be formed with the dark insulating film. An insulating film different from the dark-colored insulating film (for example, a bright-colored insulating film coated with a bright-colored insulating paint such as white) may be formed. That is, the color of the insulating film may be the same between the LED-mounted surface and the non-LED-mounted surface of the circuit board, or the color of the insulating film may be different between the LED-mounted surface and the non-LED-mounted surface of the circuit board. good. Furthermore, the insulating film formed on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 is not limited to a film (resist) formed by applying (solidly coating) an insulating coating, and is not limited to a film (resist) formed by applying (solidly coating) an insulating coating. It may include a layer (first layer) to be formed and a layer (second layer, outermost layer) formed by silk-printing an insulating paint on this layer. In this case, the types (components) and colors of the insulating paints may be different between the first layer and the second layer. The layers may be light (eg, white), or the first layer may be light and the second layer dark.

Further, as shown in FIG. 257B, the case 7100 is composed of a front cover portion 7110 on the front surface side of the substrate 7200 and a rear cover portion 7120 on the rear surface side of the substrate 7200. The front cover portion 7110 and the rear surface The substrate 7200 is housed inside the case 7100 so as to be sandwiched between the cover portion 7120 and the substrate 7200 . In addition, the surface cover portion 7110 covering the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 (the surface (front surface) of the substrate 7200) has a predetermined thickness (about 5 mm in this example) and corresponds to each of the LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200. A cylindrical through portion 7110a is formed as shown in FIG. The front cover portion 7110 and the back cover portion 7120 are tightly adhered to each other without a gap (difficult to remove, and the substrate 7200 cannot be removed unless at least part of the substrate 7200 such as the front cover portion 7110 and the back cover portion 7120 is broken by welding or the like. The substrate 7200 is fixed (attached) to the surface cover portion 7110 by attaching the substrate 7200 to the surface cover portion 7110 . As a result, the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 is partitioned so that the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 are arranged in separate through portions 7110a, and the LEDs 7001 are illuminated from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001. Leakage of light to the other penetrating portion 7110a and the rear surface side of the substrate 7200 is suppressed, and interference of light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be suppressed. The light can be emitted individually from the through portion 7110a, and the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be easily identified individually. For example, even when the first LED and the second LED among the plurality of LEDs 7001 are caused to emit light of different colors, the emission colors of the plurality of LEDs 7001 are suppressed by suppressing mixing of these colors. Since the information can be individually identified, it is possible to prevent the information displayed on the dot matrix display device 7000 from being conveyed to the player differently from the original information. Further, since the front cover portion 7110 and the back cover portion 7120 are firmly attached, the substrate 7200 and the front cover portion 7110 can be kept in close contact with each other, and interference of light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be prevented. The risk of impairing the suppressing function is reduced.

Further, on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100, in addition to the plurality of LEDs 7001, areas near each of the plurality of LEDs 7001, such as the part numbers of the LEDs and areas indicating the positions where the LEDs are arranged. A notation part (also called an information display part (including symbols and characters) indicating the attributes of the LED (further, the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction of the LED (mounting direction), and the type of the LED may be included) ) is a black insulating film (resist) that is solidly coated with a white insulating paint (not limited to white, but may be a bright color (e.g. yellow) with high reflection efficiency) that stands out against black. silk-printed on. In this example, the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 is partitioned so that the silk-printed description portion is included in the through portion 7110a. Specifically, one LED is arranged in the penetrating portion 7110a, and a descriptive portion that is silk-printed in the vicinity of the one LED and indicates the part number of the LED is arranged ( The labeling portion may be arranged so that the entirety of it fits inside the through portion 7110a, or it may be arranged so that part of the labeling portion fits inside the through portion 7110a). As a result, the area inside the through portion 7110a (the area in which one LED 7001 is arranged) on the substrate 7200 is defined by the marking portion that is silk-printed with a white insulating paint having the highest reflection efficiency and is placed inside the through portion 7110a. Reflection efficiency can be increased, and a decrease in brightness in the through portion 7110a can be further suppressed when the LED 7001 emits light. In addition, as described above, since the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 is coated with a black insulating film (resist) that has the lowest reflection efficiency, the area outside the penetrating portion 7110a maintains a state of low reflection efficiency. Even if the light from the LED 7001 arranged in the through portion 7110a leaks out of the through portion 7110a, the light can be prevented from diffusing. In this case, the ratio of the marking portion to the area outside the penetrating portion 7110a in the substrate 7200 is reduced as much as possible (most of the marking portion is contained within the penetrating portion 7110a and part of the marking portion slightly protrudes outside the penetrating portion 7110a). , etc.), the effect of preventing light diffusion can be further enhanced.

In addition, the above circuit board has a through hole (which penetrates the circuit board in the front-rear direction and electrically connects the wiring pattern on the front side (front side, LED mounting side) and the wiring pattern on the back side (LED non-mounting side). A plurality of holes are formed to connect with each other. Since this through-hole penetrates the circuit board in the front-rear direction, the light from the LEDs mounted on the front surface (the front surface, the LED mounting surface) of the circuit board is not reflected by the through-hole and is emitted from the back surface of the circuit board. side (LED non-mounting surface side), and there is a risk that the brightness may decrease. In this example, in the substrate 7200 accommodated in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000, through holes are not formed in the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a (the region inside the penetrating portion 7110a). With this configuration, the light from the LEDs 7001 arranged in the area corresponding to the through portion 7110 a can be reflected toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 without leaking to the back side of the substrate 7200 . The brightness of the light emitted from the LEDs 7001 mounted on the surface (the front surface, the LED mounting surface) of the LED 7001 can be increased, and the interference of each LED 7001 can be suppressed so that the light emission of each LED 7001 can be clearly seen. .

A black insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100, but no marking portion is formed on this insulating film (resist). You may do so. With this configuration, only the insulating film (resist) of the same color is formed on the LED mounting surface (surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, and the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (surface, front surface) can be made uniform. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 due to the marking portion. In addition, by not improving the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, the insulation film ( Interference of light on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) on which a resist is formed is suppressed, and diffusion of light from the LED 7001 arranged in the through portion 7110a to the outside of the through portion 7110a can be suppressed. The light emission of each of the LEDs 7001 corresponding to .

In addition, in the case where the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is not silk-printed with an insulating paint to form a marking portion, the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) of the substrate 7200 is printed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface). (For example, if a black insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface), a color with a higher reflection efficiency than black (for example, white yellow, green, light blue, yellow-green, blue, purple, etc.), and if a white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface), colors with lower reflection efficiency than white (e.g., yellow, green , light blue, yellowish green, blue, purple, black, etc.))) may be silk-printed with an insulating paint, or a foil punch (wiring pattern In the layer (copper plane) on which the is formed, the wiring pattern, which is copper foil, is used to form letters, figures, symbols, etc., and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form the wiring pattern. The notation part may be formed by the color of the insulating film formed on the substrate 7200 (formed electrically insulated from the electronic parts) on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 ( A dark color (a dark color such as blue, purple, or green is used when a black insulating film is formed over the substrate 7200 ), and a dark color such as blue, purple, or green is used when a green insulating film is formed over the substrate 7200 . In that case, the writing portion may be formed by silk-printing an insulating paint (a dark-colored insulating paint such as black, blue, or purple) on the insulating film (on the resist).

That is, only an insulating film (resist) of the same color (black in this example, but dark colors such as green, purple, and blue may be used) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. It is also possible not to form the notation part with a color different from that of the insulating film on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 . By configuring in this way, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 can be made uniform, and the improvement of the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is suppressed. Since it is possible to suppress the interference of light, the light emission of each of the LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 can be made clear, thereby facilitating identification of each light emission state. In addition, the part number of the LED mounted by the notation formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) or the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) of the substrate 7200, the area indicating the position where the LED is arranged, etc. It becomes easy to grasp the attribute of the LED.

In addition, according to the color of the insulating paint used to form the marking part, the marking part is formed on the insulating film (resist) formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the circuit board, and the circuit board may be different from the case where the marking portion is formed on the insulating film (resist) formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) of . For example, in a circuit board in which a dark-colored (for example, black, green, blue, purple, etc.) insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface), the insulation formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) On the film (resist), an insulating paint having a dark color (for example, black, green, blue, purple, etc.) different from the color of the insulating film (resist) may be silk-printed to form the marking portion. Alternatively, the notation section may be formed by silk-printing a light-colored (white, yellow, light blue, yellow-green, etc.) insulating paint on the insulating film (resist) formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface). good. In addition, in a circuit board in which a light-colored (white) insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface), on the insulating film (resist) formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface), The notation part may be formed by silk printing with an insulating paint of a bright color (for example, yellow, light blue, yellowish green, etc.) different from the color of the insulating film (resist), or the LED non-mounting surface (back surface ), a dark-colored (black, green, blue, purple, etc.) insulating paint may be silk-printed on the insulating film (resist) to form the marking portion. As a result, it is possible to add advantageous characteristics to the circuit board according to the purpose of use of the circuit board (whether it is a circuit board that wants to improve reflection efficiency or a circuit board that wants to suppress light interference by suppressing reflection efficiency). It is possible to enhance the production effect and the information transmission effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

On the other hand, the above-described luminous decorations (back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back rear left rotating decoration 3510, back rear right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back top front Rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.) are provided on the circuit board and the door frame 3 for mounting LEDs that emit surface light in specific areas. (back front left decoration board 3714 of back front left decoration unit 3710, back top front decoration board 3422 of back top effect unit 3400, back front right decoration board 3814 of back front right decoration unit 3810, back Back bottom right decoration board 3253 of bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom left decoration board 3203 of back bottom left effect unit 3200, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top center decoration board 455 , door frame top left decorative substrate 456, door frame top right decorative substrate 457, etc.), a light-colored (white in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (surface, front surface), On top of this insulating film (resist), an insulating paint of a bright color (yellow in this example, but other bright colors such as light blue and yellowish green are also acceptable) different from the color of the insulating film (white in this example) is applied. A description portion is formed by silk printing.

That is, the light-emitting decorations (lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, upper back rear rotating decoration 3440, back left rotating decoration 3510, back right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back upper front rotating decoration Body 3410, back upper front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.) is provided on a circuit board or a door frame 3 to mount an LED that emits surface light in a specific area. circuit board (back front left decoration board 3714 of back front left decoration unit 3710, back top front decoration board 3422 of back top effect unit 3400, back front right decoration board 3814 of back front right decoration unit 3810, back bottom right Back bottom right decoration board 3253 of production unit 3250, back bottom left decoration board 3203 of back bottom left production unit 3200, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top center decoration board 455, door A light-colored (white in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (surface, front surface) of the frame top left decorative substrate 456, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, etc., and the insulating film (resist) is formed. On the film, silk is applied with an insulating paint of a bright color (yellow, light blue, yellowish green, etc.) different from the color of the insulating film (resist) so as not to reduce the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface). A marking portion is formed by printing. As a result, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) can be suppressed from being lowered by the writing portion, and the brightness of the light irradiated toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased to improve the performance effect. . In addition, it is desirable to use a yellow insulating paint as the bright color for forming the marking portion. Yellow is the color with the closest reflection efficiency to white, so by forming the markings with yellow insulating paint, we can suppress the deterioration of the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface of the circuit board, Identifies attributes of LEDs such as numbers and areas indicating positions where LEDs are arranged (further, LED shape, LED size, LED mounting direction (mounting direction), and LED type may be included). be able to

In addition, a circuit board provided in a conventional pachinko machine 1 in which a white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface and a writing portion is formed on the insulating film (resist) by silk printing with a black insulating paint. In contrast, when the circuit board on which the notation part is formed by silk printing with a bright insulating paint such as yellow, light blue, or yellow-green, the notation part is less conspicuous when placed on the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加The luminous decorations (back bottom center rotating decoration 3310, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back left rotating decoration 3510, back back right rotating decoration 3610, back back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotating decoration 3410, back upper front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.) and door frame 3, the LED mounting surface of each circuit board is directed to the front side of pachinko machine 1 (pachinko machine 1), so that the shape and decoration are unified according to a predetermined theme. Attributes of LEDs, such as the part number of the LED that is unrelated to the game being played and the area indicating the position where the LED is arranged (further, the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction of the LED (mounting direction), the LED ), etc., are visually recognized by the player, the sense of unity and the world view of the pachinko machine 1 may be lost, and the interest in the game may be reduced. In the above example, since the notation part is less conspicuous than the circuit board provided in the conventional pachinko machine 1, the LED attributes such as the part number of the LED unrelated to the game and the area indicating the position where the LED is arranged (Furthermore, the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction of the LED (mounting direction), and the model of the LED may be included.) Information such as the information becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the uniformity of the pachinko machine 1 is improved. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest by suppressing the collapse of the world view.

In addition, since the reflection efficiency of white and yellow is close and the difference in visual characteristics (contrast) is small, a white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface, and a white insulating film (resist) is used. When a yellow insulating paint whose reflection efficiency is close to that of white is used as the marking part to be formed, the effect of suppressing a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface is enhanced compared to the case of using a combination of other colors. In addition, when installed in the pachinko machine 1, the inscription part is made inconspicuous, and the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the game interest can be enhanced.

In addition, light emitting decorations (lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, upper back rotating decoration 3440, back left rotating decoration 3510, back right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back upper front rotating decoration Body 3410, back upper front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.) and the door frame 3 are provided and light emission is controlled in relation to the variable effect, so that the light emitting decoration can be specified. Light colors (yellow, light blue, yellow Green, etc.) may be used to form the notation part, the notation part may be formed by removing foil, or the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) may be formed without forming the notation part on the LED mounting surface. Alternatively, the marking portion may be formed in a color (not limited to a bright color) different from the white color of the insulating film, or may be formed by removing foil. In addition, the notation part may be formed corresponding to each of a plurality of LEDs (for example, "LED1" or the like is formed for one LED), or it may be summarized for each plurality of LEDs (for example, each type). (For example, "LED1 to LED5" are formed for a plurality of LEDs). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) and increase the brightness of the light emitted from the dimming LED or the non-dimming LED. In addition, efficient light emission can be realized by suppressing the loss of light emitted by non-dimmable LEDs.

In addition, the region corresponding to the through portion 7110a (the region inside the through portion 7110a) of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 is white (not limited to white, but is a light color with high reflection efficiency (for example, The reflection efficiency may be improved by changing the color to yellow). FIG. 258(A) shows a front view and AA cross-sectional view of the circuit board (the board 7200 in this example) in Modification 1, and FIG. , and a cross-sectional view along line AA. As shown in FIG. 258(A), as the substrate 7200 of Modified Example 1, a first conductive film 7200A (resist) is formed by applying black insulating paint to the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of a base material 7201. Then, a white insulating paint is applied to the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the base material 7201 to form a back side conductive film 7202 (resist), and then the base material on which the first conductive film 7200A (resist) is formed. On the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of 7201, the area corresponding to the through portion 7110a (the area inside the through portion 7110a) is subjected to second conductive film 7200A by silk printing with a white insulating paint. A conductive film 7200B may be formed, and one LED 7001 may be mounted in the center of each of the second conductive films 7200B (the second insulating film 7200B may be formed around the LED 7001 after mounting the LED 7001). may be used).

Further, as shown in FIG. 258B, as the substrate 7200 of Modified Example 2, the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the base material 7201 is coated with a white insulating paint to form a first conductive film 7200A (resist). is formed and a white insulating paint is applied to the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7201 to form a back-side conductive film 7202 (resist), and then the first conductive film 7200A (resist) is formed. Black insulating paint is silk-printed from above the first conductive film 7200A except for the area (the area inside the penetration part 7110a) corresponding to the penetration part 7110a on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the base material 7201. The second conductive film 7200B may be formed by forming the second conductive film 7200B, and one LED 7001 may be mounted in the center of each first conductive film 7200A (resist) (the second insulating film 7200B may be formed after mounting the LED 7001). may be configured).

That is, in FIG. 258A, a black first conductive film 7200A is formed around a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and a white first conductive film 7200A is formed in a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a. A two conductive film 7200B is formed. In FIG. 258B, a black second conductive film 7200B is formed around the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and a white second conductive film 7200B is formed in the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a. 1 conductive film 7200A is formed.

In this manner, a black insulating film (black first conductive film 7200A, black second conductive film 7200B) is formed around a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and the penetrating portion 7110a is formed. By forming a white insulating film (white second conductive film 7200B, white first conductive film 7200A) in a region corresponding to the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, a region (one piece The reflection efficiency of the area inside the through portion 7110a where the LEDs 7001 are arranged) can be increased. As a result, when the LED 7001 emits light, the brightness in the through portion 7110a is further suppressed, and the light emitted by one LED 7001 can be clearly seen. A state of low reflection efficiency can be maintained around the region, and even if the light from the LED 7001 arranged in the through portion 7110a leaks out of the through portion 7110a, the light is prevented from diffusing. can.

Further, in this case, the above-described description portion may not be silk-printed, or the description portion may be silk-printed on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted. A light-colored paint with high reflection efficiency such as white or yellow is used on the black first conductive film 7200A or the black second conductive film 7200B formed around the area corresponding to the through portion 7110a on the surface. The notation portion may be silk-printed, or a yellow color or the like may be printed on the white first conductive film 7200A or the white second conductive film 7200B formed in the area corresponding to the through portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface. The notation portion may be silk-printed using bright-colored paint with high reflection efficiency.

In addition, on the surface of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is mounted (the front surface, the LED mounting surface), the dark color with lower reflection efficiency (black in this example, and black green, blue, purple, etc.) accounted for a higher proportion. Therefore, interference of light from each LED 7001 is suppressed on the entire surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) on which the LEDs 7001 are mounted in the substrate 7200, so that individual lights can be clearly seen.

Further, in the above example, a through-hole is not formed in the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the substrate 7200 accommodated in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 (the region inside the penetrating portion 7110a). Alternatively, a through hole may be formed in a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a, and at least the hole on the LED mounting surface side of the through hole may be closed with the above-described white second conductive film 7200B. In this case also, the light from the LEDs 7001 arranged in the area corresponding to the through portion 7110a can be reflected toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 without leaking to the back side of the substrate 7200. The brightness of the light emitted from the LEDs 7001 mounted on the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of 7200 can be increased, and the interference of each LED 7001 can be suppressed so that the light emission of each LED 7001 can be clearly recognized. can.

In addition, by housing the substrate 7200 on which the black insulating film is formed in the case 7100 formed of a colored opaque white resin that does not transmit light, the pachinko machine can be connected to other circuit substrates on which the LEDs are mounted. While the case 7100 is configured so that the reflection efficiency of the light emitted toward the front of the substrate 7100 can be increased, the area corresponding to the through portion 7110a of the substrate 7200 accommodated in the case 7100 has high reflection efficiency. By forming the white insulating film, the light-transmitting film 7300 attached to the case 7100 is peeled off and the substrate 7200 accommodated in the case 7100 can be visually recognized through the through portion 7110a. Even when a case 7100 is used in which a part of the substrate 7200 is exposed from the through portion 7110a without the 7300 being adhered, the reflection efficiency is improved by the substrate 7200 exposed from the through portion 7110a formed in the case 7100. It can be prevented from lowering, and the light emitted from the other circuit board on which the LED is mounted toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 is reflected with high efficiency to increase the brightness and improve the performance effect. .

Alternatively, the notation portion may be formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) without forming the notation portion on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, or the LED mounting surface (front surface) of the substrate 7200 may be formed. , the front) is a punched product that is formed by punching out the surrounding copper foil to create shapes such as letters, figures, symbols, etc. with wiring patterns that are copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed. and the wiring pattern forming the foil punching is electrically insulated from the electronic component), or the LED mounting surface (surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 may be formed with the substrate A dark color different from the color of the insulating film (dark color such as black or green) formed on the substrate 7200 (when a black insulating film is formed on the substrate 7200, a dark colored insulating paint such as blue, purple, or green) is used. When a green insulating film is formed on the substrate 7200, a marking portion is formed by silk-printing an insulating paint (a dark-colored insulating paint such as black, blue, or purple) on the insulating film (on the resist). You may make it In addition, in the case where the notation part is formed on the LED non-mounting surface (rear surface) of the substrate 7200, a predetermined color (white, yellow, black, The notation part may be formed by silk printing with an insulating paint such as green), or letters and figures may be printed with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed. , a form such as a symbol is formed and the copper foil around it is removed, and the wiring pattern forming the foil removal is electrically insulated from the electronic parts) to form the marking part. You may do so. By configuring in this way, it is possible to uniform the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, and the reduction in reflection efficiency is suppressed in the area corresponding to the through portion 7110a of the substrate 7200. Thus, luminance can be increased, and improvement in reflection efficiency is suppressed in a region outside the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the substrate 7200, so that interference of light can be suppressed.

In addition, the substrate 7200 is housed in the case 7100 with the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 in close contact with the surface cover portion 7110, and the light emitted from the LEDs arranged in the through portion 7110a is emitted from the outside of the through portion 7110a. Therefore, on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the same substrate 7200, the area where the reflection efficiency is desired to be improved and the reflection efficiency are suppressed to suppress light interference. It is possible to coexist with a region that conflicts with the desired region, which not only increases the brightness of the light emitted from the LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200, but also suppresses the interference between the LEDs 7001 and the LEDs 7001. Individual luminescence can be clearly visualized.

The color of the insulating film formed on the non-LED-mounted surface (back surface) of the substrate 7200 is not limited to the same color as the LED-mounted surface (front surface, front surface). (In this example, black, blue, green, purple, etc. may be used in addition to black) insulating film is formed, and a bright color (white in this example, other than white) is formed on the LED non-mounting surface (rear surface) of the substrate 7200 . or yellow) may be formed.

In addition, at least some of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are set to have higher brightness than usual (normal brightness: brightness reflecting the result of brightness adjustment by the player described later, higher brightness than usual). : Brightness higher than the brightness that reflects the result of brightness adjustment by the player, maximum brightness in the brightness range in which the brightness can be adjusted by the player, brightness higher than the brightness range in which the brightness can be adjusted by the player (the brightness can be adjusted by the player) The plurality of LEDs 7001 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 are controlled to emit light while maintaining normal luminance even under specific conditions such as when light emission is controlled to high luminance that cannot be set by ). Since it is possible to individually identify the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001, important information displayed on the dot matrix display 7000 can be recognized. In addition, under the specific conditions described above, the LED mounted on the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710, the LED mounted on the back top front decoration board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400, the back LED mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the front right decoration unit 3810, LED mounted on the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom left of the back bottom left effect unit 3200 Since some of the plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) provided on the game board 5, such as LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate 3203, are turned off, the brightness inside the glass frame 161 is reduced. Therefore, it is easy to determine the light emission state (displayed information) of the plurality of LEDs provided in the dot matrix display 7000 . In addition, at least some of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light with higher brightness than usual, and the decoration provided on the game board 5 (movable decoration (rear bottom middle rotation decoration 3310 , back upper rear rotary decoration 3440, back rear left rotary decoration 3510, back rear right rotary decoration 3610, and back rear movable decoration 3110), back front left decoration unit 3710, back upper production unit 3400, back front Light-emitting means provided on decorations that do not display important information (except function display unit 1400 that displays important information), such as right decoration unit 3810, back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom left effect unit 3200, etc. (LED) may be turned off, and light emission of the LED as the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the LED 7001 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 may be controlled while maintaining normal luminance ( For example, when it is desired to draw attention to the display content of the effect display device 1600 (at the time of occurrence of super reach or error state, etc.), in this case, since the brightness inside the glass frame 161 can be further reduced, the dot matrix display is performed. It becomes easy to determine the light emission state (displayed information) of the plurality of LEDs provided in the device 7000 .

In addition, since all the light from the LED 7001 provided in the through portion 7110a can be emitted from the front of the through portion 7110a without leaking to the outside of the through portion 7110a, the brightness in the through portion 7110a is reduced. can be suppressed. Note that not only the front cover portion 7110 and the back cover portion 7120 but also the substrate 7200 is firmly attached to the front cover portion 7110 (difficult to remove, irreversible removal that cannot be removed unless at least a part of the front cover portion 7110 and the substrate 7200 is destroyed by welding or the like). In this way, the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 can be protected by the surface cover portion 7110, so that the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 will not malfunction due to mischief or the like. is suppressed.

Further, an opening 7120a for exposing the connector 7002 mounted on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 is formed in a part of the back surface cover portion 7120 covering the back surface (rear surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the connector 7002 is mounted. formed. As described above, since the substrate 7200 is fixed to the surface cover portion 7110 in close contact with the surface cover portion 7110 so that only one LED is arranged in the through portion 7110a, the back surface of the substrate 7200 (rear surface) is required. ) side, and the light from the LED 7001 does not leak from the opening 7120a that exposes the connector 7002 formed in the rear cover portion 7120. As shown in FIG.

As described above, in this example, the light-emitting decorative body provided with the LED that controls light emission in relation to the variable effect is formed of translucent resin, and is designed to emit surface light by the light emitted from the LED. . On the other hand, the case 7100 of the dot matrix display device 7000 is colored opaque white without translucency (other than white may be used as long as it is opaque without translucency, for example, black, navy blue, dark green, etc.). The light from the LED 7001 can be seen only from the through portion 7110a, and the light from the LED 7001 cannot be seen from other parts of the case 7100. . In addition, the front cover portion 7110 and the back cover portion 7120 of the case 7100 are firmly adhered (welded) in close contact with each other without a gap, and light leakage from the joint portion between the front cover portion 7110 and the back cover portion 7120 is prevented. suppressed. In this way, the case 7100 housing the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display device 7000, which individually controls light emission to display important information related to the progress of the game (for example, special lottery results), is formed of a non-translucent resin. etc., while accommodating a circuit board mounted with LEDs whose light emission is controlled by a predetermined number of LED units (each group consisting of a predetermined number of LEDs) and does not display important information related to the progress of the game. is made of transparent resin or the like, it is possible to determine whether or not the defective light emitting means such as an LED displays important information, and whether or not the LED control unit (a predetermined number of LEDs is controlled for each) or whether it is controlled independently), etc., can be easily determined from the appearance, and if a problem occurs in the light emitting means that displays important information related to the progress of the game, it will be possible to respond quickly. It is possible to prevent a decline in amusement interest.

Further, the front cover portion 7110 and the back cover portion 7120 of the case 7100 are firmly adhered by welding or the like so that the substrate 7200 cannot be taken out of the case 7100 unless at least part of the case 7100 is destroyed. It's becoming Further, as described above, the main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and after destroying one of the plurality of sealing mechanisms to open the main control board box 1320, can close the main control board box 1320 using a different sealing mechanism. On the other hand, the case 7100 of this example does not have such a sealing mechanism, and once the case 7100 is partially destroyed and the case 7100 is taken out, the case 7100 cannot be returned to its original state. there is In this manner, the substrate 7200 is enclosed and protected by the case 7100 from which the substrate 7200 cannot be taken out (exposed) unless at least a portion thereof is destroyed, so that the LED 7001 having an important function is physically destroyed. can be suppressed. On the other hand, a light-emitting decorative body (back and bottom center) housing a circuit board mounted with LEDs whose light emission is controlled in units of a predetermined number of LEDs (each group consisting of a predetermined number of LEDs) and does not display important information related to the progress of the game Rotating decoration 3310, back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, back rear left rotating decoration 3510, back rear right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back upper front rotating decoration 3410, back upper front decoration 3421 , back left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.) are formed detachably (reversibly) by screwing or the like so that the circuit board can be taken out without destroying the light emitting decoration. It's becoming As a result, electronic components (such as LEDs) mounted on the board 7200 housed in the case 7100 housing the circuit board on which the LEDs displaying important information are mounted are physically difficult to be destroyed, and the important information is displayed. It is now possible to prevent information from disappearing, and to replace the light-emitting decorative body containing the circuit board on which the LED that does not display important information is immediately replaced in the event of a problem with the electronic component (LED, etc.). ing.

Further, in the dot matrix display device 7000 of this example, the LED 7001 provided in the case 7100 has a preset constant luminance, and the effect operation section 301 (rotation operation section 302, pressing operation section 303) is operated. However, the brightness adjustment, which will be described later, cannot be performed. As a result, the brightness of the LED 7001, which has an important function, can be kept constant, and important information such as information related to the profit of the player can be reliably transmitted. As for the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information even under the specific conditions described above, the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, the door frame right side LEDs provided on the side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, the dish upper left decoration substrate 273, the dish upper right decoration substrate 278, the dish upper center The LED provided on the decoration substrate 314 may also be included.), the light emission may be controlled without turning off.

In addition, when a specific ready-to-win effect is executed in the display effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600 may be turned off. When the driving motor 3352 rotates the lifting arm 3357 to move the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 from the lowered position to the raised position, the upper back rotary decoration 3440 is moved to the appearing position below the front upper back decoration 3421 . , the back-left rotating decorative body 3510 is moved to the first appearance position or the second appearing position to the right of the back-front-left effect unit 3700, the back-right rotating decorative body 3610 is moved to the back-front right effect. When moving to the first appearance position or second appearance position on the left side of the unit 3800, and by moving the slide guide 3130 downward by the rear rear drive motor 3126, the lock by the lock member 3134 is released and the rear rear is movable. When the decoration 3110 is dropped from the retreat position to the appearance position, the LED mounted on the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 and the back top front decoration board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400 The mounted LED, the LED mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810, the LED mounted on the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom right effect unit 3250, The LED mounted on the bottom left decoration board 3203 of the bottom left effect unit 3200 may be extinguished. In front of the effect display device 1600, there are movable decorations (lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, upper back rear rotating decoration 3440, back left rotating decoration 3510, back right rotating decoration 3610, and rear back movable decoration 3110. ), by turning off the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600, the effect executed by the movable decorative body appearing in front of the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized. can be prevented. In this case, the dot matrix display 7000 may continue to be controlled to emit light without being turned off. As a result, important information such as information related to the player's profit can be displayed even under specific conditions, so that the player or the like is not disadvantaged.

In this example, not only when a specific ready-to-win effect is executed, an error state such as detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch occurs, LED mounted on the back front left decoration board 3714 of the left decoration unit 3710, LED mounted on the back top front decoration board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400, back front right decoration of the back front right decoration unit 3810 LED mounted on the substrate 3814, LED mounted on the back bottom right decoration substrate 3253 of the back bottom right effect unit 3250, LED mounted on the back bottom left decoration substrate 3203 of the back bottom left effect unit 3200, movable LEDs provided on the decorations (lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, upper back rotating decoration 3440, back left rotating decoration 3510, back right rotating decoration 3610, and rear back movable decoration 3110), Even when at least some of the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 are turned off, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and at least some of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the LED 7001 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 are controlled to emit light without turning off. As a result, when an error occurs, for example, at least some of the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 are turned off, and at least some of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are turned off during normal operation. It notifies that an error state has occurred (for example, that the door frame 3 is open) by controlling light emission in a different error mode (for example, flashing light with higher brightness than usual in a short time). , display (for example, "abnormal occurrence!") to notify that the effect display device 1600 is in an error state, or output an audio message that an error state has occurred (for example, "The door is open ”, “Pull out the ball”, etc.), while the LED 7001 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 is controlled to emit light without turning off. Interruption of the game can be suppressed, and by continuing the update display (fluctuation display) of the dot matrix display 7000, it is possible to prevent anxiety and distrust that the special lottery result is not displayed. can.

It should be noted that whether or not to turn off the dot matrix display 7000 may be changed according to the type of error state (degree of urgency). When the opening of the door frame 3 is detected, when a vibration sensor (not shown) detects the vibration of the game board 5 continuously for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) (an action such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 is being performed) is detected), when a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input (when it is detected that the plate 202 is filled with game balls B), a detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is input (an error with a low possibility that the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a, etc.) is provided in the dot matrix display 7000. While the progress of the game is not interrupted by controlling the light emission without extinguishing the LED 7001 that is present, errors that have a serious effect on the game (serious errors: when radio wave irradiation is detected, when magnets are detected, second When the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401 is input when the starting opening 2004 is not open, the first big winning opening sensor 2402 or the second big winning when not in the big winning game state or the small winning game state When a detection signal is input from the mouth sensor 2601, and when there is a high possibility that a goto act is being performed), by controlling the dot matrix display 7000 to turn off, a variable effect is executed. In this way, the control state of the dot matrix display 7000 can be changed according to the degree of the error, and the player and the game parlor are not disadvantaged. You can choose not to give.

In addition, when an error state occurs, depending on the type of the error state, the effect display device 1600 displays the error state, and the LED provided on the door frame 3 is turned on in the error mode. Either one of the notification by light emission control and the notification of the occurrence of an error state by voice output may be executed, or any combination of the two may be executed. or all. For example, when a minor error with a small effect on the game occurs, the effect display device 1600 displays an error state, and the LED provided on the door frame 3 emits light in an error mode. Either one or a combination of two of notification by control and notification of the occurrence of an error state by voice output is executed, and a serious error that seriously affects the game occurs In this case, the effect display device 1600 displays an error state, a notification by controlling light emission of the LED provided on the door frame 3 in an error mode, and an error by voice output. Notification that a state has occurred may be executed.

Also, the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 . As a result, compared to the case where the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 performs control based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems (such as display of content different from what should be displayed). , it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. Further, as described above, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the peripheral control unit steady-state processing every 33.3 ms, whereas the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the main control side timer interrupt processing every 4 ms. , the display content of the dot matrix display 7000 is updated at a shorter cycle than when the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the dot matrix display 7000 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. Even if a problem occurs and a different content is displayed on the dot matrix display 7000, the display content is updated immediately (after 4 ms) to restore the original display content. It can be changed and does not give disadvantages to players. That is, for the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information (high importance), the control signal is output at a shorter period than the light emitting decoration that does not display important information (low importance), and the light emitting means ( Since the light emission mode of the LEDs) is updated, even if there is a problem with the display content (the light emission mode of the LEDs 7001) of the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information, the display content can be immediately changed to normal display content. This light can prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the display of different contents. Further, when the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to control the dot matrix display 7000 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 Although there is a possibility that a communication error may occur and the information indicated by the dot matrix display 7000 (the light emitting state of the LED 7001) may be defective, in this example, the main control board 1310 directly controls the dot matrix display 7000, so that the peripheral Compared to the case where the peripheral control MPU of the control board 1510 controls the dot matrix display 7000, the information (the light emitting state of the LED 7001) displayed by the dot matrix display 7000 is less likely to have problems, which is disadvantageous to the player. can be suppressed.

Further, the translucent film 7300 is adhered to the surface cover portion 7110 of the case 7100 as described above. As shown in FIG. 257(A), the translucent film 7300 is composed of a translucent sheet, and the area around the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the case 7100 is printed in opaque black (limited to black). First, the color (dark color or the like) may be applied so that the light emission state in the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a can be easily visually recognized, so that the light does not transmit therethrough. On the other hand, the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a is not printed in black and is in a translucent state having translucency. As a result, when the LED 7001 is caused to emit light and the region corresponding to the through portion 7110a emits surface light, the area corresponding to the through portion 7110a appears dark like a shadow. By contrasting the region and the periphery of the region corresponding to the through portion, it becomes easier to visually recognize the surface emission of the region corresponding to the through portion 7110a (light emission state of the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200), and the dot matrix display 7000 can be used in various ways. By clearly displaying characters, symbols, graphics, etc., important information such as information related to the player's interests can be reliably conveyed. In addition, by providing regions that do not transmit light between the regions that emit surface light corresponding to the penetrating portions 7110a, it is possible to suppress interference of light emitted from the plurality of penetrating portions 7110a when the LED 7001 emits light. Even when light of different colors is emitted from each of the through portions 7110a of the LED 7001, it is possible to suppress the mixing of the emitted light of various colors and make the individual colors clearly visible. Since the regions corresponding to the penetrating portions 7110a that are surface-light-emitting by light can be identified as separate light-emitting regions, various characters, symbols, graphics, and the like can be clearly displayed. By forming at least the surface cover portion 7110 itself of the case 7100 with dark resin such as black without providing the translucent film 7300, the light emitted from the through portion 7110a when the LED 7001 emits light can be easily seen. In this case also, various characters, symbols, graphics, etc. can be clearly displayed on the dot matrix display 7000, so that important information such as information related to the profit of the player can be displayed. can be conveyed with certainty.

Note that the front surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) and back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 are divided into a first region and a second region by a predetermined imaginary line. The LEDs 7001 may be mounted only on one of the first region and the second region on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, or the second region on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 may be mounted. A dark-colored (black in this example) insulating film with low reflection efficiency is formed not only on one of the regions 1 and 2 where the LED 7001 is mounted, but also on the other region where the LED 7001 is not mounted. You may do so. For example, as shown in FIG. 259, a substrate 7200 having a black insulating film formed on its surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) is defined by a virtual line X as a mounting area where LEDs 7001 are mounted on its surface (LED mounting surface, front surface). , and a non-mounted area where the LED 7001 is not mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface).

Alternatively, the connector 7002 may be arranged in a non-mounted area on the back surface (LED non-mounted surface) of the substrate 7200. In this case, a virtual line in the non-mounted area on the back surface (LED non-mounted surface) of the substrate 7200 A connector 7002 may be arranged near the end on the far side from X. As described above, the substrate 7200 is accommodated in the case 7100, and the opening 7120a for exposing the connector is formed on the back side of the case 7100 (back cover portion 7120). Even if light enters the case 7100 through the opening 7120a, the opening 7120a is formed at a position away from the mounting area where the LED 7001 is mounted. Recognition of erroneous information can be suppressed. In addition, a black insulating film with low reflection efficiency is formed not only on the mounting area where the LED 7001 is mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, but also on the non-mounting area where the LED 7001 is not mounted. Even if the light entering the case 7100 from the portion 7120a passes through the through holes 7003 formed in the substrate 7200 and reaches the surface of the substrate 7200 (LED mounting surface, front surface), the black color formed in the unmounted area The insulating film can suppress the reflection of light and prevent it from entering the mounting area. As a result, light entering from outside the case 7100 can be prevented from entering the penetrating portion 7110a and erroneous information being recognized by the player.

In addition, a connector 7002 is arranged in an unmounted area near the end of the substrate 7200 farthest from the mounting area, and an opening 7120a is formed at a portion of the case 7100 corresponding to the connector 7002. It is possible to suppress the entering light from reaching the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 through the through holes 7003 formed in the mounting area of the substrate 7200 .

In the above example, the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is not mounted with bright electronic components. It may be mounted with colored electronic components. In this case, a bright electronic component is provided at a position away from the LED 7001, and a black insulating film is formed on the surface (LED mounting surface, surface) of the substrate 7200 around the bright electronic component. Therefore, even if light is reflected by a bright electronic component, further reflection is suppressed by a black insulating film formed in a non-mounted region on the surface of the substrate 7200 (LED mounting surface, front surface). It is possible to suppress light from entering the region, thereby suppressing the light entering from outside the case 7100 from entering the penetrating portion 7110a and recognizing erroneous information by the player.

[Example of rendering using a dot matrix display]
Next, an example of rendering using the dot matrix display 7000 described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 256, the dot matrix display 7000 is provided in the upper part inside the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . Important information relating to the progress of the game is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 260, when executing a variable effect with the effect display device 1600 based on the starting winning to the first starting port 2002 and the starting winning to the second starting port 2004, the dot matrix display In 7000 as well, the display contents are updated (variably displayed). Then, when a predetermined period (fluctuation time) elapses after the update display of the display contents on the dot matrix display 7000 is started, a predetermined mode is displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 261(A) and 261(B), information related to winning or losing such as "big win", "losing", etc. is displayed when the variable time elapses. In this way, the dot matrix display device 7000 of this example is provided with a circuit board on which LEDs are mounted, and is different from the light emission decoration or the like that controls light emission in relation to the above-described variation effect. , second special lottery result) can be discriminated (at least, it is sufficient if different contents are displayed in the case of a big hit and in the case of a loss). In other words, the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is determined from the light emission mode of the light emitting decorative body, etc., which is provided with a circuit board on which LEDs are mounted and which is controlled to emit light in relation to the variable effect. While it is difficult to determine the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) from the light emission mode of the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 is possible. In addition, when some condition is satisfied (for example, when executing a jackpot confirmation effect that notifies that the jackpot is confirmed before deriving the special lottery result), a circuit board on which an LED is mounted is provided. The special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) may be controlled so as to be discriminable from the light emission mode of the light-emitting decorative body or the like that is controlled to emit light in relation to the variable effect. However, in the dot matrix display 7000, the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) can always be determined from the light emission mode of the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 regardless of the specific conditions. Even if a circuit board on which LEDs are mounted is provided and there is a problem with the light emission mode of the light emission decoration body or the like that controls light emission in connection with the above-mentioned variable effect, the special lottery result ( 1st special lottery result, 2nd special lottery result) can be discriminated, so that the player or the like is not disadvantaged.

Also, the dot matrix display 7000 displays the types of jackpots (15R jackpot, 5R jackpot, 2R jackpot) during the jackpot game state. In addition, when it is time saving, it may be displayed to that effect, or when it is a high probability state, it may be displayed to that effect.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, a game aiming at entering a game ball to the second start port 2004 during time saving (low probability time saving state (also referred to as time saving state), high probability time saving state (also referred to as variable state)) (So-called "right-handed hitting") is performed. In addition, when the time is reduced, the second starting port 2004 is frequently opened, and the start winning (to the first starting port 2002 winning of the game ball, winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004) becomes easier, so the state is advantageous to the player. However, this advantageous state cannot be enjoyed when the player does not play a game aiming at entering the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 (so-called "right-handed hitting") during time saving. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, as shown in FIG. 261(C), the player performs a game (so-called "right-handed hitting") aiming at entering the game ball into the second start port 2004 during time saving. "Right hitting →" is displayed as a notification display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to enjoy an advantageous state in spite of the fact that the time is short, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In this way, the dot matrix display 7000 of this example displays important information related to the game, unlike the light-emitting ornaments, etc., which are provided with a circuit board on which LEDs are mounted and which control light emission in relation to the above-described variable effects. It is designed to Further, as described above, the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 on which the LEDs 7001 are mounted is an insulating film of a color different from that of the circuit substrate provided in the light emitting decoration or the like and on which the LEDs are mounted. is formed (resist processing), whether or not it is a circuit board on which LEDs are mounted for displaying important information related to the game by the color of the LED mounting surface when the LED mounting surface of the LED is visually recognized can be easily determined.

Although the dot matrix display 7000 is arranged inside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in this example, it may be arranged outside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 . This increases the degree of freedom in designing the inner regions of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and provides structures and movable objects to enhance decorativeness and presentation effects.

By the way, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, there is a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game balls B supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout base unit 550 for paying out the game balls B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player side. a unit 560; In addition, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and a door frame for the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600. 3 side or a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the board unit 620 side (see FIG. 4).

In addition, the game balls B supplied to the payout base unit 550 and the payout unit 560 are easily charged by moving downstream while rubbing against each other. There is a possibility that trouble will occur in the arranged light emitting means (LED, etc.). In this example, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 directly controls the LED 7001 mounted on the board 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information related to the game, and the display content (LED 7001 Therefore, even if the display content of the dot matrix display device 7000 is defective due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, the content can be immediately updated to the correct content, and the display can be improved to the player. It is designed not to give disadvantage.

In this way, the areas near the payout base unit 550 and the payout unit 560 are susceptible to noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but in this example, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 By updating the display contents of the dot matrix display 7000 in a short period of time (4 ms), it is possible to display areas susceptible to noise, such as the front view of the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The dot matrix display 7000 can be arranged even in the upper left area or the lower left area when viewed from the front. That is, the dot-matrix display device 7000 of this example can perform display without giving disadvantage to the player even if it is arranged in an area susceptible to noise.

According to the above-described embodiment, a plurality of light-emitting means (light-emitting decorations (lower back middle rotating decorations 3310, upper back rotating decorations 3310, back upper rear rotating decorations, 3440, back left rotating decoration 3510, back right rotating decoration 3610, back back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotating decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right LED provided on the decorative body 3813 etc.), LED provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, The LEDs provided on the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the LEDs provided on the dish top left decorative substrate 273, the dish top right decorative substrate 278, and the dish center top decorative substrate 314 are also included. ), a dot matrix display device 7000, a function display unit 1400, an effect display device 1600, etc.), and a plurality of light emitting means are divided into separate systems for each light emitting means, and light emission is controlled individually. Means (dot matrix display device 7000, function display unit 1400) and second light emitting means (light emitting decorations (back and bottom center rotary decoration Body 3310, back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, back rear left rotating decoration 3510, back rear right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back upper front rotating decoration 3410, back upper front decoration 3421, back LEDs provided on the front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.), LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, the door The LEDs provided on the frame top center decoration substrate 455 , the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 , and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are also provided on the dish top left decoration substrate 273 , the dish top right decoration substrate 278 , and the dish top center decoration substrate 314 . LED may also be included.)), and the color of the mounting surface of the circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted and the circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted In order to make them different, by looking at the color of the mounting surface of the circuit board, it is possible to determine the control unit of the light emitting means mounted on the board. A circuit board on which light-emitting means that plays a role is mounted (substrate 7200 provided in dot matrix display 7000, substrate 7200 provided in function display unit 1400) function display board) and other circuit boards (light-emitting decorations (back bottom center rotating decoration 3310, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, back rear movable decorative body 3110, back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.), the LED provided in the door frame 3 Circuit boards to be mounted (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, The plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may also be included. )) and ) have different colors on their mounting surfaces, making it easier to determine whether a malfunctioning light emitting means is an important light emitting means or not. Since it becomes possible to play games, it is possible to suppress the decline in game interest.

In addition, the first light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode in which the special lottery result can be determined, the second light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode in which the special lottery result cannot be determined, and the circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted. The mounting surface of is a special color (black) different from the color (white) of the mounting surface of the circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted, so the defective light emitting means plays an important role. It becomes easy to determine whether or not.

A first substrate case (a case 7100 that houses the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000, a box that houses the function display substrate of the function display unit) that houses the circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted, and a second light emitter. A second substrate case that accommodates a circuit board on which the means is mounted (the plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, the plate upper right decorative body 276, the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side unit 400 Door frame left side decoration body 404, door frame right side decoration body 419 of door frame right side unit 410, door frame top decoration body 453 of door frame top unit 450, back top front rotary decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421 , back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, back bottom left rotation decoration 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration 3251, back bottom middle rotation decoration 3310, back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, etc.), and the first substrate case is a first body portion (a case 7100 that accommodates the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display device 7000, a function display unit a box housing the function display board), and a first display section (the through portion 7110a of the case 7100, the LED insertion hole of the box housing the function display board) capable of determining the light emitting state of the first light emitting means. , and the second substrate case includes a second main body formed of a translucent material (upper left plate decoration 271 of plate unit 200, upper right plate decoration 276, upper center plate of production operation unit 300). Decoration body 312a, door frame left side decoration body 404 of door frame left side unit 400, door frame right side decoration body 419 of door frame right side unit 410, door frame top decoration body 453 of door frame top unit 450, back top front Rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, back bottom left rotation decoration 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration 3251, back bottom middle rotation decoration 3310, Since it has the back upper front rotary decoration body 3410, the back upper front decoration body 3421, etc.), it is possible to determine whether or not the light emitting means plays an important role as a control unit for the light emitting means depending on whether or not the substrate case is translucent. becomes easier.

The first board case becomes a state in which the circuit board can be detached by breaking a part of the first board case, and the second board case allows the circuit board to be removed without breaking a part of the second board case. can be detached, and the circuit board cannot be detached unless a part of the first board case is destroyed, so that physical destruction of the light emitting means, which plays an important role, can be suppressed. On the other hand, the less important light emitting means can be physically replaced easily.

First light-emitting means (light-emitting decorations (back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back rear left rotating decoration 3510, back rear right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back top front rotating decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.) LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top The LED provided on the right decorative substrate 457, the LED provided on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may also be included.)) and the first light emitting means. First circuit board to be mounted (luminous decoration (lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, upper back rotating decoration 3440, back left rotating decoration 3510, back right rotating decoration 3610, back movable decoration 3110 , back upper front rotary decoration 3410, back upper front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.), a circuit for mounting the LED provided on the door frame 3 Substrates (in this example, at least the door frame left side decoration substrate 402, the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457; It may also include a decorative substrate 273, an upper right plate decorative substrate 278, and an upper plate central decorative substrate 314.)), and second light emitting means (dot matrix display) capable of individually controlling light emission to display a predetermined light emission mode. device 7000, function display unit 1400), and a second circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted (substrate 7200 provided in dot matrix display device 7000, function display substrate provided in function display unit 1400), A white insulating film is formed on the mounting surface of the first circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted, and a dark insulating film is formed on the mounting surface of the second circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted. Therefore, the reflection efficiency of the first circuit board is increased, and a decrease in luminance when the first light emitting means emits light can be suppressed. In addition, since a dark-colored insulating film is formed on the second circuit board on which the second light-emitting means that are individually controlled to emit light is mounted, reflection is suppressed and individual light emission is suppressed by contrast with the mounting surface of the dark-colored insulating film. can be clearly seen.

Each light emitting means is partitioned into a cylindrical shape by a suppressing member (a penetrating portion 7110a of the case 7100 and an LED insertion hole in a box housing a function display board) that suppresses interference of colors emitted by each of the plurality of light emitting means of the second light emitting means. ), the diffusion and interference of the luminescent colors are suppressed, and the luminescent colors of the plurality of light emitting means can be easily identified individually.

It further comprises a board case for housing the second circuit board (a case 7100 for housing the board 7200 of the dot matrix display device 7000 and a box body for housing the function display board of the function display unit), and the board case comprises a plurality of light emitting means. A display portion (the through portion 7110a of the case 7100, an LED insertion hole in the box housing the function display board) that can determine the light emission state, and a dark display auxiliary portion formed around the display portion (the Since the translucent film 7300 has an opaque black surrounding area corresponding to the penetrating part 7110a, and a black function indicating seal having a black surrounding transparent part, the display area can be compared with the display auxiliary area. It becomes easy to determine the light emitting state of the light emitting means in.

A game board 5 on which a game is played, a frame (door frame 3) provided in front of the game board 5 and provided with a game window part (door window 101a) for making the game board 5 visible, and the frame A plurality of frame side light emitting means provided on the body (door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457, may also include the LEDs provided on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314), and the game window provided on the game board. A plurality of board-side light-emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400, light-emitting decorations (lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, upper back rear rotating decoration 3440, back left rotating decoration 3510) visible through the part , back right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back top front rotating decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.) When a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of frame-side light-emitting means are caused to emit light with higher luminance than usual, and at least a specific board-side light emission among the plurality of board-side light-emitting means is provided. Means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) is made to emit light while maintaining normal luminance. A light-emitting substrate (substrate 7200, function display substrate) to be mounted, and partitioning members (penetrating portion 7110a of case 7100, box-shaped LED housing function display substrate) for partitioning each of the plurality of light-emitting elements mounted on the light-emitting substrate. Each light-emitting means is partitioned into a cylindrical shape by the insertion hole for the light-emitting device). Even in a situation where the side light emitting means emits light with high luminance, it is easy to determine the state of light emission by the specific board side light emitting means.

When a specific condition is established, a predetermined number of board-side light-emitting means (light-emitting decorations (back side)) excluding specific board-side light-emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) among a plurality of board-side light-emitting means Middle rotary decoration 3310, back upper rear rotary decoration 3440, back rear left rotary decoration 3510, back rear right rotary decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back upper front rotary decoration 3410, back upper front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.) are turned off, so that the brightness in the game window can be reduced, and a specific It becomes easy to determine the light emitting state of the board side light emitting means.

A dark color with low reflection efficiency is applied around the area of the light emitting substrate where the light emitting element is arranged and partitioned by the partitioning means (around the area corresponding to the through portion 7110a of the substrate 7200, around the area corresponding to the function display substrate). is formed, even if the light emitted from the light emitting element leaks out of the region partitioned by the partitioning member, the diffusion of the light can be suppressed, and the dark insulating film and the It becomes possible to visually recognize more clearly by the contrast of .

Receives a predetermined control signal, and emits light in a light emission mode based on the received control signal. decoration 3510, back right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back top front rotating decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.) LEDs provided, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457 LEDs provided , and may also include the LEDs provided on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314.) and information of higher importance than the first light emitting means. and a second light emitting means (dot matrix display device 7000, function display unit 1400) that can be obtained, and the control signal is output in different cycles between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, so that when a problem occurs Moreover, it is possible to prevent both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means from emitting light in a light emission mode different from the original light emission mode.

A first light emission control means for outputting a control signal to the first light emission means (a portion for controlling light emission of the light emitting decoration by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510), and a second light emission control for outputting the control signal to the second light emission means. means (a portion that controls light emission of the dot matrix display 7000 and the function display unit 1400 by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310), and the second light emission means is controlled at a shorter cycle than the first light emission control means. Since the signal is output, it is possible to prevent the information represented by the second light emitting means from being defective.

The first light emission control means controls light emission of the first light emission means in a manner in which it is difficult to determine the result of the special lottery, the second light emission control means controls light emission of the second light emission means in a manner in which the result of the special lottery can be determined, To control the light emission of the second light emitting means, which is more important than the first light emitting means, by outputting a control signal in a shorter period than the first light emitting means by controlling the light emission in a manner in which the result of the lottery process can be determined. , it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the occurrence of a problem in the information displayed by the second light emitting means.

A game control means (main control MPU of the main control board 1310) for controlling the progress of the game including the first light emission control means, and a second light emission control means for controlling the performance based on the command from the game control means. A production control means (peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510) is further provided, and the first light emission means is controlled by the game control means, and the second light emission means is controlled by the production control means. can be reliably suppressed.

A game control means (main control MPU of the main control board 1310) that controls the progress of the game, and a plurality of light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, Function display unit 1400, luminous decoration (lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, upper back rear rotating decoration 3440, back left rotating decoration 3510, back right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back upper front rotary decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.), door frame left side decoration substrate 402, door frame right side decoration substrate 418 , the LEDs provided on the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457; The plurality of light emitting means are mounted on different circuit boards according to their uses (performance use, game state and special display result notification use). , the first circuit board (the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, the function display substrate), and light-emitting means used for a second application different from the first application (light-emitting decorations (lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, upper back rear rotating decoration 3440, back left rotating decoration 3510, back right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back top front rotating decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.) LEDs, LEDs provided on door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457; The second circuit board (light-emitting decoration (rear-lower-middle rotating decoration 3310 , Back top rear rotating decoration 3440 Back back left rotation decoration 3510 Back back right rotation decoration 3610 Back back movable decoration 3110 Back top front rotation decoration 3410 Back top front decoration 3421 Back front left A circuit board provided on the decorative body 3713, the back front right decorative body 3813, etc.), a circuit for mounting the LED provided on the door frame 3 Substrates (in this example, at least the door frame left side decoration substrate 402, the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457; A decorative substrate 273, a top right plate decorative substrate 278, and a top center plate decorative substrate 314 may also be included. )) and ) have different mounting surfaces, the reflection efficiency of the light emitting means can be increased or decreased depending on the application. For example, it is possible to prevent wrong information from being conveyed to the player by making the circuit board desired to enhance reflection efficiency bright and the circuit board desired to suppress diffusion of light dark.

The light emitting means mounted on the first circuit board is used to enhance the presentation effect, and the light emitting means mounted on the second circuit board is used to display information related to the lottery results. By forming a dark-colored insulating film on the surface of the second circuit board that displays predetermined information, interference of light can be suppressed, and notification of erroneous information can be suppressed.

A white insulating film is formed on the surface of the first circuit board, and a dark insulating film is formed on the surface of the second circuit board. By forming a white insulating film on the surface of the first circuit board, the reflection efficiency of the light emitting means can be increased, so that the luminance of the light emitting means mounted on the first circuit board during light emission can be increased, Enhances the performance effect. On the other hand, by forming a dark-colored insulating film on the surface of the second circuit board for displaying information related to the lottery result, it is possible to suppress the diffusion and interference of the light emitted from each of the light emitting means. The light emitting state of each light emitting means becomes clear, and misunderstanding and transmission of information related to the result of the lottery can be suppressed.

A first circuit board comprising a game board 5 having a front surface formed with a game area 5a on which game balls roll, and rail members (an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002) defining the front surface of the game board 5. is arranged in the inner area of the rail member, and the second circuit board is arranged in the outer area of the rail member. It is possible to enhance the presentation effect by increasing the light reflection efficiency in the inner region of the member.

A plurality of light-emitting means (light-emitting decorations (lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, back left rotating decoration body 3510, back right rotating decoration 3610, back back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotating decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.) LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 , and the LEDs provided on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the LEDs provided on the dish upper left decorative substrate 273, the dish upper right decorative substrate 278, and the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 may also be included.), dot matrix a display 7000, a function display unit 1400, an effect display device 1600, etc.), the plurality of light emitting means are divided into a plurality of light emitting units, and the plurality of light emitting units emit light simultaneously. When controlled, the first light emitting unit (light emitting decoration (lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, upper back rear rotating decoration 3440, back left left rotating decoration 3510, back right right rotating decorative body 3610, back movable decorative body 3110, back top front rotating decorative body 3410, back top front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.), door frame 3 LEDs (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, and may also include the LEDs provided on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314.)), and light emission control of a plurality of light emitting means at the same time. and a second light-emitting unit (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) that is identifiable for each light-emitting state when the light-emitting means are mounted on the surface of the first circuit board on which the plurality of light-emitting means are mounted. a first insulating film (a light-colored insulating film such as white) formed of a first insulating paint; and the electrical component formed on the first insulating film and mounted on the first circuit board. Attributes of the LED, such as the part number of the LED and the area indicating the position where the LED is arranged (furthermore, the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, etc.) size, LED mounting orientation (mounting direction), and LED type. ) is formed (including foil removal and silk printing with an insulating paint different in color from the first insulating paint)), and the second in which the plurality of light emitting means are mounted. The surface of the circuit board is characterized in that only the second insulating film (insulating film of dark color such as black) is formed by the second insulating paint without forming the writing portion. As a result, only the second insulating film made of the second insulating paint is formed without forming a marking portion on the surface of the second circuit board on which the second light-emitting units whose individual light-emitting states are made visible are mounted. Therefore, the reflection efficiency on the surface of the second circuit board can be made uniform. In addition, when only the second insulating film is formed on the surface of the second circuit board with the second insulating paint of a dark color, the interference of light is suppressed and the individual light emitting states are made clear. , which facilitates identification of individual light-emitting states.

Alternatively, the first insulating paint may be of a light color, and the marking portion may be formed of a light color different from that of the first insulating paint. As a result, a coating film of a light-colored insulating paint is formed on the surface of the first circuit board, and a light-colored notation portion different from the light-colored insulating paint is formed on the coating film. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the reflection efficiency on the surface of the substrate due to the marking portion, and to specify the electric component mounted on the first circuit board by the marking portion. As a result, it is possible to specify the electric parts mounted on the first circuit board without lowering the luminance of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the first circuit board, thereby improving the effect of the game presentation. It is possible to make it possible to suppress the decline of game interest.

Alternatively, the first insulating paint may be white and the marking portion may be yellow. As a result, the marking portion is formed in yellow, which is close in reflection efficiency to the white of the insulating paint formed on the surface of the first circuit board. It becomes possible to specify the electrical component mounted on the circuit board, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the brightness of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means. As a result, the effect of the game presentation can be improved, and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

Alternatively, the second insulating paint may be dark-colored, and a dark-colored second insulating film may be formed on the surface of the second circuit board. As a result, a coating film of a dark-colored insulating paint is formed on the surface of the second circuit board, while the marking portion is not formed, thereby suppressing an improvement in the reflection efficiency on the surface of the second circuit board due to the marking portion. becomes possible. As a result, interference of light on the surface of the second circuit board can be suppressed and individual light emission states can be clarified, thereby facilitating identification of individual light emission states.

Alternatively, the second insulating paint may be black, and a black second insulating film may be formed on the surface of the second circuit board. As a result, while a coating film of black insulating paint is formed on the surface of the second circuit board, the notation portion is not formed, thereby suppressing improvement in reflection efficiency on the surface of the second circuit board due to the notation portion. becomes possible. As a result, interference of light on the surface of the second circuit board can be suppressed to clarify each light emitting state, thereby facilitating identification of each light emitting state.

Also, a marking portion for specifying the electrical components mounted on the second circuit board may be formed on the back surface of the second circuit board on which the plurality of light emitting means are not mounted. Since the notation portion is formed on the back surface of the second circuit board, it is possible to specify the electrical component mounted on the second circuit board while suppressing a decrease in reflection efficiency on the front surface of the second circuit board.

Further, the marking portion formed on the back surface of the second circuit board may be formed in a color having a higher reflection efficiency than black. Since the notation portion formed in a color having a higher reflection efficiency than black is formed on the back surface of the second circuit board where the light emitting means is not mounted, the second circuit board does not have to improve the reflection efficiency on the front surface of the second circuit board. It is possible to specify the electrical components mounted on the two circuit boards, suppress the interference of light on the surface of the second circuit board, and clarify the individual light emission states, thereby making it possible to identify the individual light emission states. can facilitate identification.

In addition, the first circuit board cover covering at least the surface on which the plurality of light emitting means of the first circuit board is mounted (back bottom center rotating decoration 3310, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back rear left rotating decoration 3510, back Back right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back top front rotating decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, left side of door frame 3 inner lens 403, right side inner lens 415, etc.), and a second circuit board cover (surface cover part 7110) covering at least the surface of the second circuit board on which the plurality of light emitting means are mounted. A portion of the circuit board case corresponding to the surface of the first circuit board is made of a translucent material, and a portion of the second circuit board case corresponding to the surface of the second circuit board is made of a non-translucent material. In addition, a display section may be provided that enables determination of the light emitting state of each of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the second circuit board. Light is emitted over the entire area of the first circuit board case corresponding to the surface of the first circuit board by forming the part of the first circuit board case corresponding to the surface of the first circuit board with a light-transmitting material. can be decorated. In addition, a portion of the second circuit board case corresponding to the surface of the second circuit board is formed of a non-translucent material so that the light emitting state of each of the plurality of light emitting means can be determined from the display section. The interference of light from each of the light emitting means can be suppressed to clarify the individual light emitting state, thereby facilitating identification of the light emitting state of each of the plurality of light emitting means.

Further, the display portion of the second circuit board cover may have suppressing means for suppressing light interference by each of the plurality of light emitting means (each light emitting means is partitioned into a cylindrical shape). With this configuration, light interference on the surface of the second circuit board is suppressed, making it easier to individually identify the light emitting states of the plurality of light emitting means.

In addition, the second circuit board cover covers the surface cover portion (surface cover portion 7110) covering the surface of the second circuit board on which the plurality of light emitting means are mounted and the back surface of the second circuit board on which the plurality of light emitting means are not mounted. a back cover portion (back cover portion 7120) to accommodate the second circuit board; The second circuit board may be brought into a detachable state by destroying the second circuit board. As a result, the second circuit board cannot be removed unless part of the second circuit board case is destroyed, so the possibility of impairing the function of suppressing light interference is reduced.

A game machine performs a lottery for winning or not based on the establishment of a lottery condition, controls to a special game state advantageous to a player when the result of the lottery is a win, and has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs). and a back surface on which the plurality of light emitting means are not mounted (back front left decoration board 3714 of back front left decoration unit 3710, back top front decoration board 3422 of back top effect unit 3400 , back front right decoration board 3814 of back front right decoration body unit 3810, back bottom right decoration board 3253 of back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom left decoration board 3203 of back bottom left effect unit 3200, door frame left side decoration board 402 , door frame right side decoration substrate 418 , door frame top center decoration substrate 455 , door frame top left decoration substrate 456 , door frame top right decoration substrate 457 , substrate 7200 provided in dot matrix display 7000 , function display unit 1400 . A plurality of light-emitting substrates include a dark-colored light-emitting substrate (dot matrix display 7000) having an insulating film made of a dark-colored (black, green, dark blue, purple, etc.) insulating paint on at least the surface thereof. a substrate 7200 provided in the function display unit 1400, etc.), and a bright color (white, yellow, light blue, yellowish green, etc.) insulating film formed on at least the surface with an insulating paint. Light emitting substrate (back front left decoration substrate 3714 of back front left decoration unit 3710, back top front decoration substrate 3422 of back top effect unit 3400, back front right decoration substrate 3814 of back front right decoration unit 3810, back bottom right effect Back bottom right decoration board 3253 of unit 3250, back bottom left decoration board 3203 of back bottom left effect unit 3200, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame , and a connector (connector 7002) for connecting wiring to the dark light-emitting board only on the back surface of the dark light-emitting board. ) is arranged, and a connector for connecting wiring to the bright color light emitting substrate is arranged on the surface of the bright color light emitting substrate. With this configuration, the connector is not arranged on the front surface of the light emitting substrate where the insulating film is formed with the dark insulating paint, but by arranging the connector on the back surface, the reflection efficiency on the surface of the light emitting substrate is uniform. It becomes possible to clearly visually recognize the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means. As a result, the performance effect is improved, and the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

Alternatively, bright colored (white, light blue, yellow, yellowish green, etc.) connectors may be used. By arranging a light-colored connector on the back surface of the dark-colored light-emitting board, it is possible to connect the wiring to the dark-colored light-emitting board while suppressing the improvement of the reflection efficiency on the surface of the dark-colored light-emitting board. By making the connector arranged on the surface of the bright-colored light-emitting substrate bright, it becomes possible to connect wiring to the bright-colored light-emitting substrate while suppressing a decrease in reflection efficiency on the surface of the bright-colored light emitting substrate.

Alternatively, a black insulating paint may be used as the dark insulating paint. Since the insulating film of black insulating paint is formed on the surface of the dark light emitting substrate, light interference on the surface of the dark light emitting substrate can be suppressed. Further, by arranging the connector on the back surface, the reflection efficiency on the front surface of the dark light emitting substrate can be made uniform without being improved by the connector, and the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means can be clearly visually recognized.

Alternatively, a white insulating paint may be used as the bright insulating paint. Since an insulating film of white insulating paint is formed on the surface of the bright-color light-emitting substrate, the light reflection efficiency on the surface of the bright-color light-emitting substrate is improved compared to a conventional circuit board on which a green insulating film is formed. be able to. In addition, by making the connector arranged on the surface bright, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the reflection efficiency on the surface of the bright-color light-emitting substrate, and it is possible to increase the brightness of the light emitted by the plurality of light-emitting means.

Also, a white connector may be used. By arranging a white connector on the back surface of the dark light emitting substrate, the reflection efficiency on the front surface of the dark light emitting substrate can be made uniform without being improved by the connector, and the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means can be clearly visually recognized. . Further, by making the connector white, it becomes easy to identify the connector when a dark-colored insulating film is formed on the back surface of the dark-colored light-emitting substrate. In addition, since a white connector similar to the insulating film formed on the surface of the bright-color light-emitting substrate is arranged on the surface of the bright-color light-emitting substrate, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the reflection efficiency of the surface of the bright-color light emitting substrate due to the connector.

In addition, a dark-colored light-emitting substrate case (case 7100) that houses the dark-colored light-emitting substrate is further provided. A display portion (penetrating portion 7110a) may be provided to enable determination of the light emitting state of each of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the dark light emitting substrate. A portion corresponding to the surface of the dark-colored light-emitting substrate of the dark-colored light-emitting substrate case is formed of a material having no translucency so that the light-emitting state of each of the plurality of light-emitting devices can be determined from the display unit. It is possible to suppress the interference of the light and clarify the individual light emission state, thereby facilitating identification of the light emission state of each of the plurality of light emitting means.

In addition, the display section of the dark light emitting substrate case may have suppression means for suppressing interference of light from each of the plurality of light emitting means (each light emitting means is partitioned into a cylindrical shape by the penetrating portion 7110a). Interference of light on the surface of the dark light emitting substrate is suppressed, making it easier to individually identify the light emitting states of the plurality of light emitting means.

Moreover, the dark-colored light-emitting substrate case may be brought into a state in which the dark-colored light-emitting substrate can be detached by partially destroying the dark-colored light-emitting substrate case. Since the dark light emitting substrate cannot be removed without destroying a part of the dark light emitting substrate case, the possibility of impairing the function of suppressing light interference is reduced.

A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a game control means for controlling the progress of a game according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and a plurality of light emitting means capable of emitting light as the game progresses. (Luminous decoration (lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, upper back rear rotating decoration 3440, back left rotating decoration 3510, back right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back upper front rotating decoration 3410, back upper front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.), LED provided in the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decoration LEDs provided on substrate 402, door frame right side decoration substrate 418, door frame top center decoration substrate 455, door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and door frame top right decoration substrate 457, dish upper left decoration substrate 273, dish upper right decoration The substrate 278 may also include an LED provided on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314.), a dot matrix display 7000, a function display unit 1400, an effect display device 1600, etc.). The plurality of light-emitting means are mounted on different substrates depending on the purpose (whether the decorative body is to be illuminated by surface light emission, or to display various letters, symbols, figures, etc. by dot matrix display, etc.). Among the plurality of light emitting means, the first light emitting means is a first light emitting substrate (the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 and the substrate 7200 provided in the function display unit 1400) made of a black mounting surface with low light reflection efficiency. function display board, etc.), and the second light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means is a second light emitting board (rear front left side of the back front left decorative body unit 3710) made of a white mounting surface with high light reflection efficiency. Decoration substrate 3714, back top front decoration substrate 3422 of back top effect unit 3400, back front right decoration substrate 3814 of back front right decoration unit 3810, back bottom right decoration substrate 3253 of back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom left effect Back lower left decorative board 3203 of unit 3200, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, etc.), and the first light emitting substrate is housed in a white case body (case 7100) having high light reflection efficiency. As a result, the first light emitting substrate does not increase the reflection efficiency of its own light emission, but can increase the reflection efficiency of other light emission.

Further, the first light emitting means mounted on the first light emitting substrate can display the lottery result of the lottery means in a light emitting mode, and the second light emitting means mounted on the second light emitting substrate can display the lottery result of the lottery means. Before the first light emitting means displays the result of the lottery according to the light emission mode, it may be possible to execute a light emission effect according to the result of the lottery. By making the mounting surface of the first light emitting substrate, which displays the lottery result by the light emission mode, black with low light reflection efficiency, interference of light on the mounting surface of the first light emitting substrate is suppressed, and erroneous information is notified. can be suppressed.

[Tamper prevention measures for important boards]
As described above, in this example, the circuit board on which the light-emitting means that plays an important role in causing trouble in the progress of the game is mounted, in other words, the degree of importance is controlled by performing control directly related to the profit of the player. A black insulating film is formed on the surface of the high circuit board (in this example, the board 7200 provided in the dot matrix display device 7000, the function display board provided in the function display unit 1400, etc.). light-emitting decorations that do not display such information (may be rarely displayed) (lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, upper back rear rotating decoration 3440, back left left rotating decoration 3510, back right rotating decoration body 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back top front rotary decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.) and others such as those provided on the door frame 3 circuit board, in other words, a circuit board with a low degree of importance by performing control related to game performance that is not directly related to the player's profit 3440, back left rotating decoration 3510, back right rotating decoration 3610, back back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotating decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right Circuit boards provided on the decorative body 3813, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457, etc., which may also include the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314), a white insulating film is formed on the substrate surface.

Further, as described above, the dot matrix display device 7000 of this example is directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 . On the other hand, by performing control related to game performance that is not directly related to the player's profit, circuit boards with low importance Left rotating decoration 3510, back rear right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back top front rotating decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc. , door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457, etc. The upper left decorative board 273 of the plate, the upper right decorative board 278 of the plate, and the upper central plate decorative board 314 may also be included). It is designed to control.

That is, in this example, among the circuit boards on which LEDs that are provided on the game board 5 and emit light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 are mounted, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 directly controls the circuit board, In other words, a circuit board of high importance (in this example, the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000) is formed with a black insulating film, while a circuit board controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, in other words, Then, a circuit board with a low degree of importance (in this example, the back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, the back top rear rotating decoration 3440, the back rear left rotation decoration 3510, the back rear right rotation decoration 3610, the back rear movable decoration 3110, A white insulating film is formed on the circuit board provided on the back upper front rotating decoration 3410, the back upper front decoration 3421, the back front left decoration 3713, the back front right decoration 3813, and the like. .

Thus, in this example, the circuit board provided on the game board 5 and mounted with LEDs that emit light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. The insulation formed on the board surface determines whether the circuit board is of high importance or the circuit board of low importance controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 . It can be easily distinguished by the color of the membrane. Therefore, if it is determined that the circuit board is of high importance in the manufacturing process, etc., the circuit board will be thoroughly inspected so that when it is installed in the game machine, it will directly benefit the player. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious problems that are involved. On the other hand, since it can be easily determined that the circuit board has a high degree of importance, there is a possibility that the circuit board with a high degree of importance will be modified illegally. In this example, by making it difficult for the player to determine whether the circuit board has a high degree of importance, it is difficult to tamper with the circuit board having a high degree of importance.

Specifically, in the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display device 7000 described above, although a black insulating film is formed on the substrate surface (LED mounting surface), the above-described through holes are formed in the portion where the LED is mounted. Only a white insulating film is formed in a region corresponding to the portion 7110a (FIGS. 262(A) and (B)). A white insulating film is formed on the rear surface of the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display device 7000 (non-LED mounting surface). Note that FIGS. 262A and 262B show a state in which the translucent film 7300 is peeled off from the case 7100 for the sake of convenience. In addition, the translucent film 7300 is not limited to being attached to the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000, and may It may be affixed to a transparent member (resin, glass, etc.) to be placed.

In this example, in the area of the substrate 7200 that is visible through the penetrating portion 7110a and the opening portion 7120a formed in the case 7100, control related to game performance that is not directly related to the profit of the player is performed. Only a white insulating film is formed that is the same as or very similar to the insulating film formed on the less important circuit board. In this way, in the area of the substrate 7200 that is visible through the penetrating portion 7110a and the opening portion 7120a formed in the case 7100, only a white insulating film that is the same as or very similar to the less important circuit substrate is formed. As a result, the translucent film 7300 attached to the case 7100 is peeled off and the substrate 7200 accommodated in the case 7100 can be visually recognized through the through portion 7110a, or the translucent film 7300 is not attached. When a case 7100 that exposes a part of the substrate 7200 from the through portion 7110a is used, even if the substrate 7200 is visually recognized through the through portion 7110a and the opening 7120a formed in the case 7100, the importance is high. It is possible to prevent the player from noticing that it is a circuit board. However, on the surface of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is mounted (the front surface, the LED mounting surface), the white insulating film which is the same as or very similar to the insulating film formed on the less important circuit board occupies a higher proportion than the black insulating film. account for a higher percentage. Therefore, in the manufacturing process, the color of the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the board 7200 on which the LEDs 7001 are mounted makes it possible to immediately determine that the circuit board is of high importance, and sufficient inspection is performed. become.

Of the circuit boards provided on the game board 5 and mounted with LEDs that emit light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1, all the circuit boards directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 are colored white. is not limited to those on which insulating films of different colors (for example, black or green) are formed, and at least one circuit board among the circuit boards directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is white. Insulating films of different colors (for example, black or green) may be formed. A combination of two or more of a circuit board on which an insulating film is formed, a circuit board on which a green insulating film is formed, and a circuit board on which a white insulating film is formed may be included). In addition, among the circuit boards provided on the game board 5 and mounted with LEDs that irradiate light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1, all the circuit boards controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 are colored white. The insulating film is not limited to the one on which the insulating film is formed. At least one of the circuit boards controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 has an insulating film of a color different from black (eg, white, green, etc.). may be formed, or an LED non-mounting surface (back surface (rear surface)) of a circuit board on which an LED that is provided on the game board 5 and emits light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted may be formed with an insulating film of a color different from white (for example, black or green).

On the other hand, circuit boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (at least the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, but the payout control board 633 etc.) are circuit boards of high importance, and in this example, insulating films of the same color (green) are formed. A main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 is made of a transparent resin so that the main control board 1310 can be viewed from outside the main control board box 1320, and a peripheral control board box that houses the peripheral control board 1510. 1520 is made of transparent resin so that the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized from the outside of the peripheral control board box 1520 . In addition, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are provided with notation portions corresponding to the respective electronic components on the mounting surfaces of the electronic components. In this way, for the circuit boards of high importance such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, insulating films of the same (very similar) color are formed and the mounting surface of the electronic components is In the manufacturing process, it is easy to determine whether the circuit board is of high importance or not, and sufficient inspection is performed for the high importance circuit board. can be performed, and in the state provided on the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 after manufacture, even if the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized by the player, a plurality of machines arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 An insulating film of the same or very similar color is formed on the circuit board, and a marking portion corresponding to each electronic component is formed on the mounting surface of the electronic component, so that the mounting surface of the electronic component is substantially the same (at least As long as an insulating film of the same or very similar color is formed on the mounting surface of the electronic component, the color of the notation part (black, yellow, etc.) and the arrangement method (form for each electronic component, or multiple Formed collectively for electronic components, formed on the surface where electronic components are mounted, or formed on the back surface where electronic components are not mounted), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 Among the plurality of circuit boards to be placed in, it is difficult to determine which is the most important circuit board (main control board 1310, payout control board 633, etc.), and the circuit board with high importance (main control board 1310, payout control board 633, etc.) will be less likely to be tampered with.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the circuit board provided on the game board 5 and arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is formed with an insulating film of the same color (very similar color) to form a circuit having a high degree of importance. While it is difficult to distinguish whether it is a circuit board or a circuit board of low importance, a circuit mounted with an LED that is provided on the game board 5 and emits light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In the substrate, the color of the insulating film is made different so that it is possible to distinguish between a circuit substrate of high importance and a circuit substrate of low importance, while also being visible through the case (case 7100, etc.). By using the same color (very similar color) for the insulating film on each board, it is difficult for the player to notice whether the circuit board is of high importance or of low importance. In addition, the circuit board provided on the game board 5 and arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is also provided on the game board 5 and mounted with an LED that emits light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Similarly, the insulating film may be made to have different colors, but if the case (main control board box 1320, peripheral control board box 1520, etc.) is made opaque, it will be late to discover even if unauthorized modifications have been made. Since there is a risk that the damage will increase due to the It is desirable to house them in the main control board box 1320, the peripheral control board box 1520, etc.).

In the above example, the white insulating film is formed on the entire area of the back surface of the substrate 7200 (non-LED-mounted surface), but it is not limited to this. A white insulating film may be formed in the region corresponding to the opening 7120a exposing the connector 7002 (the region visible through the opening 7120a exposing the connector 7002). Insulating films of different colors (for example, black, green, etc.) may be formed. In addition, when openings and through-holes are formed in addition to the openings 7120a for exposing the connector 7002, a white insulating film is also formed on the regions corresponding to these openings and through-holes, and the openings are formed. Even if the back surface of the board 7200 (non-LED mounting surface) of the board 7200 is visible through the part or the through part, it is possible to show that the circuit board is of high importance by performing control directly related to the profit of the player. It may be arranged so that the person does not notice it.

In addition, in the substrate 7200, a color (in this example, white ) may be formed, or may be formed on a less important circuit board in a part of the neighboring region outside the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a when the substrate 7200 is accommodated in the case 7100. A white insulating film that is the same as or very similar to the insulating film to be formed may be formed in a predetermined form (for example, any shape, symbol, character, written portion, etc.). With this configuration, even if the substrate 7200 accommodated in the case 7100 is displaced and the area of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the through portion 7110a is changed, the black insulating film can be made less visible. , it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the circuit board is of high importance. also,

Further, as described above, the case 7100 that houses the substrate 7200 is made of a colored opaque white resin that does not transmit light. Further, on the surface (front) side of the case 7100, a translucent film 7300 in which a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a is translucent (in this example, has a cloudy frosted glass shape) is attached. The substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 cannot be directly viewed from the surface (front) side. As a result, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the circuit board is of high importance in the manufacturing process, and to sufficiently inspect the circuit board of high importance. The existence of a circuit board mounted with an LED for irradiating light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is concealed among the circuit boards having a high degree of importance in the state provided on the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1, and countermeasures are taken against this. Since unauthorized remodeling is made difficult, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the gaming machine from deteriorating.

In addition, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, etc., which are arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, are placed on at least the LED mounting surface (excluding at least the area corresponding to the through portion 7110a) of the board 7200 housed in the case 7100. It is also possible to form an insulating film of the same color (green) as or very similar to that of the circuit board of high importance. Then, among the circuit boards controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, at least the LED mounting surface of the circuit board on which the LED that is provided on the game board 5 and emits light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted By forming an insulating film of a color (white) different from that of the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, etc., in the manufacturing process, it becomes easy to determine whether or not the circuit board is of high importance. Therefore, it becomes possible to sufficiently inspect a circuit board having a high .DELTA.

In addition, the case 7100 that houses the substrate 7200 may be made of a white resin that is the same as or very similar to the insulating film formed on the less important circuit board, thereby making the case 7100 less important. It is possible to prevent the user from noticing that a circuit board of high importance is accommodated by recognizing that it is similar to a circuit board.

As described above, in the substrate 7200 accommodated in the case 7100 in this example, the region corresponding to the through portion 7110a is provided with a white insulating film that is the same as or very similar to the insulating film formed on the less important circuit board. Since only the film is formed, even if the translucent film 7300 is peeled off from the case 7100 and the substrate 7200 accommodated in the case 7100 becomes visible through the through portion 7110a, it is accommodated in the case 7100. It is possible to make it difficult to notice that the board 7200 being marked is a high-importance circuit board.

Further, no through-hole is formed in a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the substrate 7200 accommodated in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 (the region inside the penetrating portion 7110a). As a result, the surface of the white insulating film formed over the entire surface of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a (the region inside the penetrating portion 7110a) is smoothed. It is possible to prevent a player who sees (the front surface, the LED mounting surface) from feeling uncomfortable, and to prevent the player from noticing that the circuit board has a high degree of importance. A through hole is formed in a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the substrate 7200 (region inside the penetrating portion 7110a), and the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a including the through hole is formed. In this case also, the surface of the insulating film can be smoothed, so that the surface of the substrate 7200 (front surface, front surface, It is possible to prevent a player who sees the LED mounting surface from feeling uncomfortable, and to prevent the player from noticing that the circuit board has a high degree of importance.

In addition, the region corresponding to the through portion 7110a (the region inside the through portion 7110a) of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 is white (not limited to white, but is a bright color with high reflection efficiency (for example, The reflection efficiency may be improved by forming an insulating film of (may be yellow). For example, as shown in FIG. 258(A), a black insulating paint is applied to the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 to form a first conductive film 7200A. The second conductive film 7200B may be formed by applying (silk-printing) a white paint over the first conductive film 7200A to the region (the region inside the penetrating portion 7110a). ), a white insulating paint is applied to the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 to form a first conductive film 7200A, and a region (through portion 7110a The second conductive film 7200B may be formed by applying (silk-printing) a black paint over the first conductive film 7200A except for the inner region of the first conductive film 7200A.

That is, in FIG. 258(A), a black first conductive film 7200A is formed around a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and a white first conductive film 7200A is formed in a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a. A two conductive film 7200B is formed. In FIG. 258B, a black second conductive film 7200B is formed around the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and a white second conductive film 7200B is formed in the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a. 1 conductive film 7200A is formed. In this way, a black insulating film (black first conductive film 7200A, black second conductive film 7200B) is formed around a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and the penetrating portion 7110a is formed. By forming a white insulating film (white second conductive film 7200B, white first conductive film 7200A) in a region corresponding to the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, a region (one piece (the area inside the through portion 7110a where the LED 7001 is arranged) can be improved, so that when the LED 7001 emits light, the decrease in luminance in the through portion 7110a is further suppressed, and the light emission by one LED 7001 can be made clear. In addition, the area around the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a can be kept in a state of low reflection efficiency. Even if the light leaks out of the penetrating portion 7110a, the light can be prevented from diffusing. Further, in this case, the above-described description portion may not be silk-printed, or the description portion may be silk-printed on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted. A light-colored paint with high reflection efficiency such as white or yellow is used on the black first conductive film 7200A or the black second conductive film 7200B formed around the area corresponding to the through portion 7110a on the surface. The notation portion may be silk-printed, or a yellow color or the like may be printed on the white first conductive film 7200A or the white second conductive film 7200B formed in the area corresponding to the through portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface. The notation portion may be silk-printed using bright-colored paint with high reflection efficiency.

According to the above embodiment, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a win is made based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and if the result of the lottery is a win, the game machine is controlled to a special game state advantageous to the player. , the main side board (the board 7200 provided in the dot matrix display device 7000, the function display board provided in the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, etc.) used for the progress of the game, and the execution of the effect Used sub-side boards (peripheral control board 1510, back front left decoration board 3714 of back front left decoration unit 3710, back top front decoration board 3422 of back top effect unit 3400, back front right decoration unit 3810 back front right Decoration board 3814, back bottom right decoration board 3253 of back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom left decoration board 3203 of back bottom left effect unit 3200, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame A top center decoration board 455, a door frame top left decoration board 456, and a door frame top right decoration board 457) are provided, and the main side board is arranged so that the surface on which electronic components are mounted faces the rear of the game machine. The first main side board (main control board 1310, payout control board 633, etc.) and the surface are arranged so as to face the front of the game machine, and at least the surface is colored with a specific color that is not formed on the sub side board. a second main substrate having an area (the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display device 7000 and the function display substrate provided in the function display unit 1400), and the electronic components to be mounted on the first main substrate Information that identifies the type of the electronic component (the part number of the electronic component, the attributes of the electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the electronic component is placed, etc. (In addition, the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting direction of the electronic component ( Mounting direction), electronic component model)) (including foil removal and silk printing with an insulating paint different in color from the first insulating paint)) is provided. On the other hand, the second main board is characterized in that no information specifying the type of electronic component to be mounted is provided. As a result, for the second main side board arranged so that the surface on which the electronic components are mounted faces the front of the game machine, a specific colored region (for example, a resist of a different color) that is not formed on the sub side board , silk, etc.), it becomes easy to determine whether or not the board is of high importance, and it is possible to prevent oversight of the inspection of the board of high importance. In addition, if the existence of a highly important substrate is grasped by the player, there is a risk of fraudulent activity using it. By not forming a colored area of a specific color on the first main side board arranged so as to face the front side of the game machine, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the first main side board and the sub side board, and the surface faces the front of the game machine. Information specifying the type of the electronic component to be mounted is not provided on the second main board. As a result, the first main side board is similar to the sub side board without providing a colored area of a specific color, making it difficult to determine whether or not it is a board of high importance. A coloring area of a specific color is formed on the easily visible second main side board to make it easy to determine whether or not the board is highly important in the manufacturing process, while making it difficult to specify the type of the electronic component. This makes it difficult to illegally modify the second main board, thereby suppressing a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine.

Also, the first main board may have a function of performing a lottery to determine whether or not a win is made based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and the second main board may have a function of displaying the lottery result. The first main side board and the sub side board are treated as the same as the sub side board without forming a colored region of a specific color for the first main side board, which is the most important by conducting a lottery to determine whether or not the player wins. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the substrate is of high importance by making it difficult to determine whether the substrate is of high importance.

In addition, the surfaces of both the first main side board and the second main side board are covered by a cover body (main control board box 1320, payout control board box 632, case 7100, etc.), and the second main side board is provided with an opening (through portion 7110a) that opens toward the front side of the game machine, and the plate surface on the front side of the second main side board is covered by the cover body. A colored region (insulating film) having a color (such as black) different from the substrate color of the sub-side substrate is provided at least on the plate surface outside the opening when covered. Only a colored region (insulating film) of a color (such as white) that is the same as or very similar to the substrate color of the sub-side substrate is provided on the plate surface that is inside the opening when the plate surface is covered with the cover body. can be Even if the board surface of the second main side board is seen through the opening toward the front side of the gaming machine, only a colored area of the same or very similar color to the board color of the sub side board can be seen. It is possible to make the person recognize that the substrate is of low importance so that the person does not notice that it is an important substrate.

In addition, when the front side surface of the second main side board is covered with the cover body, a part of the vicinity of the surface of the board outside the opening is colored the same as or very similar to the board color of the sub side board. A colored region (a colored insulating film formed of arbitrary shapes, symbols, characters, written portions, etc.) may be provided. As a result, even if the second main board housed in the cover shifts and the area of the board surface inside the opening changes, the colored area having a color different from the board color of the sub-side board becomes less visible. .

The cover body covering the surface of the second main board includes a front cover part (front cover part 7110) covering the front side of the second main board and a back cover part covering the back side of the second main board. (back cover part 7120), and the back cover part is provided with a back side opening (opening part 7120a) that opens toward the back side of the gaming machine, and the board on the back side of the second main side board A colored region (insulating film) having a color (such as black) different from at least the substrate color of the sub-side substrate is provided on the plate surface that is outside the opening when the surface is covered with the back cover portion. When the back surface of the side board is covered with the back cover part, the board surface inside the opening has only a colored area (white, etc.) that is the same as or very similar to the board color of the sub side board. may be provided. Even if the board surface of the second main side board is seen through the opening towards the back side of the gaming machine, only the colored area of the same or very similar color to the board color of the sub side board can be seen. It is possible to make the person recognize that the substrate is of low importance so that the person does not notice that it is an important substrate.

A game machine performs a lottery as to whether or not a win is made based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and when the result of the lottery is a win, the game machine is controlled to a special game state advantageous to the player, and is used for the progress of the game. Main side board (substrate 7200 provided in dot matrix display 7000, function display board provided in function display unit 1400, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, etc.) and sub-side board (peripheral Control board 1510, back front left decoration board 3714 of back front left decoration unit 3710, back top front decoration board 3422 of back top effect unit 3400, back front right decoration board 3814 of back front right decoration unit 3810, back bottom right Back bottom right decoration board 3253 of production unit 3250, back bottom left decoration board 3203 of back bottom left production unit 3200, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top center decoration board 455, door A frame top left decorative board 456 and a door frame top right decorative board 457) are provided, and the main side board is a first main side board arranged so that the surface on which electronic components are mounted faces the rear of the game machine ( main control board 1310, payout control board 633, etc.), and a second main side which is arranged so that its surface faces the front of the gaming machine, and has at least a coloring area of a specific color not formed on the sub-side board on said surface. substrates (the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 and the function display substrate provided in the function display unit 1400), and the first main side substrate and the second main side substrate each comprise a case body (main control substrate). box 1320, payout control board box 632, case 7100, etc.), but the second main side board is difficult to see from the outside when housed in the case body (main control board box 1320 and the payout control board box 632 are transparent, while the case 7100 is opaque). According to the above configuration, the second main board, which is arranged so that the surface on which the electronic components are mounted faces the front of the gaming machine, has a specific colored region (for example, a different colored area) not formed on the sub board. By having colored resist, silk, etc.), it becomes easy to distinguish whether or not the substrate is of high importance in the manufacturing process, and it is possible to prevent overlooking inspections of high importance substrates. . In addition, if the existence of a highly important board is grasped by the player, there is a risk of cheating using it. By not forming a colored area of a specific color on the first main side board arranged so as to face the front side of the game machine, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the first main side board and the sub side board, and the surface faces the front of the game machine. The arranged second main side board is housed in a case body so as to be difficult to see from the outside. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether or not the first main side board is the same as the sub side board without providing a colored region of a specific color, and it is difficult to determine whether or not the board is of high importance. A colored area of a specific color is formed on the second main side board so as to face the second main side board so that it is easy to determine whether or not the board is of high importance during the manufacturing process, while the player can easily see the board in the state after manufacture. Since the presence of the second main side board is concealed to make it difficult to illegally modify it, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the gaming machine from deteriorating.

Also, the case body for housing the second main side board may be formed in a color that is the same as or very similar to the board color of the sub side board. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent person to notice that the substrate is important.

[Lamp/LED brightness adjustment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by rotating the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation portion 301 in the effect operation unit 300, the LED provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457; 273, a plate upper right decorative board 278, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface of the plate center upper decorative board 314 may also be adjustable in brightness.), LEDs provided on the game board 5 (in this example, at least A plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame left side decoration board 402, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457, The brightness of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, the upper rear decorative substrate 3452, the left rear rear decorative substrate 3522, and the right rear decorative substrate 3622 mounted on the movable decorative body can also be adjusted. It is also possible to adjust the brightness of a plurality of LEDs as the backlight of the effect display device 1600. However, the LEDs provided in the display that displays important information related to the game (for example, the function display unit 1400 It is desirable that the brightness of the provided LEDs) cannot be adjusted.) and can be adjusted over a range of 70% to 100% in 5% increments.

Specifically, when the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise, the brightness of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the LEDs provided on the game board 5 is improved, and the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated. When rotated counterclockwise, the brightness of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the LEDs provided on the game board 5 is reduced.

Further, when the brightness is adjusted by operating the rotary operation unit 302, a barometer corresponding to the current brightness is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a certain period of time, and the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When operated, the scale of the barometer increases until the luminance reaches 100%, and when the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise, the scale of the barometer decreases until the luminance reaches 70%. In this way, when the rotary operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, by making the user pay attention to the display contents of the effect display device 1600, the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 can be provided. The central button decoration board 376, the peripheral button decoration board 37, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 can be suppressed from being visually recognized. Since information such as the number of pins, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, etc. becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from collapsing and the design is improved. can be suppressed, and a drop in amusement can be suppressed.

In addition, according to the result of the special lottery drawn, the player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is not performed. LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. When the rotary operation unit 302 is operated during normal times when the LEDs mounted on the surface of the and are turned off, the LEDs mounted on the surface of the central button decoration board 376 and the surface of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are controlled to emit light over a certain period of time, and the center of the effect operation button unit 360 A button cover 375, an outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and a rotary operation part 302 of an effect operation ring 330 are decorated with light emission. Then, when the period during which the effect operation section 301 is not operated reaches a fixed period, the display of the barometer of the effect display device 1600 is extinguished, and the LED of the effect operation unit 300 is extinguished. In the player participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate the rotary operation unit 302, vibrate it, assist the rotary operation, or inhibit the rotary operation, and the operation button elevation drive motor By 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to be conspicuous, and the operation of the presentation operation section 301 can entertain the player participation type presentation.

In this way, by controlling the light emission of the LEDs provided in the effect operation unit 300 when the brightness is adjusted by operating the rotary operation unit 302, the central button decoration board 376 on which these LEDs are mounted, The surfaces of the peripheral button decoration board 377 and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the light emitted from the LED.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs mounted below the effect operation ring 330 The brightness of the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided in , cannot be adjusted. That is, the brightness of the LEDs provided in the performance operation unit 300, which is provided at a position close to the player and tends to attract attention, cannot be adjusted, and is controlled to emit light at a preset brightness. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 300 is decorated with light emission in the light emission mode during effect, the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376, the peripheral button decoration board 377, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are always mounted at a certain brightness or more. Illuminated from the LED in a situation where the player pays attention to the production operation unit 300 (a situation in which the production operation unit 301 is operated such as a player participation type production or volume adjustment is being performed). The center button decoration board 376, the peripheral button decoration board 377, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the emitted light. Since information such as numbers, pin numbers, outlines on which electronic parts are arranged, etc. becomes difficult for a player to visually recognize, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and to suppress deterioration of the design. It is possible to prevent a decline in amusement interest.

In addition, in the above-described center button decoration substrate 376, outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, and effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, white is adopted as an insulating film (resist) on the mounting surface of the LED, and a yellow insulating film is applied to the mounting surface. Information (notation part) such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic parts are arranged is silk-printed with paint. In this way, in this example, since the inscription part is silk-printed with yellow insulating paint, which has little visual difference (contrast) with respect to white, it can be used not only when the LED is lit but also when the LED is extinguished. It is getting harder to identify this information.

It should be noted that the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 is performed for a certain period of time (for example, the period from when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the peripheral control MPU is activated, before and after the special symbols that are variably displayed are stopped). It may be always executable except for a certain period of time, one or both of them), or a specific condition such as a period during which a demonstration is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state may be made executable only when Further, the result of luminance adjustment based on the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 may be immediately reflected, or the result of the luminance adjustment based on the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 may be reflected depending on the situation (whether or not the variable display is being performed, etc.). are reflected immediately, and the result of luminance adjustment is reflected at a timing later than the operation timing of the rotary operation unit 302 .

In this example, brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 can be performed even when the door frame 3 is open. In addition, when the door frame 3 is opened, the LEDs mounted on the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 are mounted on the back top front decoration board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400. LED, LED mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810, LED mounted on the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom left effect unit 3200 LEDs mounted on the back bottom left decoration substrate 3203, movable decorations (back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back left left rotating decoration 3510, back back right rotating decoration 3610, and A plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as the LEDs provided on the back movable decorative body 3110), are turned off (unlit state), and the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (this example Then, at least the door frame left side decoration substrate 402, the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, and the dish upper left decoration substrate 273, The plate upper right decorative substrate 278 and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may also be controlled to emit light. That is, when the brightness is adjusted by operating the rotary operation unit 302 while the door frame 3 is open, the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 are turned off. , the luminance cannot be determined from the light emission states of these LEDs.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is not opened (the door frame 3 is closed), the LEDs mounted on the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration body unit 3710 and the back top effect unit 3400 LED mounted on the back top front decoration board 3422 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 LED mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 Mounted on the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom right effect unit 3250 LED mounted on the back bottom left decoration board 3203 of the back bottom left effect unit 3200, movable decorations (back bottom center rotation decoration 3310, back top rear rotation decoration 3440, back back left rotation decoration A plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 such as the LEDs provided on the body 3510, the back right rotating decoration 3610, and the back rear movable decoration 3110) are not controlled to turn off (lighting possible state). Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed and the brightness is adjusted by operating the rotary operation part 302, the brightness can be determined by the light emitting state of the LED provided on the game board 5.例文帳に追加

In addition, the back front left decoration substrate 3714, the back top front decoration substrate 3422, the back front right decoration substrate 3814, the back bottom right decoration substrate 3253, the back bottom left decoration substrate 3203, the back rear decoration substrate 3114, and the back top rear decoration substrate. 3452, rear left decorative substrate 3522, and rear right decorative substrate 3622, white is used as an insulating film (resist) on the mounting surface of the LED, and yellow insulating paint is applied to the mounting surface to reduce the number of connector pins. , direction of the IC, part number, pin number, and information (notation part) such as outlines where the electronic parts are arranged are silk-printed. Therefore, even when the door frame 3 is opened and the LEDs mounted on these boards are in a non-lighting state, it is possible to make it difficult to identify these pieces of information.

[Brightness adjustment of LED mounted on specific substrate]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a circuit board on which LEDs (dimming LEDs) whose brightness can be adjusted within a predetermined range and LEDs (non-dimming LEDs) whose brightness cannot be adjusted and which emit light at a constant brightness are mounted. A mounted circuit board is provided. When adjusting the brightness of the dimming LED, the brightness can be adjusted using the emission brightness of the non-dimmable LED as an index.

Specifically, the back front left decoration board 3714, back top front decoration board 3422, back front right decoration board 3814, back bottom right decoration board 3253, back bottom left decoration board 3203, back back decoration board 3114, back top back Decoration substrate 3452, rear left decoration substrate 3522, rear rear right decoration substrate 3622, rear lower middle rotating decoration 3310, rear upper rear rotating decoration 3440, rear left rotating decoration 3510, rear right rotating decoration 3610, Back rear movable decoration 3110, door frame left side decoration substrate 402, door frame right side decoration substrate 418, door frame top center decoration substrate 455, door frame top left decoration substrate 456, door frame top right decoration substrate 457, etc. is mounted with a dimming LED, a central button decoration board 376 and a peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the production operation button unit 360 of the production operation unit 300, and a production operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the production operation ring 330. , the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, the function display substrate provided in the function display unit 1400, and the like are mounted with non-dimmable LEDs.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, circuit boards on which non-dimmable LEDs are mounted are provided in the upper left and upper right portions of the game board 5 and are provided below the game board 5 in the front frame 3 . In other words, non-dimmable LEDs are provided in each of the arbitrarily divided areas of the upper area and the lower area of the game board 5 . Therefore, when adjusting the brightness of a dimming LED, the emission brightness of the non-dimming LED provided in the area to which the dimming LED belongs, that is, the non-dimming LED arranged near the dimming LED is used as an index. brightness control can be performed as The non-dimmable LEDs mounted on the production operation ring decoration board 352, the board 7200 provided in the dot matrix display device 7000, the function display board provided in the function display unit 1400, etc. are controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern. However, at least one non-dimmable LED among the predetermined number of non-dimmable LEDs mounted is turned on. Therefore, it can be reliably used as an index when adjusting the brightness of the dimming LED.

In addition, in FIG. 263(A), attributes of the LED such as the part number of the LED and the area indicating the position where the LED is arranged (further, the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction of the LED (mounting direction), LED model may be included.) is omitted. In addition, the notation part may be formed in a light color (yellow, light blue, yellowish green, etc.) different from the white color of the insulating film formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface), or may be formed by removing foil. Alternatively, without forming a marking part on the LED mounting surface, the LED non-mounting surface (rear surface) is marked with a color different from the white of the insulating film (not limited to a bright color) or without foil. You may make it form a part. In addition, the notation part may be formed corresponding to each of a plurality of LEDs (for example, "LED1" or the like is formed for one LED), or it may be summarized for each plurality of LEDs (for example, each type). (For example, "LED1 to LED5" are formed for a plurality of LEDs). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) and increase the brightness of the light emitted from the dimming LED or the non-dimming LED. In addition, efficient light emission can be realized by suppressing the loss of light emission due to the non-dimmable LED.

In addition, the LED mounting surface (surface ) includes a back front left decoration board 3714, a back top front decoration board 3422, a back front right decoration board 3814, a back bottom right decoration board 3253, a back bottom left decoration board 3203, a back rear decoration board 3114, and a back top rear decoration. Substrate 3452, back left decorative substrate 3522, back right decorative substrate 3622, back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back left rotating decoration 3510, back right rotating decoration 3610, back Rear movable decoration 3110, door frame left side decoration substrate 402, door frame right side decoration substrate 418, door frame top center decoration substrate 455, door frame top left decoration substrate 456, door frame top right decoration substrate 457, etc. A white insulating film (resist) is formed in the same manner as the mounting surface (surface). In this way, the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are mounted to provide brightness. For the non-dimmable LED, which is an index for adjustment, the light emission is controlled under the same conditions as the dimmable LED (mounted on the same or very similar white insulating film (resist)), so by comparison with the non-dimmable LED The difference between the brightness of the dimming LED after the brightness adjustment and the brightness of the dimming LED becomes clear, and the brightness can be easily adjusted to the player's preference.

In addition, the LED mounting surface (surface ), back front left decoration board 3714, back top front decoration board 3422, back front right decoration board 3814, back bottom right decoration board 3253, back bottom left decoration board 3203, back back decoration board 3114, back top back decoration board 3452 , back left decoration board 3522, back back right decoration board 3622, back bottom center rotating decoration 3310, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back back left rotating decoration 3510, back back right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable LED mounting surface of decoration body 3110, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board 456, door frame top right decoration board 457, etc. By forming a white insulating film (resist) on the (surface), the reduction in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (surface, front surface) of these circuit boards is suppressed, and light emitted from dimming LEDs and non-dimming LEDs is suppressed. Therefore, the loss of light emitted by the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED can be suppressed, and efficient light emission can be realized.

A circuit board on which a non-dimming LED is mounted to have the same function as the dot matrix display 7000 and the function display unit 1400, and a white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface). In this case, instead of the dot matrix display 7000 or the function display unit 1400, the emission brightness of the non-dimmable LED mounted on the circuit board provided in the specific display may be used as an index.

In addition, a specific substrate is provided on which both an LED (dimmable LED) whose brightness can be adjusted within a predetermined range and an LED (non-dimmable LED) that emits light with a constant brightness because the brightness cannot be adjusted are mounted. can be For example, as shown in FIG. 263, a non-dimmable LED and a back front left decoration substrate 3714, a back top front decoration substrate 3422, a back front right decoration substrate 3814, and a back bottom right decoration substrate 3253 having a function as the specific display device. , back bottom left decoration board 3203 , back back decoration board 3114 , back top back decoration board 3452 , back back left decoration board 3522 , back back right decoration board 3622 , back bottom center rotation decoration 3310 , back top rotation decoration 3440 , rear left rotating decorative body 3510, rear right rotating decorative body 3610, rear movable decorative body 3110, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame Both the top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, and the like, and the dimming LEDs that control light emission in relation to the game performance may be mounted on one circuit board.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 263(A), a white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface), and the side view consists of a full-color LED whose brightness can be adjusted within a predetermined range. type dimming LED 1820 and a top-view non-dimming LED 1830 consisting of a full-color LED whose brightness cannot be adjusted and emits light with a constant brightness are placed on the same surface ( The specific substrate 1800 mounted on the LED mounting surface, front surface, front surface) may be provided on one or both of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 . In addition, mounting holes 1810 for mounting are formed in the four corners of the specific substrate 1800, and a plurality of through holes 1840 are also formed.

Further, in the specific substrate 1800 of this example, each of the dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LEDs 1830 is composed of a plurality of LEDs. The group of dimming LEDs are arranged at predetermined intervals. In addition, the distance between the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group is greater than the distance to the adjacent dimming LED 1820 in the dimming LED group and the distance to the adjacent non-dimming LED in the non-dimming LED group. are placed at a distance of By configuring in this way, it becomes easy to distinguish between the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group, and it becomes easy to compare the brightness of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 .

Also, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 use packages of the same or very similar colors, and each package is made of white resin. In this way, since the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are packaged in the same or very similar colors, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 can be caused to emit light under the same conditions. By contrasting the brightness with the dimming LED, the difference between the brightness of the dimming LED after brightness adjustment and the brightness of the non-dimming LED becomes clear, and the brightness can be easily adjusted to the player's preference. In the above example, a side-view type LED is used as the dimming LED 1820, and a top-view type LED is used as the non-dimming LED 1830. However, the same type of LED (top-view type or side view type) may be used. In this case, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 can be caused to emit light under the same conditions. The difference from the luminance of the dimming LED becomes clear, and it becomes easy for the player to adjust the luminance to his liking. Also, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 may be of the same package type.

In the above example, an LED package enclosing an LED bare chip is used as the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, but the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package may be directly mounted on the specific substrate 1800. In this case also, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 can be caused to emit light under the same conditions. The difference from the luminance of the dimming LED becomes clear, and it becomes easy for the player to adjust the luminance to his liking.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 263(B), in front of the specific board 1800, the dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LEDs 1830 have different decorations. In this example, the character "chance" is formed by a translucent lens in front of the area where the dimming LED 1820 of the specific substrate 1800 is mounted, and the opaque first decoration part 1850 is arranged in the other part, In front of the area where the non-dimmable LEDs 1830 are mounted on the substrate 1800, a dividing member 1860 is provided that penetrates the non-dimmable LEDs 1830 so as to make individual light emission visible. A translucent cover body 1870 is provided in front.

In this way, in this example, the dimmable LED 1820 and the non-dimmable LED 1830 are mounted on the specific substrate 1800 which is the same circuit board. and are demarcated by decoration. In addition, since a partitioning member 1860 that is not provided for the dimming LED 1820 is provided in front of the non-dimming LED 1830 , it is easy to understand that it has a function different from that of the dimming LED 1820 .

In addition, in this example, since the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are mounted on the same substrate, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are arranged at a relatively short distance while being spaced apart. Therefore, it is easy to compare the brightness of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 .

In this example, a partitioning member is provided in front of the non-dimmable LEDs 1830 so that light emission from each of the plurality of non-dimmable LEDs 1830 can be visually recognized. The dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 mounted on the specific board 1800 are controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 based on control signals from the main control board 1310 . In addition, the non-dimming LED 1830 is also controlled to emit light in a predetermined manner in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols in the same manner as the dot matrix display 7000 described above. (1 special lottery result, second special lottery result). As a result, the non-dimming LED 1830, which the player pays attention to by being lit and displayed in a light-emitting mode according to the special lottery result, can be used as an index for brightness adjustment, and the brightness of the dimming LED 1820 can be adjusted. By making it easier to visualize the brightness after adjustment, it becomes easy for the player to adjust the brightness to his/her preference.

Further, a plurality of through holes 1840 are formed between the dimming LED 1820 group and the non-dimming LED 1830 group in the specific substrate 1800 on which the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are mounted. The through-hole 1840 allows the light emitted from the LED to leak to the rear surface (non-LED-mounted surface) side of the specific substrate 1800 without being reflected, thereby suppressing light reflection and interference. Since a plurality of through-holes 1840 are formed between the group of dimming LEDs 1820 and the group of non-dimming LEDs 1830 in this way, the light emitted from each of the dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LEDs 1830 reflects or interferes. is suppressed, and each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 can be made to have the luminance according to the individual light emission, and the dimming LED 1820 can be controlled by using the luminance according to only the light emission of the non-dimming LED 1830 as an index. Since it is possible to adjust the brightness, the accuracy of comparison is enhanced, and the brightness can be easily adjusted to the player's preference.

In addition, in this example, the through holes 1840 are formed so as to have an outer diameter smaller than that of the dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LEDs 1830 (one through hole 1840 is formed on the LED mounting surface (surface, front surface) of the specific substrate 1800. The ratio (area) occupied by one dimming LED 1820 or one non-dimming LED 1830 occupies (area)), so that the light from the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 is more than necessary from the back surface of the specific substrate 1800 through the through hole 1840. It is possible to suppress leakage to (LED non-mounting surface). In addition, the number of through holes 1840 formed between the dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LEDs 1830 is larger than the number of the dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LEDs 1830 mounted on the sides of the through holes 1840. There are many. Thus, in this example, the through hole 1840 is formed with a smaller outer diameter than the dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LEDs 1830, and the number of the dimming LEDs 1820 mounted on the side of the through hole 1840 and the non-dimming LEDs 1820 In order to form more through-holes 1840 than the number of LEDs 1830, while achieving suppression of reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LEDs 1830, more than necessary dimming LEDs 1820 and It is possible to prevent the brightness of the non-dimming LED 1830 from being lowered.

Holes different from the through holes 1840 , such as the positioning holes of the specific substrate 1800 and the mounting holes 1810 described above, may be formed between the dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LEDs 1830 . Also, the hole may be formed with an outer diameter larger than that of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830. A smaller number of holes may be formed. As a result, the luminance of the dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LEDs 1830 is prevented from being lowered more than necessary while suppressing the reflection and interference of the light emitted from the dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LEDs 1830 respectively. be able to.

In addition, a three-dimensional object (electronic component or structure having a predetermined thickness, etc.) that separates part or all of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 is provided on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the specific substrate 1800. In this way, reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 may be suppressed. For example, as shown in FIG. 263(C), a resistor 1880 may be mounted between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 on the LED mounting surface (front surface, top surface) of the specific substrate 1800 . Also, the resistor 1880 has a predetermined thickness and is mounted so as to protrude from the LED mounting surface (front surface, top surface) of the specific substrate 1800 . In this way, the resistor 1880 is provided between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, and protrudes from the LED mounting surface (front surface, top surface) of the specific substrate 1800, thereby making the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 more uniform. Since a part or all of them are separated, it is possible to suppress reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LEDs 1830 .

In addition, a three-dimensional object such as an electronic component or a structure provided between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 has a dark color (black, gray, green, blue, brown, etc.). Different portions (for example, may have a metallic color such as silver or a transparent portion) may be provided. For example, a resistor 1880 having a black appearance may be mounted on a specific substrate 1800 as shown in FIG. 263(C). Thus, by mounting the resistor 1880 having a dark appearance with low reflection efficiency between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, the light emitted from each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 can be reflected. and the interference suppression effect can be further enhanced. In addition, when a three-dimensional object such as an electronic component or a structure having a black appearance with the lowest reflection efficiency as a dark color is provided between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 The effect of suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the above can be maximized.

In addition, although the electronic component in which the resistor 1880 is mounted has been exemplified, the same effects as described above can be obtained with electronic components mounted on a circuit board such as capacitors, diodes, ICs, and LED driver ICs (constant current drive circuits). It is possible to play In addition, the number and manner of arrangement of three-dimensional objects such as electronic components and structures are not limited to those described above. Or, a three-dimensional object having a larger outer diameter than the dimming LED 1820 or the non-dimming LED 1830 (the ratio (area) occupied by one three-dimensional object in the LED mounting surface (surface, front surface) of the specific substrate 1800 ≧ one dimming LED 1820 or 1 The rate (area) occupied by one non-dimmable LED 1830 may be one or more.

In addition, as a three-dimensional object such as an electronic component or a structure provided between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, the light from the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) is higher than the LED package of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830. An object with a large amount of protrusion (high height from the LED mounting surface to the outermost surface of the three-dimensional object) may be arranged. It is possible to further enhance the effect of suppressing reflection and interference of irradiated light.

Alternatively, the dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LEDs 1830 may be distinguished from each other by making the packages of the dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LEDs 1830 different in color and shape. Distinguish between the dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LEDs 1830 by differentiating the arrangement form with the dimming LEDs 1830 group (arranged in a vertical row as shown in FIG. 263(B), or arranged in two diagonal rows, etc.) It may be made possible.

According to the above embodiment, the lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the game control means for controlling the progress of the game according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and the light emitting device capable of emitting light as the game progresses. A plurality of light emitting means (light emitting decorations (back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back LEDs provided on the upper front rotary decoration 3410, the back upper front decoration 3421, the back front left decoration 3713, the back front right decoration 3813, etc.), the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least LEDs provided on the door frame left side decoration substrate 402, the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, and the dish top left decoration substrate. 273, the upper right decorative board 278 of the plate, and the LEDs provided in the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate may also be included.), the dot matrix display 7000, the function display unit 1400, the performance display device 1600, etc.), and the player and brightness adjusting means capable of adjusting the brightness of the light emitting means according to the operation of the operating means (rotating operation portion 302 of the effect operating portion 301) capable of being operated by the second light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means. 1 Light emitting means (light emitting decoration (lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, back left rotating decoration 3510, back right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back upper front Rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.) LED provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame LEDs provided on the left side decoration substrate 402, the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, etc. In addition, the plate upper left decoration substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may also include LEDs. Among the means, the second light emitting means (the dot matrix display 7000, the function display unit 1400, the effect display device 1600, etc.) is characterized in that light emission is controlled at a constant luminance regardless of the operation of the operation means. As described above, since the luminance of the second light emitting means is constant, it can be used as a reference when checking the luminance of the first light emitting means.

Also, the second light emitting means may be arranged at a position separated from the first light emitting means by a predetermined distance. By arranging the second light emitting means controlled to emit light at a constant brightness regardless of the operation of the operating means at a position separated from the first light emitting means by a predetermined distance, the light emitted from the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means Since the interference of the light emitted from the first light emitting means and the light emitted from the second light emitting means can be visually recognized separately, the luminance can be easily compared.

A through hole (through hole 1840) may be formed between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means. Since the through-hole is formed between the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means, the reflection efficiency of the substrate surface between the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means can be reduced, and light interference can be prevented. is suppressed, making it easier to compare the luminance of the first light emitting means and the luminance of the second light emitting means.

The second light-emitting means is partitioned by a decoration different from that of the first light-emitting means (in this example, the character "chance" is displayed by a translucent lens in front of the area where the dimming LED 1820 of the specific substrate 1800 is mounted. The non-dimmable LEDs 1830 are separated in front of the area where the non-dimmable LEDs 1830 of the specific substrate 1800 are mounted, and the individual light emission is visually recognized. A penetrating partition member 1860 is provided so as to allow it, and a translucent cover body 1870 is provided in front of the partition member.). Since the second light-emitting means is partitioned by decoration different from the first light-emitting means, the second light-emitting means to be used as a reference can be easily specified by controlling light emission at a constant luminance regardless of the operation of the operating means. will be able to

The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be mounted on the same light emitting substrate. Since the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are mounted on the same light-emitting substrate, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means can be provided at positions relatively close to each other. Comparison with the luminance of the light emitting means is facilitated.

A white coating film may be formed on the surface of the light emitting substrate on which the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are mounted. Since the white coating film is formed on the surface on which the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are mounted, the reflection efficiency on the surface of the light-emitting substrate can be increased, and the light emission from the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means can be enhanced. Efficient light emission can be achieved by suppressing loss.

[Details of the main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 264 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 accommodates a main control board 1310 for controlling game content, payout of game balls B, etc., a setting change board 1311 for setting game performance, and the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311. and a non-conductive resin main control board box 1320 attached to the board holder 1200 .

When the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, when the game board 5 is viewed from behind, the rectangular main control board 1310 that is long in the horizontal direction is the left side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. It is formed and arranged in a size that occupies about four-fifths of the area from the left side to the right side of the area surrounded by the top, right, and bottom sides, and the remaining one-fifth of the area is A square setting change board 1311 is arranged in a corner region where the upper side and the right side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected.

As described above, the outer frame 2 coaxially rotates the main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 320 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Since the body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward about the left side in front view, the body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the body frame lower hinge portion 320 of the body frame 4 are arranged. The left side of the main body frame 4 in the front view in the up-down direction is the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side in the up-down direction of the main body frame 4 on the opposite side is the open side of the main body frame 4. Become. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, while the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side of the main body frame 4 ( A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the closed side).

Further, the rear cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 as described above. It is. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 , the main control board box 1320 is covered with the rear cover 640 . As described above, the back cover 640 has its right side in front view attached to the right end of the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in front view so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically, and its left side in front view Since it is attached to the rear cover mounting portion 551i of the base 551 and the rear cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600, the right side of the front view becomes the pivotal support side (closed side) of the rear cover 640. The left side in the front view, which is the opposite side, is the open side of the back cover 640 . That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640, whereas the back cover is opened. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side.

In this embodiment, green is used as the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns. On the other hand, as the resist of the setting change board 1311, a white color different from that of the resist of the main control board 1310 is adopted, and the entire surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting board 1311 are white. It is solidly coated with resist except for various land patterns.

Here, the use of a color different from the color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 as the resist of the setting change board 1311 will be described. Both the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are boards housed in the main control board box 1320 . The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game (controls the content of the game, the payout of the game ball B, etc.) and is highly important for crime prevention. Awareness about is very high. Therefore, it is not necessary to draw attention to the fact that this board is the main control board 1310 by distinguishing it from other boards. On the other hand, since the setting change board 1311 is a board having a completely new function in the pachinko machine 1 that can set the game performance, it is accommodated in the main control board box 1320, but it is less important for crime prevention. Awareness of the fact that it is an expensive substrate is extremely low. Therefore, it is necessary to draw attention to the fact that this board is the setting change board 1311, distinguishing it from other boards.

Therefore, in this embodiment, green, which is generally used as a substrate resist, is adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310, and white, which is different from the color adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310, is adopted as the resist of the setting change board 1311. adopted. As a result, among the boards housed in the main control board box 1320, the setting change board 1311 stands out more than the main control board 1310, and the setting change board 1311 is also highly important in terms of crime prevention in addition to the main control board 1310. This can contribute to raising awareness of the fact that it is a substrate.

In this embodiment described above, the resist of the setting change board 1311 is white, which is different from the green used as the resist of the main control board 1310. However, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be distinguished. If possible, it may be yellow, red, blue, transparent, and the like.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as the resist of the setting change board 1311, a white color different from the green used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used. The surface (mounting surface) and/or the back surface (solder surface) may be printed in white to cover almost the entirety of the surface (mounting surface) and/or in black, blue, yellow, or red. You may print.

Next, the main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board box 1320 is composed of a non-conductive resin cover and a non-conductive resin base. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. A main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether or not an illegal IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. In addition, the main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main In order to open the control board box 1320, its sealing mechanism must be destroyed, and the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be discovered, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 is enhanced. The cover body is formed with a plurality of vent holes for heat radiation through which the air inside the main control board box 1320 can be released to the outside air.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting opening sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3051, a first big winning opening sensor 2402, and a second big winning opening. It is connected to the sensor 2601, the out-port sensor 3053, the first sub-out-port sensor 2403, the second sub-out-port sensor 3054, the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is provided with a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the setting values. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is connected by a harness). The harness (electrical wiring) absorbs (relieves) the force associated with the operation of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 is connected electrically. can be difficult to transmit to). A signal from the setting key switch 1311 a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 by this connector connection (inter-board connection). Note that connector connections, which are connections between boards, include connection using a normal connector that does not have a floating mechanism and connection using a special connector that has a floating mechanism. A normal connector that does not have a floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug into the socket. The structure is such that there is absolutely no amount of movement in the direction (for example, vertical direction) relative to the direction in which the plug is inserted and pushed. On the other hand, a special connector with a floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug. At the time of mating, it is possible to absorb the error (fitting axis misalignment) that occurs when the socket is pushed in by moving the socket in a predetermined distance range in a direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (e.g., vertical direction). It has a structure. In this embodiment, a normal connector without a floating mechanism is used as a connector connection between boards, but a special connector with a floating mechanism may be used.

The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with one side having a distance dimension approximately one-fifth of the horizontal distance dimension of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and the upper side of the setting change board 1311 being the main control board 1310. is arranged on the same straight line as the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the lower side thereof is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 respectively.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction. , at a position corresponding to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 . A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is arranged at the center point of intersection of the center lines of the square setting change board 1311 in the vertical and horizontal directions. On the main control board 1310, a setting change permission lamp 1310z that can emit a single color (for example, red) is arranged above the center line of the setting change board 1311 in the horizontal direction and near the connector MSCN. Above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, a setting display 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged. A special monitor 1310h composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a line is arranged from the center toward the right side below.

The setting display 1310g can display the set value of the pachinko machine 1, while the special monitor 1310h can display the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered. However, even if only the special monitor 1310h is provided, the function of displaying the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and the function of displaying the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls won are combined. good. In such a case, on the special monitor 1310h, the pachinko machine 1 may is displayed, the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is displayed in a state excluding the change permission state and the confirmation display state. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the longitudinal direction of the insertion opening having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction). position), the setting key switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position. When the setting key cylinder is at the initial position, the setting key made of metal can be inserted into the insertion port and can be pulled out from the insertion port. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 is detached from the pachinko machine 1 for some reason, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening. On the other hand, even if the main body frame 4 is closed, the member of the other pachinko machine (or the member of the island facility of the game hall) arranged opposite to the island facility of the game hall and the setting key do not interfere with each other. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so as not to damage it.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on. to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . In addition, the setting key cylinder is moved so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 .

[Procedure for changing setting values, procedure for confirming and displaying set values]
Next, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310, and the setting display 1310g of the main control board 1310 will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing setting values will be briefly described, and the case of displaying the current setting values for confirmation will be briefly described. In addition, since the setting key is an important key that can be used not only to change the setting value but also to check the current setting value, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the settings of the set values, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the body frame is changed to the outer frame 2. 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON. Therefore, it is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated. In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then check the outer frame 2. Perform the work of opening the body frame 4, then insert a metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on. , the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a while operating the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch.

A person who changes the setting value must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. After performing the opening operation, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON. , the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Subsequently, while operating the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a controls the current setting value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (set value 1 to set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON). value) is displayed on the setting indicator 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from the off state to the on state.

When the person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310, the detection signal from the RAM clear switch is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 be done. Each time the person who changes the setting of the set value presses the push operation portion of the RAM clear switch, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current set value by 1 based on the detection signal from the RAM clear switch, When it reaches the set value 6, which is the maximum value, it returns to the set value 1, which is the initial value, increases again by 1, and performs control to display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

When determining the setting value, the person who changes the setting value must move the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on). It is rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the turning position of the setting key cylinder to be turned off, and is turned off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and hides the setting value from the state where it is displayed on the setting display 1310g. state, and switches from the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1310z is lit to the state in which it is extinguished.

A person who changes the setting value removes the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting value. complete the configuration change task.

When confirming and displaying the set values currently set, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON. Therefore, it is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is not operated. In other words, the person who actually confirms and displays the setting values that are currently set must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then After the body frame 4 is opened from the frame 2, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turned clockwise by 60 degrees. , the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning ON the setting key switch 1311a, and then the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then Next, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees. is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Subsequently, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a controls the current setting value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (set value 1 to set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON). value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the state where the setting change permission lamp 1310z is extinguished is maintained, and even if the person who confirms and displays the setting value currently set presses the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch, the pressing operation is supported. Then, the set value is not changed at all, and the contents displayed on the setting display 1310g are also not changed.

After confirming the currently set value, the person who confirms and displays the set value currently set must move the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder to the original position to the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) to turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying the setting value.

A person who confirms and displays the set values currently set removes the metal setting key from the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. to complete the confirmation display of the currently set setting values.

It should be noted that, as described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs instantaneously), the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform ON operation. It is necessary that the setting key is turned ON and that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is operated, while the predetermined setting value display permission condition is the pachinko game as described above. When the power of the machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a is opened. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the cylinder 1311ab, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned on, whereby the setting key is turned on and the RAM clear switch is pressed. It is necessary that the part is not manipulated. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition are set when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). When the power is restored, the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise. There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned ON by turning it 60 degrees and turning it ON, and the predetermined setting value change permission condition is "when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when there is a power failure ( Permission to display predetermined set values The condition is that "the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch must not be operated when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily)". The difference is that

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" is the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or a small hit or not, in addition to the probability It is possible to change the probability for lottery determination when moving to time, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (the degree of advantage) of increasing the number of game balls that can be played is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values. A probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a big hit determination table that defines the ratio of the big hit determination value indicating that the big win has been won, A big hit pattern determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the decision, a small hit determination table that defines the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small win has been won, and a ratio of the determination value of the determination value of the small hit pattern Select a small hit pattern determination table, a normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the transition determination from the probability variation to the normal time, etc.), or use various distribution rates associated with the set value Various tables (for example, a sorting table that defines a sorting time, a block that manages driving of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) is selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. The various tables used for various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values differ from each other, and the various tables used for various sorting rates are set so that at least some values differ from each other. The value may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electric drive source. Some are set to In addition, as the set values described above, six set values (integers) ranging from set value 1 to set value 6 were used, but a smaller range may be used, or a larger range may be used. can be anything. For example, four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4 may be used, or eight setting values (integer) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8 may be used.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set values, but also checks the contents of the internal RAM when the main control MPU 1310a restores power to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off processing has not ended normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or it is unreliable). is not possible), an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

[Regarding the initial operation of the movable body when the power is turned on]
As described above, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 consists of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and the payout control board 633 attached to the body frame 4, Each control is shared. Of these, the main control board 1310 controls game operations (progress of the game), while the peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310 . Specifically, at a predetermined timing, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 stores information about the control of game effects and information about the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM (storing commands). By sequentially transmitting the set commands to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 also receives information on the control of game effects and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1. can grasp.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with various movable bodies on the body frame 4 and the game board 5. - 特許庁Among these, as a movable body (main control board side movable body) whose action itself directly gives profits to the player, for example, the second start door 2414 (start door solenoid 2415) for opening and closing the second start door 2004 , the first big prize winning opening door 2417 (first attacker solenoid 2418) for opening and closing the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening door 2611 (second attacker solenoid 261) is operated by a drive signal output from the main control board 1310. FIG. On the other hand, the action itself does not directly lead to the provision of profits to the player, but the movable body (peripheral control board side movable body) that operates during various effects during the game includes, for example, the effect operation unit 301, the back upper rear rotation decoration The decorative bodies such as the body 3440 and the back upper decorative body 3451 are operated by drive signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 . As for such movable bodies, a movable body operated by the main control board 1310 (main control board side movable body) and a movable body operated by the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control board side movable body) are respectively , when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it is possible to perform an initial operation for confirming whether or not it operates properly.

First, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 265 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In this example, only when the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the initial operation of the movable body (main control board side movable body) operated by the main control board 1310 is performed.

As shown in FIG. 265, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t1, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on process. Then, during the period from timing t1 to timing t3, the processing of steps S10 to S22 of the main control side power-on processing described above is executed. In the wait time waiting process of step S24, a waiting time (boot timer) is provided for waiting until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted).

When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t1, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the ON operation, and the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU at timing t3. In step S37, the setting change process is performed, and the state shifts to a state (change permission state) in which the setting value can be changed. In such a change permission state, the setting values (setting values 1 to 6) can be changed each time the RAM clear switch, which functions as a setting switching button, is pressed. After that, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key cylinder from the rotational position where the setting key is turned on to the original position. is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which it is impossible to change the setting of the set value (change-impossible state). Then, after turning off the setting key switch 1311a, the main control MPU performs step S38, and excludes specific areas (above-mentioned set value dedicated area and out ball count dedicated area) from all areas of the main control built-in RAM. After that, steps S40 to S52 are performed to perform various initial settings (time t4 is the completion of various initial settings).

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t1, the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON, and the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch to power on the pachinko machine 1. , the setting change process of step S37 is not performed at timing t3, and the setting value is not changed (change permitted state). However, since the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, during the period of timing t3 to t4, the main control MPU performs step S38, and the specific area out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM After clearing except for (the set value dedicated area and the out-ball counting dedicated area), steps S40 to S52 are performed to perform various initial settings.

After completing various initial settings at timing t4, among the movable bodies mounted on the game board 5, the movable body (main control board side movable body) that operates by the drive signal output from the main control board 1310 Start initial operation. Specifically, as the movable body on the main control board side, a second starting door 2414 (starting door solenoid 2415) for opening and closing the second starting port 2004, and a first large opening for opening and closing the first grand prize winning port 2005 The initial operation of the winning opening door 2417 (first attacker solenoid 2418) and the second winning opening door 2611 (second attacker solenoid 261) for opening and closing the second winning opening 2006 is started. These main control board side movable bodies are members capable of opening and closing operations, respectively. Each of the big winning entrance doors 2611 performs a special operation different from the operation that appears in the course of normal game progress. Such an operation ends when timing t5 arrives. (The point of time when the initial movement of the movable body on the main control board side is completed is assumed to be timing t5).

When the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5, the main control MPU transmits a power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 . Further, after completing the initial operation of the main control board side movable body at timing t5, the state shifts to a state (variable state) in which the variable display of the special symbol can be performed. That is, at timing t6 after completing the initial operation of the main control board side movable body at timing t5, when the ball enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, the variable display of the special symbol is started, A variation pattern command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

As described above, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, during the period of timing t3 to t4, the setting value can be changed (change permission state). In the period from timing t4 to t5, the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is performed regardless of whether or not it has been performed. As a result, if the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on during inspection during manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, the main control board side movable body will operate, so that the main control board side movable body will operate normally. It is possible to visually confirm whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is to be played, and the inspection at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated.

During the period from timing t4 to t5, as the initial action of the main control board side movable body, a special action different from the action that appears in the normal game progress process is performed. Specifically, the second start entrance door The initial action of 2414, the initial action of the first big prize winning opening door 2417, and the initial action of the second big winning prize opening door 2611 are performed in this order (details of each initial action will be described later). In this way, in the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side, by sequentially operating each movable body, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not it operates normally, and the pachinko machine 1 is made difficult to overlook defects. It is possible to improve the accuracy of inspection at the time of manufacturing. Incidentally, if emphasis is placed on shortening the inspection time at the time of manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, the initial operations of the movable bodies on the main control board side may be performed in parallel at the same time. In such a case, the inspection of the initial operation of the main control board side movable body can be completed early, and the game can be started early (variable display of special symbols is possible state (variable state)). In addition, when the initial actions of the main control board side movable bodies are to be operated in parallel at the same time, the main control board side movable bodies are moved within a specific area (for example, the center accessory 2500) of the game area 5a. It is preferable to place them collectively in the area on the right side of ). As a result, even when the initial operations of the movable bodies on the main control board side are operated in parallel at the same time, it is possible to easily check whether or not the operation is normal, thereby making it difficult to overlook the trouble. It is possible to improve the accuracy of inspection at the time of manufacture of the machine 1 .

Here, a specific aspect of the initial operation of the main control board side movable body performed during the period from timing t4 to t5 will be described. During the period from timing t4 to t5, the initial operation of the second starter door 2414, the initial operation of the first large winning opening door 2417, and the initial operation of the second large winning opening door 2611 are performed by individual drive sources. , and each initial operation is an open/close operation in which a short opening of 1 second or less and a long opening of 3 seconds or more are performed. That is, the initial operation of the second starting door 2414, the initial operation of the first large winning opening door 2417, and the initial operation of the second large winning opening door 2611 are each first opened for 0.5 seconds, and then A combination action is set for the initial action of closing for 1 second followed by opening for 3 seconds. Such a combination operation for the initial operation (an operation of opening for 3 seconds after opening for 0.5 seconds) is an operation that does not appear when the main control board side movable body operates during the course of the game. With this, it is possible to clarify that the operation is not due to returning to the game (time saving game or big hit game) before the power failure, and to prevent misrecognition during inspection work. In addition, regarding the individual actions of short opening and long opening, it is checked whether or not normal action can be performed by making the action that can appear even when the main control board side movable body moves in the course of the game. accuracy can be improved, which is preferable.

In addition, with respect to the initial operation of the second start door 2414, the initial operation of the first large winning opening door 2417, and the initial operation of the second large winning opening door 2611, it is possible to detect whether each initial operation has been performed normally. can be In each initial operation, after moving from the initial position (closed state) to the operating position (open position), an operation for returning from the operating position to the initial position is performed. An initial position detection sensor is provided for each of the winning prize opening door 2417 and the second prize winning opening door 2621, and when an abnormality is detected in which the movable body does not return to the initial position, the subsequent operation of the movable body is detected. may be maintained in a state in which the game cannot be progressed. This prevents the outflow of defective products and loss of holes.

Further, during the period from timing t4 to t5, the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is performed. Even if the game ball B enters a ball entrance such as the mouth 2006, it is treated as invalid, and after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5, such a ball entrance is entered. The entered game ball B is treated as valid. Specifically, in the period from timing t4 to t5, "detection corresponding to each of the ball entry openings such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2006, etc. A mode in which the power supply to the detection sensor is cut off so as not to perform detection by the sensor itself", a mode in which detection is performed by the detection sensor but no detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310", or , "Detection is performed by a detection sensor, and a detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, but based on the detection signal, no detection signal or command is sent to other boards such as the payout control board 633. A mode in which output is not performed", and the like. Also, after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5, "detection by the detection sensor is performed, the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, and the payout is performed based on the detection signal. It is a mode in which detection signals and commands can be output to other boards such as the control board 633."

In addition to the above, during the period from timing t4 to t5, the game ball B is prevented from being paid out from the payout device 580, and after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5, the game ball is released from the payout device 580. Allows B to pay out. In addition, during the period of timing t4 to t5, it is in a state where it is impossible to perform variable display of special symbols (variable state), and after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5, special symbols The state is shifted to a state in which variable display can be performed (variable state). As a result, even if the game ball B is entered illegally when the ball entrance is opened during the initial operation of the main control board side movable body, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed, and the payout device 580 is released. The game balls B are not put out, and illegal profit can be prevented.

Further, although details will be described later, the special monitor 1310h monitors the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts, calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, and displays the calculation results. Regarding such a special monitor 1310h, during the period from timing t4 to t5, when the game ball B enters the ball entrance, regardless of whether or not detection is performed by the detection sensor corresponding to each ball entry. It is controlled so that it is not added to the number or the number of payouts and is not reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h. Then, after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5, when the game ball B enters the ball entrance, detection is performed by the detection sensor corresponding to each, and the number of entering balls and the number of payouts are performed. It is controlled so that it is added to the number and reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h. As a result, even if the game ball B is entered illegally when the ball entrance is opened during the initial operation of the main control board side movable body, it will not be reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h. Information reliability can be improved. It should be noted that, for several seconds after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t1, control is performed so that the 7 segments and the like for displaying information on the special monitor 1310h are all lit up. As a result, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it can be confirmed whether the special monitor 1310 operates normally.

Also, during the period from timing t4 to t5, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is prevented from being shot from the ball shooting device 540, and after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5, A game ball B is shot from a ball shooting device 540 when a handle 182 is operated. As a result, although the ball entrance is opened at the time of the initial operation of the main control board side movable body, the game ball B is not shot in the first place. It is possible to prevent illegal profits from being obtained.

Further, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting illegal magnetism within the game area 5a and a vibration sensor 3005 for detecting illegal vibration within the game area 5a. During the period from timing t4 to t5, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as effective, and even after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5, it is continued. there is As a result, during the initial operation of the main control board side movable body, when the game ball B is illegally entered when the ball entrance is opened by using a magnet or applying vibration, illegal magnetism or Fraudulent vibrations can be detected, and fraudulent acts can be prevented.

Next, control on the peripheral control board 1510 side will be described. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t1, the peripheral control MPU starts the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit. Then, during the period from timing t1 to timing t3, the processing of steps S1000 and S1002 of the above-described peripheral control unit power-on processing is executed. In the initial setting process in step S1000, the peripheral control MPU itself is initialized, hot start/cold start determination process, wait timer setting process after reset, and various control information (peripheral data) are transferred. Processing and the like are performed (the timing t2 is the completion of the initial setting on the peripheral control board 1510 side).

It should be noted that the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) completes the initialization process of step S1000 before timing t3 at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. After that, various commands can be received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). However, although the completion of the initial setting process in step S1000 is before timing t3 at which the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, it is the time at which the main control MPU completes various initial settings. It may be before timing t4.

After the initial setting is completed at timing t2, the standby screen 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the period until the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5. On the standby screen 1, for example, by displaying a message "Restoring", it is notified that the game cannot be started. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5, the effect display device 1600 displays the standby screen 2 based on the power-on command. On the standby screen 2, for example, by displaying a decorative symbol "123" as a stop symbol, it is notified that the game is waiting for the start of symbol variation. After that, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command at timing t6, the effect display device 1600 starts the variation display (variation effect) of the decorative symbols based on the variation pattern command.

In addition, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5, among the movable bodies mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, a movable body operated by a drive signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 The initial operation of the body (peripheral control board side movable body) has started. Specifically, as the peripheral control board side movable body, the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4, the back upper rear rotary decoration body 3440 and the back upper rear decoration body 3451 mounted on the game board 5, etc. has started the initial operation of the movable body. Each of these peripheral control board side movable bodies is a member that can move between an initial position and an operating position. position) to the operation position (appearance position), and perform accurate positioning so that the movable body waits at the initial position. After the initial motion of the peripheral control board side movable body is completed, an effect using the movable body can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, if a variation pattern in which an effect using a movable body is set during symbol variation is transmitted, a predetermined , the movable body is moved from the initial position to the operating position. However, if the initial movement of the movable body on the peripheral control board side has not been completed at the timing when the movable body moves based on the variation pattern command, the initial movement is given priority and the movable body is controlled not to move. ing.

Note that when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5, among the movable bodies on the peripheral control board side, the movable bodies that are not in the initial positions are first returned to the initial positions, and then Initial operation is started.

Also, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, after the initialization is completed at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5. If the peripheral control board 1510 has not received a power-on command for a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 2 minutes), the predetermined time has passed even though the power-on command has not been received. At the time point, the display of the standby screen 1 on the effect display device 1600 is shifted to the display of the standby screen 2 . Also, when a predetermined time has passed, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is started. This is because, of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, only the power supply to the peripheral control board 1510 side is not supplied. Even in such a case, when the power on the side of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored without receiving the power-on command, the state is set in which the variation performance based on the variation pattern command can be started. Because.

Also, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON, and the RAM clear switch is operated while the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, during the period of timing t3 to t4, the set value However, at the start of the change permission state, a setting change start time command is sent from the main control board 1310 to notify that the change permission state is starting. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . As a result, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change start time command, the effect display device 1600 can notify that the change is permitted by displaying, for example, a message "setting change in progress". It becomes possible. However, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is not started when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change start command, but when it receives the power-on command at timing t5 thereafter. there is

As described above, among the movable bodies mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, the main control board side movable body performs the initial operation during the period from timing t4 to t5, whereas the peripheral control board As for the side movable body, the initial operation is performed after timing t5. That is, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is started after the initial action of the main control board side movable body is completed. In this way, by sequentially performing the initial operations for the main control board side movable body and the peripheral control board side movable body, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not they are operating normally, and inspections during the manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1 are facilitated. can be facilitated.

In the above, when the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5, the main control MPU transmits the power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510, but at timing t4, the main control board A power-on command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 when the initial setting on the 1310 side is completed. In such a case, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t4, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is started. That is, the initial operations of the main control board side movable body and the peripheral control board side movable body are started at the same time. As a result, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body can be completed at an early timing, and the state in which the movable body can be operated based on the variation pattern command can be quickly transitioned to.

Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 266 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Here, only the parts that are different from the case where the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 266, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t1, the main control MPU starts the main control side power on process. Then, during the period from timing t1 to timing t3, the processing of steps S10 to S22 of the main control side power-on processing described above is executed. In the wait time waiting process of step S24, a waiting time (boot timer) is provided for waiting until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted).

When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t1, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning ON the setting key switch 1311a, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the RAM clear switch, the main control MPU controls the timing At t3, steps S29 to S36 are performed to check the main control built-in RAM, and then the set value confirmation display processing of step S28 is performed, and the state in which the set value confirmation display is performed (confirmation display state) is entered. . After that, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key cylinder from the rotational position where the setting key is turned on to the original position. is turned off, the setting value is shifted to a state in which confirmation display is not performed (confirmation impossible state). Then, after turning off the setting key switch 1311a, the main control MPU performs steps S40 to S52 to perform various initial settings (at the timing t5 when the various initial settings are completed).

On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t1, the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on, and the power switch 630a is operated without operating the RAM clear switch to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the setting value confirmation display process of step S28 is not performed at timing t3, and the state in which the setting value confirmation display is performed (confirmation display state) is not performed. During the period from timing t3 to t5, the main control MPU performs steps S29 to S36 to check the main control built-in RAM, and then performs steps S40 to S52 to perform various initial settings.

When the RAM clear switch is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t1, the main control board side movable body is not initialized after various initial settings are completed at timing t5. Upon completion of various initial settings at timing t5, the main control MPU transmits a power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. Also, after various initial settings are completed at timing t5, the state shifts to a state (variable state) in which variable display of special symbols can be performed. That is, at timing t6 after completing various initial settings at timing t5, when the ball enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, the special symbol variation display is started, and the peripheral control board 1510 Send a variation pattern command to

As described above, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in the period of timing t3 to t4, the state in which the setting value can be changed (change permission state) In the period from timing t4 to t5, the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is performed regardless of whether or not it has been performed. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, timing t4 to t5 regardless of whether or not the confirmation display of the setting value is performed (confirmation display state). period is not provided, and the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is not performed. That is, depending on whether or not the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it is possible to determine whether or not the main control board side movable body is initialized. As a result, for example, when inspecting the pachinko machine 1 after it is installed on the game island, if it is desired to check whether the main control board side movable body operates normally, the RAM clear switch can be set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The operator can select whether or not to perform the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side, and inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated.

Regarding the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5. It is intended to start on time.

Also, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON and the power switch 630a is operated without operating the RAM clear switch to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, during the period of timing t3 to t5, the setting It shifts to a state (confirmation display state) in which it is possible to confirm and display the value. to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the confirmation display start command, the effect display device 1600 notifies that the confirmation display state is in effect by displaying, for example, a message "setting value confirmation display in progress". becomes possible. However, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is not started when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the confirmation display start command, but when it receives the power-on command at timing t5 thereafter. there is

In the above description, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is assumed to start when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5. That is, it may be started when the initialization of the peripheral control board 1510 side is completed at the timing t2. Such a modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 267 and 268. FIG. FIG. 267 is a time chart showing a modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and FIG. is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when is not operated. Here, only parts different from FIGS. 265 and 266 will be described below.

As shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, in this modification, when the initial setting of the peripheral control board 1510 side is completed at timing t2, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is started. That is, without waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to receive the power-on command at timing t5, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is started early. As a result, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body can be completed at an early timing, and the state in which the movable body can be operated based on the variation pattern command can be quickly transitioned to.

[Regarding the specific action of the movable body in the predetermined number of symbol changes after the setting change]
In this embodiment, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the predetermined number of symbol fluctuation display after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (in this embodiment, the first time At the start of the variable display of symbols and the 100th variable display of symbols), a suggestion effect is executed to suggest that the setting value has been changed. In this suggestive effect, a specific action is performed with respect to the movable bodies mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5.例文帳に追加If the setting value is not changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the suggestive performance is executed at the start of the variable display of the symbols for the predetermined number of times after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. , so that the movable bodies mounted on the body frame 4 and the game board 5 are prevented from performing specific actions.

First, the case where the specified movement of the movable body is performed in the initial symbol variation display after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 269 . FIG. 269 is a time chart showing the operation timing of the specific operation of the movable body in the initial symbol variation display after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. In the following, first, the case where the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body has already been completed at the time of starting the variable display of symbols for the first time will be described.

As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees. When the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON by moving and turning ON, and the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU performs the setting change process of step S37 at timing t3, and shifts to a state (change permission state) in which the setting value can be changed. In such a change permission state, the setting values (setting values 1 to 6) can be changed each time the RAM clear switch, which functions as a setting switching button, is pressed. After that, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key cylinder from the rotational position where the setting key is turned on to the original position. is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which it is impossible to change the setting of the set value (change-impossible state). After the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the main control MPU performs various initial settings on the main control board 1310 side and the initial operation of the main control board side movable body, and directs the power supply to the peripheral control board 1510. Send an on-board command.

As shown in FIG. 269(A), when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the state shifts to a state in which setting values can be changed (change permission state), and the setting values are changed. In this case, when the power-on command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t5, a setting change completion command indicating that the setting value has been changed is also transmitted. As a result, it can be grasped that the setting value is changed on the side of the peripheral control board 1510 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

After transmitting the power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t5, the main control MPU shifts to a state (variable state) in which it is possible to variably display special symbols. In other words, at timing t6 after transmitting the power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t5, when the ball enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, the variable display of the special symbols is started. At the same time, it transmits a variation pattern command to the peripheral control board 1510 . Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command at timing t6, the peripheral control MPU starts the first variation display (variation presentation) of the decoration pattern in the effect display device 1600 based on the variation pattern command. ing.

After the setting value is changed when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, at the timing t6 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started for the first time, the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is specified. I am trying to take action. Specifically, as a movable body mounted on the main body frame 4, a specific action is performed with respect to the effect operation unit 301, and in addition, as a movable body mounted on the game board 5, a back upper rear decorative body 3451 A specific action is performed on the The effect operation unit 301 is a member that allows the button to move between an initial position (retracted position) and an operating position (protruding position). After that, it returns to the initial position. In addition, the back top decoration 3451 is a member that can move between the initial position (retracted position) and the operating position (appearance position). In the specific action for 3451, the upper back decoration body 3451 moves to the action position and then returns to the initial position.

On the other hand, when the setting value has not been changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, that is, when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on When only the control built-in RAM is cleared, or when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on normally (setting change of setting value, confirmation display of setting value, clearing of main control built-in RAM is not performed) If not), when the variable display of decorative symbols is started for the first time after that, the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is not subjected to the specific action.

As described above, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started for the first time after that, the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are loaded. A specific action is performed with respect to the movable body. As for the setting change of the setting value, for example, the hall manager makes it before the opening of the hall, so after the opening of the hall, the player should know whether the setting change of the setting value has been made before the game. can't. However, by starting the game and starting the variable display of the decorative symbols for the first time, whether or not a specific action is performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, that is, setting of the set value A player can know if changes have been made. As a result, when the hall is opened, it is possible to positively start the game in order to know whether or not the setting value has been changed.

Further, regarding the specific action for the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the variable display of the decoration pattern for the first time is performed. Including the start time, it is performed at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols for a predetermined number of times. For example, in addition to the start of the first variable display of the decorative symbols, it is also performed at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols for the specified number of times every 100 times. As a result, even if the game is not immediately after the opening of the hall, it is possible to know whether or not the setting value has been changed, and the game can be positively started.

Here, in the variation pattern, the variation time of the special symbol (decorative symbol) and the content of the effect executed by the peripheral control board 1510 during the variation time are set. For example, as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which an effect using a movable body is set during the variable display of decorative symbols is transmitted, a variation effect As a part of , the movable body is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the decorative pattern. However, all the variation patterns are set so that the movable body does not move for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the variation display of the decorative symbols. That is, for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the movement of the movable body based on the variable pattern is restricted. When the setting value has been changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the movable parts mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are displayed at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols for the predetermined number of times. The specific action for the body is not based on the variation pattern, and is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the variation display of the decorative pattern. Does this imply that the set values are changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when a specific action is performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5? , whether the degree of expectation is suggested as part of the variable performance based on the variable pattern.

Further, when performing a specific action on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, the action time of the specific action is shorter than the action time of the movable body based on the variation pattern. is set to be As a result, for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the variable display of the decorative design, the movement of the movable body based on the variable pattern is restricted, but the variable display of the decorative design for the predetermined number of times is performed. By shortening the operation time of the specific operation at the time of starting, the limited time can be shortened.

In this example, after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols for the predetermined number of times, the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are loaded. Although the specific action is uniformly performed on the movable body, as a modification, either a specific action A suggesting a set value or a specific action B not suggesting a set value is performed. can be Specifically, at the start of the variable display of decorative symbols for a predetermined number of times, the peripheral control MPU obtains a predetermined random value X and a random value Y, and determines whether or not to execute the specific action A (execution lottery). is performed based on the acquired random number value X, and the specific action A or the specific action B is performed based on the result of the execution determination. Further, when determining the specific action A, any one of the specific action A1 suggesting a low set value, the specific action A2 suggesting a high set value, and the specific action A3 suggesting a set value 6 is selected. It is determined according to the set value and the random value Y. Here, when the set values currently set are set values 1 to 3, the probability that the specific action A1 suggesting a low set value is higher than the specific action A2 (specific action A1:specific action A2=7: 3), the effect is determined according to the value of the random value Y with reference to the low setting effect distribution table. Further, when the setting value is 4 to 5, the high setting determines the specific action A2 suggesting the high setting value with a higher probability than the specific action A1 (specific action A1:specific action A2=3:7 ratio). An effect distribution table 1 is referred to, and an effect is determined according to the value of the random number Y. Further, when the setting value is 6, the specific actions A1 to A3 including the specific action A3 suggesting the setting value 6, which is not determined when the setting values are 1 to 5, have a predetermined probability (the specific action A1 : specific action A2:specific action A3=1:5:4 ratio), the effect is determined according to the value of the random value Y with reference to the effect distribution table 2 for high setting. In other words, the specific actions A1 and A2 may be output regardless of the current set value. When A3 is output, it is determined that the set value currently set is set value 6. FIG. In this way, when the specific action A is executed, the player can have expectations according to the suggestions of the set values that can be grasped from the specific action A.

Further, in this example, when the setting value has not been changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are displayed at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols for the predetermined number of times thereafter. Although it is designed not to move with respect to the mounted movable body, it is acceptable if it does not perform the specified motion, and it may perform a non-specified motion different from the specified motion. As non-specific actions for the movable bodies mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, for example, the effect operation unit 301 moves slightly from the initial position (moves to the extent that it does not move to the action position), or For example, the decoration body 3451 may slightly move from the initial position (moving to the extent that it does not move to the operating position). In this way, when the setting value is not changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, even if a non-specific action is performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, , the difference from the specific operation is clear, and it is possible to clearly grasp that the setting value has not been changed.

Further, in this example, as a suggestive effect suggesting that the setting value has been changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main body frame 4 and the game board are displayed at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols for the predetermined number of times. 5, the suggestive effect may be performed by displaying a specific image using the effect display device 1600, or specified from a speaker. You may make it perform by the output of a sound.

Regarding the above description of FIG. 269(A), after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, at the timing t6 when the first pattern variation display is started, the peripheral control board side Since the initial motion of the movable body has been completed, the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 can be subjected to a specific motion at the time of starting the variable display of the symbols for the first time. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269(B), after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, at timing t6 when the first pattern variation display is started, the peripheral control board side movable If the initial motion of the body is not completed, the specific motion cannot be performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 at the start of the initial variable display of symbols. In such a case, at the start of the variable display of symbols, which is started after the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is completed, the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 I'm trying to do a specific action. For example, at timing t6, when the first symbol variation display is started, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is not completed, but when the second symbol variation display is started, the peripheral control board side When the initial movement of the movable body is completed, the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is made to perform a specific movement at the start of the second symbol variation display. ing. As a result, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the specific action can be performed without fail, and the information obtained from the specific action can be prevented from being overlooked. can.

Also, regarding the above description of FIG. 269(A), when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5 after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, The initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is being performed, but the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body has been completed normally. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269(C), in the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body, if an abnormality such as the peripheral control board side movable body not returning to the initial position occurs, the initial pattern variation will occur. Including the start of the display, at the start of the variable display of the pattern for the predetermined number of times, the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is not subjected to a specific action. However, in this example, as the movable body that performs the specific action, there are the effect operation section 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 and the back upper rear decorative body 3451 mounted on the game board 5, and an abnormality occurs. If only one of the movable bodies is selected, the specific action is not performed for the abnormal movable body, whereas the specific action is performed for the movable body that has completed the initial action normally. I have to. As a result, when the setting of the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the movable body in which the abnormality has occurred can be removed and the specific action can be performed, and the information obtained from the specific action can be displayed. You can avoid missing it.

Also, in the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body, if an abnormality such as the peripheral control board side movable body not returning to the initial position occurs, after the abnormality occurs, the movable body is used during the pattern fluctuation. Even if the variation pattern in which the effect is set is transmitted, the movable body is not moved from the initial position to the operation position at a predetermined timing during pattern variation. However, the movement based on the variation pattern is simply not performed for the movable body in which an abnormality has occurred in the initial movement, and the movable body that completed the initial movement normally can perform the movement based on the variation pattern. .

[Regarding the standby position of the movable body after changing the settings]
In this embodiment, when the setting value is not changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control board side movable body is in normal standby mode when the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is completed. In contrast, if the setting value has been changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control board side movable body will be positioned at the completion of the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body. It is designed to change to a position different from the normal standby position. In other words, if the setting of the set value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the set value will be changed depending on the standby position of the peripheral control board side movable body when the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is completed. A suggestive effect is being executed to suggest that a setting change has been made.

First, regarding the case where the standby position of the peripheral control board side movable body changes when the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is completed after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, FIG. will be described with reference to FIG. 294 is a time chart showing the standby position of the peripheral control board side movable body at the completion of the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. . In the following, first, the case where the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body has already been completed at the time of starting the variable display of symbols for the first time will be described.

As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees. When the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON by moving and turning ON, and the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU performs the setting change process of step S37 at timing t3, and shifts to a state (change permission state) in which the setting value can be changed. In such a change permission state, the setting values (setting values 1 to 6) can be changed each time the RAM clear switch, which functions as a setting switching button, is pressed. After that, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key cylinder from the rotational position where the setting key is turned on to the original position. is turned off, the setting value is shifted to a state in which it is impossible to change the setting (change-impossible state). After the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the main control MPU performs various initial settings on the main control board 1310 side and the initial operation of the main control board side movable body, and directs the power supply to the peripheral control board 1510. Send an on-board command.

As shown in FIG. 294(A), when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the state shifts to a state in which setting values can be changed (change permission state), and the setting values are changed. In this case, when the power-on command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t5, a setting change completion command indicating that the setting value has been changed is also transmitted. As a result, it can be grasped that the setting value is changed on the side of the peripheral control board 1510 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5, the movable bodies ( peripheral control board side movable body) has started initial operation. Specifically, as the peripheral control board side movable body, the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4, the back upper rear rotary decoration body 3440 and the back upper rear decoration body 3451 mounted on the game board 5, etc. has started the initial operation of the movable body. Each of these peripheral control board side movable bodies is a member that can move between an initial position and an operating position. position) to the operation position (appearance position), and perform accurate positioning so that the movable body waits at the initial position.

At the end of the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body, each movable body is returned to the initial position, and then the movable body waits at the initial position. However, among the movable bodies on the peripheral control board side, specific movable bodies, here, the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4, the back upper rear rotary decorative body 3440 mounted on the game board 5, and the back upper rear Regarding the decorative body 3451, there are cases where the setting of the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and when the setting of the setting value is not changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The standby position of the specific movable body at the end of the initial movement of the body is made different. Specifically, when the setting value is not changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body, the standby position A which is the initial position of the specific movable body (Normal standby position), in contrast, if the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body, the specific movable body The movable body is located at one of standby positions B to D, which is different from the initial position of the movable body.

As described above, if the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body, the standby position A, which is the initial position of the specific movable body It is positioned at one of the standby positions B to D different from the (normal standby position), after which the specific movable body waits at that standby position. As for the setting change of the set value, for example, the hall manager makes the change before the opening of the hall. can't know However, before the start of the game after the opening of the hall, the specific movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is waiting at any one of waiting positions B to D different from the normal waiting position. By confirming whether or not, the player can know whether or not the setting value has been changed. As a result, when it is confirmed that the set values have been changed after the opening of the hall, the game can be actively started.

In this example, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the standby position of the specific movable body at the end of the initial movement of the specific movable body is changed to the initial position of the specific movable body. is different from the standby position A (normal standby position), and furthermore, the standby position of a specific movable body is changed according to the currently set value (set value after change). . That is, the setting value currently set (the setting value after change) is suggested by the standby position of the specific movable body. Specifically, standby positions B to D are prepared as standby positions different from the normal standby position of a specific movable body, and the currently set setting values are set values 1, 3, and 5. , it is possible to determine the standby position B, which suggests that the set value is an odd number. Further, when the set values currently set are set values 2, 4, and 6, it is possible to determine the standby position C, which suggests that the set values are even numbers. Further, when the currently set set values are set values 5 and 6, the standby position D can be determined to indicate a high set value. If the currently set value is 5, the ratio of standby position B higher than standby position D (standby position B: Standby position D = 7:3 ratio) with reference to the effect distribution table for set value 5 (random value (when the standby position is determined (at the start of the initial movement of a specific movable A decision is made according to the value of the obtained random number). Similarly, when the currently set setting value is 6, the ratio of the standby position C to the standby position D is higher than the standby position D (standby position C : Standby position D = 7:3 ratio) Refer to the effect distribution table for set value 6 to determine the random value (random value obtained in )) is determined. As a result, it is not determined that the current setting values of the standby position B and the standby position C are set low or high, but that the standby position D is set high. As a result, when a specific movable body is waiting at the standby position D, it is possible to have an expectation corresponding to the suggestion of a high set value that can be grasped from the standby position D.

Among the specific movable bodies, standby positions B to D of the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 are arranged in the order of standby position B, standby position C, and standby position D. is located so that the amount of movement from the standby position of the Similarly, with regard to the standby positions B to D of the back upper rear rotary decoration body 3440 and the back upper rear decoration body 3451 mounted on the game board 5, the standby position B, the standby position C, and the standby position D are arranged in this order. It is located so that the amount of movement from position A (normal standby position) is large.

In this example, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, at the end of the initial movement of the specific movable body, the standby positions B to D different from the initial position of the specific movable body However, at the end of the initial movement of the specific movable body, the specific movable body may be moved back to the initial position. In such a case, at the end of the initial movement of the specific movable body, after returning the specific movable body to the initial position, the initial movement of the specific movable body is performed by a movement different from the initial movement of the specific movable body. It operates so as to be positioned at one of standby positions B to D, which are different from the position.

Further, in this example, the specific movable bodies include the production operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4, and the back top rear rotary decoration 3440 and back top rear decoration 3451 mounted on the game board 5. It is Of these, the effect operation unit 301 is mounted on the main body frame 4, so when it is positioned at the standby positions B to D different from the initial position, it is directed to the outside such as a customer who is not playing a game. It is possible to greatly appeal that the setting change of the setting value is being performed. In addition, since the effect operation unit 301 is exposed so that it can be touched from the outside, there is a possibility that the standby position will be changed unjustly due to mischief. It is easy and can prevent the occurrence of mischief. On the other hand, since the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back upper rear decoration 3451 are mounted on the game board 5, they cannot be contacted from the outside, and the standby position is changed illegally by mischief. never.

Further, in this example, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are used as specific movable bodies. Both of the back upper rear rotary decoration body 3440 and the back upper rear decoration body 3451 are operated so as to be positioned at any one of standby positions B to D different from the initial position of the specific movable body. However, it may be possible to select only one of them so as to operate so as to be positioned at any one of the standby positions B to D. In such a case, for example, it is mounted on the main body frame 4 rather than the case where only the standby positions of the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 and the back upper rear decoration 3451 mounted on the game board 5 are changed. A higher set value may be suggested when only the standby position of the effect operation unit 301 changes. Furthermore, only one of the standby positions of the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 and the back upper rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back upper rear decoration body 3451 mounted on the game board 5 is changed. A change in both standby positions may indicate a high setpoint rather than a change in both standby positions, and a change in both standby positions may establish setpoint 6. may

Further, in this example, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the fact that the setting value has been changed is indicated by the change in the standby position of the specific movable body. Although it is suggested, it is not limited to the movable body whose standby position can be changed. good. Even in such a case, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the change from the normal stop mode suggests that the setting value is being changed. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 294(A), after transmitting the power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t5, the main control MPU enters a state in which it is possible to variably display special symbols (variable state ). That is, at timing t6 after transmitting the power-on command toward the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t5, when the ball enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, the variable display of the special symbols is started. At the same time, it transmits a variation pattern command to the peripheral control board 1510 . Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command at timing t6, the peripheral control MPU starts the first variation display (variation presentation) of the decoration pattern in the effect display device 1600 based on the variation pattern command. ing.

At timing t6, when the variable display of decorative patterns is started for the first time, a specific movable body positioned at one of standby positions BD is operating to return to the initial position (normal standby position). As a result, during the first variable display of decorative symbols, an effect using a specific movable body can be executed based on the variable pattern. It should be noted that, in the variation pattern, the variation time of the special symbol (decorative symbol) and the effect content to be executed on the peripheral control board 1510 side during the variation time are set. For example, as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which an effect using a movable body is set during the variable display of decorative symbols is transmitted, a variation effect As a part of , the movable body is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In the above, when the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 at timing t6, the variable display of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is started. Only at the start of the variable display of the special symbols based on the sphere, the specific movable body located in any of the standby positions B to D is operating to return to the initial position (normal standby position). On the other hand, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2004, the specific movable body positioned at one of the standby positions BD is at the initial position (normal standby position). I am trying not to go back. When the setting value is changed when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the RAM is initialized (RAM clear), and the game is always started from the normal game state (low probability non-time saving state). Therefore, entry into the second starting port 2004 is not permitted. Therefore, as the initial variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2004 should not be performed, and the ball is entered into the second starting port 2004 by fraud. It is possible that In such a case, even if the variable display of the special symbol is performed for the first time, the specific movable body does not return to the initial position (normal standby position) and remains positioned at one of the standby positions B to D. Therefore, it is easy for the hall manager to notice, and the fraudulent act itself can be deterred.

Regarding the above description of FIG. 294(A), after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control is already started before the initial symbol fluctuation display is started at the timing t6. Since the initial movement of the substrate-side movable body is completed, the standby position different from the standby position A (normal standby position), which is the initial position of the specific movable body, at the end of the initial movement of the specific movable body Located in any of B-D. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 294(B), after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, at timing t6, when the first symbol variation display is started, the peripheral control board can be moved. If the initial movement of the body has not been completed, the specific movable body does not reach any of the standby positions B to D at the end of the initial movement of the specific movable body, and the standby position, which is the initial position It is positioned at A (normal standby position). For example, after the start of the variable display of the pattern for the first time, at the end of the initial movement of the specific movable body, if the specific movable body is positioned in any of the standby positions B to D, the variable effect based on the variation pattern However, positioning at the standby position A (normal standby position), which is the initial position, does not cause such a misunderstanding.

294(A), when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5 after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, The initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is being performed, but the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body has been completed normally. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 294(C), in the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body, if an abnormality such as the peripheral control board side movable body not returning to the initial position occurs, the specific movable body At the end of the initial operation, the specific movable body is not positioned at any one of the standby positions BD. However, in this example, as specific movable bodies, there are the effect operation section 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 and the back upper rear decorative body 3451 mounted on the game board 5, and the movable body in which an abnormality occurs If the body is in one of the standby positions B to D, the movable body in which the abnormality has occurred is not located in any one of the standby positions B to D, whereas the movable body that has completed the initial operation normally is located in any one of the standby positions B to D. I'm trying to be located somewhere. As a result, when the setting of the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the specific movable body except for the movable body in which an abnormality has occurred is positioned at one of the standby positions B to D. It is possible to prevent missing information obtained from the standby position of the specific movable body.

In the above description, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is assumed to start when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5. 267 and 268). Also in such a case, at the end of the initial movement of the specific movable body, any one of the standby positions B to D different from the standby position A (normal standby position) which is the initial position of the specific movable body It is assumed to operate so as to be located in As a result, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is completed at an early timing, so that the specific movable body can quickly shift to a standby state at one of the standby positions BD.

[Regarding restrictions on suggestive effects after an abnormality occurs]
In this embodiment, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when the number of big wins after the setting value change reaches a predetermined number (6 times in this example) Then, a suggesting effect is executed to suggest that the setting value has been changed. This suggestive effect is executed using lamp light emission and sound output from a speaker. In addition to such a configuration, in the present embodiment, when an abnormality is detected after the setting value is changed and before the suggestive effect is executed, the suggestive effect is not executed at the execution timing of the suggestive effect. controlling. The relationship between such suggestive effects and abnormality detection will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 295 is a time chart showing the relationship between suggestive effects and abnormality detection.

As shown in FIG. 295, when the setting value is changed at timing t1 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, then the game ball B is accepted into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. The number of big hits is counted when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the lottery results in a big hit. At timing t3, when the number of big wins reaches a predetermined number of times (six times in this example) after the setting of the set value is changed, a suggestion performance is executed to suggest that the setting of the set value has been changed. . In this suggestion effect, by executing the effect according to the currently set setting value (setting value after change), it not only suggests that the setting value has been changed, but also It also suggests setting values In addition, the suggestive effect is executed at the end of the big win game based on the predetermined number of times (in this example, the sixth time) big win after the change in setting of the set value.

Further, in the suggestive effect, any one of the suggestive effects A to C is executed as an effect corresponding to the currently set set value (set value after change). Specifically, an execution determination (execution lottery) is performed as to which of the suggestive effects A to C is to be executed. When it is determined that it is the end time of , the peripheral control MPU obtains a predetermined random value X, and suggests a suggestion effect A suggesting a low set value, a suggestion effect B suggesting a high set value, and a suggestion suggesting a set value 6. One of the performances C is determined according to the currently set set value and the random number value X. Here, when the set values currently set are set values 1 to 3, the probability that the suggestive effect A suggesting the low set value is higher than the suggestive effect B (suggestive effect A: suggestive effect B=7: 3), the effect is decided according to the value of the random value X with reference to the low setting effect distribution table. In addition, when the setting value is 4 to 5, the high setting that determines the suggestive effect B that suggests the high set value with a higher probability than the suggestive effect A (the ratio of the suggestive effect A: the suggestive effect B=3:7). An effect distribution table 1 is referred to, and an effect is determined according to the value of the random number value X. In addition, when the set value is 6, the suggestive effects A to C including the suggestive effect C suggesting the set value 6, which is not determined when the set values are 1 to 5, are performed at a predetermined probability (suggestive effect A : Suggestive effect B: Suggestive effect C=1:5:4 ratio). In other words, suggestive effects A and B may be output regardless of the current set value. , it is determined that the set value currently set is the set value 6. In this way, when the suggestive effect is executed, the player can have an expectation corresponding to the suggestion of the set value that can be grasped from the suggestive effect.

As the suggestive effect A suggesting a low set value, effect data is used in which a sound "beep" is output from the speaker and the lamps mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 emit blue light. As the suggestive effect B suggesting a high set value, effect data is used in which a sound "beep" is output from the speaker and the lamps mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 emit red light. As the suggestive effect C suggesting the set value 6, a sound "beep beep" is output from the speaker, and the lamps mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 emit light in rainbow colors. is used. In this manner, by executing the voice output and the lighting of the lamp differently for each setting value suggestion, it is possible to grasp what kind of setting value is being suggested.

On the other hand, when the setting value has not been changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, that is, when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on When only the control built-in RAM is cleared, or when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on normally (setting change, setting value confirmation display, and clearing of the main control built-in RAM are not performed) If not), even if the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 after that becomes a big hit, It is not counted as the number of hits. In other words, even if the number of jackpot hits reaches a predetermined number of times (six times in this example) after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the suggestion effect is not executed, and the currently set set value is also suggested. No.

Also, in this example, after changing the set value, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 becomes a big hit. The number of big wins is counted when a small win occurs, but the number of big wins is not counted when a small win occurs. Here, when the set value is changed, the big hit probability is changed, but the small win probability is not changed. For this reason, only the big hits related to the setting change of the setting value are counted as the number of times in the execution conditions of the suggestive effect, and the small wins not related to the setting change of the setting value are counted as the number of times. It is not included in the execution conditions of the suggestive production.

The pachinko machine 1 of this example monitors whether or not an abnormality has occurred by various methods. Specifically, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting illegal magnetism within the game area 5a and a vibration sensor 3005 for detecting illegal vibration within the game area 5a. Whether or not a magnet is used or vibration is applied is monitored, and if detection is made by the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005, an illegal act such as using a magnet or applying vibration is performed. Since there is a high possibility that the game ball B will illegally enter the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) after that, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

In addition, in the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving state), the game ball B that has flowed down the left side area of the game area 5a is allowed to enter the first start port 2002 that can enter. On the other hand, it is not allowed to enter the second start opening 2004 into which the game ball B that has flowed down the right area of the game area 5a can enter. Therefore, in the normal game state (low probability non-time saving state), it is monitored whether the game ball B is hit in the right side area of the game area 5a, and the game ball B flows down the right side area of the game area 5a. If it is detected that it is there, there is a possibility that the game ball B is hit into the right side area of the game area 5a in an attempt to illegally enter the ball into the second start hole 2004, so an abnormality has occurred. I believe there is.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a door frame open switch for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and a main body frame open switch for detecting opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. . When the door frame opening switch or the body frame opening switch is detected even though the game is in progress, the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4 or the body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. 4 is being opened, and there is a possibility that a ball may be illegally entered into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, or a big hit may be illegally generated. has occurred.

When an abnormality is detected at timing t2, a speaker, LEDs provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, etc. are used to notify the abnormality to the outside. As an abnormality notification, in order to inform the outside that an abnormality has occurred, a warning message is output from a speaker, or an LED provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 blinks with strong light emission. . Also, as a warning message, the display contents are varied depending on the type of abnormality. For example, when the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 detects and determines that an abnormality has occurred, a warning message "magnetism (vibration) detected" is output. In addition, when it is detected that the game ball B is flowing down the right side area of the game area 5a and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, a warning message "Please return to left-handed hitting" is output. doing. In addition, the door frame open switch and the body frame open switch are detected, and when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, a warning message "door is open" is output.

Further, the anomaly notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) from the time when the anomaly is detected. However, if the anomaly is resolved before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the anomaly was detected, the anomaly notification is terminated at that point. For example, when it is detected that the game ball B is flowing down the right side area of the game area 5a and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, the game ball B is made to flow down the left side area of the game area 5a. , the abnormality is resolved and the abnormality notification is terminated. Further, the door frame opening switch and the body frame opening switch are detected, and when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 or the body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. 4 is closed, the abnormality is resolved and the abnormality notification is terminated.

When an abnormality is detected at timing t2, even if the number of big hits reaches a predetermined number (six times in this example) at timing t3 after changing the setting of the set value, the suggestive performance is restricted so as not to be executed. ing. In other words, if an abnormality is detected after the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and before the number of big hits reaches a predetermined number (six times in this example), a suggestive effect is produced. Even at the execution timing, the suggestion performance is not executed. Fraudulent activity is suspected as the cause of the abnormality detection, and if such fraudulent activity is suspected, information on the fact that the setting value has been changed and the currently set value is obtained. Since it is impossible to do so, it is possible to give a penalty for fraudulent behavior and deter fraudulent behavior itself.

More specifically, when an abnormality is detected at timing t2, the abnormality is notified for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) from the time when the abnormality is detected. Even if comes, the suggestion production is not executed. In other words, even if the number of big hits reaches a predetermined number of times (six times in this example) after the setting value is changed during the execution of the abnormality notification, the abnormality notification is executed with priority over the suggestive effect. It is possible to clearly indicate to the outside that an abnormality has occurred.

Further, when an abnormality is detected at timing t2, the abnormality is reported for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) from the point of time when the abnormality is detected. Also, it does not perform the suggested rendition. That is, even if the number of big hits reaches a predetermined number of times (six times in this example) after the abnormality notification is completed, the setting value is not changed by not executing the suggestive effect. information about the settings that are currently set.

In this example, if the abnormality detected at timing t2 is a specific abnormality, all suggestive effects including voice output, lamp lighting, and effect display are restricted to not be executed. If there is no specific abnormality, it is restricted so that only a part of the suggestive effect consisting of voice output, lamp light emission, and effect display is not executed. In other words, the extent to which the suggestive effect is restricted differs depending on the type (degree) of the abnormality. Specifically, when the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 is detected at timing t2, it is determined that a serious abnormality (a specific abnormality) has occurred, and audio output, lamp emission, and production are performed. While it is restricted so as not to execute all the suggestive effects consisting of display, when it is detected that the game ball B is flowing down the right side area of the game area 5a at the timing t2, or when the door frame is detected. If the opening switch or the body frame opening switch is detected, it is determined that a minor abnormality has occurred, and among the suggestive effects consisting of voice output, lamp lighting, and effect display, only voice output is not executed. , and the lighting of the lamp and the effect display are executed. Here, when the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 is detected, there is a very high possibility that a fraudulent act such as using a magnet or applying vibration is being performed. While it is determined that a (specific abnormality) has occurred, when it is detected that the game ball B is flowing down the right side area of the game area 5a, the player simply plays the game. There is a possibility that the ball B is hit in the wrong area, or if the door frame open switch or body frame open switch is detected, it is possible that the hall manager simply opened the door frame 3 or body frame 4. It is judged that there is a minor abnormality because it is not necessarily a fraudulent act. In this way, when a serious abnormality occurs, there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed, and since all of the suggestion performance is restricted so as not to be executed, the fraudulent act itself can be deterred.

In the above, depending on the type (degree) of the abnormality, some or all of the suggestive effects consisting of sound output, lamp lighting, and effect display are restricted so as not to be executed. may not be executed. In addition, when an abnormality is detected, it is possible to suppress the mode of outputting suggestive effects consisting of sound output, lamp light emission, and effect display. In this way, when the mode of outputting the suggestive performance consisting of voice output, lamp light emission, and performance display is suppressed, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the suggestive performance is being executed at the execution timing of the suggestive performance.

In this example, when the number of big hits reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, 6 times) after the setting value is changed, the suggestive effect is executed. Before the number of big wins reaches a predetermined number of times, every time a big win is made after changing the setting of the set value, the suggestion performance may be executed. In other words, when the predetermined number of times of the big wins is 6 times, the suggestive performance may be executed for each of the 1st to 5th big wins. As the suggestive effect, one of the suggestive effects A to C is executed as a effect corresponding to the set value currently set (the set value after change). , suggesting that expectations are high at high settings. When the suggestive performance is executed for each of the 1st to 6th big wins, the suggested performance is executed for each of the 1st to 6th big wins so that the degree of expectation can be increased step by step, At the sixth big hit, the final suggestion effect is executed to suggest the high set value of expectation. Incidentally, in each of the 1st to 5th big wins, of the suggestive effects A to C, the suggestive effect C in which it is determined that the currently set setting value is 6 is not executed. For example, in the sixth jackpot, when the suggestive effect C is executed as the final suggestive effect, the suggestive effect A→suggestive effect A→suggestive effect A→suggestive effect B→in each of the 1st to 5th big wins. It is possible to execute in the order of the suggestive effect B. As a result, since the final degree of expectation cannot be grasped before the number of big wins reaches 6 after the setting change of the set value, until the number of big wins reaches 6, The game can be continued with anticipation.

In the above, the suggestive effect can be executed each time a big win is achieved after the setting value is changed, but if an abnormality is detected at timing t2, the suggestive effect is executed at the subsequent execution timing of the suggestive effect. restricted not to. Specifically, when the predetermined number of times of the big win is 6 times, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect even in each of the 1st to 5th big wins. When an abnormality is detected in , the execution of the suggestive performance is restricted at the time of the third and subsequent big wins.

Further, in this example, at the end of the jackpot game based on the predetermined number of times (in this example, the sixth time) after the setting value is changed, the suggestive effect is executed. Then, it is sufficient if the suggestive effect is executed with the 6th big hit as a trigger. For example, when the jackpot result (stop pattern) is displayed based on the predetermined number of times (in this example, the sixth time) after changing the setting value, or the predetermined number of times after changing the setting value (in this example, , 6th) may be during execution of a jackpot game based on the jackpot. Further, after the jackpot game based on the predetermined number of times (in this example, the sixth time) jackpot after the setting value is changed, the demonstration (demonstration performed while the player is waiting) is executed. , as a suggestive effect, the content of the demonstration (e.g., the lighting mode of the lamp) may be changed. A demonstration is an effect that is started when a state in which no game is played continues for a predetermined period of time. As a result, after the jackpot game based on the predetermined number of times (in this example, the sixth time) the jackpot after the change of the setting value, when the game is not played, the contents of the demonstration can be confirmed. It is possible to grasp whether or not the degree of expectation, which is the high set value, is high, and when it is indicated that the degree of expectation, which is the high set value, is high, it is possible to increase the motivation to start the game. It should be noted that the contents of the demonstration executed as the suggestive effect can be terminated by, for example, operating the effect operation unit 301, and the content of the demonstration can be confirmed to determine whether the high set value of the expectation is high. If the hall manager does not want to know, the hall manager operates the effect operation unit 301 so as not to be able to grasp whether or not the expectation level, which is the high set value, is high.

[Regarding contact/non-contact with the steering wheel and single-shot button]
In this embodiment, as a configuration related to the handle 182 and the single-shot button 193, a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and a single button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the single button 193 is being pressed during the rotation operation, and detects the operation status of the handle 182 and the single button 193 .

First, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the player and detects the static electricity acting on the player's handle 182 or the like. It detects contact with the In other words, when the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects, but when the player does not touch the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 does not.

The single-shot button operation sensor 194 has a function of detecting whether or not the handle 182 is not being rotated (non-rotating state), and has a function of detecting whether the single-shot button 193 is pressed while the handle 182 is being rotated. It has a function of detecting whether or not there is. That is, when the handle 182 is not being rotated, or when the single-shot button 193 is pressed while the handle 182 is being rotated, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the rotation of the handle 182. When the single-shot button 193 is not pressed during operation, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 does not detect it. As for the single-shot button 193, by pressing the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the shooting of the game ball B is temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182. In addition, by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the game ball B can be hit again into the game area 5a with the hitting strength before the single-shot button 193 was operated.

Next, referring to FIG. 271, the signal paths of the handle touch sensor 192 and the single button operation sensor 194 will be described. FIG. 271 is a diagram for explaining signal paths during detection of the handle touch sensor 192 and the single button operation sensor 194. FIG.

A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the relay board 106 behind the handle. When receiving the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 , the firing control section 633 b outputs the detection signal to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 .

Similarly, the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the relay board 106 after the handle. Then, when the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input, the firing control section 633b outputs the detection signal toward the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU selects one of the following four operation states depending on whether or not a detection signal is input from the handle touch sensor 192 and whether or not a detection signal is input from the one-shot button operation sensor 194. I know which one it is.

As a first operation state, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is not input and the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input, the player is not in contact with the handle 182. Therefore, it is determined that the handle 182 is not rotated and that the game is not being played.

As a second operation state, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input and the detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194 is not input, the player touches the handle 182 and This is a state in which the single-shot button 193 is not pressed during the rotating operation of the handle 182, and it is determined that this is a normal operation state in which the game ball B is to be shot.

Further, as a third operation state, when a detection signal is input from the handle touch sensor 192 and a detection signal is input from the one-shot button operation sensor 194, the player touches the handle 182 and Either the handle 182 is not being rotated, or the player is in contact with the handle 182 and pressing the single-shot button 193 while the handle 182 is being rotated. We have determined that it is a normal operating situation to try to temporarily stop the launch.

As a fourth operation state, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is not input and the detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194 is not input, the player touches the handle 182. It is determined that the handle 182 is rotating even though the player is not playing, and that this is an abnormal operating situation that cannot occur in a normal game.

The main control MPU performs the above-described firing permission signal setting process (step S113), and sets the logic of the firing permission signal that tells the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the game ball B is permitted to be fired. making it possible. In this processing, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input and the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is not input, the logic of the firing permission signal can be set to firing permission logic. On the other hand, even if the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input, when the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input, the firing stop logic ( firing non-permissible logic). That is, when the handle 182 is touched and the single-shot button 193 is not operated, it is possible to output a firing permission signal toward the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, while the single-shot button 193 is operated. Sometimes, there is no need to output a firing permission signal toward the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, regardless of whether or not the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is not input, the firing permission logic is inverted as the logic of the firing permission signal. It is set to stop logic (fire non-permission logic). That is, when the handle 182 is not touched, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633. FIG.

When the handle 182 is rotated while the firing control unit 633b is receiving the firing permission signal, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. On the other hand, even when the handle 182 is touched, when the single-shot button 193 is operated, even if the handle 182 is rotated to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, the launch permission signal is not received. For some reason, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit.

Also, in the fourth operation situation (abnormal operation situation) in which the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, is the period during which the firing permission signal is not received (the period during which the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact), so the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. It has become. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a manner different from the original to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

When the main control MPU receives the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 and does not receive the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, it permits firing toward the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. When outputting the firing permission signal, a firing permission timing command is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 to inform that it is time to output the firing permission signal. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state where the player is not pressing the single-shot button 193 while the handle 182 is being rotated while the player is in contact with the handle 182 during the period when the firing permission command is received. It can be grasped that the game ball B is to be shot in the second operation state (normal operation state).

In addition, when the main control MPU receives a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 and receives a detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194, the main control MPU directs toward the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 Although the launch permission signal is not output, in that case, a launch stop time command is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 to inform that the shooting of the game ball B is temporarily stopped. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which the player is not rotating the handle 182 while touching the handle 182 while the firing stop command is being received, or the player is in a state in which the handle 182 is not rotated. A third operation state (normal operation state) in which the single-shot button 193 is pressed during the rotation operation of the handle 182 while contacting the . It can be understood that

In addition, when the main control MPU does not input the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 and does not input the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 However, at that time, an abnormality occurrence command is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 to inform that an abnormal operation situation has occurred. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which the handle 182 is rotating even though the player is not in contact with the handle 182 during the period when the abnormality occurrence command is received. It is possible to grasp that it is the fourth operation situation (abnormal operation situation) that cannot occur.

Regarding the above, the peripheral control MPU uses the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the LEDs provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, etc., to notify the outside of the abnormality during the period when the command at the time of abnormality occurrence is received. I am trying to do As an abnormality notification, in order to notify the outside that an abnormal operation situation has occurred, a warning message is output from the effect display device 1600 or the speaker, or an LED provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is flashing with strong light. Also, as a warning message, the message "Perform a normal steering operation" is output. Here, when the command at the time of abnormality occurrence is received, the handle 182 is rotated even though the player is not in contact with the handle 182. There is a high possibility that the player appears to be playing a game on a fixed basis, and there is a possibility that the player is attempting to commit fraud during such a period. In this regard, in this example, it is possible to grasp the fourth operation state (abnormal operation state) that cannot occur in a normal game, and when such a fourth operation state is grasped, By performing the anomaly notification, it is possible to detect at an early stage the danger of trying to commit a fraudulent act.

Further, the main control MPU does not contact the handle 182 and rotates the handle 182 during the period in which none of the launch permission command, the launch stop command, and the error occurrence command are received. It can be grasped that it is the first operation state in which no game is being played.

In addition, when the main control MPU determines that the setting value is not permitted to be changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed, the logic of the firing permission signal can be set to the firing permission logic. When it is determined that the value change is permitted or the setting value is displayed for confirmation, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the firing permission logic. In other words, during the permission to change the set value or the confirmation display of the set value, even when the handle 182 is touched, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633. . Therefore, while the set value is being permitted to be changed or the set value is being displayed for confirmation, even if the handle 182 is rotated to shoot the game ball B into the game area 5a, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball is not driven. B cannot be shot.

In the above, while the setting value is being permitted to be changed or the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the firing permission signal is not output toward the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. After the confirmation display of the setting value is completed, it is possible to output a firing permission signal toward the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. If the handle 182 is continuously touched from 1 to 9, the firing permission signal is not output even after the permission to change the setting value or the confirmation display of the setting value is finished. In such a case, after the permission to change the set value or the display of the confirmation of the set value is completed, the handle 182 can be released and then touched again to output a firing permission signal, and the handle 182 can be released. By rotating, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a.

Further, as described above in detail, the main control MPU determines that fraudulent activity has not been detected based on the value of the fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG when the fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0. When this occurs, the logic of the firing permission signal can be set to the firing permission logic. On the other hand, when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (is 1), it is determined that fraud has been detected. In some cases, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the firing permission logic. That is, when a fraudulent act is detected, even when the handle 182 is touched, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633. FIG. Therefore, when a fraudulent act is detected, even if an attempt is made to rotate the handle 182 to shoot the game ball B into the game area 5a, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be shot. ing.

It should be noted that while the setting value is being permitted to be changed or the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, even when the handle 182 is touched, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. , and the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 does not output a firing permission command. Similarly, when a fraudulent act is detected, even when the handle 182 is touched, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 does not output a firing permission signal toward the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU recognizes that the handle 182 is not in contact with the peripheral control MPU.

By the way, while the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 continues to be input, the main control MPU may continue to output the firing permission command to the peripheral control MPU. When the detection signal from the steering wheel touch sensor 192 switches from non-input to non-input, a command for firing permission is output, and when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 switches from input to non-input, a command for firing non-permission is output. may In such a case, the peripheral control MPU can grasp that the handle 182 is being touched during the period from when the firing permitted command is received until when the firing is not permitted command is received. Similarly, while the detection signal is being input from the handle touch sensor 192, during the period in which the detection signal is being input from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the main control MPU sends the firing stop command to the peripheral control MPU. The output may be continued, but when the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 switches from non-input to input, the firing stop command is output, and the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is changed from the input. A firing non-stop command may be output when switching to non-input. In such a case, the peripheral control MPU detects that the single-shot button 193 is being operated, even though the handle 182 is being touched during the period from when the firing stop command is received until when the firing non-stop command is received. can grasp.

(Production according to the operation of the single-shot button)
Next, in the peripheral control MPU, depending on the presence or absence of input of the firing stop command, it is determined whether or not it is time to operate the single-shot button 193 while the handle 182 is being touched. and an effect corresponding to the cancellation of the operation of the single-shot button 193 is executed. Of these, first, the execution control of the effect according to the operation of the one-shot button 193 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing an example of the first firing stop command-related process executed in the peripheral control unit steady process.

As shown in FIG. 272, the peripheral control MPU first executes a ready-to-win effect (for example, a super ready-to-win effect) that is highly expected as a ready-to-win effect after the formation of the ready-to-win effect during the variable display of patterns (decorative patterns). (step S2801). In the peripheral control MPU, the effect is controlled based on the variation pattern determined on the main control board 1310 side. The effect of executing a normal reach effect with a low degree of expectation later, the effect of executing a normal reach effect with a low degree of expectation after forming a reach, and then executing a super reach effect with a high degree of expectation, and the like. These effects are set so that the effect time becomes longer in the order of the effect that does not form the reach, the effect that executes the normal reach effect, and the effect that executes the super reach effect.

In the process of step S2801, when it is determined that the ready-to-win effect with high expectation (for example, super ready-to-win effect) is being executed as the ready-to-win effect after forming the ready-to-win, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect with high expectation, It is determined whether or not a firing stop command has been received (step S2802). That is, it is determined whether or not the shooting of the game ball B is temporarily stopped by operating the single-shot button 193 during execution of the ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation. When it is determined that the firing stop command is received during execution of the ready-to-win performance with high expectation, the game ball B is shot by operating the single-shot button 193 during execution of the ready-to-win performance with high expectation. is counted (added) to a firing stop number counter that indicates the number of times the is temporarily stopped (step S2803). Regarding this firing stop count counter, it is possible to count only once for one execution of the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect. It doesn't count times.

Following the processing of steps S2801 to S2803, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the tenth highly anticipated ready-to-win effect ends (step S2804). Then, when it is determined that the tenth high-expected ready-to-win effect ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the firing stop number counter is 5 counts or more (step S2805). That is, whether or not the shooting of the game ball B is temporarily stopped by operating the single-shot button 193 in five or more high-expected ready-to-win productions performed 10 times in the high-expected ready-to-win production. to judge.

In the process of step S2805, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop count counter is 5 counts or more at the end of the 10th highly anticipated ready-to-win effect, the single-shot button 193 is pressed as an audio output from the speaker. A special sound A is output to suggest that the number of times that the shooting of the game ball B has been temporarily stopped by operation is large (step S2806). As the special sound A, a voice saying "You're in good shape" is output.

On the other hand, in the process of step S2805, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop count counter is not 5 counts or more at the end of the 10th high-expectation ready-to-win effect, the single-shot button 193 is activated as an audio output from the speaker. is operated to output a special sound B suggesting that the number of times the shooting of the game ball B has been temporarily stopped is small (step S2807). As the special sound B, a voice saying "Let's do our best" is output. Further, in the process of step S2807, it is determined whether to output one of setting suggesting sounds A to C suggesting the currently set value (execution lottery). Any one of setting suggestion sounds A to C is output according to the result of determination.

It should be noted that regardless of whether or not the value of the firing stop count counter is 5 counts or more at the end of the tenth high-expectation ready-to-win effect, after the processing of steps S2806 and S2807, the firing stop count counter is counted. resetting the value. After the 10th high-expected ready-to-win effect is completed, the next high-expected ready-to-win effect is set to the first high-expected ready-to-win effect, and the counter for the number of firing stops is newly started. I am planning to

Here, during the execution of the ready-to-win performance with high expectations, the performance time is long, so there is a situation where the suspension due to the ball entering the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 is likely to increase. reaches the upper limit (4, which is the limit number), even if the ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the hold does not increase, and the single-shot button 193 is operated to play the game. Temporarily suspend the launch of ball B so as not to reduce the number of balls you have. At this time, if the ball is likely to enter the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the hold is likely to reach the upper limit, and the single-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily launch the game ball B. likely to stop. In other words, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop number counter is 5 counts or more at the end of the tenth high-expectation ready-to-win effect, the ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Since it was a situation where it was easy and it was difficult to reduce the number of balls held, it is highly possible that the single-shot button 193 was operated to temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball B, and in order to praise such a situation. is to output the special sound A. On the other hand, when it is difficult to enter the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the hold is unlikely to reach the upper limit, and the game ball B may continue to be shot without operating the single-shot button 193. is high. That is, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop count counter is less than 5 counts at the end of the tenth high-expectation ready-to-win effect, the ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Since it was a difficult situation and the number of possession balls was easy to decrease, there was a high possibility that the game ball B was continuously fired without operating the single-shot button 193, and a special sound was made to encourage such a situation. B is to be output.

In the processing of step S2807, execution determination (execution lottery) is performed as to which one of setting suggestion sounds A to C is to be output. When it is determined that the value of the stop number counter is not equal to or greater than 5 counts, the peripheral control MPU acquires a predetermined random value X, and generates a setting suggesting sound A suggesting a low set value, a setting suggesting sound B suggesting a high set value, One of the setting suggesting sounds C suggesting the setting value 6 is determined according to the currently set setting value and the random value X. Here, when the currently set setting values are the setting values 1 to 3, the setting suggesting sound A suggesting the low setting value has a higher probability than the setting suggesting sound B (setting suggesting sound A: setting suggesting sound B=7:3 ratio), the effect is decided according to the value of the random value X with reference to the low setting effect apportionment table. Further, when the setting value is 4 to 5, the setting suggesting sound B suggesting the high setting value has a higher probability than the setting suggesting sound A (setting suggesting sound A: setting suggesting sound B = 3:7 ratio). Effect determination according to the value of the random number value X is performed by referring to the high setting effect apportionment table 1 to be determined. In addition, when the setting value is 6, the setting suggesting sounds A to C including the setting suggesting sound C suggesting the setting value 6, which is not determined when the setting values are 1 to 5, are generated with a predetermined probability (setting Suggestive sound A: Suggestive setting sound B: Suggestive setting sound C = 1:5:4 ratio) The high setting effect distribution table 2 is referred to and the effect is determined according to the value of the random value X. . In other words, the setting suggesting sounds A and B may be output regardless of the current setting values. When the suggestive sound C is output, it is confirmed that the set value currently set is the set value 6. - 特許庁In this way, when the setting suggesting sound is output, it is possible to have an expectation corresponding to the suggestion of the setting value that can be grasped from the setting suggesting sound.

As setting suggesting sound A suggesting a low setting value, sound data for outputting a sound "beep" from a speaker is used. As the setting suggesting sound C suggesting the setting value 6, the sound data outputting the sound "beep beep" from the speaker is used. In this way, by outputting different setting suggesting sounds for each setting value suggestion, it is possible to grasp what kind of setting value is suggested.

As described above, in this example, it is possible to output a special sound as an effect in response to the operation of the one-shot button 193 . Specifically, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop number counter is 5 counts or more at the end of the 10th highly anticipated ready-to-win performance, the single shot button 193 is operated to shoot the game ball B. By outputting a special sound A that suggests that the number of times that the is temporarily stopped is large, in a situation where it is easy to enter the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and in a situation where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held be able to comprehend what happened. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop count counter is less than 5 counts at the end of the 10th ready-to-win performance with high expectation, the single-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily fire the game ball B. By outputting a special sound B that suggests that the number of times of stopping is small, it was a situation where it was difficult for the ball to enter the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004, and the ball held was easy to decrease. can be grasped. Thereby, when the special sound is output, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game efficiency is good.

Also, the firing stop command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 only when the single-shot button 193 is operated while the handle 182 is being touched. In other words, even if the single-shot button 193 is operated, if the handle 182 is not in contact, the peripheral control MPU will not receive the firing stop command. It is not determined that the shot has been stopped, and the count (addition) is not made to the firing stop number counter. Thus, while participating in the game by contacting the handle 182, it is possible to grasp whether the single-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball B. It is possible to improve the accuracy of information such as the game situation obtained from.

Further, in this example, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop number counter is less than 5 counts at the end of the 10th highly anticipated ready-to-win effect, the single-shot button 193 is operated to release the game ball B. In addition to outputting a special sound B suggesting that the number of times the firing has been temporarily stopped is small, any one of the setting suggesting sounds A to C suggesting the currently set value is output. In this way, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop number counter is less than 5 counts at the end of the tenth high-expectation ready-to-win effect, the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 is entered. It is highly probable that this is a situation in which it is difficult to hit the ball and the game efficiency is low. can motivate the player to continue playing even under adverse circumstances. In addition, when it is suggested that the set value currently set is a high set value, the player is likely to win the game, so it is possible to make the player particularly motivated to continue playing the game.

In this example, it is possible to output a special sound by judging whether or not the value of the firing stop number counter is 5 counts or more at the end of the 10th highly anticipated ready-to-win effect. However, at the end of the 10th high-expectation ready-to-reach effect, regardless of whether the value of the firing stop count counter is 5 counts or more, after the 10th high-expected ready-to-reach effect ends, special Sound may be output.

(Production according to the cancellation of the single-shot button operation)
Next, the execution control of the effect according to the cancellation of the operation of the one-shot button 193 will be described with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing an example of the second firing stop command-related process executed in the peripheral control unit steady process.

As shown in FIG. 273, the peripheral control MPU, first, during the variable display of patterns (decorative patterns), is executing a highly anticipated ready-to-win effect (for example, super ready-to-win effect) as a ready-to-win effect after formation of the ready-to-win effect. (step S2901).

In the process of step S2901, if it is determined that the ready-to-win effect (for example, super ready-to-win effect) with high expectations is being executed as the ready-to-win effect after forming the ready-to-win state, to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (step S2902). In addition, at the time of increase in retention due to the ball entering the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, or at the time of decrease in retention due to the start of pattern fluctuation, the main control board 1310 transmits a hold number command indicating the number of holds. Therefore, the number of reservations can be grasped by the peripheral control board 1510 . Then, when it is determined that the hold due to the ball entering the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 has reached the upper limit (limit number), it is determined whether or not the firing stop command has been received ( step S2903). In other words, it is determined whether or not the shooting of the game ball B has been temporarily stopped by operating the single-shot button 193 in a situation where the hold has reached the upper limit during execution of the ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation. Whether the single-shot button 193 is operated before the start of the ready-to-win performance, which is highly expected, or whether the single-shot button 193 is operated after the start, it is determined that the shooting of the game ball B is temporarily stopped. can do.

In the processing of step S2903, if it is determined that the firing stop command has been received, a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) is set as the time during which a special effect, which will be described later, can be executed when the firing permission time command is received. The set operation waiting time is started (step S2904). Here, in the case of executing the reach production with high expectation based on the variation pattern, the production is executed in the order of start of fluctuation → reach formation → reach production with low expectation → reach production with high expectation. As the waiting time, a time shorter than the presentation time of the highly anticipated ready-to-win presentation is set. After the start of the operation waiting time, the operation waiting time is ended when the firing permission time command is received. On the other hand, after the start of the operation waiting time, if the firing permission time command is not received, the operation waiting time ends when the predetermined time elapses. When the performance is terminated, the operation waiting time is also terminated. Further, during the operation waiting time, it is monitored whether or not the state in which the firing stop command is received can be switched to the state in which the firing permission command is received. In other words, during the execution of the highly anticipated reach effect, in a situation where the hold reaches the upper limit, after temporarily stopping the shooting of the game ball B by operating the single-shot button 193, the similarly highly anticipated reach During execution of the performance, it is monitored whether or not the operation of the single-shot button 193 is released to restart the shooting of the game ball B.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the processing of step S2904, when the operation waiting time is started, as the effect executed during the operation waiting time, the promotion effect for promoting the cancellation of the operation of the one-shot button 193 is started. As the promotion effect, the effect display device 1600 is used to display an image saying "What might happen if the shooting is restarted?". As a result, even when the single-shot button 193 is being operated, it can be grasped that the operation of the single-shot button 193 is canceled and the shooting of the game ball B is restarted.

Following the processing of steps S2901 to S2904, the peripheral control MPU determines whether an operation waiting time is occurring (step S2905). Then, if it is determined that the operation waiting time is occurring, if the state of receiving the fire stop command is switched to the state of receiving the fire permission command during the operation waiting time ( Step S2906), execution determination (execution lottery) as to which one of the setting suggestion sounds A to C suggesting the currently set value is to be output as a special effect, and the execution determination is performed as voice output from the speaker. Depending on the result of (step S2907), one of the setting suggestion sounds A to C is output. In other words, when the operation of the single-shot button 193 is canceled and the shooting of the game ball B is restarted during the operation waiting time, the special effect is executed.

Here, during the execution of the ready-to-win performance with high expectations, since the performance time is long, there is a situation where the suspension due to the ball entering the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 is likely to increase. reaches the upper limit (4, which is the limit number), even if the ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the hold does not increase, and the single-shot button 193 is operated to play the game. Temporarily suspend the launch of ball B so as not to reduce the number of balls you have. At this time, when it is easy to enter the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the hold is likely to reach the upper limit, and the single-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily launch the game ball B. likely to stop. In other words, during execution of the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect, if an operation waiting time occurs, it is a situation in which it is easy to enter the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the shooting of the game ball B is temporarily stopped by operating the single-shot button 193 . On the other hand, when the operation waiting time does not occur during execution of the ready-to-win effect with high expectations, it is a situation where it is difficult to enter the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the number of balls held decreases. Since it was an easy situation, there is a high possibility that the game ball B was continuously shot without operating the single-shot button 193 .

Also, during execution of the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect, if the single-shot button 193 is operated and an operation waiting time occurs, the number of balls held does not decrease, but the hall side does not operate the single-shot button 193. It is preferable to cancel and have the game balls B continue to be shot. In this respect, when the operation of the one-shot button 193 is canceled while the operation waiting time is occurring, it is possible to guide the player to cancel the operation of the one-shot button 193 by executing a special effect.

In the process of step S2906, execution determination (execution lottery) of which one of the setting suggestion sounds A to C is to be output is performed. The peripheral control MPU acquires a predetermined random value X when it is determined that the setting has One of C is determined according to the set value currently set and the random value X. Here, when the currently set setting values are the setting values 1 to 3, the setting suggesting sound A suggesting the low setting value has a higher probability than the setting suggesting sound B (setting suggesting sound A: setting suggesting sound B=7:3 ratio), the effect is decided according to the value of the random value X with reference to the low setting effect apportionment table. Further, when the setting value is 4 to 5, the setting suggesting sound B suggesting the high setting value has a higher probability than the setting suggesting sound A (setting suggesting sound A: setting suggesting sound B = 3:7 ratio). Effect determination according to the value of the random number value X is performed by referring to the high setting effect apportionment table 1 to be determined. In addition, when the setting value is 6, the setting suggesting sounds A to C including the setting suggesting sound C suggesting the setting value 6, which is not determined when the setting values are 1 to 5, are generated with a predetermined probability (setting Suggestive sound A: Suggestive setting sound B: Suggestive setting sound C = 1:5:4 ratio) The high setting effect distribution table 2 is referred to and the effect is determined according to the value of the random value X. . In other words, the setting suggesting sounds A and B may be output regardless of the current setting values. When the suggestive sound C is output, it is confirmed that the set value currently set is the set value 6. - 特許庁In this way, when the setting suggesting sound is output, it is possible to have an expectation corresponding to the suggestion of the setting value that can be grasped from the setting suggesting sound.

As setting suggesting sound A suggesting a low setting value, sound data for outputting a sound "beep" from a speaker is used. As the setting suggesting sound C suggesting the setting value 6, the sound data outputting the sound "beep beep" from the speaker is used. In this way, by outputting different setting suggesting sounds for each setting value suggestion, it is possible to grasp what kind of setting value is suggested.

As described above, in this example, when the one-shot button 193 is operated, an operation waiting time is generated, and when the operation of the one-shot button 193 is canceled during the operation waiting time, a special effect is executed. ing. In other words, a special effect is executed as a effect corresponding to the operating state of the single-shot button 193 . Specifically, when it is determined that the one-shot button 193 has been operated during execution of the highly anticipated reach effect, by generating an operation waiting time, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 It is possible to grasp that it is a situation where it is easy to enter the ball and the situation where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held. On the other hand, if it is determined that the one-shot button 193 has not been operated during execution of the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect, no operation waiting time is generated. Thereby, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game efficiency is good depending on whether or not the operation waiting time is generated. Further, when it is determined that the operation of the one-shot button 193 has been canceled while the operation waiting time is occurring, it is possible to guide the player to cancel the operation of the one-shot button 193 by executing a special performance.

Also, the firing stop command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 only when the single-shot button 193 is operated while the handle 182 is being touched. In other words, even if the single-shot button 193 is operated, if the handle 182 is not in contact, the peripheral control MPU will not receive the firing stop command. It is not determined that the shot has been stopped, and the count (addition) is not made to the firing stop number counter. As a result, while participating in the game by contacting the handle 182, it is possible to grasp whether the single-shot button 193 is being operated to temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball B. It is possible to improve the accuracy of information such as the game situation obtained from.

Further, in this example, if it is determined that the operation of the one-shot button 193 has been canceled while the operation waiting time is occurring, setting suggesting sounds A to C suggesting the currently set value are played as a special effect. which is output. As described above, when the operation of the single-shot button 193 is canceled during the operation waiting time, the shooting of the game ball B is restarted, and there is a high possibility that the number of held balls will decrease, but the setting suggestion sound is output. In such a case, since the information about the set value currently set can be known, it is possible to generate the desire to restart the shooting of the game balls B even if there is a possibility that the number of held balls will decrease. In addition, when it is suggested that the set value currently set is a high set value, the player is likely to win the game, so it is possible to make the player particularly motivated to continue playing the game.

In addition, in this example, on the condition that the hold due to the ball entering the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 has reached the upper limit (limit number) during execution of the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect, When the one-shot button 193 is operated, an operation waiting time is generated. As a result, after the start of the pattern variation, until the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect is started, the hold due to the ball entering the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 will reach the upper limit (limit number). It can give rise to the desire to Also, during execution of the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect, the single-shot button 193 is operated even when the hold due to the ball entering the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 has not reached the upper limit (limit number). An operation waiting time may be generated when the Then, when the operation of the one-shot button 193 is canceled during the occurrence of such an operation waiting time, a non-special effect (fake special effect) may be executed. As a non-special effect, for example, a setting non-indicating sound that does not suggest the currently set setting value may be output, such as outputting a sound "beep" (sound different from the setting suggesting sound) from the speaker.

In this example, it is monitored whether or not the operation of the one-shot button 193 is canceled during the operation waiting time during the execution of the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect, and the operation of the one-shot button 193 is canceled. At this time, the special effect is being executed, but even if it is determined that the operation of the one-shot button 193 has been canceled during the operation waiting time, the special effect will be performed after the end of the highly expected ready-to-win effect. It is good also as performing production.

(Production according to the operation of the steering wheel)
Next, the execution control of the effect according to the contact with the handle 182 will be described with reference to FIG. 274. FIG. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing an example of firing permission command-related processing executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing.

As shown in FIG. 274, the peripheral control MPU, first, during the variable display of patterns (decorative patterns), produces a production including a highly anticipated ready-to-win production (for example, a super ready-to-win production) as a ready-to-win production after formation of a ready-to-win zone. It is determined whether or not it is being executed (step S3001).

In the process of step S3001, if it is determined that the production including the highly anticipated reach production (for example, super reach production) is being executed as the reach production after the formation of the reach, is the firing permission time command received? It is determined whether or not (step S3002). The production including the high-expected ready-to-win production is, as described above, the production based on the fluctuation pattern, in which the normal ready-to-win production with the low expected level is executed after forming the ready-to-win, and then the super ready-to-win production is executed. During the performance including the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect, if it is determined that the firing permission time command has been received, the contact time counting counter that indicates the time during which the handle 182 is in contact is counted. (addition) (step S3003).

In the process of step S3303, during the performance including the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect, only the time during which the firing permission command is received is counted, and the time during which the firing stop command is received is not counted. No. In other words, during execution of an effect including a highly anticipated ready-to-win effect, when the player is in contact with the handle 182 and the single-shot button 193 is not operated and the game ball B can be shot. , The contact time counting counter is counted, but the handle 182 is in contact, but the single-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball B. , it is not counted against the contact time counting counter and is excluded from contact time with the handle 182 . Also, during the performance including the highly anticipated ready-to-win performance, if the single-shot button 193 is temporarily operated while the handle 182 is in contact, after releasing the operation of the single-shot button 193, The contact time counting counter is restarted.

Following the processing of steps S3001 to S3003, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not it is time to end an effect including a highly anticipated ready-to-win effect (at the end of the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect) (step S3004). . Then, when it is determined that it is time to end the effect including the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect, it is determined whether or not the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined time (step S3005).

In the process of step S3005, when it is determined that the value of the contact time counting counter is less than the predetermined time at the end of the production including the highly anticipated ready-to-win production, a sound is output from the speaker to the steering wheel 182. A special sound A suggesting that the contact time is short is output (step S3006). As the special sound A, a voice saying "You're in good shape" is output.

On the other hand, in the processing of step S3005, when it is determined that the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined time at the end of the effect including the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect, the handle 182 is output as an audio output from the speaker. A special sound B is output to suggest that the contact time is long (step S3007). As the special sound B, a voice saying "Let's do our best" is output. Further, in the process of step S3007, it is determined whether to output one of the setting suggesting sounds A to C suggesting the currently set value (execution lottery), and the execution is determined as voice output from the speaker. Any one of setting suggestion sounds A to C is output according to the result of determination.

Here, when executing a production including a reach production with a high expectation based on the variation pattern, the production is executed in the order of start of fluctuation → reach formation → low expectation reach production → high expectation reach production. However, the predetermined time is set to be longer than the time from the start of fluctuation to the start of the ready-to-win effect with high expectation (end of the ready-to-win effect with low expectation).

In addition, during execution of an effect including a highly anticipated ready-to-win effect, the effect time is long. When the hold reaches the upper limit (4, which is the limit number), even if the ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the hold does not increase, and the single-shot button 193 is operated. to temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball B so as not to reduce the number of balls held. At this time, if the ball is likely to enter the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the hold is likely to reach the upper limit, and the single-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily launch the game ball B. likely to stop. In other words, when the time of contact with the handle 182 excluding the time when the single-shot button 193 is operated is less than the predetermined time, it is a situation where it is easy to enter the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, and the ball is held. Since it was difficult to reduce the number of shots, there is a high possibility that the single-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball B, and a special sound A is output to praise such a situation. and On the other hand, when it is difficult to enter the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the hold is unlikely to reach the upper limit, and the game ball B may continue to be shot without operating the single-shot button 193. is high. In other words, when the contact time with the handle 182 excluding the operation of the single-shot button 193 is longer than the predetermined time, it is difficult to enter the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, and the ball is held. Since it was a situation where the number of balls was likely to decrease, there is a high possibility that the game ball B is continuously shot without operating the single-shot button 193, and a special sound B is output to encourage such a situation.

In the process of step S3007, execution determination (execution lottery) is performed as to which one of setting suggestion sounds A to C is to be output. When it is determined that the value of the time counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined time, the peripheral control MPU acquires a predetermined random value X, and sets a setting suggesting sound A suggesting a low set value and a setting suggesting sound B suggesting a high set value. , or a setting suggesting sound C suggesting a set value 6 is determined according to the currently set set value and the random value X. Here, when the currently set setting values are the setting values 1 to 3, the setting suggesting sound A suggesting the low setting value has a higher probability than the setting suggesting sound B (setting suggesting sound A: setting suggesting sound B=7:3 ratio), the effect is decided according to the value of the random value X with reference to the low setting effect apportionment table. Further, when the setting value is 4 to 5, the setting suggesting sound B suggesting the high setting value has a higher probability than the setting suggesting sound A (setting suggesting sound A: setting suggesting sound B = 3:7 ratio). Effect determination according to the value of the random number value X is performed by referring to the high setting effect apportionment table 1 to be determined. In addition, when the setting value is 6, the setting suggesting sounds A to C including the setting suggesting sound C suggesting the setting value 6, which is not determined when the setting values are 1 to 5, are generated with a predetermined probability (setting Suggestive sound A: Suggestive setting sound B: Suggestive setting sound C = 1:5:4 ratio) The high setting effect distribution table 2 is referred to and the effect is determined according to the value of the random value X. . In other words, the setting suggesting sounds A and B may be output regardless of the current setting values. When the suggestive sound C is output, it is determined that the set value currently set is the set value 6. - 特許庁In this way, when the setting suggesting sound is output, it is possible to have an expectation corresponding to the suggestion of the setting value that can be grasped from the setting suggesting sound.

As setting suggesting sound A suggesting a low setting value, sound data for outputting a sound "beep" from a speaker is used. As the setting suggesting sound C suggesting the setting value 6, the sound data outputting the sound "beep beep" from the speaker is used. In this way, by outputting different setting suggesting sounds for each setting value suggestion, it is possible to grasp what kind of setting value is suggested.

As described above, in this example, it is possible to output a special sound as an effect according to the contact time with the handle 182 . Specifically, when it is determined that the value of the contact time counting counter is less than the predetermined time at the end of the performance including the highly anticipated ready-to-win performance, it suggests that the contact time with the handle 182 is short. By outputting the special sound A, it can be grasped that the ball is likely to enter the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 and the ball is difficult to decrease. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined time at the end of the performance including the highly anticipated ready-to-win performance, a special sound B suggests that the contact time with the handle 182 is long. By outputting , it is possible to grasp the situation in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and the ball is likely to decrease. Thereby, when the special sound is output, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game efficiency is good.

In addition, in this example, during the execution of the effect including the highly anticipated reach effect, only the time during which the firing permission command is received is counted, and the time during which the firing stop command is received is not counted. . In other words, during execution of an effect including a highly anticipated ready-to-win effect, when the player is in contact with the handle 182 and the single-shot button 193 is not operated and the game ball B can be shot. , The contact time counting counter is counted, but the handle 182 is in contact, but the single-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball B. , it is not counted against the contact time counting counter and is excluded from contact time with the handle 182 . As a result, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game ball B is in a state in which it is in contact with the handle 182, and the accuracy of information such as the game situation obtained from the handle 182 and the single-shot button 193. can increase

Also, in this example, if it is determined that the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined time at the end of the performance including the highly anticipated ready-to-win performance, it is suggested that the contact time with the handle 182 is long. In addition to outputting the special sound B that indicates the current setting value, any one of the setting suggesting sounds A to C suggesting the currently set value is output. Thus, when it is determined that the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined time at the end of the production including the highly anticipated ready-to-win production, the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 is entered. It is highly probable that this is a situation in which it is difficult to hit the ball and the game efficiency is low. can motivate the player to continue playing even under adverse circumstances. In addition, when it is suggested that the currently set set value is a high set value, it is possible to make the player particularly motivated to continue the game, because the situation is such that a win is likely to occur.

In this example, it is possible to output a special sound by determining whether or not the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or longer than a predetermined time at the end of an effect including a highly anticipated ready-to-win effect. However, regardless of whether the value of the contact time counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined time at the end of the production including the highly anticipated reach production, after the production including the highly anticipated reach production is finished, special Sound may be output.

In addition, in this example, it is possible to output a special sound by determining whether or not the contact time with the handle 182 is longer than a predetermined time during the performance including the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect. counts the number of times the handle 182 is touched and the number of times the hand is released from the handle 182 in a situation where contact and non-contact with the handle 182 are repeated during the performance including the highly anticipated reach performance. In this way, it may be possible to determine whether or not the number of times of contact or non-contact with the handle 182 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, and output a special sound. For example, when the number of times of contact and non-contact with the handle 182 is a predetermined number or more during execution of an effect including a highly anticipated reach effect, the ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Therefore, it is highly possible that the game ball B is repeatedly shot and stopped, and the special sound B is output to encourage such a situation. Also, based on both the determination result of whether or not the contact time with the handle 182 is a predetermined time or more and the determination result of whether or not the number of times of contact or non-contact with the handle 182 is a predetermined number or more. may be used to determine which of the special sounds A and B is to be output.

[Regarding a common aspect used in the suspension notice effect and the setting value suspension suggestion effect]
Next, the suspension notice effect and the set value suspension suggestion effect will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the number of first reserved memories changes based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 2002, a command for instructing the number of first reserved memories (first reserved number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to display the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600, and the second reserved memory number is displayed based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004 When it changes, a command (second reservation number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 1)) is set to indicate the second reservation memory number and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to set the second reservation memory number. It is designed to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

In addition, not only the lottery result of which the start of suggestion is suspended is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the first suspension memory display 1700 and the second suspension memory display 1701, but also the lottery result of which the suggestion is being executed The pending memory is also displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a pending memory display 1702 during execution. As a result, the final display mode of the pending notice effect and setting value pending suggesting effect, which will be described later, can be displayed in the execution pending storage display 1702, and by configuring in this way, the suggestion of the lottery result is executed. Since it is possible to make the player pay attention to the holding notice performance and the setting value holding suggesting performance until the game is played, the player can have expectations for the big win and the high setting value, so that the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002, the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, and based on the detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 2402. When a pre-determination command is received from the main control board 1310 based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004, the start of suggestion is suspended based on the pre-determination command Corresponding to the lottery result By changing the display modes of the first reservation memory display 1700 and the second reservation memory display 1701 displayed on the performance display device 1600, a reservation notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit at the time of executing the suggestion of the lottery result can be executed. It's like

In this example, the second reserve storage number indicated by the first reserve storage number or the second reserve number storage command indicated by the first reserve number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the pre-determination command indicated by Peripheral control board 1510 determines presence/absence of suspension notice effect according to each of the prejudgment information (losing, small hit, big hit, etc., and may be information that can notify the type of big hit such as probability variable big hit or normal big hit). and a pending notice determination table for determining the pending notice pattern type when executing the pending notice effect.

Then, when the decision to execute the pending notice effect is made and the type of pending notice pattern to be executed is determined, the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 are changed from normal. It is displayed in a different display mode (in this example, a display color different from usual). In this example, the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 are normally displayed in white, which is the basic color, and displayed in either blue, green, red, or rainbow color when the pending notice is executed. do. Also, the display modes of the first reserved memory display 1700 and the second reserved memory display 1701 are set so that the degree of expectation for the big hit increases in the order of white→blue→green→red→rainbow color.

In addition, when the lottery result specifies a big hit as the preliminary judgment information, a reservation notice pattern in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is high (for example, red or rainbow color) is determined as a final reservation display mode with a high probability, and the preliminary judgment is performed. When a lottery result is specified as a loss as information, a final reservation display mode is determined by determining, with a high probability, a reservation notice pattern in which the degree of expectation for a big win is low (for example, blue) as a final reservation display mode. When a state with a high degree of expectation for a big win is displayed as , the degree of expectation of the player for the state of the big win game increases.

In addition, in the pending notice pattern, every time the suggestion of the lottery result (variation display of the decorative pattern (variation display of the special pattern)) is performed during the execution of the pending notice effect (every time the hold is digested), the effect display device It is set how the display modes of the first reserved memory display 1700 and the second reserved memory display 1701 displayed in 1600 change. In addition, in the pending notice pattern, the display mode of the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is the reverse order of the order of white→blue→green→red→rainbow color. It is set so that it does not change (that is, the expectation of a big hit does not decrease), and the suggestion of the lottery result (variation display of decorative patterns (variation display of special patterns)) is performed (every time the hold is digested To), the display mode of the first retention memory display 1700 and the second retention memory display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or so that the jackpot expectation degree is high. is set to Therefore, even if the first reservation memory display 1700 and the second reservation memory display 1701 are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, the suggestion of the lottery result to be executed for the reservation notice is started. Until then, there is still the possibility that the mode of the pending display will change to a mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, and the mode of the pending display can be paid attention to with expectation until the end.

Further, in the pending notice pattern, it is not always necessary to change the order of blue→green→red→rainbow after displaying the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 in white (basic color). (For example, based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002 based on the game ball entered the first starting port 2002 to display the first reservation memory display 1700c in red) , changes to the next display mode without going through the middle display mode (for example, when the first reserved memory display 1700d is displayed in white, the suggestion of the lottery result ends and the next lottery result starts is changed from white to rainbow color when the first reserved memory display 1700d is moved to the first reserved memory display 1700c according to For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (holding number) to change the display mode of the first holding memory display 1700 or the second holding memory display 1701, the first holding memory display 1700 or the second holding memory display 1700 or the second A pending storage display 1701 is allowed to be displayed. In addition, even if the first reservation memory display 1700 or the second reservation memory display 1701 is displayed in a display mode with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, it is not possible to predict which display mode will change next, and the first The display modes of the reserved memory display 1700 and the second reserved memory display 1701 can be watched with anticipation until the end.

In addition, the start timing of the pending notice effect (the timing at which the display mode is displayed in a mode different from the usual) is based on the reception of the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Not limited to the timing of displaying the memory display 1700 or the second reserved memory display 1701, the timing after that (for example, the suggestion of the lottery result ends and the first reserved memory 1700a to d is moved according to the start of the next lottery result etc.). As a result, even if the pending advance notice effect is not executed, the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 can be watched with anticipation until the end.

Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by changing the display mode of the first reservation memory display 1700 and the second reservation memory display 1701, the pachinko machine 1 A setting value holding suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of is capable of being executed. Specifically, based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002, the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, and based on the detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 2402, the second starting hole 2004 based on the entry of the game ball, from the time the pre-determination command is received from the main control board 1310, based on the set value currently set, corresponding to the lottery results pending the start of suggestion. By changing the display modes of the first reservation memory display 1700 and the second reservation memory display 1701 displayed on the performance display device 1600, it is possible to execute the setting value reservation suggestion performance suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. there is

In this example, the set value currently set is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU, but at the timing when the variation pattern is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as a variation pattern command, The current set value is also stored in the peripheral control MPU by being sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as a command. However, the information (set value information) about the set value currently set, based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, the game ball entered the first start port 2002, the second start It may be included in the advance determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the game ball entering the second start opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the opening sensor 2402 .

In this example, the number of first reserve storage indicated by the first reserve number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second reserve storage number indicated by the second reserve number storage command, and the currently set A setting value holding suggestion determination table for determining the setting value holding suggestion pattern type in the case where the peripheral control board 1510 executes the set value holding suggestion effect and the set value holding suggestion pattern type is created according to each of the setting values. I have it.

Then, when a decision is made to execute the setting value holding suggestion performance and the setting value holding suggestion pattern type to be executed is determined, a first holding storage display 1700 and a second holding storage display 1701 are displayed on the production display device 1600. is displayed in a display mode different from usual (display color different from usual in this example). In this example, the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 are normally displayed in white, which is the basic color, and displayed in either blue, green, red, or rainbow color when the pending notice is executed. do. In addition, the display mode of the first reserved memory display 1700 and the second reserved memory display 1701 is the degree of expectation for the set value of the pachinko machine 1 (the degree of expectation for the high set value) in the order of white→blue→green→red→rainbow color. is set to be higher.

In addition, when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 5 or 6, the set value hold suggestive pattern, which has a high degree of expectation for the high set value (for example, red or rainbow color) as the mode of the final hold display, is made high. A set value hold suggesting pattern determined by a probability, and when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 3 or 4, the final hold display mode is a mode (e.g., green) with a medium degree of expectation for the high set value. is determined with a high probability, and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1 or 2, the setting value holding suggestion that the mode with the lowest expectation for the high setting value (for example, blue color) is the final holding display mode. By determining the pattern with a high probability, when a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high set value is displayed as the mode of the final pending display, the player's degree of expectation for the high set value is increased.

In addition, in the set value hold suggestion pattern, the lottery result suggestion (decoration pattern fluctuation display (special pattern fluctuation display)) is performed during the execution of the set value hold suggestion effect (every time the hold is digested) , How the display modes of the first reserved memory display 1700 and the second reserved memory display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 change are set. In addition, in the setting value reservation suggestion pattern, the display mode of the first reservation memory display 1700 and the second reservation memory display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is reversed from the order of white→blue→green→red→rainbow color. It is set so that it does not change in the order of is digested), the display mode of the first reserved memory display 1700 and the second reserved memory display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or It is set to be a mode with a high degree of expectation. Therefore, even if the first reserved memory 1700 and the second reserved memory 1701 are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode with a low expectation for the high set value, the result of the lottery for which the set value hold suggestion effect is to be executed is displayed. Until the suggestion is started, there is a possibility that the mode of the pending display will change to a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high set value, and the mode of the pending display can be paid attention to with expectation until the end.

Also, in the setting value retention suggestion pattern, it is not necessary to change the first retention memory display 1700 and the second retention memory display 1701 in white (basic color) in the order of blue→green→red→rainbow color. , start from the display mode in the middle (for example, based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002, the first reservation memory display 1700c is displayed in red ), changes to the next display mode without going through the middle display mode (for example, when the first reserved memory display 1700d is displayed in white, the suggestion of the lottery result ends and the next lottery result is set to change from white to rainbow color when the first reserved memory display 1700d is moved to the first reserved memory display 1700c in response to the start of . Therefore, even if there are few opportunities (holding number) to change the display mode of the first reserved memory display 1700 or the second reserved memory display 1701, the first reserved memory display 1700 or the first reserved memory display 1700 or A second pending storage display 1701 is enabled to be displayed. Also, even if the first reserved memory display 1700 and the second reserved memory display 1701 are displayed in a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high set value, it is not possible to predict which display mode will change next, The display modes of the first reserved memory display 1700 and the second reserved memory display 1701 can be expected to draw attention to the end.

In addition, the start timing of the setting value holding suggestion effect (the timing of displaying the display mode in a mode different from the usual mode) is determined based on the reception of the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Not limited to the timing of displaying the first reserved memory display 1700 or the second reserved memory display 1701, but the timing after that (for example, when the suggestion of the lottery result ends and the next lottery result starts) The first reserved memory 1700 a to d , etc.). As a result, even if the setting value reservation suggesting effect is not executed, the first reservation memory display 1700 and the second reservation memory display 1701 can be paid attention to with expectation until the end.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the holding notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the big hit and the setting value holding suggestion effect suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 are the same effect contents (same mode). Allows display control. Specifically, in the pending notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation of the big hit, the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 are displayed in either blue, green, red or rainbow color based on the pending notice pattern. On the other hand, in the set value hold suggestion effect that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1, the first hold memory display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1701 are displayed based on the set value hold suggestion pattern. It is possible to display in either blue, green, red, or rainbow color, which is the same aspect as the pattern-based aspect. Thereby, when the first reservation memory display 1700 and the second reservation memory display 1701 are displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (white which is the basic color), the degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested during execution of the reservation notice performance. It is not possible to discriminate whether the pachinko machine 1 is suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 during execution of the setting value holding suggesting performance, and it is possible to provide the pleasure of guessing which performance is being executed. can. For example, as a mode of the final pending display, when the result of the lottery indicates a loss (when the result of the variable display of the decorative pattern indicates a lost pattern) despite the rainbow color display, The player says that the execution of the advance notice effect does not suggest that the degree of expectation for the big win is high, but that the execution of the setting value holding suggestion effect suggests that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is a high set value. can be reasonably inferred.

Note that while the pending notice effect is executed based on the preliminary determination information, the set value pending suggestion effect is not based on the preliminary determination information. That is, the pending notice performance can be executed by acquiring the pending lottery result in advance, while the setting value pending suggestion performance can be executed without acquiring the pending lottery result in advance.

Further, in this example, when it is determined to execute only one of the execution determination of the pending advance notice effect and the execution determination of the setting value pending suggestion effect, the determined effect is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined to execute both the determination of execution of the pending notice effect and the determination of execution of the set value pending suggestion effect, the final pending display mode will be the higher mode (blue → green → red → Execute the effect for which the higher order of the rainbow colors) is set. As a result, it is not possible to discriminate whether the degree of expectation for a big win is being suggested during the execution of the pending notice performance or whether the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is being suggested during the execution of the setting value suspension suggesting performance. A person can have a little bit more expectations. In addition, when it is decided to execute both the determination of execution of the pending notice effect and the determination of execution of the set value pending suggestion effect, if the final display mode of the pending display is the same, either effect is executed Alternatively, for example, the suspension notice effect may be preferentially executed. In addition, when it is determined to execute both the execution determination of the pending notice effect and the execution determination of the set value pending notice effect, one of the effects may be preferentially executed, for example, the pending notice effect may be preferentially executed.

Further, in this example, the execution frequency of the setting value suspension suggestion effect is set lower than that of the suspension notice effect. That is, the pending advance notice effect is executed based on the advance judgment information, and when the lottery result is suggested based on the pending memory executing the pending notice effect, the content of the pending notice effect is reset. , Since the contents of the setting value holding suggestion performance continue without being reset until the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, by setting the execution frequency of the set value holding suggestion performance to be lower than that of the holding notice performance, It is possible to prevent the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

Further, in this example, the suspension notice effect and the setting value suspension suggestion effect use all modes of the suspension display in common, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors, but only some modes are used. You may use it in common. In other words, there may be a mode in which only one of the pending notice effect and the set value pending suggesting effect can appear exclusively as a mode of the pending display. There may be a mode in which it is possible to appear exclusively as a mode of pending display for each of the suggestive effects. For example, if it is possible to change the final pending display mode to a rainbow color only for the pending notice effect, when the final pending display mode changes to the rainbow color, the pending It can be determined that the execution of the advance notice effect suggests that the degree of expectation for the big win is high. In addition, if it is possible to change to the rainbow color as the final suspension display mode only for the set value suspension suggestion effect, when the final suspension display mode changes to the rainbow color , it can be determined that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is a high setting value by executing the setting value holding suggesting effect.

In addition, in the pending notice effect, it is possible to display the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 in either blue, green, red, or rainbow color based on the pending notice pattern, In the setting value holding suggestion effect, the first holding memory display 1700 and the second holding memory display 1701 based on the setting value holding suggestion pattern are displayed in blue, green, red, and rainbow which are the same as the forms based on the holding notice pattern. Although it is possible to display in any of the colors, these common aspects are displayed on the effect display device 1600 using the same image data. In addition, in the pending notice pattern and the setting value pending suggestion pattern, each time the lottery result suggestion (decoration pattern fluctuation display (special pattern fluctuation display)) is performed (each time the hold is digested), It is set how the display mode of the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes, but these effect patterns are made common and the pending notice effect is performed. In the case of executing any of the setting value holding suggesting effect and the setting value holding suggesting effect, the mode of the holding display may be changed based on the common effect pattern.

In addition, in the pending notice effect, by changing the state of the pending display based on the pending notice pattern, an effect (first effect) suggesting the degree of expectation of the big hit is executed, whereas in the setting value pending suggesting effect, An effect (second effect) suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed by changing the state of the reservation display in the same manner as the reservation notice effect based on the setting value reservation suggesting pattern. Apart from this, a third performance suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 may be executed. For such a third effect, the first reservation storage number indicated by the first reservation number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second reservation storage number indicated by the second reservation number storage command , pre-determination information instructed by the pre-determination command (losing, small hit, big hit, etc., and may also be information that can notify the type of big hit such as probability variable big hit or normal big hit) and the currently set setting value. An effect pattern in which how the state of the pending display changes is set is determined according to each case. Then, when the lottery result is specified as a big hit as the advance determination information and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as a high set value (for example, 5 or 6), the mode of the final hold display is highly expected. (for example, red or rainbow color) is determined with a high probability, the lottery result is specified as a loss as the preliminary determination information, and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as a low setting value (for example, 1 or 2). The mode with the lowest degree of expectation (for example, blue) may be determined with a high probability as the mode of the final pending display. Further, the lottery result is specified as a jackpot (or a specific jackpot such as a probability variable jackpot) as the advance determination information, and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is a predetermined setting value or more (for example, 3 or more). Only when specified, it may be possible to determine a specific aspect (for example, rainbow colors) as the aspect of the final pending display. In such a case, when a specific mode is displayed as the mode of the final reserved display, not only is it determined that the result of the lottery is a big hit and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped at the big win, and the pachinko machine 1 Since it is confirmed that the set value of is equal to or greater than the predetermined set value, it is possible to particularly increase the motivation to continue the game even after the end of the big win game.

Next, a specific example of the suspension notice effect and the set value suspension suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 275 is a specific example of the suspension notice effect and the set value suspension suggestion effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 275(A), the lottery results in which the start of the suggestion is suspended are displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the first suspended memory display 1700 and the second suspended memory display 1701, and the suggestion is being executed. It is possible to display on the effect display device 1600 as a pending memory display 1702 during execution also the pending memory according to the lottery result. For example, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002, the number of first reserved memories increases, and one first reserved memory display 1700 is added to the effect display device 1600 and displayed. Then, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002, if it is determined to execute either the suspension notice effect or the setting value suspension suggestion effect, the determined effect pattern (suspension notice pattern) or set value retention suggestion pattern), the additionally displayed first retention memory display 1700 can be displayed in any of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors.

Then, whenever the suggestion of the lottery result (variation display of decorative symbols (variation display of special symbols)) is performed (every time the suspension is digested), the first suspension memory display 1700 displayed on the effect display device 1600, As the second pending memory display 1701 moves, it is possible to change the display mode based on the effect pattern of the already determined effect (either the pending notice pattern or the set value pending suggesting pattern). .

Then, as shown in FIG. 275(B), during the execution of the suggestion of the lottery result (decorative pattern variable display (special symbol variable display)), an execution pending memory display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow colors. At this time, if the lottery result is a big win, the big win design is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a stop design of the decorative design (Fig. 275(C)). On the other hand, when the lottery result is a loss, a lost symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a stop symbol of the decorative symbols (Fig. 275(D)).

As described above in detail, as the suspension notice effect, when the lottery result is specified as a big hit as the preliminary determination information, the final suspension display mode is a mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, red or rainbow color). A pattern is determined with a high probability, and when the lottery result is specified as a loss as the preliminary determination information, a pending notice pattern in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is low (for example, blue) is determined with a high probability as a final pending display mode. ing. In other words, when the suspension notice performance is executed, when the performance pending memory display 1702 displayed on the performance display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color, there is a high possibility that the result of the lottery is a big win. From this, when the execution suspension storage display 1702 displayed on the performance display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the variable display of the decorative pattern stops at the big hit pattern, the suspension notice performance and the set value suspension suggestion performance are displayed. Among them, it can be grasped that there is a high possibility that a pending notice effect suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high is executed.

On the other hand, as the set value hold suggesting performance, the final hold is made when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 5 or 6, regardless of whether the lottery result specifies a big hit or a loss as the preliminary determination information. As a mode of display, a setting value holding suggestive pattern in which a high setting value is highly expected (for example, red or rainbow color) is determined with a high probability, and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 3 or 4, the final result is obtained. A set value hold suggestion pattern in which the degree of expectation for a high set value is medium (e.g., green) is determined with a high probability, and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1 or 2. Sometimes, a set value hold suggestion pattern is determined with a high probability as a form of final hold display in which the degree of expectation for a high set value is lowest (for example, blue). That is, at the time of execution of the set value pending suggestion effect, when the pending storage display 1702 during execution displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color, the possibility that the set value is high is high, but the lottery It is not concerned with the possibility that the outcome is a jackpot. From this, when the in-execution pending memory display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped with the missing pattern, the pending notice effect and the setting value pending suggesting effect are displayed. Among them, it can be grasped that there is a high possibility that the setting value holding suggestion performance suggesting that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is a high setting value was executed.

In addition, in this example, the variation pattern is determined based on the lottery result, and the production based on the variation pattern is a production that does not form a reach (normal fluctuation), and a normal reach production with a low expectation after forming a reach. Effects to be executed, effects of executing a normal reach effect with a low expectation after forming a reach, and then executing a super reach effect with a high expectation, and the like. These effects are set so that the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of the effect that does not form a reach, the effect that executes a normal reach effect, and the effect that executes a super reach effect. In other words, when the pending notice performance is executed, when the performance pending memory display 1702 displayed on the performance display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color, there is a high possibility that the result of the lottery is a big win, and the reach with a high expectation of a big win. It is more likely that the performance will be executed. From this, when the execution pending memory display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color, and when the ready-to-win effect with high expectation of big hit is executed, the pending notice effect and the set value hold suggestive effect are selected. , it is possible to grasp that there is a high possibility that a pending advance notice effect suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is high.

On the other hand, at the time of executing the setting value pending suggestion effect, when the pending storage display 1702 during execution displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color, the possibility of the high setting value is high, but the lottery It is not involved in the possibility that the result is a big hit, and it is not involved in the possibility of executing a ready-to-win effect with a high expectation of a big win. From this, when the execution suspension storage display 1702 displayed on the performance display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the ready-to-win performance with high expectation of big hit is not executed, the suspension notice performance and the setting value suspension suggestion performance are performed. Among them, it can be grasped that there is a high possibility that the setting value holding suggestion performance suggesting that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is a high setting value was executed.

In addition, in the suspension notice effect, only when the lottery result is a big win, it may be possible to allow the rainbow color to appear as the final suspension display mode. In such a case, when the in-execution pending memory display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped with the missing pattern, the pending notice effect and the setting value pending suggesting effect are performed. Of these, it is determined that the set value holding suggestion performance suggesting that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is a high set value has been executed. Also, in the set value pending suggestion effect, only when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is 6, it may be possible to make the rainbow color appear as the final pending display mode. In such a case, when the in-execution pending memory display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped with the missing pattern, the pending notice effect and the setting value pending suggesting effect are performed. Although it is not possible to grasp which of the above has been executed, if it is the execution of the setting value holding suggestion performance, it is confirmed that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is 6, so that the expectation of the player is increased. can be done.

In this example, it is possible to change the mode of the suspension display between the suspension notice effect and the setting value suspension suggestion effect. may be targeted. Even in such a case, by making it possible for a common mode to appear in the performance suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win and the performance suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1, when the common mode appears. In addition, it is impossible to determine whether the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested or the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is suggested. In addition, the effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit and the effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 are not limited to those executed using the display of the effect display device 1600, but are executed using the sound from the speaker or the lighting of the lamp. may be executed.

Further, when the holding notice effect or the setting value holding suggesting effect is executed, the big hit expectation level and the pachinko machine 1 are set according to the operation of the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation part 301 in the effect operation unit 300. In this case, after the operation instruction image for instructing the operation of the rotary operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the production operation section 301 in the production operation unit 300 is displayed on the production display device 1600 The degree of expectation for a big hit or the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested according to the operation of the rotary operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the presentation operation section 301 in the presentation operation unit 300 . In addition, the operation instruction image may be made common between the case of maintaining the expected degree of big win and the suggested set value and the case of further increasing the expected degree of big win and suggested set value, whereby the pending notice effect and the set value may be used. It becomes impossible to discriminate whether or not the degree of expectation for a big win or a set value to be suggested is increased by the performance (the performance of displaying the operation instruction image) that is a sign of the execution of the pending suggestion performance, and the rotation of the performance operation part 301 in the performance operation unit 300. It is possible to induce the user to actively operate the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 .

In addition, during the demonstration (demonstration effect that is performed while the player is waiting), it may be possible to select the presence or absence of the suspension notice effect or the presence or absence of the set value suspension suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to execute performances that match the tastes of the players, and execution of suspension notice performances and set value retention suggestion performances is performed even for players who do not want to be suggested the degree of expectation for big wins, the set values of the pachinko machine 1, etc. It is possible to suppress that the big hit expectation degree and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 are suggested.

In addition, the description of the mode suggested by the pending notice effect and the setting value pending suggestion effect (the mode of suggesting the degree of expectation of the big hit and the mode of suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 are common modes, etc.) It may be executed during a demonstration (demonstration performed while the player is waiting) or when suggesting the result of the lottery (during the variable display of decorative symbols). As a result, it is possible to prevent the expectation for the big win from being erroneously recognized as the degree of expectation for the big win and the expectation for the big win being excessively increased when the setting value holding suggestion performance is executed.

Also, during execution of the time-saving state and the probability variable state, execution of the pending notice effect based on the pre-determination information instructed by the pre-determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball enters the first start port 2002 Instead, only the suspension notice effect based on the advance judgment information indicated by the advance judgment command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 may be executed. . In addition, during execution of the time saving state and the variable probability state, only the setting value holding suggesting production is associated with the first holding storage 1700 displayed on the production display device 1600 based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 2002 may be executed. As a result, when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 during the time saving state or the variable probability state, it is possible to make the player have expectations for the set value hold suggesting effect.

[About special monitor information]
Next, the special monitor 1310h will be described with reference to FIG. A game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls B can enter. Among the plurality of ball entrances, as the prize winning openings to which prize balls are paid out by entering, there are a plurality (here, four 1) general winning opening 2001 and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are different positions in the game area 5a. A second starting port 2004 that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing through 2003, and the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A first big prize winning opening 2005 that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result to be drawn, and the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004. and a second big prize winning port 2006 which enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the .

In addition, among the plurality of ball entrances, an out port for recovering the game balls B that did not enter the prize winning port is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a and discharges the game balls B from within the game area 5a. It has an out port 2010, and a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 which are provided in the middle of the vertical direction in the game area 5a and discharge the game ball B from the game area 5a.

In addition, among the game balls B launched into the game area 5a, the game that entered the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 The ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, and the second big winning opening sensor 2601, the out opening 2010, and the first sub-out. The game ball B collected by the outlet 2011 and the second sub-out outlet 2012 is detected by the outlet sensor 3053, the first sub-out outlet sensor 2403, and the second sub-out outlet sensor 3054, and these detection signals are transmitted through the panel relay board 1710. input to the main control MPU.

The main control MPU controls the number of game balls B entered (the number of balls entered) (the number of balls entered) provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, that is, the number of balls in the game area 5a. The number of game balls B ejected from is counted. Specifically, the number of game balls B detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the winning opening from which winning balls are paid out and the number of game balls B not entering the winning opening are collected. The number of game balls B detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the mouth is counted as the number of entering balls.

Further, the main control MPU counts the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (the number of payouts) by entering the winning hole. Specifically, a predetermined number of game balls B (for example, 3 for entering the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004) corresponding to the winning hole to which the prize ball is paid out by entering the ball , etc.), and when detected by a detection sensor corresponding to a winning opening from which winning balls are to be paid out, the predetermined number of game balls B is counted. , is counted as the number of payouts.

The main control MPU calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, stores the calculation result in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the special monitor 1310h. A formula for calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of hit balls is (number of payouts/number of hit balls)×100. For example, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is too large, it is possible that the balls are entering only the winning holes that are the target of paying out prize balls. Yes, by monitoring the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h, it is possible to ascertain whether or not the ball is entered into the winning hole due to fraud.

In addition, in this example, among the plurality of game states, only when the low probability non-time saving state, the number of balls B (entered ball number) that entered the ball entrance (winning mouth, out mouth), The number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (number of payouts) is counted and reflected in the display on the special monitor 1310h. In the low-probability time-saving state (time-saving state) and high-probability time-saving state (probability variable state), the ball frequently enters the second start port 2004, so the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 also increases. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls tends to increase. In other words, whether or not the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls increases depends on the period of time when it is in a low probability time saving state (time saving state) or a high probability time saving state (variable state), but such By excluding the period, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls can be kept within a certain range if there is no fraudulent activity.

In this example, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. ) and the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (the number of payouts) may be displayed respectively.

As for the special monitor 1310h, the main control MPU calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, stores the calculation result in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the special monitor 1310h. I have to. Also, the information stored in the specific area of the RAM (the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls won) is not cleared even if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on. However, regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls, each time the number of game balls B entered into the entry hole (winning hole, out hole) reaches 60000 balls, a new entry will be made. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls is calculated, and the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls that has become old is stored as a history up to a predetermined number of calculation results. In such a specification of the special monitor 1310h, for example, from the point of time when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is newly calculated, at least the number of game balls B entered into the entry hole (winning hole, out hole) ( Until the number of incoming balls reaches 1000, execution of the display of the ratio of the number of payouts to the new number of incoming balls may be restricted. This is because immediately after calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls, the number of entering balls continues to enter the winning hole, which is the target for paying out winning balls, and the number of entering balls is lower than the standard value. The ratio of the number of payouts is high, or the number of payouts is lower than the standard value due to a situation in which the balls do not enter the winning opening to which the prize balls are paid out. Bias is more likely to occur. Therefore, immediately after calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, it is determined that the information obtained from the special monitor information command is unreliable, and the display of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is displayed. should not be executed.

In addition, in this example, the game balls B collected by the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 are detected by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054, respectively. Although detected, detection sensors corresponding to the respective out ports may not be provided on the game board 5 side, but may be provided on the body frame 4 side. Such modifications will be described below.

First, as a first modified example, a game ball B entered into a ball entrance (a prize winning opening, an out opening) provided on the game board 5 passes through the ball discharge opening 629 provided in the main body frame 4. A frame-side out-port sensor capable of detecting the game ball B passing through the ball discharge port 629 is provided. be done. When the frame-side out-port sensor detects a game ball B that has passed through the ball discharge port 629, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. FIG. Then, in the main control board 1310, after the game ball B enters a ball entry hole (a winning hole, an out hole) provided on the game board 5, the merged game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. When the frame-side out-port sensor detects the game balls B, the number of game balls B detected by the frame-side out-port sensor is counted as the number of entering balls.

In the above description, the game balls B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 are also discharged from the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through the passage 610c and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, the ball passes through the discharged ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1. It is discharged to (the island facility side of the game hall), and not only the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, but also the game ball B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is also the frame side. The out port sensor is configured to be detectable. Here, considering the purpose of grasping the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a, the number of game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is It is desired to eliminate (invalidate) and perform various calculations. In response to this, in the configuration in which the frame side outlet sensor also detects the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580, the sensor is positioned upstream of the frame side outlet sensor and separately from this. A game ball B discharged downward from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580 is detected by the ball discharge detection sensor, and the game ball detected by the ball discharge detection sensor is provided. It is desirable that the number of B is subtracted from the number of incoming balls. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is detected by the ball removal detection sensor, is subtracted from the number of incoming balls, and is detected by the frame side out outlet sensor. It is added to the number of entering balls, and substantially the number of game balls B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 can be prevented from being reflected in the number of entering balls. In addition, such a form is applied when the game ball B is released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 in a state where the gaming machine 1 is not energized (when the ball is pulled out of the payout device 580). , there is no problem because neither the ball removal detection sensor nor the frame side outlet sensor can perform the detection itself, but when the game machine 1 is energized, the game is played downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580. When the ball B is released (when the ball is pulled out of the payout device 580), or when the game machine 1 is not energized, the game ball B is released downward from the ball pull-out passage 580b of the payout device 580. This solves the problem when the game machine 1 is energized while the ball is being pulled out (the action of pulling the ball out of the payout device 580 is performed). In addition, the game ball B hit into the game area 5a and the game ball B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 do not merge and pass through separate passages to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1. It may be configured such that only the game ball B struck into the game area 5a can be detected by the frame-side out-port sensor. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to subtract the number of game balls detected by the above-described ball removal detection sensor from the number of entered balls.

Next, as a second modification, the game ball B that entered the winning hole to which the winning ball is paid out and the game ball B that did not enter the winning hole enter the out hole for collecting. The game balls B that have been played are discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (on the side of the island equipment of the game hall) through separate passages without being merged, and the prize winning is the object to pay out the prize balls by entering. A first frame side out opening sensor capable of detecting a game ball B passing through a first passage after the game ball B entering the opening joins, and a game ball not entering the winning opening. A second frame side out hole sensor capable of detecting the game ball B passing through the second passage after the game ball B entering the out hole for collecting B is provided. be done. When the first frame-side outlet sensor detects the game ball B passing through the first passage, the second frame-side outlet sensor detects the game ball B passing through the second passage. At times, detection signals are input to the main control board 1310 respectively. Then, in the main control board 1310, after the game ball B has entered the winning hole from which the winning ball is to be paid out, when the merged game ball B passes through the first passage, the first The frame side out hole sensor detects the game ball B, and after the game ball B enters the out hole that collects the game ball B that did not enter the winning hole, the merged game ball B is the second When passing through the passage, the second frame side out sensor detects game balls B, the number of game balls B detected by the first frame side out sensor, and the number of game balls B detected by the second frame side out sensor The game ball B detected by the side outlet sensor is counted as the number of entering balls.

[Regarding production control based on special monitor information]
In this example, the special monitor 1310h not only displays the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, but also uses the information obtained from the special monitor 1310h to judge the game status of the pachinko machine 1 and reflect it in the content of the effect. I am letting Effect control regarding information obtained from such a special monitor 1310h will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 270 is a flow chart showing an example of special monitor-related effect processing that is executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing.

As shown in FIG. 270, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether or not a special monitor information command has been received from the main control board 1310 (step S2701). A special monitor information command is a command indicating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, which is equivalent to the information output to the special monitor 1310h. In addition, the special monitor information command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board every time the number of balls B entered (the number of balls entered) reaches 100. 1510 is being sent.

In the processing of step S2701, if it is determined that a special monitor information command has been received from the main control board 1310 side, it is determined whether or not the special monitor information command has been received ten times or more since the power was turned on. (Step S2702). In other words, since the special monitor information command is transmitted every time the number of game balls B entered (the number of balls entered) reaches 100, the game can be played after the power is turned on. is started, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls B that have entered at least the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) has reached 1000 balls. If it is determined that the special monitor information command has been received ten times or more since the power was turned on, the processing of steps S2703 to S2708 is performed.

In the processing of step S2703, as information obtained from the special monitor information command, it is determined whether or not the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is equal to or greater than the first abnormal value or equal to or less than the second abnormal value. .

In the process of step S2703, if it is determined that the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is not equal to or greater than the first abnormal value and is not lower than the second abnormal value, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is , is greater than or equal to the first specified value (step S2704). Then, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of hit balls is equal to or greater than the first specified value, a special sound A is output as a voice output from the speaker, suggesting that the number of payouts to the number of hit balls is large ( step S2705). As the special sound A, a voice saying "You're in good shape" is output.

In the process of step S2704, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is less than the first specified value, it is determined whether the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is equal to or less than the second specified value. It judges (step S2706). Then, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is equal to or less than the second specified value, a special sound B is output as an audio output from the speaker, suggesting that the number of payouts relative to the number of balls entering is small ( step S2707). As the special sound B, a voice saying "You're in good shape" is output. In the process of step S2707, it is determined whether to output any one of setting suggesting sounds A to C suggesting the currently set value (execution lottery). Any one of setting suggestion sounds A to C is output according to the result of determination.

Here, the first specified value and the second specified value refer to values assumed by the game designer regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered when the game is played normally. Using the reference value as a reference, the first specified value is set so as to increase the ratio of the reference value, and the second specified value is set so as to make the ratio smaller than the reference value (first specified value>reference value>second specified value). In other words, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is equal to or greater than the first specified value, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is higher than the reference value. It can be understood that the number of balls has increased, and it was easy for the ball to enter the winning hole, which is the target for paying out the prize ball by entering the ball. On the other hand, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is equal to or less than the second specified value, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is lower than the reference value, so the payout amount is higher than expected by the player designer. It can be understood that the number of balls has decreased, and it was difficult to enter the winning hole, which is the target for paying out prize balls by entering the ball.

In addition, the first abnormal value is set so that the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is much higher than the reference value or the first specified value (first abnormal value>> first specified value>reference value). In other words, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is equal to or greater than the first abnormal value, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is much higher than the reference value or the first specified value. is unexpectedly too large, and it is suspected that the ball is illegally entered into the winning opening, which is the target of paying out the prize ball. On the other hand, the second abnormal value is set so that the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is much smaller than the standard value or the second specified value (reference value > second specified value). value >> second outlier). In other words, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is equal to or less than the second abnormal value, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is much lower than the reference value or the second specified value. is unexpectedly too small, and the nails, etc. near the prize-winning openings, which are the targets for paying out prize balls, are bent and crafted so that balls do not enter those prize-winning openings. is suspected.

In addition, in the execution determination (execution lottery) which one of the setting suggestion sounds A to C is to be output, when the special monitor information command is received, the peripheral control MPU acquires a predetermined random value X, and selects the low setting value. Any one of a setting suggesting sound A suggesting a setting suggesting sound B suggesting a high set value and a setting suggesting sound C suggesting a set value 6 is determined according to the currently set set value and the random value X. Here, when the currently set setting values are the setting values 1 to 3, the setting suggesting sound A suggesting the low setting value has a higher probability than the setting suggesting sound B (setting suggesting sound A: setting suggesting sound B=7:3 ratio), the effect is decided according to the value of the random value X with reference to the low setting effect apportionment table. Further, when the setting value is 4 to 5, the setting suggesting sound B suggesting the high setting value has a higher probability than the setting suggesting sound A (setting suggesting sound A: setting suggesting sound B = 3:7 ratio). Effect determination according to the value of the random number value X is performed by referring to the high setting effect apportionment table 1 to be determined. In addition, when the setting value is 6, the setting suggesting sounds A to C including the setting suggesting sound C suggesting the setting value 6, which is not determined when the setting values are 1 to 5, are generated with a predetermined probability (setting Suggestive sound A: Suggestive setting sound B: Suggestive setting sound C = 1:5:4 ratio) The high setting effect distribution table 2 is referred to and the effect is determined according to the value of the random value X. . In other words, the setting suggesting sounds A and B may be output regardless of the current setting values. When the suggestive sound C is output, it is determined that the set value currently set is the set value 6. - 特許庁In this way, when the setting suggesting sound is output, it is possible to have an expectation corresponding to the suggestion of the setting value that can be grasped from the setting suggesting sound.

As the setting suggesting sound A suggesting a low setting value, sound data in which a sound "beep" is output from a speaker is used, and as the setting suggesting sound B suggesting a high setting value, a "beep is used, and as the setting suggesting sound C suggesting the setting value 6, the sound data of outputting the sound "beep beep" from the speaker is used. In this way, by outputting different setting suggesting sounds for each setting value suggestion, it is possible to grasp what kind of setting value is suggested.

As described above, in this example, it is possible to output a special sound as an effect according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, which is the information obtained from the special monitor information command. Specifically, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is equal to or greater than a first specified value, by outputting a special sound A suggesting that the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is large, It can be grasped that the ball is likely to enter the prize winning hole to which the prize ball is to be paid out. On the other hand, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is equal to or less than the second specified value, a special sound B is output to suggest that the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is small, thereby winning prize balls by entering balls. It is possible to grasp that it was difficult for the ball to enter the winning hole to be paid out. Thereby, when the special sound is output, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game efficiency is good.

In this example, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is within the range of the first prescribed value to the second prescribed value, an effect is executed according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls. No. However, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is in the range of the first specified value to the second specified value, for example, as the sound output from the speaker, the number of payouts to the number of entered balls is near the reference value. A special sound C suggesting something may be output. As the special sound C, for example, a voice saying "That's okay" is output. As a result, when the special sound C is output, it can be understood that the game efficiency is close to the reference value assumed by the game designer.

Further, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of hit balls is equal to or less than the second specified value, in addition to outputting a special sound B suggesting that the number of payouts to the number of hit balls is small, the currently set Any one of setting suggesting sounds A to C suggesting a set value is output. In this way, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is equal to or less than the second specified value, it is difficult to enter the winning hole from which prize balls are paid out, and the gaming efficiency is reduced. Although it is a bad situation, when the setting suggestion sound is output, it is possible to know the information about the currently set setting value, so that even under such a situation where the game efficiency is low, the player will be motivated to continue playing the game. can be made In addition, when it is suggested that the currently set set value is a high set value, it is possible to make the player particularly motivated to continue the game, because the situation is such that a win is likely to occur.

In addition, in this example, the number of game balls B entering the entrance (winning entrance, out exit) is displayed according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls, which is the information obtained from the special monitor information command. It is to be executed every time (number of balls entered) reaches 100 balls. As a result, as long as the game is continued, it is possible to periodically execute an effect according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls, and it is possible to periodically grasp whether the game efficiency is good. can be done.

In this example, after the game is started after the power is turned on, at least the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 1000 balls. During this period, the performance is limited according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, which is information obtained from the special monitor information command. This is because immediately after the game is started after the power is turned on, the situation where the balls enter the winning hole to which the prize balls are paid out continues, and the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is higher than the standard value. It is easy for bias to occur, such as the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is lower than the standard value, such as the situation where the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is lower than the standard value. ing. Therefore, immediately after the game is started after the power is turned on, it is determined that the information obtained from the special monitor information command is unreliable, and the performance corresponding to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is not executed. I'm doing it.

In the process of step S2703, if it is determined that the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is equal to or greater than the first abnormal value or equal to or less than the second abnormal value, the number of entering balls is output as audio output from the speaker. An abnormality notification sound is output to suggest that the number of payouts for is greatly deviated from the reference value (step S2708). As the abnormality notification sound, a voice saying "It's strange" is output.

As described above, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is equal to or higher than the first abnormal value, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is much higher than the reference value or the first specified value. , The number of payouts is unexpectedly too large, and it is suspected that the balls are illegally entered into the winning openings to which the prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is equal to or less than the second abnormal value, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is much lower than the reference value or the second specified value. is unexpectedly too small, and the nails, etc. near the prize-winning openings, which are the targets for paying out prize balls, are bent and crafted so that balls do not enter those prize-winning openings. is suspected. In such a case, by outputting an abnormality notification sound, it is possible to notify that some abnormality has occurred with respect to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, thereby enhancing the deterrence against cheating. can.

It should be noted that the volume of the game sound output from the speaker can be changed by operating the effect operation section 301 . That is, after the volume of the game sound is changed, the effect sound is output at the changed volume. However, while the volume of the special sound is output at the changed volume, the volume of the abnormality notification sound is output at the maximum volume regardless of whether the volume has been changed. . For example, if the volume of the abnormality notification sound is also reduced when the volume is changed to a low volume, even if the abnormality notification sound is output, there is a possibility that the abnormality notification sound will not be noticed. By outputting an abnormality notification sound in , it is possible to reliably notify that some abnormality has occurred, and to increase deterrence against fraudulent acts.

Incidentally, in this example, every time the number of game balls B entered into the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) reaches 100, a special monitor information command is transmitted, and the special monitor At the timing when the information command is sent, it is possible to execute an effect (output of a special sound) according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls. It may be possible to execute an effect according to the ratio of the number of payouts. For example, the special monitor information command may be sent at any time each time the game ball B enters the ball entrance (winning or out). Then, the timing at which it is determined that the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is equal to or greater than the first prescribed value based on the special monitor information command, or the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is equal to or smaller than the second prescribed value. At the timing determined as such, an effect (output of a special sound) may be executed according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls. As a result, the information obtained from the special monitor information command can be known in real time.

Further, for example, at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed as the contact time with the handle 182, it may be possible to execute an effect (output of a special sound) according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls. As a result, the desire to continue operating the steering wheel 182 can be generated. Further, for example, during execution of a specific ready-to-win effect such as a highly anticipated ready-to-win effect, the timing at which the single-shot button 116 capable of stopping the launch of the game ball B is operated, or the operation of the single-shot button 116 is canceled. At the timing, it may be possible to execute an effect (output of a special sound) according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls. Among these, if it is possible to execute an effect (output of a special sound) according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered at the timing when the operation of the single-shot button 116 is canceled, the single-shot button 116 is operated. Even in a situation where the launch of the game ball B is stopped by pressing the button 116, the desire to continue launching the game ball B can be generated by canceling the operation of the single-shot button 116.

As for the special monitor 1310h, the main control MPU calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, stores the calculation result in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the special monitor 1310h. I have to. Also, the information stored in the specific area of the RAM (the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls won) is not cleared even if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on. However, regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls, each time the number of game balls B entered into the entry hole (winning hole, out hole) reaches 60000 balls, a new entry will be made. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls is calculated, and the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls that has become old is stored as a history up to a predetermined number of calculation results. In such a specification of the special monitor 1310h, for example, from the point of time when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is newly calculated, at least the number of game balls B entered into the entry hole (winning hole, out hole) ( Until the number of incoming balls) reaches 1000, the performance may be restricted according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the new number of incoming balls. This is because immediately after calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls, the number of entering balls continues to enter the winning hole, which is the target for paying out winning balls, and the number of entering balls is lower than the standard value. The ratio of the number of payouts is high, or the number of payouts is lower than the standard value due to a situation in which the balls do not enter the winning opening to which the prize balls are paid out. Bias is more likely to occur. Therefore, immediately after calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, it is determined that the information obtained from the special monitor information command is unreliable, and the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is calculated. It is only necessary to decide not to execute the production.

In this example, it is possible to output a special sound from the speaker as an effect corresponding to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, which is the information obtained from the special monitor information command. may be executed using any of sound, display, and lamp emission, or two or more of them may be executed.

[Regarding measurement prohibition status of special monitor]
As described above, during the game, the number of game balls B entered (the number of balls entered) provided in the game area 5a divided and formed on the game board 5 (the number of balls entered), In other words, the number of game balls B discharged from within the game area 5a and the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 by entering the winning hole (number of payouts) are counted. Then, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is calculated from the information, and the calculation result is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. In addition to such a configuration, in this embodiment, the main control board 1310 can generate a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) that prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts. A special monitor measurement inhibit switch 1310j is provided.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j. Since this special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is provided on the back side of the game machine 1, it can be operated after the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, and can be operated only by the hall manager. It is possible to

The special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j can be operated upward or downward from the reference position. The signal of this special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. FIG. Normally, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is set to the reference position, and the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts are counted. On the other hand, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward or downward, the measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) that prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts is activated. are causing it. However, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B cannot be shot from the ball launching device 540. When the prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, a state is generated in which the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting device 540 when the handle 182 is operated.

More specifically, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, the main control MPU sets the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal even if the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input. is set to the inverted firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic). That is, even when the handle 182 is touched, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633. FIG. Therefore, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, a measurement prohibition state is generated. 182 to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, the launch control unit 633b does not receive the launch permission signal, so the launch solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B is not allowed to be typed. While the measurement prohibition state is being executed, the ejection permission signal is not output toward the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, but after the measurement prohibition state ends, the ejection control board 633 Although it is possible to output a firing permission signal to the control unit 633b, if the handle 182 is continuously touched from before to after the end of the measurement prohibition state, the measurement prohibition state ends. Even afterward, the launch permission signal is not output. In such a case, after the end of the measurement prohibition state, by releasing the hand from the handle 182 once and touching it again, the firing permission signal can be output, and the game ball B is played by rotating the handle 182. An implant can be made in the region 5a.

On the other hand, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, the main control MPU sets the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input. making it possible. That is, when the handle 182 is touched, a firing permission signal is output toward the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633. FIG. Therefore, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, a measurement prohibition state is generated. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the drive of the firing solenoid 542 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182, and the game ball You can hit B.

(Regarding the extension of the measurement prohibition state)
First, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 286 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward.

As shown in FIG. 286, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward at timing t1, the main control MPU enters a measurement prohibition state (stop) that prohibits (stops) measurement of the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts. non-measurement state). Specifically, in the measurement prohibition state, regardless of whether or not the game ball B has entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole), the game in which the ball entered the ball entering hole (winning hole, out hole) It prohibits counting the number of balls (the number of entered balls) of ball B, and maintains the information on the number of entered balls before transitioning to the measurement prohibition state. In addition, in the measurement prohibited state, counting the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (number of payouts) is prohibited, and information on the number of payouts before shifting to the measurement prohibited state is maintained. In other words, in the measurement prohibited state, the information regarding the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts does not change, so the information regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls is maintained as it was before the transition to the measurement prohibited state.

Then, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at timing t2, the main control MPU does not end the measurement prohibition state immediately, and a predetermined state continuation period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the measurement prohibition state is ended, and counting of the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts is started. That is, even after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at timing t2, the measurement prohibition state is continued for a predetermined state continuation period. In addition, after the end of the count prohibited state, the new number of entered balls is added to the information on the number of entered balls that has been maintained since before the transition to the prohibited state. A new number of payouts is added to the information on the number of payouts maintained before the transition.

After the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at timing t2, the handle 182 is operated for a predetermined state continuation period (for example, 5 seconds) during which the measurement prohibition state continues. After the game ball B is launched, it enters a ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) on the game area 4a and is detected by a detection sensor corresponding to the ball entering hole (winning hole, out hole). It is set to be at least longer than the ball flow down time (for example, 4.5 seconds). For example, when the game ball B used during inspection of the pachinko machine 1 remains in the game area 4a while the measurement prohibition state is being executed after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward at the timing t2. Even if the game ball B flows down the game area 4a after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at the timing t2, the game ball B does not enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, out Regarding the timing detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the opening), the measurement prohibition state continues, and it is not counted as the number of incoming balls or the number of payouts, and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the number of incoming balls can be reliably excluded from the ratio of the number of payouts to

As described above, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) is generated to prohibit (stop) the measurement of the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts. ing. For example, if an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 will be inspected by the hall manager in order to eliminate the abnormality. When counting is performed, the game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) during such inspection are displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls). As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h no longer indicates the information being played. In this regard, during inspection of the pachinko machine 1, the hall manager operates the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j upward to generate a measurement prohibition state in which measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts is prohibited. A game ball B entered into a ball entry hole (award winning hole, out hole) during such an inspection is not reflected in the information (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls) displayed on the special monitor 1310h. As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can indicate the information during the game.

In addition, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) is generated in which measurement of the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts is prohibited (stopped). After the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, the measurement prohibition state is continued until the predetermined state continuation period elapses. After completing the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 and returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from above to the reference position, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 1 will become abnormal again. In this regard, after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, by continuing the measurement prohibition state until the predetermined state continuation period elapses, the pachinko machine 1 again Information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered) is displayed on the special monitor 1310h, even if an abnormality occurs. is not reflected in As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can exclude the information at the time of occurrence of the abnormality, and the accuracy of the information during the game can be maintained.

In addition, in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t3, even if the game ball B enters the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance), it is treated as invalid, and measurement is prohibited at timing t3. After the state is terminated, the game ball B entering such a ball entrance is treated as valid. Specifically, in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t3, "a mode in which the power supply to the detection sensor is cut off so that the detection itself by the detection sensor corresponding to each ball entrance is not performed" , ``a mode in which detection is performed by the detection sensor but no detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310'', or ``detection is performed by the detection sensor and the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310 However, based on the detection signal, the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts are not reflected. In addition, after the counting prohibition state ends at timing t3, "detection by the detection sensor is performed, the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, and based on the detection signal, the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts is detected. The manner in which it is reflected in the figures”. As a result, in the measurement prohibited state, even if the game ball B enters the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole), it is prohibited to be counted as the number of entering balls or the number of payouts, and is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. It can be excluded from the information (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls).

In addition to the above, the game ball B is prevented from being put out from the payout device 580 in the measurement prohibited state that is the period of timing t1 to t3, and after the measurement prohibited state ends at timing t3, the game ball B is released from the payout device 580. It is possible to pay out In addition, in the measurement prohibition state, which is the period of timing t1 to t3, it is set to a state in which it is impossible to perform variable display of special symbols (variation impossible state), and after the measurement prohibition state ends at timing t3, the fluctuation of special symbols A transition is made to a state in which display can be performed (variable state). As a result, even if the game ball B enters the winning opening such as the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 in the measurement prohibited state, the special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, and the payout device 580 is released. The game ball B is not put out, and it is possible to prevent profit from being obtained during execution of the measurement prohibition state.

In addition, in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t3, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is prevented from being shot from the ball launching device 540, and after the measurement prohibited state ends at timing t3, the handle When 182 is operated, a game ball B is shot from the ball shooting device 540. - 特許庁As a result, even if the handle 182 is operated in the measurement prohibition state, the game ball B is not shot in the first place, so that the game ball B cannot be shot to enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole). , it is possible to prevent profit from being obtained during execution of the measurement prohibition state.

Further, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting illegal magnetism within the game area 5a and a vibration sensor 3005 for detecting illegal vibration within the game area 5a. In the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t3, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as effective, and continues even after the measurement prohibited state ends at timing t3. . As a result, in the measurement prohibition state, when trying to illegally enter the game ball B into the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) by using a magnet or giving vibration, illegal magnetism or illegal Vibrations can be detected, and fraud can be prevented. However, detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 may be invalidated during the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t3. In such a case, in the measurement prohibited state, even if a magnet approaches or a vibration is applied without the hall manager's intention during inspection, the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 may detect it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inspection work of the hall manager from being hindered.

In the above, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as effective in the measurement prohibited state that is the period of timing t1 to t3, and the entrance (winning entrance) is detected by using a magnet or applying vibration. , out-port), illegal magnetism and illegal vibration are detected. Here, regarding the information about the game, the outer end signal is output to the outside (hall computer) via the external terminal plate 558, but the outer end signal that conveys the measurement prohibition state and the external end signal that conveys the magnetic detection and vibration detection. The terminal signal is output from the same terminal. The outer end signal that conveys the measurement prohibited state is output with priority over the outer end signal that conveys magnetic detection and vibration detection. For this reason, except for the measurement prohibited state, when an illegal magnetism or illegal vibration is detected, the outer end signal that conveys the detection of magnetism or vibration is output. Even if magnetism or illegal vibration is detected, it does not output an outer end signal that conveys magnetism detection or vibration detection. In addition, except for the measurement prohibited state, an abnormality notification that conveys magnetic detection or vibration detection is performed using the effect display device 1600 or the like. Priority is given to the special display corresponding to , and the abnormality notification (display) that conveys magnetic detection and vibration detection is not performed.

In this embodiment, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts is displayed on the special monitor 1310h as information on the number of entering balls and the number of payouts, and is also displayed on the effect display device 1600. FIG. In addition, in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t3, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 without displaying information on the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. doing. The display of the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward will be described with reference to FIGS. 286 and 287. FIG. FIG. 287 shows a specific display example displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement inhibition switch 1310j is operated upward.

First, in a normal state (when measurement is not prohibited), it is possible to count the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts, and the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is calculated. For example, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is 20.0%, the special monitor 1310h displays a numerical value of "A-20.0", and the effect display device 1600 displays "payout rate 20.0%". 0%” is displayed (FIG. 287(A)). As a result, both the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 can recognize the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls. Normally, by transmitting an information command that conveys the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 can display the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls. allowing it to be displayed.

More specifically, regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls, each time the number of game balls B entered into the entry hole (winning hole, out hole) reaches 60000 balls, The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is newly calculated, and the old calculation results of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls are saved as history up to two calculation results. Then, on the special monitor 1310h, "the ratio of the number of payouts to the current number of hits"→"the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of hits in the previous history"→"the number of hits in the history of two times before" The display is switched at regular intervals (for example, 3 seconds) in the order of "ratio of the number of payouts to". For example, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, which is the history of the previous record and the history of the record of the previous record of the second record, is 20.0%, then the special monitor 1310h displays "A-20.0". →"B-20.0"→"C-20.0" in this order, and the display is switched at regular time intervals (for example, 3 seconds). During execution of the measurement prohibited state, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h as described later. The ratio of the number of payouts to the current number of incoming balls" is started in order.

In addition, in the measurement prohibited state, special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 without displaying information on the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts. A period of timings t1 to t2 until the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, and a period of timings t2 to t3 after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above. , the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state is switched from the special display 1 to the special display 2.

Specifically, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward during the period from timing t1 to t2 until the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upward direction to the reference position in the measurement prohibition state. As a special display 1 corresponding to the state of being in the state where the (Fig. 287(B)). As a result, both the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 can recognize that the measurement prohibition state is being set. In addition, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction, the main control board 1310 transmits a start command to inform the start of the measurement prohibition state to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the effect display device 1600 It enables display 1 to start displaying.

In the measurement prohibition state, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above during the period from timing t2 to t3 after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above. As a special display 2 corresponding to the state after the measurement, the special monitor 1310h displays the symbol "++++++", and the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Waiting for the end of the measurement prohibition state". (Fig. 287(C)). Further, in the effect display device 1600, a predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed so as to enclose the message "Waiting for completion of the measurement prohibition state". As a result, both the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 can recognize that the measurement prohibition state is waiting for completion. When the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, the main control board 1310 sends a peripheral control command to notify that the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j has been returned to the reference position from above. By transmitting toward the substrate 1510, the special display 2 can be started to be displayed in the effect display device 1600. FIG. After the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, when a predetermined state continuation period elapses, the main control board 1310 sends an end command to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the termination of the measurement prohibition state. By directing the transmission, the effect display device 1600 can return to normal display (display of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered).

As described above, in the measurement prohibited state, special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 without displaying information on the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts. As a result, both the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 can recognize whether or not the measurement prohibition state is being set. Also, in the measurement prohibition state, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state is switched from special display 1 to special display 2 before and after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above. As a result, both the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 can recognize whether the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j has been returned to the reference position from above. It is possible to prevent forgetting to return the

In addition, when switching the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state from special display 1 to special display 2 before and after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from above to the reference position in the measurement prohibition state, In the effect display device 1600, a predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed so as to enclose the message "Waiting for the end of the measurement prohibition state". As a result, the special display 2 is more conspicuous than the special display 1, making it easier to recognize that the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j has been returned to the reference position from above. In this example, while the measurement prohibition state is being executed, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state is displayed. In addition to the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310j, it may be executed using any of the sound output from the speaker, lamp light emission, etc., or two or more of them may be used.

In addition, the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (for example, the production operation unit 301, the back upper rear rotary decoration body 3440 and the back upper rear decoration body 3451, etc.) each have an initial position and an operation position. However, during execution of the measurement prohibition state, the performance member is restricted so as not to operate. As a result, the effect member does not operate while the measurement prohibition state is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the inspection work of the hall manager from being hindered.

Immediately after the start of the timing t1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, that is, immediately after the start of the measurement prohibition state, the special display corresponding to the start of the measurement prohibition state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600. 0 may be displayed. For example, as the special display 0 corresponding to the start of the measurement prohibited state, the 7 segments of the special monitor 1310h are displayed so as to be fully lit, and the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Start of the measurement prohibited state". may As a result, both the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 can recognize that the measurement prohibition state has started. Also, when the measurement prohibition state starts, by displaying the 7 segments of the special monitor 1310h so that all of them are lit, it is possible to confirm whether the special monitor 1310 normally performs the display operation.

In this example, when the measurement is normally performed and not in the measurement prohibited state, the special monitor 1310h displays the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts as information related to the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts, as well as an effect display. Displayed on device 1600 . Then, in the measurement prohibited state, special displays (special display 1, special display 2) corresponding to the measurement prohibited state are displayed without displaying information on the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts on the special monitor 1310h and the performance display device 1600. it's shown. However, in the performance display device 1600, the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts are normally measured without displaying the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts in a state in which measurement is normally performed and not in the measurement prohibited state. Only the display to that effect may be performed. In such a case, since the performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the player side in a state in which measurement is normally performed without being in a measurement prohibited state, the number of entered balls and the number of payouts are normally measured. While the player side can grasp only that fact, the special monitor 1310h is positioned on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 invisibly from the player side. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts can be grasped from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加In addition, in the measurement prohibition state, special displays (special display 1, special display 2) corresponding to the measurement prohibition state are displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600, so that the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are displayed. The fact that the measurement is not performed can be grasped from the player side or the back side of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

Also, in this example, a switch that can be operated in the vertical direction is used as the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j, but any member that can be moved to the measurement prohibition state by operation may be used. It may be a push-down switch or a member capable of shifting to the measurement prohibition state by operating a key possessed by the hall manager.

In this example, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j provided on the main control board 1310 is configured to be exposed from the main control board box 1320 in which the main control board 1310 is accommodated. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a small cover that disables contact with the prohibition switch 1310j from the outside. You may operate the prohibition switch 1310j. As a result, unintended operation of the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j can be prevented.

(Regarding a modified example of the end timing of the measurement prohibition state)
In the above, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at timing t2, the main control MPU does not end the measurement prohibition state immediately, and a predetermined state continuation period elapses from timing t2. However, the measurement prohibition state may be terminated when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at timing t2. However, even in such a case, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state is displayed not only during execution of the measurement prohibition state, but also at timing t3 when the predetermined notification continuation period has elapsed after the measurement prohibition state ends. Until then, it will continue to be displayed. A modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when such a special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 288 is a time chart showing a modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward.

As shown in FIG. 288, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward at timing t1, the main control MPU enters a measurement prohibition state (stop) that prohibits (stops) measurement of the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts. non-measurement state). Specifically, in the measurement prohibition state, regardless of whether or not the game ball B has entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole), the game in which the ball entered the ball entering hole (winning hole, out hole) It prohibits counting the number of balls (the number of entered balls) of ball B, and maintains the information on the number of entered balls before transitioning to the measurement prohibition state. In addition, in the measurement prohibited state, counting the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (number of payouts) is prohibited, and information on the number of payouts before shifting to the measurement prohibited state is maintained. In other words, in the measurement prohibited state, the information regarding the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts does not change, so the information regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls is maintained as it was before the transition to the measurement prohibited state.

When the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at timing t2, the main control MPU terminates the measurement prohibition state and starts counting the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts. there is In addition, after the end of the count prohibited state, the new number of entered balls is added to the information regarding the number of entered balls that has been maintained since before the transition to the prohibited state. A new number of payouts is added to the information on the number of payouts maintained before the transition.

As described above, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) is generated to prohibit (stop) the measurement of the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts. ing. For example, if an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 will be inspected by the hall manager in order to eliminate the abnormality. When counting is performed, the game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) during such inspection are displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls). As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h no longer indicates the information being played. In this regard, during inspection of the pachinko machine 1, the hall manager operates the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j upward to generate a measurement prohibition state in which measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts is prohibited. A game ball B entered into a ball entry hole (award winning hole, out hole) during such an inspection is not reflected in the information (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls) displayed on the special monitor 1310h. As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can indicate the information during the game.

In addition, in the measurement prohibition state, which is the period from timing t1 to t2, even if the game ball B enters the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance), it is treated as invalid, and measurement is prohibited at timing t2. After the state is terminated, the game ball B entering such a ball entrance is treated as valid. Specifically, in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t2, "a mode in which the power supply to the detection sensor is cut off so that the detection itself by the detection sensor corresponding to each ball entrance is not performed" , ``a mode in which detection is performed by the detection sensor but no detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310'', or ``detection is performed by the detection sensor and the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310 However, based on the detection signal, the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts are not reflected. In addition, after the counting prohibition state ends at timing t2, "detection by the detection sensor is performed, the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, and based on the detection signal, the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts is detected. The manner in which it is reflected in the figures”. As a result, in the measurement prohibited state, even if the game ball B enters the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole), it is prohibited to be counted as the number of entering balls or the number of payouts, and is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. It can be excluded from the information (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls).

In addition to the above, the game ball B is prevented from being dispensed from the payout device 580 in the measurement prohibition state that is the period of timing t1 to t2, and after the measurement prohibition state ends at the timing t2, the game ball B is released from the payout device 580. It is possible to pay out In addition, in the measurement prohibition state, which is the period of timing t1 to t2, the variable display of the special symbols is disabled (variation impossible state), and after the measurement prohibition state ends at timing t2, the fluctuation of the special symbols. A transition is made to a state in which display can be performed (variable state). As a result, even if the game ball B enters the winning opening such as the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 in the measurement prohibited state, the special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, and the payout device 580 is released. The game ball B is not put out, and it is possible to prevent profit from being obtained during execution of the measurement prohibition state.

In addition, in the measurement prohibition state, which is the period of timing t1 to t2, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is prevented from being shot from the ball launching device 540, and after the measurement prohibition state ends at the timing t2, the handle When 182 is operated, a game ball B is shot from the ball shooting device 540. - 特許庁As a result, even if the handle 182 is operated in the measurement prohibition state, the game ball B is not shot in the first place, so that the game ball B cannot be shot to enter the ball entrance (winning or out). , it is possible to prevent profit from being obtained during execution of the measurement prohibition state.

Further, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting illegal magnetism within the game area 5a and a vibration sensor 3005 for detecting illegal vibration within the game area 5a. During the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t2, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as valid, and continues even after the measurement prohibited state ends at timing t2. . As a result, in the measurement prohibition state, when trying to illegally enter the game ball B into the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) by using a magnet or giving vibration, illegal magnetism or illegal Vibrations can be detected and fraudulent actions can be prevented. However, detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 may be invalidated during the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t2. In such a case, in the measurement prohibited state, even if a magnet approaches or a vibration is applied without the hall manager's intention during inspection, the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 may detect it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inspection work of the hall manager from being hindered.

In the above, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as effective in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t2, and the ball entrance (winning entrance) is detected by using a magnet or applying vibration. , out hole), an illegal magnetism or illegal vibration is detected. Here, regarding the information about the game, the outer end signal is output to the outside (hall computer) via the external terminal plate 558, but the outer end signal that conveys the measurement prohibition state and the external end signal that conveys the magnetic detection and vibration detection. The terminal signal is output from the same terminal. The outer end signal that conveys the measurement prohibited state is output with priority over the outer end signal that conveys magnetic detection and vibration detection. For this reason, except for the measurement prohibited state, when an illegal magnetism or illegal vibration is detected, the outer end signal that conveys the detection of magnetism or vibration is output. Even if magnetism or illegal vibration is detected, it does not output an outer end signal that conveys magnetism detection or vibration detection. In addition, except during the display of a special display during execution of the measurement prohibition state and during the display of a special display that continues to be displayed after the end of the measurement prohibition state described later, magnetic detection and vibration detection are not performed. Abnormality notification is performed using the effect display device 1600 or the like, but during the display of such a special display, the special display is given priority, and abnormality notification (display) that conveys magnetic detection or vibration detection is performed. I try not to.

In this embodiment, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts is displayed on the special monitor 1310h as information on the number of entering balls and the number of payouts, and is also displayed on the effect display device 1600. FIG. In addition, in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t2, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. doing. Further, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is continued not only during execution of the measurement prohibited state, but also until timing t3 when the predetermined notification continuation period elapses after the measurement prohibited state ends. it's shown. A modified example of the display of the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 and 289. FIG. FIG. 289 is a specific modified example of display displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement inhibition switch 1310j is operated upward.

First, in the measurement prohibited state, special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the performance display device 1600 without displaying information on the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts. The special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed not only during execution of the measurement prohibited state, but also until timing t3 when a predetermined notification continuation period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the end of the measurement prohibited state. It is displayed continuously during

Specifically, during the period from timing t1 to t2 when the measurement prohibited state is being executed, the special display 1 corresponding to the fact that the measurement prohibited state is being executed is displayed on the special monitor 1310h as "----- -" is displayed, and the effect display device 1600 displays a message "Setting the measurement prohibition state" (FIG. 289(A)). As a result, both the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 can recognize that the measurement prohibition state is being set. In addition, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction, the main control board 1310 transmits a start command to inform the start of the measurement prohibition state to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the effect display device 1600 It enables display 1 to start displaying.

In addition, during the period of timing t2 to t3 after the end of the measurement prohibited state, as a special display 2 corresponding to the end of the measurement prohibited state, the special monitor 1310h displays a symbol "++++++++" to produce an effect. The display device 1600 displays a message "Setting measurement prohibited state" (Fig. 289(B)). Further, in the effect display device 1600, a predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed so as to enclose the message "Measurement prohibited state is being set". As a result, both the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 can be made to recognize that the measurement prohibition state is being set even after the measurement prohibition state has ended. When the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, that is, when the measurement prohibition state ends, the main control board 1310 sends an end command to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the end of the measurement prohibition state. By transmitting, it is possible to start displaying the special display 2 in the effect display device 1600 . Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, it is monitored whether or not a predetermined notification continuation period has elapsed after the end of the measurement prohibition state, and when the predetermined notification continuation period has elapsed after the end of the measurement prohibition state, an effect is displayed. In the device 1600, it is possible to return to normal display (display of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls).

As described above, in the measurement prohibited state, special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 without displaying information on the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts. As a result, both the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 can recognize whether or not the measurement prohibition state is being set. Further, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed not only during execution of the measurement prohibited state, but also continuously until a predetermined notification continuation period elapses after the measurement prohibited state ends. Here, when operating the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j, since the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is provided on the back side of the game machine 1, it is necessary to open the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. There is In other words, immediately after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, the body frame 4 is in a state of being opened with respect to the outer frame 2, so the ball entrance (winning entrance, out exit) However, if game ball B is illegally entered into the ball entrance (winning entrance, out exit), it will be after the end of the measurement prohibition state. It is counted as the number of entered balls and the number of payouts, and is reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls). It ceases to be something to show. In this regard, by recognizing that the measurement prohibition state is being set even after the measurement prohibition state has ended, it is possible to reduce the motivation to illegally enter the ball. The reliability of the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can be improved. In addition, there is a possibility that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 due to the fraudulent act, and in order to inspect the pachinko machine 1 after the occurrence of the abnormality, the hall manager operates the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j upward. When the measurement prohibition state is generated by the measurement prohibition state, it is made to recognize as if the measurement prohibition state is being set after the measurement prohibition state ends, so that the person who is likely to have committed the fraudulent act can be re-attacked. Motivation to cheat can be reduced.

Further, after the measurement prohibition state ends at timing t2, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state is continuously displayed until timing t3 when a predetermined notification continuation period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. However, during such a predetermined notification continuation period, when the handle 182 is operated, it is possible to shoot the game ball B from the ball launching device 540, the first start port 2002, the second start By entering the game ball B into a winning opening such as the opening 2004, it is possible to perform variable display of special symbols (variable display of decorative symbols). In such a case, in the effect display device 1600, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state is displayed while the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed. By displaying with priority, even if the game ball B is illegally entered into the winning hole, it can be recognized as if the variable display of the decorative pattern is not performed, and the ball is illegally entered. It can reduce the desire to

Before and after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state is switched from special display 1 to special display 2. FIG. As a result, both the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 can recognize whether the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j has been returned to the reference position from above. It is possible to prevent forgetting to return the

Before and after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, when switching the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state from the special display 1 to the special display 2, the effect display device 1600: A predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed so as to enclose the message "Measurement prohibited state is being set". As a result, the special display 2 is more conspicuous than the special display 1, making it easier to recognize that the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j has been returned to the reference position from above. In this example, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is continuously displayed not only during execution of the measurement prohibited state but also after the end of the measurement prohibited state until the predetermined notification continuation period elapses. However, any notification corresponding to the measurement prohibition state may be performed, and such notification may be any of the effect display device 1600, the special monitor 1310j, the sound output from the speaker, the light emission of the lamp, and the like. It may be executed using two or more of them.

In addition, the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (for example, the production operation unit 301, the back upper rear rotary decoration body 3440 and the back upper rear decoration body 3451, etc.) each have an initial position and an operation position. However, during execution of the measurement prohibition state, the performance member is restricted not to operate. As a result, the performance member does not operate while the measurement prohibition state is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the inspection work of the hall manager from being hindered. In addition, not only during the display of the special display during execution of the measurement prohibition state, but also during the display of the special display that continues to be displayed after the end of the measurement prohibition state, the effect member may be restricted so as not to operate. . As a result, even during the display of the special display that continues to be displayed after the end of the measurement prohibition state, the production material does not operate just like during the execution of the measurement prohibition state, so it seems that the measurement prohibition state is set. can be recognized.

Immediately after the start of the timing t1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, that is, immediately after the start of the measurement prohibition state, the special display corresponding to the start of the measurement prohibition state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600. 0 may be displayed. For example, as the special display 0 corresponding to the start of the measurement prohibited state, the 7 segments of the special monitor 1310h, etc. are displayed so as to be fully lit, and the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Start of the measurement prohibited state". may As a result, both the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 can recognize that the measurement prohibition state has started. Also, when the measurement prohibition state starts, by displaying the 7 segments of the special monitor 1310h so that all of them are lit, it is possible to confirm whether the special monitor 1310 normally performs the display operation.

Also, in this example, during the display of the special display during execution of the measurement prohibition state, during the display of the special display that continues to be displayed after the end of the measurement prohibition state, and during non-display of the special display except for As information on the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and also displayed on the effect display device 1600. FIG. During the display of the special display, the special display (special display 1, special display 2 ) is displayed. However, the performance display device 1600 does not display the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of hit balls while the special display is not displayed, and only displays that the number of hit balls and the number of payouts are normally measured. You may do so. In such a case, since the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the player side while the special display is not displayed, the player side will only be notified that the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are being measured normally. On the other hand, since the special monitor 1310h is positioned on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so that it cannot be visually recognized from the player side, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts as information on the number of entering balls and the number of payouts is displayed. It can be grasped from the back side of the machine 1 . During the display of the special display, the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 indicate that the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are not measured when the special display is 1, and the number of balls entered when the special display 2 is displayed. The player side and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can grasp the number and the number of payouts as if they are not being measured (as if the measurement prohibition state is being set).

(Regarding ball launch permission during measurement prohibition state)
Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 290 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward. Compared to the case where the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, this is the same in that a measurement prohibition state is generated in which measurement of the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts is prohibited, but when the handle 182 is operated, the ball The difference is that a state in which the game ball B is shot from the shooting device 540 is generated.

More specifically, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, the main control MPU sets the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input. make it possible to That is, when the handle 182 is touched, a firing permission signal is output toward the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633. FIG. Therefore, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, a measurement prohibition state is generated. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the driving of the firing solenoid 542 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182, and the game ball You can hit B.

As shown in FIG. 290, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward at timing t1, the main control MPU enters a measurement prohibition state (stop) that prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts. non-measurement state). Specifically, in the measurement prohibition state, regardless of whether or not the game ball B has entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole), the game in which the ball entered the ball entering hole (winning hole, out hole) It prohibits counting the number of balls (the number of entered balls) of ball B, and maintains the information on the number of entered balls before transitioning to the measurement prohibition state. In addition, in the measurement prohibited state, counting the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (number of payouts) is prohibited, and information on the number of payouts before shifting to the measurement prohibited state is maintained. In other words, in the measurement prohibited state, the information regarding the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts does not change, so the information regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls is maintained as it was before the transition to the measurement prohibited state.

Then, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from the downward direction at timing t2, the main control MPU does not end the measurement prohibition state immediately, and a predetermined state continuation period has passed since timing t2. At timing t3, the measurement prohibition state ends, and counting of the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts is started. That is, even after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from the downward direction at timing t2, the measurement prohibition state is continued for a predetermined state continuation period (for example, 5 seconds). In addition, after the end of the count prohibited state, the new number of entered balls is added to the information on the number of entered balls that has been maintained since before the transition to the prohibited state. The new number of payouts is added to the information on the number of payouts maintained before the transition.

In addition, in the measurement prohibition state, which is the period of timing t1 to t3, when the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is launched from the ball launching device 540, and the measurement prohibition state ends at the timing t3. I will continue to do so later. In other words, when the measurement prohibition state and the shooting permission state are set at the same time, the game ball B can be shot from the ball shooting device 540. You can enter the ball.

As described above, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) is generated that prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts. In addition, when the handle 182 is operated, a shooting permission state in which the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting device 540 is generated. In other words, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, when the handle 182 is operated, it is possible to shoot the game ball B from the ball launching device 540. A trial shot mode is set, which is not reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting device 540, and whether the game ball B shot from the ball shooting device 540 normally enters the ball entrance (winning slot, out slot). In order to confirm whether there is a ball, a trial shot by the hall manager is required. The game ball B entering the winning hole, out hole) is reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered), and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h It no longer shows the information inside. In this regard, when the hall manager performs trial shots, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward to generate a measurement prohibition state that prohibits the measurement of the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts. A game ball B entering a ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) during a trial shot is not reflected in the information (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering) displayed on the special monitor 1310h. As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can indicate the information during the game.

In addition, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) is generated in which measurement of the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts is prohibited (stopped). After the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from the downward direction, the measurement prohibition state is continued until the predetermined state continuation period elapses. Immediately before returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j to the reference position from the bottom, if the hall manager is performing a test shot, immediately after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j to the standard position from the bottom, There is a possibility that the trial-hit game ball B will enter a ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole). In this regard, after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from the downward direction, the measurement prohibition state is continued until the predetermined state continuation period elapses. However, even if the ball enters the entrance (winning entrance, out exit) immediately after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the number of It is not reflected in the payout ratio). As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can exclude the information at the time of the trial shot, and the accuracy of the information during the game can be maintained.

After the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below at timing t2, the handle 182 is operated for a predetermined state continuation period (for example, 5 seconds) during which the measurement prohibition state continues. After the game ball B is launched, it enters a ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) on the game area 4a and is detected by a detection sensor corresponding to the ball entering hole (winning hole, out hole). It is set to be at least longer than the ball flow down time (for example, 4.5 seconds). As a result, even if the game ball B is shot by operating the handle 182 immediately before returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j to the reference position, the game ball B corresponds to the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening). Regarding the timing detected by the detection sensor, it is not counted as the number of incoming balls or the number of payouts during the continuation of the measurement prohibition state, and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the number of payouts for the number of incoming balls) percentage) can be reliably excluded.

Further, in the above, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from the downward direction at timing t2, the main control MPU does not end the measurement prohibition state immediately, but The measurement prohibition state is terminated at timing t3 after the elapse of the measurement prohibition state. The measurement prohibition state may end when the direction is returned to the reference position. That is, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below at timing t2, the trial shot mode (measurement prohibition state and firing permission state) may be ended.

In addition, in the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), which is the period from timing t1 to t3, even if the game ball B enters the entrance (winning entrance, out exit), it is treated as invalid. After the measurement prohibition state ends at timing t3, the game ball B entering such a ball entrance is treated as valid. Specifically, in the trial shot mode, which is the period from timing t1 to t3, "a mode in which the power supply to the detection sensors is cut off so that the detection itself by the detection sensors corresponding to each entrance is not performed" , ``a mode in which detection is performed by the detection sensor but no detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310'', or ``detection is performed by the detection sensor and the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310 However, based on the detection signal, the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts are not reflected. In addition, after the trial shot mode ends at timing t3, "detection by the detection sensor is performed, the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, and based on the detection signal, the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts is performed. The manner in which it is reflected in the figures”. As a result, in the trial shot mode, even if the game ball B enters the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole), it is prohibited to count the number of balls entering or the number of payouts, and is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. It can be excluded from the information (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls).

In addition to the above, in the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and shooting permitted state), which is the period from timing t1 to t3, the game ball B is prevented from being dispensed from the dispensing device 580, and after the trial shot mode ends at timing t3 , a game ball B can be paid out from a payout device 580. - 特許庁Further, in the trial shot mode, which is the period of timings t1 to t3, the variable display of the special symbols is disabled (unchangeable state), and after the trial shot mode ends at timing t3, the variable display of the special symbols is performed. is shifted to a state (variable state) in which it is possible to perform As a result, even if the game ball B enters the winning opening such as the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 in the trial shot mode, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed, and the payout device 580 is released. A game ball B is not put out, and profit can be prevented from being obtained during execution of the trial shot mode.

Further, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting illegal magnetism within the game area 5a and a vibration sensor 3005 for detecting illegal vibration within the game area 5a. In the trial firing mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), which is the period from timing t1 to t3, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as effective, and after the trial firing mode ends at timing t3 I am also trying to continue. As a result, in the trial shot mode, when trying to illegally enter the game ball B into the entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) by using a magnet or giving vibration, illegal magnetism or illegal Vibrations can be detected and fraudulent actions can be prevented. However, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 may be treated as invalid in the trial firing mode, which is the period from timing t1 to t3. In such a case, in the trial shot mode, the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 can be detected even if the magnet approaches or the vibration is given without the hall manager's intention during the trial shot. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inspection work of the hall manager from being hindered.

In the above, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as effective in the test firing mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), which is the period from timing t1 to t3, and a magnet is used or vibration is applied. For example, when a game ball B is illegally entered into a ball entrance (winning hole, out hole), illegal magnetism or illegal vibration is detected. Here, regarding the information about the game, the outer end signal is output to the outside (hall computer) via the external terminal plate 558, but the outer end signal that conveys the trial hitting mode and the outer end signal that conveys the magnetic detection and vibration detection. The terminal signal is output from the same terminal. Then, the outer end signal that conveys the trial shot mode is output with priority over the outer end signal that conveys magnetic detection and vibration detection. For this reason, except for the trial shot mode, when an illegal magnetism or illegal vibration is detected, an outer end signal that conveys the detection of magnetism or vibration is output. Even if magnetism or illegal vibration is detected, it does not output an outer end signal that conveys magnetism detection or vibration detection. Except for the trial shot mode, anomaly notification such as magnetic detection or vibration detection is performed using the effect display device 1600 or the like. A special display corresponding to the trial shot mode is given priority, and an abnormality notification (display) that conveys magnetic detection or vibration detection is not performed.

In this embodiment, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts is displayed on the special monitor 1310h as information on the number of entering balls and the number of payouts, and is also displayed on the effect display device 1600. FIG. In addition, during the period from timing t1 to t3, even if a trial shot is made, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered) is not reflected in the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and shooting mode). permission state), and a special display corresponding to the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) without displaying information on the number of balls entered or the number of payouts on the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. is displayed. The display of the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward will be described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 291. FIG. FIG. 291 is a specific display example displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement inhibition switch 1310j is operated downward.

First, in the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), a special display corresponding to the trial shot mode is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. Of these, the period from timing t1 to t2 until the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below and the period after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below The special display corresponding to the trial shot mode is switched from the special display 3 to the special display 4 during the period from timing t2 to t3.

Specifically, during the period from timing t1 to t2 until the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from the downward direction in the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), special monitor measurement is prohibited. As a special display 3 corresponding to the downward operation of the switch 1310j, the special monitor 1310h displays a symbol "LLLLLL", and the effect display device 1600 displays "Setting the trial shot mode". message is displayed (Fig. 291(A)). As a result, even if the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 performs a trial shot, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered) is not reflected in the trial shot mode ( It can be recognized that the measurement prohibition state and firing permission state) are being set. When the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, the main control board 1310 transmits a start command to tell the start of the trial shot mode to the peripheral control board 1510. It enables display 3 to start displaying.

Also, during the period from timing t2 to t3 after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from the downward direction in the trial firing mode (measurement prohibition state and firing permission state), the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j As a special display 4 corresponding to the state after returning to the reference position from below, the symbol "UUUUUU" is displayed on the special monitor 1310h, and the effect display device 1600 displays "end of trial shot mode. Waiting" message is displayed (Fig. 291(B)). Also, in the effect display device 1600, a predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed so as to enclose the message "Waiting for completion of trial shot mode". As a result, both the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 can recognize that the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) is waiting for completion. When the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below, the main control board 1310 issues an end operation command to notify that the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j has been returned to the reference position from below. By transmitting it toward the substrate 1510, it is possible to start displaying the special display 4 in the effect display device 1600. FIG. After the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from the downward direction, when a predetermined state continuation period elapses, the main control board 1310 sends an end command to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the end of the test firing mode. By directing the transmission, the effect display device 1600 can return to normal display (display of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered).

As described above, in the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 do not display information about the number of balls entered or the number of payouts, and the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state) and a launch permission state) is displayed. As a result, even if the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 performs a trial shot, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered) is not reflected in the trial shot mode ( It is possible to recognize whether the measurement prohibition state and firing permission state) are being set. Also, in the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), before and after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from the downward direction, the special display corresponding to the trial shot mode is changed from special display 3 to Switching to special display 4. As a result, both the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 can recognize whether the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j has been returned to the reference position from below. It is possible to prevent forgetting to return the

Also, in the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), before and after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from the downward direction, the special display corresponding to the trial shot mode is changed from special display 3 to When switching to the special display 4, the effect display device 1600 adds a predetermined display (graphic) so as to enclose the message "Waiting for completion of the trial shot mode". As a result, the special display 4 is more conspicuous than the special display 3, making it easier to recognize that the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j has been returned to the reference position from below. In this example, a special display corresponding to the trial shooting mode is displayed while the trial shooting mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) is being executed. As such notification, in addition to the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310j, voice output from a speaker, lamp emission, etc. may be used. It may be executed.

Also, in this example, when the handle 182 is touched, the main control MPU can input the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 and set the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal. Then, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 starts to be input, a specific effect such as sound, light emission, image, etc. is executed as an effect capable of informing that the shooting of the game ball B is started. It is possible. However, while the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) is being executed, it is possible to input a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 by touching the handle 182, but the specific effect is not executed. restricted. As a result, during the execution of the trial shot mode (measurement prohibition state and firing permission state), even if the handle 182 is touched and trial shot is performed, the trial shot operation is not hindered because the specific effect is not executed. can be prevented. After the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) ends, a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 starts to be input due to contact with the handle 182, making it possible to execute a specific effect. there is

In addition, the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (for example, the production operation unit 301, the back upper rear rotary decoration body 3440 and the back upper rear decoration body 3451, etc.) each have an initial position and an operation position. However, during the execution of the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), the performance member is restricted not to operate. As a result, during execution of the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), the effect member does not operate, and the trial shot operation can be prevented from being hindered.

Immediately after the timing t1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, that is, immediately after the start of the trial shooting mode (measurement prohibition state and firing permission state), the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 A corresponding special display 0 may be displayed at the start of the hitting mode. For example, as the special display 0 corresponding to the start of the trial shooting mode, the 7 segments of the special monitor 1310h are displayed so as to be fully lit, and the effect display device 1600 displays the message "start of the trial shooting mode". may As a result, both the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 can recognize that it is time to start the trial shot mode. Also, when the trial shot mode is started, by displaying all the 7 segments of the special monitor 1310h, etc., it is possible to confirm whether or not the special monitor 1310 operates normally.

In addition, in this example, in a state of normal measurement other than the trial shooting mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of hit balls is specified as information on the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts. It is displayed on the monitor 1310h and also on the effect display device 1600. FIG. In the trial shot mode, the special display (special display 3, special display 4) corresponding to the trial shot mode is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the performance display device 1600 without displaying the information on the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts. it's shown. However, in the effect display device 1600, the number of entering balls and the number of payouts are normally measured without displaying the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls in a normal measurement state that is not in the trial shot mode. Only the display to that effect may be performed. In such a case, since the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the player side in a state of normal measurement not in the trial shot mode, the number of entered balls and the number of payouts are normally measured. While the player side can grasp only that fact, the special monitor 1310h is positioned on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 invisibly from the player side. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts can be grasped from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加In the trial shot mode, the special display (special display 3, special display 4) corresponding to the trial shot mode is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600, so that the number of balls entered and the number of payouts The fact that the measurement is not performed can be grasped from the player side or the back side of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

[Regarding the measurement of the special monitor when the second starting port is closed]
As described above, during the game, the number of game balls B entered (the number of balls entered) provided in the game area 5a divided and formed on the game board 5 (the number of balls entered), In other words, the number of game balls B discharged from within the game area 5a and the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 by entering the winning hole (number of payouts) are counted. Then, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is calculated from the information, and the calculation result is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. In addition to such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004 despite the closing of the second starting port 2004 is counted as the number of entering balls. The game ball B entering the second starting port 2004 is controlled so as not to be counted as the number of entering balls. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 292 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed.

As for the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door 2414 operates according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003 to open the second starting port 2004, thereby opening the game ball. Acceptance of B becomes possible. Then, the game ball B entering the second starting hole 2004 is detected by the second starting hole sensor 2401 . Therefore, the game ball B entered just before the closing of the second starting hole 2004 may be detected by the second starting hole sensor 2401 immediately after the closing of the second starting hole 2004 . From this, the game ball B detected by the second start opening sensor 2401 in a predetermined period from the time of closing the second start opening 2004 is regarded as "the game ball B entered when the second start opening 2004 is closed". For the game ball B detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 during the period excluding the opening of the second starting port 2004 and the predetermined period from the closing of the second starting port 2004, It is treated as "a game ball B entered when the second starting port 2004 is closed".

As shown in FIG. 292, when the game ball B enters at timing t1 when the second start hole 2004 is closed, the main control MPU controls the game ball B entering the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole). It is counted (added) as a number (number of balls entered). Further, when the game ball B enters at the timing t1 when the second starting port 2004 is closed, the main control MPU counts (adds) the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (the number of payouts). . In other words, the game ball B entering when the second starting port 2004 is closed is reflected in the information (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls) displayed on the special monitor 1310h.

In addition, it is possible to pay out the game ball B from the payout device 580 based on the game ball B entering when the second starting port 2004 is closed at the timing t1. In addition, it is possible to perform a variable display of special symbols based on the entry of the game ball B when the second starting port 2004 is closed at the timing t1. As a result, the game ball B entered when the second starting port 2004 is closed can be paid out from the payout device 580 in the same manner as when the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is opened. Or, it is possible to perform a variable display of special symbols.

In addition, when the game ball B enters when the second start port 2004 is closed at the timing t1, the effect display device 1600 and the LED provided in the main body frame 4 are used to notify the outside. (Normal measurement impossibility notification) is performed. The specific notification will be described later in detail, but during execution of the specific notification, even if the game ball B enters the second start port 2004, it is not counted as the number of balls entered or the number of payouts (normal counting is performed). In order to inform the outside that there is no such event, a warning message is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or the LED provided on the body frame 4 is flashed with strong light emission. For example, when the game ball B enters the ball when the second start port 2004 is closed, a warning message saying "Because there is a risk of illegal winning, normal special monitor measurement will not be performed from here onwards." is displayed.

In addition, when the game ball B enters at timing t1 when the second starting port 2004 is closed, the effect display device 1600 performs a specific notification while the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. , the specific notification (message display) may be displayed with priority over the variable display of the decorative pattern. For example, by making the variable display of the decorative pattern invisible (difficult to see) by the specific notification (message display), it is possible to greatly appeal to the outside that the specific notification is being performed.

After that, during the execution of the specific notification, when the game ball B enters the second start port 2004, and the game ball B enters the ball entrance (winning hole, out port) excluding the second start port 2004 Whether or not to count the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts is different depending on whether the ball is hit or not. That is, after the game ball B enters when the second start port 2004 is closed at the timing t1, the case where the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 and the ball entrance excluding the second start port 2004 Whether or not to count the number of balls entered or the number of payouts differs depending on whether or not the game ball B enters the (winning hole, out hole). It should be noted that the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting device 540 when the handle 182 is operated even during execution of the specific notification.

Specifically, during the execution of the specific notification, for the game ball B that entered the second start port 2004, regardless of whether the second start port 2004 is open or closed, the ball entrance It is prohibited to count (add) the number of game balls B entered (the winning hole, the out hole) as the number of balls entered. In addition, during the execution of the specific notification, the game ball B entered into the second start port 2004 is paid out from the payout device 580 regardless of whether the second start port 2004 is open or closed. It is prohibited to count (add) the number of game balls B (number of payouts). In other words, during execution of the specific notification, the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004 is not reflected in the information (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering) displayed on the special monitor 1310h.

Further, even if the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 during execution of the specific notification, it is treated as invalid. Specifically, during the execution of the specific notification, "the power supply to the second starter sensor 2401 corresponding to the second starter 2004 is cut off so that the detection itself by the second starter sensor 2401 is not performed. mode", "a mode in which detection is performed by the second starter sensor 2401 but no detection signal from the second starter sensor 2401 is input to the main control board 1310", or "a mode in which detection by the second starter sensor 2401 is performed , a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401 is input to the main control board 1310, but based on the detection signal, the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts are not reflected. As a result, even if the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 during execution of the specific notification, it is prohibited to count the number of entering balls and the number of payouts, and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (input It can be excluded from the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls).

In addition, during execution of the specific notification, regardless of whether the second start port 2004 is open or closed, based on the game ball B entering the second start port 2004, the payout device No game ball B is paid out from 580. Also, during the execution of the specific notification, regardless of whether the second start port 2004 is open or closed, based on the game ball B entering the second start port 2004, special symbols change display is not performed. As a result, even if the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 during execution of the specific notification, the game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 580 without performing the variable display of the special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to prevent profit from being obtained during execution of the specific notification.

On the other hand, during execution of the specific notification, the game ball B that entered the ball entrance (winning opening, out opening) excluding the second start opening 2004 entered the ball entering opening (winning opening, out opening) It is counted (added) as the number of game balls B (entered ball number). Also, during the execution of the specific notification, regarding the game ball B that entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) excluding the second start hole 2004, the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 ( are counted (added) as the number of payouts). In other words, during the execution of the specific notification, regarding the game ball B that entered the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) excluding the second start opening 2004, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (for the number of entering balls ratio of the number of payouts).

Further, during execution of the specific notification, based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the winning opening (the winning opening from which the winning ball is paid out) excluding the second starting opening 2004, the game is started from the payout device 580. It makes it possible to pay out ball B. Also, during execution of the specific notification, based on the entry of the game ball B into the winning opening (the winning opening from which the prize balls are to be paid out) excluding the second start opening 2004, the special symbols are variably displayed. allows you to do As a result, during the execution of the specific notification, the game ball B entering the winning opening other than the second starting opening 2004 is paid out from the payout device 580, and the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner. be able to.

As described above, when the game ball B enters when the second start hole 2004 is closed, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) for the game ball B It is counted (added) as (the number of incoming balls), and is counted (added) as the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (number of payouts). When the second starting port 2004 is opened, it is possible to enter the game ball B, whereas when the second starting port 2004 is closed, it is impossible to enter the game ball B. Regarding the game ball B entered when the second start port 2004 was closed, there is a possibility that the game ball B was entered by opening the second start port 2004 due to a fraudulent act. However, for example, at the time of transition from the state in which the second start port 2004 is open to the state in which it is closed, the game ball B is caught on the second start port door 2414 in operation, and the second start port 2004 is closed, the state in which the game ball B is caught on the second start door 2414 is eliminated, and the game ball B is detected by the second start door sensor 2401. There is also the possibility that some irregularity occurred. In other words, regarding the game ball B entered when the second start port 2004 is closed, although there is a possibility that the game ball B entered the second start port 2004 due to fraud, the second start port due to the occurrence of irregularity Since there is a possibility that game ball B has entered 2004, it is not necessarily the case that game ball B has entered the second start hole 2004 due to fraud. Therefore, the game ball B entered when the second start port 2004 is closed is not excluded from the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls), but is included as information during the game. I'm trying

In addition, when the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed, a specific notification is made to the outside, and during the execution of the specific notification, the ball enters the second starting port 2004. Regarding the game ball B, regardless of whether the second starting port 2004 is open or closed, counting (adding) as the number of incoming balls or the number of payouts is prohibited. Here, at the stage where one game ball B enters when the second start port 2004 is closed, it cannot be determined whether it is the game ball B that entered the second start port 2004 due to fraudulent acts, but it continues after that. When the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2004, it can be determined that the possibility of the game ball B entering the second starting hole 2004 due to fraud is very high. For this reason, during the execution of the specific notification, it is prohibited to count (add) the game ball B that entered the second start port 2004 as the number of entering balls or the number of payouts, and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h It is not reflected in (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls). As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can exclude the information when it is determined that the ball has been entered by cheating, and the accuracy of the information during the game can be maintained.

It should be noted that, during the execution of the specific notification, it is prohibited to count (add) the game ball B that entered the second start port 2004 as the number of entering balls or the number of payouts, but after the execution of the specific notification, The pachinko machine 1 is inspected by the pachinko hall manager, and the power is turned on again to eliminate the state in which normal measurement is not possible. It can be returned to a state where it can be (added).

In the above description, it is possible to pay out the game ball B from the payout device 580 based on the fact that the game ball B enters when the second start port 2004 is closed at the timing t1. may not be paid out. Also, based on the game ball B entering when the second starting port 2004 is closed at the timing t1, it is possible to perform the variable display of the special symbols, but the variable display of the special symbols is not performed. may As a result, even for the game ball B that entered first when the second starting port 2004 was closed, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed, the game ball B is not paid out from the payout device 580, and fraud is committed. It is possible to prevent profit from being obtained in a state where there is a possibility that the ball has entered the second starting port 2004.

In addition, during the execution of the specific notification, regarding the game ball B entered into the second start port 2004, regardless of whether the second start port 2004 is open or closed, the ball entrance (winning hole , Out hole) is prohibited from being counted (added) as the number of balls (entered ball), but may be counted (added) as the number of entered balls. However, during the execution of the specific notification, the game ball B entered into the second start port 2004 is paid out from the payout device 580 regardless of whether the second start port 2004 is open or closed. It is prohibited to count (add) the number of game balls B (number of payouts). As a result, when the game ball B continues to enter the second starting port 2004 during execution of the specific notification, only the number of entering balls increases between the number of entering balls and the number of payouts, and the number of entering balls increases. Since it is reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h so that the ratio of the number of payouts is reduced, the act itself of trying to enter the game ball B into the second start port 2004 during the execution of the specific notification can be suppressed.

As described above, when the game ball B enters when the second start port 2004 is closed, whether the game ball B entered the second start port 2004 due to fraudulent activity or the second start due to the occurrence of irregularity Since it is not possible to determine whether the game ball B has entered the opening 2004, the game ball B is counted as the number of entered balls and the number of payouts. In this way, if it is not possible to determine whether the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004 due to fraud or whether the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004 due to the occurrence of an irregularity. , the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts may be counted, and the following example may be used. Specifically, for the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door 2414 operates according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003 to open the second starting port 2004. Although it is opened and configured to be able to accept the game ball B, in the normal state (state where the time saving is not given), the ordinary lottery result is not hit and the second start port 2004 is not opened. may be configured. In such a case, there is a possibility that the game ball B, which entered the second starting hole 2004 in the normal state, opened the second starting hole 2004 and entered the game ball B by a fraudulent act. However, for example, just before the end of the time saving state (the state in which the time saving is given), the ordinary lottery result becomes a hit, and based on the hit, the second start port 2004 is opened after the shift from the time saving state to the normal state. In such a case, there is a possibility that the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004 due to the occurrence of an irregularity, even though it is in the normal state. That is, when the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 in the normal state, whether the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 due to fraudulent activity or the second start port 2004 due to the occurrence of irregularity Since it is not possible to judge whether the game ball B has entered the game ball B, the game ball B is counted as the number of entered balls or the number of payouts. As a result, the game ball B entered into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state is not excluded from the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls), and is treated as information during the game. can be included.

[Measurement of special monitor at the time of abnormality detection]
As described above, during the game, the number of game balls B entered (the number of balls entered) provided in the game area 5a divided and formed on the game board 5 (the number of balls entered), In other words, the number of game balls B discharged from within the game area 5a and the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 by entering the winning hole (number of payouts) are counted. Then, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is calculated from the information, and the calculation result is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. In addition to such a configuration, in the present embodiment, game balls B that enter the ball entrance (a prize winning entrance, an out entrance) after an abnormality is detected are counted as the number of entered balls, but are not counted as the number of payouts. controlled to The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when such an abnormality is detected will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 293 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when an abnormality is detected.

The pachinko machine 1 of this example monitors whether or not an abnormality has occurred by various methods. Specifically, it monitors whether or not a large number of game balls B are entering in a short period of time into one ball entrance (a prize winning entrance, an out exit). However, if a large amount of game balls B are entered in a short period of time, the fraudulent act such as directly entering the game ball B into one ball entrance Since the game ball B has already illegally entered the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

Further, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting illegal magnetism within the game area 5a and a vibration sensor 3005 for detecting illegal vibration within the game area 5a. Whether or not a magnet is used or vibration is applied is monitored, and if detection is made by the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005, an illegal act such as using a magnet or applying vibration is performed. Since there is a high possibility that the game ball B will illegally enter the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) after that, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the ball entrances (winning and out) are connected to the main control board 1310 by wires, respectively, and these wires are monitored for disconnection or disconnection. , If the wiring is detected to be disconnected or disconnected, even if the game ball B is entered into the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole), it will not be detected by the detection sensor, and the game will be played normally. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred because it is not possible to perform

As shown in FIG. 293, after the abnormality is detected at timing t1, the game ball B that enters the entrance (winning opening, out opening) is the same as before the abnormality is detected at timing t1. It is counted (added) as the number of game balls B entering the winning hole, out hole). In addition, from the time when the abnormality is detected at the timing t1, the game ball B that has entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) is counted as the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (number of payouts) ( addition) is prohibited. In other words, from the time when the abnormality is detected, the game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) are counted as the number of entering balls, but are not counted as the number of payouts. Only this will be reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered).

As described above, the game balls B that enter the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) after the abnormality is detected are counted as the number of entered balls, but are not counted as the number of payouts. From this, when the game ball B enters the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) after the abnormality is detected, only the number of entering balls out of the number of entering balls and the number of payouts increases, and the number of entering balls increases. It will be reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h so that the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts is reduced. As a result, after the abnormality is detected, it is possible to suppress the act itself of causing the game ball B to enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance).

In addition, from the time when the abnormality is detected at the timing t1, when the game ball B enters the ball entrance (a prize winning entrance, an exit exit), it is treated as valid for counting the number of entering balls, and is paid out. It is treated as invalid for counting numbers. Specifically, from the time when the abnormality is detected at timing t1, "detection by the detection sensor is performed, and the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, but based on the detection signal, the number of incoming balls A mode in which it is reflected in the count but not reflected in the count of the number of payouts”, and the like. As a result, when the game ball B enters the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) from the time when the abnormality is detected, only the information on the number of entering balls and the number of payouts is It can be included in the information displayed on the monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls).

Moreover, the game ball B is prevented from being paid out from the payout device 580 from the point of time when the abnormality is detected. In addition, from the point of time when the abnormality is detected, it is in a state (variation impossible state) in which it is impossible to perform variable display of special symbols. As a result, even if the game ball B enters the winning opening such as the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 from the time of the detection of the abnormality, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed, and the payout device. Since the game ball B is not paid out from the 580, it is possible to prevent the profit from being obtained after the abnormality is detected.

In addition, with the detection of abnormality at timing t1 as a trigger, specific notification (notification of impossibility of normal measurement) is made to the outside using the effect display device 1600, an LED provided in the body frame 4, or the like. . As a specific notification, even if the game ball B enters the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole), it is not counted as the number of payouts (normal counting is not performed). A warning message is displayed on 1600, and an LED provided on the body frame 4 is flashed with strong light emission. Also, as a warning message, the display contents are varied depending on the type of abnormality. For example, if it is detected that a large number of game balls B are entering one ball entrance in a short time, and if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, it is determined that there is a risk of illegal winning. Therefore, normal special monitor measurements will not be performed from here onward" is displayed. In addition, if it is detected by the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, it will say, "Because there is a risk of illegal winning, normal special monitor measurement will not be performed from here on. ” is displayed as a warning message. In addition, if it is detected that the wiring is disconnected or disconnected, and if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, the message "Since there is a risk that the winning will not be detected, normal special monitor measurements will not be performed from here onwards. ” is displayed as a warning message.

Moreover, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is prevented from being shot from the ball shooting device 540 from the point of time when the abnormality is detected. As a result, even if the handle 182 is operated from the point of time when the abnormality is detected, the game ball B will not be shot in the first place, so that the game ball B can be shot to enter the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole). It is possible to prevent profits from being obtained after anomaly detection.

In the above, even if the handle 182 is operated from the point of time when the abnormality is detected, the game ball B is not shot from the ball shooting device 540. B may be fired. As a result, the game ball B can be launched, but even if the game ball B enters a prize-winning opening such as the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, the variable display of the special symbol may be performed. Since the game ball B is not paid out from the payout device 580, it is possible to prevent the profit from being obtained after the abnormality is detected.

In addition, game balls B that enter the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) after an abnormality is detected are counted as the number of entered balls, but are prohibited from being counted as the number of payouts. After that, the pachinko machine 1 is inspected by the hall manager, and the power is turned on again to eliminate the state where normal measurement is impossible. It can be returned to a state in which it can be counted (added) as a number.

[Another example]
Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine was exemplified as a game machine, but it can also be applied to other game machines such as a mackerel machine and an arrangement ball machine. It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates a spinning drum or reel. The slot machine will now be described with reference to FIG. Figure 296 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

The slot machine 6000 comprises a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body (box) 6004, as shown in FIG. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are connected to each other via hinges (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, a key is inserted into a keyhole 6005 of a metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turned clockwise to open the front door (front frame) 6002 to the main body. It can be opened from the portion (box) 6004 .

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of the metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and cooperates with the locking unit (not shown) to lock the main body (box) 6004. It is used for opening and closing and locking the front door (front frame) 6002 . The metal locking device is attached to a cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) made of metal extending back and forth, a key hole 6005 made of metal formed in the front end face of the cylinder body, and the rear side of the cylinder body. and a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates together with the regular metal key. The cylinder main body of the metal locking device penetrates from the rear through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is arranged at positions facing each other across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member is formed so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder of a metal lock unit (not shown) is inserted from behind. By inserting the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder into the pair of cutouts, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder and rotated. When the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004 and the rotation transmission member of the locking device made of metal and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other, the metal The locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

The door frame reinforcement unit has a function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to impart rigidity, and also functions as a door frame metal ground. It is electrically connected to a ground board provided inside the box 6004 . That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. This ground board (not shown) collects electromagnetic noise generated in various places and can be grounded (grounded) to the island equipment of the game hall. It is electrically connected to the equipment ground.

An open switch (not shown) capable of detecting opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 is arranged on the main body (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. there is This open switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the body portion (box) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal by the opening and closing operation by the metal locking device. Instead, the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the body portion (box) 6004 is detected independently of the opening/closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the release switch is not placed near or around the metal locking device, and is positioned below the metal locking device and placed on the main body so as not to be affected by electromagnetic wave noise that enters the metal locking device. An open switch is arranged on the portion (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002 . In this manner, even if electromagnetic noise enters the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic noise.

A front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of these various decorative portions are not plated with decorative plating at all, while others are plated with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is noble metal plating such as chromium plating or hard gold plating, and has electrical conductivity, so electromagnetic wave noise may enter. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit that constitutes the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some of the decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), while the conductive member is directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit.) are electrically connected). As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise entering the various decorative parts is transmitted to the metallic door frame reinforcing unit, thereby preventing the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative parts from entering the board ground. In addition, among various decorative parts, when electromagnetic noise that enters the decorative parts with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), the door frame metal ground wire is transferred. It is transmitted to the ground board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 via the ground board, and then transmitted from the ground board to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, and is removed from the slot machine 6000 . That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

In addition, an electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static elimination unit at a predetermined location on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002, and when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body (box) 6004, A static elimination pad may be provided as a static elimination unit on the open side that is opposite to the side on which the hinge is arranged (closed side). The electrostatic removal pad can remove noise (electromagnetic wave noise) caused by electrostatic discharge.

Also, the front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of them are decorated with decorative plating on the entire surface, and among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). , and the ground board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 was electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, but the door frame metal ground wire was The metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board are electrically connected to the terminals of the power supply board of the power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the body portion (box) 6004 without being electrically connected to the ground board. may be electrically connected. The power board is supplied with AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that protects against transient excessive voltage is provided on the power supply substrate. This surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and does not allow current to flow. , has the ability to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcing unit is transmitted from the N terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) by the surge protection element (surge absorber) from the terminal of the power supply board, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. .

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002 , and a protruding portion protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 . A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 on this projecting portion. A storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 , and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024 . These bet buttons 6010, 6012, starting lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, accumulation settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. It is The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and fixed by being attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004 .

In addition to the main control board 1310, the main control board box 1320 also accommodates a setting change board 1311 on which setting key switches 1311a capable of changing setting values are mounted. In other words, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and fixed by being attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004. 1311a is arranged inside the body portion (box) 6004 . The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004. It may be attached and fixed to a housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box) 6004 . In addition to the setting key switch 1311a, the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 has a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values, and a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot). and the setting change permission lamp 1310z described above may be mounted.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 and production devices (not shown) are displayed through this display window. It is designed to be transparent. The three variable rotators (not shown) are attached and fixed to a body-side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the body portion (box) 6004 . On the other hand, the production device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002 .

On these variable rotators, translucent pattern belts printed with a plurality of patterns (for example, bells, watermelons, cherries, 7s, Vs, etc.) as pattern information are attached to the respective cylindrical frameworks. ing. Such cylindrical variable rotators are called reels or drums in game machines such as slot machines, and the output shafts of stepping motors (not shown) are connected to the respective variable rotators. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shafts of the stepping motors, a plurality of types of patterns are continuously changed from the above display window from top to bottom. It looks like

The production device includes a plurality of movable production bodies (not shown), the above-described production display device 1600, various decorative substrates on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the above-described peripheral control unit 1500. Based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1500 controls operation of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of the effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decoration boards, and the like. By performing various controls, the progress of production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

A predetermined number of medals as game media are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008, and the main control board 1310 starts the variable display of pattern information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the lapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals to a receiving tray 6026 as a game medium.

In addition, in the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of game balls as game media inserted into the ball slot 6008', and the start lever 6014 is operated. Then, the variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, and the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls to a receiving tray 6026 as game media.

1 pachinko machine 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5 game board 5a game area 3000 back unit 3100 back rear effect unit 3110 back rear movable decoration 3111 decoration (decoration member, decoration plate)
3111a first decorative protrusion 3111d metal decorative portion 3112 decorative sheet (decorative member, decorative plate)
3113 light guide radiation plate (decorative member, radiation plate)
3113a body portion 3113b flange portion (peripheral wall portion)
3113c First LED housing portion 3113d Second LED housing portion 3113e Reflecting portion 3114 Back rear decoration substrate (decoration substrate)
3114a first LED (LED, specific LED)
3114b Second LED (LED)
3114c Substrate main body 3114d Copper foil 3114e Electronic component 3115 Decorative body base 3115a Coating plate portion 3115b Flange portion EL Creepage distance SL Predetermined distance

Claims (1)

A game machine comprising a game board on which a game area is divided,
The game board comprises a plurality of substrates having a front mounting surface on which light emitters are mounted and a back mounting surface on which light emitters are not mounted,
A first substrate among the plurality of substrates includes a dark-colored insulating coating made of black or green that is formed over substantially the entire surface of the surface mounting surface, a surface mounting surface-side wiring pattern that is formed on the surface mounting surface, and a back surface mounting. a back-mounting-surface-side wiring pattern formed on a surface, a front-mounting-surface-side land electrically connected to the front-mounting-surface-side wiring pattern, and a back-mounting surface electrically connected to the back-mounting-surface-side wiring pattern a through hole having a side land,
The through holes formed in the first substrate are not provided for mounting electronic components including light emitters,
At least the outer periphery of the surface-mounting-surface-side land formed on the first substrate is covered with a dark-colored insulating coating made of black or green,
At least one of the opening of the front mounting surface and the opening of the back mounting surface of the through hole formed in the first substrate is open,
comprising a partition section that partitions the surface mounting surface of the first substrate so as to correspond to the light emitting area of the light emitter;
When the player operates the adjusting means, the brightness of the light emitter mounted on the second substrate of the plurality of substrates can be changed, while the light emitter mounted on the first substrate can be changed. Emitting brightness is no longer changed,
A gaming machine characterized by :

Images